The Students Greek Grammar. 
 
 GRAMMAE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 GKEEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 .By DR GEOKGE CUETIUS, 
 
 rBOrESBOE IN THE tTNITEESITY OP LEIPZIG. 
 
 TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR. 
 EDITED 
 
 By WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D., 
 
 OLABSIOAL EXAMIIIES IN THE UNIVEKSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOB OF THE 0LAS8I0AL 
 AND LATIN DICTI0NAEIE8. 
 
 For to^^^e qp Colleges a>4^ High - Schools. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 HAKPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 franklin square. 
 
 18 7 2. 
 
5^/^J^ 
 
 
 f XL 
 

 EDITOK'S PREFACE. 
 
 The Greek Grammar of Dj;. Curtius is acknowledged 
 by the most competent scholars, both in this country and 
 in Germany, to be the best representative of the present 
 advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost 
 the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan- 
 guage in a really scientific form; while its extensive use 
 in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations 
 it has received from practical teachers in that country, are 
 suflicient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is 
 surprising to find that many of the public and private 
 schools in this country continue to use Grammars which 
 ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern 
 philology, and still cling to the division of*the substantives 
 into ten declensions, the designation of the Second Perfect 
 as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. 
 Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on 
 which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary 
 to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to 
 add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi- 
 tion of the original work (1862), with the author's sanction, 
 and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of 
 his final correction and revision. 
 
 An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub- 
 lished simultaneously with the present work. 
 
 w. s. 
 
 London, March. 1863. 
 
 Su f^ 
 
FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 The fact that within a few years the present Grammar 
 has found its way into a large number of schools in various 
 countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to 
 the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is 
 attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, there- 
 fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first 
 appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat- 
 ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some 
 observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, 
 •ancT I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration 
 of teachers. 
 
 Few sciences have within the last half century been so 
 completely reformed as the science of language. . Not only 
 has our insight into the nature and history of human speech 
 been greatly advanced, but— and this is justly regarded as 
 a matter of still greater importance — quite a different 
 method in treating language in general has been discov- 
 ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo- 
 sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his- 
 torical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. 
 No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the prog- 
 ress thus made, and to confine, them to the mechanical 
 repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably 
 doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which 
 have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exer- 
 cise its influence on the teachino^ of lano-uasre. 
 
 If the teaching of a language in our schools is intended 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas- 
 ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate 
 and stir up the youthful mind by independent exertion, 
 and by occupation with a subject so immensely rich, and so 
 harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers 
 as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to 
 keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is, 
 unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching 
 of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to 
 make a commencement. The modern science of language 
 has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram- 
 mar, but none has been more affected by it than the first, 
 commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in- 
 quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached 
 the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the 
 Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many 
 aids which we possccS for the Greek in the high antiquity 
 of its literature and in its dialects. A scientific treatment 
 of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more- 
 over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of 
 the early age at which the elements must necessarily be 
 learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep- 
 arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific 
 inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with advan- 
 tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu- 
 tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as 
 heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin 
 forms ; granting that the most important object in learning 
 Latin consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed 
 laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength 
 of the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different. 
 ' The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the 
 Greek language is the most ancient work of art which they 
 
PREFACE. Vll 
 
 have reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, 
 who approaches the Greek after he has already gone 
 through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, 
 ought to be impressed with the idea that the structure of 
 this language is one of the most marvelous productions of 
 the intellectual powers acting unconsciously. Every thing 
 lies here clear before us : the sources of our knowledge are 
 more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms 
 is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric 
 dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely 
 wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 
 1782, made considerable progress. The attempt, therefore, 
 to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school 
 with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous 
 precedents ; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir- 
 cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception. 
 My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care- 
 ful selection, and a clear and precise exposition, rather 
 than an entirely new system. 
 
 In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in- 
 quiry, I have always kept in view the idea that the book 
 was intended for practical use in schools. The first requi- 
 site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond 
 the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec- 
 essary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain ; 
 for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude 
 all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion 
 and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether 
 a result has been obtained by special researches into the 
 Greek language or by the more general inquiries of com- 
 parative philology. 
 
 I was farther obliged to admit only those things which 
 find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at 
 
Vlll PKEFACE. 
 
 most in a comparison with the Latin ; but even within 
 these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as 
 really aiFord an important insight into the structure of the 
 forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and 
 many other things have been passed over because they 
 seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations 
 I include especially all changes of terminology, and the 
 entire alteration of whole parts of grammar which are often 
 still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor- 
 tance used to be attached. 
 
 The new technical terms I have introduced have gen- 
 erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my 
 Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe- 
 dantic consistency, " if possible, to put significant names in 
 the place of dead numbers," as, for e, (/., A Declension, O 
 Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will 
 scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at 
 once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates 
 learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expres- 
 sions strong and -z^^^^^l', which I have employed to distin- 
 guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware 
 now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of 
 scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, 
 but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For 
 the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless 
 we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con- 
 sistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by 
 calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and 
 first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward. 
 But a common name to distinguish the two forms of the 
 Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect 
 Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. 
 An innovation had here become necessary, for both neg^ 
 
ative and positive reasons. The expressions strong and 
 weak have this advantage — that, after being introduced by 
 Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been 
 adopted by English grammarians ; and, though I use them 
 not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. 
 It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand 
 that those forms are called strong which spring from the 
 root, as it were, by an internal agency, and loeak those 
 which are formed by syllables added externally, especially 
 as he may easily compare the English tahe^ took, and love^ 
 loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few 
 disadvantages, oifers so many advantages as this, and I shall 
 retain it until a better one is suggested ; and, after all, in 
 necessary innovations, it is often more important that men 
 agree than on what they agree. 
 
 The fact that the most essential changes I have made in 
 the arrangements of the subjects — as, for example, the strict 
 adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and 
 especially the ilivision of the verb according to temporal 
 Stems — have met with the approval of practical teachers, 
 has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a 
 clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no 
 means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as 
 is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal 
 Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic 
 grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined 
 together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that 
 which is easy to that which is more difficult. 
 
 The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat 
 enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief. 
 But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to 
 the formation of verbal nouns : in treating of the verbs of 
 the different classes, I have always directed attention, by a 
 
 1* 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 number of characteristic examples, to the application of the 
 different Stems in the formation of words. By this means 
 the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his 
 grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of 
 words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their 
 sanction to this arrangement. 
 
 In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin- 
 guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. In this part of 
 the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating 
 the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost 
 possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only 
 in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, 
 does my system present considerable differences from the 
 usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more 
 or less probable theories — among them especially the ever- 
 repeated theory about the original local meaning of the 
 cases, with which I can not agree at all — have been rigor- 
 ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected 
 to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the 
 corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En- 
 glish, where this could be done with brevity and advan- 
 tage ; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com- 
 prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every 
 appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling 
 of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from 
 childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo- 
 sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various 
 meanings. For the same reason, I every where attach 
 great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek 
 idiom into English or Latin. I need hardly guard myself 
 against the opinion that I considered such a translation to 
 be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. 
 A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. 
 
PREFACE. XI 
 
 I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not 
 intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed 
 to memory paragraph by paragraph ; but, in teaching, a 
 suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil's 
 advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif- 
 ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated 
 this. 
 
 It may be remarked in general that the first business 
 every where is that of memory, and only when the actual 
 forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed 
 to memory, analysis may be added. First knowledge, then 
 understanding : this ought to be the leading principle ; 
 but, as I have said in another place, " Memory can neither 
 accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re- 
 tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com- 
 bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks 
 and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, 
 and permanently to impress it upon the mind." If details 
 learned at different times and carefully committed to mem- 
 ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with 
 one another and form various groups ; if, then, many things, 
 at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a 
 law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a 
 mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, 
 and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety 
 of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant 
 opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest 
 efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are 
 truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. 
 That the book has actually found such teachers has been 
 proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat- 
 ification. G. C. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE GREEK LAI^GUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 
 
 FIRST PART.— ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 I. Letters and Sounds. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE GREEK CHARACTERS. 
 
 A.Letters § 1-9 
 
 B. Other Characters 10-16 
 
 C. Accents 1 7-23 
 
 D. Punctuation 23 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE SOUNDS. 
 
 A. The Vowels 24-29 
 
 B. The Consonants 30-34 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS. 
 
 A. Vowels in Combination 35-39 
 
 B. Other kinds of Vowel Changes 40-43 
 
 C. Consonants in Combination with one another 44-54 
 
 D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word 55-62 
 
 E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word •. 63-69 
 
 CHAPTER IV, 
 
 DIVISION OP SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY. 
 
 A. Division of Syllables 70-73 
 
 B. Quantity 74-78 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 ACCENTS 79-99 
 
XIV CONTENTS. 
 
 II. Inflexion. 
 A. Inflexion of Nouns and Pronouns. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 declension of substantives and adjectives. 
 First Principal (or Vowel) Declension. 
 
 A. The A Declension §112-113 
 
 {commonly called the First Declension?) 
 
 1. Feminines 114-119 
 
 3. Masculines 130-123 
 
 B. The O Declension 134-131 
 
 {commonly called tJie Second Declension.) 
 Attic Declension 133-133 
 
 Second Principal (or Consonant) Declension 135-143 
 
 {commonly called the Third Declension.) 
 
 1. Consonant Stems : 
 
 a. Guttural and Labial Stems 144-145 
 
 6. Dental Stems 146-149 
 
 c. Liquid Stems 150-153 
 
 2. Vowel Stems : 
 
 a. Soft Vowel Stems 154-158 
 
 h. Diphthong Stems 159-161 
 
 c. O Stems 163-163 
 
 3. Stems suffering Elision : 
 
 a. Sigma Stems 164-167 
 
 5. r-Stems 168-169 
 
 c. r-Stems 170-171 
 
 Irregularities in Declension 174-177 
 
 Case-like Terminations •. 178-179 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 A. Gender .*. 180-191 
 
 B. Comparison 193-300 
 
 C. Adverbs of Adjectives 301-304 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS 305-319 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 THE NUMERALS 320-234 
 
CONTENTS. XV 
 
 B. Inflexion of Verbs. 
 General Remarks §225-230 
 
 LIST OF PAEADIGMS. Tabic. 
 
 Elfiijlam -.- I. 
 
 Synopsis of Xv w, Iloose (exhibiting the meanings of the Tenses) II. 
 
 VERBS IN Q. 
 
 A. Vowel Stems : 
 
 1. Uncontracted, Xuw .'. . III. 
 
 2. Contracted, Tiixdoj, ttoiew, dovXou) .- IV. 
 
 B. Consonant Stems : 
 
 1. Guttural Stems, TrXkw, ^eyyw, rdaffu) V. 
 
 2. Dental Stems, ^pivdofiai, ttciOw, KOfiiK(o VI. 
 
 3. Labial Stems, 7r£/i7rw, Xei'ttw, KaXinrTio VII. 
 
 4. Liquid Stems, dspcj, dyyeXXw, cnrdpio VIII. 
 
 VERBS EN MI. 
 
 First Class, tLOijui, didiofit, 'larrjin IX. 
 
 Second Class, Mkwhi X. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Q. 
 
 I. The Present-Stem : 
 
 A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem : . . . § 231-233 
 
 B. TheAugment 234-242 
 
 C. Contracted Verbs 243-244 
 
 D. Distinction of the Present -Stem from the Verbal 
 
 Stem 245-253 
 
 n. The Strong Aorist-Stem 254-257 
 
 m. The Future-Stem 258-266 
 
 IV. The Weak Aorist-Stem 267-271 
 
 V. The Perfect-Stem 272 
 
 1. Perfect Active 276-282 
 
 2. Pluperfect Active -• 283 
 
 3. Perfect Middle and Passive 284-289 
 
 4. Pluperfect Middle and Passive 290-2^1 
 
 VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem 292-295 
 
 VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem 296-299 
 
 Verbal Adjectives 300 
 
 Verbs which leave their Stem- Vowel short 301 
 
XVI CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks § 302-304 
 
 1. First Class 305-317 
 
 2. Second Class 318-319 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327 
 
 Anomalies in Signification 328-330 
 
 Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms 331-333 
 
 Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect 334 D.-338 D. 
 
 III. Derivation. 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 A. Simple Berivatwes 339-340 
 
 1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan- 
 tives 341-349 
 
 2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives. . 350-352 
 
 3. Derivative Verbs 353 
 
 B. Compound Derivatives ': 
 
 1. Form of the Combination 354-358 
 
 2. Meaning of Combination 359-360 
 
 SECOND PART.— SYNTAX. 
 Preliminary Remarks 361 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 NUlteER 'and GENDER 362-367 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 THE ARTICLE 368-391 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 . USE OF cases: 
 
 A. Nominative • 392-393 
 
 B. Vocative 394 
 
 C. Accusative 395-406 
 
 D. Genitive 407-428 
 
 E. Dative 429-443 
 
CONTENTS. XVll 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 THE PREPOSITIONS § 444 
 
 General View of the Prepositions . 448 
 
 1. Prepositions which take only One Case 449-457 
 
 2. Prepositions which take Two Cases 458-461 
 
 3. Prepositions which take Three Cases 462-468 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 THE PRONOUNS 469-475 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 THE KINDS OF VERBS 476-483 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES 484 
 
 1. The forms for the Incomplete Action 486-491 
 
 2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action 493-498 
 
 3. The Future 499-501 
 
 4. The forms for the Complete Action 502-506 
 
 CHAPTER XXr. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS. 
 
 A. In Simple Sentences : 
 
 1. Indicative 507 
 
 2. Subjunctive 508-513 
 
 3. Optative 514-517 
 
 4. Imperative 518 
 
 B. In Compound Sentences : 
 
 Connexion of Sentences with one another 519-524 
 
 1. Dependent, Declarative, and Interrogative Sentences 525-529 
 
 2. Sentences expressing a purpose. 530-533 
 
 3. Conditional Sentences 534-550 
 
 4. Relative Sentences 551-555 
 
 5. Temporal Sentences 556-558 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. Use of the Infinitive in general 559-566 
 
 2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572 
 
 3. The Infinitive with the Article 573-574 
 
 4. The Infinigve with av 575-576 
 
 5. THe Infinitive instead of the Imperative 577 
 
XVlll CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 ON PARTICIPLES. 
 
 1. Attributive Use § 578 
 
 2. Appositive Use 579-583 
 
 3. The Participle with an Absolute Case 584-586 
 
 4. Supplements to Participles 587-588 
 
 5. The Predicative Participle 589-594 
 
 6. The Participle with av 595 
 
 7. Verbal Adjectives 596 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.. 597-605 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 606-611 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 THE NEGATIVES. 
 
 1. Use of Simple Negatives. 612-618 
 
 2. Several Negatives combined 619-621 
 
 3. Some Negative Phrases 622 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 A. Conjunctions 623 
 
 1. Copulative Conjunctions 624-625 
 
 2. Disjunctive " 626-627 
 
 8. Adversative " 628-630 
 
 4. Comparative " 631-682 
 
 "'5. Declarative " 683 
 
 6. Temporal " 634-685 
 
 7. Causal " 686 
 
 8. Inferential « 687 
 
 9.Final " 638 
 
 10. Hypothetical " 689 
 
 11. Concessive " 640 
 
 B. Emphatic Particles 641-643 
 
 Page 
 
 English Index - - . . 353 
 
 Greek Index - 357 
 
THE 
 
 STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 raTRODUCTION. 
 
 THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 
 
 The Greek language is the language of the Ancient 
 Hellenes (^EXXr^veg), the inhabitants of Greece, with all 
 its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the 
 languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians, 
 Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister- 
 languages, and together form the Indo-European family. 
 
 The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which 
 spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek 
 language are the ^olic, Dorfc, and Ionic. At first each 
 race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 
 
 1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, es- 
 pecially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, 
 and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects 
 developed by poetry, and produced three diiferent but 
 nearly related dialects, viz. : 
 
 a) The Old-Ionic or JE^pic dialect, which is preserved 
 in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol- 
 lowers. 
 
 h) The New-Ionic dialect, which we know chiefly from 
 the history of Herodotus. 
 
 Ob8. — The Old and New Ionic dialects are also designated by the 
 common name lonic^ as distinguished from the Attic. 
 
 c) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous 
 works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time 
 
2 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of her glorj. The principal writers of the Attic dialect 
 are — the tragedians ^schylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the 
 comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and 
 Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias, 
 Demosthenes, and ^schines. Through the importance 
 of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit- 
 erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek 
 language. 
 
 Obs. — A less important distinction i^ made between the earlier and 
 later Attic writers. .The tragedians and Thucydides belong to 
 the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The 
 language of Plato is intermediate between the two : that of the 
 tragedians has also many other peculiarities. 
 
 2. The ^OLic dialect was spoken by the 2Eolians, par- 
 ticularly in Asia Minor, Boeotia, and Thessaly. Alcaeus and 
 Sappho wrote in this dialect. 
 
 3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief- 
 ly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and 
 in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower 
 Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar's lyric 
 poems and* Theocritus's bucolics (herdsman's poetry). The 
 choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 
 
 4. After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, 
 the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated 
 Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi- 
 tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century 
 before Christ, the common Greek dialect {{] koivyj ^laXtKroc) 
 was distinguished from the Attic. 
 
 On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the 
 common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher Aris- 
 totle. Among later authors, the most important are — the 
 historians Polyhius^ Plutarch^ Arrian, Dion Cassitts ; the 
 geographer Strabo ; the rhetoricians Dionysius of Hali- 
 carnassus and Lucian. 
 
^^ 0^ Tfl-i 
 
 ItriTIVBESIf 1 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 I. LETTERS AND SOUNBS. 
 
 Chap, 
 
 . L- 
 
 -The Greek Characters. 
 
 ' . 
 
 
 A. Letters, 
 
 « 
 
 § 1. The Greek letters are. the following: 
 
 Large Character. Small Character. Name. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 > Alpha 
 
 a (short or long). 
 
 B 
 
 ft 
 
 Beta 
 
 b. 
 
 r 
 
 y 
 
 Gamma 
 
 g- 
 
 A 
 
 8 
 
 Delta 
 
 d. 
 
 E 
 
 £ 
 
 Epsilon 
 
 e (only short). 
 
 Z 
 
 z 
 
 Zeta 
 
 z. 
 
 H 
 
 V 
 
 Eta 
 
 e (only long). 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 Theta 
 
 th. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 Iota 
 
 I (short or long). 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 Kappa 
 
 k. 
 
 A 
 
 X 
 
 Lambda 
 
 1. 
 
 M 
 
 /^ 
 
 Mu i 
 
 m. 
 
 ■ N 
 
 V 
 
 Nu '; 
 
 n. 
 
 iS 
 
 I 
 
 Xi 
 
 X. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 Omikron 
 
 o (only short). 
 
 n 
 
 TT 
 
 Pi 
 
 P- 
 
 p 
 
 9 
 
 Rho 
 
 r. 
 
 s 
 
 (^y 
 
 q Sigma 
 
 s. 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 Tau 
 
 t. 
 
 Y 
 
 V 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 •B (short or long). 
 
 <E> 
 
 i> 
 
 Phi 
 
 ph. 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 Chi 
 
 eh. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Psi 
 
 ps. 
 
 a 
 
 tJ 
 
 Omega 
 
 o (only long). 
 
4 LETTERS. § 2. 
 
 § 2. For 5 there is a double sign in the small character: 
 o- at the beginning and in the middle, and g at the end of 
 a word. Hence (rvv, aeiw, ^cav, but rrovog, Kepag. In 
 compound words g may also stand at the end of the first 
 word in the compound : wpog-Epxofjiai, ^vg-j^arog. 
 
 § 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the 
 expression " Alphabet." The characters of the Greek al- 
 phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin 
 and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of 
 the Phoeilicians. 
 
 In regard to pronunciation, the following points are to 
 be observed: 
 
 § 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike. 
 But 7 is an exception, since, before y, k, x^, or ^, it is 
 pronounced n^. Hence in Latin it is represented by n : 
 Tiyyb) is pronounced tengo ; o-uy/caXw, synghalo ; \6y\r\y 
 longchl; (^top^iy^, jphorminx. 
 
 § 5. ? is pronounced like the English z. It is of very 
 different origin in different cases. Compare imdZwv (for 
 fiiyiwv) from fiiyag ; ^wyoy with Latin jugum, English 
 "goke^ etc. 
 
 § 6. ^ we pronounce as f, but probably the Greeks pro- 
 nounced the J9 and h separately ; hence pJi^ not f^ is used 
 in Latin for 0: (luXocro^iaf jphilosojphia ; ^LXoKT^rrig, Phi- 
 loctetes. 
 
 § 7. we pronounce like the English th. 
 
 § 8. Of the diphthongs, ai and u are both pronounced 
 as ei in height ; oi, as oy in l>oy ; au, as ou in sour ; ov, 
 as ou in tour ; vi, as wi in wing; ev and rjv, as eio vs\ few. 
 The iota subscriptum {underwritten) is not pronounced in 
 
 § 3. Dialects, ^The Greek language had in the most ancient times 
 another letter, /, which was called Digamma (^t'yaft/xar=" double gam- 
 ma") from its form, and Vau {Pav) from its pronunciation. It was 
 pronounced like the Latin ti : Polvog, wine z=zltat. vinum. At a later 
 time it was written only by the ^olians and Dorians. 
 
§ 14. OTHKK Cn^}^.^^^^^^ 
 
 a, rjy to. It is not written under, but after capitals, as At, 
 Hi, £2<, but still remains unpronouncecl. 
 
 § 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are 
 to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a diaere- 
 sis (Smt/o£o-fc'=<^^i>«^««^^'^^): thus TTuig is pronounced ^<2-^>/ 
 avTTvog, a-iojpnos. 
 
 B. Other Characters. 
 § 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also 
 the sign ', which is placed over the initial vowel to which 
 it belongs, and represents the h: e^ is pronounced hex; 
 aira^, hapax. This sign is called spirit us asper, "rough 
 breathing." 
 
 § 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also mark 
 those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the 
 sign \ i. e., the sjpiritus lenis, " gentle breathing." This 
 sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec- 
 essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant 
 precedes : Ik is pronounced eJc ; ayw, ago. 
 
 § 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second 
 vowel: ovToq — hoittos ; ei^ov = eidon. But when the first 
 vowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it : 
 "AiZriQ= Hades; '£li^fi=Ode. 
 
 § 13. Every initial p has the spiritus asper over it: 
 /oai//(j)Soc> f'ivfj.a. In Latin the aspirate is written after 
 the p : rhapsodies, rheuina. When two /o's come together 
 in a word, ' is usually placed over the first, and ' over the 
 second : Wvppoq — Pyrrhus ; KaWippor] = CalUrrhoe. 
 
 Obs. — Many write tlie double q without any breathing: TlvppoQ\ 
 KaXKippuT], 
 
 § 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign ~ over a vowel 
 denotes that the vowel is long, "^ that it is short, and - that 
 it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they 
 are used only with the vowels a, /, v, since f, rj, o, w, are 
 distinguished by their form. 
 
6 ACCENTS. § 15. 
 
 § 15. The sign ' at the junction of two words indicates 
 the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called 
 an wpostroj)he : irap Ikeivi^ for irapa eKdvoj, with that one/ 
 jLiri ^yu) for fxri syw (ne ego). 
 
 § 16. The same sign has the name coronis (Kopwvig) 
 when it stands over the junction of two words contracted 
 into one : tovvojulu for to ovofia, the name / Kayadog for 
 icat ayaOog, and good. It indicates that a crasis {Kpamg, 
 mixtu7'e) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, 
 like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph- 
 thong : TavTo for to auro, the same. 
 
 C. Accents. 
 
 § 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or Accent 
 (wpogij^^ia) of words. The sign ' over a vowel is called 
 the acute accent {b^ua irpogi^dia), that is, the sharp or 
 raised tone : Xoyog, rourwy, wapa, htpog. The syllable 
 thus marked must be raised above the rest. 
 
 A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable is 
 called oxytone (o^vtovov): irapa y uiri, (damXevg. 
 
 A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is 
 called paroopyto?ie {TrapoE,vTovov) : Xiyio, (l>aiv(jJ. 
 
 A word having the acute accent upon the last but two 
 is called proparoxytone (TrpoTrapo^vTOvov) : XiytTai, uTrtTe 
 
 § 18. Obs. — A proparoxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in 
 the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to 
 give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length 
 of the second syllable : jSefBijKa should be pronounced hebeka ; 
 cLTTofSaive, apohaine. 
 
 § 19. The sign ' over a vowel is called the grave accent 
 {fiapua TTpogoj^ia). It indicates a low tone, that is, that 
 a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in airoj^alvt, the 
 last two might have the grave accent. The marking of 
 them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the 
 acute being a suiBScient guide. All Avords without an 
 
§ 23. PUNCTUATIOX. 7 
 
 accent on the final syllable are therefore called harytone 
 {^apvTOva) : Xeyw, trepog. 
 
 § 20. The sign \ however, also denotes a subdued acute, 
 and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not 
 immediately followed by a pause : otto, from^ but aTro 
 TovTovyfrom this; (^amXevg^a kijig,hutj5a(n\svQ lyivtro, 
 he hecame king. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent 
 unchanged only at the end of a sentence. 
 
 § 21. The sign " over a vowel is called the circuwflex 
 accent (Trt/oto-Trw/ztyrj irpoqui^ia), from its shape. The cir- 
 cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, '\ 
 
 A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called 
 jperisjyoinenon {irspKrirwiui^vov) : ayaOoTg, crKiag. 
 
 A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but 
 one is called properispome?ion (TrpoTrEpicrirwiuLevov) : ^cOyt, 
 
 § 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ 12), 
 is put over the second vowel : (pavyei, tovto. 
 
 When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon 
 the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing: 
 ovTog, riOogf "^Qrog. The acute, in a similar case, stands to 
 the right of the breathing : aye, ip\ofiaif "Iwv. 
 
 Obs. — The acute is placed between tlie two points of a diaeresis (9), 
 aXhoQ^ but tlie circumflex over them, irpaisvai. 
 
 i 
 D. Punctuation. 
 
 § 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods, 
 the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For 
 the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon : rt uirag ; 
 what did yoio say 9 For the colon or semicolon they 
 place a point at the upper part of the line : Ipiortj vfiag ' 
 Ti iTTonjaaTE ; I ask you : what did you do f kairipa i]v ' 
 TOTS rjXOev ayyeXog, it was evening ; then a messenger 
 came. 
 
8 VOWELS. § 24. 
 
 Chap. II. — The Sounds. 
 
 A. The Vowels. 
 
 § 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has ^nq^ vow- 
 els, of which the first four are like the Latin, a^ e^ o, i. 
 But instead of the Latin u, the Greeks have v (pronounced 
 nearly like the French u and the German it). 
 
 § 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and 
 short, are divided into two classes — the hard and the soft 
 vowels : a, 6, r?, o, w, are hard ; v, i, soft. 
 
 § 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together 
 arise di/phthongs {^i(l)Ooyyoi, i, e., double-sounds). They 
 are: 
 
 av, from a and v. ov, from o and v. 
 
 Of, " o " I. 
 
 27. The union of long hard vowels with i produces the 
 
 ■> 
 
 ti 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 I, 
 
 s 
 
 (( 
 
 t 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 » 
 
 a 
 
 £ 
 
 (( 
 
 ^ 
 
 § 24. Dialects.'— The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif- 
 . ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus : 
 
 1. The Ionic (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers rj for Attic 
 d : Att. Oojpd^, Ion. Oiopi]^, hreastplate ; Att. dyopa^ Ion. dyopri^ mcirket ; 
 Att. vavQ^ Ion. vr]VQ^ ship ; but Ion. iiwa\i^p'n] for Att. fiE(Tt]fil3pia, mid- 
 day. 
 
 2. The Boric^ on the contrary, prefers d : Att. dtjfiog, Dor. ddfiog, 
 people ; Att. /xrjrijp, mother, Dor. ixdrjjp (comp. Latin mdter) ; Dor. 'AQdva 
 for 'A9r]vd, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 
 
 3. The Ionic dialect often changes e to «, and o to ov : Att. ^hog. 
 Ion. ^tivog, foreign ; At. 'ivsKa, Ion. uveku, on account of; Att. ]idvog, Ion. 
 fiovvog, alone ; Att. ovofia, Ion. ovvo/xa, name. Rarely o to oi, or a to at : 
 Att. riyvoTjae, lon. -qyvohim, he Tinew not. 
 
 § 26. Dialects. — The Kew-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong 
 wu, which, however, only comes in place ,of av in the other dialects. 
 Oojvfia for Oav/na, iDonder ; tiovrov for iavrov, of himself : ojv must be 
 pronounced as ou. 
 
§ 33. CONSONANTS. 9 
 
 spurious diphthongs a, r?, (j>, in which the underwritten 
 iota is not heard. (Compare § 8.) 
 
 § 28. The Greek language also combines v with i, but 
 only before vowels: fivla, a fly. 
 
 § 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (o, w), 
 the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (t, t^), and 
 the more obscure v from the clearer i. 
 
 m 
 B. TJie Consonants. 
 
 § 30. The consonants are divided : I. According to 
 the position in the mouth where they are produced, 
 i. e., according to their organ {opyavov, " instrument"), 
 into : 
 
 1. Gutturals (throat-sounds), k, 7, x* 
 
 2. Dentals (teeth-sounds), r, S, 0, v, X, p, o-. 
 
 3. Labials (lip-sounds), tt, /3, 0, ji. 
 
 § 31. II. According to ihe'ir power, that is, whether they 
 can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into ; 
 
 § 32. 1. Mutes (mutaa) : 
 
 (a.) hard (tenues), k, t, tt. 
 
 ih.) soft (mediae), 7, S, /3. 
 
 {c.) aspirated (aspirata?), x, 0, (p. 
 
 Ohs. — The aspirated consonants contain each a 7iard consonant 
 with the rough breathing, % therefore = k' (kh) ] 9=zr (th) ; 0= 
 X (ph). 
 
 § 33. 2. Vocals (semivocales) : 
 
 (a.) Liquids (liquida)), X, p. 
 
 {h.) Nasals (nasales), 7 (7 before gutturals, § 4), v, fi, 
 
 {c.) Sibilant (sibilans), o- (c). 
 
 § 32. Dialects. — In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the 
 breathing : Uko^xui for Attic ^kxo^ai^ accept ; avnc, for Attic avQiQ^ 
 again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing : KiQuiv 
 for Attic xiTh}v., tunic ; IvOev-ev for Attic evreuOev. 
 
 A2 
 
10 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 34. 
 
 § 34. The dovhle consonants belong to both kinds : 
 5, ;//, 2 : for ^ = k(j, ■^ — tto-, 2 = ^, with a soft sibilant 
 (§ 5). 
 
 Obs. — K(s only occurs in compounds with k: tKawKio, I rescue. 
 
 Chap. TIL— Combinations and Changes of 
 Sounds. 
 
 A. Vowels in Combination. 
 35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may 
 
 § 34. Dialects. — A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want 
 of the breathing v. The v^ however, was not altogether wanting ; 
 for — 
 
 1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in 
 the beginning of the following words : dywixi, Ireak ; liXiQ^ numer- 
 ous ; aXitTKoixai, am caught; dva^, ruler ; dvatrauj, rule; dv^dv(>y^ jjlease ; 
 dpaide, tender; drrrv, city; tap, spring [««?']; tBvoQ, swarm, people ; 
 tiKom, twenty [Doric PiKan, Latin 'viginti]', eIku), yield; €»\w, p7'ess ; 
 eKTjTi, icillingly ; tKvpog, father-in-law ; tKwv, willing; tXTrojuai, hope; 
 the pronominal Stem i (to, sui), toiKu, appear; iirog, icord ; eIttov, 
 spoTce ; tpyov, worh ; tpyoj, close in; tppu), go on; Ipvcj, draic ; ipku), 
 shall say ; iaQriQ, clothing; el/jia, dress (Stem Peg, Latin vestis) ; trrjg, 
 relative; tiSvg, agreeable; "iXiog, city Ilios ; laog, equal; oIkoq, house; 
 olvog, wi7ie (pimim). On the operation of the digamma, see § 63, D., 
 75, D. 
 
 2. The / in the middle occurred in o{g, sheep, from oPig (Latin ovis) : 
 vr}-6g,ofthe ship, from vdPog (Latin nams). Gen. of vav-g. 
 
 3. The Dorians and JGolians retained the digamma at the begin- 
 ning of many words : ^ol. Pkrog, year. Dor. Pi^wg, own. 
 
 4. In Homer, at the beginning of many words, e stands for P. te, 
 him, self; luKoai, ticenty ; itar}, equal; tedvov, marriage-gift =^ 'i^vov. 
 
 § 35. Dialects. — The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi- 
 nations of vowels. The £Jpic and New-Ionic leave many syllables 
 uncontracted : tv = eu, icell ; dtofiai =z olofiai, I thinTc ; Trd'ig =. Traig, 
 doy ; voog = vovg, sense; (piXkrfTe =z ipiXijTs (ametis) ; uskcdv =z dKwv, 
 Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the 
 
^ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 11 
 
 combine. The dissimilar vowels pair Avith one another 
 best: 
 
 1. The soft generally remain unchanged before the hard 
 vowels : ao<^ia, vnsdom / Xvw, I loosen / \avw, I slumfiber j 
 vu^ it rains ; ivvoia, benevolence. 
 
 2. Hard vowels hefore soft ones become diphthongs : 
 £u, 6u, good ; iraigy Traig, l)Oy ; yivu, yivei, to trie race, 
 
 Ohs. — Diphthongs sometimes lose tlieir second part before vowels : 
 ^ov-6q becomes j3o-6g (hov-is) ; Kai-oj^ kol-o), hum. Compare §§ 160, 
 
 248, Oh. 
 
 § 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together, 
 and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according 
 to the following laws : 
 
 1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel : \aag 
 becomes Xaq, stone j ZrjXow, ZrjXu), T a7n zealous; Xiiog, 
 XToc, (^ Chian ; (piXirjre, (piXriTE, ametis, in which cases g 
 and rj, o and w, are similar. 
 
 Still it must be observed that e f usually become u, and 
 o o become ov : Trofee, ttoUi, do / ttAooc, ttXcuc, passage hy 
 sea. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong 
 disappear: ttXoov, tt\ov, of a passage ; oiKiu, oiku, dwells ; 
 ^i\iyy (l)iXy, arnet. 
 
 § 37., 2. Dissimilar vowels form a compound in which 
 
 contrary, contracted in these dialects: IpoQ^^upog^ lioly ; (idxjagzzz 
 (Sonffag, one wlw has called. 
 
 2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by 
 this letter first becoming P, and then being quite dropped (compare 
 § 34, D., 2) : ^ov-6g—(ioP-6g [hov-is]— (io-6g.- 
 
 § 37. Dialects. — 1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus, in 
 New-Ionic especially, eo and eov are contracted into ev, not into ov : 
 TToisofiev, TToieujufv, we make ; Trodovm, Troievm, they make. 
 
 2. In the Ionic dialect, ao (rjo) often changes to ew : 'Arps/^ao, 'ATpeL- 
 de(o, of Atrides ; 'iXaog, 'iXeajg, merciful, a before w is often changed 
 into the thinner sound e : TlocraSewv = UotreLddiov, Att. UoaEidiov, the god 
 Poseidon. 
 
 3. In Doric, ao^ au), are contracted into d : 'ATpddao =z 'Arpeica, Uo- 
 (Kiddojv ■=. Xlotrei^dv, Q(.do)v (dearum) = Q^dv. 
 
12 
 
 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 
 
 38. 
 
 a) the obscurer vowel overpowers the clearer (§ 29). 
 Thus from 
 
 ao comes (X) m Tifxaofiev^ 
 
 TinojfiEv, we honor. 
 vujSvvog, painless, 
 aiduj, pudorem. 
 Kr}Xu)Te, ye may de jealous. 
 yevovQ, of the race. 
 tr]\ov, be jealous, 
 tlldr), song. 
 Tifio), he honored, 
 fiiov, surely not. 
 Xpy(Tov, of the golden. 
 Xpvool^ the golden. 
 KnKoig^ thou art jealous. 
 olvovQ, abounding in wine. 
 
 ■when the ti rejDresents the lengthening of « 
 
 § 38. h) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound 
 meet, the first in order gains the upper hand : 
 
 T]0 
 
 a 
 
 (t) 
 
 ' vri-odvvog 
 
 oa 
 
 u 
 
 U) 
 
 ' aiSoa, 
 
 or] 
 
 u 
 
 • 
 
 <jj 
 
 ' Kr]\6r]TE^ 
 
 £0 
 
 u 
 
 ov 
 
 ' ykvEog^ 
 
 . 06 
 
 a 
 
 ov 
 
 ' ^^\0€, 
 
 aoi 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 ' aoi^}7, 
 
 aov 
 
 a 
 
 0} 
 
 ' TLjxdoVj 
 
 t]OV 
 
 u 
 
 10 
 
 ' /ir) oiiv, 
 
 iOV 
 
 u 
 
 ov 
 
 " X|0w(7£oy, 
 
 eoi 
 
 a 
 
 01 
 
 ' XP^f^^oi, 
 
 oei 
 
 u 
 
 01 
 
 ' KrjXoeiQ, 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 ov 
 
 " oivoeic, 
 
 Obs. — oei 
 
 become 
 
 OV -when tl 
 
 (§ 42). 
 
 
 
 
 ae become 
 
 a in de/cwv, 
 
 d»ca>v, unwilling. 
 
 art " 
 
 a 
 
 ' TlfldtJTE, 
 
 Tifidre, honoretis. 
 
 aei " 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' d£(^W, 
 
 ^dit), I siiig. 
 
 ay " 
 
 ?f 
 
 ' rifidyg, 
 
 rifi^g, honores. 
 
 Ea 
 
 »7 
 
 ' *>, 
 
 r)p, spring. 
 
 eai " 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' Xveai, 
 
 Xvy, thou art loosened. 
 
 vat " 
 
 y 
 
 ' XuTjat, 
 
 Xvy, solmris. 
 
 Obs. — In the contractions of an and eai, sometimes ai takes the 
 place of ^, €1 that of y. So from deiKrjg, unjit, comes alicfjg ; from 
 deipo), I lift up, comes alpu) ; from Xveat comes Xvei (with Xvy). 
 Exceptions, §§ 130, 183, 243 (nfidv), 244. 
 
 § 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to- 
 gether is called Synizesis {GvviZ,r]Gig, i. e., sinking). It con- 
 sists in the first vowel being written but not pronounced 
 as a vowel : Qz6q — as one syllable. 
 
 § 39, Dialects. — Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after t : 
 UrjXrfiddeu), of Felides ; xp^<^^oig, aureis ; vea,navem; also TroXiag, cities ; 
 uySoog, the eighth. 
 
§ 43. OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 13 
 
 B. Other Tcinds of Vowel changes. 
 
 § 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their 
 being lengthened. Two kinds of lengthening are distin- 
 guished, viz. : 
 
 1. Organic lengthening^ i. e., that which is required by 
 inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening — 
 
 a generally becomes »/, rt/zaw, / Jumor, Fut. n/tz/trw. 
 
 always " w, ^r]\6(x)^ I am jealous, " KijXuxru). 
 € " " rj, TTodu), I TUaJce, " Troirjau). 
 
 1 either " 7, riio, I Jionor, " rro-w ; 
 
 or " £1, St. Xltt, Pres. XetTrw, I leave : 
 
 sometimes " oi, " Xitt, Adj. Xoi-koq, remaining, 
 
 V either " i", Xya», / loose, Fut. \v(r^>) ; 
 
 or . " tv, St. 0yy, Pres. <pevyu}, IJlee. 
 
 § 41. O&s. — After e, t, and p, a is changed to d instead of r} : law, 
 / leave, alloic ; fut. l6.(Sii) ; St. /a, Ileal ; iuTpoQ, physician ; St. bpa, 
 see; opd^ia, a view. The Attic dialect is altogether ai^erse to the 
 combinations £j], ir], pr], and frequently puts ed, id, pd in their place. 
 
 § 42. 2. Co7)ipe7isato7'2/ lengthening, i. e., that which is 
 used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it a, even 
 when £, I, or p does not precede, is often changed to a : 
 Trac, every, from -n-a-vr-g — £ generally becomes ft : ufii, 
 Iain, from la-fii (§ 315) — o generally becomes ov : di^ovg 
 for §f So-vr-c [Lat. r/a-?i-5] — t always becomes 7, and v 
 always v : ^eiKvC-g for §£fKvu-vr-c^ showing. 
 
 Obs. — Exceptions, in which e becomes r], and o becomes w, are given 
 in § 147, and in which a becomes ?? in § 270. 
 
 § 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange in 
 one and the same Stem, when, generally, t is regarded 
 as the Stem -vowel: Tpiirw, I ttorn ,' tr pair ov, I turned j 
 
 § 40. Dialects. — The extension of v to ov appears in eiXriXovOa, am 
 come, from Stem IXvO (§ 327, 2). 
 
 § 41. Dialects. — The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the 
 combinations erj, irj, and pr] : IHrj = Attic Irsd, willow ; lijrpog = Attic 
 iarpog, physician ; TrsLprjao/xai =: Attic Trupdaofiai, I will try. 
 
 The Doric dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens a into a : 
 Ti^dffoj =: Tifitjau), I will honor (§ 24, D., 2). _^ 
 
14 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 44. 
 
 TpoTTog, turning / Stem y^v^g, Nom. yivoq, race [compare 
 Lat. generis, Nom. gen ws] ; (pXtyu, I hum / ^Xo^, flame. 
 
 r\ also is at times changed to w : apy]yM,I help j apwyog, 
 helper. 
 
 C. Consonants in cornbinatiofi with one another. 
 
 % 44. Consonants, in regard to their combination, are 
 subject to still greater limitation and change than the 
 vowels. Those which are dissimilar (comp. §§ 32, 33) 
 agree hest with one another, especially the mutes with the 
 liquids. 
 
 That discordant consonants may continue together, they 
 are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more 
 unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary 
 changes of consonants are the following : 
 
 § 45. 1. Before micte dentals (§§ 30, 31), only conso- 
 nants of other organs which are of the same order (that is, 
 both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand ; 
 consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds 
 are — icr, ttt, yS, /3S, x^^ 0^- 
 
 When a different mute stands before the dental, through 
 inflexion or derivation, it must be assimilated to the order 
 of the latter. Consequently — 
 
 K^ and x^ become yS. tt^ and <pS become [3d. 
 
 ic9 " y9 " x^' 7r9 " [39 " <p9. 
 
 yr " xr " KT. /3r " ^r " ttt. 
 
 Therefore — 
 
 7r\EK-9riva^ becomes TrXex^^vat, from Tr\eK(o,Itceave. 
 Xey-Tog " Xe/crof, " Xeyio, I say 
 
 [lectus instead of leg-tus]. 
 \ey-9r]vat " \Ex9rjvai, ■ " Xeyw, / say. 
 
 Sex-Tog " dsKTog, " Sexo/^aL, I receive 
 
 [tractus instead of trah-tus, from tralw]. 
 TV7r-9t]vai " TV(p9i]vaij from rvTrruj, I strike. 
 
 ypa^-Tog " ypuTTTog, " ypd<pio, I icrite. 
 
 ypa(p-dr}v " ypd[3driv, " " " 
 
 05s.— The preposition k, out of (Lat. ex), remains unchanged in all 
 combinations : iK9emg, casting out ; tKdpourj, running out. 
 
§ 48. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 15 
 
 § 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audible 
 are changed into o- {Dissimilatio^i), Therefore — 
 TT^ St, and 9r become or. 
 Te,d9, " 99 " (t9: hence 
 , dvvT-TOQ becomes dwaTog, accomplished^ from dvvTix)^ I accomplish. 
 4^-Tiov " ^(TTEov, canendum est, " ^du),Ising. 
 
 7rei9-9t]vai " Trei(T9fjvai, to he persuaded, " 7r€i0a», I p&rsuade. 
 
 § 47. 3. Before /x a guttural becomes y, a dental a, a 
 labial jul. Therefore — 
 
 SiujK-ixog becomes diujyfiog, persecution, from ^twKw, I pursue. 
 /36-/3pfx-/iat " I3kl3peyfiai, I have deen wetted, from (3psx(o, I wet. 
 id-fjiev " co-zLtej/, 'Z/)6 ^Tioic, from ol^a, / ^/ioz(). [2)U8h. 
 
 rjvvT-naL " yvvajxai, I have l)een perfected, from dvvTO), I accom- 
 
 7rs-7rH9-fievog " TreTrutTfisvog, persuaded, from. TrEi9(t),I piersuade. 
 KOTT-fiog " K0fiii6g,a strilcing,ivoioii K6Tz-T(x},Istrike\summus,ivou\. 
 
 sup-mus]. 
 Te-Tpi(i-fiai " TSTpifiixai, I have heen imhhed, from rpiiSoj, I rub. 
 ■ypa<}>-ixa " ypdfifia, letter, from ypd<p(o, I icrite. 
 
 Obs. — Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain 
 unchanged : uKfirj, hloom; pv9fi6g, 7novement, rhythm; dpi9^6g, nwiv- 
 ber. 
 
 The jDreposition Ik leaves its k unchanged : tKfidcrcrio, I wipe out. 
 
 § 48. 4. Before o-, as a hard consonant, y and ^ become 
 K, and ft becomes ir {Assimilation) : jco- is then written 5, 
 and TTo- \//. Therefore — 
 
 dy-<T(D becomes dK-crio, written a^-w, / sJiall lead, from dyio, I lead [rexi 
 
 instead of 7'e^-s^, from reg-o~\. 
 hx-<yofiaL " hK-(rofxai, written Si^o/xaL, I shall receive, from ^kxofiai, 
 
 I receive [traxi instead of trah-si, from, trah-o]. 
 Tpi(i-(TM " • Tpi7r-(TU), written rpiipw, I shall rub, ti-om Tplf3io, I rub 
 
 [scripsi instead of scrib-si, from scrib-o']. 
 ypa<i>-(TO} " ypuTT-ffio, written ypdxpco, I shcdl write, from ypdcp-aj, I 
 
 write. 
 Obs. — It is clear from § 34 that every k and tt with <r must become 
 
 § 47. Dialects. — The changes of dentals and gutturals before ft is 
 frequently omitted in Ionic: iK-fxevog, favorable, from St. ik (iKdvoj, I 
 come) ; dKcfxti^vog, pointed, from St. uk (Lat. acuo) ; dvTfxr], breath ; ddfufi, 
 smell, from St. od (o^w) [od-or], Att. da-firj ; 1S-/jisv, we Tcnow = Att. Itr-fiev; 
 Ke.Kopv9iikvog, equipped, from St. Kopv9 {Kopvacroi) = Att. KSKopvafisvog. 
 
16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 49. 
 
 I and \p: hence TrXeK-acj becomes TrXe^w, from ttXsko), I weave ; 
 XeiTT-cru) becomes Xei\po), from XetTrw, I leave. 
 
 § 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before <t, 
 are dropped without compensatioii ; in like manner v dis- 
 appears before Z,. Therefore — 
 
 dwT-mg becomes dvvcng, accomj^lishment, from dvvTu), I accomplish. 
 i^d-<Tofiai " i](TOfiai, Iwhall rejoice^ from ijdofiai, I rejoice [laesi for 
 
 laed-si, from laed-o]. 
 KopvO-ai " Kopvai, to the helmets^ from Kopvg^ Gen. K6pv-9oQ^ helmet. 
 5aifiov-ffi " datixom, to the dwmons, from daifiojv, dceinon. [yoJce. 
 avv-Kvyog " av^vyog, yoJced together, from avv, together, and ^vySv, 
 Hence a before another c is lost : Teixea-cn becomes re/'xe-ffi, to walls 
 (from r€t%of , wall) ; ka-ao^ai, t-aofiai. 
 
 Obs. l.—v is not always dropped before <t or ?• in composition. In 
 the preposition kv, the v remains for the sake of clearness : iv- 
 araZ^io, I trickle in; ivKevyw/xi, I harness. The v in ttuv, all, every, 
 and TrdXiv, again, either remains michanged or is assimilated to 
 the following a : irdvao(pog, aU-icise ; iraXifftrvrog, from iraXiv- 
 avTog, starting hack The v in (tvv, with, is dropped before ^ or c 
 with a consonant following : cv^vyog (see above) ; avtTrrjfia, sys- 
 tem ; it is assimilated before a simple a : avaaiTiov, from avv-mnov, 
 common mml. 
 
 2. Sometimes v remains unchanged before <t in the 2d Pers. Sing, 
 of the Perf Mid. : Tre-^av-crai, thou Imst appeared. 
 
 3. In exceptional cases, compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes place 
 when a single v is omitted : for instance — 
 
 ci) In some Kominatives Sing. : fieXd-g, MacJc, for p,eXav-g. 
 
 h) In the 3d Pers. Pliir. of the chief tenses, where o- has taken 
 the place of r : Xv-ov-m, they loosen, instead of Xv-ov-ai (orig- 
 inally Xv-ov-Ti) (§ 60). 
 
 c) Often in derivation : yepovaia, senate, instead of yepovna, from 
 St. yepovT, Nom. yspojv, old man. 
 
 § 50. 6. The comhinations vr, v0, vS, ar# likewise omit- 
 ted before o-, but cause a compensatory lengthening (§ 42) : 
 
 TravT-ai becomes Tram, to all, from St. ttuvt-, Nom. 7rd-g. 
 
 Ti9evT-g " TiOeig, putting, " " riOevT. 
 
 yepovT-at " yspovcn, to old m£n, " " yepovr, Nom. yspwv. 
 
 § 49. Dialects. — Homer often assimilates a mute to the fallowing a : 
 7ro(T(7t=Att. TToai for 7rod-<n (pedibus). He often preserves one a before 
 another : la-o-o/nai, I shall he. 
 
§ 51. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 17 
 
 , (to those } r. ^, 
 
 dEiKvvvT-ai becomes hiKvmiA^j^^ shoicl' ^^■'^^ Shkwvt, !Nom. detKvv-Q. 
 
 a^,v^-a<o " ^^^'^^-^^Zathm]^'' " ^'^^^^^ Pres. ^7rix.^a>. 
 
 TrevO-aofxai " Treiaofiai^IsMUsu^er, " " 7r€v0, Pres. 7ra<Txa>. 
 
 Ods. 1. — j/r disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of 
 
 Stems of Adjectives in svr, Nom. ei-g : St. xapt€i/r, Nom. x«|Otetc, 
 
 Dat. Pkir. xapte-cri for xajOtevr-fri. 
 2. — Of j/0 before or, v remains in 'iXfiiv-g, tape-icorm, instead of t\- 
 
 jxivQ-g, Stem tXfiivO : Tipw-g^ the city Tiryns^ instead of 'Ti.pvvQ-Q^ 
 
 Stem TipvvO. 
 
 § 505. In later Attic a is readily assimilated to a preceding p : Old 
 Att. x^pf^ovr]<Tog, New Att. x^ppovrjaog, peninsula ; Old Att. QapaCj^ 
 New Att. Oappu)^ I am courageous. 
 
 § 51. 7. V remains unchanged before mute dentals; it 
 becomes the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), ju before labials, 
 and is assimilated before liquid consonants : 
 
 avv-TiOrjiJii, I put together^ is unchanged. 
 
 <7yv-KaXea>, / call togeth£r^ becomes o-yy/caXew. 
 
 cvv-xpovoQ^ contemporaneous^ " crvyxpovog. 
 
 tv-TTupog^ experienced^ " t/xTreipog, from Iv and te7 pa, 2^'oof [so 
 
 in-peritus becomes im-peritus]. 
 tv-\//vXOf , inspirited, " tfx\pvxog, from tv and ^wx*)? ^^^• 
 
 ev-jxerpog, metrical, " tfifierpog, from tv and fthpov, measure 
 
 [so in-modicus becomes im-raod- 
 
 icus]. 
 avv-peoj, IJiow together, " avppaio, from auv and psw, I flow [so 
 
 con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. 
 avv-Xeyu), I collect, " o-yXXeyw, from cruv and Xeyw, / p'a^A^r 
 
 [so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. 
 
 0&8. 1. — V in the preposition Iv remains unchanged before p : tv- 
 
 pvBfiog, rhythmical. 
 2. — V is combined with p by means of ^ in av-^-p6g. Gen. of dvj7|0, 
 
 man. So is /[* Avith p by /3 in nEcrij/x-li-pia, midday, instead of 
 
 HS(Tr}fi(e)pia (jieffog and rjfiepa, compare" § 61, c). 
 
 § 51. Dialects. — In the Epic dialect j3 is often inserted between ft 
 and p, and between p, and X : pk-p.-^-\ioKa, I Imxe gone, from Stem /loX, 
 by metathesis (§ 59). /* before X or p becomes /3 at the beginning of 
 a word : j3Xw-(t/cw, / go, Present of the Stem poX ; (Sporog, mortal, for 
 UpoTog, from the Stem fxpo or /iop \mor-ior, mortuus sum'l. 
 
18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 52. 
 
 § 52. 8, Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following 
 rough hreathmg (spiritus asper) into aspirates (x, Q, (p) : 
 hence^ 
 
 t-rr' (fcTTi) and rjfiepa, day, become e<pf]ixepog,for a day. 
 deK (dsKo) " r)ix8pa,day, " hxhix^poQ^for ten days. 
 
 ten 
 avT {avTi) '"'' virarog, consul, " dvQinrarog, proconsul. 
 
 § 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the following word 
 begins with a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into 
 an aspirate : 
 
 ovx ovrog, not this, for ovk ovtoq. 
 
 a((t i(TTiag,from the hearth, " cltt' (a7r6) hriaQ. 
 
 KaO' rjfiepav, by day, " kut {Kara) ijukpav. 
 
 Obs. — If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated, 
 the first must also be aspirated (§ 45): tTrrd and i)}ikpa form 
 i^9r}ixepoQ,for seven days; vvktu and dXrjv become vvxO' oXrjv, totam 
 noctem. 
 
 § 53b. 10. Two syllables immediately following one an- 
 other can not both begin with aspirates in the following 
 cases : 
 
 a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute takes 
 the place of the aspirate : 
 
 Ke-xiopn^a for x€-xw|07?/ca, I have proceeded, from xojplw, I proceed. 
 TL-9riixi " Qi-drjixi, I put. 
 
 TTB-^vKa " ^E-^vKa, I have become. 
 
 h) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems 0£ {ridrifii, 
 I put), 6v {Ovtjf I sacrifice), adopt the same modification ; 
 i'Ti-Qr]v,I was put, for e-Oe-Or^v ; l-rv-Orfv, I was sacrificed, 
 for l-Ov-Orjv. (Compare §298.) 
 
 c) In the Imperative of the First Aorist- Passive (§ 297), 
 on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed to a tenuis : 
 (Tw-6ri-Ti, he saved, for au)-6r}-9i. 
 
 d) Isolated instances are : o/xttcy^? embrace, for aji^^^ao ; 
 lKi\Hpia, for i')(jE\upia, armistice, from t\^iv, to hold, and 
 X^ip, hand. 
 
 § 52 and 53. Dialects. — The aspiration is omitted in New Ionic : 
 l7rr)fiepoQ,J'or a day; dTrirjfii, I send away ; ovk ov-ojq :=^ ovx ovtoq, not so; 
 air ov,from the time when, Att. d(p' ov. 
 
% 55, OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 10 
 
 Ois. — Sometimes tlie spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, be- 
 cause the following syllable begins with an aspirate : ti-^pa, till, 
 for 6-0|oa, from the relative Stem 6 (§ 213, 217), t'xw for s^w, from 
 St._*x(§327,6). 
 
 § 54. Some Stems beginning with r change this letter 
 to 6 when an aspirate at the end can not be retained (§ 45). 
 This happens : 
 
 , a) In the Substantive Stem Tpi^, whose Nominative is 
 Opi^f hair, Dat. Plur. 6piE,L The other cases are regu- 
 lar, formed from the Stem rpix (Gen. rpixog, Nom. Plur. 
 
 rplx^g), 
 
 V) In raxyq, quick, whose comparative is Ocktcfljv for 
 TaxKj^v (§ 57 ; compare § 198). 
 c) In the following Verbal Stems : 
 
 Ta(i>, Pres. OdTTToj^Ihury, Fut. 6d\l/io, Aor. Pass. trd^TjVj Subs. 
 
 ^ TUipdc, grave. 
 
 Tpe<p, '^ rpe^oj, I nourish, 
 
 " 9pe\pu}, Subs. Opefifia, cattle. 
 
 mx, " rpsxoj,Irun, 
 
 " Ope^ofiai ) 
 
 Tpv(p, " epvTTTOj, I rit^ to 2nec€s, 
 
 " Op^cj [ (§ 260). 
 
 TV(p, " Tv<p(o, I smoJce, 
 
 " GvxPoj ) 
 
 Obs. — In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296), and in the Infinitive of 
 the Perf. Mid., the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet 
 
 • the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is 
 not felt to be necessarily an original Aspirate, as it might have 
 been modified by the influence of the 9 after it (§ 45) : t9pe(p9T]v, 
 Te9pd<])9ai. 
 
 D. Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the 
 middle of a Word. 
 
 § 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by the 
 modifications of the soft vowel i in connection with conso- 
 nants (compare §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently, 
 for instance, 
 
 1. I after v or |0 is put a syllable farther back, where it 
 forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence, 
 
20 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. § 56. 
 
 ■ TEivcj, from TEv-iio, I stretch, St. rev [tendo]. 
 
 ixaivofiai, " ftav-iofiai, I rage, " fiav. 
 
 dfiEivojVj " dfi£v-i()jv, better, " dfiev. 
 
 KEipoj, " KEp-iu), I shear, " Ksp. 
 
 SoTEipa, " dorep-ia, the giver, fern. " Sorep {Sorfip, gi^er). 
 
 Xslpojv, " xejO-ioiv, worse, " xejo. 
 
 § 56. 2. ( is assimilated to a preceding X : 
 
 fiaXXov, from fiaX-iov, TTwre, from fidXa, much. 
 iiXXonai, " dX-iofiai, I spriTig, St. dX [salio]. 
 dXXoQ, " aX-iog, another [alius]. 
 (TTeXXu), " oreX-tw, / send, St. oreX. 
 
 § 57. 3. Gutturals (r and less frequently) coalesce 
 with a following i to era- (New Att. tt) : 
 
 rjaawv, from ifK-nov, less, St. ifK, SUperL riKiara. 
 
 ep^(7(Ta, " ep(^K-ia, Thracian, fem. (masc. Qp^K)t St. e/o^cK. 
 rdaaii), " ray-iw, / arrange, St. ray. 
 
 cXdo-ffwj^, " tXax-twv, smaller, " tXax, superl. iXaxtoroc. 
 
 Kprjaaa, " K|Oj;r-ia, Cretan, fem. (masc. Kpi?^), St. KpT/r. 
 Kopvaaix), " KopvQ-iu), I arm,^ St. KopvO {Kopvg, helmet^. 
 
 § 58. 4. 3 and sometimes y coalesce with a following t 
 to S. 
 
 e^ofiai, from id-iofiai, I sit, St. t^ (ro (Sog,the seat). 
 KpdK(t), " Kpay-iuj, I cry, " /CjOay (Perf. Kk-Kpdy-a). 
 
 Other changes of Sounds are : • 
 
 § 59. 1. Transposition (lUETaOemg), ^Yhlch most frequent- 
 ly occurs with A, p, also with fx and v : 
 
 Opdaog, together with Odpaog, loldness. 
 
 Opuxricio, from the St. 9op, I spring, Second Aorist tOopov. 
 
 l3e-(3Xr]-Ka, " jSaX, I have thrown, " " tjSaXov. 
 
 Te-Qvij-Ka, " Oav, I am dead, "■ " tQavov. 
 
 "■urj-aig, " Tefi,aciit, Vres. TEfxvu), I cut. 
 
 Obs. — In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened. 
 
 § 59. Dialects. — Transposition is more frequent in the Homeric dia- 
 lect (compare § 295, D.) : KuprEpSg and Kparepoc, strong ; KdpTKrrog z= 
 Att. KpdrKTTog, the strongest, from Kparog, strength; rpaTr-dofiw (compare 
 § 295, D.) for Tapir-donEv, we desire to rejoice, St. TEpir {Tkpirofxai). So 
 also in iSpaKov, I saw, St. SepK (SepKOfiai) ; tirpaQov, I destroyed, St. irtpO 
 (TrepOoj). Homer: drapTrog =: Att. drpuTrog, path. -^ 
 
§ 62. OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 21 
 
 § 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. The most 
 important weakenings are : 
 
 d) The very frequent one, especially before t, of r to or : 
 
 avaiaQr]<Jia^ want of feeling^ for dvaiaOrjria, from dvaiaOTjTog, without 
 
 feeling. 
 ^dai for ^avTi, they say. 
 
 On the rejection of v and the compensation for it, which 
 frequently occur in this case, see § 49, Ohs. 3, cy compare 
 § 187. 
 
 li) The weakening of initial or before vowels to the spir- 
 itus asper: 
 
 vQ, swine, together with avg. Compare Lat. su-s. 
 
 'i-(TTr}-fii for m-arrj-fii, I place. Compare Lat. si-sto (§§ 308, 327, 5, 6). 
 
 § 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The following 
 cases are important : 
 
 a) (T is rejected where it would have to stand between 
 two consonants in inflexion : 
 
 y^ypd^-Qai for y£ypa(p-(T9ai, to he written, St. ypatp, Pres. ypd^oj. 
 TtTv^-Oe " re-Tvrp-aOe, he ye struck, " tvtt, " rvTrru). 
 
 h) (T between two vowels is very often rejected : 
 
 \eye-ai, Xeyy (§ 38), for Xeyeaai, tJiou art said, St. Xey, Pres. Xsyco. 
 edvva-o, ISvvoj, for tdvvatro, thou couldst, Pres. ^vvafiai. 
 yeve-oQ for yevetrog, of the race, St. y e v e tr (§ 166). 
 
 c) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in the 
 middle of a word is called syncojpe (o-uyicoTrr)) : \--KT-6-ixr\v 
 for f-7r£r-o-/zr]v, I flew, St. tt £ r (§ 326, 34). Compare § 51, 
 Ols. 2. 
 
 § 62. 4. The doiibling of a consonant. This is rare, 
 
 § 60. Dialects. — The Dorians retain r : <pavTi=(pd(Ti(v), they say. The 
 older Att. less frequently : rfj/xepov = (rrjfiEpov, to-day. 
 
 § 61. Dialects. — Syncope is more frequent in Homer : nVre for riTrore, 
 why ever f why ? IkskXeto = t-KE-KsXeTo, he called, St. keX. 
 
 § 62. Dialects. — In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled ; 
 the mutes more rarely: ottttw^ == Attic '67riog,7iow; ottttoToc = Attic 
 uTToloc, qualis ; orn =: Attic on, tJmt ; the vocal consonants often: 
 
22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 63. 
 
 when it has not arisen through the assimilations men- 
 tioned above (§§ 47, 505, 51, 56). The liquid p is the 
 most frequently doubled : tpplxpa for eplipa, I hicrled / 
 apprjKTog for a-pr^KTog, not breakable. The aspirates can 
 be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Ba/cxoc, 
 
 E. Changes of Sowid at the end of a Word. 
 
 § 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by 
 another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by 
 a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a hiatus. The Greeks 
 very often suffer the hiatus in prose ; but frequently the 
 hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word is a shorter 
 one and of itself of little importance. This is done in 
 thi^ee ways, that is, either by elision (rejection of the final 
 vowel), or by crasis (contraction of the two vowels), or by 
 synisesis (collapse of two syllables into one). 
 
 IXXa^e =: Attic £Xa/3€ , lie took ; ^iXonfiei^rjg = Attic ^i\oixHdr]c, readily 
 smiling; HwriTog =i Attic ev-vtjto^, well-woven ; cxraov =^ Attic b<Tov,7iow 
 great ; vkicvam = Attic veKvm, to the corpses ; 67riaa<o = Attic oTrtVw, 
 dach On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where 
 the Attic has double : wKvpoog = MKvppoog, swift-Jlowing. Often also 
 both forms are usual together : 'AxtXewf and 'AxtWeyf, 'Odvaevg and 
 'Odvaaevg. 
 
 § 63. Dialects. — The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many 
 cases : the most important are : 
 
 1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma : Kara 
 oIkov for Kara PoTkov, at Jwme. 
 
 2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is 
 not usual : TfaiU oiraaaw^ Tie gave to the son. 
 
 3. It is softened by a pause or a cgesura after the first short syllable 
 of the third foot : KaOrjao, kfK^ d' eTriTreiOeo nvQip^ sit down, and obey my 
 word ; tmv ot «^ lykvovro Ivl /leyapoKri, of which six were horn to him in 
 the chambers. 
 
 4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be- 
 comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus : 'ArpeTdai 
 re Kal dXXoi kvKvrjfiideg 'Axaioi, Ye Atridm and ye other well-greaved 
 Achoeans " " . Compare § 75, D., 2. 
 
^65. ELISION. — CRASIS. ^3 
 
 § 64. 1. Elisio7i^ or the rejection of the final vowel, 
 of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only 
 with short final vowels, but never with v ; most frequent- 
 ly at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions, and 
 adverbs : Itt avT(J[), with ?dm, for Itti avT(^ ; ouS' l^vvaro, 
 he could not even^ aXX' f/XOtv, hict he ca'me , less fre- 
 quently at the end of nouns and verbs : ot iravr uqa^- 
 yiXXovTeg, i. e., ol navra elgayjiXXovregf who reported the 
 whole. 
 
 Obs. 1. — The prepositions Trep/, round^ dxpi and fiexpi, till, and the 
 conjunction on, that, never suffer elision. 
 
 2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without, however, being 
 indicated by the apostrophe : iTr-epxofiai, from tTn-kpxonai, I come 
 up; but Trepdpxofiai, I go round. 
 
 3. On the change of consonants occurring with elision (e^* rjukpq), 
 see § 53. 
 
 § Q6. 2. Crasis {Kpaaig, mixing) is governed, on the 
 
 § 64. Dialects. — Elision is much more frequent with the poets than 
 in prose ; thus, not only e and i even in nominal and verbal forms 
 are elided, but also the diphthongs ai and oi, in the verbal termina- 
 tions fiai, cat, rai, aOai, and in the forms /ioi and roi. In Homer, i in 
 oTi, tJmt, is also sometimes elided. 
 
 A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the apocope 
 {aTTOKoiri]). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
 beginning with a consonant. The apocope is frequent in Homer with 
 the prepositions ava, Kara, irapa, and with the conjunction apa, note, 
 seldom with airo and vtto : it takes place in compounds as well as 
 at the meeting of two separate words. The v of av{a) then suffers 
 the changes described in § 51 ; the r of Kar(a), the tt of a7r(6) and 
 i'7r(6), are made like the following consonant : dvdverai = dvaSvsTai, 
 emerges; kcltt tteSiov := Kara. 7re9iov, on the plain; KaXXi7r£=zKaT8\i7re,left 
 dehind; irap9ETx>z=zTrapiQEro,put before; dTnrefi^pet^z aTroTrtfi^pei, will send 
 away; KardavCiv = KaraOavelv, die. 
 
 § 65. Dialects. — Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in 
 the Attic poets: e. g., ov^ = 6 l^, KwdvpsTai = Kal oSvpsTai, and laments; 
 S)va^ ■=■ u) ava^, Icing ; ^wttocoi = koL ottoooi, and how many. — Herod. 
 a>XXoi=oi aXKoL, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes 
 indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): firi yw r= /x^ tyw, ne ego; ijdii 
 'Upx^'rai = i]Sr) lUpx^T^^h ^^ ^ already coming out. 
 
24 SYNIZESIS. § 66, 
 
 whole, by the laws given for contraction (§ 36-39). It 
 occurs chiefly after forlns of the article, of the relative 
 pronoun (especially 6, quod, and a, quce), after the prep- 
 osition TTpo, for, hefore, Latin pro, and the conjunction 
 Kaiy and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily 
 long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (§ 16) : rayaOa, 
 bona, from ra ayaOa ; raXXa, from ra aXXa, the other things; 
 Tovvofia, the name, from ro ovofxa ; ravro, the same, for to 
 
 Obs. 1. — The rou<?li breatliinor of the article or relative maintains 
 its place in spite of crasis : dvr]p^ tlie inan^ irregular for 6 avryp, in 
 which case the coronis disappears ; in Oolfidnov, from to ifidnov, 
 the dress, the spiritus asper has changed r into Q (§ 52) ; so also 
 Odrepov, irregular for ro ezEpov, tlie other. 
 ■ 2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has i subscript only when i 
 is the last of the contracted vowels: kuI tv,and i/i, becomes kuv, 
 but Kui elra, and then, becomes k^tu. 
 On the accent with crasis, § 89. 
 
 § 66. 3. Synizesis (sinking, compare § 39) occurs at the 
 meeting of two words only after a long vowel, especially 
 after the conjunctions iwdy as, ?}, or, r\, num, iii],not, and 
 after f-yw, I : l-rrCi oh, as not ; fxrj^Woi, ne alii/ eyioyvy I 
 not. It is perceptible only in the poets, who reckon the 
 two syllables as one. 
 
 § 67. -No Greeh roord ends in any consonant except the 
 vocal ones, v, p, and q (^, ^). The only exceptions are : 
 the negative ouk (before consonants oxi) and the preposition 
 f/c, o\it (^Z* (before vowels e^), which attach themselves so 
 closely to the following word that their k can hardly be 
 looked upon as final. 
 
 When any other consonant, except these three, appears 
 at the end of a word, it is usually rejected : 
 
 ;.aXt, hmiey {mel), for ^.X.r (Gen. /.^er-oc) ) ^ ,^ § ^^^j^ 
 
 aS)fia,Oody, acjfiaf (Gen. au)fiar-og) ) 
 
 tjaav, they were, " i^aavT (compare Lat. erant). 
 
§ 68. MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 25 
 
 But mute Dentals in this case are often changed into 
 vocal g: 
 
 irpoQ for TTpor, from Trport, to (Horn.). 
 Uq " ^00, " SoQi, give. 
 Tspag " TEpar, Gen. Tspar-oQ, miracle. 
 
 § 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel 
 at the end, a movcbble v {y If^ikKvaTiKov). This v is used 
 before words which begin with a vowel — by which the 
 hiatus is avoided — and before longer pauses. Poets em- 
 ploy it also before consonants, especially at the end of the 
 word, to make it more sonorous. 
 
 The words and forms which have a movable v are the 
 following : 
 
 1. The Dat. Plur. in ai{y)\ nacnv t^wKa, I gave to all; 
 but nam ^oku. ovtixjq uvai, to all it seems to he so. 
 
 2. The designations of place in (n(y) : ^AOrjvrjcriv rjv, he 
 was at Athens; but 'AOrfvriai to^s tyiverOfthis happened 
 at Athens. 
 
 3. The single words iiKO(n{v), twenty; iripvmiy), last 
 year; and 7ravTa7rao-f(v), entirely; ukoglv av^pig, twenty 
 men ; but eiKom yvvaiKeg, twenty women. 
 
 4. The third person Sing, in i.{y) : ecrtomv avrovg, he 
 saved them; but co-wo-e rovg 'AOrjvaiovg, he saved the 
 Athenians. 
 
 5. The third person Plur. as well as Sing, in crt(v) : XI- 
 yovmv IV, they sjpeah well, but XiyovGi rouro, they say this; 
 ^uKvvmv iKeXdEf he points there, but ^siKvvaL tov av^pa, he 
 points out t%e man. 
 
 § 68. Dialects. — To the words which have a movable v there are 
 added in Homer the adverbs of place in Bi.{y) : dvf.v9i{v)^from afar; 
 '7rdpoi9e(v),from iefm'e, formerly ; the particles Ke{v), perhaps^ and vv(v), 
 now. 
 
 The New-Ionic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of 
 vowels, omits the movable v. On the k in ovk before a spiritus asper, 
 § 53, D. 
 
 B 
 
26 . DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. § 69. 
 
 § 69. Obs. 1. — In like manner, ov, not^ takes k only before vowels, 
 
 which becomes % before the spiritus .asper (§ 52) : ov ^rjm, Tie says 
 
 not; ovK. avTog, not he himself; ovx ovrojQ^ not so. The k appears 
 
 also in ovKkn and firjicen, no more. 
 3. Ik, out of, is t^ before vowels (Lat. ex) : tK Trjg ttoXewq, out of the 
 
 city; 1% cLKpoTToXeiog, out of the acropolis or castle; UXkyio,! speak 
 
 out; lUXeyov, I spoke out. 
 3. "Without any definite reason, the words ovnog, thus (adverb of 
 
 ovTog, this), dxpig, i^^xp^^i ^^^h ^^^1 frequently lose their final g ; but 
 
 TToXKaKig, many times, loses it only in the poets. 
 
 Chap. IV. — Division of Syllables and their 
 Quantity. 
 
 A. Division of Syllables. 
 
 § 70. The Syllables (<7uXXaj3?7, collectiori) in Greek words 
 are divided according to the following rules. Every vowel 
 which stands before another, but does not form a diph- 
 thong with itj or collapse with it by synizesis (§ 39), is 
 reckoned a separate syllable : l-arpog, physician, trisyl- 
 labic. 
 
 § 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels 
 belongs to the second syllable: t-^u, has ; ov-rog, this ; 
 i-Ka-v6gf capable. 
 
 Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol- 
 lowing vowel : a-TrXouc? simple ; a-pi-are-pog, on the left 
 hand; t-ay^ov , I had ; a-fiv6gylamb ; l-xdp6g, inimical ; 
 likewise double consonants : o--^o-fiai, I shall see ; t-X,iii, 
 I place. • 
 
 § 72. Exceptions, l. Liquids and nasals join the pre- 
 ceding vowel : ap-juaf carriage / aSf X-^oc? brother ; Kay- 
 XaZii), I laugh ; cV-^ov, within ; aii-(^ii), both., ambo. [iv 
 only join the following vowel : Ka-juvu), I suffer. 2. When 
 a consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding, 
 the second to the following syllable: \ir-"Kog, horse ; j5a\- 
 \(t), I throw / Yivp'pog. The same takes place when aspi- 
 
§ 76 QUANTITY. * 27 
 
 rates follow the corresponding tenues : 'AT-Oig, Baic-xoc, 
 
 § 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of 
 which they are formed: avv-ixMyl hold together j l^-aydj, 
 I drive out. 
 
 B. Quantity 
 
 § 74. With regard to the quantity (length or shortness) 
 of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the * 
 Greek as for the Latin. An important exception, how- 
 ever, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to 
 be short in Greek : ^wr), penance ; Xaoq, jpeople ; jSlXrt'ov, 
 better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final syllables 
 hold good in Greek. 
 
 § 75. A syllable is long hy nature when it contains 
 a long vowel or diphthong : hjiug, you ; K/orvw, / decide y 
 a^w, / sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is ren- 
 dered much easier by the characters ; do/mog, roo7n, house / 
 ^w/xa, house ; in other cases by tlffe accent (§§ 83, 84) ; 
 the rest can be learned only by practice and from the 
 lexicon. 
 
 Obs. — Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long : a/cwv, uvr 
 willing m dsfcwv, \p6Q ■=■ iepoc, Jwly. 
 
 § 76. A syllable is long hy position when a vowel is fol- 
 
 § 74. Dialects. — Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom short- 
 ened before vowels in the same word: Horn. oIoq (qualis'^^, and jSe- 
 fiXrjai, with short rj. 
 
 § 75. Dialects. — 1. The quantity of the common vowels is very un- 
 certain generally, but especially in Hom. 'tcj/xEv, let us go ; "Apsg, 'Ap^g, 
 Ares, Ares. 
 
 . 2. A final syllable ending in a long vowel or diphthong in Homer 
 and the tragic choruses is shortened before a following vowel : oIkoi 
 taav, they were at home ("""'); r)fikvri Iv, sitting in ('"""). Compare 
 § 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.) 
 leave a preceding vowel long in Hom. : KaXXet re an'X/3wv kuI el/namv 
 (""" ")? glittering with beauty and garments. 
 
28 * QUANTITY. § 77. 
 
 lowed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant, 
 whether — 
 
 a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in the 
 same word ; ya^iia^joy (" ") ; I^iq, mien (" ") ; Katxrw/j (" ") ; or 
 
 h) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin 
 the second : 0f 6c ^f , ^ut God C " ") ; Iv rovrb^, meanwhiU 
 (— ); or 
 
 c) both or the double consonant stand at the beginning 
 of the second word: ra Krj)juara, the goods (""''''); 6 Z^dvy 
 the living one (" "). 
 
 Obs. — When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature, this 
 must be indicated in the pronunciation: the a in irpdvaM^I act^ 
 sounds diflferently from that of raffcroj, I arrange, though both 
 words make a spondee in verse ; that in fidXXov different from 
 that of KotWog, leauty, though both form a trochee. 
 
 § 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a 
 mute with A, p, v, jx following, the syllable may be long or 
 short : riKvov, child (- '') ; rv(^\6gy Hind (- ^ ; ri ^pag, what 
 art thou doing (- ') ? 
 
 The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the follow- 
 ing cases : 
 
 § 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, 
 the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word ; 
 £K vYiCJVf out of the ships ( ) ; and in compounds in which 
 the mute belongs to the first element : kXlyw, / sjpeak out 
 
 h) when a soft mute (j3, 7, ^) is followed by X, ju, or v\ 
 /3t/3Xoc, look (■ ") ; Tajfia, task (■ '') ; ix'^^^y snake (^'^\ 
 
 § 77. Dialects. — In Homer, a mute with \, p, v, [i following, almost 
 regularly makes position : t'ikvov tI KXaisic, child, why tceepest thou 
 ( ) ? 'vTTvoQ TravdafidTiop, all-svibduing sleep ( ). Nay, even 
 
 X, p, V, fi, at the beginning of words, have often the power of length- 
 ening the short final vowel of the preceding word : Ka\r]v re fityaXrjv 
 re, a leautiful and great ( - - - -)^ ^ in the Stem hi {hlaai),fear^ 
 and in ^r]v, long, has the same effect. 
 
§83. ACCENTS, 29 
 
 Chap. Y. — Accents. -• 
 
 § 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words 
 are the following : 
 
 1. Every word onust have 07ie, and can never have more 
 than g7ie principal accent, which is called simply the ac- 
 cent : TroXvTT pay luocrvvt), husy occupation / airaparjKivaaTog, 
 unj>repared. On the designation of words according to 
 the accent, see §§ 17, 19, 21. 
 
 * § 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac- 
 cent or the ctciote (o^eta), and the lengthened or the cir- 
 cumflex {7r£pi(nrwij.ivri), On the mode of using both, see 
 §§ 17, 21. 
 
 § 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables, 
 the circumflex only upon such syllables as are long hy 
 nature: ^?>,\iywylsay; \i]yijj,I cease ; Ka\6q,heautiful j 
 a\r\QnQ,true ; avOpwirog, man/ Ktifxevog, lying / KtLTat,he 
 lies; (Tbjfiafhody; ev,welL 
 
 § 82. 4, The acute accent can be only on one of the last 
 three syllables, and on the last but two only when the last 
 is short : clttolkoq^ colonist,h\it not airoiKov (Gen.); tXeyov^ 
 I said, but not tXcyrjv, I was said, 
 
 § 83.» 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last 
 two syllables, and on the last but one only when the last 
 is short by nature: avKov,flg,h\xt not gvkov (Gen.); awfia^ 
 'body, but not atofiaTog (Gen.) ; irpa^ig, act, but not irpa^u^ 
 (Norn. Plur.). 
 
 Obs. 1. — When the last syllable is long by position, it does not 
 hinder the circumflex from being on the last syllable but one : 
 avXdK, furrow, Gen, avXdicog, but it does when it is long by na- 
 ture as well as by position : 9Mpd^, h^east-plate, Gen. Qwpdicog. Com- 
 pare § 145. 
 
 2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap- 
 ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of 
 
30 ACCENTS. § 84. 
 
 the exceptions occur with the final syllables in at and oi : ajroiKoij 
 although 01 is long ; yvtofiai, opinions ; TvnT^Tai^ he is struck. Com- 
 pare §§ 108, 132 D. 3, 133, 157, 229, 268. 
 
 § 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, 
 can have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is 
 short by nature: (^>^vye,flee,i\oi (pevye; rtpxov, I reigned, 
 not i]pxov ; ^Xt ?, of the same age, not riXi^ (Ge«. r'lXiKog) ; 
 KparXvog, not Kparivog. It may, however, be without an 
 accent : elire, speak / avOpomog, 7nan. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Apparent exceptions, such as wore, so that, iy^e, this, are ex- 
 jilained in § 94. • 
 
 2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of 
 the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred 
 from the accent: Wi (t), ffo ; Trpwra [ prima, 'Nom.FluT.] (a); yv- 
 vaiKUQ (a), women, Ace. Plur. ; yvwixag (a), opinions, Ace. Plur. 
 
 § 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last 
 part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to 
 § 82, etc. : airiOi, go away ; a(ln\oq, friendless ; (juXoywog, 
 friendly to women / aTroSoc, gi've hack / iraptvOec, put in 
 hesides. (Compare § 359, Ohs. 2.) 
 
 § 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the 
 changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the con- 
 nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is : 
 
 1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed 
 by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the 
 acute. (Compare § 20.) 
 
 § 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the 
 syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if 
 none of the syllables to be contracted had it : jLveog, ye- 
 vovg, of the race ; rifiak, Tina, honor. The accent of a con- 
 tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the 
 general rules on accent; hence rifiCiVT^gy honoring (Nom. 
 Plur.), from Tiij,aovTeg,TiiuiwvT(i)v (Gen. Plur.), from Ti/maov- 
 rwv (according to §§ 83 and 84). A contracted final syl- 
 lable has 
 
§ 91. ACCENTS. 31 
 
 d) the circumflex, when the first of the imcontracted 
 syllables was accented : rifxaei, rijuia, lie honors / \pv(yiovy 
 Xpvaov, of golden ; • 
 
 V) the acute, when the last was accented ; laTawq, iaruyq, 
 standing. 
 
 § 88. 3. With elision (§ 64), oxytone prepositions and 
 conjunctions entirely lose their accent ; all other kinds of 
 words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes : W 
 avTt[}, on /mn = eTr\ avrc^ ; ouS' l^vvafn]v , I could not even=z 
 ov^e b^vvdiurjv; u^i '0^v(Tavg,Iam Odysseus — uixi 'OSuctevc; 
 t-KT riaav, there were seven — iina y]<jav. 
 
 § 89. 4. With crasis (§ Q6) the accent of the first word 
 is lost: Taya9a,hona=Ta ayaOa ; Ooljuariovythe dress = to 
 ifxariov. Only when paroxytones change the first sylla- 
 ble by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a cir- 
 cumflex : TO. aXXa, alia, gives raXXa ; to tpyov, the work, 
 Tovpyov. 
 
 On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; on the 
 accent of verbs, see §§ 239, and 331-333.. 
 
 § 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception 
 of a^0t, avTi, ava, ^la, when placed after the noun or verb 
 to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first 
 syllable : tovtwv nipt, about those {irhpX tovtiov) ; in like 
 manner, when used adverbially, they include the substan- 
 tive verb, as Trapa = 7rape(TTi, it is there, near; lEvi = tv£(7Ti, 
 it is therein, is possible. This drawing back of the accent 
 is called anastrophe. Compare § 446. 
 
 § 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so 
 closely with the preceding word that they throw their ac- 
 cent on to it. Such words are called enclitics {eyKXiTiKoi 
 
 § 90. Dialects. — Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision, 
 have not the accent even when they occupy the position indicated 
 in § 90. Homeric ryai Trap elvdereg x^XKevov, among them I forged niiie 
 years long. 
 
32 ENCLITICS. § 92. • 
 
 Xi^aiQf i, e.^ inclihing words), and the throioing hack of the 
 accent is called inclination, 
 
 § 92. The following are enclitics : 
 
 1. The indefinite pronoun riq, ti, some one, something, 
 through all forms (§ 214). 
 
 2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms fxov, juoi, 
 fie, mei, mihi, me/ (xoVf aoi, ctI, tui, tihi, te ; ou, oT, f, sui, 
 sihi, se ; a(^hiiv, to them two ; and a^iaii^^, to them, 
 
 3. The ■ Indicative Present of uixi, I am, and of <^r\iii, 
 inquam, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing, d 
 and (^7jg, 
 
 4. The indefinite adverbs ttov or iroQi, somewhere ; tti], 
 somehow; noi, somewhither; irodiv, from somewhere'; 
 -K or k, sometime ; Truyq, somehow ; TrM,yet. 
 
 5. The particles yi, quidem ; ri, and; roi, truly ; vvv 
 or vi), now ; Hom. kLv or K.iyjperhaps,I suj>j)Ose ; pa (apa), 
 then; Hom. dr)v, truly; irep,very; and Se (meaning to- 
 ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212. 
 
 § 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre- 
 ceding word, in the following manner : 
 
 a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued 
 (§ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic : a'^a^ov 
 Ti, something good ; avrog (prjcriv, he himself says. 
 
 h) After Siperispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely 
 lost : opw Tivag, I see some ; vo lariv, it is well ; ti/uw <t£, 
 I honor thee, 
 
 c) After a jparoxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely 
 lose their accent ; but those of two syllables retain their 
 accent on the last syllable: ^tXoc p.ov, my friend ; Xoyoc 
 Tiq, a speech ; but Aoyot nviq, some speeches, Xoywv rtvwv 
 (Gen. Plur.). 
 
 § 92. Dialects. — The Ionic additional form of eZ = ele, is enclitic, so 
 also (jf^'iaq (Ace. Plur.), them^=^K\X. (T<pdg, and fiiv,Mm, Tier, § 205, D. 
 
97. ENCLiT<iUHIVEESr m 
 
 c 
 
 d) Prqparoxytones and jprope^^^omes retain their ac- 
 cent, but receive also from the following enclitic another 
 accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsub- 
 dued : avOpwTTog rig, a man ; ^i^aioi elcriv, they are firm ; 
 Gwiia yt, the hody at least ; iraX^ig rivecy some hoys. 
 
 e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as acutes : 
 ov (prjmv, he says not ; ojq re, and how. 
 
 § 94. Ohs. — Several words of one syllable form orie word with en- 
 clitics following : thus, wgre, so that ; elre, sive ; ovte, neque ; firfTe, 
 neque ; oIoqte, capable ; oqtiq, whoever ; yroi, truly; Kairoi, and yet ; 
 to this also belongs the ^s mentioned in § 92, 5 : oSe, this one ; 
 ohaSe, homewards. These words form partly apparent exceptions 
 to §§ 79 and 84. 
 
 § 95. f) When several enclitics follow one another, each 
 throws its accent upon the preceding : a rig /mot (priai Trort, 
 if any one ever says to me. 
 
 § 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent 
 (become orthot07ied), viz. : 
 
 1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen- 
 tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its 
 accent : nvlg \iyovai, some say. This position, however, 
 is rare. 
 
 2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: al \iyii),1 7nean 
 you — no one else ^ u tanvyifit is really so. When tort 
 denotes exist, he allowed, jpossihle, it retains the accent, 
 and that, too, on the last syllable but one : cort 0foc? there 
 is a God ; ouk ianv, it is not allowed, not jpossihle. Com- 
 pare § 315, Ohs. 2. 
 
 3. After elision: ravr Icrri xpev^ri, this is false=Tavra 
 
 4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned 
 
 § 93, c. 
 
 § 97. Atona, i. e., words without accent, also csilled pro- 
 clitics, or inclining forward, are several words of one syl- 
 
 B 2 
 
34 ATONA. ^ § 98. 
 
 lable, which have so little independence that, in regard to 
 accent, they combine with the following word. 
 They are the following : 
 
 1. of the article, the forms 6, ??, o\, m ; 
 
 2. the prepositions, Iv {in^ with the Dat.), Iq or ^iq {into, 
 with the Ace), Ik or a^, out of; 
 
 3. the conjunctions, d, if and wg, how, that ; the latter 
 also in its use as preposition to y 
 
 4. the negative ov or ouk (oi>\). 
 Obs.-^ovxi-, a more emphatic oy, is always accented. 
 
 § 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. : 
 a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and ^Jierefore 
 
 have no following word on which they can rest : <^?7c ») ov ; 
 
 do you say so or not f so always wc when placed after the 
 
 word with which a comparison is made: ^eoc wg,liJce a 
 
 god, Horn. ; 
 
 h) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its 
 accent : ov (firjcn, he says not. Compare § 93, c, 
 
 § 99. The following particles are distinguished accord- 
 ing to the accent : »i, tha7i, or, and ^, truly, or interroga- 
 tive, Lat. num / apa, then, consequently, and apa as an in- 
 terrogative ; vvVf now, and enclitic vv{v), now, particle of 
 transition ; ojg, how, and log, so / ovkovv, therefore, and 
 ouKouv, not therefore. 
 
§ 100. DECLENSION. 35 
 
 II. IISTFLEXIOK 
 
 A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 
 
 Chap. YI. — Declension of Substantives and 
 Adjectives. 
 
 § 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns, 
 and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence. 
 
 A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem 
 and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination 
 the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in- 
 dicate the different relations. 
 
 The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen- 
 sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified 
 according to Cases, the terminations added to them are 
 called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case- 
 ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form. 
 Thus TTpayiiaT-oQ is a case-form of the Stem rrpayfiar, 
 formed by means of the case-ending -oc. 
 
 Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and 
 the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case- 
 form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom- 
 inative of the Stem irpayfiar is irpayfxa, thing. Aoyoc, 
 speech, is the Nominative of the Stem X070, which appears, 
 for example, in the compound word \oyoypd(l)o-g, a loriter 
 of speeches.* 
 
 The Greeks distinguish in the Declension : 
 
 1. Three Numhers : the Singular for one, the Dual for 
 two, the Plural for several; 
 
 2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa- 
 tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for 
 the Nom., Ace, and Yoc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
 In the Plur., the Yoc. is always like the Nom. 
 
 3. Three Genders : Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. 
 
 * The Stem will always be left unaccented. 
 
36 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 101. 
 
 § 101. The gender is known : 
 
 1. From certain general characteristics of sex, in which 
 the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the 
 Latin. Besides the rule founded in the nature of things, 
 that the designations of male persons are masculine, those 
 of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed : 
 
 § 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of rivers 
 and winds), and Tnonths (6 ixi]v, the month), are masculine : 
 6 Evpwrag, the River Eurotas j 6 Zf^ujooc, the west wind j 
 6 'E/caro^jSatwv, the month Ilecatombceon. 
 
 § 103. h) The names of t7'ees, lands (17 yf/, the land), 
 islands {y\ vfjo-oc, the islaTid), and most cities^ are femi- 
 nine : 7} ^pvg,the oak; i] ' ApKalia, Arcadia ; 17 AeVjSoc, 
 the island of Leshos / /? KoXo^wv, the city of Coloj)hon. 
 Most abstract substantives also, i. e.^ those which denote a 
 condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine : 17 iXirig, 
 hope / 17 viKti, mctory ; 17 BiKaiocrvvr^f righteousness ; 17 
 rax^rrjc, quickness. 
 
 § 104. c) Many names o^ fruits are neuter : to ctvkov, the 
 fig ; most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine 
 words : ro yepovriov, dimin. of 6 yeptov, the old man / ro 
 yvvaiov, dimin. of r) yvvi), l^^ vsoman. Farther, every name 
 and word which is adduced merely as a word : to avOpMirog, 
 the name '' man f'' to ^iKaiocrvvt}, the idea of righteous- 
 ness f'' and the names of the letters, to aXcpa, to my pa. 
 
 § 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is 
 known according to §§ 113, 125, 137-140. 
 
 3. In Declension, the Neuter may be distinguished from 
 the Masculine and Feminine, Jbr all Neuters have 
 
 a) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom. 
 
 h) no g as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. 
 
 c) the ending a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. PI. 
 
 § 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs 
 the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the 
 following : 
 
109. 
 
 ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 TO 
 
 the. 
 
 Qen. 
 
 TOV 
 
 Trig 
 
 TOV 
 
 of the. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Ti^ 
 
 ■^y 
 
 T(^ 
 
 to the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 TOV 
 
 Trjv 
 
 TO 
 
 the. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A. 
 
 TOJ 
 
 TO. or Thi 
 
 TU) 
 
 the. 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Tolv 
 
 TCLIV or TOlv 
 
 TOXV 
 
 of or to the. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 01 
 
 ai ■ ^^ TOi 
 
 the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 tG)V 
 
 TUIV 
 
 tCjv 
 
 of the. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 toIq 
 
 Toig 
 
 TO~ig 
 
 to the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 TOVQ 
 
 Tag 
 
 TO. 
 
 the. 
 
 The following general rules on accentuation apply to all 
 the declensions of substantives. 
 
 § 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable 
 on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen- 
 eral laws of accent allow : avOptoTroQ, man, avOpwire (Yoc.) ; 
 avKoVfJig, (TVKa (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142, 
 181,2. 
 
 h) But when the original accentuation becomes impos- 
 sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at 
 the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the 
 word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces- 
 sary : avdpisJTToq, onan, avQpwirov (Gen. Sing.), avOpcjiroig 
 (Dat. Plur.) ; (rCojuaf hody, awfiaTog (Gen. Sing.), cTMjuaTCJv 
 (Gen. Plur.) ; tcTxoc, wall, rsixovg (Gen. Sing.). 
 
 § 108. c) The terminations oi and at are not considered 
 long in regard to accent ; hence avOpwirot, yvtojuai (yvw^r?, 
 opinion). 
 
 ^§ 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers, 
 if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon 
 this syllable, but only the circumflex : iroTafiov, Gen. Sing. 
 
38 THE A DECLENSION. § 110. 
 
 of 7roTafi6t;,rive7' ; TijuyjDsit. Sing, of n/xtj, honor ; ttoSwv, 
 Gen. Plur. of TTovg,foot ; iiy\voiv. Gen. Dual of p/v^ month, 
 
 § 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for 
 which reason much has still remained common, which we 
 shall put together below, § 173. But we distinguish Two 
 Princvpal Declensions according to the ending of the 
 Stems : 
 
 1. the Fi7'st Principal Declension {vowel declension), 
 which comprehends the Stems ending in a and o ; and 
 
 2. the Second Principal Declension {consonant declen- 
 sion), which compreh^^s the Stems ending in consonants, 
 but also those in the soft ^wels i, v, in diphthongs, and a 
 small number of Stems in o. 
 
 First Principal Declension. 
 
 ( Vowel-declension,) 
 
 § 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into 
 two, viz. : 
 
 A. The A Declension, 
 
 B. The O Declension. 
 
 What is common to both is put together below, § 134. 
 
 A. The A Declension 
 
 {commonly called the First Declension). 
 
 § 112. The A Declension comprehends those words 
 whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a 
 becomes r]. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks cor- 
 responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth. De- 
 clension of the Latin lang-uaffe. 
 
 § 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and 
 Feminines. The two genders are most easily distinguishil 
 in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take g, the 
 feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of 
 
115. 
 
 THE A DECLENSION. 
 
 39 
 
 the Nom. Sing, are in the feminine a, rj, in the masculine 
 § 114. 1. Feminines. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 X<^pa, Icind. 
 
 y\a)(T(Ta, tongue. 
 
 TifXT]^ honor. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 XOipa [terra] 
 
 yX(o<T<ra 
 
 tI ft a 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Nmn. 
 
 xwjoa [terra] 
 
 y\u)(j(Ta 
 
 Tifiy) 
 
 Gm. 
 
 XWpUQ 
 
 y\u}a<rr]Q 
 
 Tifirjg 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Xd>pq. [terras] 
 
 yXwacry 
 
 Tifiy [re-i] 
 
 Ace. 
 
 X(opd-v [terra-m] 
 
 yXaiaad-v 
 
 Tifiri-v [re-m] 
 
 Voc. 
 
 XU)pd [terra] 
 
 yXaxrad 
 
 Tifir) 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 X(opa 
 
 yXwaffd 
 
 Tina 
 
 G.D. 
 
 X(opaiv 
 
 y\b}U<jaiv 
 
 TijxaXv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nam. 
 
 Xiopai [ten'se] 
 
 yXwaaai 
 
 Tifiai 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Xwpwv 
 
 yXuxTcriov 
 
 TlfiU>if%'' 
 
 Dat. 
 
 X<^paiQ 
 
 yXaxraaiQ 
 
 Tifidig 
 
 Ace. 
 
 X^pdg [terras] 
 
 yXwaadg 
 
 Tifiag 
 
 Voc. 
 
 XoJpai [terrse] 
 
 yXwcraai 
 
 Tifiat 
 
 Examples for Declensicn. 
 
 Bed, goddess. SS^a, ojnnion. yij, earth. 
 
 (TKid, shadow. TTvXr], gate. yvojfir], opinion. 
 
 (3ia,jorce. 
 
 § 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the 
 Dual and Plural, a becomes rj. Hence the following rules : 
 
 1. In order to form the Nom. Sing, from the Stem, or 
 from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural : 
 
 §§ llC-117. Dialects. — 1. The Doric dialect nsi'cr changes a into tj: 
 Tifid, Tifxag ; yXuJacra, yX^aadg. 
 
 3. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into t] : 
 (TO017;, TTSTprj, jSamXdrjg, fxoipy. Short a is generally unchanged, as ^aai- 
 Xeid, fioXpdv : but in abstract substantives in -eid, -oid, a is likewise 
 changed into rj : dXi]9eiT], truth, Att. dXi^Oua ; EVTrXoir], good passage; and 
 also in Kvharj, steam from fat, SkvXX?/. The d remains in Oed and some 
 j)roper names. 
 
 3. The Voc. of vvfuprj, young woman, is in Homer vvficpa. 
 
40 THE A DECLENSION-. § 116. 
 
 cb) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after £, i, or jo (§ 41) : 
 St. ao(^ia, Nom. Sing, crotpia, wisdom ; Dat. Plur. iriTpaig, 
 Nom. Sing, irirpa, rock. 
 
 h) a remains in the Nom. Sing, after o-, and after the 
 double consonants X,, S, ^, a a (or r r), XX, as well as in the 
 feminine designations in -aiva\ St. a ju a ^ a, Nom. Sing. 
 cLfia^a, carriage; Gen. Plur. Xtaivoiv, Nom. Sing. Xiaiva, 
 lioness. 
 
 c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally 
 changed into ri in the Nom. Sing. : St. j3oa, Nom. Sing. 
 j3o//, cry ; Ace. Plur. yvwfxag, Nom. Sing, yvw^ij (opinion). 
 
 More important exceptions are: to a) kto/ot;, girl; Kopprj, temple; 
 ^eipr], neck — to V) tparj, dew — to c) arod, hall; xp^^i color ; TuXfia, 
 'boldness ; Siaira, mode of life. 
 
 § 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu- 
 lar according to a given Nom. Sing. : 
 
 a) If the Nom. Sing, ends in rj, this letter remains 
 throughout the Sing. : ^iktj, justice, ciKr}g, ^iKy, ^iK-qv, ^ikt], 
 
 h) If the Nom. Sing, ends in a, this letter remains always 
 in the Ace. and Yoc. : a/uLa^a, a/uLa^av. 
 
 c) If the Nom. Sing, ends in o, this letter remains also in 
 the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or /> (§ 41) : 
 Nom. Sing. (T0<^m, wisdom, Gen. ao^iag ; Nom. Sing, aroa, 
 colonnade, Dat. oro^t : also in some proper names with long 
 a : Nom. Sing. Ar)Sa, Gen. Aii^ac ; and in jxva (contracted 
 from fivaa), Gen. fivag, 
 
 d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing, becomes t) in Gen. and 
 Dat. : Nom. Sing, fiovcra. Gen. juovcrrig ; Nom. Sing. ^laLTa, 
 Dat. diaiTT}. 
 
 § 117. For thequantity of a in the Nom. and Ace. Sing., 
 the general rule is : apurum (after vowels) and a after p is 
 long, every other a is short : Oed, goddess / afxiXkayfight. 
 
 The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2). 
 The most important are the fern, designations in -rpia and -ua : 
 \paXTpta, female player ; (SaaiXeia, queen (but j3am\Eid, dominion) ; 
 and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, 
 as <T<paipa, ball; evvoia, good will; /loXpa, fate. 
 
§120. 
 
 THE A DECLENSION. 
 
 41 
 
 § 118. The Gen. Plur. has the ending mv, which com- 
 bines with the Stem a to form awv, contr. wv. This is the 
 reason that the Gen. Plur. of ' all words in this declension 
 has the circwnjlex : x^P^f X^P^^ j Xiaiva, XeatvCjv (Excep- 
 tions, § 181. Compare § 123). 
 
 § 119. The Dat. Plur. originally ended in cr i, before 
 which I is added to the a of the Stem. The aiai thus 
 formed is usually shortened into a i g, but the original form 
 is found even in Attic writers in poetry and prose. (Com- 
 pare § 128, D.) 
 
 § 120. 2. Masculines. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 vedvidg, youth. 
 
 TToXiTijc, citizen. 
 
 'Epfirjg, god Hermes. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 vedvta 
 
 TT oXIt a 
 
 'Ep fiT] (from ' EjO/iea) 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 vedvid-g 
 
 TToXlTTJ-g 
 
 'Epfiij-g 
 
 Gen. 
 
 vedviov 
 
 TToXlTOV * 
 
 'EpfJiov 
 
 Dat. 
 
 vmviq. 
 
 TToXlTy 
 
 'Epfiy 
 
 Ace. 
 
 veavia-v 
 
 TToXlTIJ-V 
 
 'Epfirj-v 
 
 Voc. 
 
 vedvid 
 
 TToXlTa 
 
 'EpM 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 J^.A.V. 
 
 vedvid 
 
 TToXlTd 
 
 'Epfid, statues of 
 Hermes. 
 
 O.D. 
 
 redviaiv 
 
 TToXiTaiv 
 
 'Epfxaiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 JVom. 
 
 vedviai 
 
 TToXTrai 
 
 'Epfxal 
 
 Gen. 
 
 vEdvidv 
 
 TToXlruiv 
 
 'Epfxaiv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 veaviaiQ 
 
 TToXiraig 
 
 'Epfidig 
 
 Ace. 
 
 vedvidg 
 
 TToXirdg 
 
 'Epfidg 
 
 Voc. 
 
 VEaviai 
 
 TToXXrai 
 
 'Epfidl 
 
 § 118. Dialects. — 4. The -aujv of the Gen. Plur. is preserved in the 
 Horn, dialect : KXimdiov (/cXter/a, tent), dyopdojv (dyopd, speech) ; but -siov 
 also occurs, in which case e is generally lost by synizesis (§ 39) : ttu- 
 aeiov, of all, fern. 
 
 The Dorians contract -aiov into dv (§ 37, D. 3) : Oedv, dearmn. 
 
 § 119. Dialects. — 5. The Dat. Plur. in Ionic ends in -y(Ti(v), -yg (but 
 also in the Attic -aig) : KXi(ny<n, Trkrpyg. 
 
42 THE A DECLENSION. § 121. 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 rafiiag, treasurer. (TTpaTKOTije, warrior. dSoXhxvQ, idbbler. 
 
 Nifc/ac, Nicias. iraiSoTpi^riQ^ wrestling- ' AXKi^iddrjQ. 
 
 'Kpirrie, judge. master. 
 
 § 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines, 
 when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains 
 and is long; after every other letter it becomes r) in the 
 Nom. Dat. and Ace. Sing. 
 
 Those words which in the Nom. Sing, end in rri-g, 
 names of peoples, and compound words, have a short in the 
 Voc. Sing. : TroXTra, Ilipaa (Nom. Sing, llipar]-^, Persian) ; 
 y^wnirpa (Nom. Sing. ye(i)iuiTpr}-g, land-measxiver). The 
 Voc. Eiairora (Nom. Sing. ^eaTroTrj-g, lord) draws back the 
 accent, contrary to § 107, a, to the first syllable. All oth- 
 ers have t) in the Vocative : Kpovidrj (Nom. Sing. Kpo- 
 viSrj-g). 
 
 § 122. The Declension of the Masculines is distinguished 
 from that of the Feminines : 
 
 1. in the Nom. Sing, by g being added to the Stem ; 
 
 2. by the Gen. Sing, ending in o u. 
 
 Ohs. — The termination of the Gen. Sing, of the masculines is prop- 
 erly -0, which, with the a of the Stem, foims -ao (see the Homeric 
 dialect); by weakening a to e (§ 118, D.) and contraction (§ 37) 
 arises ov : TroXirdo (ttoXitso), ttoXitov. 
 
 §§ 121 and 122. Dialects. — 1. The Epic dialect in some words omits 
 the Q of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the a remains short: 'nnroTd, 
 horseman; vetpeXijyepsTdjClovd-gathei'er. (Comi^are Lai. poeta, scriba.) 
 
 2. The Dorians also in the masculines put d for i], and contract a o 
 into d. (§§ 34, D. ; 37, D. 3.) 
 
 3. Homer has three forms in the Gen. Sing. : 
 a) the original -do : 'Arpeiddo ; 
 
 5) -eo) with the quantity transposed (where e is lost by synizesis, 
 §§ 37, D., 39, D.) : 'ArpdSeoj. The accent remains unchanged, in spite 
 of the w in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same. 
 
 c) -u) by contraction : 'Epfielio (N"om. Sing. 'Epfieid-g = Attic 'Epfirjg), 
 ^opiu) (Nom. Sing, ^opkdg). Compare § 37, a. 
 
§ 125. THE O DECLENSION. 43 
 
 ^oppcLQ (contracted from f3opm-g, north wiruT), contracts the original 
 a o in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into d : j3oppd. The 
 same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names, 
 and a few other words: 'EvXXag, Sulla ; 6pvi9o9rjpa£j fowler, Gen. 
 Sing. a. 
 
 § 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the 
 Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines. 
 
 Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in § 118 are xpv<^tv-Q, 
 usurer; tTrjmai, trade-winds, Gen. Plur. xpn<yT(t)v (xprjcrTuiv in the O 
 declension, fi-om XjO?](Tr6e, good) and irrjmiop. 
 
 B. The O Declension 
 
 {commonly called the Second Declension). 
 
 « 
 
 § 124. The O Declension comprehends those words 
 whose Stems etid in o, together with a few whose Stems 
 end in w (§ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declen- 
 sion in Latin. 
 
 § 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A 
 Declension in regard to gender. It contains Masculines 
 and Neuters., but only few Feminines. 
 
 The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the 
 Nom. Sing, is o-q, that of Neut'ers o-v [Lat. u-s^ u-mP\, 
 
 The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike ; the 
 Neuters are distinguished from them (compare § 105) only 
 
 by- . '. . 
 
 1. The Nom. and Yoc. Sing, taking the Accusative end- 
 ing V : Sw/oo-v (gift) \_donu-in\, 
 
 2. The Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Plur. ending in a : '^dpa 
 
 [dona']. 
 
44 
 
 THE O DECLENSION. 
 
 §126. 
 
 
 §126 
 
 • 
 
 
 Examples. 
 
 6 av9po)7ro-g, man 
 
 ri 6d6-g, way. 
 
 TO diopo-v, gift. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 dv9 pOJTTO 
 
 6do 
 
 S Ui p 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Mm. 
 
 dvdpojTTo-Q [dominu-s] 
 
 oSo-g 
 
 dwpo-v [donu-m] 
 
 Gen. 
 
 dv9p(t)7rov 
 
 odov 
 
 diijpov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 dv9pu)7rq) [domino] 
 
 6 dip 
 
 diop(ii [dono] 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dv9pu)7ro-v [dominu-m] 
 
 6d6-v 
 
 Saipo-v [donu-m] 
 
 Voe. 
 
 dv9p(t)Tre [domine] 
 
 ode 
 
 dwpo-v [donum-] 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 dv9pu)7rb) 
 
 odo) 
 
 Swpoj 
 
 G.J). 
 
 dv9pwTroiv 
 
 odoXv 
 
 dilJpoiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Worn. 
 
 dv9poj7roi [domini] 
 
 odoi 
 
 Sdpa [dona] 
 
 Gen. 
 
 dv9p(o'!ro)v 
 
 ddu)V 
 
 ddjpojv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 dv9p(b7roiQ 
 
 oColg 
 
 dwpoig 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dv9pw7rovg [dOTTlino-s] 
 
 bdovg 
 
 duipa [dona] 
 
 Voe. 
 
 dv9pu)7roi [domini] 
 
 odoi 
 
 dwpa [dona] 
 
 6e6g, God. 
 vofiog, law. 
 Kivdvvog, danger, 
 ravpog^ Imll. 
 
 Esamples for Declension. 
 TTOTuiiog, river. 
 TTovog^ trovMe. 
 fiiog, life. 
 9dvarog, death. 
 
 (TVKOV, Jig. 
 fiBTpov, measure. 
 ifiaTiov, dress. 
 
 § 127. Ods. — The Feminines are partly known by the general rules 
 already given (§§ 101, 103) : rj (prjyog, esculent oaJc; rj dfiTreXog, vine; 
 , rj vijaog, island ; t} -qTreipog, continent ; K6piv9og. 
 The following also are feminine : 
 
 1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ^d^^og, sand ; 
 Koirpog, dung; iv-^og^ chaTk ; 7r\iv9og, hrick ; (nrocog, ashes; 4^)}(pog, 
 pebble ; jSdaavog, touch-stone. 
 
 2. Different words for way: oS6g, KeXEv9og, drpairog, path ; dfia^irog, 
 carriage-road. In the same manner, r) Td(ppog, dike, but 6 orerwTrof, 
 narrow way. 
 
 3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity: xv^og, chest of draicers; 
 yvd9og, jaw ; KifiioTog, chest ; <Top6g, coffin ; \r}v6g, wine-vat ; Kupdo- 
 
 ^ TTog, hneading-trough ; Kdjxlvog, oven. 
 
 4. Several adjectives used as substantives : rj didfxerpog (supply 
 ypa/^HT], line), diameter; avyKXrjTog (supply fiovKi], council), meeting 
 of the council. 
 
§ 130. THE O DECLENSION. 45 
 
 5. Single words: /3t/3\oe, hook; pd(3dog, staff; StdXeKTog, dialect; 
 v6(Tog, disease ; dp6(Tog, dew ; doKog, 'beam. Many designations of 
 personal beings are common^ that is, with the same form they 
 are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they 
 denote a female: 6 066^, god ; ^ 0£6e, goddess; 6 avOpiorrog and i) 
 dv9p<jJ7rog. ^ 
 
 § 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing, is -o, which, with 
 the o of the Stem, is contracted into ov (compare § 122) : 
 avBp(i)iro-o = avOpwirov. 
 
 § 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used instead 
 of the Vocative form : the Vocative of Oeog is always the 
 same as the Nom. : w Oeog [Lat. deus] : a^e\(l)6g, brother, 
 has aScX^t in the Vocative with the accent thrown back. 
 
 Contracted Declension. 
 
 § 130. Several words which have £ or o before the last 
 letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with the o. 
 The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied : fa, however, 
 contrary to § 38, is contracted into a. 
 
 § 128. Dialects. — The Epic dialect in the Gen. Sing, has the older 
 form 1 for the ending ; i o with o of the St. produces oio : dvOpcjTroio, 
 TTiSioLo {m^io-v) afield. We also, however, find the Attic ov. 
 
 Other Epic peculiarities are : -oav = oiv in the Gen. and Dat. Dual : 
 wfiouv ((hfiog, shoulder) : — oiai(v) = oig in the Dat. Plur. : dv9pu)7roi(n{v), 
 which is also New-Ionic, and is found even in Attic writers (compare 
 « 119). 
 
 § 130. DinRts. — The Ionic dialect leaves the forms uncontracted. 
 
46 
 
 CONTRACTED O DECLENSION. 
 
 131. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 6 vov-g, sense 
 
 
 TO 6<jTovv^ hone. 
 
 
 Stems. 
 
 V 00 
 
 
 6 <TTe 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nam. 
 
 v6o-Q 
 
 VOVQ 
 
 6<tHo-v 
 
 OGTOV-V 
 
 Gen. n^ 
 
 voov 
 
 VOV 
 
 offTeov 
 
 6<TT0V 
 
 Bat. 
 
 VOl^ 
 
 Vi^ 
 
 ocrrsqt 
 
 btJTif 
 
 Ace. 
 
 v6o-v 
 
 vov-v 
 
 0(TTeO-V 
 
 0<JTOV-V 
 
 Voc. 
 
 voe 
 
 VOX) 
 
 oarko-v 
 
 6(TT0V-V 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 v6<o 
 
 vw 
 
 OffHlO 
 
 6(TTb) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 VOOLV 
 
 volv 
 
 ocrrkoiv 
 
 6(TT0Xv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 VOOl 
 
 vol 
 
 oarka 
 
 OCTTO. 
 
 Om. 
 
 v6(t)v 
 
 vG)V 
 
 6(TTe(OV 
 
 6(TTU)V 
 
 Bat. 
 
 vooig 
 
 vdiQ 
 
 offTtoig 
 
 ocrrolg 
 
 Ace. 
 
 VOOVQ 
 
 VOVQ 
 
 6(TTea 
 
 dtTTO. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 VOOL 
 
 vol 
 
 oarsa 
 
 oara 
 
 ttXouc, voyage. 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 povQ^ stream. ddeX^idovQy 'brother's son. 
 
 § 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in the 
 contraction, viz. : 
 
 1. the Nom. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to § 87. • 
 
 2. compound words leave the accent on the last syllable 
 but one, also contrary to § 87 : TrcjOtVXtf), Dat. of irepiirXovg, 
 circumiiavigation, for ir^pnrXiJ^, from -ow. 
 
 3. the word Kavwv, hasJcet, is contracted into gkvouv, con- 
 trary to § 87. 
 
 On contracted adjectives, see § 183. 
 
 Attic Declension. 
 
 § 132. A small number of words, instead of the short 
 0-sound (o), have the long (w). This w at the end of the 
 
 §* 131. Dialects. — A Gen. ending -o appears in Homer in Ilerew-o, 
 Gen. Sing, from the Nominative n€r£w-c. 
 
134. 
 
 ATTIC O DECLENSION. 
 
 47 
 
 Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes 
 the case-endings as far as possible. Most ^f these words 
 have £ before w, and for -tw there also occurs the additional 
 form -a o : vew-g, temple, together with vao-g ; Xsuj-g, people, 
 together with Xa6-g (compare § 37, D.). This Declension 
 is called the Attic. 
 
 On adjectives in w-g, see § 184; on some words which 
 fluctuate between this and the second principal declension, 
 see § 174. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 6 vEU)-g, temple. 
 
 TO dvu)yeu)-v, upper room. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 V e u) 
 
 dvo) y eu) 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 JVbm. 
 
 V(.(x)-Q 
 
 avwyeoj-v 
 
 ■Gen. 
 
 veu) 
 
 dvioyeu} 
 
 Dat. 
 
 VSijJ 
 
 dv(t)ye(p 
 
 Ace. 
 
 veu)-v 
 
 av(oyEU)-v 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 veto 
 
 dvujyEOi 
 
 a.D. 
 
 ve.ij}V 
 
 avioyEijiV 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 VEl^ 
 
 dvioyeu) 
 
 Gen. 
 
 veujv 
 
 dvwyeiov 
 
 Dat. 
 
 vecpg 
 
 avojyeqtg 
 
 Ace. 
 
 vewg 
 
 dvojys(o 
 
 Another example : Kd\o)g, rope. 
 
 § 133. The accentuation in these words has a twofold 
 irregularity, viz. : 
 
 1. €(u passes always for only one syllable in regard to ac- 
 cent : Mf vaXewc, apparently contrary to § 82 ; 
 
 2. even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they are 
 accented, the accent is put, not as a circumflex, but as an 
 acute, contrary to § 109. 
 
 § 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Yowel or 
 First Principal Declension, have the following points, in 
 common : 
 
48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 135. 
 
 1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing, the ending -c. 
 
 2. the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. (§§ 122, 128) 
 the ending ~ov, 
 
 3. all three genders have i subscriptum with a long vowel 
 in the Dat. Sing. 
 
 4. all three genders have -v in the Ace. Sing. 
 
 5. all three genders have the Stem vowel lengthened in 
 the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Dual. 
 
 6. all three genders affix -tv to the Stem vowel in the 
 Gen. and Dat. Dual. 
 
 7. all three genders have -wv in the Gen. Plur. 
 
 8. all three genders affix -mv or g with preceding i to the 
 Stem vowel in the Dat. Plur. 
 
 9. the masculines and feminines affix -i to the Stem vowel 
 in the Nom. Plur. 
 
 10. the masculines and feminines affix -g (for vg) in the 
 Ace. Plur., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate for 
 the V dropped (§42). 
 
 The diiference, therefore, is only in the formation of the 
 Gen. Sing, of the feminines and in the accentuation of the 
 Gen. Plur. 
 
 Second Principal Declension. 
 
 Consonant-declension 
 (commonly called the Third Declension), 
 
 % 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
 all the Stems which end in consonants^ the soft 'vowels t 
 and V, or diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in o 
 (Nom. w). The Stem is best recognized in the Gen. Sing., 
 where what remains after rejecting the termination o g may 
 generally be considered as' the Stem : Gen. Xtovr-oc, St. 
 XfQvr (Nom. Xewv, lion) ; Gen. (j)v\aK-og, St. 0vXaK (Nom. 
 <pvXa^, guard). 
 
§ 139. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 49 
 
 Hence, for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not 
 only the Nominative, but also the Stem or the Genitive is neces- 
 sary : as, Nom. caig, St. ^air, or Gen. dairSg, meal [Lat. rex^ St. reg, 
 or Gen. regis]. 
 
 To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third 
 and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings iisually appear 
 pure, i. e., not mixed up with the end of the Stem. 
 
 The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension, 
 because the soft vowels (§ 35, 1) can be used together with the 
 vowels of the terminations : Gen. ttItv-oq (Stem ttitv^ Nom. Trirv-g, 
 pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs, the v is some- 
 times resolved into f : for example, the Stem (3ov (Nom. /3ou-f, 
 ox) was originally in some forms (3oP (Latin hov), as Gen. (3oP^6g 
 {=ih(yD-is). See § 35, Ods. The O Stems have probably lost a 
 final consonant. 
 
 § 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
 all three genders. 
 
 The Neuters may be recognized by the inflexion, accord- 
 ing to § 105, from their having the Nom. and Ace. alike, 
 and these cases in the Plur. always with the ending -a : 
 (T(jJiuaT-a (St. (TWjuar, Nom. Sing, (rtofxa, hody). 
 
 § 137. For determining the gender from the Stem, the 
 following are the most important rules : 
 
 a) Mascioline are the Stems in su (Nom. cu-c), rrj/o 
 (Nom. rr]p), rop (Nom. Ttjp), vr (with Nom. c or v pre- 
 ceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v (of 
 various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel: St. 
 y paipev, Nom. ypacpevg, writer / St. and Nom. a-tjjTrjp, sa- 
 vior; St. pr)Top, Nom. pr]Twp, orator; St. X £ o v r, Nom. 
 \iwv, lion, leo ; St. and Nom. aywv, contest. 
 
 § 138. h) Feminine are all Stems in S (Nom. -Tc, -ac)? 
 most in i (Nom. -l-q), those in o (Nom. -w or -w-c), and the 
 names of qualities in r r? r (Nom. -rrj-c) : St. s X tt t ^, Nom. l\- 
 TTig, liojpe ; St. TT o X f, Nom. ttoX^c, Gif'V y St. tt e 1 o, Nom. 
 iruOwf persuasion ; St. t o- o r tj r, Nom. to-orijc^ equality. 
 
 % 139. c) Neuter are the Stems in /xar (Nom. iia)^ the 
 substantive Stems in q with Nom. o^ or aq, those in t or i» 
 which append no q in the Nominative, and those in p pre- 
 
 C 
 
50 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 §140. 
 
 ceded by a short vowel in the Nom. : St. o- w ju a r, Nom. 
 
 (T(oiua, hod?// St. y £ V £ c> I^om. yhog, genus / St. and Nom. 
 
 yvpaQf <^g^ / St. and Nom. mvairi, irhustard ; St. and Nom. 
 
 aoTw, ciUj ; St. and Nom. r]Top, heart, 
 
 % 140. The following words must be noticed separately : 
 
 77 yaGTr]p {j^t. y a a t e p), helly / 6 ttovq {St.7ro^),Jbot/ r] 
 
 X^ip (St. x^tp)fhand / to ovq (St. (jjT),ear/ 6 irri^^yg (St. 
 
 TT »7 X ^)' forearm ; ri ^piiv (St. /o § v), diajphragm^ mhid ; 
 
 6 TTtXeKvg (St. TTcXcfcu), axe / 6 j^orpvg (St. j5oTpv\ 
 
 bunch of grapes ; 6 <jTaxvg (St. (rrax^)) ^^^ of corn; 6 
 
 a^i]^ (St. o-^ T^ »c), wasp ; 6 fxvg (St. jiv g), moitse [piles'] ; 
 
 6 Ixdvg (St. I X v)ijish ; 6 a//jO (St. a £ />), a^V/ ro irvp (St. 
 
 IT vp), fire; to vdwp (St. v^aT), water. 
 
 Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as : 6 and 
 t) dXeKTpviov (St. dXe/cr/owov), coch and Ae7i/ o and ri vq or trvg 
 (St. if or 0- v), swjme [sMs] ; 6 and r) al'^ (St. a i y), goat; 6 and r) /3oi;c: 
 (St. /3ow), <?.»; and many names of persons: 6 and r) ttoXq (St. 
 Traid), boy and ^iW; o and 77 daifnov (St. daiiJiov)^ god and ^06?- 
 fZess; 6 and r; fiavnc, propTiet and prophetess. 
 
 § 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the 
 following : 
 
 
 Masculines and Femininss. . 
 
 Neuters. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Mui. 
 
 g, or compensation by lengthening 
 
 no ending. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 og 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 I 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 a or V 
 
 no ending. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 no ending, or as in the Nom. 
 
 u 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 8 
 
 , 
 
 G.I). 
 
 OIV 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 fC 
 
 a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 wv 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ci(v) 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ag 
 
 a 
 
 Voc— Nom. 
 
 fe 
 
 a 
 
 § 141. Dialects. — The Hom. dialect has otiv for oiv in Gen. and 
 Dat. Dual (compare § 129, D.), iroS-oXiv, and in Dat. Vlwv. frequently 
 eaa i(v) for a i(v) : '7r6d-e(T<Ti(v), seldom ea i(v) : a1y-E(Ti(i'). 
 
§ 143. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51 
 
 § 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declension 
 deviates from the rules laid down in § 107 in the following 
 point : 
 
 Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Dat of 
 all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel 
 be long, § 109) : ttoS-oc, ttoS-i (but -rro^-a), ttoSoTv, ttoSwv, 
 
 TTOaL 
 
 Exceptions. — 1. Participles, as: wv, being, ovTog; jSdg, going, l5dvTog 
 — accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last 
 syllable but one. 
 
 2. Trdg, omnis, has iravToQ, TravH, but Trdvrojv^ 7ra.(TL(v). 
 
 3. The words Traig, hoy; dfiwg, slave; 9iog,jacJcal; Tpwg, Trojan; to 
 (putg, light ; rj <p(^g, Mister ; t) £^g, torch ; to ovg, ear; 6 arig, moth, 
 are paroxytones in Gen. Plur. and Dual : ■ Kai^-_w u^ti(^-<>iv, Ooj-mv, 
 
 . Tpoj-iov, ^(t)T-(jjVj (p(jjd-(Dv, d(^d-(DV, <jjT-oi,v, cE-wv (compare farther 
 
 § 177, or^^ 
 
 4. The words which have become monosyllables by contraction : 
 tjp = tap, spring (ver), ijpog, ripi. 
 
 § 142 &. In regard to the quantity, it must be observed that several 
 monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened : 
 St. TTod, Nom. Sing. 7rov-g,foot ; St. ttuvt, Nom. Sing. Neut. ttclv, 
 every thing; St. irvp, Nom. Sing. Trvp, fire; St. av, Nom. Sing, avg, 
 hoar. 
 
 § 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension 
 are divided into three Classes with diiferent subdivisions : 
 
 I. Consonant Stems. 
 
 1. Guttural and Labial Stems. 
 
 2. Dental Stems. 
 
 3. Liquid Stems. 
 
 IL Vowel Stems. 
 
 1. Soft-vowel Stems. 
 
 2. Diphthong Stems. 
 
 3. o Stems. 
 
 IIL Elided Stems. 
 
 1. g Stems. 
 
 2. r Stems. 
 
 3. V Stems. 
 
52 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION, 
 
 144. 
 
 I. Consonant Stems. 
 144. 1. Guttural and Labial Stems, 
 i. e., Stems in k, x> Jy tt, 0, /3. 
 
 Examples. 
 Stems. 
 
 6 (pvXa^^ guard. 
 <pvXdK 
 
 ri ^Xsipj vein. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (pvXa^ [dux] 
 (pvXaK-oQ [duc-is] 
 (pvXdK-X [duc-i] 
 <pvXdK-d [duc-e-m] 
 
 0X€i// [pleb-s] 
 (pXef5-6g [pl5b-is] 
 <}>Xe(3-i [pl6b-i] 
 <l>Xe(3-d [plSb-e-m] 
 
 Dual. 
 
 NA.V. 
 G.B. 
 
 (l>vXdK-e 
 <pvXdK-oiv 
 
 ^Xs^-e 
 (pXel3-oXv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N(m. V. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (pvXdK-eg [du<?-es] 
 (pvXaK-(ov [duc-um] 
 <pvXaKi{v) 
 tpvXdK-dg [duc-es] 
 
 <pXel3-eg 
 <pXs(3-ojv 
 
 tl>Xe(3-dg 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 'O fjLvpfir}^^ ant, St. fi v p fi rj k. j) <p6pfxiy^, ??/r6, St. <p o p fi i yy. 
 
 Tj fidari^, whip, St. /* a o- r I y. 6 AiOio^p, .^Sthiopian, St. Ai9 lo tt. 
 
 r) ^r]H, cough, St. f3r]X. 
 
 § 145. All these Stems are Masc. or Fem. The Nom. 
 Sing, is formed by affixing g to the Stem : the g with the 
 final consonant of the Stem forms 5, \p, as in the Dat. Plur. 
 (§ 48). The Yoe. is always the same as the Nom. 
 
 Ohs. — The Stem a X w tt e k has the vowel irregularly lengthened in 
 the Nom. Sing.: dXwTnjH, fox ; while, on the contrary, the long 
 vowel in the Stems ktjpvk, ^oivIk, is shortened in the Nom. ; 
 Kripv^, herald ; ^olviS,, palm-tree, where the accent shows that the 
 V and I are short by nature (compare § 83, Ob%. 1). rpix has Nom. 
 Sing. 10 1 1, hair, Dat. Plur. 9pi^i(y) (compare § 54, a). 
 
§147. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 53 
 
 • § 146. 
 
 2. Dental Stems, i, e., 
 
 Stems in r. 
 
 e,s,v. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 ■q XajXTraQ 
 
 TO (Toifia 
 
 6 yspLoi 
 
 6 riySfiMv 
 
 Stems. 
 
 Xa fiTT a d 
 
 <T w/A a r 
 
 y e povT 
 
 -qyefiov 
 
 
 lamp. 
 
 lody. 
 
 old man. 
 
 leader. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 XafiTrd-Q 
 
 (ToJfia 
 
 yep(x)v 
 
 rjyEjxwv 
 
 Oen. 
 
 XaftTrdS-og 
 
 (Tu)fidr-OQ 
 
 yspovr-OQ 
 
 Tjyefiov-og 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Xa/x7rdd-i 
 
 au)fidT-i 
 
 yepovT-X 
 
 rjyefiov-X 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Xa/XTrdd-d 
 
 aaifia 
 
 ykpovT-a 
 
 rjyefiov-d 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Xajiird-Q 
 
 auifia 
 
 ykpov 
 
 I'lyeficjv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A. V. 
 
 XafiTrdd-e 
 
 (TtofidT-e 
 
 yspovT-e 
 
 7)yep.6v-e 
 
 Q.D. 
 
 XafiTrdd-oiv 
 
 aiofidr-oiv 
 
 yep6vT-oiv 
 
 tjyefiov-oiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. V. 
 
 Xafi7rdd-eg 
 
 au)fidT-d 
 
 yepovT-eg 
 
 rjyefiov-eg 
 
 Gm. 
 
 XafX7rdd-b)V 
 
 aujfidr-ojv 
 
 ysp6vT-o)v 
 
 Tjyeix6v-ojv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Xafi7rd-(TL(v) 
 
 (Tu)fid-cn(v) 
 
 ykpov-(n{v) 
 
 riyeix6-(n{v) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XafiirdS-dg 
 
 awfidT-d 
 
 ykpovr-dg 
 
 ■qy^p-ov-dg 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 T) TTUTpi-g, native country^ St-Trarpid. 
 TO ovofia, name^ St. 6v o fiuT. 
 if vv^, night [nox for nocts], St. w kt [tioc^]. 
 77 KUKOTTj-g, badness, St. k a k o r ij t. 
 TO /uIXt, honey [mel], StfieXir. 
 6 o^ovg, tooth [den-s for dent-s]^ St. odovr [dent]. 
 6 deXcpig, dol2)hin, St. dsXiplv. 
 o 7roifir]v, shepherd, St. tt o i fiev. 
 6 "EXXtjj/, Hellen, St. 'E \ X j? v. 
 6 aywv, contest, St. d y w v. 
 Adjectives : 
 
 7rkvT}-g, poor, St. TTEVJJT. 
 
 aKOJv, neut. uKov, unwilling, St. aKovr. 
 
 aTrpdyfiujv, neut. dirpayfiov, inactive, St. aTrpayfxov. 
 
 § 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be no- 
 ticed below, the Xom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. may be formed 
 in two ways, viz. : 
 
 1. With Sigma affixed to the Stem. Before this sigma 
 
54 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 147. 
 
 the consonants r, ^, 6, when they stand alone, disappear 
 altogether (§ 49) : Aa/x7ra5-c, ^ajuira-g ; KopvO-g, Kopv-g, 
 helmet ; but v and vr have the short vowels of the Stem 
 lengthened by way of compensation (§ 42), so that a, t,. v 
 become a, 7, £» ; but £ becomes e f, and o,ov'. -Kavr-g, 7ra-c, 
 every; h-g,t1-g,one; oSovr-gyO^ov-g, tooth. 
 
 Exceptions. — The monosyllabic Stem irod [ped] (§ 143 h) has tlie 
 vowel lengthened exceptionally : rrov-g [Lat. j^e-s, i. e., ped-s] ; 
 dafxapT lias Nom. Sing, r) ddfiap, spouse, for Sajxapg, because of its 
 harshness. 
 
 2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem ; but in its 
 stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, is lengthened, so 
 that by this lengthening (§ 42, Ohs.) e becomes 17, and 
 o becomes 10: St. noLfxev, Nom. TToifii]v, shepherd; St. 
 -nyefiov, Nom. rij£fjiu)v. If the Stem- vowel is long of 
 itself, the Nom. Sing, is like the Stem : 6 aywy, contest. 
 
 The r of the Stems in v r in this formation is rejected, 
 according to § 67: yepovr, Nom. ysptjv (for yepwvT). 
 The simple t of the Participial Stems in or is changed 
 into g: St. XcX UK or, Nom. Sing. XeXukwc (for XeXvkwt), 
 having loosened. 
 
 Obs. 1. The vowel w shows that g is not a mere afl&x in XeXvkojc, one 
 who has loosened. Compare xa|0i-c,/<2w?', St. x'^pi-'^- 
 
 Ohs. 2. The Stems in 'd, 9, as well as those in avT, bvt, always 
 form the Kom. Sing, with sigma ; but Stems of substantives in 
 ovT and the Stems in v generally without g. 
 
 § 147 h. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Xom. 
 Ace. and Yoc. Sing. (§ 136), as far as the laws of sound in 
 regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it : \v%iv{j), loosened 
 (see § 187), XeXu/coc (for X c X v »c o r) ; yaka, milk, from the 
 Stem yaXaKT (Gen. yakaKT-og = Lat. lact-is). On ttuv 
 (Stem iravr), see § 142 b. ■ . 
 
 Obs. — On the Ace. Sing, in v, belonging to some Stems in it, i9, id, 
 v9, vd, see § 15C. 
 
§ 149. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 55 
 
 § 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines some- 
 times has the pure •tem, as far as is possible : "ApTejuL (St. 
 ApT e jLLid), A7av (St. Alavr), yipov (St. y e povr); some- 
 times it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent 
 is on the last syllable) : rjysfxwv ; and in all participles even 
 when the accent is not on the last syllable : Xiyijjv (St. 
 Xeyovr), speaking. 
 
 The Voc. irai, hoy, from the Stirai S, is specially to be 
 observed. * 
 
 0^8. — The Stems 'AttoXXwv, UoasidoJVj wliich are like the Nom., 
 shorten the vowel and draw back the acqent in the Vocative : 
 "AttoXXov, JlotreiSov. The accent is also draw^n back in many 
 compound words : 'Aydfiefivov, ' ApiaroyuTov (§ 85). 
 
 § 149. The formation of the Dat. Plur. results from the 
 laws of sound (§§ 49, 50). r, 3, Q, and simple v, are 
 dropped before (ti(v) without leaving any trace; but vt 
 is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by way of 
 compensation. 
 
 Exception. — The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no 
 lengthening of the vowel by w^ay of compensation : St. % a p t e vr 
 (Nom. Sing. xap'ffC, graceful^ Dat. Plur. x<ip'i^<^i^(y)- See Inflexion, 
 
 § 187). 
 
 § 148. Dialects. — The Vocative of the Stem dvaKx (Nom. Sing. 
 ava^^ ruler) is in Homer dvd (shortened from dvaKv: compare the 
 neuter ydXa, § 147 &) ; some Stems in v r lose the v in the Voc. : "ArXa 
 for ''ArXar(r). 
 
 § 149. Dialects. — Homer forms the Dat. Plur. 7ro(rcr/(r) instead of 
 7ro^-(ri(v), Ait. TToaiv {ttovq^ foot) \ the d being assimilated instead of 
 being rejected. 
 
56 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 §150. 
 
 § 150. 
 
 3. Liquid Stems, i. e. 
 
 , Stems in X and 
 
 P' 
 
 Examples. 
 Stems. 
 
 6 (IXg 
 salt. 
 
 6 prjTiop 
 prjTop 
 orator. 
 
 IXTITep 
 
 mother. 
 
 6 Orjp 
 
 Orip 
 
 game. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Bat. 
 Ace. 
 'Voe. 
 
 iiX-g [sal] 
 a\-6g [sal-is] 
 aX-i [sal-i] 
 icX-a [sal-e-m] 
 
 liX-g 
 
 pnT(op 
 
 phrop-og 
 
 pr]TOp-i 
 
 pr]Top-a 
 
 prJTop 
 
 firiTTjp [mater] 
 firjTp-og [matr-is] 
 prfTp-i [matr-i] 
 fxrjTsp-a [matr-e-m] 
 firjrep 
 
 Onp 
 
 9r]p-6g 
 9r]p-i 
 9fjp-a 
 9np 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 G.B. 
 
 uX-e 
 aX-olv 
 
 6r]Top-e 
 prjTop-OiV 
 
 pr]T£p-e 
 p.r]T'tp-oiv 
 
 9np-e 
 9r)p-oiv 
 
 Plural. 
 N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Bat. 
 Ace. 
 
 ciX-eg [sal-es] 
 aX-wv [sal-um] 
 aX-<Ti(v) 
 llX-ag 
 
 pr]TQp-eg 
 prjTop-oJv 
 pr)Top-ai{v) 
 pf]Top-ag 
 
 prjTep-eg [matr-es] 
 p7)Tsp-wv [matr-um] 
 
 pvrpd-<Ji{v) 
 fiT)T(p-ag 
 
 9np-eg 
 9r]p-CJv 
 9r}p-ai{v) 
 9iip-ag 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 TO vEKTap, nectar. 6 Kpari'ip, mixing^ug, St. Kparij p. 
 
 6 ai9r}p, cether, St. al9 ep. 6 ^wjo, thief {fur), St. ({xo p. 
 
 § 151. The only Stem in X which forms the Nom. Sing, with sigma 
 is dX ; all Masc. and Fem. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing, with- 
 out sigma (§' 147, 3) ; hence with long Stem- vowels the Nom. 
 Sing, is like the Stem ; short Stem-vowels, however, are length- 
 ened, i. e., e into i/, o into w. 
 
 The neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing. : to r/rop, heart. 
 Only the monosyllabic Stem irvp lengthens the v: to itvp^fire 
 (§143,&). 
 
 § 152. The Yoc. Sing, has the pure Stem : pryrop. The 
 Stem (Tit)Tri p (Nom. (Tii)Tr]p, savior) shortens rj into e, and 
 draws back the accent (compare § 148) : Yoc. (TtJTsp, 
 
 § 153. The Stems Trare p, fxrjrtp, Ovyars p, y a a rep, 
 
 § 150. Dialects. — )? llXg, -poet, the sea. 
 
 § 153. Dialects. — The e is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by 
 poets : fiTjTEpog ; while it is rejected in other cases : 9vyaTpa. Instead 
 of aGi{v) in the Dat. Plur., there may be the iaai{v) mentioned, 
 § 141, D. : 9vyaTkpeaai{v). 
 
§154 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 57 
 
 ^r]fxr]Ti:p (Noms. TraT{]pf father j' fxriTtip, mother; OvyaTt^p, ^ 
 daughter ; yacjTrip, helly ; Ar}iui]Tr)p), reject e in the Gen. 
 and Dat. Sing. (§ 61, e). The first four throw the accent 
 on the case-ending ; the last draws it back {Trarpog, At/^tj- 
 rpog). The £ is accented where it appears : p.r]Tipa, in spite 
 of fxr^np, except in the Voc, where the accent is drawn 
 back r irdrEp, in spite of Trarrjp, but Ace. Sing. AtjfxriTpa. 
 In the Dat. Plur. the syllable rLg^p-beeomeaJi^UQaetath^^ 
 (§ 59) T pa: fjir)Tpa-<Ti(v)* 
 
 Obs. — The Stem dtrrep (Nom. Sing, dcm'jp, star) belongs to these 
 words only in the formation of the Dat. Plur. : d(TTpd(n(v). For 
 dvrip (St. dvEp), see, under the irregular words, § 177, 1. 
 
 II. Vowel Stems. 
 § 154. 1. Soft-vowel Sterns, i. e., Stems in i and v. 
 
 Examples. 
 Stems. 
 
 r) TToXig, city. 
 
 TToXl 
 
 rj (Tuf , SOW. 
 
 (TV 
 
 TO dtJTv (dfTTv), city. 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Bat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 
 iroXi-Q 
 Tr6Xs-it)Q 
 {TToXe-'i) ttoXei 
 
 TToXl-V 
 TToXl 
 
 ffv-g 
 
 (Tv-6g 
 
 av-i 
 
 av-v 
 
 av-g 
 
 atJTV 
 
 d<rT£-og or darE-cjg 
 
 {d(TT£-l) dOTU 
 dCTV 
 
 darv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 KA.V. 
 G.B. 
 
 TToXe-e 
 TToXe-oiv 
 
 <rv-e 
 
 (TV-o1v 
 
 {d(TTE-E) dffTT] 
 
 dark-oiv 
 
 Plural. 
 N. V. 
 Gen. 
 Bat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 {TToXE-eg) TToXeig 
 
 TToXe-OJV 
 
 7r6Xe-m(y) 
 (TToXe-af) TToXeig 
 
 (Tv-eg 
 
 <TV-G)V 
 (TV-ffi(v) 
 
 (Tu-ag or (Tvg 
 
 {d(TTe-a) dart} 
 
 d(TT£-OJV 
 
 d(TTe-cn(v) 
 {dtTTE-a) dart] 
 
 '^Xi^^ 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 6 /3orpu-c, hincJi of grapes, ") 
 ri TTiTv-g, pine-tree J > according to § 157. 
 
 r 6 irrixv-g, fore-arm, ) 
 
 ri^vvaiii-g, power I both according to § 157. 
 
 r) ardm-g, party, J action, ) 
 Adjectives, § 185. 
 
 C 2 
 
58 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155. 
 
 § 155. The Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed 
 by Sigma. The Neuter Sing, as well as the Vocative 
 Sing, of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes 
 the^Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case 
 jn all monosyllables. In the Ace. Sing. Masc. and Fem. v 
 is affixed to the Stem. • 
 
 On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, § 142 h. 
 But this lengthening takes* place also in the Nom. and Ace. 
 Sing, of some polysyllabic words. 
 
 § 156. Barytones in it, i^, tO, vd, v9 (Nom. i g, v g), form 
 the Ace. Sing, generally by affixing v after rejecting the 
 Stem-consonant : St. i pi^ (Nom. tpi-g, strife), Ace. epi-v ; 
 St. Ko pvO (Nom. Kopv-Q, helmet), Ace. Kopv-v ; St. 6 pviO 
 (Nom. opv'i-g, bird). Ace. opvl-v. Th^^Oxytones, on the 
 contrary, always have a : l\7ri-g, hope, Ace. tXTrtSa ; kXeiq, 
 hey, stands alone ; St. k X £ t 8, Ace. kKCiv (seldom jcXtt 3-a), 
 Ace. Plur. icXtTc or icXftSac. 
 
 Examples, 
 
 . r) tpi-e, strife. 
 
 r} t\7rt-f , Twpe. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 kpid. 
 
 IXttiS. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 tpi-Q. 
 
 tkiri-Q. 
 
 
 tpid-og. 
 
 l\7rid-0£. 
 
 
 ?pid-i. 
 
 tXirid-i. 
 
 
 epi-v. 
 
 lX7rid-a. 
 
 § 157. Most Stems in i, as well as adjective and some 
 substantive Stems In v, change their final vowel to t in 
 Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and 
 
 § 156. Dialects. — The Ace. Sing, in a of dental Stems is more fre- 
 quent in Homer : yXavKdJirid-a (yXavKw-mg, hright-eyed), tpid-a ; kXeiq is 
 KXrjtg, Acc. KXrj'id-a. 
 
 § 157. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect leaves i unchanged : Gen. ttoXi-oc, 
 Dat. TToXl (from xoXi-i), Nom. Plur. 7r6Xi-eg, Gen. ttoXi-wv, Dat. in Herod. 
 7r6\i-(ri(v), Homer 7roXi-e0(n{v), Acc. iroXi-ag (Herod, also iroXig). Other 
 additional forms of the Homeric dialect are : Gen. Sing. TroXrj-og, Dat. 
 Sing. 7r6\€-i and ttoXtj-V, Nom. Plur. TroXrt-eg, Acc. Plur. 7r6Xr)-ag. 
 
 The Stems in v have always o c in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing, 
 only is contracted : ttjjx". £vpv-g, droad, has the additional form evpia 
 in the Acc. Sing. 
 
§ 158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59 
 
 Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing, this c remains 
 unchanged ; in the Sterns^, however, in /, and in some sub- 
 stantive Stems in v, £ is followed by w ^ (instead of og), 
 called the Attic termination, which does not prevent the 
 accent from being on the antepenult : iroXe-wg, ir^XiKe-wg 
 (iriXeKv-g, axe). 
 
 In the Dat. Sing. £ i is contracted into £ i, in the Nom. 
 Plur. £ £ c and Ace. sag into £ i g, and £ a of neuter substan- 
 tives into T]. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form 
 £a : aarii]y but yXu/cta. 
 
 § 158. The contraction of f £ to r? in the Nom. Ace. and 
 Yoc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in l follows 
 the accent of the Gen. Sing. : ttoXe-wv like ttoXs-wc- 
 
 Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel unchanged ; 
 but others, like aarv, follow the analogy of Stems in i, and 
 change v into f . u £ are sometimes contracted into v in the 
 Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual ; in the Ace. Plur. also we find 
 tx^uc, with lyfiv-ag (lxOv-g,Jish), and o^pvgy Ace. Plur. of 
 6(j)pv-gf eyebrow. 
 
 £y\£Xu-c, eel^ retains v in the Sing. : Gen. £yx^Xi»-oc ; 
 but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into £ : Nom. Plur. 
 l'^\kkug. 
 
 The adjective 'Icpi-g, acquainted with, St. Id pi, keeps 
 its I unchanged through all the cases. 
 
 § 158. Dialects. — The Dat. IxQm is in Homer contracted into ixdWt 
 In tlie Dat. Plur. a is sometimes doubled: vkKv-crai(y) with veicv-Ea(n(v) 
 (yeKv-Qj corpse). 
 
60 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 159. 
 
 § 159. 2. 
 
 Diphthong Stems, 
 
 i. e., Stems 
 
 in sv, aVf ov. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 6 (3a(TL\evQ 
 
 i) ypavg 
 
 6 and tj (3ovg 
 
 Stems. 
 
 /3a<Ti\€ V 
 
 ypav 
 
 (3ov 
 
 
 Mng. 
 
 old woman. 
 
 ox or cow. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 l3a(n\Ev-g 
 
 ypav-g 
 
 fiov-g [bo-s] 
 
 Oen. 
 
 (3a(n\k-u)g 
 
 ypd-6g 
 
 /3o-of [bov-is] 
 
 Bat. 
 
 (J3a(n\s-i) (SaaiKei 
 
 ypd-t 
 
 /3o-f [bov-i] 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (3a(nXe-d 
 
 ypav-v 
 
 ^ov-v [bov-e-m] 
 
 Voc. 
 
 (SaffiXev 
 
 ypav 
 
 (iov 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 JV.A. V. 
 
 /3a(TiXe-e 
 
 ypa-e 
 
 /3o-€ 
 
 G.JD. 
 
 l3amXe-oiv 
 
 ypd-oTv 
 
 (io-oXv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 iV. V. 
 
 (J3a(n\e-eg) /3ao-t\r}e 
 or (3a<n\uQ 
 
 ypd-eg 
 
 (36-eg [bov-es] 
 
 Oen. 
 
 (iaaCkk-ojv 
 
 ypa-u)V 
 
 (3o-wv [bo-um] 
 
 Bat. 
 
 l3a<nX€v-ai(y) 
 
 ypav-(Ti(v) 
 
 ^ov-<Ti{p) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (iacnXk-ag 
 
 ypav-g 
 
 (iov-g 
 
 6 yov£v-g, parent. 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 
 6 iepev-g, priest. 'OSvffaev-g, 'AxiXXeu-f . 
 
 § 160. All diphthong Stems affix c in the Nom. Sing, 
 and cn{v) in the Dat. Plur. ; those in av and ov affix v in 
 the Ace. Sing, to the full Stem. In the Yoc. Sing, the 
 Stem appears pure. 
 
 ^ Before vowel case-endings, i. e., in all other forms, the v 
 ^f the Stem was changed into f (§ 34, D.) : j3o/'-oc [hov-is'], 
 and then was entirely lost : |3o-oc [j3o-wv = ho-u7n'] (§ 35, 
 D. 2). 
 
 OU. — An isolated diphthong Stem is o i, Nom. oT-g, sheep [ovi-s] : 
 olog, oil, olv; Plur. oleg, olutv, oi<Ti{v), olg. Compare § 34, D. 
 
 § 159. Dialects. — Homer has yprjvg for ypav-g, Dat. ypijt, Voc. yprjv or 
 ypTjiJ ; from j3ov-g, Ace. Plur. (i6-dg, Dat. J36-e(T(n(v). The forms /3wc, 
 Nom., (3a)v, Ace. Sing., are Doric. 
 
 § 160. Dialects. — Ionic oig (pvis) for olg. Gen. oiog, Dat. Plur. dt-effm or 
 oeam, Acc. dig. 
 
§162. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 61 
 
 Some compounds of Trov-g, Jvot, form the Ace. Sing, 
 like Stems in ov : Tpiwovg, three-footed., Ace. TpiTrow. For 
 vaif'Q, see among the irregular words, § 177, 11. 
 
 § 161. The Stems in t v, moreover, have in the 
 a) Gen. Sing., wg for o^. Compare § 157. 
 h) Dat. Sing., c i always contracted for eV. 
 
 c) Ace. Sing, and Plur., a is long and not contracted. 
 
 d) Nom. and Yoc. Plur., etg contracted by older Attic 
 writers into r/ g, by the later into c i g. 
 
 e) Words which have a vowel before e v may be con- 
 tracted also in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., and in the Ace. 
 Plur. : St. Ue I paitv, Nom. Ilaipaiev-g, port of Athens^ 
 Gen. Ilefjoatwc, Ace. Xlaipaia ; xou)-g, measure^ Ace. Plur. 
 Xo5c. ^ 
 
 Obs. — The Gen. in -e w e has arisen by transmutation of quantity 
 (§ 37, D. 2) out of the Horn. r]og. Hence the length of the final 
 syllable. In the same manner, the Ace. Sing, ea has arisen out 
 of r\a : still ea is also found, like edg in the Ace. Plural ; eag is 
 contracted by later writers into eig. 
 
 162. 3. O Stems, i. e., Stems in o and w. 
 
 Ste: 
 
 
 Examples. 
 Stems. 
 
 ?7 7ni9u), persicasion. 
 TreiOo 
 
 6 ijptogj Tiero. 
 rjpu) 
 
 4 
 
 Singular. 
 Norn. 
 Gm. 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 
 TraOco 
 
 (TTEiOo-og) iruBovg 
 (irEiOo-i) TTElOol 
 (ireiQo-a) TreiOib 
 ireiOol 
 
 Tjpio-g 
 iipu)-og 
 rjpoj-i 
 
 ijpu)-a ijpu) 
 rjp(o-g 
 
 Plur. T/jOW-fc 
 rjpcj-ojv 
 Vipui-aiiy) 
 ijpdj-ag or 
 Vpujg 
 
 
 Dual and Plural of TruQto are 
 formed as in the o declension. 
 
 Dual ijpoj-e 
 rjpw-oiv 
 
 § 161. Dialects. — The Epic dialect lengthens the e of Stems in cv 
 into T) before vowels : (3am\r}-og, (SamXij-i, (SacriXij-a, (SaaiXri-eg, (SaaiXri-cjv, 
 
62 CONSONANT DECLENSION. §163. 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 r) rixoi (St. 7)xo), echo. 
 KaXv\pw, Ar]Ta), dfxoj-Q (St. d fiio), slave, 
 
 firjTpio-g (St. /xTjTpu)), avunculus. 
 
 § 163. The Stems in o, all feminine, form the Nom. Sing, 
 without sigma, except the Stem al^o, Ndm. Sing. al^a)-g, 
 sha7ne, Ace. al^oj. The Ace, which is like the Nom., is 
 oxytone (contrary to § 87) : Tnidw, not neiOoj. 
 
 The Vocative ends in o t ; all other cases are contracted. 
 The Ace. of Stems in oj usually remains uncontracted. 
 The Stem I w, Nom. r; tw-g, dawn, has Gen. Sing, tio, Dat. 
 £(j> (according to § 132), Ace. I'w (from 'iwa). 
 
 Obs. — Several Stems in o v follow the above declension in some of 
 their forms : drjdojv, nightingale^ Gen. arj^ovQ, with di)UvoQ ; e/fcwv, 
 image, Gen. ukovq (compare §171). 
 
 dpicrrrj-Effmiv) (dpiffTev-g, prince) ; still there are Genitives also in € o e 
 and BVQ ('0^u(7€we), Datives in tV, e t, and Accusatives in e a, 7/ : Tvdi). 
 The New-Ionic dialect leaves e frequently uncontracted : jSamXk-eg. 
 
 § 163. Dialects. — Homer extracts ijpco'i into 7/py, Mivioa into' MtVw. 
 The old and poetic form fo^&-f is rjoj-g (St. ^ o), declined like aido)-g. 
 Some proper names in a> in the Kom. Sing, have in the New-Ionic 
 dialect an Ace. in ovv : ArjTovv, 'lovp. 
 
165. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 63 
 
 III. Elided Stems, i. e.^ Stems which reject the final 
 consonant in certain forms. 
 
 §164. 
 
 1. S Stems, i. e., Stems which elide sigma. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 TO yevog, race. 
 
 M. evyevfjg, N. evyeveg, of good family. 
 
 Stems. 
 
 ysveg 
 
 ev y ev eg 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 , 
 
 Nom. 
 
 yevog [genus] 
 
 M. evyevrjg N. evyev'eg 
 
 Om. 
 
 (ysve-og) yevovg 
 
 (evyeve-og) evyevovg 
 
 Bat. 
 
 {ysve-'f) yevEi 
 
 (evyeve-'i) evyevel 
 
 Ace. 
 
 yevog 
 
 (evyeve-a) evyevrj N. evyev'eg 
 
 Voc. 
 
 yevog 
 
 evyev'eg N. evyev'eg 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 iV. A V. 
 
 (yeve-e) yevrj 
 
 (evyev'e-e) evyevrj 
 
 G.D. 
 
 (ysve-oiv) yevoXv 
 
 (evyeve-oiv) evyevolv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 J^.V. 
 
 {yeve-a) y'evr) 
 
 (evyeve-eg) evyevelg N". {evyev'ea) evyevf} 
 
 Gen. 
 
 (yeve-(jjv) yevaiv 
 
 {evyeve-(i)v) euyevwv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 yevE-<Ti(v) 
 
 evyev'e-<n(v) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (yeve-a) y'evr] 
 
 (evyeve-dg) evyevelg N. (evyevea) evyevfj 
 
 Examples fo» Declension. 
 TO eUog^form. Kd\\og,deauty. fiaXog, song. axOog, burden. 
 Adjectives : 
 
 (Ta^rjg, Neut. aa^eg, clear. aKpijSrjg, Neut. ccKpilSeg, exact. 
 
 evffOrjg, Neut. evrjOeg, simple. 
 
 § 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only 
 when it stands at the end, i. e., in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. 
 Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Yoc. Sing. Masc. and 
 Fem. 
 
 The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel £ into 
 o in the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. : St. y tvsg, yivog. 
 
 § 165. Dialects. — The Epic dialect //•e(2'w^%, the New-Ionic always^ 
 leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted : ykveog^ y'evei. 
 Hom. sometimes has the Gen. Sing, evg (from € o c, § 37, D. 1) : Odp- 
 cevg {Qdpffog, courage). 
 
 In the Dative Plur. Homer has three endings : e-etrffi (v), e (t-<ti(v)j 
 and the usual e-<Ti(y): i3eXe-e(Tm{v), (3e\s(T-<Ti{v), ^e\e-ci(v), (jSeXog, dart). 
 
64: CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 166. 
 
 JSTeuter adjectives leave f unchanged : EvyEvig. Masculines 
 and Feminines form the Nom. Sing, by lengthening eg 
 into rjg (§ 147, 2), as*c can not be affixed : tvyevrjg from 
 svyeveg, like Troiiurjv from ttoijulev. 
 
 Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the 
 Voc. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxytone 
 in Nom. Sing, the accent is on the last syllable but two 
 (compare §§ 148, 85) : Nom. ^loKparrig, Voc. Sw/cparfe ; 
 Nom. ArijuioaOivrigfYoc. Ar^iuocrOeveg. 
 
 Obs. — The Neuter aXr]9kQ (Masc. d\r]9rig, true) draws back the accent 
 in interrogations : dXijOeg ; really ? 
 
 § 166. In all other forms g is rejected (§§ 61 and 49): 
 yivE-'i for yivecr-L [^gener-i]. Wherever two vowels meet 
 they are contracted : € e in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual 
 become r^ ; e a generally rj ; but when another vowel stands 
 before e they sometimes become a, according to § 41 : St. 
 ev^eeg, Nom. ev^erig, defective, Ace. Ivdea ; Stvyieg, Nom. 
 vying f healthy. Ace. vyiayhvit also vyirw St. \pEEg, Nom. 
 TO xpiog, debt, Neut. Plur. xpia, •The adjectives in ~^vi]g 
 (St. ^vig) have ^vYi and <^va : Exxpvng, well-disposed, ev^vii 
 and £v<pva. 
 
 Obs. — Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Plur. on the 
 last syllable but one, contrary to § 87 : avrapK^v (Nom. avTdpKrjg, 
 self-sufficient). So also Tpirjprjg, trireme, used as a substantive, 
 Gen. Plur. Tpirjpiov. 
 
 § 167. Proper names in -kXetjq, compounded with Kkiog, glory (St. 
 KXeeg), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single 
 one in all the other cases : Nom. (nepiKXerig) UspiKXijg, Gen. (Uspi- 
 KXeeog) UepiKXsovg, Dat. {UepiKXee'i, UepLKXki) UepiKXel, Acc. (UepLKXeea) 
 nepifcXea, Voc. {UepiKXeeg) UspiKXeig. 
 
 § 166. Dialects. — A vowel before e is often contracted with it in 
 Homer : (nreog or (nrelog, cave, Gen. <nrtiovg, Dat. (ttt^-i (from (nrk'i), Dat. 
 Plur. (nrr}E(rai{v) and (T7re(T(n(v) ; evicXerjg, glorious, Acc. evKXelag (from 
 evKXeeag), hnt dKXrjsTg (from dKXer]g, inglorious). Herodotus ivdekg (Ivderjgj 
 defective), dvQpojirocpvkag (dvOpwTro^vrjg, human). 
 
 § 167. Dialects. — The Epic dialect forms 'HpaicXfjg, 'HpaKXfj-og, 
 'BpaKXrj-i, 'BpaKXrj-a ; the New-Ionic, 'HpaKXkrjg, 'HpaKXe-og, 'HjoaKXI-V, 
 'HpafcXe-a. 
 
169. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 § 168. 2. T Stems, i. e., Stems which elide r. 
 
 65 
 
 Examples. 
 
 TO 
 
 Kspag, Tiorn 
 
 
 TO Kpsag, 
 
 meat 
 
 Stems. 
 
 KE 
 
 OUT 
 
 
 • KpeuT 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 KA. V. 
 
 Kepag 
 
 
 
 Kpeag 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 KEpaT-og 
 
 (Kspaog) 
 
 Kspwg 
 
 (Kpeaog) 
 
 Kpeutg 
 
 Bat. 
 
 KBpar-i 
 
 (Kspdi) 
 
 Kep<^ 
 
 (icpsdi) 
 
 Kpk<f 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 KA.V. 
 
 Kspdr-e 
 
 (Kspae) 
 
 Kspd 
 
 
 
 O.D. 
 
 KEpdT-OlV 
 
 (fCfjOffOtr) 
 
 KSpiiiV 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A. V. 
 
 Kspdr-a 
 
 {Kspaa) 
 
 Kspd 
 
 (Kpeaa) 
 
 Kped 
 
 Gen. 
 
 KSpdT-dJV 
 
 {Kepdojv) 
 
 KepuJv 
 
 (/cpedwv) 
 
 KpEa)U 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Kepd-(TL{v) 
 
 
 
 Kpsd-(n(y) 
 
 
 § 169. r becomes g in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing., accord- 
 ing to § 67. In the other cases some words always reject 
 it: e.g.,Kpiag,(Ti\agf splendor ; yripag,age; Kvi<^ag, gloom. 
 Others, like K^pag, retain both forms together, with and 
 without r. The vowels which meet are regularly contract- 
 ed. The quantity of a is very fluctuating. The Dat. Sing, 
 is written also at : aiXai. 
 
 In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. a c) have a mova- 
 ble r. 
 
 § 169. Dialects. — Homer has ^kTra-i<T(n{v) or ^sTra<T-(n(v), Dat. Plur. 
 of dsTrag, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes e : Homer ovSag, ground, 
 Gen. ovSe-og, Kwag, Jieece, Nom. Plur. Kw€-a ; Kkpag, New-Ionic Gen. 
 
 KEjOEOC. 
 
 A movable r appears also in the Stems i^pwr, yeXwr, X(t><«>7' (Nom. 
 t^/awf, sweat ; yeXojg, laughter; xp'^Qi sMn), Dat. l^jO^, Ace. idpw, together 
 with Gen. iSpoJTog ; yeXw ; and regularly in Homer xpo-of , xpo-t (poet. 
 Xpff), Xpo-a- Compare alddjg, ri(^g, § 163. 
 
66 ' CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 170. 
 
 § 170. 3. N Stems, i. e., Stems which elide v. 
 
 Examples. " 
 
 M. F. fieiKav, greater. 
 
 N. fxaiZov 
 
 Stems. 
 
 ' fJLEl^OV 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 , 
 
 
 N. V. 
 
 fid^ojv 
 
 N. fisi^ov 
 
 Oen. 
 
 IxeiZov-OQ 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 fXElKoV-l 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fjid^ov-a [fiH^oa] jxeiKoi 
 
 N. fiei^ov 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 J^.A. V. 
 
 HdZ,ov-f. 
 
 
 O.D. 
 
 fiaiZ,6v-oiv 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 N. V. 
 
 fxei^ov-eg [/let^oeg] fiei^ovg 
 
 N. neiil^opa [jjiEi^oa] fxei^u) 
 
 Oen. 
 
 fiei^ov-iov 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 fiEiZo-(n{v) 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fieil^ov-ag [fieil^oag] jxei^ovg 
 
 N. fxEiZova [ixEeZoa] fieiKd) 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 jSeXriiov, 'better. ato-x/wr, TYiore liateful. dXy/wi/, more 'painful. 
 
 § 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in 
 use. But the open ones (/xctSoa) never occur. Compara- 
 tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in 
 the Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable 
 but two : l^iXriov, a'/txYfoy. 
 
 Besides the comparatives (Nom. w v,- o v), there are only 
 the two proper names, 'AttoXXwv (Stem, and Nom.) and Ilo- 
 (TEi^ow (Stem and Nom.), Ace. 'AttoXXw (also 'A7roXXwv-a), 
 Tlocrei^M (also Iloo-ff^wv-a). On the Vocative, see § 148, 
 Obs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be- 
 tween o V and o (§ 163). 
 
 § 171. Dialects. — Somer forms the Ace. KVKeai or KviceiCj from kvkewv^ 
 mixture. 
 
OP THK 
 
 172. . CONSONANT DEC^KgJON. ^^ ^ .^ .6^ 
 
 § 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Principal 
 Declension. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 in -a 
 
 -ar 
 
 TO (j(i)}ia^ l)ody. 
 
 aionaros 
 
 -ais 
 
 -aid 
 -air 
 
 6 Tralf, boy. 
 rj dais, meal. 
 
 Traidos 
 daiTos 
 
 -dv M. 
 
 -av K 
 
 -av 
 -avT 
 
 Udv, Pan. 
 Adj. TO irdv, the whole. 
 
 Uavog 
 iravTos 
 
 -ap 
 
 -ap 
 
 -apT 
 
 -a(p)T 
 
 TO tap, spring. 
 t) ddjxap, wife. 
 TO ^piap, fountain. 
 
 tapos 
 
 dafxaprog 
 
 (ppeaTog 
 
 -as F. 
 
 -as K 
 
 -ad 
 -air) 
 
 i) XafiTrds, lamp. 
 TO Kpkas, meat. 
 
 XafiTrddog 
 Kpeios 
 
 -ag M. 
 
 -avT 
 -av 
 
 6 yiyds, giant. 
 Adj. [ieXds,Uack 
 
 yiyavTOS 
 [isXavos 
 
 -avs F. 
 
 -a{v) 
 
 ri ypavs, old woTuan. 
 
 ypdos 
 
 -€t|0 
 
 -etp 
 
 r) xe/jO, hand. 
 
 X^^poQ 
 
 F. 
 
 -evT 
 
 -ev 
 
 -nd 
 
 Part. XvOeis, loosed. 
 Adj. els, one. 
 
 r) KXdg, Tcey. 
 
 XvQsvTog 
 
 tvos 
 
 KXeidos 
 
 -er K 
 
 -evT 
 -sv 
 
 Part. XvBkv, loosed. 
 Adj. dppEv, male. 
 
 XvQkvTos 
 dppevog 
 
 -6c K 
 
 <d 
 
 Adj. (Ta<pes, clear. 
 
 (Tacpovs 
 
 -€We ^1- 
 
 <v) 
 
 6 (povevg, murderer. 
 
 (poveojs 
 
 -?7v M. 
 
 -ev 
 
 -T}V 
 
 6 Xifxriv, harlfor. 
 6 "EXXi]v, Greek 
 
 Xifievos 
 "EXXtjvos 
 
 -rip 
 
 -ep 
 
 -vp 
 
 6 alQrjp, aether. 
 6 6r)p, game. 
 
 al^tpog 
 9np6s 
 
m 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 §172. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 stem. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 -rig 
 
 
 r) (SapvTTjg, weight. 
 6, r) Tpirjpijg^ trireme. 
 
 (SapvTijTog 
 Tpiripovg 
 
 -I N. 
 
 -t 
 
 -tr 
 
 Adj. ISpi^ acquainted with. 
 TO fieXi, honey. 
 
 idpiog 
 fieXiTog 
 
 -IV 
 
 -tv 
 
 6 deXtpiv, dolphin. 
 
 deX(pXvog 
 
 -tg 
 
 -I 
 
 -iS 
 
 -IT 
 
 -19 
 
 -IV 
 
 7/ TToXig, city. 
 7] IXirig, hope. 
 ' V xdpigjavor. 
 o, rj opvigj Mrd. 
 ■f} ^aXafiig, Salamis. 
 
 TToXsujg 
 IXTTidog 
 XdpiTog 
 opvWog 
 ^aXafilvog 
 
 -ov N. 
 
 -ov 
 
 -OVT 
 
 Adj. evdaifiov,fortunute. 
 Part. Xvov, loodng. 
 
 evdaifiovog 
 XvovTog 
 
 -og N. 
 
 -or 
 
 TO ysvog, race. 
 Part. TTEtpvKog, having 'become. 
 
 yevovg 
 
 TTE^VKOTOg 
 
 -ovg 
 
 -OVT 
 
 -od 
 -o{v) 
 
 6 o^ovg, tooth. 
 
 6 irovg^foot. 
 
 6, r) /3owf , or, cow. 
 
 oSovTog 
 
 TToSog 
 
 (3o6g 
 
 -V N. 
 
 -V 
 
 TO dffTv^ city. 
 
 daTSog 
 
 -vv M. 
 
 N. 
 
 -vv 
 
 -VVT 
 
 6 fi6(Tvv, wooden tower. 
 Part. dsiKvvv, shmcing. 
 
 fioavvog 
 hiKvvvTog 
 
 -vg M. 
 F. 
 
 -VVT 
 -V 
 
 -vd 
 
 Part. deiKvvg, shmcing. 
 6 ixOvg,Jish. 
 6 TTfixvg, ell 
 r) x^^l^^G, chaTc. 
 
 SeiKvvvTog 
 Ixdvog 
 TTrjx^iog 
 xXajxvdog 
 
 -oi F. 
 
 -0 
 
 r) tthOu), persuasion. 
 
 Trei^ovg 
 
 -(OV 
 
 M. 
 
 -ov 
 
 -OJV 
 -OVT 
 
 rj dr]^o)v, nightingale. 
 6 dycJv, contest. 
 6 Xiwv, lion. 
 
 dri^ovog 
 dyCjvog 
 XkovTog 
 
 -WjO 
 
 'Op 
 
 6 pr]Tb)py orator. 
 
 pnTopog 
 
173. 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 69 
 
 V 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 -(og M. 
 
 -0 
 
 -or 
 
 -h)T 
 
 6 rjpvjg^ hero, 
 r) alSiog, shame. 
 Part. Trecpvicwg, having lecome. 
 6 tpcjg, love. 
 
 ripuiog 
 aidovg 
 TrecpvKOTog 
 ipojTog 
 
 -^ 
 
 -TT 
 
 -0 
 
 6 yvxjyj vulture. 
 
 ri Karr)Xi-4/, upper story. 
 
 yvTrog 
 
 XdXvjSog 
 
 KarriXXcpog 
 
 -^ 
 
 -K 
 
 -r 
 
 -X 
 
 -KT 
 
 6 (pvXa^, guard. 
 7] (fXo^.flanfw. 
 6 ovv^, nail. 
 rj vv%^ night. 
 
 <pvXaKog 
 
 <pXoy6g 
 
 OVVXOQ 
 
 VVKTog 
 
 § 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the 
 First in the following particulars : 
 
 1. Masculines have g for the Nom. Sing, (or compensa- 
 tion for it) ; feminines are less consistent in this. 
 
 2. The Dat. Sing, affixes t (subscribed in the First Prin- 
 cipal Declension). 
 
 3. Yowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take v in the 
 Ace. Sing. 
 
 Obs. — The original ending of the Ace. Sing, was also in the Second 
 Principal Declension every where v. This consonant was, how- 
 ever, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel 
 a : 6dovT-a-v=zL2it. dent-e-m. Subsequently v was dropped, and a 
 left, generally as the only siam : 6d6vT-a. 
 
 4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual have i v (aiv, oiv). 
 
 5. The Gen. Plur. w v. 
 
 6. The Dat. Plur. o-t(v) originally every where. 
 
 7. The Ace. Plur. g every where. 
 
 Obs. — The original ending of all Ace, Plur, was ve, but v was 
 dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was 
 compensated for by the lengthened dg, ovg. After consonants 
 there was the same process as in the Ace. Sing. : 6S6vT-a{v)-gj 
 Lat. dent-e-s for dent-em-s. 
 
 8. Neuters all have a in Nom. Ace. and Yoc. Plur. 
 
70 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174. 
 
 The principal differences in the endings are : 
 
 1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal De- 
 clension always has o g (wc)- 
 
 2. In the Nom. Plur., where Masc. and Fern, of the Sec- 
 ond Principal Declension always have £ c. 
 
 Irregidarities in Declension. 
 
 § 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one 
 Nom. is called Heterodizing {kr^poKXiaiafttifferent inflex- 
 ion) : Nom. (jKOTog, darJcness, Gen. gkotqv (0-Declension), 
 and GKOTovQ (Second Principal Declension) ; Xaywc, hare, 
 according to the Attic declension, but Ace. Xayw. 
 
 An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper 
 names in r? c • SwKjoarr^c (St. S wic/oarcc)^ ^^^ Ace. '^^(OKpa- 
 Tr]v (as if from Stem Swic/oara of the A-Declension) with 
 Sw/Cjoarrj. But those in -kX^c (§ 167) follow the Second 
 Principal Declension exclusively. ^ 
 
 § 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem whicn 
 can not be that of the JSTom. is called Meta/plasm, (jiera- 
 irXaafioQ, cJiange of formation) : Nom. Sing, to ^Iv^pov, 
 tree, Dat. Plur. ^ivdpE(Ti(v), as if from Stem SevSpeg; Nom. 
 Sing. TO ^uKpvov, tear, Dat. Plur. ^aKpvai{v), from St. duKpv 
 (poet. Nom. SaKpu) ; to nvpffre, Plur. to. irvpa, Dat. rote 
 irvpoXg (0-Declension) ; NoiA. Sing, ovupo-g, dream, Gen. 
 ovdpaTog, Nom. Plur. oveipaTa. 
 
 § 176. A peculiar irregularif^ appears in several Neuter 
 
 § 174. Dialects. — Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. rig in Herodotus, 
 have e a for r}v in the Ace. Sing. : SeaTrorri-g, master^ deaTroTEa. 6 6xo-g^ 
 carriage, in Homer has Plur. rd ux^a, ox£(T(pi{v'), from the St. 6x^Q- 
 Oidi-n-ovg has poet. forms from a St.OiSnroSa, Gen. Sing. OidnroSao, 
 trag. OldiTTodd. Homeric ^ap-n-riddjv, stems ^ap-midov and ^apTrt]- 
 dovT. Mivcog, Acc. Sing. Miv<i)a (§ 163) and Mivbjv. 
 
 § 175. Dialects. — Hom. metaplasms are : Dat. Plur, dvdpa7r6de(T<Ti{v), 
 Nom. Sing. dvdpaTro^ov, slave; Nom. Acc. Plur. TrpoaioTrara, Nom. Sing. 
 Trpoo-wTTov, countenance ; derxfiaTa, ionds, Sing. 6 Se(TiJ.6g ; tpirjpo-g, trusty, 
 Nom. Plur. epirtpeg ; d\Kr], strength, Dat. Sing. dX/c-i ; vafilvrj, hattle, vafilvi ; 
 ix^p, divine Uood, Acc. Sing. /x<^. 
 
§ 177. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 71 
 
 Stems in apr, as (j)pEapr. They reject r in the Nom. Ace. 
 and Yoc. Sing, and p in the other cases ; to <ppiap, well, 
 Gen. (f)piaTog (also (f)priT6g) ; to rjirap, liver, Gen. rJTraroc *, 
 TO aXeKpap and aXtK^cif Solve, Gen. aXd(l)aTog. 
 
 To these correspond the Stems (T/ca(/o)r and v^a{p)T: 
 Nom. (TKWjO, 6?^V^, Gen. o-icaroc ; vScdjo, Gen. vSaroc. 
 
 § 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order: 
 
 1. aviipy man (compare § 153), rejects e of the Stem 
 avsp, and inserts S in its place (§ 51,6^5^.2): av-^-p-6g, 
 avdpt, avSpa ; Voc. avsp ; Dual, av^pe, av^potv ; Plur. av^peg, 
 avdptiJVf av^pa(Ti{v), (iv^pag. 
 
 2. "Aprj g (the god Ares) : St. 'Ape c, Gen. "A/)€wc and 
 "Apeog, Ace. "Aprjv, together with "Apr] ; Voc. regul. *'ApEg. 
 
 3. a |0 V, without Nom. : Gen. tov and r^c apv-6g, of the 
 lamb, apvi, apva , Dat. Plur. apva(n{v). 
 
 4. r o yovv, Icnee {genu), Nom. Ace. Yoc. All the rest 
 from St. y ovaT, Gen. yovaTog. 
 
 5. 17 yvv 7/, woman. All the rest from St. y u v a t k-, 
 Gen. yvvaiKog, Dat. yuvaficf', Ace. yuvaTica, Voc. yvvai ; Dual 
 yuvaiica, yvvaiKoXv ; Plur. yi»vaT»c-£c> -wv, -5«(v), -a^. 
 
 6. TO ^opv, wood, spear : St. ^&paT (comp. 4.). Gen. 
 ^opiiTog, poet, ^o p6 g, Dat. Sojoi and dopei. 
 
 7. Z £ V c (^^'^^^ ^<?<^ Zeus), Gen. Atoc, Dat. At/", Ace. At a, 
 Voc. Zed. 
 
 8. 6 and 17 kviov, dog, with Yoc. kvov, from St. kvo v. 
 All the rest from kvv: Gen. kiJvoc, Dat. kvvi, Acc. Kwva ; 
 Plur. KvvEg, kvvu)v, Kv<Ti{v), Kvvag. 
 
 9. 6 X a - c, stone, from Hom. Xao-c, Gen. Xa-oc^ Dat. Xa-V , 
 
 § 177. Dialects. — The following forms are peculiar to dialects : 
 
 1. dvfjp, poet, 'avep-og, 'avkp-i, 'avep-a ; Dat. Plur. dvdpe(T<Ti(v). 
 
 2. "AprjQ, Homer "Apijog, "Aprji, "Aprja. 
 
 4. yovv, Ion, and poet. yovvuT-og, yovvar-a, yovvdaiiy) ; Ep. Gen. Sing, 
 youvog, Plur. yovvd, yovvwv, yovv-(.a(n{y). 
 
 6. ^OjOf , dovparog, Ep. ^ovjoof, Sovpij dovpe, dovpa, dovpojv, dovpe<T<n{v)^ 
 
 7. Zevcpoet. St. Z/j V : Z?jv-dc, Z);v-/, Zj/v-a (also Zrjv, from Zjj). 
 
72 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 177. 
 
 Acc. Xaa-v, Xav ; Plur. Xa-sg, Xd-wv, Xd-£(T<7i{v) or Xd-e(Ti{v), 
 Xa-ag. 
 
 10. 6 /mdpTv-g, witness, with Dat. Plur. fidprvmiv), from 
 St. fxapr V. The rest from the St. fxaprv p : p,dpTvpog, 
 fidpTvpi, etc. 
 
 11. 17 vav-g, ship, ve-ivg, vr\-'L, vav-v ; Plur. vr]-ig, ve-iov, 
 vav-(Ti{v), vavg. Compare § 159. 
 
 Ohs. — The Nom. Acc. Sing, and Dat. Acc. Plur. rest on the St. vav. 
 Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) vt]P, vt] ; ve-tog 
 is for vT}-6g (§ 37, D. 2). 
 
 12. 6 and 17 6pvt-g, bird, ^t. opviO and opvi: opvld-og, 
 opvWi, opvWa, and opviv ; Plur. opvlOeg and opveig, 6pv£(i)v, 
 
 13. TO ov g, ear. All the rest from St. w r : wrog, wrt ; 
 Plur. wra, wtwv, w-(Tf(v). (On the accent, § 142, 3.) 
 
 14. 17 n vv^ {the Pnyx), St. ttvk v, IIukv-oc^ TLvkv-i, 
 UvKv-a. 
 
 15. 6 7rpi(T(5v-g, the aged,hsis in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., 
 and throughout the Plur., its forms from irp^a^vra (Nom. 
 Sing. wpiaftvTrig) : irpia^ug, TTplcrf^sioVf 7rpe(Tf5E(Ti{v), signifies 
 embassadors, to which the Sing, is irpEcr^evTrig. 
 
 16. TCLv. Only Yoc. io tclv or w rav, friend ox friends, 
 a defective Stem. 
 
 17. 6 viog^ son, St. vio, vt, viEv, Gen. vUogf Dat. vlu, 
 Acc. vUa (rare), Plur. vkXg, vliiov, vUmiy), vldg. But also 
 regularly vlov, etc. 
 
 18. 17 x^^Pf ^(^'^j St. ;)^ f t p, Dual xepolv, Dat. PL x^P<^K'^)' 
 
 Dialects. — 11. vav-g, from St. vijv, Ion. vr}v-g, Hom. Acc. Sing, vfj-a^ 
 Dat. Plur. vr]e(T<T^{v), vr]v<xi{y), Acc. vr}ag. 
 
 from St. v(.Vj Ion. vs-oc, ve-t, V€-a, vk-ig, ve-wv, ve-ecrcrt, v£-af . 
 from St. vav, Dor. j/a-oe, va-i (navi), vd-e<T(Ti{v). 
 13. owe, Ion. ovag, ovar-og; Plur. ouar-a, Dor. log, tjT-6g. 
 
 17. vio-c, Ep. Gen. vl-og, vl-i, vl-a, vl-eg, vl-dai{v), vl-ag. 
 
 18. %€«>, poet, and New-Ion. x^p-og, x^p-'h Ep. Dat. Plur. xet/o-etn or 
 
 X€l/0-e<T(Tl(^'). 
 
 To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects : 
 
 19. Homer 'AtSri-g {Att"Aidr]g), St. 'Ai^, Gen. "AV^of , 'AV^-t, also 'AV- 
 dit)vev-g, with regular inflexion, according to § 159. 
 
§ 178. CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 73 
 
 Case-like TertniTiations. 
 § 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suf- 
 fixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resem- 
 ble case-endings. To these belong : 
 
 1. -di, answering to the question where: aXXo-6i, else- 
 
 where ; 
 
 2. -6 e V, answering to the question whence : 6tKo-9ev, 
 
 from home ; 
 
 3. -§£, answering to the question whither : o'lKa-^e, home- 
 
 wards. 
 
 Dialects — 20. 6 ip(og, lave, Stems kpioT and epo, poet. Ace. ipo-v. 
 
 21. Oefiig, justice, St. 9 e fit and 0e/ti<rr, Plur. OefiiaT-eg, OefiKxr-ag. 
 
 22. TO Kapa, Tiead, Horn. St. k apt] r, k a pij ar, k p dar, k p dr, Kup. 
 Horn. JVom. Sing. Kapr]. 
 
 Gen. " Kdprjr-og, Kaprjar-og, Kpdar-og, Kpar-Sg. 
 
 Dat. " KaprjT-i, Kapr]aT-i, KpduT-i, Kpdr-i (trag. Kapq). 
 
 Acc. " Kapr], rbv Kpdr-a, to Kap. 
 
 Nom. Plur. Kapd, KaprjUT-a, KpduT-a, secondary form K.dprjva. 
 
 Gen. " KpaTCJV, Kaprjvojv. 
 
 Dat. " Kpd(ji{v). 
 
 Acc. " z=:Nom. (also Tovg Kpdr-ag). 
 
 23. t; /itdoTi^, whip, Hom. Dat. ndcTl, Acc. ^daTi-v. * 
 
 24. 6 ndg, month, Ion. = Att. fir]v. 
 
 25. oaaB, eyes. Kom. Acc. Dual, Neut. in Homer. The trag. have 
 Gen. Plur. oaaiov, Dat. oaaoig or oa(roiai{v). 
 
 § 178. Dialects. — The three local suffixes are very frequent in Hom. : 
 oIkoOi, at home ; 'VkioQi irpo, in front of Ilios ; ovpavoOev, from heaven ; 
 dyopr]Q(.v,from the assembly. 9ev also supplies the place of the Gen.- 
 ending: Kara KprjOev, down from the head, entirely ; i^ d\6dtv, out of the 
 sea. -d e is generally affixed to the Acc. : oIkovSe, homewards ; KXimrjvSe, 
 into the tent; TroXivSe, into the city; (po^ov^E, into flight, (pvyade, into 
 flight, and tpaZi, to the earth, are peculiar. 
 
 A suffix peculiar to the Hom. language is ^ i (v) ; it is added to the 
 Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination 
 in both Sing, and Plur., as : 
 
 1. A- decl. : I3ir]-<pi, with force; KXtmri-tpi, in the tentj dirb vevprj-^iv, 
 from the dow-string. 
 
 2. O- decl: Oeo-ipiv, from the gods; 'l\i6-(l>iv,from Ilios. 
 
 3. Cons.-decl. : KOTv\T]dov-6-<piv, with the sucTcers (on the feelers of the 
 polypus); dir bx^<T-(pi{v) , from the carriage; Tcapd vav-<pi{v), alongside 
 the ships; dicb KpuTea-fiv, from the head. (§ 177, D. 22.) 
 
 D 
 
74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179. 
 
 These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun : 
 ^A.dr]vr]dEv,fro7rh Athens (with Ion. ?j) ; KVK\6mv,from the 
 circle (kvkXo-q). Sometimes o comes in place of the A- 
 sound : piZoOev (radicitus), from piZa {radix) ; it also serves 
 as a connecting vowel with consonant-stenjs : iravr-o-OEv, 
 from all sides. The o is sometimes accented, contrary to 
 § 107, a : kvkX-o-Osv, MapaOiov-o-dev, from Marathon. 
 The enclitic suffix S t (§ 92, 5) is often also combined with 
 the Ace. form : Mt'ya/oa-^f, to Megara ; 'EXfuaTy-a-^E, to 
 Eleusis. otK-a-Se, home^ from Stem o t k o, is irregular. 
 
 For ^ £ we find cr t, 2 £, with the same meaning : oWocte, 
 elsewhither ; 'AOr}vaZe, to Athens; 0?//3a?£, to Thehes ; 
 dvpaZe (foras). 
 
 § 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in 
 I for the Sing., and ai{y) (without a preceding i) for the 
 Plur., answering the question where : oikol, at home ; Ilu- 
 Oo7, at Pytho ; 'Io-0/ioT, on the Isthmus ; 'AOr]vri(Ti{v), in 
 Athens; n\aTaia(n{v)fin Platma ; 6vpa(n{v), at the door 
 (foris) ; wpa(Ti{v), at the right time. 
 
 Chap. VII. — Other Inflexions of the Adjective. 
 
 A. Inflexion according to Genders. 
 
 Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. 
 
 § 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that 
 which in the Masc. and Neut. follows the 0-Declension, 
 and in the Fem. the A-Declension ; which, consequently, 
 has in the Nom. Sing, oc, y\ (or a), ov [Lat. us, a, uni\. 
 
 § 180. Dialecls. — The lonians have frequently here also r\ for Att. 
 a: aiax^. 
 
§182. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 75 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 dyaOog 
 
 dyaOfj 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 <piXiog 
 
 tpiXia. 
 
 ^IXiov 
 
 am. 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 dyadijQ 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 (piKiov 
 
 <l)iXidg 
 
 <piXiov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 dya9<p 
 
 dyaOy 
 
 dyaOi^ 
 
 (piXi<li 
 
 ^iXi(f. 
 
 (piXi({) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 dyaOrjv 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 0/Xiov 
 
 (piXidv 
 
 (piXiov 
 
 Voc^ 
 
 ayaQk 
 
 dyaOrj 
 
 dyaOov 
 
 (piXte 
 
 <l)iXia 
 
 (piXiov 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 KA.V. 
 
 dyaOu) 
 
 dyaOd 
 
 dyaOu) 
 
 (piXioj 
 
 <}>iXid 
 
 ^iXi(o 
 
 G.D. 
 
 dyaBdlv 
 
 dyaGdlv 
 
 dyaOolv 
 
 (j)iXioiv 
 
 tpiXiaiv 
 
 0t\totv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 dyaOoi 
 
 dyaQai 
 
 dyaOd 
 
 (^iXioi 
 
 tpiXiai 
 
 <piXia 
 
 Oen. 
 
 dyaOojv 
 
 dyaOCjv 
 
 dyaOhiv 
 
 ^iXioJV 
 
 ^iXiojv 
 
 ^iXicjv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 dyaOoig 
 
 dyaOaXg 
 
 dyaOolg 
 
 (piXioig 
 
 ^iXiaig 
 
 (piXioig 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dyaOovg 
 
 dyaOdg 
 
 dyaOd 
 
 (piXiovg 
 
 <piXidg 
 
 (jiiXia 
 
 In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a voivel or p, else- 
 where r/ : ^iKaiog, ^iKaia, ^iKaiov, just / alaxpog, alaxp^t 
 al(T\p6v, hateful / (TO(l)6g, ao^i], croc^ov, wise. 
 
 Exception : ri stands after o, except when p precedes o : 
 dirXoog^ uTrXor], aTrXoov, Simple. 
 dOpoog, dOpod, dOpoov, assembled. 
 
 § 181. Though the declension of these adjectives con- 
 forms to §§ 114, 126, the following points must be ob- 
 served : 
 
 1. a in the Nom. Sing, is always long. 
 
 2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Plur. the Fem. 
 follows the Masc. : jSejSafoc, Jirm, Nom. Plur. Masc. /3f- 
 l^aioi, Fem. /3t/3atat (§ 108 would require jScjSataf, from 
 Nom. Sing. jScjSam) ; Gen. of all genders, jSejSatwv (not even 
 in the Fem. jSejSatwv, as would be required by § 118). 
 
 § 182. Many adjectives of this class have only two end- 
 
 § 181. Dialects. — ^Ta, Fem. of ^oc, heavenly, has in Horn. & : dTa Oedujv, 
 the heavenly one among the goddesses. 
 
 § 183. Dialects. — The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many com- 
 pound adjectives : d^porrj (Masc. d/xfiporog, immortal), dvTiOeij (Masc. 
 dvTiOeog, 
 
76 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 §183. 
 
 ings, the Masc. being used for the Fern. : Masc. and Fern. 
 r\(Tvxp^> Neut. ?7(Tuxov, quiet. Comj)ound adjectives espe- 
 cially are all of 07ily tioo endings : arf/cvoc, childless ; 
 Kapirocjiopog, fruitful. 
 
 § 183. Adjectives ending in £ o c and o o c in tl^ Kom. 
 Masc. are generally contracted (§ 130) : yjivaioq, golden^ 
 and oTrXooc, simple, are thus contracted : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nam. 
 
 XpvaovQ 
 
 Xpvar) 
 
 Xpvaovv 
 
 airXovg 
 
 UTrXfj 
 
 uTrXovv 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XpvcTov 
 
 Xpv(Tng 
 
 Xpv(Tov 
 
 airkov 
 
 airXrjg 
 
 UTrXov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XpV(T(p 
 
 Xpvay 
 
 XpV(T(^ 
 
 ttTrX^ 
 
 airXy 
 
 a7rX(^ 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Xpvaovv 
 
 Xpvariv 
 
 Xpvaovv 
 
 clttKovv 
 
 cnrXfjv 
 
 cLTrXovv 
 
 Voc. 
 
 XpvaovQ 
 
 Xpvtrn 
 
 Xpvaovv 
 
 cnrKovg 
 
 uTrXf} 
 
 ciTrXovv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jsr. A. V. 
 
 XpvtTio 
 
 Xpvaa 
 
 Xpv(T(t) 
 
 drrXu) 
 
 aTrXd 
 
 ctTrXo) 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Xpv(Toiv 
 
 Xpvffdiv 
 
 XpvaoTv 
 
 airXoXv 
 
 cLTtXaXv 
 
 cnrXolv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 XPV<T01 
 
 Xpvcrai 
 
 Xpv(Ta 
 
 cnrXdl 
 
 cnrXdi 
 
 ctTrXd 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Xpvffojv 
 
 XpvffCJv 
 
 XpvaHjv 
 
 airXCJv 
 
 cnrXCjv 
 
 dirXCjv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XpvcroiQ 
 
 Xpvcraig 
 
 Xpv(Tolg 
 
 cnrXoig 
 
 cnrXaig 
 
 cnrXoig 
 
 Ace. % 
 
 XpVtTOVQ 
 
 Xpvaag 
 
 Xpvca 
 
 cnrXovg 
 
 cnrXdg 
 
 cnrXd 
 
 The Fern, ea is contracted to r), except when preceded 
 by a vowel or p ; it is then contracted to a : apyvpia, 
 apyvpa {a?'gentea). The Nom. Plur. oa, oai, produce a : 
 ai : aTrXa, aTrXai. 
 
 The contracted final syllable also receives the circumflex, 
 contrary to § 87 : \pvGiog, xpvaovg. But compound adjec- 
 tives retain the accent on the last syllable but one : ivvovg, 
 well-disposed, Gen. {vvov, Dat. cuvtf^, Nom. Plur. ^vvoi. 
 
 % 184. A few adjectives in w c in the Nom. follow the 
 
 § 183. Dialects. — The adjectives in €oc, oog^ often remain uncon- 
 tracted : Horn. XP^^^V (where e disappears by Bynizesis), KoXXippoog, 
 heautifully-Jiowing. 
 
 § 184. Dialects. — Horn. 'iXaog^ rrXtiog, TrXdrj, TrXaov ; New-Ion. eof = 
 Att. ew f ; for Att. aiog {sahm), Horn, ooog, ?;, ov, comparative aacjrepog. 
 
§ 185. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 77 
 
 Attic 0-Declension (§ 132) : VXswc, Neut. VXtwv, gracious ; 
 a^ioXp^ii^Q, Neut. -wv, considerable ^ TrXiwg, wXia, ttXuov, 
 full. (Twg (from aaog, salvus) has in the Nom. Sing. Fem. 
 and Neut. Plur. a a ; but also the forms ctwoc, trwa, Plur. 
 
 CTwof, (Hjjai. 
 
 Adjectives of the Consonant Declension. 
 
 § 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. follow 
 the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a pe- 
 culiar Fem. with the ending i a, which, however, undergoes 
 various changes in combination with the Stem. Such ad- 
 jective-stems of three denominations are : 
 
 1. Stems in v (Masc. and» Neut., § 154). The Fem. is 
 formed from J,he Stem as it appears in the Gen. {r\ St); € 
 and L a are contracted, and the accent remains on the last 
 syllable of the Stem : hence — 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ij-g 
 
 eid 
 
 V 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 r/dv-g^ sweet. 
 
 r)deXa 
 
 rjdv 
 
 Gen. 
 
 r'iSeog 
 
 rideiag 
 
 ridhg 
 
 Bat. 
 
 ?/^£l 
 
 97^a'^ 
 
 rideX 
 
 Ace. 
 
 T)dvv 
 
 rj^Eiav 
 
 vSv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 Mm. Ace. 
 
 Tjdee 
 
 ri^eid 
 
 t)See 
 
 Gen. Bat. 
 
 r'/dkoiv 
 
 r'l^eiaiv 
 
 rjdeoiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 JSom. • 
 
 r/ceig 
 
 rjSdai 
 
 -n^ka 
 
 Gen. 
 
 rjSkojv 
 
 it^uwv 
 
 ri^etov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 T)di<n{v) 
 
 r'jSeiaig 
 
 . ij^kaiiy) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 rjdeXg 
 
 r]Mdg 
 
 ■ r)dsa 
 
 § 185. Dialects. — Horn, sometimes has er] for Att. f la : (3a6eTj (J3a9da, 
 deep) ; the Ion. £ a for tia: Horn. ijKka ''Ipigj swift Iris. Besides OfjXvg, 
 feminine^ we find also ry^wc, irovXvg (iroXvg, much), as Fem. Sometimes 
 € a is used for v v in the Ace. Sing. Masc. : evpea irovrov, the wide sea. 
 
78 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 186. 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 yXvKvg, sweet. jSpaxvg, short. evpvg, hroad. 
 
 (3padve, slow. raxvg, swift. 
 
 Obs. — OfjXvg, female, diflfering also in accent, occurs as a Feminine. 
 
 § 186. 2. 8te7ns in v. The t in « a is transferred to the* 
 preceding syllable (§ 65) : St. ju c X a v, Nom. Masc. /LieXag, 
 Fern. fxiXmva (from lueXav-ia), Neut. juiXav, black. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nbm. 
 
 /usXae 
 
 fikXaiva 
 
 fisXav 
 
 Gen. 
 
 \ik\avog 
 
 fieXaivijg 
 
 fieXavog 
 
 Bat. 
 
 [xeXavi 
 
 fxeXaivy 
 
 likXavi 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fieXava 
 
 fikXaivav 
 
 fxkXav 
 
 Voc. 
 
 fisXav 
 
 fikXatva 
 
 fisXav 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 K A. V. 
 
 fieXave 
 
 IxeXaiva 
 
 fieXave 
 
 G.D. 
 
 fxeXdvoiv 
 
 fieXaivaiv 
 
 H^XdvoVif 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 fisXaveg 
 
 fxeXaivai 
 
 fisXava 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fxeXdviov 
 
 fiaXaivwv 
 
 fieXdvojv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 fxeXafft 
 
 fieXaivaig 
 
 HeXafTi 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fikXavag 
 
 fieXaivag 
 
 jxeXava 
 
 Examples for Declension. 
 St. TaXav, ToXdgy rdXaiva, rdXav, unfortunate. 
 St. TEpev, Tsprjv, Tspeiva, Hpsv, tender. 
 
 § 187. 3. Stems in vt. To these belong especially the 
 numerous participial forms. In the Fem. the v t combines 
 with the ending i a to form cr a, the previous vowel being 
 lengthened by compensation (§ 50) : Xtyovr-La becoming 
 Xtyoucra. 
 
 The adjectives in e v r have ^Gtra in the Fem. : -^apkig, 
 Xapk(j(Ta, ')(apUv, pleasing, St. xapievr. For the Dat. 
 Plur.,see § 149. 
 
 § 187. Dialects. — Adjectives in evr (Nom. Masc. eic) are sometimes 
 contracted : IIom.Tifiyg=:riixr]Eig,?ionorable; Xix)TevvTa=.X(x)T6evTa, abound- 
 ing in lotuses; poet. irTepovcrcTazzzTrTepoeaaa, 
 
187. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 79 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 hosing. 
 
 
 
 hosing. 
 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Xvcrdg 
 
 Xvcrdaa 
 
 Xvadv 
 
 Xviov 
 
 Xvovaa 
 
 Xvov 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XvaavTOQ 
 
 Xvadcnjg 
 
 XvaavTog 
 
 XvovTog 
 
 Xvov<TT]g 
 
 XvovTog 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XvaavTi 
 
 Xvadcry 
 
 XvffavTi 
 
 XvOVTl 
 
 Xvovcfy 
 
 XvOVTl 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XvaavTU 
 
 Xvaauav 
 
 Xv(Tav 
 
 Xvovra 
 
 Xvovaav 
 
 Xvov 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Xvcrag 
 
 Xvaacra 
 
 Xvaav 
 
 Xv<t)v 
 
 Xvovaa 
 
 Xvov 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iV. A. V. 
 
 Xvaavre 
 
 Xvadaa 
 
 Xv(Taj/Te 
 
 Xvovre 
 
 XvovGa 
 
 Xvovre 
 
 G.D. 
 
 XvadvTOiv 
 
 Xvadaaiv 
 
 XvadvToiv 
 
 XVOVTOIV 
 
 Xvoixraiv 
 
 XVOVTOIV 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ncmi. 
 
 XvaavTSQ 
 
 Xvaatrai 
 
 Xvaavra 
 
 XvovTsg 
 
 Xvovaai 
 
 Xvovra 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XvrrdvTOJV 
 
 XvaaaCJv 
 
 Xv(TdvTii)V 
 
 XVOVTIOV 
 
 XVOVCTOIV 
 
 Xvovriov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Xvadcn 
 
 Xvadaaig 
 
 Xvadcrt 
 
 Xvovai 
 
 Xvovaaig 
 
 Xvovai 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XvaavTag 
 
 Xvddaag 
 
 XvcravTu 
 
 Xvovrag 
 
 Xvovaag 
 
 Xvovra 
 
 Sing. 
 
 loosed. 
 
 
 
 giving. 
 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 XvQdg 
 
 XvOelcra 
 
 XvB'ev 
 
 di^ovg 
 
 didovaa 
 
 dtSov 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XvQkvTog 
 
 XvOEicrrjg 
 
 XvQsvTog 
 
 SiSovTog 
 
 li^ovarjg 
 
 Stdovrog 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XvO&vri 
 
 XvQeicry 
 
 XvOkvTL 
 
 hdovTt 
 
 SiSovay 
 
 ^idovri 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XvOavra 
 
 XvQuaav 
 
 XvBkv 
 
 diSSvra 
 
 didov<Tav 
 
 ^idov 
 
 Voc. 
 
 XvOeig 
 
 XvOeXaa 
 
 Xv9ep 
 
 didovg 
 
 didoiKTa 
 
 dtdov 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A. V. 
 
 XvOevTS 
 
 XvBeitra 
 
 XvBevre 
 
 dlSoVTS 
 
 dL^ovara 
 
 SiSovre 
 
 G.B. 
 
 XvQkvToiv 
 
 XvQdaaiv 
 
 Xv9kvT0iv 
 
 didovToiv 
 
 Sidovaaiv 
 
 didcvroiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mm. 
 
 XvOevTsg 
 
 XvOelcrai 
 
 Xv9evTa 
 
 SidovTig 
 
 diSovaai 
 
 diSovra 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XvQkvTiov 
 
 Xv9ei(Tu)V 
 
 Xv9evT0)v 
 
 did6vT(t)v 
 
 didov(TU)P 
 
 Sidovriov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Xv9uat 
 
 XvOdaaig 
 
 XvBelai 
 
 didoixTt 
 
 didovaaig 
 
 diSovtri 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XvOavrag 
 
 Xv9el<Tag 
 
 Xv9kvTa 
 
 diSovTag 
 
 SiSovarag 
 
 ^iSovra 
 
 Sing. 
 
 pleasing. 
 
 
 
 showing. 
 
 
 
 Mm. 
 
 Xapieig 
 
 Xapaaoa 
 
 Xapiep 
 
 deiKvvg 
 
 ^UKVvaa 
 
 deiKvvv 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XapisvTog 
 
 Xapik<T(Tr]g 
 
 XapievTog 
 
 hiKvvvTog 
 
 deiKvvffrjg 
 
 dsiKvvvrog 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XapievTi 
 
 Xapikrray 
 
 XopiBi'Ti 
 
 SeiKVVVTl 
 
 SeiKVixry 
 
 SuKvvvri 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XapievTU 
 
 Xapkaaav 
 
 Xapiev 
 
 deiKvvvra 
 
 BuKvvaav 
 
 dsiKvvv 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Xaplev 
 
 XapU(T(Ta 
 
 Xctpiev 
 
 deiKvvg 
 
 hiKvvaa 
 
 SeiKvvv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 KA. V 
 
 Xapkvre 
 
 Xctpdaoa 
 
 XapkvTE 
 
 SeiKVVVTS 
 
 hiKVvaa 
 
 deiKvvvre 
 
 G.B. 
 
 XapikvTOiv x«ptso'(r«iv x"^P'^'^^tolv 
 
 SeiKVVVTOlV 
 
 dnicvixTaiv 
 
 deiKVVvroiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mm. 
 
 XaplevTsg 
 
 Xapieccrai 
 
 XapiBVTa 
 
 SeiKvvvTsg 
 
 hiKvvaai 
 
 deiKVvvra 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XapdvTwv 
 
 Xapte(T<TMV 
 
 Xapdvrujv 
 
 dsiKVVVTCJV 
 
 dfiKWcraiv 
 
 ceiKVvvrwv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Xapitai 
 
 Xapikaaaig 
 
 Xapi^frt- 
 
 deiKvvai 
 
 deiKvixraig 
 
 deiKVV(n 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XapkvTug 
 
 Xapdffffag 
 
 XapiEVTU 
 
 dtiKvvvrag 
 
 d^iKVVcrag 
 
 SeiKVvvra 
 
80 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 188. 
 
 Obs. — The form of the Fern, is explained from r before t becoming 
 (T, according to § 60, i being dropped after <t, and v before a being 
 thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel : 
 XvovTia^ Xvovcrta, Xvovaa, Xvovaa. 
 
 iravTia. Tzavaia. Travaa, Tcaaa 
 
 § 188. 4. Stems in o r. The participles of the Perfect 
 Active in o r (Nona. Sing. Masc. w g, Neut. og) have v i a 
 in the Fem. : XeXukwc, XeXvKvTa, XeXvKog, one who has 
 freed. See §§ 146, .147. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Mm. 
 
 XeXvKoJg 
 
 XeXvKvla 
 
 XeXvKog 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XeXvKOTOQ 
 
 XeXvnviag 
 
 XeXvKoTog 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XeXvkoti 
 
 XeXvKvig, 
 
 XeXvKOTL 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XEXvKOTa 
 
 XsXvKvlav 
 
 XaXvKog 
 
 Voc. 
 
 XeXvkcjq 
 
 XeXvKvla 
 
 XeXvKog 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 XEXvKore 
 
 XEXvKvia 
 
 XeXvkots 
 
 Q.D. 
 
 XeXvkotoiv 
 
 XeXvKviaiv 
 
 XeXvKoroiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 XeXvKOTEQ 
 
 XEXvicvTai 
 
 XeXvKOTa 
 
 Gen. 
 
 XeXvKoTMjv 
 
 XeXvKviojv 
 
 XeXvKoTojv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 XeXvKofTi 
 
 XeXvKviaig 
 
 XeXvKoci 
 
 Ace. 
 
 XEXvKorag 
 
 XeXvicviag 
 
 XeXvKora 
 
 Obs. — The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the 
 Masc. and Neut. is explained by the 7^ which was originally before 
 the 0. From Por-ia came first focr-ia (§ 60), then by a peculiar 
 contraction (Po becoming v) va-ia, finally (o- being dropped, § 61, 
 h) v-'ia and via. 
 
 § 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with 
 Stems according to the Second Principal Declension are : 
 i. Stems in g (Inflexion given under §§ 164, 165), as : 
 
 aatprjg ffatpsg, clear. Gen. aa^ovg. 
 
 dXrjOrig dXt]Oeg, trice. " dXtjOovg. 
 
 Other Examples for Beclension. 
 irXriprjg^fuU. \pevSfjg, false. aff^aXrjg, safe. dvcr/ievrjg, hostile. 
 
 2. Stems in v (Inflexion given under §§ 146, 147), as : 
 
 TrSTTlOV TTETTOV, HpC. GCU. TTSTTOV-Og. 
 
 eMaiiJ-oJV evdaifiov, happy. " evSai/xov-og. 
 
 G<jj(pp(t)v (Tuxppov, reasonable. 
 
 G(t)<ppov-og. 
 
 § 189. Dialects. — Herod, ipariv for dpariv. 
 
191. 
 
 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 81 
 
 Other Examples for Declension. 
 
 ixvrjfiu)!/, mindful of. tTriXrjafKjjv, forgetful of. 
 
 TToXvirpdymuv^ much occupied. 
 
 3. Isolated forms, as : 
 
 UpiQ iSpi, acquainted with. " Gen. Idpi-oQ. 
 
 (Inflexion according to § 157, D.) 
 dppr]v (^dpffrjv), dppev, TUale. Gen. dppev-og. 
 
 Compounds of substantives, such as d-n-aTajp, Neut. dirarop, St. tt are jO 
 (Nom. TruTrjp), fatherless ; dvcfxrjTdjp, firjTtjp, unmotherly ; ^iXoiroXig, -t, 
 Gen, -iS-oc, loving the city; eveXirig (Gen. eueXTrt^-oc), hopefid. 
 
 § 190. 4. Besides these, there is a large number of ad- 
 jectives which have only one ending, because either their 
 meaning or form excludes a Neuter : apira^, rapacious, St. 
 a piray ; ^vyag^ fugitive ^ St. v y a S ; ayvojQ, unacquaint- 
 ed, St. ay V it)T ', airaiQ, childless , St. a tt a f o ; jiaKpo^up, 
 long -handed ; 'Kkvy\q, jpoor, St. ^T^v^T\ yvjuvrig, light - 
 armed., St. yv\ivy]T. Some adjectives of one ending fol- 
 low the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as : 
 t^cAovrr/c, Gen. IQ^ovtov, "Doluntary ; they occur only in 
 the Masc. 
 
 § 191. The following adjectives are irregular: /uiyag, 
 great ; Trokvg^ much ; and Trp^og, gentle, the forms of eaph 
 being derived from different Stems, viz., in fiiyag, from 
 
 § 190. Dialects. — Horn, has also many adjectives in the Fern, only: 
 KoXXiyvvaiKu, Acc. Sing. e. g., ^Trdprrjv, abounding in beautiful women; 
 ISioTidveipa, e. g. ^9ir], men nourishing. 
 
 § 191. Dialects. — In Horn, both Stems, ttoXv and ttoXXo, in Masc. 
 and Neut., arc almost completely declined ; tliQ, Fern, is regularly 
 
 TToXXr). 
 
 N. TToXvg TTOvXvg or TroXXog 
 
 G. TToXXov or TToXiog 
 
 7roXX(^ 
 
 TToXXov 
 
 TToXXoi 
 
 Sing. W. TToXvg 
 
 
 TTOvXvg 0] 
 
 G. 
 
 TTOXXOU 
 
 or 
 
 TcoXiog 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 TToXvV 
 
 
 TTOvXvV 
 
 Plur. N. TToXkg 
 
 
 {iroXHg) 
 
 .0^. 
 
 TTOXXOJV 
 
 or 
 
 iroXkwv 
 
 D. 
 
 7roXiea<n(v) 
 
 7roXk(jai{y) 
 
 A. 
 
 TToXeag 
 
 
 * 
 
 N. TToXv TTOvXv TZOXXOV 
 
 N. TToXv TTOvXv 
 
 TToXXoV 
 
 TToXXd 
 
 or TToXXoXg 
 
 JV. iroXXd 
 
 TToXkmiy) 
 TToXXovg 
 Herod, has scarcely any forms except from the Stem ttoXXo: ttoX- 
 
 XoVy TToXXoi. 
 
 D 2 
 
82 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 192. 
 
 the Stems /mey a and /x c y a X o ; in TroXvg, from iroXv and 
 TT o X X o ; in irpaog, from ir p(}o and TTjoaii. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 likyag 
 
 fieydXij 
 
 fikya 
 
 TToXvg 
 
 7ro\X?7 
 
 TToXv 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fieyaXov 
 
 fieydXrjg 
 
 fieydXov 
 
 TTOXXOV 
 
 iroXKifg 
 
 TToXXov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 H^yaXifi 
 
 fisydXy 
 
 fxeydXtit 
 
 TToXX^i 
 
 TToXXy 
 
 TToXXfp 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fikyav 
 
 fieydXijv 
 
 fikya 
 
 TTOXVV 
 
 TToXXrjv 
 
 iroXv 
 
 Voc. 
 
 fikya 
 
 HeydXrj 
 
 fikya 
 
 TToXv 
 
 TToXXrf 
 
 TToXv 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W.A.V. 
 
 fieydXu) 
 
 fiEydXa 
 
 fisydXu) 
 
 
 
 
 a.D. 
 
 fieydXoiv 
 
 fieydXaiv 
 
 fieydXoiv 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 [XEyaXoi 
 
 fiEydXai 
 
 fisydXa 
 
 TToXXoi 
 
 TToXXai 
 
 TToXXd 
 
 Gen. 
 
 fieyaXoJv 
 
 fieydXujv 
 
 fieydXiov 
 
 TroXXwv 
 
 TToXXwV 
 
 TToXXwP 
 
 Bat. 
 
 fieyaXoig 
 
 fiEydXaig 
 
 fiiydXoig 
 
 TToXXoXg 
 
 TToXXaig 
 
 TToXXolg 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fieyaXovQ 
 
 p.e.ydXag 
 
 fiEydXa 
 
 TToXXovg 
 
 TToXXdg 
 
 TToXXd 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Trp^oQ 
 
 TTpaeia 
 
 Trpav 
 
 Trp^ot, or 
 TrpaEig 
 
 TrpaCiai 
 
 Tvpaka 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Trpq,ov 
 
 TTpaeiag 
 
 7rpg,ov 
 
 TTpakwu 
 
 vpaHwv 
 
 7rpaku)v 
 
 Bat. 
 
 irp^ifi 
 
 Trpaeig. 
 
 ^p4v 
 
 Trp^oig, or 
 7rpakm{v) 
 
 TTpauaig 
 
 Trp^oig, or 
 7rpakcn{v) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 TTp^OV 
 
 irpaelav 
 
 irp^ov 
 
 Trpq.ovg 
 
 Trpaeiag 
 
 irpaka 
 
 B. Comparison. 
 § 192. The first and most frequent ending of tlie Com- 
 parative is r £ /o o (Nom. Tfjooc, Ttpa, Tepov)\ of the Super- 
 lative Taro (Nom. raroq, rarr], rarov), with the usual in- 
 flexion of adjectives (§ 180). These endings are affixed to 
 the pure Stem of the Masc., as : 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 Kov(j)og, light. 
 
 KOV<l)0 
 
 Kovtporepog, a, ov 
 
 KOvtporaTogy t] ov 
 
 yXvKvg, sweet. 
 
 yXvKV 
 
 yXvKvrepog 
 
 yXvKvraTog 
 
 jueXaf, blacJc. 
 
 fieXav 
 
 fieXdvrepog 
 
 fieXdvTarog 
 
 XapUig^ graceful. 
 
 Xapievr 
 
 Xapikarepog 
 
 Xapuararog 
 
 
 (from xf^-P^^vT-T^pog-, according to 
 
 §§46and|J). 
 
 (Ta<l)r]g, clear. 
 
 a a^eg 
 
 aacpkaTEpog 
 
 cra(pk(TTarog 
 
 fiUKap., happy. 
 
 fiaK ap 
 
 fiaKaprepog 
 
 fiaKaprarog 
 
 TrevTjg, poor. 
 
 7r€ vr]T 
 
 TreveffTEpog 
 
 TrevsaTttTog 
 
 (for TrevrjT-Tepog, rarog^ according to § 46, r} being shortened). 
 
§ 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83 
 
 § 193. The following points are to be observed : 
 1 The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the 
 preceding syllable is long (§ 74, etc.), but lengthen it to 
 w when that is short : Trovrjpo-Tepog, tvorse / wiKpo-TaTOv, 
 77iosi hitter; ao(pu)'TepoQ, wiser ; a^iw-TaTi], most worthy. 
 Every syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants 
 or a double consonant is here considered long (§§ 76, 
 77). 
 
 § 194. 2. The o is always rejected after ai in the adjective yepatde, 
 senex^ sometimes in TraXato^ , antiquus^ and axoXdiog, at leisure : ye- 
 paiTepoQj TraXaiTarog. 
 
 § 195. 3. The o or to is changed to at in fieaog, medius ; itrog, like; 
 ivdiog, clear ; Trpuiiog, early y oipiogy late : fietraiTarog, TrpojiaiTepov. 
 ijcTvxog, peaceful, has ricrvxaiTepog, and rjffvxdjrepog ; ^iXog, dear, be- 
 sides 0t\wrf)ooc, -TUTog, also (j)iXrepog, -TUTog, and ^iXairepog, -rarog ; 
 TrXrimaiTepogj TrXrjaLairaTog, belong to TrXrjaiov, near, and TrapaTrXt]- 
 mairepog, more like, to the same ; Trpovpyiairepog to rrpovpyov, from 
 irpb tpyov, advantageously. 
 
 § 196. 4. The endings ear ep o-g, eararo-g, are inorganically ap- 
 plied : 
 
 • a) to Stems in ov : aco^poveffrepog (St. <t(o^ pov, Nom. aw^pojv, reason- 
 able), evdaifiovearepog (St. evdaifiov, Nom. evSai/xwv, fortunxxte). 
 TrloTspog, -TUTog, from 7r'nov,fat, and TreTraiTspog, -rarog, from TrtTrwr, 
 rijye, are exceptional. 
 
 5) to the Stems ofdKpdrog, unmixed; Ipfxofievog, strong; d(Tfievog, will- 
 ing : ciKparecrrepog, kpp<op.Evk(Tr^pog. More seldom to others. 
 
 c) to some Stems in oo contracted: evvovarepog for evvoecrrepog, from 
 evvovg, well-disposed. 
 
 § 1 97. 5. i<rrepog, lararog, occur with XdXog, talkative ; rrrtoxog, 
 beggarly; 6\po<pdyog, epicure; fiovo(j)dyog, eating alone; and some 
 adjectives of one ending, as KXeTrrrj-g, thievish : XaXiarepog, tttw- 
 Xl<yrarog, KXeTrricrr^pog. 
 
 Others of one gender in rj-g follow the rule of those in o : v^piaro- 
 repog, from v^pi(Trr]g, haughty. 
 
 § 193. Dialects. — The quantity of the 0-sound in poets is rather 
 doubtful : Hom. oi^vpwrarog, the most wretched. 
 
 Horn, has Idvvrara, from iQvg, straight ; (padvrarog, from ^auvog, glit- 
 tering ; dxap'Krnpog (for dxapir-repog, according to § 46), from «x«/otfj 
 graceless. 
 
-84 COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 198. 
 
 The compounds of xapig, grace, favo7% fonn their Comparative and 
 Superlative as if they ended in x«iOt7-o-c : tTnxapiribrepog, more 
 obliging. 
 
 § 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com- 
 parative is f o V (Nom., Masc, and Fem. i w v, Neut. i o.^v) ; 
 of the Superlative, kjto (Nom. laToq, larr], kttov). The 
 Stem- vowel is rejected before i. The accent is placed as 
 far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl. In- 
 flexion of the Comp., § 170. So is formed from : 
 
 Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 ri^'uDV, -ov i]di(TTog, -r/, -ov 
 
 OdffaojVj -ov rdxKTTOQ, -rj, -ov 
 
 (from raxiojv, according to §§ 54, 57). 
 /teyaf, large. fiey a fiEi^ojv, -ov fieyitrrog 
 
 (from jxeyiujv, according to § 58). 
 
 Ods. — The length of a in Odaaov (compare /xdWov, § 202), and the 
 diphthong of fxei^iov, is explained from the i passing into the pre- 
 ceding syllable, as in dudviov (compare § 55); 
 
 Farther with suppression of p : 
 
 tx9p6, -e, hostile. txB'nov, -ov Superl. txBtcrog. 
 
 ahxpo, -f, sJiameful. aiaxioiv, -ov " alaxK^rog. 
 
 oiKTpo, -g, pitiable. " olKTicrrog. 
 
 ixOp-og and oiKTp-og also have the forms in T^po-g and raro-g. 
 
 § 199. This comparison occurs also in connection with 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Stem. 
 
 i)Ug, agreeoMe. 
 
 r)5v 
 
 raxvg, swift. 
 
 raxv 
 
 § 198. Dialects. — The endings t w v, i o- r o c, are more frequent in the 
 poets : Hom. ^iXiiov {<pi\og, dear) ; y\vKi<Dv (yXvKvg, sweet) ; ^Kiarog {ojKvg, 
 swift)', (3d9i(TTog (JiaQvg, deep) ; jSpdacTojv = jSpaxiiov (jSpaxvg, short), Bup. 
 poet. jSpdxKTTog, Hom. Superl. (idpharog (jSpaSvg, slow, § 59, D.) ; izdaaiov 
 =:7raxi(iiv {Traxvg, thick)', ndaaiov z=:^ ixcLk'hov (jiaKpog, long). Sup. firjKKTTog 
 (Dor. ficLKiaTog) ; KvdiiDv {tcvSpog, famous) ; jui^wv, ISTew-Ion. for fieiZiov. 
 
 § 199. Dialects. — 1. Hom. Comp. dpdiov, Positive Kparv-g, Superl. 
 KdpTKTTog ; Comp. Xwinpog ; New-Ion. Kpscracov =: KpEiaawv ; poet. (3eX- 
 repog, (SeXrarog, <pepTepog, ^spraTog, or <pepL(TTog, mme excellent, most excel- 
 lent. 
 
 2. Hom. KaK(x)Ttpog ; x^PVQ^ Xfpeiwv, x^P^f^orepog, x^^porepog ; New. -Ion. 
 'd<T(X(t)vz=:r]cr(Twv. (Compare Kpk(jao)v, fik^iov, § 198, Obs.) 
 
 4. Hom. vTr-oXil(x)v. 
 
§ 199. 
 
 COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 85 
 
 other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the 
 changes of sound of §§ 55-58 are often applied : 
 1. For the idea Osgood: 
 
 Positive 
 
 ayaQoQ 
 [St. d /x e v] 
 [St. dpec] 
 [St. /3€Xro] 
 [St. KpaTv] 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 afMEivaJV, ajxuvov 
 
 [cijoet'wv, Horn.] dpiarog, t], ov 
 
 (SsXtiojv^ (ikXriov (ikXriaTog, ?/, ov 
 
 Kpuaavjv {KpeiTTiov) KpaTitrrog, ij, ov 
 
 N. KpeTaaov (kpeXttov) 
 [St. \ w y] X(i)twv or Xi^wv Xi^arog, tj, ov 
 
 i\r. Xijjiov or Xipov 
 
 Obs. — dfiEivujv and dpiarog rather express excellence, capacity; Kpdcr- 
 aojv, Kpariarog, strength, preponderance (Lat. superior) ; ijaatuv is op- 
 posed to Kpd<JGh)V. 
 
 2. For the idea of dad : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 KUKOg KUKllOV JV. KiXKlOV KUKKTrog 
 
 [St. xep] x^'P*^^ (deterior), JSF. x^pov xf/pioToe 
 
 [St. r) K v] i](T<Tiov (inferior), JV. tjaaov JV. PI. ijiciara, least of aU. 
 
 3. fxiKpog, small, besides fiiKpoTEpog 
 
 /xeiiov, smaller, If. jxeXov 
 
 4. oXiyog, little, 
 [St. £\a%w], iXd<T(r(i)v N. tXaacov 
 
 5. TToXvg, mucTi, TrXeiojv (ttXswv) 
 
 N". TrXeov (also ttXeTv) 
 G. KuXog, heautiful, as if from 
 
 KoXXog, heauty koXXiojv -ZV! koXXlov 
 
 7. p(}hog, easy, "* 
 [St. pa], p4^v N. pq.ov 
 
 8. dXyHvog, painful, as if from 
 dXyog, pain, dXyiwv . N. dXyiov 
 
 fiLKporarog 
 
 oXiyicrrog 
 tXdxKTrog 
 TrXeicTTog 
 
 KoXXiaTog 
 
 pq.aTog 
 
 dXyiarog 
 
 Dialects. — 5. Homer contracts TrXkov to irXwv, TrXeoveg to irXevveg; 
 Plur. also irXeeg, irXeag, TrXia. 
 
 7. Ion. pr]idiog ; Hom. prfiTEpog, ptjiarog, prjtraTog. Hom. forms single 
 degrees from substantives : Kvvrepog, more doggish (kvojv, dog) ; piyiov, 
 worse ; plyog, cold, shudder. 
 
 Defectives : Iveprepoi, also tragic vkpnpoi {inferi, for which Positive 
 ivepoi) ; Hom, TTVfxaTog and XolaOog, Xoiadiog, last ; vcrrdTiog z=: vaTurog, 
 devTUTog, in a like sense, Trpdjuarog ^=: irpwrog, the first. 
 
86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 200. 
 
 § 300. Finally observe farther the Defectives : 
 
 varepoQ, later, vffTaTog, ultimus. 
 iffx^^Tog, extremus. 
 
 (yeog, new), vearog, novissimus. 
 
 (vTrep, over), v-jrarog, mmmus. 
 
 {irpo, before), TrpoTspog, prior, TzpCJTog, primtis. 
 
 (jrkpav, on the other side), Trepairspog. 
 
 C. Adverbs of Adjectives, 
 
 § 201. Adverbs are derived from the Adjective Stem by- 
 affixing to it the syllable w g. The o of the Stem is en- 
 tirely dropped: <^tXoc, adv. ^tXwc The Stems of the Sec- 
 ond Principal Declension ffave the same form as in the 
 Genitive : raxvQf swift, rax^toQ ; ca^^ic, clear, (Ta(l)eiog, 
 contr. (Ta(l)LJg ; cruxppojv, 7'easonaMe, atvfppovujg. Contrac- 
 tion occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The ac- 
 cent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Geni- 
 tive Plural of the corresponding adjective : \pvxp6c, cold, 
 \pv\pLjg ; ^tKaiog, jiist, dtKaitog ; irag (St. tt a v r), iravriog, 
 every way. 
 
 The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the 
 Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb. 
 
 § 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as : ray^, 
 from rayyg, quich (meaning, in Att. prose, ^^M<^^) ; a^ia, 
 at the same tiine ; naka, very. The Comp. of [laka is 
 IxaXkov {jpotius)=^a\iov (§ b^)', Superl. juaXiaTa {jpotissi- 
 7)ium). fu, loell, as an adverb to ayaQogy good, stands alone. 
 
 § 203. Adverbs in w ^ are also formed from Comparatives 
 and Superlatives : l^^f^aioTepwg, more frmly / KaWiovwg, 
 more beautifully. But, as a rule, the comparative has the 
 
 § 203. Dialects. — The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer : 
 &Ka {quickly, wKvg) ; \iya, aloud, Xiyvg ; Kapra, strongly, very, to Kparvg, 
 compare § 59, D. ; (rdcpa (clearly, aa(pr]g). 
 
 Homer has for w or iv the adjective ivg or rjvg, good. 
 
 §§ 303, 204. Dialects. — Homeric UaffTepu), iKacTTdro) (from iKdg,far); 
 daaov {pzayx'-^'^)-! aaaorkpio (dyxt, near), ayxi(fra', New-Ion. dyxorarw, 
 dyxorara. In addition to this, there is the Horn. kiraaavT^poi, en 
 with V instead of o. 
 
205. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 87 
 
 Neut. Ace. Sing.^ the superlative the ISfeut. Ace. Plur., as 
 an adverb : l5s(5ai6TEpov, koXXiov ; |3fj3a(orara, KaXXtcrra. 
 
 § 304. Adverbs in w, like dvo), above ; Kdrw, delow ; taio, inside ; t^w, 
 outside^ have no q in Compar. and Superl. .: avtuTspu), Karwrl/ow, 
 likewise dTrwrs/ow, farther (from diro) ; tyyvrepu) (or iyyvTepov), 
 iyyvTCLTO) (or tyyvrara), from cyyvf, wear, and some others. 
 
 Chap. VIIL — Inflexion of Pronouns. 
 § 205. The Personal Pronouns are : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 iyib, I [ego] 
 
 av, thou [tu] 
 
 
 
 Oen. 
 
 t/xoy, iiov 
 
 <TOV 
 
 ov, of him. 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 kfioiy fioi 
 
 (TOt 
 
 ol 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ifis, Ilk [me] 
 
 as [te] 
 
 ■i [se] 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 KA. 
 
 (vCji) vu), we. 
 
 (acpm) acpM, ye. 
 
 (acpios), they. 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 {vmv) V(^v 
 
 (ffipioiv) a<p(pv 
 
 (atpiijtv) 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 t'l^iiQ, we. 
 
 vjieXg, you. 
 
 a(peXg, they. 
 
 N. a(p£a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ilfiwv 
 
 v^S)v 
 
 acpuJv 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 r'lUlv 
 
 VfiXv 
 
 a(pl-ai(y) 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 r)fidg 
 
 vfidg 
 
 atpdg 
 
 N. a^sa 
 
 § 205. Dialects. — The following are special additional forms of the 
 Ion. Dialect. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.) 
 Sin 
 
 rvvT] [tu] 
 
 \aso, aev (so, sv 
 
 [aeXo, as-Oev (flo, s-Qev 
 
 Toi, retv tot) compare § 34, 
 
 te j D. 4. 
 (vfikg) vfineg 
 v}ikit)Vy vfieiojv (T^fwv, a(pei(t)v 
 
 vnjxiiy) a(pi(v) 
 v^kag^ vufxe cr(pdg, a<pkag, 
 
 a(puag^ a<pe 
 An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing, of the third person is 
 fx i p, trag. V i V, both enclitic ; in a like sense acps occurs in the poets. 
 viv seldom stands for the Plural. 
 
 Nom. tyojv 
 
 ^^^'X^ilHO, l/i£-6l€v(§178,D.) 
 
 Bat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Plur, Nrnn. (v/xkg) dfifieg 
 
 Gen. rifiEiov, ijfidoiv 
 Bat. djifiiiy) 
 
 Ace. rineag, dfifie 
 
88 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 206. 
 
 § 206. The Stems of the Sing, are : e fie, for the first 
 person ; a f , for the second ; e, for the third. The Nom- 
 inative, however, is formed differently from them : lyd), gv, 
 and that of the third person is entirely wanting. 
 
 Obs. — The <r of the Stem ae has arisen from r (§ 60, a) \te\ which 
 remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem t goes back to /^e, 
 and this to a still older form, aP^ [Lat. se for me\. (§ 60,^ 5.) In 
 the form <t0€, the f is hardened into ^. 
 
 The Stems of the Dual are : v w {jio-s], a(lni), (jcfxt). The 
 Dual of the third person does not occur in prose. 
 
 The Stems of the Plural are : 17 ju f , u /x e, <t t (e is gen- 
 erally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex : 
 see Dialects). 
 
 § 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal Pro- 
 nouns, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned in § 92, 
 2 ; in that case the first person has the forms beginning 
 with ju. But when emphatic, as well as generally after 
 prepositions, it retains its accent, and the first person has 
 the fuller forms : doKu /uloi, it seems to me y IfioX ov aoi 
 TovTo ape<TKsi, this pleases m^e, not you. 
 
 The Gen., Dat., and Ace. Plur. of the first and second persons, when 
 not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first syllable : 
 rjixwv, v/iiv, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and 
 A!?c. is usually shortened : TJfiiv, rjixag (Hom.). When emphatic, 
 with the final syllable shortened, they are written t)fiiv, vfiiv. 
 
 § 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from the 
 Stems of the Personal Pronouns : 
 
 St. € ju 6, e/tiof, my. St. ?7 /i €, r/fieTEpo^, our. 
 
 " (7 €, aoQ^ thy. " I* /i 6, vfierepoQ, your. 
 
 " e, og, his, her. " a<pe, cr^eTepog, their. 
 
 Obs. — The ending npog is that of the comparative (§ 193). 
 
 § 208. Dialects. — Hom. additional forms of the Possessives : te6q 
 \tuus'\, log {suns'], afxag (properly Dor.), v/iog, acpog. From the Dual 
 Stems vw, (T(poj: vtJiTepog, nos-ter ; cr^mTEpog, belonging to you two; afiog 
 (also ufiog) often means my, og sometimes means own, without any ref- 
 erence to a particular person. 
 
§ 211. REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PROXOUNS. 89 
 
 § 209. avT(j-g, avTijf avro, self, is declined like a com- 
 mon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Ace. 
 Yoc. Sing, has no v (compare the article to). 
 
 6 avTog {avTog), 17 avrr) (avTr])y to qvto (rauro or TavTOv), 
 the same, Lat. idem. 
 
 § 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined 
 with avTog, produce the Reflexive Pronouns. 
 
 Singular. Gen. M. N. F. Dat. M. N. F. Ace. M. F. N. 
 
 1st person, IfiavTOv -fjQ Ifiavri^ -y tfiavTov -i]v^ myself, 
 
 2d person, treavTOv -iig ceavT<^ -y aeavrov -rjv, thyself. 
 
 or (TtwTov -rjg aavTi^ -y aavrov -r]v 
 
 3d person, iavTov -rjg tavT(^ -y iavTov -rjv -6, Mmself Tier- 
 
 or avTov -fJQ avT(^ -y avrov -t]v -6, self, it 
 
 In the plural, both Stems are declined together : 
 Plural. Gen. M.F.N. Dat.M.N. F. Ace. M. P. 
 
 1st person, yfidv avT&v r'lfiiv avToiq -aXg t]fiag avrovg -dg, ourselves. 
 
 2d person, vfiHiv avrwv vfxlv avrolg -a7g vfiag avrovg -dg, yourselves. 
 
 3d person, acpdv avrdv (T(pi<nv avroig -alg (T<pdg avrovg -dg^ themselves. 
 
 Neut. a(pi.a avrd 
 
 Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : 
 
 tavrCJv iavroXg -alg tavrovg -dg -d 
 
 or avrwv avroXg -alg avrovg -dg -d 
 
 §211. aXXo'Qy aXXr], aXXo, another (alius), is declined 
 like avTog. 
 
 The Stem aXXo combined with itself produces the Re- 
 ciprocal Pronoun aXX-r]Xo (for aXX-aXXo), occurring 
 only in the Dual and Plural. 
 
 § 209. Dialects. — New-5onic bivrog, lovrri, rojvro ; Homeric cjvrdg = 6 
 avrog. 
 
 § 210. Dialects. — The Epic dialect declines both Stems together 
 even in the sing. : Ifik avrov = ifiavrov, ol avrt^ ^ lavri^^ etc. 
 
 New-Ionic sfieujvrov, aecovrov, tcjvrov, stand for the forms with av. 
 
90 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 212. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 G.D. 
 
 aKKy\Koiv 
 
 aKK.y]Kaiv 
 
 aXki]koiv 
 
 Ace. 
 
 aSXy]kixi 
 
 aKkr]Ka 
 
 d\\i]Xio 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Om. 
 
 aXKr\K{tiv 
 
 dXAjjXwv 
 
 dWrjXtov 
 
 Bat. 
 
 aKki]koiQ 
 
 aKKTf]Kaiq 
 
 d\\T]\0lQ 
 
 Ace. 
 
 afO<r\KovQ 
 
 aXAijXa^ 
 
 dWijXa 
 
 § 212. The two most important Demonstrative Pro- 
 nouns are : 
 
 ode, ijde, toSsj that. ourog, avrr}, tovto, this. 
 
 ode consists of the article 6 and the demonstrative enclitic 
 81, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with 
 de affixed, ovrog corresponds to the article with regard to 
 the rough breathing and the r at the beginning ; it also has 
 the diphthong au in the last syllable but one where the 
 article has a or t; (A-sound), and o v where the article has 
 o, w, or o u (0-sound). 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 t6 
 
 01 
 
 at 
 
 Td 
 
 ode 
 
 ijde 
 
 Tode 
 
 o'ide 
 
 a'lSe 
 
 Tdde 
 
 OVTOQ 
 
 aVTTJ 
 
 TOVTO 
 
 OVTOl 
 
 avTai 
 
 TavTa 
 
 TOV 
 
 rrjg 
 
 TOV 
 
 
 TU}V 
 
 
 TovSe 
 
 TTjgde 
 
 Toiide 
 
 
 Tiovde 
 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 TavTTjg 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 
 TOVTOJV 
 
 
 rv 
 
 ry 
 
 Tq, 
 
 ToXg 
 
 Taig 
 
 Toig 
 
 Tqide 
 
 TySe 
 
 Ti^Se 
 
 ToXgSe 
 
 Toigh 
 
 ToTgde 
 
 TOVTlf) 
 
 TavTy 
 
 TOVTlf} 
 
 TOVTOig 
 
 TavTUig 
 
 TOVTOig 
 
 TOV 
 
 TT)V 
 
 TO 
 
 Tovg 
 
 Tag 
 
 Td 
 
 Tovde 
 
 Tt'ivde 
 
 Tode 
 
 Tovgde 
 
 TagSe 
 
 Tdde 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 TaVTT]V 
 
 TOVTO 
 
 TOVTOVg 
 
 TavTag 
 
 TaVTU 
 
 Oen. 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 § 212. Dialects. — In Homer, the article itself is a demonstrative pro- 
 noun, with these special forms : Nom. o ; Gen. rolo ; Gen. Dat. Dual 
 ToXiv ; Nom. Plur. roc, rai ; Gen. Plur. Fem. Tdiov ; Dat. Plur. Tolaiiy), 
 Tyai(v), or T7jg. 
 
 From ode we have Dat. Plur. rola^eo-t or ToTade(T(n{v)j and KeXvog, poet, 
 for tKeh^og. 
 
§ 214. RELATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 
 
 91 
 
 TU) 
 
 TO. 
 
 Th) 
 
 
 ' Toiv 
 
 Toiv 
 
 Toiv 
 
 ru}de 
 
 ToiSe 
 
 TOJde 
 
 G.D. 
 
 < ToTv^e 
 
 rdlvde 
 
 ToXvde 
 
 TOVTix) 
 
 Tavra 
 
 TOVTiO 
 
 
 i TOVTOIV 
 
 Tavraiv 
 
 TOVTOIV 
 
 N.A.V. 
 
 The adverb of oh is wh ; that of ovtoq, ovtojq or oi5rw, in this way. 
 Like ovTOQ are declined : 
 
 TO<TOVTOQ TOffaVTT) TOffOVTO OT TOffOVTOV, SO gVeOt {taUtUS) ; 
 
 ToiovTOQ ToiavTTi TOtovTo OT ToiovTov, suck (talis) ; 
 
 TtjXlKOVTOQ T1]klKaVTT} TTjXlKOVTO OT TTjXlKOVTOVj SO old / 
 
 in which, however, the r of the forms beginning with r is 
 dropped ; raura, but TO(T-avTa ; by affixing the enclitic dk, we have 
 the forms ToaogSe, so large; roldc^e, of such quality; ttjXikoq-Ss, of 
 such an age, with a regular adjective declension before the syl- 
 lable de. 
 
 kKEivo-g, EKeivT], Ikeivo, that, is declined like avTog. 
 
 A long accented i is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns 
 to strengthen the meaning without affecting the declension, but 
 the € of ^€ is lost : ovTogi, odt, tKeiviovt, avrijt, ToigSt Compare the 
 Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce. 
 
 § 213. The Belative Pronoun has the rough breathing 
 in all cases, as : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. » 
 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 -Fem. Neut. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut 
 
 N&m. 
 
 og, wh). ri 
 
 o 
 
 di 
 
 di li 
 
 N.A. w li w 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ov rjg 
 
 ov 
 
 
 wv 
 
 G. D. olv div olv 
 
 Bat. 
 
 V y 
 
 V 
 
 dig 
 
 dig olg 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ov TjV 
 
 
 
 ovg 
 
 ug li 
 
 
 Obs. — In the phrases kul og etpri, and he said, and r) 5' og, hit he said, 
 og is used as a Demonstrative (compare the Dialects). 
 
 § 214. The Interrogative Pronoun has the same Stem 
 as the Indefinite Pronoun, from which it is distinguished 
 
 § 213. Dialects. — Horn, o = og, oov = ov, eijg = rjg, and signifies he. 
 Ion. olo = ov, and the forms of the Article which begin with r, are used 
 instead of those of the Bdati^e: tov = ov, cujus; r^ =z ^, cui; To~ig-=^ 
 olg, quibus. 
 
 § 214. Dialects. — Hom., partly also New-Ion. forms are : Gen. t^o, 
 Tw ; Dat. r£<^, T(p ; Gen. Plur. tbujv ; Dat. Plur. Tkoi(n(y) ; Neut. Plur. 
 daaa. The 
 
92 
 
 INTERROG. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS. 
 
 215. 
 
 only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun has the 
 accent always on the Stem syllable ; the Indefinite is en- 
 clitic : hence rig, who f riq, enclitic, some one. 
 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nbm. 
 
 Tig tI 
 
 TlQ tI 
 
 Gm, 
 
 Tivog 
 
 Tivog 
 
 Bat. 
 
 TlVl 
 
 Tivi 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Tiva Tl 
 
 Tivd Tl 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. Ace. 
 
 TIVE 
 
 Tivk 
 
 Gen. Bat. 
 
 TIVOIV 
 
 Tivoiv 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Mm. 
 
 TlV^Q Tiva 
 
 Tivkg Tlvd {CLTTO) 
 
 Gen. 
 
 TlViOV 
 
 TIVWV 
 
 Bat. 
 
 Ti<Ji(v) 
 
 Tl(Ti(v) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Tivag Tiva 
 
 TLvag Tiva {aTTo) 
 
 Qba. — 1. Tov, T(^, which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for 
 Tivog, Tivi, and for tivoq, tivi. 
 
 Obs. — 2. The Eelative and Indefinite combine to form dcFTig, ijTig, 
 o Tl, wTio. Both Stems are declined together : ovnvog, Tjgnvog, 
 t^Tivi, olvTivoiv (§ 93, d). A space is left between o and ti in o ti, 
 which, to distinguish it from the conjunction on, th/itt. 
 
 The shorter forms of tIq are also used with dg ; but the Stem 6 is 
 not declined : Gen. otov ; Dat. ot(i) ; more rarely Gen. Plur. otojv, 
 Dat. oToi(n{v). uTTa is an additional form for uTiva, not to be 
 confounded with dTTa for Tivd. 
 
 § 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun is ^tlva, of three gen- 
 ders, quidam, sometimes undeclined, sometimes declined as 
 follows : 
 
 Sing. 6, 77, TO delva, ^eTvog, deivi, deiva. 
 
 Plur. oi, ai, deiveg, deivojv, ^eivag. 
 
 The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Hom. 
 
 and also in New-Ion. : 
 
 Sing. oTigy N. oTTi ; orev, ottso, ottev ; ors(p ; oriva, N. otti 
 Plur. N. ciarra ; orsiov oTtoKTi ; oTivag, N. iiaaa 
 
 (for arta, according to §57). 
 
 . The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged. 
 
217. 
 
 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 93 
 
 216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns : 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Relative. 
 
 TIQ, who ? 
 
 rig, some one. 
 
 o^e, ovTog, this. 
 
 og, ogTig, who. 
 
 TTOTepog, uter f 
 which of two ? 
 
 TTorepog, one of 
 two(alteruter). 
 
 erepog, the one of 
 two {alter). 
 
 uTTOTspog, which 
 of two. 
 
 -Koaoq, haw great ? 
 how much? 
 {quantus, quot). 
 
 TTocTog, of some 
 size or nwriber. 
 
 To^^-ocogh, To- 
 (Tovrog, so great, 
 so much itantus, 
 tot). 
 
 ocrog, oTToaog, 
 how great, how 
 much (quan- 
 tus, quot). 
 
 TToTof, of what 
 quality ? i^uxilis). 
 
 TToiog, of some 
 quality. 
 
 Tolog, ToiogSe, roi- 
 ovTog, of such a 
 quality (talis). 
 
 olog, oTTolog, of 
 what quality 
 (qualis). 
 
 TrrjXiKog, how old ? 
 
 TTTjXiKog, of some 
 age. 
 
 TTiXiKog, TTiXiKogde, 
 
 TT]\lKOVTOg, of 
 
 such age. 
 
 TtjX'iKog, oTnjXiKog, 
 of what age. 
 
 05s.— On the ending r e p o c, see §§ 192, 208, Obs. 
 
 In Attic prose of the Demonstratives generally only 
 those in -Se and -ovro-q are used. 
 
 § 217. Correlative Adverbs are formed from the same 
 Pronominal Stems. 
 
 § 216. Dialects. — oaaog (add. form oarsaTiog), roffcrog, are Epic for 
 o(Tog, Toaog. For every Interrogative tt the New-Ion. dialect Has k : 
 KocTog, Koiog, kote, kqv. 
 
 § 217. Dialects. — ttoQl is Epic = ttov ; ttoQI =: ttov ; dem. toOi, there, 
 rel. Wi, where. In poetry, t6Qw is dem. to ttoOzv, New-Ion. ivOavra for 
 IvravOa, IvOevtev for IvtevOev. 
 
 wg in the Poets, like ovriog, means so, to be distinguished from ujg 
 (without accent), hoic ; it is written also we, with the meaning yet: 
 Kal log, and yet. With the meaning so, Twg also occurs, yxi is an ad- 
 ditional form of y. The tt is doubled : oinrojg, oTTTrore (§ 62, D.). 
 
94 
 
 CORRELATIVE ADVERBS. 
 
 §218. 
 
 Interrogative. Indefinite 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Relative. 
 
 TTov, where ? 
 {uUf) 
 
 TToOev, 
 
 TToT, whither f 
 
 (quo ?) 
 TTore, when ? 
 
 c at 
 TcriviKa < what 
 (timef 
 
 TTwc, how ? 
 
 ( whither ? 
 
 . ^^ r some- 
 
 cvM) r^^'^' 
 
 TToOev ^ from 
 
 {all- > some- 
 
 cunde) ) where. 
 
 7V IsoM 
 
 ^^, i whither, 
 
 quo) ^ 
 
 TToH, sometime. 
 
 Try 
 
 ■<. in what 
 
 way i 
 
 T^y\ 
 
 some whither, 
 in som^ way. 
 
 ov 
 
 OTTOV 
 
 ) where 
 \ {ubi). 
 
 oQ^v \ whence 
 oTToOev S (unde). 
 
 ) whither 
 ) (qiM). 
 
 thitJier, 
 in this 
 way. 
 
 ol 
 
 OTTOl 
 
 OTEj OTTOTE, wheU. 
 
 tlv'iKa ) at what 
 oTnjviKa S time. 
 
 WQ, OTTiOQ, as. 
 
 c whither:^ 
 ( way. 
 
 Obs. — tv9a and ivQiv, in their original demonstrative sense, occur 
 only in a few combinations in Attic prose {ivBa dr),just then; 
 ivOa Kul ev9a, here and there) ; but they are regularly used in a 
 relative sense : where., whence. 
 
 To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also cwc, qtiamdiu (Rela- 
 tive, as long) ; rlwe, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as 
 the poetic b^pa (for o^pa, § 53, c, Obs.) used in the same meaning 
 as «wf , and ro^pa as Hajg. 
 
 To^the simple UeXvog (that, § 212) correspond among the Adverbs 
 of place tm, there; eKEWev,from there; iKeiae, thither. The De- 
 monstrative iig occurs in Attic prose only in kuI wg, even thus, and 
 ovd' Mg, not even thus. It is also written Jtg in these combinations. 
 
 § 218. The conjunctions Srj, Stjitote, and ovv (meaning ever, Latin 
 cunqu£), and the enclitic Trep, may be joined to any relative pro- 
 noun or adverb to give prominence: oang drj ttotb, whosoever ; 
 oTTiog ovv (utcunqy^), eiffirep, just as. 
 
 Sometimes ij is affixed to the interrog. tL in the sense of why f and 
 to the corresponding indirect interrogative B n : rirj, otitj, why ? 
 
 § 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed : 
 ovTig, fir]Tig, no one; ovSeTepogj^ff^Shepog, neither, neuter ; ovda/nov, 
 firidanov, nowhere ; ovda/idg, fiijdafiwg, in no way. 
 
220. 
 
 THE NUMERALS. 
 
 95 
 
 Chap. IX. — The Numerals. 
 
 § 220. The Cardinal^ Ordinal^ and Adverbial Numer- 
 als, with their value and signs, are : 
 
 1 
 
 d 
 
 elg, fiia, «V, one. 
 
 6 Trpwroc, thejirst. 
 
 uTra^, once. 
 
 3 
 
 i3' 
 
 dvo 
 
 devTspog 
 
 dig 
 
 3 
 
 7 
 
 TpHQ.rpia^ 
 i Te(T(Tapeg, rka- ) 
 
 rpiTog 
 
 rpig 
 
 4 
 
 h' 
 
 < aapa, or rkrvd- \ 
 ( joef , TETTapa ) 
 
 TETapTog 
 
 TETpaKig * 
 
 5 
 
 e 
 
 TTSVTe 
 
 TTEfiTTTOg 
 
 TTEvraKig 
 
 6 
 
 t' 
 
 U 
 
 EKTOg 
 
 E%dKig 
 
 7 
 
 r 
 
 (.Tcrd 
 
 ffiSofiog 
 
 ETTTaKig 
 
 8 
 
 V 
 
 OKTU) 
 
 oydoog 
 
 OKTUKig 
 
 9 
 
 & 
 
 tvvka 
 
 Evarog {Evvarog) 
 
 ivaKig (Ivvdicig) 
 
 10 
 
 i 
 
 ■SsKa 
 
 dsKarog 
 
 ^EKUKig 
 
 11 
 
 id 
 
 'svdeica 
 
 EvSEKarog 
 
 EvdEKUKig 
 
 12 
 
 c(3' 
 
 du)deKa 
 
 diodEKUTog 
 
 dbidEKUKig 
 
 13 
 
 ty' 
 
 rpigKaidsKa 
 
 TpigKaiSEKUTog 
 
 
 14 
 
 t^ 
 
 \ TEcrrapiQKa'ihKa \ 
 \ TsacapaKaideKa ) 
 
 TEtraapaKai^EKaTog 
 
 
 15 
 
 IS 
 
 TrevreKaideKa 
 
 TTEVTEKaiUKarog 
 
 
 16 
 
 it' 
 
 SKicaiSeKa 
 
 EKKaidEKUTOg 
 
 
 17 
 
 tr 
 
 tTrraicaideKa 
 
 ETTTaKai^EKUTOg 
 
 
 18 
 
 IT}' 
 
 OKTiOKaiSeKa 
 
 oKTOJKaidEKarog 
 
 
 19 
 
 iff 
 
 IvveaKaidEKa 
 
 EVVEaKaidEKUTog 
 
 
 20 
 
 K 
 
 EiKoaiiy) 
 
 eiKOCTog 
 
 EiKoaaKig 
 
 30 
 
 X' 
 
 TpidKOvra 
 
 TpidKOCFTog 
 
 TpidKOVTUKig 
 
 40 
 
 /*; 
 
 TE(xaapaKOVTa 
 
 TEaaapaKoarog 
 
 TEcrcrapdKOVTaKig 
 
 50 
 
 v 
 
 TTEVTTJKOVTa 
 
 TrevTTtKOffTog 
 
 TTEVTTlKOVTdKig 
 
 60 
 
 r 
 
 e^rjKOvra 
 
 E^T]K0(TT6g 
 
 UT]KOVTdKig 
 
 70 
 
 6^ 
 
 ijSdofirjKovra 
 
 tl3doiJ.T]KO(TT6g 
 
 ilSdo/jirjKovrdKig 
 
 80 
 
 IT 
 
 oydorjKOVTU 
 
 dySoT]KO(TT6g 
 
 oydorjKOVTaKig 
 
 90 
 
 q' 
 
 IvEvriKovra 
 
 EVEVtJKOdTog 
 
 EVEVTIKOVTUKig 
 
 100 
 
 p 
 
 Ikutov 
 
 EKaroarog. 
 
 EKaTOVTUKig 
 
 200 
 
 a 
 
 didicomoi^ ai, a 
 
 SiaKomocrrog 
 
 ^laKoaiaKig 
 
 300 
 
 T 
 
 TpidKoaioi, ai, a 
 
 TpiaKoaioaTog 
 
 
 400 
 
 V 
 
 TETpdKOCTlOl, ai, a 
 
 TETpaKOmOCTTOg 
 
 
 500 
 
 ¥ 
 
 TTEvrdicoaioi, ai, a 
 
 TTEvraKoaiodTog 
 
 
 600 
 
 X 
 
 i^aKomoi^ at, a 
 
 E^aKOffLOtTTOg 
 
 
 700 
 
 f 
 
 iTTTdKoaioi, at, a 
 
 ETTTaKOCTLOaTOg 
 
 
 800 
 
 it) 
 
 OKTUKoffioi^ ai, a 
 
 oKTaKoaiooTog 
 
 
 900 
 
 ^ 
 
 j ivuKomoi, ai, a 
 
 EvaK0(TL0(TT6g or 
 
 
 I ivvdKoaioi^ at, a 
 
 EVvaKoaioffTog 
 
 
 1000 
 
 p. 
 
 Xi'Xtoi, aij a 
 
 XlXlOOTOC 
 
 XiXid/cig 
 
 2000 
 
 J3 
 
 SiQxiXioi, ai, a 
 
 Sigxi-Xioffrog 
 
 
 3000 
 
 n 
 
 Tpigx'iXioi, aiy a 
 
 vpigxiXiofTTog 
 
 
 10000 
 
 ji 
 
 fjivpioi, ai^ a 
 
 fivpioffrog 
 
 fivpidicig 
 
96 
 
 THE NUMERALS. 
 
 221. 
 
 Obs. — The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un- 
 interrupted succession. In the most frequent designation, given 
 above, stigma (<r') is inserted after k for the number 6 : a to & 
 are therefore units ; t is 10, k' 20 ; after it (= 80), Q' (koppa = 90) 
 is inserted; and after w (==800) ^ (sampi:i=:900). The alphabet 
 begins again at 1000, but here each letter has the accent under 
 it; hence ,/3r/tr=: 3344, ,aa>^/3'=1863. 
 
 § 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 tcr4 are declined: 
 
 1. Norti. 
 
 ' elg fiia tv 
 
 2. W. A. dvo 
 
 
 Qm. 
 
 tvoQ fitdg evoQ 
 
 G. B. dvolv 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 ivi inq, • tvi 
 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 'iva fiiav 'iv 
 
 
 
 3. Nrnii. 
 
 Tpelg JV. Tpia 
 
 4. TEaaapeg 
 
 If. Tsaaapa 
 
 Oen. 
 
 Tpiaiv 
 
 Tecraapbjv 
 
 
 Bat. 
 
 rpi(T[{v) 
 
 rkaaapmiv) 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Tpe7g iV! Tpia 
 
 Ttaaapag 
 
 iV". Teacrapa 
 
 ov^dg, ov^e/iiiaf ov^ev-, and firtddgy no one, are declined 
 like HQ. ^vo is also used without inflexion, ^vfiv is an- 
 other form for ^voXv. tt occurs for o-o- in all forms and 
 derivations of TscrcrapeQ. a^^w {amho, hotJi), Gen. Dat. a/x- 
 0otv, is sometimes represented by the Plur. afK^iOTLpoi, ai, a, 
 of which the Singular ajuKfiOTepov, hoth, is also in use. 
 
 §§ 330-223. Dialects. — 1, Homer has the fem. Id, irjg, ly : also Neut. 
 Dat. T(^. 
 
 2, dvo) for all cases : ^orw, doioi, doiai, Sold ; Dat. doiolg ; Ace. doiovg, 
 dg, d. 
 
 3, Tp'iTaTog-=.TpiTog. 
 
 4, Hom. ^ol. TTitTvpEg, New-Ion. rkacrepsg, Horn. TSTparog (§ 59, D.). 
 7, kl^^ofxaTog. 8, dydoarog. 9, tivarog. 
 
 13, Hom. SvwdeKa, and dvo Kal dUa, dvodsKaTog. 
 
 20, Hom. kiKoai, kiKOffTog. 30, Hom. TpirjKOvra. 80, by^wKovTa. 90, 
 ivvTjKOVTa. 200, etc., also diijKomoi', Herod. TrevTijKotnoi, eivaK6<noi. 
 
 9000, Horn. IvedxiXoi. 10,000, SeKdxTXoi. 
 
 dixa, Hom. dixOd'^ likewise rpixOd, rerpaxOd, threefold, fourfold ; also 
 rpnrXy, TETpanrXy. 
 
I 
 
 § 224. NUMERALS. 97 
 
 § 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable. 
 
 We also find rpslg, rpia Kai dsKa, rkaaapEQ, r'taoapa Kai dsKa, for 13 
 and 14. The units and tens are united by Kai, in any order : 
 EiKoai Kai TrkvTE and Trevre Kai eiKoai ; or without Kai when the 
 tens are first : etKocrt Trsire, 25 ; so also kKarbv SeKa. For twenty- 
 j^rst we have eIq Kai dKoarog, or TrpCJTog Kai eiKoffrog, and eiKOffTog 
 TrpuJTog, etc. 
 
 The Cardinal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal, 
 regular adjectives of three terminations : ^taKomoi, ai, a. 
 The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superlative, 
 except ^evTspog, which has that of the comparative (compare 
 
 § 192). 
 
 § 223. By combination with (tvv, the numeral Stems form Distribu- 
 tives: (tvvSvo, two and two; avvTpug, three aTid three; Multipli- 
 catives, by the syllable irkovg (from ttXooc, Lat. plex) : airXovg^ 
 simple; SnrXovg, rpnrXoiig, TrevTaTrXovg, etc. Observe also hrraog, 
 twofold; Tpiffaog, threefold; dnrXdmog, twice as much; TpnrXdmog, 
 etc., TToXXaTrXdmog, many times as much. Adverbs : fiovaxy, sim- 
 ply (jiovog, alone) ; dixy or dixa, dmibl/y. Substantives : fiovdg (St. 
 fxovad), unity; Svdg, rpidg, rerpdg, Trefnrdg, i^dg, ij3dofidg, oydodg^ 
 evvedg, deKdg, eixdg, tKaTovrdg, X'^*^?> /uupidg; hence rpelg fivpiddeg 
 = 30,000. 
 
 § 224. The most important ge^iieral Adjectives of quan- 
 tity are : cicaoToc, each / kKanpog, either,' irag, Tracra, irav 
 (St. iravT), all / TTooToc, oirocTTog [quotjis] ; and the ad- 
 verbs : iroWaKig, many times, often ; tKaaraKig, every 
 time / oaaKig, as often as / ro<5avTaKiq, SO often / TrXet- 
 GjaKiQi very often ; dXiyuKig, seldom, 
 
 E 
 
98 THE VEKB. § 225. 
 
 B. INFLEXION OF VEEBS. 
 
 General BemarJcs. 
 § 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb — 
 
 1. Three Nmiibers : Singular^ Dual, and Plural. 
 
 2. Three Voices : 
 
 Active : t\vaa, I loosed ; 
 
 Middle : iXvcraiuYiv, I loosed for myself; 
 
 Passive : IXvOr^v, I was loosed. 
 
 Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called 
 Deponents : ^ixofxai, I receive, 
 
 Obs. — Only the Aorist and the Future have special lorms for the 
 Passive ; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle : in 
 all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning. 
 
 3. Two classes of Tenses : 
 
 A. Principal, viz. : 
 
 1. Present : \vii),Iloose ; 
 
 2. Perfect : \i\vKa, I have loosed ; 
 
 3. Future : Xvctw, I shall loose. 
 
 B. Historical, viz. : 
 
 1. Imperfect : cXuov, I was loosing ; 
 
 2. Pluperfect : eXeXvKEiv, I had loosed / 
 
 3. Aorist : tXvcra, I loosed. 
 
 4. Pour Moods, viz. : 
 
 ' 1. Indicative : Xvoj, I loose / 
 
 Finite J 2. Subjunctive : Xikjj, I may loose / 
 
 Verb. I 3. Optative : Xvot/ii, I would loose / 
 
 . 4. Imperative : Xue, loose. 
 
 5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz. : 
 
 1. Infinitive : Xvhv, loose ; 
 
 2. Participle : Xvojv, loosing; 
 
 3. Verbal Adjective : XvHoq, to be loosed, soU 
 
 vendus. 
 
§ 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.— TENSE-STEMS. 
 
 99 
 
 226. The Personal Endings had originally the follow- 
 
 ing* forms : 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Principal Teuses. Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Principal Tenses. 
 
 Hist. Tenses. 
 
 Sing. 1. -/it 
 
 -V 
 
 -/xat 
 
 -firiv 
 
 3. -at 
 
 -C 
 
 -aai 
 
 -ao 
 
 3. -rt 
 
 — 
 
 -rat 
 
 -TO 
 
 Dual 1. -fiw 
 
 
 -fiEOov 
 
 
 2. -TOP 
 
 
 -(jQov 
 
 
 3. -TOV 
 
 -TTIV 
 
 -aQov 
 
 -aOriv " 
 
 Plur. 1. -fiw 
 
 
 -fie9a 
 
 
 2. -re 
 
 
 -a9s 
 
 
 3. -rn 
 
 -V 
 
 -vrai 
 
 -VTO 
 
 The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are 
 most easily observed in the verb : 
 
 €t-/it, I am. 
 l<T-<Ti (contr. d) 
 la-Ti(y) 
 
 t(T-fiev 
 ka-Tov 
 ia-Tov 
 
 ecr-fisv. 
 la-Ts. 
 H-ai(y) {pi: 
 
 60). 
 
 The endings of the three persons in the Sing, are really the per- 
 sonal pronouns alSixed, I^thou^ Jie^ and to be compared with the 
 Stems of the Personal Pronouns : {lo (St. ^ e), at ((re), n (the Stem 
 of the article, r o). The 1 Dual in the Active is always iden- 
 tical with the 1 Plur. The ending of the 1 Sing, of the Historical 
 Tenses was originally fi (Lat. era-m)^ which at the end of the 
 word was changed into v, according to § 67, Ods. The ending of 
 the 3 Sing, was originally r, which, however, could not continue 
 at the end according to § 67 (compare § 233, 3) ; and that of the 
 3 Plur. VT (Lat. era-nt) ; but the r was dropped (§ 67). 
 
 § 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classified 
 according to the Stems {Tense-Stems) from which they are 
 formed. The Tense- Stems are the following : 
 
 1. The Present Stem, from which the Present and Im- 
 perfect are formed. 
 
 § 236. Dialects. — Instead of vrai, vto, the Ion. (especially New-Ion.) 
 often has arat, aro, in 3 Plur. Mid. The vowel a is here properly a 
 connecting vowel, as in the Ace. Sing, of the Second Principal Declens. 
 (§ 173, 3, Ods.) ; and v is dropped in both alike ; hence a-Tai, a-To, for 
 a-vTai, a-vTo (compare §§ 287, 302, 3). 
 
100 'TENSE-STEMS. § 228. 
 
 2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or 
 Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 
 
 3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act", and 
 Mid. are formed. 
 
 4. The WeaJc Aorist Stem, from which the First or Weak 
 Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 
 
 5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Pluper- 
 fect, and Future-Perfect are formed. 
 
 These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle. There 
 are added to them, for the special forms of the Passive : 
 
 6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second or 
 Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive are 
 formed. 
 
 7. The Weah Passive Stem, from which the First or Weak 
 Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are formed. 
 
 The form from which all the Tense- Stems of a verb may- 
 be derived is called the Verbal Stem. 
 
 § 228. The Suhjunctive is indicated between the Stem 
 and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it : Xv-w-/x£v, 
 solv-a-mus ; Xv-yi-te, solv-d-tis. 
 
 The vowel t is characteristic of the Optative^ which gen- 
 erally becom-es a diphthong with other vpwels : Xv-oi'/m^v, 
 we would loose. The Subjunctive has the^endjngs q£ tho"* 
 JlTiuCiW<f^ Aaa^i^.*? y the Optative (except 1 Sing. Act.) those 
 of the historical tenses. 
 
 The Pnperative has the following peculiar endings : 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 Sing. 2. -6i -ao 
 
 3. -rw -a9<») 
 
 Dual 2. -TOP -gBov 
 
 3. -rwv -aOiov 
 
 Plur. 2. -re -aOe 
 
 3. -vTOJv or -Tojcrav -trOwv or -aOdxrav 
 
 § 229. The general law for the accentuation of the verb 
 is that the accent is jplaced as far bach as jpossible from 
 
 § 228. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often shortens the long vowel 
 of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural. 
 
§ 230. CONJUGATIONS. 101 
 
 the end, final a i not being considered long except in the 
 optative : Xuw, Xvere, Xvojuai. 
 
 Obs. — An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen- 
 sion (chap, vii.), if possible (§§ 79-87), always keep the accent 
 on the same syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc. : Part. Pres. Act. 
 fiainXevcjv, regnam, Kent. (iamXevov (not (SamXevov, according to 
 § 84), Part. Fift. Act. (iaaiXevaujv, regnaturus, Neut. (3amXev<Tov. 
 (The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.) 
 
 § 230. We distinguish Two Principal Conjugations : 
 
 1. The First — the far more frequent— connects the per- 
 sonal endings with the first two Tense- Stems by a connect- 
 ing vowel : Xv-O'iuev. The verbs belonging to it are called 
 verbs in w because the first Person Sing. Pres. Act. ends 
 in u) : Xvtt), 
 
 2. The Second — the less frequent, but older — affixes the 
 personal endings to the first two Tense- Stems without a 
 connecting 'dowel : la-iikv. They are called verbs in /x i 
 because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original end- 
 ing /x I : £i-/it. 
 
 The forms of the other five Tense- Stems are common to 
 both Conjugations. 
 
 The Paradigms of the verbs are given first : the forma- 
 tion of each Tense- Stem is then explained in order. 
 
 List of the Pakadigms. 
 
 Eifii,Iam Table I. 
 
 Synopsis of Xvu), I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the 
 
 Tenses) " II. 
 
 Verbs in q. 
 
 A. Vowel Stems. 
 
 1. Uncontracted, Xww " III. 
 
 2. Contracted, rt/taw, ttoieo), dovXoM " IV. 
 
 B. Consonant Sterna. 
 
 1. Guttural Stems, TrXsKio, ^evyw, Td<r(T(i) " V. 
 
 2. Dental Stems, xpevSofiai, TreiOio, KOfii^oj " VI. 
 
 3. Labial Stems, Trsfnroj, XtiTrw, KaXvTrTio " VII. 
 
 4. Liquid Stems, ^ipw, dyyiXXw, (nreipu) " VIII. 
 
 Verbs in mi. 
 
 First Class, tIOtjixi, ^I'^w/^t, 'IcTTrjiJii " IX. 
 
 Second Class, ^e/fcvvp " X. 
 
102 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Table I. 
 
 PAEADIGMS OF YEEBS. 
 
 Et/it, I am. Stem kg. 
 
 Moods. 
 
 M 
 
 GQ 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 g 
 
 1 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 elfxi 
 
 i)v or ?} 
 
 tcTO/xai 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 el 
 
 fioBa 
 
 toy or tcrei 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 k(TTi(v) 
 
 r)v 
 
 tarai 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 lao/xeOov 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 iarov 
 
 ijarov or rfrov 
 
 taeaOov 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 lOTOV 
 
 r)<TTi]V or iiTr]v 
 
 taeaOov 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 (.(Tflkv 
 
 rjfxev 
 
 kaofieOa 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 iars 
 
 ricrre or ryre 
 
 i<TE(T9e 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 dffi 
 
 r}(rav 
 
 icrovTUi 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 0) 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 ijTOV 
 
 rjrov 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 wfiev 
 r)TE 
 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 drjv 
 
 
 iaoinr]v 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 tirjg 
 
 
 iffoio 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 eit] 
 
 
 taoiTO 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 
 . 
 
 kaoifieOov 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 elrjTov or dTov 
 
 
 IcroicrOov 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 eirjTijv or dTTjv 
 
 
 IcfoktOtj 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 eiTjixav or dfxev 
 
 
 ktroifieOa 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 sirjTE or fire 
 
 
 tffoiaOe 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 dr]aav or dev 
 
 
 icroivTO 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 S. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 taroi 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 tffTOV 
 i(TT(iJV 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 tare. 
 
 etTTuxrav or tffrcjv 
 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 dvai 
 
 
 i<7£a9ai 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 ovaa 
 
 ov (Stem ovt) 
 
 
 ttrofievog 
 
 i<TOfiEvr) 
 
 eao/iievov 
 
 Note. — The formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in 
 § 315, but they are inserted in this place because some of them are re- 
 quired in conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs. 
 
Table II. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 103 
 
 i 
 
 •2 
 
 ^ 
 
 91P 
 
 o 3 o o 53 ^o 
 /< /< r< ^ ^ /-i 
 
 S^ 
 
 
 
 
 SKhS 
 
 ^^J 
 
 
 b § b "b 
 
 1^ ^ ^ ^ 
 S » S) S> 
 
 b § g^§ 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 "to 
 
 
 ^ '3 <*) R" '!?■ 1*) 
 
 vj) ^ Q:> ^ <I) Qi 
 
 ^ ^ /< ^ ^ /< 
 
 I It si -I 
 
 ^ b b b 
 r> ^ ^^ .^ 
 
 b b 
 
 ^S s 
 
 /</</<<< ^ 
 
 
 ^ ?^ 5S 
 ?? ^ ^ 
 
 -5; p-O 
 
 i i 
 
 81P 
 
 CJI CJI 
 
 o> 
 
 ?. ?k 
 
 =L a. :i. b b a. 
 
 s s s s -s s 
 
 ^ /< /< 1^ ,< /< 
 
 
 3- ?^ A 
 3 3 o <o S 3 
 S -S »S IS ^s ^s 
 
 
 '«fH 
 
 O^S^fr 
 
 5-5* 
 3 o S 
 b b b 
 -s -s -s 
 >< ^ >< 
 
 
 s 
 
 iJ^ 
 
 's 
 
 rtii-i 
 
 SSl-s 
 
 JaJ 
 
 b 3 « o « B 
 s b b b b b 
 
 ^ ^S ^S »S JS ^s 
 
 ^ ^ >< ^ << >< 
 
 
 ^•n 
 
 o 
 
 11 
 
 '^'"refill 
 
 ii^.flit 
 
 1 
 
 3- § ^ 
 
 B 3 o CO «3 '3 
 « Si Wj y a s,; 
 
 S "S ^S s s s 
 
 ^ ^ /< ^ ,< /< 
 
 coOhhmPh 
 
 ^ J 
 I -^ 
 
 k s ^ 
 
 J 
 
 b^ 
 
 '^ b'^ 
 
 "* 'Si S 
 
 ^^^'^ 
 
 o o . 
 b b oi 
 ■s s \o 
 
 ;^ ;> 
 
104 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 Active 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 If 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 S S 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Xvo) 
 
 iXvov 
 
 Xviij 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xveig 
 
 aXves m 
 
 Xvyg 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Xmi 
 
 iXvelv) 
 
 Xvy 
 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 XVETOV 
 
 iXviTOV 
 
 XvT]TOV 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 XVETOV 
 
 iXviTijv 
 
 XvTJTOV 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Xvofuv 
 
 iXvofiw 
 
 XvbJjXEV 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xvere 
 
 iXvere 
 
 XVTJTE 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Xvov(Ti{v) 
 
 tXvov 
 
 Xv(t)(n(v) 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Xv(T(0 
 
 XvaeiQ 
 Xvaei 
 
 XlXTETOV 
 XvffSTOV 
 
 Xvarere 
 
 Xv<TOV(Tl(v) 
 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist 
 
 S. 1 
 
 tkvaa 
 
 
 Xv<T(0 
 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 iXvffag 
 
 
 Xvayg 
 
 
 t 
 
 3 
 
 iXvaE(y) 
 
 
 Xvcry 
 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 iXvaarov 
 
 
 XvariTOV 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 iXvadrriv 
 
 
 XvffrjTOV 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 iXvffaixEV 
 
 
 Xv(T(OflEV 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 eXvaare 
 
 
 Xv<TT]TE 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 tkvaav 
 
 
 Xv<TO}(Tl(v) 
 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 
 1 Perfect 
 
 S. 1 
 
 XkXvKa 
 
 iXEXvKElV 
 
 XeXvku) 
 
 
 (Weak). 
 
 2 
 
 XkXvKaQ 
 
 IXeXvKElQ 
 
 XEXvKyg 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 XsXvke(v) 
 
 IXEXvKei 
 
 XsXvicy 
 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 XeXvKarov 
 
 IXeXvKeirov 
 
 XeXvkijtov 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 XsXvKaTOv 
 
 iXiXvKeiTijv 
 
 XeXvktjtov 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 XeXvKafiev 
 
 kXeXvKEifiev 
 
 XeXvkwixev 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 XeXyKare 
 
 IXeXvKEiTe 
 
 XEXvKT]rE 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 XeXvKd(Ti(v) 
 
 IXeXvKScrav 
 
 or tXEXvKElffaV 
 
 XEXvK(o(n(v) 
 
 
 2 Aorist 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 Perfect and 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 
 Pluperf.(Strong). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Examples for 
 6vio, I sacrifice; 9EpairEvoj,Iserve; (3ovXEvtx), I advise; xop^vu),Idance; 
 
 tTravaOijv ; 
 
Table III. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 105 
 
 1. UNCONTRACTED. 
 Voice. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participte. 
 
 
 Xuot/ii 
 
 
 XVELV 
 
 XvdiV 
 
 
 Xvoig 
 
 Xve 
 
 
 Xvovaa 
 
 
 Xioi 
 
 XviTU) 
 
 
 Xvov 
 
 
 XVOITOV 
 
 XvfTOV 
 
 
 
 
 Xvo'lTTlV 
 
 XVSTOJV 
 
 
 Gen. XvovTog 
 
 
 XvOlflEV 
 
 
 
 XvovffTjg 
 
 
 XvoiTe 
 
 Xvere 
 
 
 XvovTog 
 
 
 XVOIEV 
 
 XvovTojv or XvETcotrav 
 
 
 St. XVOVT 
 
 
 Xvffoifii 
 
 
 XXXTEIV 
 
 XlXTOJV 
 
 
 Xvffoig 
 
 
 
 
 
 Xvffoi 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 XvcTovffa 
 
 
 XvaoiTov 
 
 
 
 Xvaov 
 
 
 Xv<ToiTr}v 
 
 
 
 Gen. XvffovTog 
 
 
 XvffOljXEV 
 
 
 
 Xv<Tov(Tt]g 
 
 
 Xv(TOLT£ 
 
 
 
 XvaovTog 
 
 
 XvaoiEv 
 
 
 
 St. XvaovT 
 
 
 Xvaaifxi 
 
 
 Xvaai 
 
 Xvoag 
 
 
 Xvcraig or Xvaeiag 
 
 Xv(TOV 
 
 
 Xvaaaa 
 Xmav 
 
 
 Xvcrai or XvffEie(v) 
 
 Xvadru) 
 
 
 Gen. XvaavTog 
 
 
 XvaaiTov 
 
 Xvaarov 
 
 
 Xvadarjg 
 
 
 XvffaiTTjv 
 
 Xv0a.Tix)v 
 
 
 XvaavTog 
 
 
 Xvcraifiep 
 
 
 
 St. XvaavT 
 
 
 XvaaitE 
 
 XvauTE [ffav 
 
 
 
 
 Xvaauv or Xvcreiav 
 
 XvadvTiov or Xvadrcj- 
 
 
 
 
 XeXvKOifxi 
 
 
 XEXvKEVai 
 
 XEXvK(x)g 
 
 
 XeXvKOig 
 
 XiXvKE 
 
 
 XeXvkvIu 
 XEXvKog 
 
 
 XeXvKoi 
 
 XeXvketo} 
 
 
 Gen. XEXvKOTog 
 
 
 XeXvkoltov 
 
 
 
 XEXvKViag 
 
 
 XeXvKoirrjv 
 
 XeXvketov 
 
 
 XEXvKorog 
 
 
 XfXvKOllXEV 
 
 XeXvketmv 
 
 
 St. XeXvkot 
 
 
 XeXvKOlTE 
 
 XeXvkete 
 
 
 
 
 XeXvicoisv 
 
 XeXvkovtojv or 
 XEXvKETOJcrav 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 SaKpv(o,I weep; Travio, I maJce to cease (Mid., I cease). [1 Aor. Pass. 
 
 Verbal, Travarkog.] 
 
 E 2 
 
106 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. — 
 
 
 
 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Middle and 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tenses comTnon to 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 
 Si 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 Xvofiai 
 
 Xv<t)ixai 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xvy or Xvei 
 
 Xvy 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Xverai 
 
 XvjjTat 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 
 XvofieOov 
 
 Xvo}fx.E9ov 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 XveaOov 
 
 Xvij(t9ov 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Xve(t9ov 
 
 Xvt]<t9ov 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 XvofiEQa 
 
 Xv(oixe9a 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xve<T9s 
 
 Xvr}a9e 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 XVOVTUI 
 
 XviOVTUl 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 iXvov 
 
 tXvETO 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 iXv6ixe9ov 
 
 iXve<T9ov 
 
 kXvk(T9ijv 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 tXv6ne9a 
 lXve(T9e 
 
 iXvOVTO 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 Xvffo/xai [ofiai 
 etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 XsXvixai 
 XkXvffai 
 
 XsXvrai 
 
 XeXvfievog w 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 XeXvfiE9ov 
 
 XsXv<t9ov 
 
 XeXv(T9ov 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 XeXvfiE9a 
 
 XsXv(r9e 
 
 XkXvvTai 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 IXeXvfiijv 
 
 IXeXvffo 
 
 eXsXvro 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 kXeXvixs9ov 
 
 iXeXva9ov 
 
 iXeXv(T9r]v 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 eXeXvixE9a 
 lXsXv(j9e 
 
 IXkXvVTO 
 
 
 
 Future Per- 
 
 S. 
 
 1 
 
 XeXvarofiai [o/xai 
 
 
 
 fect. 
 
 
 
 etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 
 
 
 
Continued, pakadigms of v]^Ba,=-= 
 
 I. UNCONTRACTED. 
 
 Passive Voices. (§ 225, OU. 2.) 
 1)0111 Voices. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 \vo'i\ir\v 
 Xvoio 
 
 XVOITO 
 
 Xvoi/xeOov 
 
 Xvoi(t9ov 
 
 XvoiaOrjv 
 
 Xvoi/iieOa 
 
 XvoiaOe 
 
 XVOIVTO 
 
 XveaOai 
 
 Xvov 
 
 XvkffOu) 
 
 XvsffOov 
 XveaOojv 
 
 XvetrOe 
 XvkrrOiov or 
 Xvkadioaav 
 
 Xvo/xEvog 
 
 XvofievT] 
 
 XvofiEvov 
 
 XvcroifiTjv [oifxrjv 
 
 etc., as in tlie Pres. Xv- 
 
 XvaeaOai 
 
 XvaofievoQ 
 
 XvaofievT) 
 
 Xvcrofievov 
 
 XeXvfievoQ drjv 
 
 XeXixrOai 
 
 XsXvcro 
 
 XeXv<t9(o 
 
 XeXvcrOov 
 
 XsXvcrOe. 
 XeXvaOiov or 
 XeXvaOitxrav 
 
 XiXvixevog 
 
 XeXvixevr] 
 
 XeXvfievov 
 
 XsXv(Toifirjv [oifiTjv 
 
 etc., as in the Pres. Xv- 
 
 XeXixrecrOai 
 
 XeXvcTofievog 
 
 XeXv(rofikvT] 
 
 XsXvaofievov 
 
108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table III. — 
 
 A. YOWEL STEMS. 
 Middle and 
 
 Tenses peculiar to 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 1 Aorist 
 (Weak). 
 
 S. 1 
 3 
 
 3 
 D. 1 
 3 
 3 
 P. 1 
 3 
 3 
 
 kXvadfiriv 
 
 iXvaaro 
 
 tXvadJleQov 
 
 tXvaaaBov 
 
 eXv(Td(T9r]v 
 
 kXvffdfieOa 
 
 IXvaacQe 
 
 kXvaavTO 
 
 Xv(T(t)fiaL 
 Xvay 
 
 Xvffijrat 
 
 Xv(Jb)}it9ov 
 
 Xvar]a9ov 
 
 Xv<Tt](T90V 
 
 Xv(rojiie9a 
 
 Xv<Tt](T9e 
 
 XvffiovTai 
 
 
 3 Aorist 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 Tenses peculiar to 
 
 1 Aorist 
 (Weak). 
 
 S. 1 
 -3 
 
 3 
 D. 3 
 
 3 
 P. 1 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 iXvQriv 
 IXvOrjg 
 
 IXiOri 
 
 iXv9rjTov 
 
 IXvOrjTijv 
 
 eXvOrjfiev 
 
 lXver]Te 
 
 IXvOtjffav 
 
 Xv9o} 
 Xv9y£ 
 
 Xv9y 
 Xv9rirov 
 
 Xv9flT0V 
 
 Xv9a>ixev 
 
 Xv9T}re 
 
 Xv9(o(n(v) 
 
 
 1 Future 
 (Weak). 
 
 S. 1 
 3 
 3 
 
 D. 1 
 
 3 
 
 -3 
 
 P. 1 
 3 
 3 
 
 XvOrjaofxai 
 
 XvOrjay or Xv9r]<TeL 
 
 XvOricreTai 
 
 XvOrjao/xeOov 
 
 Xv9r}<Tea9ov 
 
 Xv9r](Te(T9ov 
 
 Xv97](r6iif.9a 
 
 Xv9r}cre<r9e 
 
 Xv9r](TovTai 
 
 
 
 3 Aorist 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 3 Future 
 (Strong). 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : Xvrog, rj, 6v. 3. XvHog, a, ov. 
 
 
Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in 12. 109 
 
 I. UNCONTRACTED. 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 fhe Middle Voice. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 • 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 Xv(TaifiT}v 
 Xvaako 
 
 XvGaiTO 
 
 Xv(TaiixE9ov 
 
 Xvaaia9ov 
 
 Xv(rai(T9r]v 
 
 Xv<jainE9a 
 
 Xv(jai(j9E 
 
 XvaaivTO 
 
 Xvaat 
 
 Xv(Td(T9u) 
 
 Xv(Taa9ov 
 Xvad(j9u}v 
 
 Xv(Ta(T9E 
 
 Xvada9(>)v or 
 Xv(Td<T9w(Tav 
 
 Xvaaa9aL 
 
 XvffdfiEvog 
 
 XvaajiEVT] 
 
 XvadfiEvov 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 the, Passive Voice. 
 
 
 Xv9Eiriv 
 Xv9Eirig 
 
 Xv9Eir] 
 
 Xv9EiT}Tov or Xv9eXtov 
 Xv9Eir]Tr]v or Xv9EiTr]V 
 Xv9Eit]fiEv or Xv9eXijlev 
 Xv9EiriTE or Xv9eIte 
 Xv9Eir]<Tav or Xv9eXev 
 
 Xv9r]Ti 
 
 Xv9r]T(ii 
 
 Xv9t]tov 
 Xv9r}Tiov 
 Xv9r]TE 
 
 Xv9r]T(t)ffav or 
 Xv9evtojv 
 
 Xv9r]vai 
 
 Xv9eig 
 
 Xv9Ei<Ta 
 
 Xv9ev 
 
 Gen. Xv9EVTog 
 
 \v9Ei(Trig 
 
 Xv9EVTog 
 
 St. Xv9Evr 
 
 
 Xv9T](T0iflT]V 
 
 Xv9r](Toio 
 
 Xv9r]<T0lT0 
 
 Xv9r]<ToifiE9ov 
 
 Xv9r](Toia9ov 
 
 Xv9r]<Joia9riv 
 
 Xv9T](ToiixE9a 
 
 Xv9r]<Toia9e 
 
 Xv9r]<T0lVT0 
 
 
 Xv9r)(TE<T9ai 
 
 Xv9r]a6}iEvog 
 
 Xv9tiaoiiEvr] 
 Xv9ri<T6nEvov 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
110 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table IV. 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Present and 
 
 Tlfidu), I honor 
 
 TToieu), I make 
 
 dovXoo), I subjugate. 
 
 
 [compare Lat. am{a)o'\. 
 
 [comp. Lat. rrumeo]. 
 
 
 
 Stems: n^ia 
 
 TTOie 
 
 SovXo 
 
 
 • Active. 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Tljxdlt) Tlfld 
 
 TTOieu) TTOlG) 
 
 dovXoo) dovXd 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 rijiduQ Tifi^g 
 
 TTOikig TTOieXg 
 
 dovXoeig dovXoXg 
 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 Tiixdei Tifiq, 
 
 TTOUei TTOiel 
 
 dovXoei SovXoX 
 
 
 1 
 
 D.l 
 
 
 
 
 
 T5 
 
 2 
 
 Tifiderov Tifiarov 
 
 ttoiUtov ttoisXtov 
 
 dovXoSTOv SovXovrov 
 
 
 3 
 
 TlfldlTOV TlfiaTOV 
 
 TTOUeTOV TTOielTOV 
 
 SovXoerov dovXovrov 
 
 
 P 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Tifjidofiev TifiatfiEv 
 
 Troisojxev Troiovfiev 
 
 SovXoofiev SovXovfiev 
 
 
 Pk 
 
 2 
 
 TlfldETE r I ft UTS 
 
 TTodere Troielre 
 
 dovXoere SovXovte 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tlfld-OV- TlfxCj- 
 
 irOlkoV- TTOIOV- 
 
 dovXoov- SovXov- 
 
 
 
 
 <Tl(v) <'■*(*') 
 
 m(v) ctCi^) 
 
 ai(v) <Ti(v) 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Tlfldu) TlflUJ 
 
 TTOteW TTOlUt 
 
 dovXoo) dovXoJ 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Tifidyg Tifi^g 
 
 TTOuyg TTOiyg 
 
 dovXoyg dovXoXg 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 3 
 
 Tifidy Tijxq, 
 
 TTody TTOiy 
 
 dovXoy dovXoX 
 
 
 1 
 
 D.l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 rifidrjTov rifiaTOV 
 
 TroisijTov TTOiiirov 
 
 SovX6r}Tov dovXutTov 
 
 
 2* 
 
 3 
 
 Tindr]Tov ri/xarov 
 
 TTOUrjTOV TTOlrJTOV 
 
 dovXolJTOV dovXbJTOV 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Tifidu)fiev TijXbofxev 
 
 TTOlSlOfieV TTOlCjjXEV 
 
 dovXaiofXEv SovXwfiev 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 TifidrjTE Tifidre 
 
 TToieijTe TToiiJTe 
 
 dovXoJjTS dovXwTS 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Tifidu)- rifiu)- 
 
 TTOIBIO- TTOIW- 
 
 dovXou)- dovXw- 
 
 
 
 
 (Ti(v) o't(*') 
 
 <n{v) fft(v) 
 
 (n{v) (T I (y) 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Tifidoifii rifK^ifit 
 
 TTodoifil TTOIOX/Xl 
 
 dovXooifii dovXoXfii 
 
 
 
 
 {-aoiTjv -(^Tjv)* 
 
 (eoirjv -oiijv) 
 
 {-ooirjv -0 i t) v) 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Tifidoig TifKpg 
 
 TTOisoig 'KoioXg 
 
 dovXooig SovXoXg 
 
 
 
 
 (-aoiijg -(^r]g) 
 
 (-eoJTjg -oiTjg) 
 
 {-toirjg -oirjg) 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 TlfldoL Tlfltp 
 
 irodoL TToioX 
 
 dovXqoi SovXoX 
 
 
 
 
 {-aoirj -i^rj) 
 
 {-eoirj -0 i rf) 
 
 {-ooiij -0 i rf) 
 
 
 q5 
 
 •1 
 
 D.l 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 TlfidoLTOV Tifxqtrov 
 
 TTodoirov ttoioXtov 
 
 dovXooiTov SovXoXrov 
 
 
 
 
 {-aoir]Tov -(^t]tov) 
 
 (-eoir)TOV -oir}Tov) 
 
 {-ooir]TOV -oirjTOv) 
 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 TifiaoiTTjv riixt^rijv 
 
 ■JTOLeOlTTJV 7roioiTT]v 
 
 dovXooiTr]v dovXoirijv 
 
 
 
 
 (-aoiTjTTjv -(i)r]rr}v) 
 
 {-eoir)TT}v -oirjrriv) 
 
 {-ooirjTijv -oirjTTjv) 
 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Tifidoifiev rifxi^fiev 
 
 TTodoifiev TTOioX/xev 
 
 dovXaoiixev SovXoXfiev 
 
 
 
 
 {-aoi7]nsv -(^T]nsv) 
 
 (-eoirjfxev -oirjfiEv) 
 
 (-OOITJUEV -oijJUEv) 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 TlfxdoiTE rifK^TE 
 
 TTodoiTS TToioXre 
 
 dovXooLTE dovXoXre 
 
 
 
 
 {-aoiijTe -(^7]T() 
 
 {-eoirjTE -oiijTe) 
 
 (-ooirjTE -oiTjTe) 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 TlfldoiEV TlfK^ev 
 
 TTodoLEV TTOIOXeV 
 
 {-eoirjfTav -oirjaav) 
 
 dovXooiev dovXolev 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * Obs. — The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type. 
 
Table IV. pakadigms of verbs. — verbs in G. Ill 
 
 II. CONTRACTED. 
 
 Impeiifect Tenses. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 rifiaofiai Tifiwfiai 
 Tifidy, €1 r I /i ^ 
 TifidsTai Tifxarai 
 TifiaofieOov TifKofie- 
 
 Qov 
 Ti}iataOov TifxdffOov 
 TifidecrOov TifidffOov 
 TijxaofieOa rifitofieOa 
 Ti/ideaOe rindcrOe 
 TifidovTai rifiojVTai 
 
 Trouofiai 
 
 TTodaTai 
 TTOieofieOov 
 
 TTodeaOov 
 TroisecrQov 
 TroieofxeOa 
 TToderrOe 
 
 TTOlSOVTai 
 
 TTOIOV fiai 
 TTOty, €l 
 
 TTOIOV fie- 
 Oov 
 
 TTO IEXgOoV 
 
 TToielaOov 
 TTOIOV fieOa 
 TToielcrOe 
 TTOiovvrai 
 
 dovXoofiat 
 dovXoy, €i 
 SovXoerai 
 dovXoofie- 
 
 9ov 
 dovXoecrOov 
 dovXoecrOov 
 dovXo6n£9a 
 dovXoEaOe 
 dovXoovrai 
 
 dovXov flat 
 dovXol 
 dovXovTui 
 dovXovfiE- 
 
 9ov 
 dovXovaQov 
 dovXovaOov 
 dovXovfieOa 
 dovXavaOe 
 SovXovvTai 
 
 Tifiaojfiai 
 Tifidy 
 TifidrjTat 
 Tifiau)ne- 
 
 Oov 
 TifxdijffOov 
 
 TlfldT](T90V 
 
 TifiaojiiE9a 
 
 Tifxdr](T9e 
 
 Tifidwvrai 
 
 Tifxiofxat TTOisiofiai 
 
 Tinq, TTOiky 
 
 Tifidrai TTodrjrai 
 
 TllMOJfie- 7T0Cf.i!jfXE90V 
 
 9ov 
 
 Tiiid(y9ov ■7rodT](T9ov 
 
 Ti}ida9ov 
 Tifiu)fie9a 
 rifid(T9e 
 TifiatvTai 
 
 TTodr}a9ov 
 7TOie(t)ixe9a 
 7TodT)(j9e 
 
 TTodiiiVTai 
 
 TTOHOjiai 
 TTOiy 
 
 TTOifjrai 
 
 TTOloJfie- 
 
 9ov 
 
 TT0lfj(T90V 
 TT0liJG90V 
 
 TToiit) ixe9a 
 '7Toii}a9s 
 
 TTOlUJVTai 
 
 dovXoiofiai dovXiofiai 
 dovXoy - dovXoX 
 dovXoTjTai dovXatrai 
 SovXoMfia- SovXwfjLB- 
 
 9ov 9ov 
 
 SovX6t]<T9ov 5ovXuj(t9ov 
 dovX6r}a9ov dovXCJa9ov 
 ^ovXo(jj}if.9a dovXa)ne9a 
 dovX6T]a9e dovXoj<r9e 
 dovXoiovrat dovXtoVTai 
 
 Tifiaoifirjv 
 
 Tifidoio 
 
 TifxdoiTO 
 
 Tifiaoijxe.- 
 
 9ov 
 Tifxdoia9ov 
 
 Tifiaoi(T9ov 
 
 TifiaoifiE9a 
 
 Tifidoi(T9e 
 
 TlfldoiVTO 
 
 Tlfl(i)IXT]V 
 
 TllK^O 
 
 TlfK^TO 
 
 9ov 
 
 TlfH^<T9oV 
 
 Ti^t^a9ov 
 Tifn^fiE9a 
 Tifi(^(T9e 
 
 Tljli^VTO 
 
 TT0l(.0l}Xr}V 
 
 TTO^OIO 
 
 TTodoiTO 
 
 7roieoiiJ.e9ov 
 
 TTodoia9ov 
 
 TTOieoi<T9r]v 
 
 TroieoifiE9a 
 
 TTodoi(T9e 
 
 7T0l0lfir)V 
 TTOLOXO 
 
 ttoioIto 
 
 TTOloiflE- 
 
 9ov 
 TToioXa9ov 
 
 TT0l0i<T9rjV 
 TT0l0iflE9a 
 
 ttoioX(t9e 
 
 TTOUOIVTO TTOIOLVTO 
 
 dovXooifjirjv dovXoifirjv 
 
 dovXooio dovXoXo 
 
 SovXooiro dovXoXTO 
 
 dovXaoi/xE- SovXoifXE- 
 
 9ov 9ov 
 
 dovXoot- dovXoX<T9ov 
 
 (t9ov 
 
 SovXooi- SovXoi<T9r]v 
 
 (T9riv 
 
 dovXooifiE- dovXoifieOa 
 
 Oa 
 
 ^ovX6oia9E dovXoX(T9e 
 
 dovXooivTo dovXoXvTO 
 
112 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table lY. — 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 Present and Imperfect Tenses^ 
 
 rTfidio, I TwTWr 
 [compare Lat. am{a)o\. 
 
 [comp. Lat. moneo]. 
 
 dovXoo), I subjugate. 
 
 
 
 Stems: n^ta 
 
 TTOie 
 
 SovXo 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 2 
 
 rt/^ae rifid 
 
 TToke TToiei 
 
 SovXoe dovXov 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 TifiasTU) rifidro) 
 
 TTOieeru} tt o t e i r w 
 
 dovXosru) iovXovro) 
 
 
 c5 
 
 D.2 
 
 TlfiCieTOP TLfXaTOV 
 
 TToderov Troieirov 
 
 dovXoerov dovXoiirov 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 rifXaeTlOV TtflOLTiOV 
 
 TTOiEtriov TTOieiriov 
 
 dovXokrwv S ovXovriov 
 
 
 p 
 
 3 
 
 TijxdtTE T I flare. 
 
 TTodere Troiilre 
 
 dovXSere SovXovre 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 
 
 Tijxaov- TlflWV- 
 
 TTOieoV- TTOIOVV- 
 
 dovXoov- S ovXovv- 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 T(i)V TbJV 
 
 Tiov r(ov 
 
 T(ov r<jjv 
 
 
 
 
 
 TlfXaSTU)- TlflCLTlii- 
 
 TTOueru)- TTOietrw- 
 
 dovXokru)- dovXovru)- 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 aav aav 
 
 aav cav 
 
 aav aav 
 
 
 d 
 
 l-H 
 
 
 Ti^deiv Tiiiav 
 
 TTOueiv TTOielv 
 
 dovXoeiv SovXovv 
 
 
 
 
 
 Tifidcov rifidv 
 
 TTOUdJV TTOIOJV 
 
 dovXotov SovXwv 
 
 
 ]3 
 
 
 
 rifidovaa Tinaxra 
 
 TTOiEovaa woiovcra 
 
 dovXoovaa S ovXovffa 
 
 
 
 
 rifidov TifioJv 
 
 TTOlkoV TTOIOVV 
 
 SovXoov d ovXovv 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 1 
 
 eri/xaov iri/xwv 
 
 IttoLeov sTToiovv 
 
 idovXoov edovXovv 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 2 
 3 
 1 
 
 erifiaeg kTifidg 
 kTifiae(v) krif^id 
 
 iTToieeg (Troieig 
 kTroies(v) tiro ill 
 
 • 
 
 iiroiUrov cTroteT- 
 
 idovXoEg edovXovg 
 tdovXoe{v) kd ovXov 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 tTlfldf.- BTiixd- 
 
 IdovXos- kdovXov- 
 
 
 a3 
 ft 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 TOV TOV 
 
 rov 
 
 Tov rov 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 tTifiai- krifid- 
 
 tiroid- IttoieL- 
 
 edovXos- tdovXov- 
 
 
 l-H 
 
 P. 
 
 1 
 
 rrjv TTjv 
 
 tTlfxdo- kTlfxCi- 
 
 Tr}v rijv 
 kTroikofiiv k'lroiov- 
 
 rrjv rr]v 
 tdovXoo- IdovXov- 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 tTifidET^ It I liars. 
 
 flEV 
 
 eTToikre 1 tt o t £ i r e 
 
 fiev fiev 
 MovXoere fdovXovre 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 krijiaov krifiwv 
 
 eTToieov tTVoiovv 
 
 edovXoov kdovXovv 
 
 
 The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in Xvu). 
 
 Examples for 
 ToXfido), I dare. law, / let (§ 236). 
 
 mydo), I am silent. 
 (Sodio, I call out. 
 
 d(TKS(i), I practise. 
 KO(Tfieio, I adorn. 
 
Continued, pakadigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 113 
 
 II. CONTRACTED. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 TlHaOV TlfHx) 
 
 TifJidk(T9(t) niidaObJ 
 TifideaOov niidaQov 
 TifiaeaOojv TifidaOiov 
 TifideaOe rifidcrOe 
 TLfiaicrOwv TifidaOiov 
 
 TifiakaBi)}- TifidoOo)- 
 aav aav 
 
 TTOUOV TTOIOV 
 
 TTOii^aOu) ttoib'ktOo) 
 iroikaOov TrotElaOov 
 
 TTOlUaOiOV "TTOlElffOoJV 
 
 TToikaOe TroceXaOe 
 TTOiseaOiov TroieicrOojv 
 
 TTOueaOu)- TTOifiaOoi- 
 aav aav 
 
 ^ovKoov ^ovXov 
 dovXoetrOoj 6 ovXovctOm 
 doifkoEtrOov dovXovtrOov 
 dovXoecrOojv dovXov(T9iov 
 dovXoerrOe. d ovXovaOs 
 dovXokcrOojv S ovXovcrOuiv 
 
 ^ovXosado)- dovXovtrOoj- 
 aav crav 
 
 TifideaQai riixdcrOai 
 
 TTOikecrOai TroieXcrOat 
 
 dovXoeaQai dovXovtrOai 
 
 Tifiaofie- rifidJfie- 
 
 VOQ VOQ 
 
 Tijiaofikvr] TifitofievT] 
 
 TlfiaoflE- TlfKOflS- 
 
 vov vov 
 
 TTOieofie- TTOIOV ft e- 
 
 VOQ VOQ 
 
 TTOieOflSVt] TTOIOV fXeVT) 
 
 TTOLeSfie- TTOIOV fie- 
 vov vov 
 
 dovXoofie- dovXovfie- 
 
 vog vog 
 
 dovXoofievTj d ovXov fievT] 
 SovXoone- d ovXov fiE- 
 
 vov vov 
 
 tTlfia6flT]V ETlfHOfXlJV 
 
 BTlfldoV £TlflW 
 
 iTifidero enndro 
 
 krifiaSfxe- lrifi(i)fiE- 
 
 Oov Bov 
 
 erifide- erifxa- 
 
 (tOov <t9ov 
 
 kTijiak- tTifid- 
 
 (tOtjv adriv 
 
 Irifiaofie- er ifib) fiB- 
 
 Oa 9a 
 
 iTifxdeffBe kTifid(T9e 
 
 krifldoVTO STlflWVTO 
 
 STTOUOflTJV tTTOlOV flTjV 
 ETTodoV k TTOIOV 
 
 eTTOisero eTTOielro 
 
 tTTOLEOfXe- eTTOlOV fie- 
 
 ' 9ov Bov 
 
 lTT0lkc90V tTTOiel- 
 
 <t9ov 
 
 tTT0iee(T9t]v eTTOiei- 
 
 a9r}v 
 
 tTTOLEOflE- ETTOlOVfie- 
 
 9a 9a 
 
 «7roi£€(r0€ ETTOiEXaBe 
 
 SITodoVTO eTTOlOVVTO 
 
 kdovXoofiTfv 
 
 kdovXovixrjv 
 
 edovXoov 
 
 edovXov 
 
 IdovXoETO 
 
 IdovXovTO 
 
 edovXoofxe- 
 
 edovXovfie- 
 
 Bov 
 
 Bov 
 
 IdovXoe- 
 
 kdovXov- 
 
 (tBov 
 
 aBov 
 
 edovXos- 
 
 kdovXov- 
 
 <TBr)v 
 
 aBriv 
 
 tdovXoofxe- 
 
 kdovXovfie- 
 
 Ba 
 
 Ba 
 
 tdovXoetjBe 
 
 sdovXovffBe 
 
 edovXoovTO 
 
 idovXovvTO 
 
 A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in the following Table 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 dpLBfieiOj I count. Zrifiiou), I punish. 
 
 drjXou), I make clear. 
 ffTe(j)av6(t)^ I crown. 
 
 Xpvaoo), 
 
114 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN 12. Table IV. 
 
 A. VOWEL STEMS. 
 
 ( Tlncontracted 
 
 Tensea* 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 Active Voice. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 Tl/Xr}(T(t) 
 TTOiriffiO 
 
 dov\(jj(r(o 
 
 • 
 
 Tiixrjaoijjii 
 7roir)<TOifii 
 dovXtoaoifxi 
 
 
 1 Aorist 
 (Weak). 
 
 iTifiijaa 
 kdovX(t)(xa 
 
 7rOlT]<TU) 
 dovX(0(T(t) 
 
 Tifir](Taifii 
 TTOiTjaaifii 
 dovXaxTai/xi 
 
 
 1 Perfect 
 (Weak). 
 
 TeTiixTjKa 
 
 TTETToitlKa 
 
 dedovXbJKa 
 
 TerifirjKUi 
 7re7roir]K<i} 
 dedovXwKU) 
 
 TeTifirjKoifii 
 ■7re7roiT]Koifit 
 deSovXwKoifii 
 
 
 1 Pluperfect 
 (Weak). 
 
 kreTi/xriKeiv 
 eTreiroirjKeiv 
 kSedovXujKeiv 
 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive Voices. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 Tinr](TOfiaL 
 TTOiTjaofiat 
 dovXwaofiai 
 
 
 rifirjaoifirjv 
 TTOirjaoi/xTjv 
 
 ^0vXh)(T0'lfir]V 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 TETifirinai 
 TTETroirjixai 
 dsdovX(ofiai 
 
 TETi}ir]fikvog hi 
 TTETroiijfisvog (5 
 SedovX(i)fxevog <L 
 
 TETi}ir}}ikvog eir]v 
 TTETroirifikvog eirjv 
 SeSovXhjfiBvog elrjv 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 kreTifirjixijv 
 hiTETroiriiiriv 
 kdedovXw/xrjv 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 TETifirjaoixai 
 7r67rot?7 (To/iai 
 dedovXbXTOnat 
 
 
 TeTiixr}(7oifir]v 
 7reTroiT](ToiixT]v 
 dedovX(»)(ToifiT}v 
 
 
 1 Aorist Pas- 
 sive (Weak). 
 
 kTTOLTjOrjV 
 
 sdovX(x)9t]v 
 
 Tiixr]9uj 
 Troir]9Cj 
 dovX(i)9oj 
 
 riixr]9eiiiv 
 '7roiTj9eir}v 
 dovX(i}9eir]v 
 
 
 3 Future Pas- 
 sive Weak). 
 
 Tiixi]9r](T0fiai 
 Troir]9r)<TOixai 
 ^ovX(t)9r](TOjxai 
 
 
 TlfiT]9t]<T0ifl7]V 
 
 '7roir]9riaoijxr]v 
 dovXio9r](ToiiJirjV 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 1. Tifirjrdg 2. TijxriTkog 
 
 TrOllJTOQ TTOirjTSOg 
 
 dovXiOTog dovXioTEog 
 
 
Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 115 
 
 1. UNCONTRACTED. 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 
 Active Voice. 
 
 
 
 
 7roif)aeiv 
 dovXioaeiv 
 
 iroiTjcriov 
 
 dovXu)(T(ov • 
 
 ' 
 
 Tinrjaov 
 
 7roiT]<TOV 
 
 SovXwffov 
 
 Tifif}(Tai 
 TTOLtjaai 
 dovXwcrai 
 
 mirjaag 
 TTOirjCag 
 dovXwcrag 
 
 
 TerifiTjKe 
 TreTToirjKe. 
 SedovXwKe 
 
 reTi/jiTjKBvaL 
 TreTTOiijKSvai 
 dedovXojKevai 
 
 TETifir}Kwg 
 TreTTOirjKiog 
 dedovX(i)Ka>g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 Middle and Passive Voices. 
 
 
 
 Tinr]qf.(j9ai 
 7roir](Te(T9ai 
 
 d07)X(O<TE(T9ai 
 
 Tifirjaofievog 
 
 TTOirjtTOIXEVOg 
 
 dovXoxTofXEvog 
 
 
 Teri/Jirjcro 
 
 TTSTToiljaO 
 
 deSovXuxTo 
 
 TETi^ri(T9ai 
 'rrtTroiri<T9at 
 ^f.SovXu)a9ai 
 
 TETifitjfxevog 
 Treiroiijfievog 
 SeSovXojfievog 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 T€Tifir)(Tea9ai 
 7r€7roti7(T£(T0ai 
 dEdovXa)(Te<T9ai 
 
 reTifirjaoixevog 
 TrsTTOiijaoiievog 
 SsSovXioao/ievog 
 
 
 Tifir]9r]Ti 
 iroiri9r}Ti 
 SovXo}9tjti 
 
 TifiT]9rivai 
 7roiT]9fjvaL 
 dovXoj9T)vai 
 
 TifiT]9Eig 
 7roiT]9eig 
 dovX(i)9dg 
 
 
 
 Tifir]9r](TE(T9at 
 7roir]9r)as(T9ai 
 dovXiij9r](Te(T9ai 
 
 Tifir)9r](T6fievog 
 '7roir]9r}a6fiEvo^ 
 dovXi>}9r)(T6fiEvog 
 
 
 • 
 
116 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table V. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 TrXeKio, I plait (Class 1) ; (pevyco, I flee (Class 2) ; 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 ttXckw 
 
 (pevyut 
 rd(T(Tit) 
 
 illJ 
 
 ttXIkw 
 ^evyoj 
 rdaaio 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 • 
 
 ttXs^u) 
 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 2 Aorist (Strong). 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 fTrXe^a 
 i(pvyov 
 tTata 
 
 
 TrXfi^w 
 
 <l>vyoj 
 
 rd^oj 
 
 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 2 Perfect (Strong). . 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 TTSTrXExa 
 TTscpevya 
 rkraxa 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 iTTiTrXkxf^iv 
 tTTi^ivyuv 
 
 tTETdx^l-V 
 
 7r€7rX£\;a> 
 
 TTE^EVyU) 
 
 Tfraxw 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 TrXkKOfiai 
 rdaaofiai 
 
 Imperfect. 
 tTrXeKofitjv 
 
 kTa<T<T6flT}V 
 
 TrXfKw/iat 
 rdaffiofiai 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 TrXk^ofiai 
 rd^ofiat 
 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist Middle (Weak). 
 
 kTrXt^d[ir]v 
 iTa^djjirjy 
 
 
 TrXk^iofiai 
 rd^iofiai 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfegt. 
 TTSTrXey/iai 
 TSTayixai 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 tTrETrXsyfiijv 
 eTETdynTjv 
 
 TfeirXEy fxevog at 
 TETaynsvog <Jj 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 TreTrXk^ofiai 
 rerd^ofiai 
 
 
 
 
 2 Aorist Pass. (Strong). 
 1 Aorist Pass. (Weak). 
 
 iTrXdicTjv 
 kTdxOijv 
 
 
 TrXaKd 
 TUxOd 
 
 
 2 Future Pass. (Strong). 
 1 Future Pass. (Weak). 
 
 TrXaKriaojiai 
 raxOhf^Ofiai 
 
 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 1. tzX^ktoq, <l>evKT6£, toktoq. 
 
 
 Examples for 
 ayw, / drive (Aor. ijyayov, Perf, Act. ijxa) ; dpxio^Irule, both of Class 
 (Pres. -ff(Tio, rarely -?w), see § 850. Nouns are formed from the Pure 
 V dpx-n-i ^^ government. 
 
Table V. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. f 17 
 
 I. GUTTURAL STEMS. 
 
 rdaaix)^ I arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: ttXek, (pvy, ray. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 TrXsKoifit 
 (pevyoifii 
 rdffaoifii 
 
 TrXsfcg 
 <j)evye 
 
 TrXsKELV 
 
 (pevyEiv 
 
 rrXsKdJV 
 (pevy(t)v 
 
 TrXs^oifxi 
 (pEv^oifirjv 
 
 TOL^Olfil 
 
 ttXb^hv 
 
 ^ev^eaOai 
 
 rd^eiv 
 
 ttXs^ojv 
 Ta^ojv 
 
 TrXe^aifii 
 
 (pvyoifxi 
 
 Ta^aifii 
 
 TrXe^ov 
 <l)vye 
 
 TOL^OV 
 
 TrXe^ai 
 <pvyEiv 
 rd^ai 
 
 TrXe^ag 
 Takag 
 
 TrerrXexoifit 
 Tre<pEvyoifii 
 TeTaxoi/Jii 
 
 TTETrXexe 
 
 TreTrXexEvai 
 Trecpevysvat 
 TETax^vai 
 
 TreTrXexwf 
 TTSipevywg 
 TETax*i)Q 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 rrXeKoiixrjv 
 Taoaoiji'qv 
 
 TrXsKov 
 rdaaov 
 
 TrXeKetrOaL 
 Td(T(T(.a9ai 
 
 TrXEKofiivog 
 TatTcrofxevog 
 
 7rXe^oifjii]p 
 Ta^oifiriv 
 
 TrXe^eaOai 
 rd^eaOai 
 
 TrXe^ofievog 
 ra^ofievog 
 
 TrXe^aifiT]v 
 ra^aifir)v 
 
 TrXe^ai 
 rd^ai 
 
 TrXe^aaOat 
 rd^atrOai 
 
 TrXE^dfiivog 
 Tu^dfievog 
 
 ■jreTrXeyfievog tlr]v 
 TETayfikvog eIijv 
 
 TTSTrXe^o 
 Tera^o 
 
 TTETrXkxOcti 
 TETdxOai 
 
 TTETrXeynevog 
 TETayixevog 
 
 TTSTrXe^oifirjv 
 TETaKoifirfv 
 
 TTETrXe^earOat 
 
 TETd^EffOai 
 
 TTEirXE^OflEVOg^ 
 TETa^OftEVOg 
 
 TrXaKEiTjv 
 TaxOEirjv 
 
 TrXdicTjOi 
 rdx^^Ti 
 
 TrXaKTJvat 
 raxOrjvai 
 
 TrXuKEig 
 raxOEig 
 
 7rXaKr](TciffiT]v 
 rax9r]<ToinT]v 
 
 7rXaKr]<TE(T9ai 
 TaxQr)<TE(TQai 
 
 TrXaKTjaofiEvog 
 TaxOrjffSfiEvog 
 
 2. irXEKTSOg, (pEVKTEOg, TUKTEOg. 
 
 Conjagation. 
 
 1; opvaffu), I dig, Stem op^x, Class 4, a; for other guttural Stems 
 
 Verbal Stems, as r6 TrXsy-fia, the wreath (§ 47); ri rdKi-g^ arrangement ; 
 
11§ PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN Q. Table YI. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 \pevdofiai, I lie (Class 1) ; TreiOw, I persuade (Class 2) ; 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 7r€l0(U 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 tKOfllHioV 
 
 7rei9(o 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 KOfllio 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 tTTHaa 
 tKOfiiaa 
 
 KOfllffU) 
 
 
 2 Perfect (Strong). 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 Perfect. 
 Trs'7roi9a 
 
 KEKOfXlKa 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 £7r67roi0eiv 
 
 tKiKOfllKBlV 
 
 7mroi9to 
 
 KEKOfllKa) 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ipe.v^onai 
 7rei9oixai 
 KOfiiKofiai 
 
 Imperfect: 
 i-il/evd6/xT}v 
 kTrH96fir]v 
 eK0fiiZ6fir}v 
 
 ^l/ev^lof^al 
 7rei9(i)fiai 
 KOfiiZuifiai 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 ■^pevaojxai 
 rrdcTOfiai 
 Koiiiovfiai 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist Middle) 
 (Weak). 
 
 k-i\/Evadfir]v 
 irru<rdixr]v 
 eKoiXKjdinijv 
 
 y\/EV(TiO}xat 
 
 TTElCTCOfiai 
 
 KOfiiffwuai 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 t-^EV<Tfiai 
 
 7rs7rei(Tfiat 
 
 KSKOfllfffiai 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ItpEVaflTjV 
 
 iTre7rei(TfXT]v 
 
 lKSK0lxi(TflTIV 
 
 ixliEvafisvog <L 
 TreTreicrfievog w 
 
 KEKOflKTIXSVOQ h) 
 
 
 1 Aorist Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 l'ipev<T9ijv 
 l7rei(T9r)v 
 tK0fii(T9r]v 
 
 ■ipEV(T9(0 
 7rEl(T9u} 
 K0fll(T9u) 
 
 
 1 Future Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 \pevcr9rjcrofiai 
 '7rH(x9r](TOfiai 
 K0fii(T9ri(T0fiai 
 
 # 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 1. }Psv<tt6q, TTHcrrog, KOfxiarog. 
 
 
 Examples for 
 
 (TTTEv^w, libo^ Fut. o-TretVw, Perf. tairEiKa, Perf. Mid. toirEKxnai, Aor. Pass. 
 
 For verbs of a Dental Stem, with the Present ending in -aau)^ see § 250, 
 
 tlie lie; r) Tria-Ti-g, the faith; rj <nroyd-T]j the libation; 6 kXw^-wv, Gen. 
 
Table VI. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in Q. 119 
 
 II. DENTAL STEMS. 
 
 KOfii^u), I carry (Class 1,5). Verbal Stems : 4^evd, ttiO, KOfitd. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 KOfli^Olfil 
 
 KOfll^S 
 
 irdQuv 
 
 KOfliZ,tlV 
 
 7rsi6(t)v 
 
 KOfii^tOV 
 
 KOflloTfll 
 
 TreKTHv 
 
 KOfllElV 
 
 
 TreKTaifii 
 KOfxirraiixi 
 
 KOfllffOV 
 
 KOfiitrai 
 
 KOfiiaaQ 
 
 TTETTOiOoiHt 
 KEKOfllKOlfll 
 
 KEKOfllKe 
 
 TTSTTOiOevai 
 
 KEKOfllKSVai 
 
 TrETroiOwg 
 
 KSKO/llKWg 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 rpevdoifiTjv 
 7rei9oifir]v 
 
 KOfll^oifi.1]V 
 
 \pEvS0V 
 TTUOOV 
 
 KOniZ,ov 
 
 \pevdea9at 
 TreiOeaOat 
 
 ■ypevdofievoQ 
 TreiOofiEvog 
 KOfii^ofiavog 
 
 \l/ev(ToifiT]v 
 
 TTSKToifirjV 
 KOflloifilJV 
 
 -ipeixTsaOai 
 ireiaeaOai 
 KOfiiHadai 
 
 xpevaSfievog 
 TreKTofievog 
 KOfJLiovfiavog 
 
 xpevaaifXTjv 
 
 KO/XKTai/lTIV 
 
 xpev(xai 
 
 TTHCai 
 
 Kofxiaai 
 
 TtHaaaOai 
 KOfiiaaaQai 
 
 ■tpevad/xevog 
 Treiadfievog 
 KOfiKTafievog 
 
 lipev(Tfievog elrjv 
 7re7r€i<Tfitvog drjv 
 
 KSKOfllffflEVOg HT]V 
 
 ttpevffo 
 
 Tr'sTTHGO 
 KeKOflKTO 
 
 t^evffOai 
 
 TTETTEiaOai 
 
 KEKOfxicQai 
 
 xpevaOEirjv 
 iruaQdriv 
 KOfiiaOEirjv 
 
 xlyeixrOrjTi 
 TrdffOrjTi 
 KOfiiaOrjTi 
 
 xpEvaO^vai 
 7rHa9fjvai 
 K0fii(r9f}vai 
 
 Irpevfffievog 
 TTSTreicTfievog 
 KSKQ flier fievog 
 
 tpevaOeig 
 ■KuaQdg 
 KOfiiaOdg 
 
 \pevaOT](ToifiT]v 
 TreicOrjffoifiijv 
 
 KOflKTOlJffoiflTjV 
 
 ^EvaOrjaEaOai 
 TrnffOrjaeffOai 
 KOfii(T9r)<Te(T9ai 
 
 xpevcrOrjffofisvog 
 TTHaOrjaofi^vog 
 KO/iKTQrjfTo/xevog 
 
 2. ypevcTTeog^ TretoTso?, KOfiiffTeog. 
 
 Coiijugation. 
 
 iffirehOrjv ; kXv^io^ I wash 
 Obs. Nouns are formed from 
 K\v6<av-og, tlw wave ; rj dpTray-rj 
 
 dpTrd^it)^ J snatch; IXtti^oj, I hope. 
 the Pure Verbal Stem, as : to \pevd-og, 
 plunder. 
 
120 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Table VII. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 Trefvrio, I send (Class 1) ; XtiTrw, / leave (Class 2) ; 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 TTSflTTU) 
 
 XeiTru) 
 KaXvTrro) 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 tTTt/iTTOV 
 
 IXeiTTov 
 
 iKaXvTTTOV 
 
 XeiTTb) 
 
 KaXvTrro) 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 Xeiipu) 
 KaXvxpoj 
 
 
 
 Aorist 1 (Weak): 
 2 (Strong). 
 1 (Weak). 
 
 tXlTTOV 
 
 iKoXvipa 
 
 XlTTit) 
 
 KaXvxpu) 
 
 
 3 Perfect (Strong). 
 2 Perfect (Strong). 
 
 Perfect. 
 irsTTOfKpa 
 XsXonra 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 €7r€7ro/i0etv 
 kXfXoiiruv 
 
 TTETTOfUpoi 
 
 XeXoiTTw 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 TTSflTTOfiai 
 
 Xuirofiai 
 KaXvTTTOfiai 
 
 Imperfect. 
 iiTEfnroiXTjv 
 IXeiTTofiijv 
 eKaXvTrrofiTiv 
 
 XeiTTCJuai 
 
 KoXvTTTOJfiai 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 TTSfixpoixai 
 
 XEi\pofiai 
 
 KaXvxpo/xai 
 
 
 
 A . . (1 (Weak). 
 
 Aonst Jn/Oi.,.? { 
 
 l7reiJ,\pdfiT]v 
 
 iXnrojJiijv 
 
 eKaXvtpdfirjv 
 
 7re fi-ipMfiai 
 
 XtTTwyuat 
 
 KaXv^jyiofiai 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 TTETrEflfiai 
 
 XeXeiixjxai 
 KeKoXvfifxai 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 iireTrkufiriv 
 eXeXdfi/jir}v 
 IkekoXv/xixijv 
 
 TTETrefjlflEVOQ (L 
 
 XeXeifinkvog w 
 KeKaXyfijiiBVOQ w 
 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 XeXei-^ofiai 
 KEKaXvypofiai 
 
 
 
 1 Aorist Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 kTrkn^9riv 
 
 kXei<p9i]v 
 
 kKaXv<p9r}v 
 
 Xei<p9(o 
 KoXv^du} 
 
 
 1 Future Passive 
 (Weak). 
 
 7reix(p9rj<T0fiai 
 
 Xei(l)9r)aofiai 
 
 KaXv(l)9r)(rofiai 
 
 
 
 Verbal Adjectives 
 
 : 1. TrefiTrTog, Xem 
 
 Tog, KaXvTTTog. 
 
 
 Tpeiru), 
 
 Examples for 
 turn (Class 1) ; dXei(f)<o, I anoint (Class 2) ; Tpij3o), I rub 
 
 (§ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as 6 Tro/xTr-o-g, 
 ing, manner; t6 dXH<p-ap,the ointment; 6 rd^-o-g, the tomb. 
 
Table VII. 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 121 
 
 III. LABIAL STEMS. 
 
 KaXviTTix}, I cmer (Class 3). Verbal Stems: 7refi7r,Xi7r, KaXv(3. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 irsfiiroifii 
 
 XeiTTOlflL 
 
 KaXv7rT0i/j.i 
 
 KdXvTTTk. 
 
 ■JTEflTTElV 
 
 Xeitteiv 
 
 KaXvTTTElV 
 
 TTEinrojv 
 XeLttiuv 
 
 KaXvTTTiOV 
 
 
 irkfiipoifii 
 
 Xeixpoifii 
 
 KaXv-^oijxi 
 
 
 TTEIXXpElV 
 
 XElXpElV 
 
 KoXvtpElV 
 
 TTEH-ipUiV 
 XElXpCJV 
 
 KaXvxj/iop 
 
 
 Trefixpaifii 
 
 XiTTOlfll 
 
 KoXv-^aini 
 
 Trsuxpov 
 
 XiTre 
 
 KaXvxpov 
 
 XlTTElV 
 
 TTEfi^l/ag 
 
 XlTTWV 
 
 KoXvipag 
 
 
 TTETTOfUpOlfiL 
 
 XeXoiiroifii 
 
 mTrofKpE 
 
 XeXoiTTE 
 
 TTETTOflCpEVai 
 XEXoiTTEVai 
 
 TTETTO/iKpdjg 
 XEXoLTTWg 
 
 
 MWdle and Passive. 
 
 
 TrefiTToiixrjv 
 
 XenroinTjv 
 
 KaXvTrTOifirjv 
 
 TTEfXTTOV 
 
 Xelttov 
 
 KaXvTTTOV 
 
 TrtinrE(j9ai 
 
 XE'nrE<j9ai 
 
 KaXv7rrE(T9ai 
 
 TTEfiTTOfiEVOg 
 
 XELTTOHEVOg 
 
 KaXvTTTOflEVOg 
 
 
 Xei-tpoifirjv 
 KaXv\poiixr]v 
 
 
 TrE}i-^E(T9at 
 
 XEi\(/E(T9ai 
 
 KaXv\l/E(T9ai 
 
 7ren\p6fiEvog 
 
 XEi-^pofiEvog 
 
 KaXv^ofiEvog 
 
 
 Tre fixpaifirjv 
 
 Xnroinr]V 
 
 KaXvxpaifiTjv 
 
 TTEflXpat 
 XlTTOV 
 
 KoXvipai 
 
 7re/x\pa(T9ai 
 
 Xi7rEcr9ai 
 
 KaXvypa<T9ai 
 
 TrEntpdfiEPog 
 
 XiTrofiEvog 
 
 KoXvipdfiEvog 
 
 
 TTETrefifiivog e'irfv 
 XeXeififiEvog eirjv 
 KEKaXvfiiikvog etrjv 
 
 TreTrEfi-ipo 
 
 XeXEi-ipo 
 
 KEKaXvtpo 
 
 7re7rEfi^9ai 
 
 XEXEl<p9ai 
 
 KEKaXv(p9ai 
 
 TrETtEflflEVOg 
 XEXElflflEVOg 
 KEKaXvflflEVOg 
 
 
 XsXei\poifit]v 
 KEKaXv^oifnf]V 
 
 
 XEXEi->pE<T9ai 
 KEKaXv\pEa9aL 
 
 XEXElXpO/XEVOg 
 KEKaXvipOflEVOg 
 
 
 7refi(p9driv 
 
 Xei<p9eirjv 
 
 KaXvp9elT]v 
 
 Trkn(p9r]Ti 
 
 XEi(l>9r]Ti 
 
 KaXv(p9r]Ti 
 
 irEfi<p9^vaL 
 
 XEi<p9fjvat 
 
 Ka\v<p9rivai 
 
 7rEfi(p9Eig 
 
 XEi(p9eig 
 
 KaXv^9Eig 
 
 
 '7rEfi^9ri<ToifiT)v 
 
 XEi(p9r]<Toifir]v 
 
 KaXv^9r)<Toifir]v 
 
 
 7rEfi(p9rj(TE<r9ai 
 XEi^9t]<yEa9ai 
 KaXv(^9r](TEa9ai 
 
 TrEH(l>9r}a6fiEvog 
 
 XEi(l>9T}(r6fiEvog 
 
 KaXv<p9T}(T6nEvog 
 
 
 2. TTEfiTTTSog, XetiTTeog, KaXv-rrreog. 
 
 Conjugation. 
 
 (Class 2), as to its Perf., see § 279 ; 9d7rTio,Ilmry (Class 3), Stem tu^ 
 the escort; Xoiir-o-g, remaining ; r} KoXv^-t}^ the hut; 6 Tpdir-o-g, the turn- 
 
 F 
 
122 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Table VIII. 
 
 B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
 
 depoj, IsTcin (Class 1) ; ayyeXXw, I announce (Class 4, c) ; airdpu), I sow (Class 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Active. 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sepu) 
 dyyeXKu) 
 (TTreipu) 
 fiiaivu) 
 
 Imperfect. 
 edepov 
 rjyyeXXov 
 
 tOTTHpOV 
 
 kfiiaivov 
 
 dsp(o 
 dyysXXc 
 (TTreipu) 
 fiiaivoj 
 
 Future. 
 
 dspuj 
 dyyeXio 
 ffxepu} 
 fiiavio 
 
 1 Aorist (Weak). 
 
 edeipa 
 ijyysiXa 
 ecnreipa 
 sfiidva 
 
 Seipoj 
 dyyuXd) 
 
 (TTTEipit) 
 
 fxidvo) 
 
 1 Perfect (Weak). 
 
 Perfect. 
 rjyyeXKa 
 iarrapKa 
 fiSfiiayKa 
 
 Mid. and Passive. 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 Sepofiai 
 dyytXXofiai 
 (jTreipo/^ai 
 juiiaivofiai 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 T^yy^KEiv 
 kairdpKHv 
 kfiefiidyKeiv 
 
 T^yyeXKOJ 
 tairdpKio 
 fisfxidyKu) 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Idepofirjv 
 T^yyeXXofirjv 
 ia7reip6fiT]v 
 eixiaiv6fjiT]v 
 
 dep(ofxai 
 dyykXXiofiai 
 (TTreipiofiat 
 fxiaiviofiai 
 
 Future. 
 
 depovfiai 
 dyyeXovfiai 
 GTrepovfxat 
 fiiavovfxai 
 
 1 Aorist Middle 
 (Weak).- 
 
 edeipdjurjv 
 riyyuXdfxriv 
 itTTTupdfiriv 
 k/xiavdfirjv 
 
 deipiofiai 
 dyyeiXojfxai 
 (TTreipojfiai 
 jxidvcjixai 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Sedap/xai 
 ijyyeXnai 
 taTcapfxai 
 fxe/jiiarrfiai 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 iSeddpfirjv 
 T^yyeXfiriv 
 L(T7rdp/xr)v 
 
 ifXEflldffflTfV 
 
 dedapfisvog <5 
 i^yyeXfisvog & 
 Itnrapfisvog t3 
 fiE/xia(Tfisvog w 
 
 r4 Strong. 
 Aorist Jl Weak. 
 Passive j 2 Strong. 
 
 VI Weak. 
 
 iSdpriv 
 riyy'sXQriv 
 ktnrapriv 
 IfiidvOTjv 
 
 dapio 
 dyyeXOu 
 (TTrapSj 
 fiiavOio 
 
 r2 Strong. 
 Future ) 1 Weak. 
 Passive) 3 Strong. 
 
 U Weak. 
 
 daprjao/xat 
 dyyeXOrjcTOfiai 
 (nrapr](TOfiai 
 p.iav9r]<T0fiai 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : 1. dapTog, dyyeXroe, (nrapTog, fxiavrog. 
 
Table VIIL 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 
 
 123 
 
 IV. LIQUID STEMS (\, ft, v, p). 
 
 4,<?); pa/vw, J5oiZ(Class4, <Z). Verbal Stems: dep,dyye\,(T7r6p,niav. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 depoi/jii 
 ayyeXXot/ii 
 
 (TTTEtjOOt/il 
 
 fxiaivoifii 
 
 depe 
 
 dyyEXXe 
 ffTrelpe 
 fxiaive 
 
 depuv 
 dyysXXeiv 
 (TTreipHV 
 HiaivHV 
 
 depiov 
 dyysXXuv 
 (Tirdpojv 
 fiiaivwv 
 
 depoTiXL 
 dyyeXoXfit 
 (Tirapo'lfii 
 fiiavoifii 
 
 deipaifit 
 dyyeiXaifiL 
 ffTT^ipaifii 
 Hidvaifii 
 
 depeiv 
 dyyeXfXv 
 (TTrepelv 
 jxiavdv 
 
 deXpov 
 ayyuXov 
 (Tireipov 
 fiiavov 
 
 deXpai 
 dyyeXXai 
 (TTreXpat 
 fiidvai 
 
 depCjv 
 dyyeXuiv 
 (TTrepatv 
 fiiaviov 
 
 deipag 
 dyyEiXag 
 (TTrelpag 
 fiidvag 
 
 T^yyeXKOi/xi 
 
 l(T7rdpK0llXi 
 
 fisiiidyKoifiL 
 
 -ijyyeXKe 
 icFTrapKE 
 fie/xiayKE 
 
 i^yyeXKsvai 
 iaTrapKsvai 
 /leniayKSvai 
 
 i^yyeXKMg 
 tairapKMg 
 HEfiiayKwg 
 
 depoifiTjv 
 dyyeXXoifirjv 
 <T7reipoiixr]v 
 fiiaivoifiTjv 
 
 depov 
 dyysXXov 
 (TTreipov 
 fiiaivov 
 
 depsffOai 
 dyysXXEaOai 
 (TTreipetrOai 
 fiiaiveaOai 
 
 Sepofievog 
 dyyeXXofievog 
 (TTnipofievog 
 fiiaivofiEvog 
 
 SepoiiiTjv 
 dyyeXoifiriv 
 aTTEpoifitjv 
 /xiavoifiriv 
 
 depeXaOai 
 dyyeXeXtrOai 
 aTrepeXaOai 
 fxiavuaQai 
 
 depovfievog 
 dyyeXovfiEvog 
 (TTrepovfievog 
 fiiavovfievog 
 
 daipaifiijv 
 dyyEiXaifXT]v 
 <nrsipaifiT)v 
 fiiavaifirjv 
 
 deXpai 
 dyynXai 
 (TTreXpai 
 fiiavai 
 
 ddparrOai 
 dyyeiXaffOai 
 (TTreipacrOai 
 fiidvaaOai 
 
 deipdfievog 
 dyyeiXdfxevog 
 (TTreipdfievog 
 fiiavd/xevog 
 
 ^edapfisvog Eirjv 
 riyyaXfisvog eiT]v 
 icTTrapfisvog eiTjv 
 fXEniaajikvog drjv 
 
 dEdapcro 
 i]yysX(TO 
 icrirapao 
 fiEfiiaffo 
 
 SeddpQai 
 ■qyykXOai, 
 l<nrdp9ai 
 fieHidvOai 
 
 h^apfxkvog 
 i^yyeXfikvog 
 iairapfikvog 
 /xeiiiatTfikvog 
 
 SapEirjv 
 dyyeXQeiTjv 
 (TTrapeirjv 
 fiiavOsiTjv 
 
 SaprfOi 
 dyyeXOrjTi 
 <T7rdpr]9i 
 fiidvOrjTi 
 
 dapfjvai 
 dyyeXOfjvai 
 (TTrapfivai 
 HmvQrivai 
 
 dapeig 
 dyyeXOeig 
 (TTrapeig 
 fiiavOeig 
 
 ^apr](roifir]v 
 dyyeX9T](Toifxr}V 
 <r7rapr](ToifiT]v 
 fiiavOrftToifiTiv 
 
 daprfaeaOai 
 dyyeX9f](TE(j9ai 
 (TTrapri(Te(x9ai 
 Hiav9'q(TEa9ai 
 
 capriaofievog 
 dyyEX9r}(T6fiEvog 
 (nrapi](T6fievog 
 fiiav9T](T6ixevog 
 
 2. SapTsog, dyyeXHog, airaprkog^ mavrkog. 
 
124 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fii. Table IX. ^ 
 
 VERBS IN fii 
 
 
 ri-en- 
 
 til, I put. 
 
 di-du)-fii, I give. 
 
 'i-cTii-fJLi^ I place. 
 
 
 Pure Stems Oe 
 
 3o 
 
 GTa 
 
 
 Present Stems n-Oe 
 
 di-do 
 
 i-ara 
 
 
 Present. Active. 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Tl-OlJ-fJll 
 
 di-ScD-fxi 
 
 'i-arrj-fiL 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ri-9r]-s 
 
 di-d(o-g 
 
 'i-(TTr]-g 
 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 
 TL-9r]-ai{y) 
 
 di-dio-(Ti{v) 
 
 'i-(TTtJ-(Tt(v) 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-Oe-Tov 
 
 di-do-TOV 
 
 'i-ard-Tov 
 
 
 ''B 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-Oe-Tov 
 
 Si-do-Tov 
 
 'i-OTCL-TOV 
 
 
 H- 1 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Ti-Be-fiev 
 
 di-do-fj.Ev 
 
 'i-(TTd-flEV 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-Os-re 
 
 di-do-TE 
 
 'i-OTCL-TE 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-9s-d-(n(v) 
 
 dt-86-d-(n(v) 
 
 i-(jTd-(n(v) 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Ti-Oa, 
 
 ai-^oi 
 
 t-OTW 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-Oy-Q 
 
 di-d(ii-Q 
 
 i-(TTy-Q 
 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-By 
 
 di-d(^ 
 
 i-ary 
 
 
 •§ 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ri-9i]-Tov 
 
 dl-^OJ-TOV 
 
 l-(TTr]-TOV 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 Tl-0i]-TOV 
 
 di-dio-Tov 
 
 i-aTrf-TOV 
 
 
 CO 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Ti-9w-fiev 
 
 dt-dd-fiiv 
 
 l-OTW-/i£V 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-Bij-re 
 
 Si-dat-TE 
 
 l-CTYI-TE • 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-9Ci-(n{v) 
 
 di-dio-(n(v) 
 
 l-(TTO)-ai{}') 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 Ti-9eir]-v 
 
 di-doir}-v 
 
 i-(TTair]-v 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-9f.ir]-Q 
 
 di-doiij-g 
 
 i-crTair]-g 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ri-9eiT] 
 
 di-doiTj 
 
 i-tTTairj 
 
 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 . ri-9eiT]-Tov or 
 
 di-doL7j-Tov or 
 
 i-arairj-Tov or 
 
 
 05 
 > 
 
 
 ti9htov 
 
 didoXrov 
 
 laTOlTOV 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-9ur}-Ti)v or 
 
 8i-doiT}-TT]v or 
 
 i-aTairj-Trjv or 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 
 Ti9eiTT]v 
 
 didoiTriv 
 
 i(TTaiTT}V 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Ti-9eLT]-fiEv or 
 
 ^L-doiTj-fiev or 
 
 i-crTaiTj-fiev or 
 
 
 
 
 riOeiixev 
 
 Sidolfiev 
 
 icTTalfjiev 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 ri-9eiT]-Te or 
 
 dL-8oiT]-Te or 
 
 i-aTair]-TE or 
 
 
 
 
 Tl9HTe 
 
 MoTre 
 
 laTdiTE 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-9eiT}-(Tav or 
 
 Si-SoiTj-tTav or 
 
 i-(TTaij]-(Tav or 
 
 
 
 
 Ti9eiev 
 
 didolev 
 
 laTOlEV 
 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 ri-9si 
 
 di-dov 
 
 'l-<TTtJ 
 
 
 05 
 
 3 
 
 Tl-9s-TiO 
 
 dL-d6-T(o 
 
 i-<TTa.-T(o 
 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 Ti-9e-T0V 
 
 di-do-TOV 
 
 'l-<TTd-TOV 
 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-9s-ru)V 
 
 dL-do-TMV 
 
 i-(TTa.-TOJV 
 
 
 1 
 
 1— I 
 
 P. 2 
 
 Ti-9e-Te 
 
 di-So-TS 
 
 'i-ara-TE 
 
 
 3 
 
 Ti-9k-vT0}V or 
 
 di-d6-vro)v or 
 
 i-trrd-VTwv or 
 
 
 
 
 ri-9k-r(o(Tav 
 
 di-d6-T(i)(Tav 
 
 i-<Trd-T(i)<Tav 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 « " 
 
 Ti-9k-vai 
 
 di-do-vai 
 
 i-ard-vai 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 n-^ei-c, Ti-9el-(Ta, 
 
 Si-dov-Q^di-dov-aa, 
 
 i-ard-g, i-ard-ffa, 
 
 
 
 
 TiBkv G. Ti9svr-og 
 
 didov G. di-dovT-og 
 
 lardv G. i-(TrdvT-og 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table IX. paradigms of verbs. — verbs in jui. 125 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 
 This First Class consists of Verbs wliicli affix their terminations 
 
 
 
 directly to the Stem. 
 
 
 Present. Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 ri-Oe-fiai 
 
 di-do-ixai 
 
 i-ara-fiai 
 
 
 Ti-9e-(Tai 
 
 di-So-aai 
 
 'i-UTd-aai 
 
 
 ri-9e-Tai 
 
 di-do-Tai 
 
 'i-ara-Tai 
 
 
 Tl-Q't-jXiBoV 
 
 di-d6-fie9ov ■ 
 
 i-GTa.-fiE9ov 
 
 
 Ti-Oa-aOov 
 
 di-do-aBov 
 
 'i-<JTa-(T9ov 
 
 
 ri-9e-a9ov 
 
 di-do-G9ov 
 
 'i-<TTa-<T9ov 
 
 
 rt-9e-fiE9a , 
 
 Si-d6-fis.9a ' 
 
 i-<TTd-fie9a 
 
 
 Ti-9e-(T9e 
 
 di-do-a9e 
 
 'l-<TTa-<T9e 
 
 
 Ti-9e-vTai 
 
 di-So-vrai 
 
 'i-ara-VTai 
 
 
 Ti-Bd-fiai 
 
 di-dio-fiai 
 
 i-GTCj-fiai 
 
 
 TL-9y 
 
 Si-d({i 
 
 i-<TTy 
 
 
 Ti-Bfj-Tai 
 
 Si-doj-Tai 
 
 l-ffTtj-Tai 
 
 
 rL-9<jj-fiE9ov 
 
 5t-du)-fie9ov 
 
 t-(TTa)-flE90V 
 
 
 Ti-9rj-a9ov 
 
 di-dio-<T9ov 
 
 i-(TTrj-&9ov 
 
 
 Ti-9i]-(r9ov 
 
 di-du)-a9ov 
 
 i-<tttj-(t9ov 
 
 
 Ti-9io-ixe9a 
 
 di-dit)-fie9a 
 
 i-<TTU)-fie9a 
 
 
 Ti-9rj-a9e 
 
 di-Sw-(r9e 
 
 i-<TTrj-<T9e 
 
 
 Ti-9u)-VTai 
 
 h-^S)-VTai 
 
 i-ario-vTai 
 
 
 Ti-9ai-ixr]v 
 
 di-doi^fi7]v 
 
 l-aTai-ixrjv 
 
 
 Ti-9u-o 
 
 di-doi-o 
 
 i-aToX-o 
 
 
 ti-9h-to 
 
 di-doX-TO 
 
 i-(TTai-TO 
 
 
 ri-9ei-fii9ov 
 
 Si-^oi-fiE9ov 
 
 i-(TTai-fxe9ov 
 
 
 Ti-9ei-(T9ov 
 
 di-dol-(T9ov 
 
 i-(TTai-G9ov 
 
 
 Ti-9d-(y9r]v 
 
 ^L-^oi-(T9r]v 
 
 i-aTai-a9r]v 
 
 
 Ti-9d-nE9a 
 
 ^i-Soi-fiE9a 
 
 i-CTai-fiEBa 
 
 
 ti-9h-<t9£ 
 
 Si-SoX-(T9e 
 
 i-(TTdi-a9e 
 
 
 Ti-9ei-vTo 
 
 di-dol-VTO 
 
 i-(jTaX-VTO 
 
 
 tI-9e-<7o 
 
 di-So-(To 
 
 'i-(TTa-ao 
 
 
 ti-9s-<t9oj 
 
 di-d6-(T9i)j 
 
 i-(TTd-(T9(t) 
 
 
 Ti-9e-<T9ov 
 
 di-So-aBov 
 
 'i-aTa-<j9ov 
 
 
 Ti-9k-a9u)v 
 
 Si-S6-<t9(i)v 
 
 i-<TTd-(r9ojv 
 
 
 Ti-9e-(T9e 
 
 di-do-a9e 
 
 'i-(TTa-(T9e 
 
 
 ti-9s-(t9ojv or 
 
 di-d6-(T9ojv or 
 
 i-<TTd-(T9(t)v or 
 
 
 Ti-9k-cr9io(rav 
 
 Sl-S6-(T9u)(TaV 
 
 i-(TTd-(r9io(Tav 
 
 
 ri-9e-(T9aL 
 
 di-do-(T9ai 
 
 'i-ceTa-a9ai 
 
 
 Ti-Bs-fievo-g^ ijj o-v 
 
 dt-So-fievo-Qj r], o-v 
 
 i-ffTd-fievo-g, ij, o-v 
 
 
 
 
 
126 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fit. Table IX. — 
 
 VERBS IN fit. 
 
 
 Ti-Orj-iJii, I put. 
 
 ^i-dio-jjii, I give. 
 
 'i-ar7]-fii^ I place. 
 
 
 Pure Stems 9e 
 
 do 
 
 (Tra 
 
 
 Present Stems Ti-9e 
 
 di-do 
 
 i-(TTT} 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 k-Ti-9f]-V 
 
 i-6i-dio-v 
 
 'i-(TTr}-v 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 k-Ti-9r]-g 
 
 e-di-du)-Q 
 
 'i-arri-g 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
 t-Ti-9rj 
 
 i-di-do) 
 
 l-CTTIJ 
 
 
 1 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 k-ri-9e-T0v 
 
 k-di-do-TOV 
 
 'i-<TTa-T0V 
 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 k-Ti-9£-rr)v 
 
 t-h-U-Tj}v 
 
 l-(7Ta-TT}V 
 
 
 P. 1 
 
 i-Ti-9e-iJ,ev 
 
 l-di-do-fxev 
 
 i-aTa-fiEv 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 k-Ti-9e-Te 
 
 k-di-do-re 
 
 i-ffTa-re 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 £-Ti-9s-(Tav 
 
 l-di-do-crav 
 
 i-<TTc^(rav 
 
 
 
 Second or Stro 
 
 ng Aorist. Active. 
 
 
 
 S. 1 
 
 [i-9v-v] 
 
 [e-doj-v] 
 
 t-(Trr]-v 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 [e-9r,-Q] 
 
 [e.du>.g] 
 
 i-arri-g 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 [i-er)] 
 
 [i-dio] 
 
 e-<rni 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 D. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 2 
 
 i-9e-T0v 
 
 i-do-Tov 
 
 t-crrrj-rov 
 
 
 ''B 
 
 3 
 
 l-9k-Tr]v 
 
 e-d6-rT]v 
 
 t-arr)-rriv 
 
 
 M 
 
 P. 1 
 
 i-9e-fiEv 
 
 i-do-fiEv 
 
 t-cTrrj-fxev 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 i-9e-Te 
 
 e-do-TE 
 
 i-(TTT]-Te 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 e-9e-aav 
 
 i-do-aav 
 
 i-<Trr)-(Tav 
 
 
 Sub). 
 
 
 9io 
 
 duj 
 
 (TT(0 
 
 
 
 
 9y-g 
 
 ^V-Q 
 
 ary-g 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc., as in the 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 9eir]-v 
 
 doiij-v 
 
 aTair}-v 
 
 
 
 
 etc., as. in the 
 
 
 
 S. 2 
 
 9e-Q 
 
 do-g 
 
 aTrj-9i. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 9e-T(o 
 
 do-ro) 
 
 ffrrj-Tio » 
 
 
 D. 2 
 
 9e-tov 
 
 do-TOV 
 
 (rrij-TOV 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 H- 1 
 
 3 
 
 9s-T(OV 
 
 d6-Tit)v 
 
 arq-Ttav 
 
 
 P. 2 
 
 9e-TS 
 
 do-re 
 
 <TTfj-T£ 
 
 
 3 
 
 9k-vT(t)v or 
 
 d6-vr(i)v or 
 
 (TTa-VTwv or 
 
 
 
 
 9k-Tit)(Tav 
 
 do-Tioaav 
 
 (TTT}-T(0<TaP 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 9el-vaL 
 
 dov-vai 
 
 arfj-vai 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 9Ei-g, 9ei-(Ta^ 9'e-v 
 
 dov-g, dov-(Ta, 
 
 (TTd-g, (TTd-aa, 
 
 
 
 
 G. 9kvT-0Q 
 
 do-v G. dovr-og 
 
 (TTOLV G. ffTOLVT-Og 
 
 
 The following Tenses are formed 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 9fj(TU} 
 
 diixyto 
 
 (TTT]<Tb) 
 
 
 First or Weak 
 Aorist. 
 
 Wjjku 
 
 idioKa 
 
 iarTjffa 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Tk9uKa 
 
 dsdioKa 
 
 e(TTr]Ka 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 iTi.9HKHV 
 
 kdeSbJKHv 
 
 k<TTr]KHV or 
 f.l<TTr]KUV 
 
 
 Verbals. 
 
 
 
 
 
Continued, paradigms of verbs. — verbs in jut. 127 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 
 This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
 directly to the Stem. 
 
 
 < 
 
 i 
 
 « 
 t 
 I 
 
 -Tl-Bk-flTiV 
 
 -Ti-BE-ao • 
 -t'i-Be-to 
 
 -Tl-Bk-fXEBoV 
 
 -Ti-BE-aBov 
 -Ti-B't-(jBriv 
 -TL-Be-fieBa 
 -tI-Be-<tBe ■ 
 -t'l-Be-vto 
 
 k-Si-do-firjv 
 
 E-dL-do-tTo 
 
 E-di-do-TO 
 
 E-di-do-jXEBov 
 
 E-di-6o-(TBov 
 
 i-di-do-aBTjv 
 
 E-Si-do-fieBa 
 
 E-Si-do-aBE 
 
 l-di-do-VTO 
 
 'l-(TTa-(TO 
 
 'i-ara-TO 
 
 l-crrd-fMEBov 
 
 'i-ara-aBov 
 
 i-aTa-aBriv 
 
 l-ard-fiEBa 
 
 'i-ara-aBE 
 
 'l-(TTa-VT0 
 
 
 Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 i-9e-fir]v 
 
 i-9ov 
 
 e-9e-T0 
 
 e-9e-fiE9ov 
 
 l-9E-a9ov 
 
 E-9k-a9r]v 
 
 k-9e-fiE9a 
 
 i-9E-a9E 
 
 i-9E-VT0 
 
 E-do-firiv 
 e-dov 
 
 E-do-TO 
 
 E-d6-fiE9ov 
 
 E-do-(T9ov 
 
 E-d6-<T9r)v 
 
 E-do-fieBa 
 
 i-do-rrBE 
 
 t-do-VTO 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 9CJ-nai 
 By 
 
 Pres. Subjunctive. 
 
 Sat-fiat 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 9Ei-fj,r}v 
 
 Pres. Optative. 
 
 doi-fiTjv 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 9ov 
 
 Bk-(TB(o . 
 
 Be-aBov 
 
 Bk-(rBii)v 
 
 Bk-aBE 
 
 9k-a9(i)v or Bk-aBioffav 
 
 dov 
 
 do-crBo) 
 
 do-aBov 
 
 do-aBiov 
 
 S6-(tBe 
 
 d6-aB(t)v or do-rrBoxrav 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 
 Be-aBai 
 
 do-crBai 
 
 Wanting. . 
 
 
 Bs-fiEvo-g, ri, o-v 
 
 do-fiEvo-g, ri, o-v 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 rni the anahgy of Verbs 
 
 in Q. 
 
 
 
 Middle and Passive. 
 
 
 Brjaofiai 
 
 Passive. TEBrjffofiai 
 
 dijjffofiai 
 SoBri<TOjJ,at 
 
 aTrjaofiai 
 (TraBr}(T0/xai 
 
 
 Middle. Wanting 
 
 PASSiVE. ItsBtjv 
 
 Wanting 
 IdoBriv 
 
 ECTT^aajiriv 
 EOrdBriv 
 
 
 HBEifiai 
 
 dsSoixai 
 
 scTTafiai 
 
 
 irEBEifirjv 
 
 edEdonijv 
 
 eaTdfirjv 
 
 
 
 Betoq 
 
 dETSOQ 
 
 Sorog 
 SoTsog 
 
 araroQ 
 crraTEog 
 
128 
 
 PAKADIGMS OF VERBS. — VERBS IN fxt. Table X. 
 
 VERBS IN fit. SECOND CLASS. 
 
 This Second Class consists of Verbs which fonn the Present-Stem by- 
 adding vv to the Pure Stem. 
 
 deiKvvfii, I show. Pure Stem ^ e i k. Present Stem Seik-v v. 
 
 Present Active. Middle and Passive. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 P1.1 
 2 
 3 
 
 dHK-VV-fXL 
 
 detK-vv-g 
 deiK-vv-ffi(v) 
 
 h'lK-VV-TOV 
 
 Mk-vv-tov 
 SeiK-vv-fiev 
 
 SeiK-VV-TB 
 
 deiK-vv-d(Ti{v) 
 
 deiK-vv-fxai 
 
 ddK-vv-uai 
 
 deiK-vij-Tai 
 
 deiK-vv-fi.e9ov 
 
 deiK-w-aBov 
 
 SeiK-w-aBov 
 
 hiK-vv-iit9a 
 
 deiK-vv-(T9e 
 
 deiK-vv-vrai 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 
 deiKvvo), yQ, y, etc. 
 
 deiKvvu)fiai, y, yrai, etc. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 dHKVVOLfll, Oig, 01, etc. 
 
 deiKvvoifiijVj oio, oiro, etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 PI. 2 
 3 
 
 Mk-vv 
 
 deiK-vv-rcj 
 
 deiK-rv-Tov 
 
 deiK-vv-T(i)v 
 
 deiK-vv-Te 
 
 deiK-vv-vr(ov or 
 
 deiK-vv-TOjaav 
 
 deiK-vv-ffo 
 
 deiK-vv-<T9(o 
 
 SeiK-vv-a9ov 
 
 SeiK-vv-aBiov 
 
 £dK-vv-(T9e 
 
 deiK-vv-(T9ii}v or 
 
 deiK-vv-(T9u}(Tav 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 deiK-vv-vat 
 
 MK-vv-a9at 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 dHK-vi>Q, deiK-vv<Ta, hiK-vvv 
 Stem Sf.iK-vv-vT 
 
 deiK-vv-fiepog, rj, ov 
 
 Imperfect 
 Indicative. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 P1.1 
 2 
 3 
 
 i-dsiK-vv-v 
 k-deiK-vv-g 
 
 k-h'lK-VV-TOV 
 
 i-SeiK-vv-rrjv 
 
 k-^UK-VV-jltV 
 k-h'lK-VV-TB. 
 
 e-deiK-w-aav 
 
 t-deiK-vv-fir]v 
 
 e-deiK-vv-ao 
 
 t-SeiK-vv-ro 
 
 i-hiK-vv-ni9ov 
 
 £-Mk-vv-(t9ov 
 
 k-hiK-vv-a9riv 
 
 k-deiK-vv-iie9a 
 
 e-deiK-vv-<T9e 
 
 k-hlK-W-VTO 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 deiK(o 
 
 dd^ofiai 
 
 Passive. ^Eix9r)<T0fiai 
 
 First or 
 Weak Aorist. 
 
 
 tdeiKa 
 
 Middle. iSu%dnr]v 
 Passive. IMx9t]v 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 dedeixa 
 
 dedeiyfiai 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 IdedeixEiv 
 
 ededeiyiJ.r]v 
 
§232. 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 129 
 
 Chap. X. — First Principal Conjugation, 
 or Verbs in w. 
 
 I. The Present- Stem. 
 A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem. 
 
 § 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains 
 after rejecting a> in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. 
 
 On the distinction of the Present- Stem from the Verbal- 
 Stem, see § 245, etc. 
 
 The following Table exhibits the way in which the Per- 
 sonal Endings are affixed to the Present- Stem by means 
 of the connectins: vowels. 
 
 § 232. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle and 
 Passive. 
 
 Present 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 \v-u) 
 
 [solv-o] 
 
 Xv-o-iiai 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 2 " 
 
 \v-El-Q 
 
 [solv-i-s] 
 
 Xv-y or Xvu 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-ei 
 
 [solv-i-t] 
 
 Xv-e-TUL 
 
 
 IDual 
 
 
 
 Xv-6-fiE9ov 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-e-Tov 
 
 
 Xv-e-crOov 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-e-rov 
 
 
 Xv-e-a9ov 
 
 • 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 Xv-o-fizv 
 
 [solv-i-mus] 
 
 Xv-6-ne9a 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-e-TS 
 
 [solv-i-tis] 
 
 Xv-a-(T6e 
 
 
 3 " • 
 
 Xv-ov-<n{v) [solv-u-nt] 
 
 Xv-o-vrai 
 
 Present 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 Xv-O) 
 
 [solv-a-m] 
 
 Xv-(t)-fiat 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-y-Q 
 
 [solv-a-s] 
 
 Xv-y 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-y 
 
 [solv-a-t] 
 
 Xv-r]-Tai 
 
 
 IDual 
 
 
 
 Xv-(Sj-fieOov 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-Tj-TOV 
 
 
 Xv-rj-aOov 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-t]-TOV 
 
 
 Xv-t]-(t9ov 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 Xv-oj-fiev 
 
 [solv-a-mus] 
 
 Xv-w-fie9a 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-ri-re 
 
 [solv-a-tis] 
 
 Xv-i]-a9e 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-<a-ai(v) 
 
 [solv-a-nt] 
 
 Xv-(t)-vTai 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 F 2 
 
130 
 
 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 
 
 232. 
 
 
 
 
 Middle and 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Present 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 Xv-oi-fxt 
 
 Xv-oi-fiT]v 
 
 Optative. 
 
 3 " 
 
 \v-oi-g 
 
 Xv-oi-o 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-OL 
 
 Xv-Ol-TO 
 
 
 IDual 
 
 
 Xv-oi-fie9ov 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-Ol-TOV 
 
 Xv-oi-a9ov 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-oi-TT]v 
 
 Xv-oi-a9rjv 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 Xv-ot-fiev 
 
 Xv-oi-fieOa 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 " 
 
 Xv-OL-re 
 
 Xv-oi-a9e 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-OL-EV 
 
 Xv-Ol-VTO 
 
 Present 
 
 2 Sing. 
 
 Xv-e [solv-e] 
 
 Xv-ov 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-k-T(o [solv-i-to] 
 
 Xv-£-a9u) 
 
 
 2 Dual 
 
 Xv-e-Tov 
 
 Xv-t-a9ov 
 
 
 3 « 
 
 Xv-£-T(t}V 
 
 Xv-k-a9(i)v 
 
 
 2 Plur. 
 
 Xv-e-TE [solv-i-te] 
 
 Xv-e-a9e 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 Xv-6-vTU}v [solv-u-nto] or 
 
 Xv-k-(T9u)v or 
 
 
 
 Xv-B-TO)(TaV 
 
 Xv-e-<T9io(Tav 
 
 Present 
 
 
 Xv-eiv 
 
 Xv-e-a9ai 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 
 Stem Xv-o-vT [solv-e-nt] 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 Xv-iov 
 
 Xv-o-jxEvo-g 
 
 
 
 Xv-ovaa 
 
 Xv-o-fievT] 
 
 
 
 Xv-ov 
 
 Xv-O-flEVO-V 
 
 
 
 Gen. Xv-o-vT-oQ 
 
 
 
 
 [solv-e-nt-is] 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1 Sing. 
 
 t-Xv-o-v 
 
 k-Xv-6-}ir}v 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 t-Xv-e-g 
 
 k-Xv-ov 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 i-Xv-E(v) 
 
 E-Xv-E-TO 
 
 
 IDual 
 
 
 E-Xv-6-fiE9ov 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 l-Xv-e-TOP 
 
 k-Xv-E-<T9ov 
 
 
 3 " 
 
 k-Xv-k-TTiv 
 
 e-Xv-e-(t9t]v 
 
 
 1 Plur. 
 
 k-Xv-o-fxev 
 
 e-Xv-6-fiE9a 
 
 
 2 " 
 
 e-Xv-e-TE 
 
 k-Xv-E-(r9E 
 
 
 3 « 
 
 e-Xv-o-v 
 
 k-Xv-O-VTO 
 
233. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131 
 
 § 233. Obs. — 1. The E-souncl (e, ?/, et) is used as a connecting vowel 
 except before nasals, where the 0-sound (o, w, o v) is used. 
 
 3. In 1 Sing. Ind. Act. w is the connecting vowel lengthened, the 
 ending fii being dropped. In the 2 Sing, e i ^ is for e o- 1. In the 
 3 Sing. € I for tn: Xv-ei-g for Xv-e-m, Xv-ei for Xv-e-n [compare 
 solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by compensa- 
 tive lengthening (§ 42) : Xv-ov-ai, from Xv-o-v(n, for the original 
 and Doric Xv-o-vn [compare soh-u-nt]. In the 3 Sing. Imperf. 
 € (v) stands for original s-t — compare solveba-t — as r at the end 
 could not maintain its ground (§67). 
 
 8. In the 2 Sing. Indie. Pres. Mid. y or e t arose from t{a)aL (§§ 61, 
 38) : \uy, from Xvt{iy)ai ; the ending ei is the Old Attic one ex- 
 clusively used in oiei, thou thinkest ; (SovXei, thou wishest ; y is the 
 one later in general use. Compare the Fut. ^u (§ 259). 
 A. The Subjunctive has always w, ?;, ^, for o (ow), e, e i ; the y of the 
 2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from r]{(j)ai (compare § 228). 
 
 5. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. the termination after the connecting 
 vowelis quite lost, o w in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid. 
 has arisen from €((r)o, €o : Xvovz=Xve((T)o, tXvov^tXve(a)o (§§ 61, 
 37) ; o 1 in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from o t (<t) o. 
 
 § 238. Dialects. — 1. The Epic dialect sometimes has the original 
 ending ^ i of the 1 Sing, in the subjunctive : iOkXio-fii^ velim; the 2 Sing. 
 Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending aOa (for q) : t9kXr}-G9a=. 
 WkXyg, KXaioi-a9a = KXaioig (KXaioj, I weep)) the 8 Sing. Subj. has the 
 old ending a i (v), from r i : k9kXr}-<n{v) = WkXy. 
 
 «-^ 2. The long vowels of the subjunctive are often shortened in Homer : 
 lOvvETE for iOvvTjre {i9vv(o, I put straight) (compare § 228, D.). 
 
 3. The Epic dialect often has /u e v a i or /« e v in the Inf. Act. con- 
 nected with the Stem by an accented € : dfivv-e-fievai or dfivv-k-jx^v := 
 dn^vHv, to defend. 
 
 4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dialect : 
 XiXaUai, thou wishest ; Subj. txwi (habearis), also shortened, fiicryeai 
 (miscearis) ; Imperat. sTreo, follow ; Imperf Ideveo, thou wast in want of. 
 f is also contracted to e u (§ 37, D.) : cVeu. 
 
 5. The 1 Dual and 1 Plftr. Mid. in poetry often has a for : (iov- 
 X6ixe<T9ov, -/i€(79a, we wish. 
 
 Q. uTo (§ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for vto in 
 3 Plur. Opt. : ^axoiaro {^naxoivro)^ they Tnay fight. In New-Ion. arat, 
 aro^ are also sometimes found in other forms where e is the connect- 
 ing vowel instead of o : Krid-k-arai = Krjd-o-vrai, they care : IfiovX-k-aro 
 =■ i(3ovXovTo. , 
 
132 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 234. 
 
 B. TJiG Augment. 
 
 § 234. The Augment {Augmentum^ increase) is the 
 sign of the jpast in the Indicative of all the historical 
 tenses (§ 225, 3. B.). It has two forms ; that is, it appears 
 either — 
 
 d) As a SyllabiG Augment, in the syllable £ prefixed, or 
 
 J) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the 
 initial vowel. 
 
 All verbs beginning with a consonant have the Sylla- 
 hiG Augment : i-\v-o-v, t-ruTrr-o-jur/v, / was strucJc. p is 
 doubled after £ : tpplirTov, from ptirTtj,! hwl. 
 
 Obs. — The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of r] 
 instead of e in -il-fieSX-o-v, I was about to, from /ueXXw ; ij-(iov\-6-fitjv, 
 I wished, from (iovkofiai ; i)-dvvd-fir]v, I could, from Svva/iai. 
 
 § 235. The Temjporal Augment is used in all verbs which 
 begin with a vowel., whether aspirated or not. The Tem- 
 poral Augment changes 
 
 a to 77 : ayw, I lead. Imperfect r}y-o-v 
 
 « " 1]'. i\avv(>),I drive. " t/Xaw-o-v 
 
 o " w : dveiSi^u), I reproach. " wveidi^-o-v. 
 
 t "I: 'iKSTevo), I beseech. " 'iKerev-o-v 
 
 7. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. rov, <t9ov, 
 for Tr]v, (T 9 T}v : Itevx^tov, the two made; and Attic writers have Ttjv 
 for the 2 Dual of an historic sense: eixerrjv, ye two had; evpkrrjv, ye 
 two found. 
 
 § 234. Dialects. — In Homer, and also in other poets, the Augment 
 may be entirely omitted: r6u%e, h^ made; tx^v, Tie had. X, fi, v, a are 
 also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment : iXXiaazro (from 
 Xi<T(TOfiai, I beseech) ; d only in the Stem d i : iddsKra (I feared, § 817, 5). 
 On the contrary, p is sometimes left single : epdirTOfiev {pdirTio, I sew, 
 
 § 235. Dialects. — By the Temporal Augment a becomes d in Doric : 
 dyov. The Temporal Augment is very often wanting in Herodotus, 
 especially in the case of diphthongs. 
 
§ 238. THE AUGMENT. ' 133 
 
 i; to v : 'v(3piK(o, linsult. Imperfect 'of3piZ-o-v 
 
 ai " y : aiaOdvofiai, Ipercewe. " yaOav-o-firjv 
 
 ay" j]v: av^dvu), lincrease. " rjv^av-o-v 
 
 01 " (p : oiKTdpujj I pity, " t^Kveip-^v 
 
 Before vowels, a becomes a, not t; : 'aiw,! hear, 'diov. 
 The long vowels rj, w, 7, v, and usually the diphthongs 
 et, ev, ov, remain without Augment. 
 
 dKuKoj, I conjecture J eiKuK-o-v (also yKaZov); 
 
 EvpiffKU), IJind, evpi(TK-o-v (seldom Aorist rjvpov) ; 
 
 also a V and o i immediately before a vowel : avaivu), I dry^ 
 avaivov ; omictgw, / 5#<?^r, oia/ctjov ; and other diphthongs 
 in isolated instances. 
 
 Obs. — The rough hreathing precedes the augmented 
 form when the verb in its unaugmented^form had it. 
 
 § 236. £ becomes c i (instead of r/) in some verbs, viz., in 
 laii). Heave ; WiZ^bi, I accustom ; k\i(TGit),I roll ; cXkw or 
 kX^vii),! draw ^' 'iirofxai, I follow; lpyaZ,o^aiyIwor7Cj' epiru) 
 or kpTrvZ,(si, I creep / lorrmw, / entertain hospitably / txw, I 
 have. Compare below the Aorists : aV/zrjv (§ 313), cTXov {at- 
 piw, I take, I 327, l), uaa, I placed (§ 269, D.,iind § 275). 
 
 Obs. — These verbs originally began with a consonant, and therefore 
 had the Syllabic Augment : PepyaK-o-fiai (§ 34, D.), k-PepyaK-o-fxriv ; 
 <^«X-^ (§ 327, 6), i-aex-o-v. Then the consonant was dropped : 
 t-epya^-o-fir]v, e-ex-o-v ; finally ee was regularly contracted to « 
 (§ 36) : elpyaZ-o-fiTjv, slx-o-v. 
 
 § 237. toprdKo), I celebrate^ has the Augment in the second vowel: 
 eojpTttZov for riopraKov (compare § 37, D. 2). Verbs which origin- 
 ally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with a con- 
 sonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel : 
 dvddvoj, I please, e-dv5avov; ovp'no, I make water; ojOsoj, I push; 
 wvsofiai, I buy (§ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and Temporal, 
 are combined in opdoj, I see, k^paov (tojpojv) ; dv-oiy-u), I open, 
 
 dv-k(j)y-o-v. 
 
 § 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the 
 
 § 237. Dialects. — Homer forms t<i}vox6u from olvoxokM, I pour out 
 wine ; irjvSavov (Herod, idvdavov) and r]vdavov from dvddvu), I please. 
 Compare § 34, D., 1 and 4. 
 
134 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 239. 
 
 Augment immediately after the preposition : ug-(j)ip-(jj, I 
 carry in, eig-t-(pEp-o-v ; irpoq-ay-u), I lead to, irpoQ-riy-o-v ; 
 Ijc, out of, becomes l^ before the Augment ; I ^-ij^-o-v, I 
 led out. ^he true forms of lv,in, and (tvv, with, altered 
 by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again before 
 e : avX-Xiy-o), I collect, avv-i-Xey-o-v ; E/i-jSaXX-w, I invade^ 
 ev-e-f^aW'O-v. 
 
 The final vowel of a preposition is elided : a7r-£-^fjO-o-v, 
 J carried away, from a7ro-<f)ip-(jj ; only irepl and irpo never 
 lose their final vowel ; but irpo is often contracted with e : 
 Trpov-j5aivov, from 7rpo-i-(5aiv-o-v, I inarched on. 
 
 § 239. Exceptions. — Some verbs, which are not merely compomid- 
 ed with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns 
 (Decomposita), have the Augment at the 'beginning: ivavTioo/iai 
 (from tvavTiog, against), rivavTiovuriv (from oonrjv), I icas against; 
 poet, rfvapov, from Ivaipo), I slay ; Trapprjaid^ofiai (from Trapprjaia, 
 freedom of speech), iirappri<nal6}iriv, I spoke freely ; but the majority 
 nevertheless have it in the middle : iKKXijaid^io, I assemble, from 
 tKicXrjffia, assembly, l^eKXrjmaZov ; vTroTrTevio, I suspect, from vTrowTog, 
 suspicious, VTTOJTrrwov ; Karrjyopsu), I accuse, Karrjyopovv (from eov). 
 Trapavofieu), I act contrary to law (from Trapd-vofiog, contrary to law), 
 has irregularly Traprjvofxow (eov). 
 
 § 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost their 
 distinctive meanings that the verbs are treated as simple : KuOevdoj, 
 I sleep, tKaOev^ov, yet KaOijvSov also ; KaOi^io, I sit, tKaOi^ov. Com- 
 ]3are the verbs 'Irjfii {d<pirip.i, § 313), 'ivwfii (dfi<pievvvixi, § 319, 5), 
 t)fiai {Kd9r]fiai, § 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Aug- 
 ment : dvkxofiai, I endure, -qvuxonrjv ; dvopQoio, I raise up, rjvwpQovv 
 (oov) ; evoxXioj, I encutriber, rjvMxXovv (sov) ; irapoiveb), I a,ct as a 
 drunkard, iirapi^vow. So also ^lairdtx), I live (from diaira, mode of 
 life), ediyrcjv (aov) ; didicovsb),! serve, IdirjKovovv {eov). 
 
 § 241. dvg, had, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment 
 when the second word begins with a consonant or long vowel : 
 ^vQTvx^i^i I cim unfm'tunate, ISvqtvxow (eov) ; dvgdJTrscj, I make a 
 sour face, i^vgw-n-ovv (eov) ; but short vowels receive the Temporal 
 Augment after bvg : SygapeffHio, I displease, dygi^pearow (eov). 
 
 Compounds with e v generally have no Augment : evrvxow (eov), 
 I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem- 
 poral Augment after ev : evrjpyeTow (eov), together with evepyerow, 
 from evepyerkio, I do good. 
 
243. CONTRACTED VERBS. 135 
 
 § 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning : 
 TjOviiovv, from dOvixeio, I am without courage. 
 
 C. ContraGted Verbs 
 
 § 243. Verbs whose Present- Stem ends in a, e, or o, reg- 
 ularly contract these vowels in all forms of the Present- 
 Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence are called Oo7i- 
 tracted Verbs. The laws of contraction given in §§ 36-38 
 
 § 243. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect very often does not contract ; but 
 the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently. 
 A. Homer inflects the a-Stems in three ways ; 
 
 1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain 
 open and unchanged: doidid-ei,he sings; vaisTd-ovai, they dwell; and 
 the Fem. Part, vaierawora for vaierdovaa, with a remarkable change of 
 
 OV to (t). 
 
 2. Contraction takes place : dpsT^ = dpeTd-n, he thrives, from dpeTdw ; 
 Trpog-ijvSa = 7rpog-T]vSa-ej from Trpog-avddoj, I address. Sometimes a e 
 becomes rj (not d) : irpog-avSrfTriv (3 Dual Imperf ), oprjai — also with 
 regular accent — (from 6pd-eai) = Att. 6p^ (2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Mid.). 
 
 3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the 
 same kind is inserted before the long one which results from con- 
 traction : 6pdu),I see, contracted 6pu>, extended 6p6oj. 
 
 a) This inserted vowel is usually sJwrt. Hence opdio is thus in- 
 flected : 
 
 Mid. 
 
 Act. Pr. Ind. 
 
 6pd-(0 
 
 itt. 
 
 bpoj I 
 
 lorn 
 
 . bp6<o 
 
 
 
 opd-eig 
 
 
 op4q 
 
 u 
 
 bpd^g 
 
 
 
 bpd-si 
 
 
 bpq. 
 
 u 
 
 bpd^ 
 
 
 
 opd-ovai 
 
 
 bpaxn 
 
 u 
 
 bpoiaai 
 
 
 Subj. 
 
 6pd-(o 
 
 
 bptj 
 
 u 
 
 bp6(i> 
 
 
 
 opd-yg 
 
 
 op^Q 
 
 a 
 
 bpdifg, etc. 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 opd-oifii 
 
 
 bpvixi 
 
 u 
 
 bpotftfii 
 
 
 Inf. 
 
 opd-Eiv 
 
 
 bpdv 
 
 u 
 
 bpdav 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 bpd-iov 
 
 
 bpSiV 
 
 u 
 
 bpoiov 
 
 
 
 bpd-ovaa 
 
 
 bpSxra 
 
 (( 
 
 bpoiacra 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 opd-ovTog 
 
 
 bpwvTog 
 
 (( 
 
 bpoojvTog 
 
 2. Sing. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 bpd-y 
 
 
 bpq. 
 
 (( 
 
 bpdg, 
 
 3. Plur. 
 
 
 bpd-ovrai 
 
 
 bpwvrai 
 
 u 
 
 bp6u)VTai 
 
 Opt. 3. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 bpd-oiVTO 
 
 
 bpt^VTO 
 
 11 
 
 bp6(^VT0 
 
 Inf. 
 
 
 bpd-eaOai 
 
 
 bpdoBai 
 
 a 
 
 bpdaffOai 
 
 3. Plur. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 eojpd-ovTO 
 
 
 k(t)pS)VTO 
 
 u 
 
 bpodJVTO 
 
136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 243. 
 
 are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs tl/liciw, iroiew, 
 ^ov\6(x), are given on p. 110-113. 
 
 Ods. — As the e i in the Infinitive f i j/ is not original, aeiv, oeiv do 
 not become ^v, oiv, but dv, ow (§ 37, Ois.). 
 
 Dialects. 
 
 I) sometimes long, e. g., 
 
 r'lfid-ovcra Att. rjjSuKTa Hom. -q ^u)0) a a 
 from ri^du), I am youtliful ; so also from Spdijj,Ido; 
 
 dpd-ovai Att. dpwai Hom. d p w cj (t i 
 and from fivdonai, I remember ; 
 
 fivd-eaOai Att. iivdaQai Hom. fivdaaOai. 
 
 After long 'vowels, the one following is sometimes shortened : 
 
 fiva-ofievoQ Att. fiviofxevoQ Hom. jxv o) 6 fiev o g 
 r)(Bd-ovTeg " rjfiwvTeQ " r) fSMOVTsg 
 
 The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels "should be long 
 or short. Such forms, for instance, as dpsTdg, C ")? vjSoojvTeg (""""), 
 are inadmissible. ^^ 
 
 In Herod., the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation oi 
 the Stems in e : 6pk(o (but 6p^g, 6p^), dpeofiEv, bpkovai, opeovreg. Instead 
 of £0 we also find €w : opsiovTeg. Homer also has ijvTeov = Att. ijvriov 
 (from dvrd-(i), I meet) ; Xjoew/xevof = Att. xp'^h^vog, making use of. 
 
 B. Stems in e fluctuate between the open and contracted forms, 
 eo is often monosyllabic by synizesis (§ 39): Wpi^vEov, I complained ; 
 often also in Ionic contracted to e y : Hom. vevfiai =z Att, vkofiai, I 
 return home, eov rarely becomes e v : veiKevai = vuKovai, they quarrel. 
 e € becomes rj irregularly in Hom. : ofiapTrjrrjv (ofiaprsoj, I rmet with), 
 d-7rELXr]TT}v (aTTEiXeio, I threaten), dopTrrjrrjv (dopTreo),! Slip), Inf. ^oprjuevai =: 
 Att. (popeiv, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is (popjjvai. 
 
 The second e in the 3 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped : fivOsaL for 
 fivOkai (Att. fiv9y, fivOei, tTwu sayest) ; ttwXso = Att. iTrwX'ov, thou hadst 
 intercourse ; sometimes e e are contracted to e t : fivOelai. The first 
 way is usual in Herod. Homer also prolongs e to e t without con- 
 traction: veiKdtit =z Att. veiKw; ereXy'ero = Att. ereXelro (TeXw, I complete). 
 
 C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: yowovfiai, I supplicate. Some 
 have an extension like those in a : dp6io(n(v) =z Att. dpov(n(v), they 
 plow; dT]i6(i)ev =: Att. dr]'ioTev,t7iey would destroy; vTrvojovrag =z Att. vir- 
 vovvrag, the sleepers. 
 
 In Herod, o sometimes changes to e, and with o is contracted to 
 £v : tdiKai(ivv=: Att. ediKaiovv, deemed right. 
 
§ 245. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137 
 
 § 244. Obs. — 1. Monosyllabic Stems in t admit only the contraction 
 €1. All syllables which, contracted, would produce another 
 sound, remain uncontracted. 
 
 Stem TT \ € (Pres. ttXsw, / sail, Inf. irXuv) ' 
 TrXkig 'jrXeiQ, but ttXsu) 
 
 TrXeei rrXei, " rrXkovci 
 
 tTrXEEQ iirXeig, " tirXeov 
 
 deio, I Und, forms an exception, having to dovv (Seov), ^oviiat, etc., 
 to distinguish them from forms of deu), I am in want of; M, it is 
 necessary; to deop, duty. 
 
 2. Some Stems in a have a preference for rj, which they admit in 
 the place of d : ^a-w, / live, ^yg, Z,y, KvTe, Zi]v ; Truvd-oj, I am hun- 
 gry, TTHvriv', Sixpa-u), I thirst, di-^fjv; so also Kvd-u), I scratch ; afid-cj, 
 I stroke ; ^j^d-oj, I scrape ; and xpa-o/xai, I Tuake use of . 
 
 3. piyo-h), I freeze, has w and ^ for ov and oi: Inf. piyujv, Opt. pt- 
 
 4. Xovio, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction ; that is, the con- 
 necting vowel after o v disappears : i-Xov for e-Xov-e ; Xov-fiai for 
 Xov-o-fiai, etc. In like manner, ol-o-fiai is often contracted to 
 ol-jxai, I think, and the Imperf. (^-S-fiijv to (^-firjv. 
 
 D. Distinction of the Present-Stem J^rom the Verbal- 
 Stem. 
 
 % 245. We call that jjart of a verb the Verbal Stem 
 from the combination of which with the terminations of 
 persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist- 
 ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb 
 may be explained : X v, Pres. Xuw, Perf. XeXu/ca, Fut. Xuo-w ; 
 T t fxa, Pres. Tijicujjf Perf. rerijuriKa, Fut. tijuliictu). 
 
 Obs. — From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of 
 the nominal suffixes : Xv-<n-Q, loosing ; Xv-rfip, looser; Xv-rpo-v, re- 
 demption fee; Ti-firj-m-g, valication ; Tifi7]-Tr)-g, censor. 
 
 When the Verbal- Stem can not be traced farther back, 
 it is called a Poot : X v, and a verb formed from it, a Root- 
 Verh: Xvw. But when the Verbal-Stem is itself a Nom- 
 
 § 244. Dialects. — 3. For xRW^i- Herod, has xp«7-at. 
 
 4, Horn. 3 Sing. Imperf X6e (for Xofe, § 35, Ol)s.)=Xov6, tXove. 
 
138 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 246* 
 
 inal-Stem formed by means of a. nominal suffix, it is said 
 to be derived : rifia is at once the Nominal- Stem o^ tijuti, 
 honor, formed by the nominal suffix ju a from the root r i, 
 and the verb* formed from it is a derivative one : Tifiait). 
 
 Obs. — Boots are almost all of one syllable ; derived Stems are of 
 two or more syllables. 
 
 § 246. The Yerhal-Stem is not always like the Present- 
 Stem, but the Present- Stem is frequently an extension 
 of the Verbal-Stem : Pres. Xuir-is), I leave, Present-Stem 
 X £ t TT, Verbal- Stem X i tt (Aorist iXiirov), 
 
 Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ; 
 the Verbal- Stem divested of them is the jpii^re Verbal- 
 Stem. 
 
 Obs. — Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns 
 are usually formed from the former, not from the latter : Verbal- 
 Stem V y, Present-Stem ^ e v y, substantive ^uy-?? {fug-a)^ adj. 
 (pvy-diS) -Q, fugitive. 
 
 § 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the Verbal- 
 Stem produces four classes of verbs with some subdi- 
 visions. 
 
 1. First Class (unenlarged). 
 
 The Present-Stem is like the Yerhal-Stem. 
 
 This comprises, first of all, the pure verbs, i. e., verbs 
 whose stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small 
 number in c w, § 248, and many others besides : rijia-Wy 
 ^ov\6-(i), irai^ev-u), I educate ; \v-w,I loose ; Ti-b),I honor ; 
 apx'h}, I rule ; ay-w, I lead ; Xey-tj, I say. 
 
 § 248. 2. Second Class (lengthened class). 
 
 The Stem vowel is lengthened in the Present-Stem. 
 
 This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a 
 inute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a long 
 vowel, as : 
 
 § 248. Dialects. — To these belongs the Hom. (rivto^IJiurry^ from the 
 
 Stem cry. 
 
§ 249. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 139 
 
 ({>Evy-ixi 
 
 , I flee, Pure Stem ^vy {^vy 
 
 -i), flight, Lat fuga). 
 
 XsiTT-a) 
 
 , I leave, " 
 
 a 
 
 XtTT 
 
 • 
 
 TreiO-ot 
 
 , I persuaxle, " 
 
 u 
 
 TT I e {mB- 
 
 av6-g, persuasive). 
 
 Tf]K-U), 
 
 I melt, 
 
 u 
 
 TOLK 
 
 
 rpt^-dj 
 
 ,Irvb, " 
 
 a 
 
 rpi^ 
 
 
 it, besides these, there are 
 
 also 
 
 six verbs in e w, viz. : 
 
 
 TrXeu), I sail, 
 
 
 Pure Stem 
 
 ttXv 
 
 
 Trvko),Il)low, 
 
 
 
 TTVV 
 
 
 veio, I sail, 
 
 
 " " . 
 
 VV 
 
 
 peu), I flow, 
 
 
 
 pv 
 
 
 Osio, I run, 
 
 
 
 9v 
 
 
 xki»,Ipour, 
 
 
 
 x^ 
 
 Obs. — The v of these Stems was lengthened to e v, but resolved to 
 £p before vowels (compare § 35, D. 2) ; finally the f was dropped : 
 TrXv-TrXevM-TrXePio-TrXeu). The diphthong appears in the substan- 
 tives unresolved : 7rvev-fia, Ireath ; pev-fia, stream. Compare 
 § 260, 2. 
 
 § 249. 3. Third Class (T-class). 
 The Present-Stem affixes r to the Verbal-Stem. 
 *This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in 
 Labials, as : 
 
 TviTT-oj, I strike. Pure Stem tvtt (rvTrog, stroke). 
 
 (SXaTTT-u), I injure, " " /3 \ a /3 (pXafif), injury). 
 
 (SaTTT-b), I dip, " " I3a<p (J3d<prj, a dip). 
 
 and, besides — 
 
 TiKT-u),Il)ringforth, " " t^k {rkROQ, child). 
 
 The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here*, as 
 in the verbs of the following class, the character. On the 
 changes of sound, see § 45. 
 
 other Examples. 
 
 KOTTTO), I cut, Stem KOTT 
 
 KXhlTTii), I steal, " K \ € TT 
 
 KpitTTTii), I hide, * " Kpv<pOYKpv(3 
 
 Odirro), I bury, " r a (§ 54, c). 
 
 § 249. Dialects. — The Stem (3Xa(3 in Hom. has a Pres. (BXafierai, like 
 class 1. 
 
140 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 250. 
 
 § 250. 4. Fourth Class (I-class). 
 
 The Fresent-Btem adds i to the Verbal-Stem [Latin 
 fug-i-o, Pure Stem fiog]. The l is here subject to the 
 various changes and transpositions discussed in §§ 55- 
 58^ viz. : 
 
 a) The Gutturals k, y, x foi"™? with t, the group (to- 
 (New-Att.rr) (§57); 
 
 ^v\daa(o,I gtiard^instesLd'of <pv\aKio), Pure Stem <i)v\aK ((pvXaKrt, a 
 
 guard). 
 rdcTffoj, Z arrange, " raytoj, " " Tay (Tayog, ar- 
 
 ranger), 
 rapdaai,}, I confuse, " rapaxio, " " rap ax {japaxh, 
 
 confusion). 
 
 Other Examples. 
 eXi(T(T(o (k) , I roll. 7rpd(Tffu) (y) , / do. dpvaao) (%) , / dig. 
 
 KT]pv<T(Tio (k) , I proclaim. o-^drrw (y) , / slay. 
 
 Obs. — The character of the Presents dpnoTTw, I fit ; Trdamo, I scatter; 
 Trkdaau), I shape ; (3pd<Tao), I seethe ; ipkaaio,! row ; TTTiaffoj^Istamp; 
 (SXiTTU), I abstract honey, is a dental ; Trecraa), I boil, has Stem ttstt' 
 irregularly. 
 
 § 251. I) 8, and more rarely 7, with i, form Z (§ 58): 
 tZojuiai, I sit, instead of t^io/uai, Pure Stem £ ^ (fS-oc, seat, 
 Latin sedes) ; Kpa Jw, I cry, instead of Kpayiw, Pure Stem 
 
 Other Examples. 
 ^pd(^io (S) , I say. oZio (d) , / smell. ax^Zm (S) , I split. 
 
 Obs. — Present-Stems in K which express a sound have the Verbal- 
 Stem in y: arevd^ii), I sigh ; olfiw^o), I wail; olfiojy-r], a wailing; 
 moreover, (rrdZio,! trickle; arilio, I priclc, Lat. in-stig-o; ixaari^io, 
 
 § 250. Dialects. — The Stems of the Presents i/xdcrao), I whip; XiV- 
 aofiai^ I beseech ; Kopvcrcru),! arm; Herod, d^dcrao),! touch, end in Den- 
 tals (X I r, KopvO); Horn. Iviaau), I blaTne, has irregularly the Stem 
 
 IviTT. 
 
 § 251. Dialects. — In all dialects, Presents in -Zio much more fre- 
 quently have a Guttural for their character, in Hom. especially in 
 dXaTrd^u), I conquer; datZco, I divide; ixepfir]pi(^<o, I ponder; TroXefil^u), I 
 war; ory^eXt^w, / strike, etc. 
 
§ 253. PRESENT AND VERBAL STEMS. 141 
 
 / wTiip, and some others. K\d^a>, / mZZ, Stem k \ a y y, K\ayy-rj, a 
 call; 7r\dZ(o, I mislead ; craXTriKd), Illoio a trumpet, haye a Pure 
 Stem in yy ; vi^u), I wash, has irregularly the Stem v i (5. 
 
 § 252. c) X with l forms XX (§ 56): 
 
 /3aXAfa>, I throw, for (SaXioj, Pure Stem (3a\ (j3e\-og, a shot). 
 aXXofiai, I leap, " aXiofiai, " " aX [sal-i-o]. 
 riXXii),Iplttch, " TiXiu), " " TiX 
 
 Other Examples. 
 9dXX(o, I lloom. <T<pa.XXoj, I cause to stagger. oreXXw, / send. 
 -TraXXd), I wield. dyyeXXu), I announce. xj^aXXcj, I play on the lyre. 
 
 § 253. d) V and p throw the l into the preceding syllable 
 of the Stem (§ 66) : 
 
 Teivu, I stretch, for tsviu), Pure Stem rev (t6v-o-c, a stretching, Latin 
 
 tendo). 
 ^Oeipoj, I corrupt, " <p9epi(o, " " (pOep {(pOop-d, corruption). 
 <paiv<i), I show, " (pavid), " " <p a v (d-^av-rjg, ir 
 
 Other Examples. 
 fxaivofiai, I rage. (nreipo), I sow. lyeipoi), I awaTcen. 
 
 aipu), I raise. dyeipoj, I collect. v^aivw, I weave. 
 
 Obs. — If the Stem syllable has i or v for its vowel, this is length- 
 ened by the retreating i : Kpivoj, T sever, judge, from KpXv-nt) ; adpio, 
 I drag, from, avp-nd. 
 
 A single Stem in \ also follows this formation, viz.: o^eX, Pres.^ 
 ocpdXb), I owe, for 6<peXi<i), to distinguish it from o^lWw, / increase, 
 with the same Stem. 
 
 The t unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems Kav 
 and KXav, which then sacrifice their v (P) : Ka-i(o, I burn ; KXa-ito, 
 I weep. Additional forms in Attic are Kdoj, »cXda> (§ 35, Obs.). 
 
 N.B. — The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. 
 
 § 253. Dialects. — Homer joins i immediately with Vowel Stems : 
 da-i(D, I bum. Stem ^ a : na-io/jiai, I seeJc, Stem fi a ; va-icj, I dwell. Stem 
 V a ; and he uses d^tXXw in the sense of tlR Att. d(j)eiX(o ; but, on the 
 other hand, he has tiXw, / press, from the Stem I X for which one 
 might expect tXXw (Class 4, c). 
 
142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. § 254. 
 
 11. The Strong or Second Aorist-Stem. 
 § 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle 
 is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the 
 Pure Yerbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Stem 
 
 XeiTT-a), I leave. 
 
 X I TT 
 
 rvTTT-o), I strike. 
 
 /3d\X-t 
 I3a\ 
 
 I throw. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Aorist 
 Ind. 
 
 f-XiTT-o-v, / left. 
 e-XiTT-e-g 
 
 i-rvTT-o-v, I struck. 
 
 t-TVTT-E-Q 
 
 i-l3a\-o-v, I threw. 
 i-(3aX-e-£ 
 
 etc., like the Imperfects tXeiTrov, trvTrrov, ijSaXKov 
 
 Subj. 
 
 fXi7r-a> 
 {XiTT-y-g 
 
 TVTr-(j) 
 
 TVTT-y-g 
 
 /3aX-w 
 (iaX-y-g 
 
 etc., like the Pres. Subjunctive XetTrw, rwTrrw, (5d\\i 
 
 Opt. 
 
 |{ 
 
 XlTT-Ol-fll 
 
 XiTT-oi-g 
 
 TVTT-Ol-fll 
 TVTT-Ol-g 
 
 (idX-oi-^i 
 (idX-oi-g 
 
 etc., like the Pres. Optative Xhttolhi, tvtttoihi, (idXXoifii 
 
 Imper. 
 
 [XtTT-e 
 I Xnr-e-T(o 
 
 TVTT-e 
 
 TVir-k-T(o 
 
 /3aX-€ 
 (iaX-k-Tia 
 
 etc., like the Pres. Imper. XeiTre, rvTrre, (idXXe. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 XlTT-UV 
 
 (iaX-Hv 
 
 Part. 
 
 XlTT-bJV, XiTT-ovcra, 
 
 XtTT-ov, Gen. XiTT- 
 ovTog 
 
 rvTT-iov, rvTr-ovcra, 
 
 TVTT-OV, Gen. TVTT- 
 
 ovrog 
 
 (5aX-d)v, (3aX-ov(Ta, 
 (3aX-6v, Gen. jSaX- 
 ovTog 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 |{ 
 
 i-Xnr-6-iir]v i-Tvir^o-jxinv t(5aX-6-fir]v 
 
 k-XlTT-OV k-TVTT-OV £-/3aX-oi; 
 
 etc., like the Imperf. kXmronriv^ hvTrToixrjv, i(3aXX6fir]v 
 
 Subj. 
 
 IiXiTr-w-fxai Tvir-io-jiai jidX-oi-fiai 
 
 (Xiir-y TVTT-y j3dX-y 
 
 etc., like the Pres. Subj. X«Vw/iat, Tvirriofiai^ j3aXXw/iat 
 
 Opt. 
 
 ijXnr-oi-fH]v Tvir-oi-firiv (iaX-oi-ni]v 
 
 (XlTT-Ol-O I TVTT-Ol-O (idX-Ol-0 
 
 etc., like the Pres. Opt. XMroifii^v, rvTrroifirjv, iSaXXoifirjv 
 
 Imper. 
 
 JXlTT-oi) TVTT-OV (5aX-ov 
 
 I [Xnr-k-ffOu) TVTr-k-aQii) ^aX-'t-cQio 
 
 etc., like the Bres. Imper. Xeittov, tvtttov, (5dXXov 
 
 Infin. I XiTT-s-aBat 
 
 Tvir-k-trOat 
 
 I (iaX-'s-ffOai 
 
 Part. j Xi7r-6-/u£vo-c, ?;, o-v \ TV7r-6-/ievo-g, rj, o-v | f3aX-6-iiisvo-g, rj, o-v 
 
§ 257. II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 143 
 
 § 255. 1. The Inflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif- 
 fers from that of the Present- Stem (Imperfect and Present 
 tenses) ofily in the accent of the following forms : the In- 
 fin. Act. is perispome Q^vkuv), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone 
 {\i7ri(jdai)y the Part. Act. accents the 0-sound {Xnrtjv, \i- 
 TTovaa), the 2 Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome {Xiirov). 
 
 2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, 
 the meaning also of the Passive : thus ipaXofirjv means only 
 I threw for myself but not I was thrown. 
 
 On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. 
 
 § 256. The Strong Aorist can be formed only from such 
 verbs as have a Present- Stem different from the Pure 
 Verbal- Stem, therefore not from the verbs of the First 
 (unenlarged) Class (§ 247). Also it is not usually formed 
 from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all 
 from any hvX Root-Yerhs (§ 245). 
 
 Obs. — On the Aorists of the verbs ^w-w and ^y-w (class 1), see §§ 316, 
 16, 17. 
 
 § 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from 
 the Pure Verbal Stem ; viz., instead of e of the latter, the Strong 
 Aor. sometimes has a, by which rpgTr-w, / tum^ though belonging 
 to the first class, has a Strong Aor. : t-rpaTr-o-v (Impf t-TpETr-o-v), 
 e-Tpair-6-fir]v. An isolated formation is Pres. Tptljy-io, I gnaw, Aor. 
 t-Tpay-o-v. ay-Wj I drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by 
 doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem ay-ay, whence 
 Ind. : iiy-ay-o-v, Subj. dy-dy-w, Inf. ay-ay-uv. 
 
 § 255. Dialects. — 1. All the peculiarities enumerated § 233, D., ex- 
 tend likewise to the Strong Aorist : 2 Sing. Subj. (SaXriaOa, 3 Sing. 
 (3aXT]<n, etc. The Inf Aor. Act. ends in Horn, also in Uiv instead of 
 elv (fiaXUiv). 
 
 2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems c r a (§ 316, 4), /3 \ t; (§ 316, 
 19), ovra (§ 316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive meaning. 
 
144 
 
 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 
 
 §258. 
 
 III. The Future- Stem. 
 
 § 258. From the Future-Stem are formed the'Fut. Act; 
 ive and Middle. 
 
 First Future 
 {The a Future). 
 
 Second Future 
 (Contracted Future). 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Xuu), Stem \ V 
 Fut. Stem Xva 
 
 Pres. (paivo), I show, Stem (pav 
 Fut. Stem <pdve 
 
 Active. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Xixr-w, I shall loose, 
 
 Xv(T-eig, etc. 
 
 like the Pres. Xv(o 
 
 (pavfo), a, I shall show. 
 <pdvk-(.ig, iig, etc. 
 like the Present tto/w 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Infin, 
 
 Part. 
 
 Xvff-oi-fit 
 
 XV(T-EIV 
 
 Masc. Xvff-wv 
 Fem. Xva-ovaa 
 Neut. Xv(T-ov 
 Gen. Xv(T-ovroc 
 
 (pave-oirjv, oii]v 
 <pavk-uv, elv 
 (pave-iov, wv 
 <pavk-ov(ja, ovaa 
 <pavs-ov, ovv 
 ^avE-ovTog, ovvTog 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Xv(T-o-ixai, I shall loose for 
 
 myself. 
 like the Present Xvo^ai 
 
 (pave-o-fiai, ovfiai, I shall ap- 
 pear. 
 like the Present iroiovfiai 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Xv<r-oi-fir]v 
 Xv(T-E-(r9ai 
 Xv<T-6-fievog, ij, op 
 
 ^ave-oi-firjv, oifiriv 
 <pavk-e.-(jBai, uaBat 
 (pave-o-fievog, ovfievog, t), ov 
 
 § 257. Dialects. — Horn., in the case of several Stems with p, forms 
 the Strong Aorist by metathesis (§ 59), and by changing e into a : 
 depK-o-jxai, I see, t-SpaK-ov ; TrspO-oj, I destroy, e-rrpaO-o-v ; in others by 
 the syncope of € (§ 61, c) : l-rrT-o-firjv {-Trkr-op-ai, I fly)-, e-yp-e-ro (Stem 
 iyep, Pres. class 4, d, iyeipo), I awake) ; Part, dyp-6-fjievoi, assembled; 
 Inf. dyep-eaOai (Pres. class 4, d, dyeipnj). 
 
 Reduplication occurs in Homer in a great many Aorists : l-xk-^pdd- 
 o-v (Stem (ppad, Pres. class 4, h, ^pdZej, I indicate) ; m-TrXQ-o-v (Stem 
 TTiO, Pres. class 3, tthOo), I persuade) ; ire-TrdX-wv (Pres. class 4, c, TrdXXw, 
 I Tyrandish) ; Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. : TE-rdpTr-e-To {rkpir-o-^ai, I rejoice) ; 
 
§ 260. III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 145 
 
 § 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future- Stem is the same 
 as that of the Present- Stem, i. e.^ that of the a Future is 
 the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the 
 Inflexion of the contracted Present of £ Stems (§§ 231, 
 232, and 243). 
 
 § 260. The <t Future forms the Future- Stem by adding 
 <r to the Yerbal-Stem: Xu, \va. All Stems ending in a 
 vowel or a mute have the a Future. The cr, according to 
 § 48, with gutturals makes 5, with labials ;/», and admits 
 of no dentals before it (§ 49) : ay-w, / drive^ Fut. a^-w ; 
 ypa(j)'(i), J write, Fut. ypa^p-i*) ; a^-w, I sing, Fut. (ttr-w ; 
 (TTTtvS-w, liho, Fut. aTTEid-oj for o-TrtvS-orw (§ 50). About 
 Opi^w, Stem T pecj), Ovxpd), Stem rvcf), and others, see § 54. 
 
 2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248) retain 
 the extended Stem also in the Future : Xt t/T-w, Xd\p-u) ; the 
 six verbs in eu) mentioned in § 248 show their strengthened 
 form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present : TrXtw, 
 TrXevaoiuai ; in like manner, icXatw brings out its Pure Stem 
 icXau in icXauo-a), and jcato) in Kavcrtsj (§ 253). About x^w, 
 see § 265. 
 
 3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the 
 fourth or I class (§ 249, etc.), the Pure Stem must be 
 found in order to form the Future : tvittu) (class 4), Pure 
 Stem TV IT, Fut. Tv\p<jj ; ^uXao-o-w, Pure Stem (pvXaK, Fut. 
 
 Stem <p I d (class 2), <pddofiai, Inf. Aor. 7re-(pid-s-(T9ai, also Fut. ttc-^i^-?}- 
 aofiai. Isolated Aorists are : £-/c8-/c(€)\-€-ro, he called, from KeXofiai ; tte- 
 (pv-o-v, I Mlled (Stem ^ e v) ; rk-rfi-o-v (I hit, Stem r e /w) ; rt-ray-wv 
 {seizing, Stem ray, Lat. tango). riv-iTr-aTr-o-v (T scolded, Pres. iv'nrTU)), 
 along with kv-kv'nr-o-v, and ripvK-aK-o-v (I kept &ac^, Pres. tjOVKw), have 
 the reduplication in the middle of the word. The reduplication in 
 this case every where belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Per- 
 fect-Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the 
 Participle. The Indie, may add the Augment or omit it before the 
 reduplication. (§ 234, D.) 
 
 § 259. Dialects. — About the contraction, see § 243, D. 
 
146 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 261. 
 
 (j)vXaK,w ; (f)paZ(j>), Pure Stem (p pa^, Fut. (l>pa(rii). Accord- 
 ingly^ verbs ending in the Present in -(raoj or -ttm gener- 
 ally make the Fut. in -gw, and those having the Present 
 in ^w generally have their Future in -o-w. 
 
 According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
 iXiacFw, I roll / Krjpv(7<T(i), I jproclaim / irpaaad), I do / 
 o-\t'2aj, I split ; ^LKaZd), I judge ; ottXiZu), I arm ; and 
 let the Presents be found to the Futures dpv^w, (T(j)a^(i), 
 ^laaopaiy Xoyttjopai. 
 
 Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present 
 in -aau) or -ttu), naturally (§ 250, Obs.) make the Future 
 in -(Tit) : ttXckho (Pres. TrXao-o-w, T shape), apfxoaw (Pres. 
 apfxoTTU), I fif) ; and, on the other hand, those with the 
 character y, which have the Present in -^w (§ 251, Ohs^, 
 make their Future in -^w : trrcva^w (Pres. (siival^u), I sigh) ; 
 GTi^w (Pres. (rrt^w, I jprick). 
 
 § 261. Vowel^Stems have their vowels long before o- ; 
 a becomes a if preceded by f, t, or p (§ 41), in all other 
 cases it becomes x). Every other short vowel is changed 
 into the corresponding long one : ta-w, / leave^ ed(T-<jj ; 
 la-ojiaiy I heal, lacT-Ofim ; ^pa-w, I do, ^pdcr-ix) ; but rifxa-ii), 
 Tifiria-ix) ; /3oa-w, I cry out, Pot](T-oiuaL ; lyyva-(i), I hand 
 over, ^yyvrjcT-ii) ; iroii-u), 7rofr}o-w, ^ovXow, dovXtja-u). 
 
 The Stem x p « {xP^^>^ 9'^'^^ ^^ oracle ; xpao/uaiy Itcse) 
 exceptionally has t/ in the Future : \pi](Hi), '\pi](jop.ai ; 
 whereas aKpodofxai, T listen, has aKpoaaojuai, 
 
 Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301. 
 
 § 262. The contracted Future forms the Future- Stem 
 
 § 261. Dialects. — The Ion. dialect has ri even after e,i,p: Trupijoofiai, 
 I shall endeavor. The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the a when the 
 vowel is short : alSsaao/xai (aideoiJiai, I feel shame). The Hom. Futures 
 aXaTrd^w, TroXe/ii'^w, <TTV(pe\i^a), and others, with their Presents in -^w, 
 are explained in § 251, D. 
 
 § 262. Dialects. — Stem Oep has in Hom. the Fut. Oepffofiai, Pres. 
 Osponai, I grow warm; Stem Kep (Pres. class 4, d, Keipao, I shave), Fut 
 KEpffo) ; Stem <pvp, Pres. (pvp(t),Imii:^ Fut. tpvpao). 
 
§ 264. III. THE FUTURE-STEM. 147 
 
 by adding t to the Verbal- Stem : (pav, (pave. This form 
 of the Future occurs in Stems ending in X, iui,v,p; and 
 the Stem voioel is short : vejuw, I distribute^ Fut. ve\iu) ; 
 a^Vvw, I defend, a/uvvw. Verbs of the seventh class here 
 show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253) : /3aAXw, / throw, 
 paXu) ; (paivwj <f)avu) ; ktsivm, I hill, ktbvw ; (jiOeipio, (f)6epio ; 
 ayytWu), ayyeXw. 
 
 According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
 <T0aAXw, I cause to fall; (rriXXw, I semi; p.aivo^ai, I rave ; 
 atpWf I lift ; and the Present (class 4) of (nrepw, irotKiXu), 
 trrifiavu), r}dvvLJ, 
 
 Exceptions. — The Stems /ceX (keXXw, class 4, c^ I Mock against) and 
 Kv p (Kvpeu), I meet) have the o- form of the Future : KaXaoj, Kvpffoj. 
 
 Obs. — The contracted Future is properly a peculiar fonn of the a 
 Future, for (pavs-oj has arisen from ^av-e-a-o) (§ 61, &), in which e 
 is the connecting vowel. 
 
 § 263. Several Stems in c (Pres. tw), aS (Pres. a^w), and 
 iS (Pres. f^w), throw out the o in the Future. Those in s 
 and ad then contract the vowels £ and a with the connect- 
 ing vowel : TeXi-tj, I complete, rfXeV-w, rtXtw, rf Xw ; 1 Plur. 
 TfXto/xev, r £ X o u /i £ V (as in the Present) ; [5ij3a!^io, I hring, 
 (5ij3a(T-ii)y (5i(5au)y j3(j3w ; 1 Plur. j5if5aopev, /3</3w^£y. To 
 these also belongs IXckjo, eXw, 2 Sing. IX^g, 3 Sing. £X«, from 
 the irregular Present iXavvw,! d/'ive ; compare § 321, 2. 
 
 Stems in id after dropping the <t insert e, Avhich is con- 
 tracted with the connecting vowel : KOjUt'Sw, / carry, Fut. 
 Act. KOfxia-Wf Kopi'i-ii), Ko fxitjfl Plur. Kojuiiofiev, KOjuiovjuiev ; 
 Fut. Mid. KO fjiiov jjLai. 
 
 This form of the Future is called the Attic. 
 
 § 264. Some verbs take an £ after the o- of the Future, 
 which is contracted with the connecting vowel : 7rv£w, I 
 hreathe. Stem irw, irvtvaovfiaL ; TrXew, I sail. Stem irXv, 
 
 § 263. Dialects. — The Futures in aw in the Horn, dialect are treated 
 exactly like the Presents (§ 243, D. A.), hence tX6w, tXa^^, IXdq. 
 
148 III. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 265. 
 
 TrXEVdovjuai along with TrX^vaojiaL ; (pavyii), I fl^^e^ Stem ^ u y, 
 (jiEv^ovfiaL and (pEvKofxai. This kind of Future, which oc- 
 curs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning, is 
 called the Doric. 
 
 § 265. Few verbs form their Future without any tense 
 sign : ^au), I^our, Fut. Act. x^^f Mid. x^ojiai, and so also 
 among the irregular verbs tdofiai, I shall eat (§ 327, 4), 
 and TTLoum, I shall drink (§ 321, 4). 
 
 § 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle sense, 
 but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an 
 Active meaning; the last is the case especially in verbs 
 denoting a bodily activity : r/^w, / sing ; aKova), I hear ; 
 cnravrdijjy I meet ; aTroXavu), I enjoy ; (dadiZtv, I walk 
 (f^adiovjuai) ; jSoaw, I call out / ytXaw, / laugh / oi/iwjw, 
 J bewail / aiyaio and o-twTraw, I am silent / cTrouSa^w, I 
 am zealous. Irregular verbs (§ 320, etc.) very frequently 
 have a Middle Future with Active meaning. 
 
 § 265. Dialects. — The Horn. (3eiofiai or (ikofiai, I shall live, akin to 
 /3i6w, / live, is likewise formed without a tense sign. 
 
§267. 
 
 IV. THE WEAK OR FI 
 
 ly. The Weak or FiRS^&e^fsf^S^H^^ v5^ 
 
 § 267. From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are 
 formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 \v-ixi 
 
 
 ^aiv-oj 
 
 
 Stem 
 
 Xv 
 
 
 .Pure Stem (pdv 
 
 
 1. (T 
 
 Form. 
 
 2. Supplementary Form. 
 
 
 Stem of Weak Aorist Xva d 
 
 <pijvd 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 i-Xv(Ta,Iho'sed. 
 
 e-Xvad-fiTjv^ I 
 loosed for myself. 
 
 showed. 
 
 t-<pr]vd-jxr]v 
 
 
 t-Xvaa-Q 
 
 l-Xvau) 
 
 t-(pi]va-g 
 
 k-(^r]V(i} 
 
 
 i-Xv(Te{v) 
 
 l-Xv<Ta-TO 
 e-Xv(Td-fie-9ov 
 
 t-(l)r]ve{v) 
 
 i-(pr]va-TO 
 k-pr]vd-fie-9ov 
 
 
 l-Xvaa-Tov 
 
 i-Xma-<j9ov 
 
 e-<l>r]va-TOV 
 
 i.-(pr]va-a9ov 
 
 
 h-Xv(jd-Tr]v 
 
 i-Xv(Td-a9i]v 
 
 l-<pT]vd-Tr]v 
 
 e-(l)r]vd-(x9t]v 
 
 
 i-Xvaa-fxev 
 
 t-Xv(Td-fie9a 
 
 l-(l>rjva-ixEv 
 
 i-(pT]vd-ixe-9a 
 
 
 i-Xvaa-re 
 
 e-Xv(Ta-(T9e 
 
 i-<prjva-TE 
 
 e<pr]va-(T9e 
 
 
 i-Xvaa-v 
 
 k-Xvaa-vTO 
 
 e-<pT)va-v 
 
 i-^{]va-VTO 
 
 Subjunct. 
 
 Xmu) 
 
 Xvcr<x)-fiai 
 
 (prjvoj 
 
 <pT)VU)-fiaL 
 
 
 XvayQ 
 
 Xvcry 
 
 <pf]vyQ 
 
 (pnvy 
 
 etc., lit 
 
 :e the Pres. Act. < 
 
 md Mid. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Xv<Tai-fJLi 
 
 Xv(yai-fxr]v 
 
 (pr]vai-fit 
 
 ^r]val-fir]V 
 
 
 Xvaai-Q or 
 
 Xvaai-o 
 
 ^r}vai-Q or 
 
 <pr]vaL-o 
 
 
 XvauaQ 
 
 
 <pr]VHaQ 
 
 
 
 Xvaai or 
 
 Xvaai-TO 
 
 (prjvai or 
 
 (pr]vai-TO 
 
 
 Xvauiiy) 
 
 Xv(Tai-fie9ov 
 
 (l)r}veiE{v) 
 
 (j)r]vai-fis9ov 
 
 
 Xixjai-Tov 
 
 Xv(jai-a9ov 
 
 (prjvai-Tov 
 
 (pr}Vai-a9ov . 
 
 
 Xv(rai-rr}v 
 
 Xv<rai-(j9r]v 
 
 (pr]vai-Tr]v 
 
 (pT)vai-(T9r}P 
 
 
 XixTai-fxev 
 
 Xv(Tai-fie9a 
 
 ^rjvai-fiev 
 
 (p7]vai-fii.9a 
 
 
 \v(Jai-TE 
 
 Xv(rai-<T9e 
 
 <pr]vai-TS. 
 
 <pr]vai-(79e 
 
 
 Xmai-ev or 
 
 Xvaai-VTO 
 
 (prjvai-ev or 
 
 (prjvai-vro 
 
 
 Xvaei-av 
 
 
 (prjvet-av 
 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 Xv(TO-V 
 
 Xvaai 
 
 (pfjvo-v 
 
 (l)i]vai 
 
 
 Xvad-TU) 
 
 Xv(Td-(79oJ 
 
 (j)r]vd-T(o 
 
 <pT]vd-(T9<x) 
 
 
 Xvcra-Tov 
 
 Xv(Ta-a9ov 
 
 (prjva-TOv 
 
 (pr]va-(r9ov 
 
 
 Xvtrd-Tiov 
 
 Xvad-<T9o}v 
 
 <p7]vd-TU)V 
 
 (pr]vd-a9iov 
 
 
 Xvaa-TS. 
 
 Xv(Ta-(T9e 
 
 <prjva-Te 
 
 <pr]va-(T9e 
 
 
 Xv(jd-VT(i)v or 
 
 Xv(Td-a9u)v or 
 
 ^rivd-VTiov or 
 
 (privd-a9u)V or 
 
 
 Xvod-ruxjav 
 
 Xv(Td-(T9ij}(Tav 
 
 (pTfvd-Tiocrav 
 
 <j)rivd-(T9ioaav 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Xvaai 
 
 Xv(Ta-c9at 
 
 (pfjvai. 
 
 (pr)va-<T9ai 
 
 Particip. 
 
 Xvad-Q, daa, av 
 
 Xvad-fiivo-Q, T}, 
 
 ^T]vd-g, d(Ta, av 
 
 (ptjvd-fievo-g. 
 
 
 Gen. XvcravT-oQ 
 
 o-v 
 
 (pr]VavT-OQ 
 
 r],o-v 
 
150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 268. 
 
 §•268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the 
 "Weak Aorist is a, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. becomes 
 f , but every where else remains unchanged before the per- 
 sonal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to 
 (1) and r?, whereby the endings become the same as those 
 of the Present. In the Optat. Act., the forms with h in 
 the 2 and 3 Sing, and 3 Plur. are more common than those 
 with ai : Xvaeiag, Xvaeitiy), Xvaeiav. In the 2 Sing. Im- 
 perat. Act. v is added, by which the a is rendered so ob- 
 scure as to become o: Xvao-v, and in 2 Imp. Mid. i is 
 added, which, with the a, makes ai. In the 2 Sing. Ind. 
 Mid. o- ig thrown out, as in the Pres. and Fut., so that 
 t-Xv(Ta{(j)o becomes tXuo-w, according to § 37. 
 
 Ols. 1. — Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing. 
 Opt. Act, the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid. ; but in ac- 
 cent they differ ; for, as the ai of the Optat. is regarded as long 
 (§ 229), the first of these three fonns is always paroxytone : 
 \uaai, ypdxpai {ypa<pto^ I write), Traidevcrai (jrai^Evu), I educate) ; the 
 Infin. always has tlie accent on the penultima : Xvtrai, Traid^ixraty 
 ypdxpai ; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible, has the accent 
 on the antepenultima : jraidevaai, Xmai, ypdxpai. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor, Act. is the same in 
 form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. Xvaov, but in Verbal-Stems of more 
 than one syllable it differs from it by the accent : 7raiSev(7op, but 
 the Neut. Part. Fut. is Traidsmov (§ 229). 
 
 § 269. The ct form of the Aorist differs from the Stem 
 
 § 268. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the 2 Sing. Indie. Mid. fre- 
 quently leaves the vowels uncontracted : tXixrao. 
 
 Some Aorists in Hom. tatoe the vowels o and e instead of a : Uov, 
 I came, l^eg ; if3r]<Tero (Jiaivo),! walk) ; Utrero (he set or went down, ^uw) ; 
 so also the Imperatives opo-eo, «me ; d^eTe,'bring; ol(Te,J)ring; \e^eo,lw 
 down ; TreXdaaerov = TreXdaarov, from rnXd^io, I approach. 
 
 § 269. Dialects. — dcpvaaio,! draw water, has in Hom. the Fut. dipv^M, 
 but the Aor. d(i>va(Ta. Irregular Horn, forms without a *are : tx^va for 
 tx^vtja, from Pres. x^w, / pour; tKrja, 1 Plur. Subj. Krjofisv or Kdofi^v, 
 Imperat. Krjov or ksIov, Infin. Krjai or Kslai, from Pres. Kaio), I hum ; Stem 
 Kav (Att. tKav(Ta)', tcaeva, Tres. atvu), I drive away; the Infinitives 
 dXevaaOai or dXeaaOai, to avoid ; darkarrQai, from dareofiai, I distribute. 
 
§ 270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIKST AORIST-STEM. 151 
 
 of the Future only by the addition of the a : Xu<t, Xvaa ; 
 ypa-ip, ypaipa ; 0i»Xa|, (l)v\aZa. Respecting the change of 
 vowels and consonants before <r, compare §§ 260, 261. 
 The irregular x^^ (§ ^^5) has the Aorist ex^a for exevcra. 
 Compare the irregularity in uira,! spoke / rjveyKa, I bore, 
 § 327, 12 and 13. 
 
 § 270. The Stem's in X, /i, v, p, forming their Future 
 without (7, reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist, 
 which gives rise to the supplementary form, for thfe vowel 
 of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for the loss of 
 the (T. 
 
 a after t and p becomes d : Pres. Trepaivu) (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem 
 
 TTEjOa v,Fut. TTEjoarcD, Aor. l-Trkpdva (§ 41) ; 
 otherwise ?; : Pres. (paivu) (class 4, d), Stem <pav, Fut. 
 
 (pdvuij Aor. i-(f)r}va. 
 
 £ becomes « : Pres. ayykWio (class 4, c), I announce, Stem 
 
 a y y 6 \, Fut. dyyeXw, Aor. ?yyyet\a. 
 
 " " Pres. vk}io) (class 1), / distribute, Fut. j/ejuw, 
 
 Aor. t-vHfia. 
 I " I : Pres. fcpiVw (class 4, <Z), I judge, Stem Kpt v, 
 
 Fut. KpXvCJ, Aor. t-KpLva. 
 V " -u : Pres. d^oi/w (class 4, ^), / defend, Stem 
 
 dfivv, Fut. dfivvd, Aor. ijfivva. 
 
 Obs. — The Stems d p (a^jow, / ^//i^) and d X (uWofiai, I lea])) have in 
 the Indie. ?/ because of the Augment : i)pa, r/Xd/jiriv, but in the 
 other forms a : dpag, dXdfievog. a instead of »/ occurs in some 
 
 elcra, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist ; the Hom. Infin. is tWat, 
 Part. Eiaag and eWac (dveo-ag), 3 Sing. Mid. UcrcraTo. On the doubling 
 of the (T, see § 261, D. : Xoecrcra (XoP-e-ffaa) =: tXovaa (Xoixo, I wash), with 
 e inserted. (Compare § 35, Ohs.) 
 
 § 270. Dialects. — 1. Homer makes the Aorist of several Stems in 
 X, ft, V, p with (T : tXaa, from tiXw, / ^;ress ; the defective diroepaa^ I 
 tore away. 
 
 2. In the ^ol. dialect, a is assimilated to preceding X, ft, v, p; an 
 example of it in Hom. is axpeXXa for uxptX-aa = Att. axpeiXa, Pres. 6<piXX(o, 
 I ina'ease. 
 
 3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. yeipa, Pres. elpoj, I join, is quite 
 irregular. Compare § 275, D. 2. 
 
152 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 271. 
 
 few verbs: Kepdaivio^ I gain ; opyaivo}, I cause anger; (rrjixaivo), I 
 indicate — karjfidva along with iarjfirjva. On the other hand, ?; 
 instead of d, in spite of the p, occurs in reTpaivuj, I hore, tre- 
 Tpriva. 
 
 § 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all verbs 
 whi(!h, accorcling to § 256, can not form the Strong Aorist, 
 that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of the first 
 class; but radical verbs of other classes, especially those 
 with Stems in X, ju, v, |0, also have the Weak Aorist. 
 
 The Weak Aorist Middle, like the Strong one, has only 
 a Middle sense, and is never Passive (§ 477, etc.). 
 
 Y. The Perfect-Stem. 
 
 § 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect 
 and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future 
 {FutuTum exactum), which occurs only in the Middle. 
 
 § 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-Stem 
 is the reduplication (compare Trc-Trrjy-a with Jjat. j>e-pig~i), 
 which generally takes the first place ; but in verbs com- 
 pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after 
 the preposition (§ 238) : Xl-Xu-ica, but k-Xe-Xu-jca. 
 
 The reduplication belongs to the Perfect- Stem, and is 
 therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, 
 infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D.). 
 
 In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the 
 initial consonant with e being placed before the Stem : 
 Stem Xu, Perfect-Stem XcXu, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. 
 Xl-Xu-jca. 
 
 § 273. Dialects. — The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be 
 omitted in the Epic dialect; dky-jxaL forms an exception (3 Plur. 
 SeX-^-T^'-)^ though we also find ^s-^ey-fiai, I expect or receive, Part. 
 ^e-8sy-ixhog, from Pres. Sex-o-fiat, (compare § 316, 34). Some verbs' 
 beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New- 
 Ionic dialect. 
 
273. 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 153 
 
 ■ I. Active. 
 
 Present Xv-ut 
 
 Stem Xv 
 
 Perfect Stem XeXw 
 
 Perfect : 1. Weak form 
 
 (paiv-io 
 
 Pure Stem ^ a v 
 
 TTC ?/ V 
 
 2. Strong fonn 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-a, I have loosed. 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-a-g 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-e-(v) 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-a-Tov 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-a-TOV 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-a-jxev 
 
 Xe-Xv-K-a-TS 
 
 Xs-Xv-K-d-(n{v) 
 
 7r£-0)]v-a, I Mve appeared. 
 
 ■K'E-<pr}v-a-g 
 
 TrE-<l>riv-E{v) 
 
 TrE-<pf]V-a-Tov 
 
 TTE-tprjV-a-TOV 
 
 TrE-tprjv-a-fiEV 
 
 7rE-(pf]V-a-TE 
 
 7rE-(pr)V-d-(n(v) 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Xe-Xv-k-uj 
 XE-Xv-K-y-g 
 
 etc., like the Subj. Pre 
 
 TTE-^rjV-OJ 
 
 7rE-(pr]V-y-g 
 sent, § 232. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Xs-Xv-K-oi-fii or XeXvkoiijv 7rE-(pT]V-oi-fii or irEiprjVoiriv 
 
 etc., like the Optat. Present, § 232. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 Xe-Xv-k-e TTE-tpriV-E 
 
 etc., like the Imperat. Present, § 232. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 XE-Xv-K-EVai 
 
 TTE-^rjv-Evai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 M. XE-Xv-K-(ljg 
 F. Xe-Xv-k-vIu 
 K XE-Xv-K-6g 
 Crcn. XE-Xv-K-oT-og 
 
 (Inflexion, §147, 2.) 
 
 7rE-(pt}v-wg 
 TTE-ipriv-vla 
 TTE-^rjv-og 
 7rE-<pr]v-6T-og 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-v, I had loosed. 
 
 E-XE-Xv-K-El-g 
 
 e-Xe-Xv-k-ei 
 e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-tov 
 
 E-XE-Xv-K-El-rT]V 
 
 e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-^ev 
 e-Xe-Xv-k-ei-te 
 E-XE-Xv-K-E-crav or IXEXiiKEiaav 
 
 E-7rE-<pr}v-Ei-v, I had appeared. 
 
 E-TrE-<prjv-Ei-g 
 
 E-TTE-^rjV-Et 
 
 E-TrE-<pr]V-Ei-rQV 
 
 E-TTE-tprjV-Ei-TTJV 
 E-7rE-<j)T]V-El-flEV 
 E-TrE-<pr]V-El-TE 
 
 l-wE-(pr]V-E-(Tav or iTTEtprjvEKrav 
 
 G 2 
 
154 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 274. 
 
 II. Middle and Passive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 • 
 
 Xe-Xv-fiaij I have loosed 
 for myself, or have 
 l)een loosed. 
 
 Xk-Xv-aai 
 
 Xk-Xv-rai 
 
 Xe-Xv-ne9ov 
 
 Xe-Xv-(T9ov 
 Xs-Xv-(t9ov 
 
 Xe-Xv-iJ.e9a 
 
 Xs-Xv-(T9e 
 Xk-Xv-vTai 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Xe-Xv-fjievog, a», yg, y, etc., § 315. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Xe-Xv-fisvog, Hrjv, Eirjg, elij, etc., § 315. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Xk-Xv-<TO 
 
 Xe-Xv-aOo) 
 
 Xs-Xv-a9ov 
 Xe-Xv-a9ii}V 
 
 Xk-Xv-<T9e 
 Xe-Xv-(79(t)v or 
 Xe-Xv-(T9ioaav 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Xe-Xv-aQai 
 
 Partic. 
 
 Xe-Xv-fitvo-g, i], o-v 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 e-Xe-Xv-fxijv, I had 
 hosed for myself 
 or had leen loosed. 
 
 t-Xk-Xv-ao 
 
 t-Xk-Xv-TO 
 
 l-Xe-Xv-fii9ov 
 
 i-Xe-Xv-aOov 
 t-Xe-Xv-<T9r]v 
 
 t-Xe-Xv-ixe9a 
 
 t-Xe-Xv-(T9e 
 e-Xs-Xv-vTo 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 Indie 
 
 . X£-Xo-(T-o-/iai, / shall have been loosed. 
 Xe-Xv-a-y, etc., like the usual Fut. Mid. (§ 258). 
 
 Opt. Xe-. 
 
 Kv-a-oi-fii]v 
 
 Inf. Xs-Xv-<T-e-<r6ai 
 
 Part. Xe-Xv-(r-6-inevo-Q 
 
 § 274. The following points, however, are to be ob- 
 served : 
 
 1. An aspirate, according to § 53, a, is represented by the 
 
 § 274. Dialects. — The full reduplication, in spite of the initial p, 
 occurs in the Horn. pE-pyTno-jjievo-g^ soiled ; on the other hand, the Per- 
 fects ffji-[xop-a (Pres. ^Eipofxai, class 4, d, I obtain) and ia-cv-nai (Pres. 
 (T6wfa), class 2, 1 hasten), instead of jxinopa, chvfiai, are treated like Stems 
 with p. 
 
§ 275. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 155 
 
 corresponding tenuis : Stem x^ P^t X^P^f ^ retreat, ke- 
 Xwprj-Ka ; Stem v, Ovw, I sacrifice, Tt-6v-Ka ; Stem <^ a v, 
 
 2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the 
 first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when 
 it is a 7?itcte followed by X, fi, v, or p : Stem 7 ^ a ^, y/oa^w, 
 I write, yi-ypa^-a ; Stem tt X a 7, irXnaaii), I strike, iri- 
 TrXr/y-a ; Stem irvv, irviu), I hreathe, Tri-Trvev-Ka. 
 
 3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two con- 
 sonants takes only t for its reduplication: Stem ktev, 
 KTSivu), I hill, t-KTOv-a ; Stem ^ i] r e, Z^tco, I seeJc, E-Zr}rr}-Ka, 
 
 4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only e, after 
 which the p is doubled : Stem p i (p, piirTii), I throw, ip-pi(p-a 
 (compare §§ 62, 234). 
 
 Exceptions. — Verl3s beginning with yv, yX, and sometimes those 
 beginning with /3X, have a simple e for their reduplication. Stem 
 y V w, t-yv(D-Ka, I have come to Jcnow ; Stem (5}fa<TTe (jSXatrrw, / 
 germinate)^ i-^Xdarri-Ka. The Stems ktu (KTw/xai, I acquire) and 
 /ttva, on the other hand, have d-KTrj-fxai and fie-fxvT]-fjiai,Irem£m- 
 ler, me-min-i. Compare Tre-TTToj-Ka, I Jiave fallen, and Trk-Trra-fiai, 
 lam spread out, §§ 319, 3, 327, 15. 
 
 Instead of the reduplication ei appears in d-\T}(p-a, I liaxe taken (§ 
 333, 35) ; u-\r\x-a, I have obtained (§ 333, 37) ; £i-Xoxa (from X^yw, / 
 gather) ; Si-ei-Xey-jxai (from ^taXeyojuai, / converse) ; u-pr]-Ka, I have 
 said (§ 337, 13) ; and in the aspirated e'i-nap-rai, it is fated, Stem 
 fiep. 
 
 § 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of the 
 
 § 275. Dialects. — 1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Ho- 
 mer, as: dp-rjpo-Tai, from dpoio, I plough; dX-dXrj-fiaL, from aXd-o-jxai,! 
 wander ; dp-rjp-a, I am joined, Stem d p ; u5-iod-a, I smell, o^w, compare 
 od-or ; o7r-w7r-a, I have seen, from the Stem 6 tt ; and with a v inserted : 
 kjxv-rjixv-Ka, from the Pres. i^fiv-oj, I droop the head. Herod, has dp-aiprj- 
 Ku, from aiptu), I take. 
 
 3. Instead of d-ioQa, Hom. also has l-ioQa, which is the only form 
 used by Herod. From the Stem kXir (originally PeXtt) i-oXir-a, I 
 hope; from Stem ipy (Pepy), i-opy-a, I have done. From the Stem 
 « p (Lat. sero), Pres. elpoj, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. kpro, Part. Perf. Mid. 
 
156 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 276. 
 
 Temporal Augment (§ 235) : Stem dpOo, opOio, I raise 
 ttp, iopO(i)-Ka. The verbs mentioned in § 236 have el here 
 also ; aiXiyfxai, Pres. iXiaauyyl roll. 
 
 1. Some Steins beginning with a, e, or o exceptionally take what is 
 called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of 
 the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with 
 its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the sec- 
 ond syllable being lengthened : Stem d \ i ^ (dXei'^w, class 2, / 
 anoint)^ dX-rjXicp-a ; Stem clko, dKovu), I hear, aK-rjKo-a (for dicrjKoPa, 
 § 35, Ohs.), but Mid. fiKovcrfiai; Stem opvx (opvcraio, class 4, 1 dig) 
 6p-ojpvx-a; Stem dyep (dyeipu), claSS 4, d, I collect), dy-rjyEp-KU ', 
 Stem iXa (Pres. tXavpo), I drive, § 321, 2), IX-rjXd-Ka, Mid. IX-rjXa- 
 fiai ; Stem iXeyx, Pres. tXeyxo), I refute (class 1), Perf Mid. tX-rjXey- 
 fiai (compare § 286, Obs.) ; lyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, from the Stem 
 eyep, Pres. lydpoj,! awaJcen (class 4, d), is ii-regular. 
 
 2. The Stems d X w (dXto-Koytiai, § 324, 17, / am made prisoner), d y 
 (dyvvfii, § 319, 13, Ihreah), eIk (not used in the Pres., § 317, 7), 
 and w V € (ojvkofiai, I luy) are likewise irregular ; but originally 
 they had an initial consonant (§ 34, D.) : c-dXw-Ka, e-dy-a, i-oiK-a, 
 
 k-MVi)-iiai ; tl!e Stem dvo ly (dvoiyu), I open) has dv-sipy-a. To 
 
 these may be added el-ojQ-a, I am accustomed, from the Stem i 9, 
 originally PeO (compare §§ 236, 237). 
 
 1. The Perfect Active. 
 
 § 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are ap- 
 pended to the Perfect- Stem in the Indicative by means of 
 the connecting vowel a. The first person has no personal 
 ending at all ; in the third, a is changed into e. The Sub- 
 junctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely oc- 
 curs) have the vowels of the Present ; the Infinitive ends 
 in -ivai (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -a»c, 
 -ma, -6q, Gen. -oroc (Stem or,% 188). 
 
 Upfisvog (compare § 270, D., 3). Th» following two are defective 
 Perfects in Horn. : dv-r]vo9-e{v) , it gushes forth ; kv-r}vo9-e{v), it is upon. 
 Both also occur as Pluperfects. 
 
 § 276. Dialects. — In the Hom. dialect, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes 
 has 0) instead of o : T£9vr]wTog =: Att. T£9vT]K6Tog (from 9vrj(7KU}, I die) ; 
 KEKXiiyioTeQ for KSKXTjyoTeg, calling, from Pres. fcXd^w. # 
 
§ 278. THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 157 
 
 Obs. — The Subjunctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed 
 periplirastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms 
 of ei'/u/, / am. 
 
 § 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different 
 ways : 
 
 1. The Strong Perfect (Second Perfect) 
 
 is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem : 
 Stem IT pay, Pres. (Class 4, a) irpaacrw, I do, Perf. ttI- 
 TTpay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist, oc- 
 curs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (§ 245), 
 and is generally the older and rarer form. 
 
 § 278. The following changes of vowels are to be ob- 
 served in its formation : 
 
 a after p becomes d : Stdm Kpay, Pres. Kpd'Cuj, I 
 
 scream^ Perf. Ks-Kpdy-a. 
 a Otherwise becomes n : Stem irXdy^ Pres. TrXrjacro), 
 
 I strike^ Perf. Trs-TrXrjy-a. 
 Stem (pdv, Pres. (paivu), I 
 
 sTioic, Perf. Tri-<pT]v-a. Compare 
 
 £ becomes o : Stem (jTpe.^, Pres. arpk^u), § 40 to § 43. 
 
 / tiirn^ Perf. t-<TTpo(p-a. 
 I " 01 : Stem XXtt, Pres. Xeittw, / 
 
 leave, Perf. Xk-Xonr-a. 
 V , " eu : Stem ^wy, Pres. (pevyoj, I 
 
 Jiee, Perf. 7rs-^evy-a. 
 
 The change of a into to is quite isolated : Stem pay, 
 Perf. ep-pioya, I am torn, Pres. pijyvv-pi (§ 319, 24), and 
 
 § 277-280. Dialects.— The Hom. dialect is partial to the Strong Per- 
 fect ; the aspiration does not occur iij it : Stem kott (kStttu)), kekottojc- 
 The Part. Trt-^y^-dr-fL', from Stem (pvy ((pevyio), is quite an isolated 
 Hom. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only froni Vowel-Stems, 
 and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms : Stem v, 
 3 Plur. Perf. Act. rrE^vdcn = Att. TretpvKdcri, from ^vcj, I deget ; Stem kots 
 (koHu), I am angry), Part. Perf. k^kot^wq, § 317, D. In the Fcm. Part. 
 Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur : Stem d p, Masc. Part. Perf. 
 ctp-Tjp-ibg, joined, Fem. dp-dp-vlw, Stem 9aX (OdXXio, I dloom), Masc. 
 Part. Perf. te-OtjX-ojc, Fem. TE-GdX-vTa. The Perf. rk-rprjx-a, lam restless, 
 Pres. ^apdaaix), I disturb. Stem r [ a ] p a x, is irregular. 
 
158 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 279. 
 
 SO also that of e into w : Stem f 6, Perf. u-wd-a, I am ac- 
 customed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and in 
 some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel: 
 Stem opv^y 6p''(jjpv)(-a, Pres. Ojouo-aw, T dig j yi-y pacji-af 
 from ypa(p(x), I write. 
 
 § 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants k, 7, tt, /3, 
 change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally 
 without any lengthening of the vowels : 
 
 Stem KTjpvic, Pres. Krjpvaaio, I jyi'oclaimj Perf. ice-Kfjpvx-a. 
 
 " d y, " ayw, I lead^ " j}\;a (dyj70\;-a). 
 
 " K TT, " KOTrrw, / hew, " Ks-KO(p-a. 
 
 " /3\ai3, " fiXdTTToj.Ihurt, " (i'c-(i\d(p-a. 
 
 In spite of the aspiration, the vowels are changed in 
 Kt-Kko^-a, Stem k X £ tt, Pres. icXiTrrfj, -T steal / izi-Troptp-a, 
 Stem IT E fXTT, Pres. irijiTrw, I send / Tt-rpocp-Qi, Stem r peir, 
 TptTTii), I turn^ which is in form the same as the Perf. of 
 the Stem r/of^ (Pres. rpif^n,), I nourish)', u-\ox-a (com- 
 pare § 274), Stem X c 7, Pres. Xtyw, I gather. 
 
 ■ Obs. 1 . — Few verbs have both fonns with and without the aspirate : 
 the Stem Trpay (Pres. Trpdcrau), I do) has both Trk-Trpdy-a (intran- 
 sitive, //««i'6/«?r<^?) and Tra-TTpdx-a {transitive, I have done) ; Stem 
 c'lvoiy, Pres. dvoiyu), I opeii, Perf. dv-U^y-a (intrans., 7 stand ojjen) 
 and dv-£<^x-a (transit., I have ojyened). 
 2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs also 
 in a number of derivative verbs : Stem dWay, dWdaaio, I 
 change^ from dXKog, Perf. ?y/\Xax-a. 
 
 § 280. 2. The Weak Perfect (First Perfect) 
 is formed from the Stem by the insertion of k : Stem X i», 
 Xi-Xv-K-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form, 
 and with all Yowel- Stems it is the only one in use, while 
 it is the more common with Stems ending in r, S, 0, and 
 those in X, jm, v, p. 
 
 Obs. — The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic 
 prose is dKrjKoa (§ 275, 1) ; but compare § 317. 
 
 § 281. In regard to the vowel, the Weak Perfect follows 
 the (T Future (§§ 260, 261): Stem dp a, dpdcrw, di-^pj^-Ka ; 
 
§ 283. THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 159 
 
 Stem T I fia, riiur](7(i)f TETifirfKa ; Stem TT X u, irX^vaw, ni- 
 TrXfuica ; Stem tt t (Trtt^w, / jyersuade), tte/o-w, iriirsiKa. 
 \iijj, I j[)Our^ Perf. KiyvKa^ is an exception (§ 265). For 
 other exceptions, see J 301. 
 
 Stems in r, ^, % throw out these consonants before a, 
 without any other change : Stem ic o ju t ^, KOfiiZw, I carry, 
 KeKO/uuKa. 
 
 § 282. The monosyllabic Stems in \, v, p, having e in the Stem 
 syllable, change this e in the Weak Perf. into a : Stem (tts\, 
 GTsWoj^ I send, Perf, t-oTaX-Ka ; Sterii tpO^p, (pOeipo, I destroy, Perf. 
 t-(p9ap-Ka. Several in v throw out the v: Stem Kptp, Kpivio, 1 
 judge, Perf. ke-kpI-ku ; Stem kXXv, kXIvu), I incline, Perf. ick-KXX-Ka ; 
 Stem ttXvv, ttXvvio, I icash, Perf. Trk-TrXv-Ka; Stem rev, re/vw, / 
 stretch, Perf Ts-rd-Ka. Wherever v is not thrown out before k, it 
 becomes, according to § 51, a nasal y : Stem ^av, (paivm, I show, 
 Perf, Tra-(pay-Ka. 
 
 Other Stems of this kind, and some in /i, admit of metathesis (§ 59) : 
 Stem (iaX, fiaXXw, I throw, Perf ^t-jSXr}-K-a ; Stem ku^i, Kafivoj, I 
 grow tired, Perf. Ke-Kfirj-K-a (§ 321, 9). 
 
 2. The Pluperfect Active. 
 
 § 283. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the 
 Perfect- Stem ; its terminations are those of tlie historical 
 tenses. Between the Stem and the termination the diph- 
 thong H steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is reduced to e. 
 
 Obs. — The 3 Plur. in uaav is rare and more modern. 
 
 The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a vowel 
 is not recognizable, because their Perfect-Stem has already 
 
 § 282. Dialects. — The Hom. fik-n^Xio-Ka for fie-fiXu)-Ka, from the Stem 
 ^ X (Aor. tfioXou, I went), is explained by metathesis. Compare §§51, 
 D., 324, 12. 
 
 § 283. Dialects. — The Ionic dialect has the antiquated endings of 
 the Pluperf : 1 Sing, ea, 2 Sing, eag, 3 Sing. €f(i/), contracted et, eiv, 
 or t] • the 2 Plur, New-Ion. ea-re. Hom. he-Orj-rr-ea, I was astonished ; 
 3 Sing. dedH7rv{]K-eiv, from dmrvea}, I dine. 
 
 t-[i6ixT]K-ov (Perf. ixefirjKa, I hleat) and i}vioyov, along with rjvojym (Perf. 
 dv(oya, I compel), are formed quite irregularly, according to the man- 
 ner of Imperfects. 
 
160 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 284. 
 
 a long vowel:. Verbal-Stem ay, ayu), I drive, Perfect- 
 Stem 77 X, ]]x-H-v. The Syllabic Augment is often omit- 
 ted. The 1 and 3 Sing, in the older Attic dialect have t? 
 instead of u and uv, as c-XeXvk-tj. 
 
 The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same as 
 that of the Perfect, and, like it, it is either strong or weak, 
 and has the vowel long or short, or unchanged. 
 
 § 284. 3. The Perfect Middle and Passive 
 c^n be formed only in one way, that is, by appending the 
 personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, with- 
 out any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-Stem, i. e.^ to the 
 reduplicated Yerbal-Stem : Stem X v, Perf. Mid. Xi-Xv-jiai, 
 The Infinitive and the Participle always have the accent 
 on the penultima : XeXvaOai, XeXvfiivog ; Stem waidev, 
 Treirai^tiKrdai, from irai^evu), T educate. 
 
 § 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in the 
 Weak Perfect : Stem t i^a, TSTifirjKa, TSTifirnmm ; Stem ttX 0, 
 iriiruKa, irfTreKTiuiai ; Stem (pO e p, ttpOapKa, ttjiOapiuLai ; Stem 
 ^ a X, j3t/3XrjK:a, jStjSXr/^at. The verbs rpi^n), I nourish, 
 Tpiwii), I turn, and crTpiclxx), I turn, also take a instead of c : 
 Ti-Opa/ui-fjiai, Tb-TpajJi-nai, hGrpaji-fxai. 
 
 § 286. The final Consonants of Consonantal- Stems change 
 according to the general laws of sound (§§ 45-49) : 
 
 § 284. Dialects. — In the Horn, dialect, the a of the 2 Sing. Perf. and 
 Pkiperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vowels : fxsfiyT]ai 
 =: HBfivT]<7ai (meministi)^ contracted fj-sfivy; so also in the New-Ionic 
 the Imperat. fisfiveo for fisfivrjao. 
 
 § 285. Dialects. — The Hom. ■n-e-Trpw-rai, Stem tt p (Strong Aorist 
 tTTopov, I gave), is explained by metathesis. The following have a 
 short vowel : rkrvyixaL, from Tevx(t), I prepai^e, 3 Plur. Tsrevxarai ; tte- 
 ^vyfitvog, from ^ewyw, IJiee; ttjavfiai, from csvoy^ITiasten ; v instead of 
 ty : TT^.-Trvv-fxai, from Trvew, § 248. 
 
 § 286. Dialects. — The of the Stem Kopv9 (icopvaaa), I arm) remains 
 unchanged in Homer : Ks-KopvO-ixevoQ. aicrxvvio, I put to shame^ has 
 
 yaxv^inai. 
 
§ 287. . THE PERFECT MIDDLE. 161 
 
 1. Before all terminations beginning with ju 
 
 every guttural becomes y : Stem ttXek, ttXsku}, I twist, Trs-TrX^y- fiai ; 
 " dental " o- : ^tem ttiO, irei9a), I persuade, TrE-Treia-fisOa; 
 
 " labial " fi : Stem y pa<p, ypd^io, I write, ye-ypafi-[isvog. 
 
 Obs. — When a guttm-al or labial is iDreceded by a nasal, the latter 
 is thrown out before ^ : Stem KUfiir, Ka/iTrroj, / hend, KtKaiifiai ; 
 Stem sXeyXj thlyxoi, I refute, eXkXeyfxai (§ 275, 1). Some Stems 
 in V, by way of exception, do not change the v before fi into (x, 
 but into fi : w^y^/uat, from o^vpm, I sharpen; those which throw 
 out the V in the Perf Active do the same here (§ 282) : KkKpijiai 
 (compare irk-ipacr-nai, from the Stem ^dv): airevdoj, I offer a liba- 
 tion, Fut. (nreiGuj, has taTruajiai. 
 
 . Before o- 
 every guttural becomes k, and this with <r becomes K : Tre-TrXe^at ; 
 " labial " tt, " " " ^: yi-ypaif^ai', 
 
 " dental is thrown out : Te-ireKrai. 
 
 3. Before r 
 
 every guttural becomes k : Trs-TrXcKrai ; Stem \ e y, Xs-XeK-rai ; 
 
 " labial " tt : ye-ypaTrrai ; 
 
 " dental (exc. v) " o- : Trs-Treta-Tai (Stem (pav, Trk-<pav-Tai). 
 
 4. The or of gQ after consonants (§ 61) is dropped, and 
 then 
 
 every guttural becomes x • 7re-TrXex-9ov for TTE-TrXeK-aOov ; 
 " labial " <p : ys-ypa^-Oe for ye-y pacp-aOe ; 
 
 " dental (exc. j/) " o- : Tre-Treitr-Oai for Tre-TreiO-aOai. 
 
 V, X, and /o remain unchanged before the which has 
 arisen from gQ : Stem a v, irEcpavOat ; Stem a 7 7 e X, 
 ?777£X0a(. 
 
 § 287. The ending vrai of the 3 Plur. is irreconcilable 
 with Consonantal- Stems. Sometimes the Ionic arai takes 
 
 § 287. Dialects. — In the Ion. dialect, the forms arai and uto for the 
 3 Plur. are common : Hom. has ^E-^Xr]-aTai (j3dXXcj, I throw), TrEiroTrjaTo 
 {irordofiai, I fiutter), dedaiuTai {daiio, I divide), tpxarai, i'tpxaro (dpyu), I 
 shut in, § 319, 15); in New-Ionic, TrapecTKEvddaro {irapaaKEvdZio, I pre- 
 pare), KSKoafiUtTai (Kotr/xeu), I adorn). Three Homeric forms insert S : 
 ippd-d-arai (paivio, I besprinkle), dKr]XE-5-aTo (dxvvfiai, I am grieved), 
 tXrjXd-S-ciTo (Stem IXa, kXavvio, I drive) ; IprjpsSaTai, from epeidcj, I sup- 
 port, is irregular. 
 
162 
 
 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 288. 
 
 its j)lace (§ 226, D.), before which y, k, j3, and tt are aspi- 
 rated : y^-ypcK^-arai, r^-ray^-araL (Stem ray, Taaaii), I cor- 
 range)^ T£-Tpi(f)-aTaL (Stem Tpiji, rpif^u), I rich). But the 
 common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the 
 Participle with Li-cri(v) : y^ypajifiivoi tWiv. Compare Lat. 
 scrijpti sunt and § 276, Obs. 
 
 The following paradigms supply examples of the above- 
 mentioned changes. 
 
 Perfect Middle and Passive. 
 
 Guttural Stems. 
 
 Dental Stems. 
 
 Labial Stems. 
 
 TTi-TrX^y-Hai 
 
 TTE-irXe^ai 
 
 TTE-irXeK-Tai 
 
 Tre-TrXey-fieOa 
 
 TTE-TrXex-Oe 
 
 Tre-TrXey-fisvoi doi 
 
 TrE-Treia-fxai 
 TTE-ireiaai 
 7re-Trei(T-Tai 
 7r€-7rct(T-/x£0a 
 
 7r£-7r€l(7-06 
 
 7re-7rei(T-fxsvoi elai 
 
 yk-ypan-fiai 
 
 yk-ypa-^ai 
 
 yk-ypaTT-rai 
 
 ye-ypdix-fjieOa 
 
 y'E-ypatp-dE 
 
 yE-ypafi-fiEvoi dai 
 
 288. After Vowel-Stems, a is frequently inserted before the ter- 
 minations beginning with ^ and r, but more especially when the 
 Stems have the vowel short : Stem r e X e, teXm, I complete, Perf. 
 TE-TEXe-cr-fiai ; Stem c tt a, <nrdio, I draw, 3 Sing. 'i-aira-a-Tai ; but 
 it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and diph- 
 thongs: dKovit},niear,i]Kov(Tiiai\ keXevio, I order ; kvX'uxt, I roll ; Xevcj, 
 I stone to death ; ^voj, I j^oUsh ; Tra'nx), I strike ; ttXeio (TrfTrXeyorai), 
 / sail; Trpioj, I saw ; adio, I shake ; %ptw, / anoint; \l/avio, I touch. 
 Others fluctuate : kXc/w or kX^'w, I close; Kpovu), I push. 
 
 289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by peri- 
 phrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of dfiL 
 (Compare Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely 
 evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves : KTdofiai, I acquire, k'e- 
 KTrj-fxai, Subj. Ke-KToj-fiai, KE-Kry, KE-KTij-Tai, Opt. Ke-KTt^-fitjv (from 
 KE-KTaoi-firiv), Ke-KTtp-To; besides these, we also have KSKTyfirjv, yo, 
 
 yro. 
 
 § 289. Dialects. — The Horn. Subj. from Stem f^iva (fiEfivrjuai, memini), 
 1 Plur, /xefiVMfieQa (New-Ion. /xe/ivew^e^a), Opt. ixsjxvyjfirjv ; 3 Sing. XeXiiro, 
 3 Plur. XeXvvTo, instead of XeXv-i-ro^ XeXv-i-vro, § 28. 
 
§ 291. THE FUTURE PERFECT. 163 
 
 § 290. 4. The Flujperfect Middle and Passive 
 differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect only 
 by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings, 
 which are those of the historical tenses. Respecting the 
 3 Plur. in vto and aro, and their places being supplied by 
 periphrasis, see § 287, which is here applicable also. 
 
 § 291. 5. The Fttture Perfect or Futurum Exactmn 
 adds cr to the Perfect-Stem with the Inflexion of the Fu- 
 ture-Middle ; the o- produces the same changes in the pre- 
 ceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle : Tra- 
 irpa^ETaL (Stem irpay, irpacrcrii), J do), it will have heen 
 done ; yey paipETui (Stem y pacj), ypacjxx), I write), it will 
 have been ivritten. 
 
 There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active 
 endings : idrriZu) (§ 311), I shall stand, and rtOvn^cj (§ 324, 
 4), I shall he dead, from the Perf. forr/zca, rWvrjKa. 
 
 Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the Part. 
 of the Perf with the Fut. of tt/xf, I am {taojuai) : XsXvKtog 
 taofxai, I shall have loosed (solver o\ 
 
164 
 
 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 292. 
 
 VI. The Strong Passive Stem; 
 
 § 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed the 
 Strong or Second Aorist, and the Strong or Second Future 
 Passive. 
 
 Present : tpaivu)^ Pure Stem ^ a r, Strong Passive Stem <pavt. 
 
 1. Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 
 
 
 h<f>di^r}-v, I ap- 
 
 
 tpavut 
 
 
 ^aveirj-v 
 
 
 peared. 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 k-<pdvT}-Q 
 
 <u 
 
 <pavy-g 
 
 
 ^aveiTj-c 
 
 ■S 
 
 h-<pavr) 
 
 •S 
 
 <l>avy 
 
 .^ 
 
 <paveirf 
 
 s 
 
 ir<pavri-TO%' 
 
 ^ 
 
 <pavrj-TOV 
 
 tl 
 
 <pavdr]-Tov or (pavelrov 
 
 ^ 
 
 i-<pavrf-Tr]v 
 
 ;f? 
 
 ^avfj-TOV 
 
 & 
 
 <paveif}-TTjv or <paveiTr]v 
 
 1— 1 
 
 t-<f>dvrj-ixtv 
 
 13 
 
 <pavCj-/xEv 
 
 
 <l>avdr}-^w or ^aveifxev 
 
 
 e-^dvT]-Te 
 
 
 (pavij-TE 
 
 
 (j)avdT]-Te or ^aveire 
 
 
 k-<pdvr]-aav 
 
 
 (l>av&-ai{v) 
 
 
 (pavHTi-aav or <paveiev 
 
 
 (pdvr]-Qt 
 
 Inf. 
 
 ^avrj-vai 
 
 Part. 
 
 (pavdg, ^aveiaa, <j)avsv 
 
 g? 
 
 <pavr]-Tu) 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. <pavk-VT-OQ 
 
 •43 
 
 ^dvrj-Tov 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^avr}-T(i)v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <l>dvri-T£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 >5 
 
 <pavri-Tio(Tav OV 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. >5 
 
 trmg or Second Future Passive. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 (pavri-aofiai 
 
 >| 
 
 Opt. 
 
 (pavrj-croifiijv 
 
 -*etc., tlie same as the Future Middle. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 (pavTj-ffEaOai 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 ^avr]-o6fiivoQ^ 
 
 ri,ov) 
 
 § 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are 
 of an Active nature, those of the Future Passive of the 
 nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the Sec- 
 
 § 293. Dialects.^The Hom. dialect lias the shorter ending ev in the 
 3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass. : e-cpdve-v or ^dve-v ; rpd(pE-v = lTpd<pt}(Tav, from 
 r/o£0a>. The Ion. dialect leaves the e in the SuIdj. uncontracted : /jXye-o} 
 (jiicryu), I mix). Homer often lengthens the e in the Subj., sometimes 
 to et : ddfid-b) = dafiio, Stem da ft, Pres. dd/jivTiixi, I tame; and some- 
 
§ 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165 
 
 ond Principal Conjugation (§ 302), to the Stem without a 
 connecting vowel, and the e of the Stem is lengthened in 
 the Indicative and Imperative to ??. In the Sjibjunctive, 
 the £ is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive: 
 (^avi'U), 0avw ; in the Optative, the e, combined with the 
 modal sign ir], becomes ht] : 0av£-trj-v. The Infinitive al- 
 ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par- 
 ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Masc. the acute on the last. 
 
 § 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong 
 Aorist Active and Middle (§ 256), is formed very rarely 
 from derivative Stems ; but it occurs in verbs of all class- 
 es, even the first (§ 247), f being added to the pure Yerbal- 
 Stem : Pres. paiTT-ii) (class 3, / sew), Pure Stem pa^. 
 Strong Passive Stem pa(p£, Aor. Pass. lppa(l>r\-v ; (j(j)aTTco 
 (class 4, / slaughter), Pure Stem (T<l>ay, Strong Passive 
 Stem (T((>ay s, Aor. Pass. i(T(j)ayr}-v, Put. Pass. (T^ayr}-(Toiuiai ; 
 Pres. ypaiji-w (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem y patpe, Aor. 
 Pass. lypa^i]'V. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in 
 such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only 
 exception is Tplirtj, I turn, Aor. Act. i-Tpair-o-v, Pass. 
 
 l-TpCLTTTl-V. 
 
 Obs. — By way of exception, ^XXayj/v is formed from the derivative 
 Stem a X X a y, Pres. aXXdaao), I change. 
 
 § 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (§ 257), the c is 
 sometimes changed into a : kXItt-t-w, T steal, e-K\a7rrj-v ; 
 ariXkh), I send, l-(TTa\r]-v ; Tpit^i-tx), I nourish, l-rpdcprj-v ; 
 irXiK-u), I twist, l-Tr\iKr]-v and l-TrXaKr^-v ; ttXtjo-ctw, I strike, 
 
 times to ri : (pdvrj-y = <pdvy. In the Dual and Plur., the modal vowel 
 is shortened where this lengthening of the. e occurs: dajxd-tTE (for 
 daiJ.er]TE, Att, dafiriTe). In the Infinitive we find the Horn, fievai or fxev : 
 
 fiiyr]fiEvaij dafiijfiEv. 
 
 § 295. Dialects. — Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59), as in 
 the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (§ 357, D.) : Pres. rlpTr-w, / delight, Aor. 
 Pass. e-TdpTTTi-v, Subj. Tpd7rk-(»y 1 Plur. Tpd-n-eiofiev (gaitdeamm), Inf. 
 Tpdirrj-nevat. 
 
166 
 
 VII. THE AVEAK PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 296. 
 
 has t'7r\riyr}-v, 7r\r]yr]-(TOfiai,hut in composition t^-e-irXayri'V, 
 eK-7rXay{}-<Toiuai ; the Pure Stem of verbs of the second 
 class here reappears: (nV-w (Stem a air, I corrupt), 
 £-o-a7rrj-v ; rrjK-u) (Stem tclk,! melt), e-TaKrj-v ; plu) (Stem 
 p V, I flow), l-f}pvr)-v, pvrj-GOfjiai. 
 
 VII. The Weak Passive Stem. 
 
 § 296. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the 
 Weak or I^irst Aorist and ths Weak or First Future 
 Passive. 
 
 Pres. Xuw, Stem Xj;,Weak Passive Stem \vBe. 
 
 1. Wealc or First Aorist Passive. 
 
 Ind. i-Xv9i]-Vj I 
 was loosed. 
 i-\vdt]-Q 
 
 Subj. XvOL 
 
 \vBy-Q 
 
 Opt. \v9eir}-v 
 XvOeirj-Q 
 
 etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 
 
 Imp. Xv9n-Ti 
 Xv9f]-r(o 
 
 Inf. Xv9i)-vai 
 
 Part. Xv9e'i-q, Xv9iiaa, Xv9kv 
 Gen. Xv9kvT-o£ 
 
 etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 
 
 2. TTm/j or First Future Passive. 
 
 Ind. Xv9f]-(T0fiai 
 
 Opt. Xv9ri-(ToiiXT]v 
 
 Inf. Xv9r}-aEa9ai 
 
 Part. Xv9r}-(r6iiEvo-Q^ »;, o-v 
 
 § 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is en- 
 tirely like that of the Strong. Eespecting the r of XvOrj-n, 
 instead of XvOr}-Oi, see § 53, c. 
 
 § 296. Dialects. — The Weak Put. Pass, is wanting in the Homeric 
 dialect. * 
 
 § 297. Dialects. — Respecting the inflexion, see § 293, D. 
 
 § 298. Dialects. — The Hom. dialect after some Vowel-Stems inserts 
 V before 9: d]XTrvv-v-9r] (Stem tt w, Trvku), I breathe), idpv-v-9ri Qdpixo, 
 Isetjirm), and changes the e of the Stem ^aev (<paeiv(jj, (paivM^I Tnalce 
 appear) into a, ^adv9r]v. 
 
§ 299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM„ 167 
 
 § 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the 
 Yerbal-Stem by appending the syllable 0f. Before this 
 syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as in 
 the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Perfect : 
 Ti/na, IrifjirtOriv ; irtipa, eTreipaOiiVy I tried. As to the ex- 
 ceptions, see § 301. As in the Perfect Middle, a is inserted 
 before 0, especially after short vowels, but often also after 
 long ones : l-reXi-dSrjv, from rsXtw, / complete ; e-KsXtv-cr- 
 Orfv, from Kf Xeuw, / order / and this is the case in the verbs 
 mentioned in § 288, and especially in ytXaw, / laugh, lye- 
 XcktOtjv ; ^pd(i)y I do, iBpdaOrjv ; wavcj, I cause to cease, 
 tTravcrOriv, but also liravQnv, The Aor. Passive of (tw^w, 
 I save, on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem 
 Gil) without the o- : e(Toj6rjv. 
 
 As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle, 
 the £ before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a : Stem rev 
 (rdvd), I stretch), l-TciOri'V (compare § 282). 
 
 The changes of the consonants before are explained 
 by the laws of sound (§ 45) : Stem tt pay, irpdcrao), I do, 
 e-7rpdx'0r}-v ; Stem \pev^, \pevdo), I deceive, t-^eva-Orj-v ; 
 Stem TTCjUTT, Tre/unro), 1 send, l-Treiu(f)-9r}-v. Kespecting 
 Wpi(f)9riv (Pres. Tpi(j)(i)), £0a<^0rjv (Prcs. OdirTii)), see § 54, 
 Ohs., and respecting triOriv, lTv9r)v (Stems Be, Ov), see 
 §53, J. 
 
 § 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future 
 Passive are, on the whole, more common than the Strong, 
 and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly all Yowel- 
 Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist 
 and Future Passive. 
 
 There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive 
 Stems are in use : Stem j3Xa/3, Pres. j3Xa7rra>, I hurt, Aor. 
 Pass. £/3Xa/3»]v and £/3Xa00rjv. 
 
168 verbal adjectives. § 300. 
 
 Verbal Adjectives. 
 
 § 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par- 
 ticiples. 
 
 Pres. Xvu), Stem X v, i. Xv-rog, 17, 6v, loosed, capable of 
 
 being loosed. 
 2. Xv-rto-c, a, ov, to be loosened, 
 solvendu-s, a, um. 
 
 The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the 
 syllable to (Nom. ro-c, rr], to-v) from the Verbal- Stem, and 
 has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive, 
 Xv-T6-g=solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos- 
 ened. 
 
 The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of 
 the syllable rio (Nom. rto-g, Tta, rio-v), which is never con- 
 tracted, from the Verbal- Stem, and has the meaning of 
 necessity, like the Latin gerundive : Xv-rto-g, one who is 
 to be loosened / XvAov tart, loosening' must take place, 
 solvendwn est. 
 
 The vowels preceding the r are in general treated ex- 
 actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist ; 
 (T is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass. : tsXs- 
 a-rog, KsXEv-fT-riov, The consonants before r are treated in 
 accordance with the laws of sound : irpaK-ro-g (Stem tt pay, 
 Pres. wpaaaio) ; jpaTT-T6-g{ypa(l)(jj) ; Ko^ut cT-r£0-v( Stem KOfxtd, 
 KojxiZtjjyl carry). 
 
 Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the forma- 
 tion of their Tenses. 
 
 % 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in : 
 
 § 300. Dialects. — Zoa-rb-Q is derived by metathesis (§ 59) from the 
 Stem ^ € p (^£|oa>, I flay). 
 
 § 301. Dialects. — The H(fm. dialect lpd(i),Ilove, Aor. Mid. '^pdffdfirjv ; 
 djOKEw, / ward off, ^pKE<ra ; Kopkio, I satisfy, sKopeffa ; kotsoj, I grndge^ 
 KOTeaaaro ; epvoj, I draw, dpvaa. On the usual doubling of the a after 
 short vowels Opd(T<raro, Ipvaaaro), sec § 261, D. 
 
§ 301. 
 
 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 169 
 
 ■yeXdujj 
 
 Ilatcgh, 
 
 Fut. yeXaffOfiai, 
 
 Aor. Act. tysXdffa, 
 Aor. Pass. lyeXd(T9r]v, 
 Fut. Pass. y^XatjQriaofiai. 
 
 9Xd(o, 
 
 Isqiteeze, 
 
 Fut. eXdao), 
 
 Aor. Act. WXaaa, 
 Verb. Adj. eXatrrof. 
 
 kXciu), 
 
 I break, 
 
 Fut. KXdau), 
 
 Aor. Pass. tKXdaQrjv, 
 Perf. Mid. KEKXafffiai. 
 
 (TTraw, 
 
 I draw, 
 
 Fut. OTrciffio, 
 
 Aor. Act. to-rrdaa, 
 
 
 
 Aor. Pass. 
 
 kff'n'daOrjv, Perf. Act. itnrdKa, 
 
 
 
 Perf. Mid. 
 
 iairaafiai, Verb. Adj. trTraorroc. 
 
 XaXdo), 
 
 I slacken. 
 
 Fut. xa^affoj. 
 
 Aor. Pass. £x«^«<y^^»'- 
 
 aideofiai 
 
 , I dread, 
 
 Fut. aide(TOfiai, 
 
 Aor. Pass. yUaOriv (338), 
 Perf. yde(Tfiai. 
 
 uKeofiai, 
 
 I heal, 
 
 Fut. aKSffOfiai, 
 
 Aor. TfKEadfirjv. 
 
 dXew, 
 
 I grind. 
 
 Fut. dXeffio (w), 
 
 Perf. Act. tiX^Xem, 
 Perf. Mid. dXr]Xe<Tfiai. 
 
 dpKSUJ, 
 
 I satisfy, 
 
 Fut. dpKsaoj, 
 
 Aor. Act. fipKiaa. 
 
 ifieu), 
 
 I vomit. 
 
 
 Aor. Act. ijfieaa. 
 
 Ke<o, 
 
 I seethe, 
 
 Fut. ^£(rw, 
 
 Aor. Act. t^€(Ta, 
 Verb. Adj. ?e(rroc. 
 
 U<o, 
 
 I scrape. 
 
 Fut. ^S(T(0, 
 
 Verb. Adj. ^earof. 
 
 rfXew, 
 
 Ijinish, 
 
 Fut. TeXkao) (w), 
 
 Aor. Act. InXeffa, 
 Aor. Pass. IreXsaBriv, 
 Verb. Adj. rtXEffrof, 
 Perf. Act. TsHXeKa, 
 Perf. Mid TETeXetrfiai, 
 
 dpoo), 
 
 Iplow, 
 
 Fut. dpoffcj. 
 
 Aor. Act. ijpoffa, 
 
 Aor. Pass. rip69rjv. 
 
 dpvio, 
 
 I draw. 
 
 Fut. dp6(Toj, 
 
 Aor. Act. ijpvaa. 
 
 addit. form dpvroj. 
 eXicvu), I draw, # Aor. Act. 6iX<n;<Ta. 
 
 Fut. Pass. iXKV<T9r)ffOfiai, * Perf. Act. eiXicvKa, 
 
 Perf. Mid. elXKvafiai. 
 TTTVii), I ^pit, Aor. Act. iTTTvaa. 
 
 Verb. Adj. Trrvtrrof. 
 
 2. 7%6 'y^j^eZ ^5 Zc>7i^ in the Weak Aor. Act., and short 
 in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in 
 
 Sk(jJ, I Und, Fut. drjffio, Aor. Act. edri<Ta, 
 
 Perf. Act. dedeKu, 
 Aor. Pass. idWrjv, 
 Verb. Adj. ^erdf, 
 Perf. Mid. deSeiiai, 
 3 Fut. SedrjtTOfxai. 
 
 H 
 
170 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. §302. 
 
 0vb)^ I sacrifice, Fut. 0i><rw, Aor. Act. tQvtra, 
 
 Perf. Act. TsOvKa, Aor. Pass. iTvQrfv, 
 Perf, Mid. TsQvfiai. 
 
 \vw, I loose, Fut. X6<rio, Aor. Act. tXvffa, 
 
 Perf. Act. XeXvKa, Aor. Pass. IXvOrjv, 
 Verb. Adj. Xvrog, Perf. Mid. XeXvfiai. 
 
 3. The Vowel is short in the Future and Weak Aorist 
 Active and Middle, but long in the Perfect, Aorist Pas- 
 sive, and Verbal Adjective ofKa\i(o,Icall, icaXI(Tw, KiKXriKa, 
 Ik:X/;0jjv, K\r}r6g ; alviu), J^raise, has alvicra), yvEKa, yvWrjv, 
 alviTogy but Perf. Mid. rjvrtfxai. 
 
 4. iroOlu), I long for ; Trovtw, I toil ; and ^uw, / s^7^^, 
 fluctuate between the short and long vowels : TroOirTOfim 
 and 7ro6rj(jijj ; wovicrw, lTrovr\aafir]v ; Siiaw, Aor. Pass. IdvBriv, 
 
 Chap. XI. — Second Principal Conjugation, 
 or Verbs in jut. 
 
 Preliminary Observations. 
 
 § 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from 
 the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong 
 AoristStems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the 
 Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 
 
 The special terminations of this conjugation are : 
 
 1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient fit : ^j;-/i«, / say 
 (§ 226). 
 
 2. The 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient <n{v) (for ri) : 
 <prjm{v) (§ 226). 
 
 3. The 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. inserts the vowel a before the termi- 
 
 § 302. Dialects. — The Horn, dialect often has the ending aOa in the 
 2 -Sing. Ind. Act. : TiOrj-aOa, thou puttest ; i-<pri-a6a ; and fiEvai or fiev 
 instead of vai in the Inf. : ^d-fievai, (pd-fiev ; and a short v instead of 
 the (Tav of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite : i-^a-v. 
 
 The Horn, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj. 
 and shortens the Modal-vowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 398) : 'tofiev — 
 'jw/iEv (eamus). 
 
§ 304. SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 1^1 
 
 nation ai (for vn) (§ 226, compare Dialects), and this a is lengthened 
 by compensation (J-aai{v)^ they go, from the Stem /), and unites with 
 the a of the Stem : ^dm(v). 
 
 4. In the Optative, it] (le, i), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly 
 to the Stem: (pa-irj-v; compare § 293. 
 
 5. The 2 Sing. Imperat. has the ending 9i : (pd-Oi. ) ^oj^pare S 292. 
 G. The Infinit. has the ending vat : <pd-vai. ) 
 
 7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has aav : l-^d-aav (3 Plur. Imperf.). 
 
 All terminations of these two tenses are appended to 
 the Stem without a connecting vowel : (^ta-fiiv (compare 
 Ti/xa-o-fiev), (pa-TU) (compare Tifia-i-ru)) ; in the Participle, 
 also, vT attaches itself directly to the Stem : a-v r, of 
 which the Nom. is formed by the addition of o- : <f)ag ; 
 Stem So, ^ovg (compare § 147, l). In the Subjunctive 
 alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with 
 the long connecting vowels, as in the ordinary contracted 
 verbs (§ 243) : ^a-w, ^w ; ri-Bt-u), tl-9u) ; ^o-io-fiai, ^Cjfxai, 
 
 § 303. In the vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change 
 of quantity takes place in such a manner that vowels in 
 themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative 
 Active, a and e becoming r?, o w, and v v : (l>v-iuih ^ ^^Vy 
 Plur. i^ta-jxiv, £-0t?-v, Dflal t-(pa-TOv ; [f-^ij-v, / jplaced'], 
 Plur. t-Oe-jULEv ; ^HKvv-fii, I show, Plur. ^ukvv-h^v. 
 
 Obs. — Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially 
 noticed below. 
 
 § 304. All verbs in fxi are divided into 2 classes : 
 
 1. Those which in the Present join their terminations 
 directly to the Stem : ^rj-jui ; 
 
 2. Those which form the Present- Stem by adding vv to 
 the Pure Stem : ^uK-vv-fii, I show, Pure Stem 3 1 1 ic, Pres- 
 ent-Stem daiKvv. 
 
172 
 
 IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 
 
 305. 
 
 I. FiRgT Class of Verbs in jui. 
 
 §§ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs 
 are inserted on p. 124, fol. sqq. 
 
 § 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in jui are formed 
 
 §§ 305, 306. Dialects. — The following are Ionic secondary forms, 
 those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic. 
 
 Active. 
 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Ti-eri-aea di-doX-aOa, also Si-dol-g 
 
 3 " " " Ti-eu Si-Soi 
 
 3 Plur. " " Ti-eel(n(y) Si-domi(v) 
 also {7rpo)9tovm(y) 
 
 2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. di-Sio-Oi 
 Inf. Pres. TL-drj-fiBvai Si-dS-fiep 
 
 di-dov-vai 
 Imperf. 1 Sing. [i-Ti-Oe-a] [l-di-6ov-v] 
 
 3 « [l-Ti-Oe-e] 
 
 Middle. 
 
 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. [ri-0€-arai 5i-d6-arai 
 3 " Imperf. " 
 
 Pres. Part. n-dri-nwoQ 
 
 Active. 
 
 2 Aor. Ind. 3 Plur. 
 
 u a 
 
 " Subj. 1 Sing, ee'no [06a>] 
 
 2 " enyq OX OrjyQ dt^c 
 
 3 " Oeiy Sa)(n(v) or 
 
 6u)y(Ti{v) 
 " " 2 D. 
 
 " " 1 Plur. ekiofiEv or dojojxEv 
 
 Qdofiw 
 
 " " 3 
 " Inf. 
 
 [i-<rr^] 
 {Ka9)-i-aTa 
 
 [t-ora] 
 
 i-(TTe-aTai] 
 [i-aTs-aro] 
 
 tarav 
 ecrraffav 
 
 (TTTjyg 
 
 (TTrjirov (§ 302, D.) 
 (TTswfiev or 
 (TTeiofisv 
 
 [<TTE(0(Tl] 
 
 Oefxevai, Qkjxw dofievai, Sofiev arrifjievai 
 
 Middle. 
 " Ind. Wio, Wev (§ 37, D., 1) ' ^ 
 
 [Herod. irpogOrjKavTo'] 
 " Subj. [Oeajfiai] Oeiofiai 
 
 " Imper. 9eo, eev. 
 
§ 308. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IJT jUt, 173 
 
 after the First Principal Conjugation, as, e. ^., the 2 Sing. 
 Imperf. hiOng, the 3 Sing. hiOeif as if from the Stem riOs. 
 Ifl the Imperf., the forms i^/Souy, e^i^ovg, l^i^ov are the 
 only ones in use from the Stem dido; they are formed 
 in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (§ 243). 
 Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the sep- 
 arate verbs. 
 
 In the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. contraction is sometimes em- 
 ployed : TiOelmf didovm, 
 
 ■ In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending 6i is 
 dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to compensate 
 for it : dldov for dldoOi. 
 
 In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel i 
 only is dropped, and the remaining 6, according to § 67, is 
 changed to g : do-6i, dog, but (rrri-Oi, which only in com 
 pounds sometimes appears as <rra, e. g., Karacrra. 
 
 In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the 
 (T between the two vowels is preserved ; riOe-aai, TiOe-ao, 
 lTiOs-<To ; only the 2 Sing, of the Subj. is treated entirely 
 like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga- 
 tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the 
 other hand, the o- is thrown out, which gives rise to a con- 
 traction : t-Oe-ao, t-Oe-o, t-9ov ; Imper. Oe-ao, Oi-o, Sov, 
 
 Obs. — The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with 
 monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction, throw the accent as 
 a circumflex upon the last syllable : Trpo-9ov ; but Homer has 
 avv-9eo and Trepi-9ov. 
 
 § 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) distin- 
 guish the Present-Stein from the Pure Stem by redujpli- 
 cation, that is, the initial consonant with i is prefixed be- 
 fore the ^ Stem : do,dido; eE,riOe{^53h); i-<TTa for 
 ai-GTay according to § 60, h (compare Latin si-sto). In 
 like manner, the Stem y^paui the Pres. becomes Kt-x/oa 
 {Ki-xpv-fJ^iyJ^ ^<^^)i Tr\a and ttjoo, with the insertion of 
 a nasal, become tt i- /li-ttX a, iri- iJ.-7r pa {jrifXTr\r]fii, I fill ^ 
 7rifi7rpr)iuii, I hum) ; but avfi-irL-TT\r]-ixi, tfji-Tri-TrXri-fjii ; the 
 
174 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. § 309. 
 
 Stem £ becomes 'l-rj-jui, I send ; and, with the reduplication 
 within the Stem itself, ova becomes o-vi-vr)-ixiy I henefit. 
 
 § 309. The Deponents Svvafiai, I can ; tTricTTaixai, I understand ; Kpe- 
 fiafxai, I hang; together with the Aorists cTrpid/ij/v, I bought; ijvti- 
 fiT]v, 1 benefited^ withdraw the accent, even in the Subjunctive 
 and Optative, as far as possible from the end : dvviofiai, tm&raivTo 
 (compare i(Tru>fiai, laTdlvTo). 
 
 Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are : 
 
 § 310. The three Stems Ot {rW^iit), go (g/gw^t)^ and I 
 (V»]/it) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ica : Wr]Ka, f SwKa, 
 riKa, but in the Middle we find only i]Kafir]v. In the Sing, 
 of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead 
 of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural 
 of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the 
 Participles have the strong forms exclusively. 
 
 The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are 
 these: 
 
 Ind. Subj. Qut Mid. Wkunv 
 
 iOriKa Opt. eeirjv Subj. Owfiai 
 
 iQtiKag Imp. Bkq etc. 
 
 tOriKf.{v). Inf. BCivai 
 
 Wetov Part, edq 
 
 iOsTTJV 
 
 tOsfiev (seldom WljKanw) 
 Were ( " WfjKaTe) 
 tOecrav ( " WriKav). 
 
 § 311. 2. The roicgh breathing instead of the o- of the 
 Stem o- r a is also used in the Perf. (§ 60, h) : i-drrj-Ka for 
 (T£-(TTrj-Ka. On the shorter forms, forajufv, etc., see § 317, 4. 
 icTTij^tx), I shall sta7id, is a Third Future Active. The Per- 
 fects of Q £ and I are rWetKa, tiKa ; the same vowel also re- 
 mains in the Perf. Mid. Tidu^iai, Eifiai. The Stems g o and 
 ara leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor. 
 
 § 310. Dialects. — ^From the Stem d o Hom. has sometimes Fut. di- 
 Sia-(T(o instead of ddjau). 
 
§ 312. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN fxi. 175 
 
 Pass., and £ in the Aor. Pass. : ^i-^o-fiai, e^69r}v, IcTraOriv, 
 IriOrjv, TeOriaojuLai. On the meaning of the different forms 
 ofW»?/if, see §329,1. 
 
 § 312. To the First Class of the Verbs in fit there also 
 belong : 
 
 A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (compare *i(TTr)iii) : 
 
 1. ri-jui (compare Lat. d-io), I say, only in the Imperf. rjv, 
 3 Sing, r) (compare § 213, Ohs.). 
 
 2. 6'vi-vr}-fjiL (Stem ova,^ SOS), I benefit, Mid. ovivafxat 
 (§ S09), I have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. tjvrtfxrjv, wvrjao, 
 wvr}TO ; Opt. 6vaifjLr}v, Imperat. ovyicto, Inf. ovaaOaiy Fut. 
 ovYjCTii), bviidOfiai ; Aor. Pass. tJvriOrjv, 
 
 3. TrL-fX'-Tr\r]-fxi (Stem TrXa, § 308). Additional form, 
 irX^di), I Jill [Lat.^Z^-o], Fut. 7r\i](Tw, Perf. Mid. iriirXri- 
 (Tfiai, Aor. Pass. ettXtj^^t^v. 
 
 4. TTi-fi-irpri-fiL (Stem irpa). Additional form, irpriOtjj 
 (quite like 3). 
 
 5. (pri-juL (Stem <{) a), I say, 2 Sing. Imperf. ecjyrjaOa (enclitic 
 in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., compare § 92, 3). Imperat. 
 (paOi or (jidOi ; compare (paaKU), 324, 8. 
 
 6. xp^ (Stem X P «' XP^)' ^^^^ ^lust, Subj. xPVf ^P*' 
 Xpeivy Inf. xpvvai, Part. XP^^^ (only Neut. from xp^ov 
 according to § 3^7, D.). Imperf. IxP^^ ^^ XP^^> l^ut. xpn- 
 o-f t ; air 6 xpVf it suffices, also 3 Plur. airoxp^i^ f^t{v), etc., 
 as above awoxpcid)* 
 
 7. Ki-xp^'l^^ (Stem xp^9% 308), I lend. Inf. Kixpo,vai, 
 Fut. xpv<r^f ^or. £ X p »? o" a. Farther the deponents : 
 
 8. aya-fxai (Stem 'a y a), I admire, Fut. ayaaojiai, Aor. 
 Pass. i]7a(T0r]v, Verb. Adj. ayaaroc- 
 
 9. ^vva-fxai (Stem ^vva), I can, 2 Sing. Ind. ^vvy is rare 
 (§ 309), Imperf Idwdfxriv, 2 Sing. iSuvw, Fut. ^vvmofxai. 
 
 § 313. Dialects. — 3. Horn, has the Aor. TrX^ro, it was filled^ 3 Plur. 
 irXrivTO^ Opt. irXyfiTjv or TrXeifirjv, Imper. [f/x]7rXj;(70. 
 6. Herod. aTrtxpa. 
 8. Horn, dydofiai, dyaiofiai. 
 
176 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN juii, § 312. 
 
 Aor. IdvvriOrjv, seldom IdvvaaOriv. The Augment is fre- 
 quently 7} (§ 23456^^5.), Perf.'SfSvvTj/zatjVerb. Adj. ^vvarog, 
 capable, possible. 
 
 10. £7rfOTa-/zm (Stem tir kt to), I understand, 2 Sing. 
 tTTiaTaaai, Imperf. riTTKTTa/xrjVy i]iri<TT(jjf Fut. liriGTr]GOfxaiy 
 Aor. riTTKTTrjOriv, Verb. Adj. ImaTtiTog. 
 
 11. tpa-fiai (Stem Ipa), poetic, / love (commonly ipau)), 
 Aor. Pass. iipaaQriv, 
 
 12. Kpijua-fxai (Stem k pep, a), I hang (§ 309). Fut. icpc- 
 pr}(Topai, Aor. iKpspatrOriv, Additional forms, § 319, 2. 
 
 05s. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
 words : to 6i-fia, the position ; 6 do-rrjp, the giver; 1) ffrd-m-g, the 
 7^e ; ri 6vr]-(n-Q, the henejit^ from the Pure Verbal-Stem, differing 
 from the Present-Stem; ») tprj-firj^fd-ma, talk; 1) dvvaixi-g, power; 
 i} eTri(TTr}-firi, hnowledge, from the Verbal-Stem, which is the same 
 as that of the Present. 
 
 Dialects. — 13. Horn. d/xEvac, satiate, Stem d, Subj. iiofiev. 
 14, Stem (S a, Part. l3i(3dg, stepping. 
 
 14. h. Stem ^ e a, 3 Sing. Imperf diaro, seemed, Aor. dod-aaaro. 
 
 15. Stem t \ a, i\d(TKOfiai, iXdojiai, I am gracious, Hom. Imperat. 'i\r]9i. 
 
 16. Stem Ktpa (compare Kepdvvvfii,Imix), Hom. 3 Plur. Subj. Mid. 
 KEpiovrai. fifTo these belong also, in regard to the inflexion of the 
 Present-Stem, those Hom. verl^s which either are used only in the 
 Present-Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem by 
 affixing the syllable -va : 
 
 a) d dfi-vrj-fxi (also Safi-vd-ui), I tame. Mid. dd/x-va-fxai, Fut. ^afioio, 
 ^afidq.Q, Weak Aor. Inf ^andaai, daixd(Ta(T9ai, Perf ^edfiTJixai, Aor. Pass. 
 idnrjOrjv, dafidaOrjv, and Strong Aor. Pass, iddfiriv (Subj. Safieico). 
 
 h) Kipvijui (also Kepdvvvni, § 319, 1), J mix, Part. Kipvdg, 3 Sing. 
 Imperf kKipvd. Compare § 319, 1. 
 
 c) Kpr)}ivdp.ai, poetic additional form of Kpefia-fiai (12). Compare 
 also § 319, 2. 
 
 d) ndpvdp,ai,I contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. kiidpvdo. 
 
 e) Trkpvriiii,! sell, Part, irepvdg, Trepvafxevog. 
 
 f) TTiXvafiai,! approach. Stem tteX, Aor. 3 Sing. i-Tr\r]-To. 
 
 g) TriTvr]fii, I spread. Part. TriTvdg, Imperf TrirvavTo. Compare 
 319, 3. 
 
 h) (TKidvT]fii,I scatter, (TKidvarai. Compare § 319, 4. 
 
§ 313. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /m, 17? 
 
 § 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in e (compare Ti6r}iuii) : 
 1. t-?j-iut (Stem I, Present- Stem l-e, i. e., l-k, according to 
 § 308), / send. 
 
 Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. ia<n{v), Opt. hir}v (secondary forms 
 
 'ioi/ni, 3 Plur. mitv). 
 
 Imperf. tVv (secondary forms [touv], 'lug, Ui), Plur. 
 
 afxev, 3 Plur. u-dav, (k^ih and r](^Lu {a<^ii}fxi, 
 
 I send away). Compare § 240. 
 
 Aor. r\-K-a, rJKag, riKi{v), eiTOv, urr\v, UfX^v, alrf, al- 
 
 (yav. 
 Subj. w. Opt. ur]v, Imperat. tg. Inf. uvaiy Part, hq 
 (Stem I V r). On this Aor., compare § 310. 
 Fut. rjo-w, Perf. H-K-a, 
 Mid. Pres. 'i-e-fxai, I hasten, strive, Subj. tw/zat, ly, etc. 
 
 Opt. hifxriv (additional form loijuiriv), Imperat. 'leao 
 
 or tou, Imperf. T-ifiriv. 
 Aor. Eijurfv, eiao, elto, Subj. wfjiat, Opt. cY/zijv (addi- 
 tional form ofjurjv). 
 
 055. — The e I of the Ind. e'l-firip is caused by the Augment (§ 236), 
 that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 303, 4). 
 
 Fut. li-aofiai, Perf a-/iat, Plup. u-nr]v. 
 
 § 313. Dialects. — 1. Horn. 2 and 3 Sing. Pres. '/etc, Vei ; 3 Plur. iHm{v)', 
 1 Sing. Imperf. Vcij/, 'ihq^ 'Ui ; 3 Plur. 'lev, 3 Sing. Subj. 'Irjmiv) ; Inf. 
 t£/iex/ai ; Aor. Act. 'ir]Ka ; 3 Plur. 'iaav ; Subj. fVw ; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. tvTo. 
 
 2. Fut. i'jaoj and (aj/)£<Tw [Herod. nEfxErifievog, as a Part. Perf. of fjte- 
 Tir]iJii=:fiE9ir]fii, § 52, D., as if from ften'w, with irregular reduplica- 
 tion]. 
 
 Moreover : 
 
 3. Stem d{P)e, Pres. dr)ixi, I hlmc, 2 Dual drjrov, 3 Sing. Imperf dr] and 
 a£i, Inf. a^vai and dtj/xevai, Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. dtvTsg, Mid. drjixevog. 
 
 4. Stem ^t^, (ev) dieaav, they frightened ; dievrai, they flee ; Opt. ^t- 
 otro. 
 
 5. Stem ^i^€, diKrffJiai, additional fomi, ^i^oj,! seeJc; 2 Sing. ^I'^j/at, 
 Inf. diZT](r9ai, Fut. di^rjcrofiai. 
 
 6. Pres. Ktx»7/ii (compare § 322, 18), I obtain; Subj. /ctxet'w, Opt. ki- 
 X€t^v, Inf. Ktxfjvat, Part. Kix^ig, Mid. KLxnuevog. 
 
 Imperf. 2 Sing, t/ct'xei? , 3 Dual Kixhrriv. 
 
 H 2 
 
178 riKST CLASS OF VERBS IN fxi. § 314. 
 
 Aor. Pass. uOr^v, Subj. kOio. Yut. tOijaofjiai. 
 Verb. Adj. tTog, ltIoq. 
 2. St-Sr/-jut (Stem S £), / buid, a rare additional form of 
 ^i-w (§ 244, 1). 
 
 § 314. C) Verbs whose Stem ends in i : 
 
 1. el-fii (Stem i, Lat. i-re)^Igo. 
 Pres. Ind. €i-/ti i-/iEv Subj. i-w t-yf, etc. 
 
 eZ I-Tov i-re Opt. i-oirjv l-oig, etc. 
 
 €t-fft(j/) i-rov t-a(Tt(^') Imperat. i-9i i-rw, etc. 
 
 3 Plur. i-6vT(M)v or t-rwcrav 
 Inf. l-t-pai Part, j-toi/, i-ovcra, i-6v (Gen. i-ovr-og, compare Lat. 
 
 e-unt-is) 
 Imperf. yeiv or ya yEifiev or ynev 
 
 yEig " yeiffOa, yeiTov, yrov, yeire " ^re 
 yet " ysiv, ydrijv, yrrjv, ytaav 
 
 Verbal Adj. Wogy Iriog (additional form trrjrfcov, it is 
 
 necessary to go. 
 
 Obs. — The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future mean- 
 ing ; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect ; y is pro- 
 duced by the Augment preceding e t. 
 
 2. Ku-fxai (Stem Kei),I lie, has the Inflexion of a Per- 
 fect. 2 Sing. KH'crai, 3 Plur. Kttyrat, Subj. 3 Sing. Klrirai, 
 Opt. KtoiTO, Imperat. Keiao, Inf. KuaOai, Part. K^juevog ; the 
 compound irapaKUfiai, Inf. irapaKuadai. (Compare r\nai, 
 § 315, 2). 
 
 § 314. Dialects. — 1. Stem «', 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. ElaQa, Subj. Ir^aBa^ Irjmvy 
 1 Plur. 'iofiev, 'tofiEv, and 'tojfiev, Opt. lot, i'ei>^ or elrj, Inf. luEvai, Ifiw. 
 
 Imperf riia and 77/ov, 3 Sing. ijk{v) or t6(i;), 1 Plur. yo/xej/, 3 Plur. 
 »yVov, ii'iaav, with (rj;^, '/i£^', ttrav. 
 
 Fut. tlaofiai, Aor. Eiffdfiijv and hiaafiriv. 
 
 2. Stem icet, 3 Plur. Keiarai, KtaTui, keovtm, Imperf. Kdaro, ksuto 
 [jckrai = mrai]. Part. Fut. kswv, cuMturus, Inf KEikfiEv. 
 
 6 V is an Hom. Stem in 0, Pres. ovofiai, I vituperate, ovoffai, 3 Sing. 
 Opt. ovoiTo (§ 309), Fut. ovoffaofiai, Aor. tjvocrd^rjv, and, from the Stem 
 6 V, wvdfirjv. 
 
 p V or £ p V is an Hom. Stem in v, 3 Plur. elpvarai, tliey rescue, protect, 
 Inf. pvaOai, ipvaOai, elpi)fi€vog, Imperf. 2 Sing, tpvtro, 3 Plur. pvaro, kpvaro, 
 elpvvTo ; moreover. Inf. Act. elpvuevai, to draw ; Aor. Mid. pmuTo, he 
 rescued; kpvaoaTo, Tie drew. 
 
§ 315. FIRST CLASS OP VERBS IN juu. 179 
 
 Obs. — When compounded witn prepositions, KEifiat is almost iden- 
 tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass, of the corresponding com- 
 pounds of riOijfii : vTroriOrjiJit, I lay as a foundation ; viroKeiTai, it is 
 laid as a foundation. 
 
 § 315. D) Verbs whose Stem 'ends in a consonant (a) : 
 
 1. elfii (Stem I e, Lat. es-se),Iam. 
 Pres. Ind. d-fii (for Icrfii) ia-fisv 
 
 el (for iff-ai) la-Tov id-rk (es-tis) 
 
 t<T-Ti(y) (Lat. es-t) ia-Tov d-ai{v) 
 Subj. to a»/i€j/ Opt. drjv eirjfiEv OF Bifiev 
 
 yg i]Tov i/TE £ij/c elriTov or drov elrjTe or drs 
 
 y ijTOV w(n{v) sir) drjrrjv or drrjv drjaav or dev 
 
 Imperat. i(t9l tarov tare Inf. dvai 
 
 iaTU) i<TT(>)v i(TT(t)(Tav Part, wp ovffa ov (Stem ovt) 
 
 (Lat. esto) eorwj/, ovtujv 
 Imperf. riv or /} r;/iev 
 
 i]rr9a 7j<ttov or r]TOv ijre or ^ore 
 ijv i'i(TTr]v or i]TT]v fjeap ^ . 
 
 Imperf. Mid. i]\ni\v (rare) 
 
 Fut. iaofiai, 3 Sing, tcrrai • 
 
 Verb. Adj. karkov. 
 
 Obs. — 1. The loss of the rr of the Stem is compensated for by the 
 vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (§ 42) : tj'/ii for t <r;ti, in the 
 2 Sing. 61 for tai, which has arisen from the laai preserved in 
 Homer (compare §§ 49, 61, &). In the 3 Sing, the original end- 
 ing n is retained: tort (i/), the 3 Plur. has €/(ri(v), from la-vn. 
 The Subj. <u stands for Iw (Hom.), from iai» ; the Opt. dj]v for 
 
 § 315. Dialects. — I(mic additUmal forms : 2 Sing, la-ai or dg, 1 Plur. 
 dfikv, 3 Plur. ta(Ti{v) ; iam is also enclitic, but not taai{v). 
 
 Subj. 1 Sing, tw, etw, 2 Sing, tj/e, 3 Sing. tr](Ti{v), ri<n{v^, iy, 3 Plur. 
 iio(n{v). 
 
 Opt. also tote, coi, 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. tarro, 3 Act. tarw, 3 Plur. 
 
 t<TT(i)V. 
 
 Inf. tfifievai (for t<T-fievai), infiev, i/xevaij tfiev. 
 
 Part, iwv, eovcTa, toy (Stem £ V r). 
 
 Imperf. 1 Sing, rju, ia, tov ; 2 Sing. tj;(T0a [tag'], 3 Sing, »}«;, tj^y, ffriv 
 
 [2 ;^r. tare], 3'Plur. taav] 3 Plur. Mid. etaro (//vro). 
 Fut. tfffTOfiai, 3 Sing, torerai, taaeraij loadrai (§ 264), 
 
 2. From ^/tat, 3 Plur. tarat, darai, Imperf. taro, eVaro. 
 
 3. Inf. tSfievai, to m^,Pres, ttrOu), iaOik), t^w [Lat, es-tis=ieditis]. Com- 
 
 pare § 327, 4. 
 
 4. 2 Plur, Imperf <i>epTe = (pepEve, bring [Lat./er^e], 
 
180 
 
 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN /xt. 
 
 §316. 
 
 t(T-irjv, as the Inf. Elvai for id-vai ; uiv for kojv (Horn.), from ea-wv. 
 In the Imperf the Dual has most fully preserved the (t. 
 
 Obs. 2. — Eifxi is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 3 Sing, el (com- 
 pare § 92, 3) ; iaTi is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or 
 means the same, as t^etrrt, " it is possible,''^ as well as at the begin- 
 ning of a sentence and after the particles ov, fit], ei, wc, Kai : tcm 
 Oeog, there is a God; ovk taTi, it is not possible. When merely ex- 
 ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (§ 93, c), l<TTi(v) is 
 oxytone : (piXog 1<ttIv Ijxov, he is mp friend. 
 
 Ols. 3. — In the compounds of dfil the accent remains on the Stem- 
 syllable ; e. g.^ in the Imperf. Trajoijv, in the Subj. and Opt. dTrw, 
 dTrelev, in the Inf and Part. dTrelvai, irapojv^ in the 3 Sing. Fut. 
 TrapkaTai. 
 
 2. riiiai (Stem 
 
 7] g),Isit, has, like Kei/mai, the Inflexion of 
 
 a Perfect. 
 
 
 Pres. rifxai 
 
 tijueOov riiiiQa ' Imperat. t^go. 
 
 rjaai 
 
 rjaOov rjads riaOu), etc. 
 
 rjarai 
 
 rjaOov rjvraL Inf. ^(rOai, 
 
 ' 
 
 Part. rtfievog. 
 
 Impf. rijULriv rjcro, etc. 
 
 In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the compound 
 KaOri/uLai, of which 3 Sing. KaOriTai, Subj. KaOw/iai, Opt. jca- 
 Ooifir]v, 3 Plur. Kadoivro, Imperat. KuOricro or kuOov (from 
 KaOeao), Inf. KaOriaOaL, Part. KaOijfJievogf Imperf. lKaQr]fxr]v 
 (§ 240) or KaSrifirjv, 3 Sing. iKaOr)To or KaOriGTO, 3 Plur. 
 EKa6r)VTO or KaOrjvro. 
 
 § 316. The following Strong Aorists, formed without a 
 connecting vowel from verbs whose Present- Stem mostly 
 follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong to 
 the First Class of Verbs in ju t ; 
 
 Stems in a, 
 
 1. £-j3rj-v (Stem /3 a), Pres. f^aivii), I go, Impl^t. j3^0f ; 
 in compounds also /3a {Kara^a), Inf. jS^vat, Part. jSac- 
 
 § 316. Dialects. — 1. 3 Plur. t/3av, Subj. jSet'w, ^riy or /3£t'y, ^uofiiv [Her. 
 /Stwjuev], Inf. (Srjfxevai. 
 
§ 316. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IJ^^ fil. 181 
 
 2. yr)pa-vai (Stem yn pa), Inf. to the Pres. yrjpa-CFKU), I 
 grow old, § 324, i. 
 
 3. h^pa-v (Stitoi ^pa), Pres. gi-g|oa-<TKw, § 324, 2, 1 run, 
 Inf. ^pa-vaif Part. ^pag. 
 
 4. t'-Kra-v (Stem k r a), Pres. jcre/vw, / ^^7Z, Part, icra-c. 
 Pari Mid. ktcl-ji^voq {killed), 
 
 5. £-7rrr]-v (Stem Trra, Trrf), Pres. irtTOimai, I Jly, Part. 
 TTTag, Mid. irrajuLevog, Inf. irriadaL. 
 
 6. e-rXr^-y (Stem t\ a), I endured, Subj. rXw,Opt. rXanjv, 
 Imperat. TX»i0f, Inf. rXf/vat, Fut. TXritjoiuai, Perf. TtrXr^ica 
 (§ 317, D., 10). 
 
 7. £-<^0r?-v (Stem a), Pres. (pOavw, I anticipate, Inf. 
 ^Orfvai. 
 
 8. l-Trpid-juriv (Stem tt jO t a),I hought, Imperat. 7r/otfi>. 
 
 Sterns in c. 
 
 9. €-ffj3r?-v (Stem (rj3f), Pres. a^ivvviii, I quench, § 319, 
 7, Inf. (rj3»}vat. 
 
 10. E-cTJcXn-v (Stem (tkXc), Pres. ctkeXXw, / dry, Inf. 
 (7»cXfiva«. 
 
 11. Imperat. crx^-g, from o"X£-0t (Stem gx^), Pres. t'x^, 
 § 327, 6, 1 Sing. Ind. t-ax-o-v. 
 
 Stems in (i), 
 
 12. i-a\(i)-v (Stem a\(i)),I was caught, Pres. akiaKo^at 
 (§ 324, 17), Opt. aXoirjv, Inf. aXC}vai, Part. aXovg. 
 
 13. £-j3t(u-v (Stem j3 f w), Pres. j3tow, / ^^^^, Opt. jSfoJr^y, 
 Inf. (5iu)vai, Part, jdiovg. 
 
 Dialects. — 2. Part, yj^pac 
 
 3. [Her. tdprjv.] 
 
 4. 3 Sing. tKTci, 3 Plur. tKrav, Subj. nrkiafiw, Inf. /cra/wevat, Mid. tfcraro 
 ^e icas M^, § 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. tKrdOep. 
 
 5. Mid. tTTTCLTO, Subj. TTTrJTai, DoP. 1 Siug. Act. £7rrar. 
 
 6. 3 Plur. trXdv. 
 
 7. Subj. 3 Sing. tpOrfy or ^0»7(rt(v), {Trapa)^9air](n{v)^ 1 Plur. (p9s(o/iEv, 
 12. j^Xwv, Subj. dXww, Opt. 3 Sing. dXoi)/, Inf. dXiofxevai. 
 
182 FIKST CLASS OF VERBS IN jUf. § 316. 
 
 14. e-yv(i)-v (Stem y v lo), Pres. yi-yvM-aKw, I come to 
 hnow (§ 324, 14), Opt. yvoiriv, Imperat. yvCjOt, Inf. yvwvai, 
 Part. yvovQ. ^ 
 
 Stems in i, 
 
 15. Imperat. ttI-Ql (Stem tt t), Pres. Trivw^Idrink, 1 Sing. 
 Aor. Ind. 'imov (§ 321, 4). 
 
 Stems in v, 
 
 16. i-^v'v (Stem 8v), Pres. ^vw,! dive, Imperat. ^vOi, 
 Inf. Svvae, Part. Sac. As to its meaning, see § 329, 4. 
 
 17. e-<f)v-v (Stem (pv), I became, Ties, (pvw, I produce, 
 Inf. ijivvat. 
 
 Dialects. — 14. Subj. yj/wa>, Inf. yvwfxevai, 
 
 15. Imperat. vie. 
 
 16. 3 Plur. idv-v, Subj. ^ow, ^u^e, 3 Sing. Opt. Un (from ^w-tq), Inf. 
 
 17. 3 Plur. ^vp. 
 
 Besides these, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect : 
 
 18. Part, dirovpag, Pres. d-Kavpcua^I take away. 
 
 19. Stem /3 \ j;, Pres. /3a\Xa>, I throw ^ 3 Dual ^vfi(3\riTT}v (met together)^ 
 Fut. ^vfi(3Xri(T0fiai, Mid. t/SXj^ro (w)as ?dt, § 255, D. 2), Subj. (iXij-e-Tai, 2 
 Sing. Opt. (3XeTo, Inf (iXrjaOai, Part. l3Xf]fievog (hit). 
 
 20. Stem o i' r a, Pres. ovrdio, I wound, 3 Sing, ovra, Inf. ovrdfievai, 
 Part. Mid. ovrd/xevog (wounded), Yerh. Adj. ouraro?. 
 
 21. Stem TT r a, Pres. Trrfjcraio, I stoop, 2 Dual i-irTrj-Tijv, Part. Perf. 
 
 22. Stem tt X a, Pres. TreXa^w, / approach, Aor. Mid. TrXrjTo. 
 
 23. Stem /3|[> w, Pres. (3i-^pib-(TKb}, I eat (§ 324, 13), Aor. e/3pwv. 
 
 24. Stem ttX w, Pres. ttXwu), I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. eirXbjg, Part. 7rXb)-g. 
 
 25. Stem icrt, Pres. fcW^w, I found, Part. Aor. Mid. tv-Kri-fievog (well- 
 founded). 
 
 26. Stem ^ 1, Pres. <peiv(o,Iwa8te away, Subj. Aor. Mid. (peierai, Opt. 
 tpOifxrjv, (pQlTO, Inf. (pOicrOai, Part. (^Bi^Evog. 
 
 27. Stem kXv, Pres. kXvio, I hear, Imperat. Aor. /cXwOt or kekXvOi, kXvtb 
 or KEfcXure. 
 
 28. Stem X u, Pres. Xww, 7 Z^J^se, Aor. Mid. XvfiTjv, Xvto or Xwro. 
 
 29. Stem ttw, Pres. ttvew, / hreathe, Aor. Mid. afiirvvTo (he recm&fed 
 Irreath). 
 
 30. Stem <ru, Pres. cevu),! scare, Aor. Mid. o-yro, Part, avfiwog. 
 
 31. Stem xi^, Pres. x«w, /^(mr (§ 248), Aor. Mid. txvro, x^ro, Part. 
 XVfiEvog. 
 
§ 317. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN jui, 183 
 
 § 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without a 
 connecting vowel : 
 
 A) Vowel Stems. 
 
 A number of Vowel- Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind. 
 Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the Perfect 
 and Pluperf. Ind., in the other moods, and in the Infinitive 
 and Participle, may connect the endings immediately with 
 the Perfect- Stem. 
 
 1. Stem /3 a, Pres. jSatW, I go (§ 321, l). 
 
 Perf. Ind . f3i(5r}K-a /Bf/ia-jucv 
 
 j3£j3»j»c-ac /3 £ j3 a -TO V )3£j3a-T£ 
 f3ij3r]K-£ f5ij5a-TOV /3£j3a-o-£(v) 
 
 3 Plur. Subj. /3£j3w(Ti(v), Part. /Bt/Bwc, jStjSwaa, Gen. 
 /BtjSwroc. 
 
 2. Stem y a (for y a v), Pres. ytyvofiat, I become, Perf 
 76-70 v-a, Plur. also yi-ya-fitv (§ 327, 14), Part, yaytjg, 
 Gen. ytywTOQ. 
 
 Dialects. — 32. Stem dX (a\Xo/iai,/8pnwg'), Aor. Mid. dX(ro,a\ro, Subj. 
 uXerai, Part. dX/xevog. 
 
 33. Stem yev, only in yevro, he took. 
 
 34. Stem ^cx (Pres. Bkxoiiat, I accept), Aor. idsyfirjv, 3 Sing. ^£<cro,Im- 
 perat. Ss^o, Inf. ^ix^"* (compare § 273, D.). 
 
 35. Stem Xey (Xkyio, I collect), Aor. Mid. Xekto, he counted. 
 
 36. Stem Xex (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. Xekto (he laid ^mseZ/"), Imperat. 
 Xs^o, Inf. Xsx9ai, Part. {KaTa)XeyixEvog, Aor. Act. tXe^a, Mid. cXe^aro, Fut. 
 Xe^o/iat. 
 
 37. Stem fi i y, Pres. /utVyw, J mia;, Aor. Mid. ifUKTo, fUKTo. 
 
 38. Stem dp, opwui,! excite, Aor. Mid. wpro, Imperat. opao or opaco 
 (ppfTev), Inf. opOai, Part, opfisvog. 
 
 39. Stem Tray {Trfiyvvfii,IJix), Aor. Mid. tTrriKTo,it was fixed. 
 
 40. Stem TraX (7rdXX(o,Iwield), Aor. Mid. TrdXro. 
 
 41. Stem TTcpO {irep9oj,I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. irkpQai {to ie de- 
 stroyed). 
 
 To these are to be added the Participles which have become Ad- 
 jectives, dfffievog, glad (Stem dd, dvddv<t>, I please); iKfievog, favorable 
 (Stem t K, iKveofiai, I come). 
 
 § 317. Dialects. — 1. Hom. 3 Plur. pe(3aa(Ti(v), Part. (5e(3awg, Dual (3e- 
 /3a aire. 
 
 2. Hom. 3 Plur. yey ad<Ti{v), Part, yeyawf, ycyavTa, Gen. yey aCjTog, 3 
 Dual Plup. (kK)yeyari]v. 
 
184 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN fit, § 317. 
 
 3. Stem Ova, Pres. Ovr}-(TKio, I die, Perf. rc-^vrj-jca, Plur. 
 ri-Ova-fiev, etc. , Inf. reOv avai. Part. rtOvewg, reOveCjaa, 
 TtdviOQ, Pluperf. 3 Plur. eTiOvaaav (§ 324, 4). 
 
 . 4. Stem (TTu, Pres. '['(ttyi-iul, Perf. t-arrj-Ka,! stand, Plur. 
 t-cTTa-iuev, Subj. Iotw/xev, idTLJcriiy), Opt. loratr/v, Imperat. 
 taraOi, tcTTaTio, iCTTCiTOVf torrarf. Inf. I or a vat. Part. k<jTWQ, 
 iaruxra, tcfrogyQen. e(TTLJTog, 3 Plur. Pluperf. f orao-a v 
 (§ 306, etc.). 
 
 5. Stem gf, Perf. gt'-gi-a or g^gof-ica, //^«7', Plur. ^i^L- 
 fxiv, Zi-'^iaaiiy), Subj. StStw, Opt. SeStftrjv, Imperat. ^i^iOt, 
 Inf. SfgfE'va^ Part. SfgitT^c, Pluperf. Egegt'ftv, 3 Dual k^^^lmv, 
 3 Plur. i^k^taav, also Aor. c^ftaa, Fut. ddaojuLai. 
 
 Obs. — The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use. 
 
 B) Consonant Stems, 
 
 In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (§ 303) and 
 consonants (§§ 45-49) must be observed. 
 
 6. Stem IB (Aor. ddov,Isaw, § 327, 8). 
 
 Perf. Ind. old -a, I hnow, lar-fxev, Subj. siSio ddujfxev 
 
 di-oQa la-Tov iff -re eiSyc ddiJTOV sidijre 
 
 oIS-e{v) iff-TOV iff-affi(v) Sidy eidfJTOV eida)ffi(v) 
 
 Oj)t. eldeirjv, Imp. iff-6i ia-rov iff -re Inf. eidtvai 
 
 iff-ru) Iff- rwv iff-rojffav Part, ddtjg, elSvia, 
 
 eidog, Gen. eiSor-og 
 
 Plup. ydeiv or ySij (IMew) ySeifiev or yffnev 
 
 ydeiffOa " ySrjffOa ydeirov or yffrov ySeire " yffre 
 
 ydei{v) " ydr) ydeirrjv " yffrrjv ydeffav " yffav 
 
 Fut. £t(TOjuai, Verb. Adj. hrhv. 
 
 Dialects. — 3. Imperat. rkOvaOi, Inf. re9vdfiev(ai), Gen. Part. reOvsCirog, 
 reOvTjoJrog, reOvsiwrog, re9vi]6rog, reOveiSrog, Fem. reOvrjvla. 
 
 4. 2 Plur. Ind. also 'iffriire, Part, iffracjg, Gen. iffraSrog [Her. cfrrewf, 
 i(rrew(ra]. ^ 
 
 5. ^et^ta, deidi/xev, Imperat. SeidiOi, 1 Sing. Perf. also SeidoiKa, Aor. t^- 
 ^£t(Ta (compare § 77, D.). 
 
 6. 1 Plur. "id-fiev [Herod, and sometimes also in Att. writers oldajxev, 
 3 Plur. oldaffi], Subj. eidkoj or Idstj, Plur. eldofiev, eidere^ Inf. iSnev{ai), 
 Fem. Part. j'^uTa, Plup. [y^ea] jyet^Tje, V^e€(v) or rieidr] [2 Plur. y'^lare], 3 
 Plur. to-a j^, Fut. ei^^crw. 
 
§ 318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fit. 185 
 
 Obs. — Besides olaOa^ we rarely have oUag, more fr^uently ydeig, 
 ySrjQ, together "with yhiaQa, and ydefxev, ydsTs, instead of .ijdeifiev, 
 ySeiTS. 
 
 7. Stem t K, only in the Perf. toiKa,! resemble^ appear, 
 1 Plur. poet. coty/xEv, 3 Plur. quite irregularly A^a(FL{v) 
 (compare '[(raai), Inf. HKtvai (poet, with loiKivai), Part. elKtjg 
 (with loiK(x)g), tiKvXa, eiKog, Plur. It^jjcEtv. 
 
 8. Stem Kpay, Pres. Kpa^o), I cry^ Perf. KUpaya, Im- 
 perat. Ke-Kpax'Oi. 
 
 11. Second Class of Verbs in /it. 
 § 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in jui belongs 
 to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of the 
 
 Dialects. — 7. Imperf. eZicc, Perf. [Her. olKa, oIkwq], Dual uktov, 3 Dual 
 Plup. etKTT]v, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. tjIkto or ukto. 
 Besides : 
 
 9. Stem /i a, 2 Dual Perf. nefidrov, strive, fisficifiev, fikfiare, fiindd<n, Im- 
 perat. fn^aTio, Part, fnfiaibg, via, 6g, Gen. wrog, 3 Plur. Plup. fikfidfrav. 
 
 10. Stem rXa, Perf. TsrkrjKa,! am patient, 1 Plur. TETXa/xev, Opt. te- 
 rXaiTjv, Imperat. TerXaOi, Inf. rETXafiev{ai), Part. TerXrjwg, rjvla, Gen. re- 
 rXfjoTog. 
 
 11. Stem avfa>7, Perf. dvioya,! command, 1 Plur. dvojyfiev, Imperat. 
 dvoJxOi, 3 Sing. dvoJxOio, 3 Plur. dv(ox9e, Plup. ?)va>yea. 
 
 12. Stem eyep, Perf. iyp-riyop-a, I am awaJce, 2 Plur. Imperat. fcypi^- 
 yop9e, 3 Plur. Ind. kypr}y6pQd<n(y). 
 
 13. Stem £\i;0, Perf eiXrjXovOa, I have come, 1 Plur. elXrjXovOfiev. 
 
 14. Stem 7r6v0, Perf 7r£7rov0a (Pres.'Tradxwj/swjf^r, § 327, 9), 2 Plur. 
 TrkTzoaQe (for 7r67roi^0-r£), Fem. Part. TrSTrdOvXa. 
 
 15. Stem 7rt0, Perf irkiroLQa (Pres. TrdQco, I persuade), 1 Plur. Plup. 
 eTTSTTiOnev, Imperat. ttettektOi. 
 
 Farther the Participles : 
 
 16. Stem 13 pu} (fii(ipu)aK(o,I eat, § '324, 13), Part. Perf ^t^pwg, Gen. 
 (iifiphJTog. 
 
 17. Stem TTTE, TTTio (TTtVrw, I fall, § 327, 15), Perf TrtirrwKa, Part. 
 Gen. irtwTEGJTog, Nom. TreTrrwf . 
 
 § 318. Dialects. — Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -v<ti{v), together with 
 -vdai{v). Hom. 2 Sing. Imperat. -v and -iiBi (daivv, ofivvOi), Inf 
 Hom. -vfievai, vfiEv (ZevyvvfiEv). Hom. forms from Saivvfiai,Ifeast, 
 the Opt. daivvTo, for daiw-i-ro. Similar cases see below, § 319, 32. In 
 
186 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fii. § 319. 
 
 Present-zStSn. The Present- Stem of this Second Class is 
 formed by adding the syllable v v to the Pure Stem. 
 
 2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules in 
 § 303, hence 8ftKvvjut, but l^dKvv/iev. 
 
 3. Yowel- Stems double v in the Present- Stem : Stem 
 K epa, Kipa-vvvfii, I 'inix, 
 
 4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use ac- 
 cording to the First Principal Conjugation (^uKvvtS), espe- 
 cially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. : ^uKvvovai{v) ; and these 
 forms are exclusively used in the Pres. Subj. and Opt. 
 
 5. Most of the Verbs of this class have the Weak Aor- 
 ist; only a^ivvv\xi, I quench (Stem o- j3 c), forms the 2 Aor- 
 ist cajSrjv, Inf. (j^r\vm. Compare §§ 316, 9; 319, 7. 
 
 The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on 
 p. 128. 
 
 § 319. The following verbs belong to the Second Class 
 of Verbs in /* ( : 
 
 Stems in a, 
 
 1. Kepdvvvfit (Stem Kipa, Kpd)ylmix. 
 
 Aor. tKkpdaa Perf. Act. dKpdKa . p ( UpaOriv 
 
 " Mid. KBKpdfiai ' ' I lKepd<T9t]v 
 
 2. Kpendvvvfii (Stem Kpefia)/l Mng, trans. Mid. Kpenafiai, I hang^ 
 
 intrans. (§ 313, 12) 
 Fut. Kp^iiCj (§ 263) UpefiaffOriv 
 
 Aor. tKpefidaa 
 
 3. TCETavvvfii (Stem TTETay,! spread. 
 
 Trerw (§ 263) t7r£ra(r0j;v 
 
 iTrerdaa 7re7r(€)ra/iat [pate-o] 
 
 4. (TKEdavvvfii (Stem crfce^a),/ scatter; additional form (TKiSvTjfit 
 
 (§ 312, D. 16, 7i) 
 CKeda (§ 263) IffKidaffOriv 
 
 l<TKkdd(Ta IffKBdaff/iai. 
 
 the New-Ion. Dialect the t of the Stem deiKis lost in SeKo), tSeKa, de- 
 deyfiai, IdexOrfv ; Hom. Pf. (deideyfiai, I salute) 3 Plur. deidexarai. 
 
 § 319. Dialects.— 1. Compare § 312, D. 16, and § 312, D. 16, 5. Other 
 forms : Kepdio, Kepaiw, Aor. iKprjtra. 
 2. Fut. Kpefiou), KpsfidffQ (§ 243, D.). 
 
§319. 
 
 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN fil. 
 
 187 
 
 Stem§ in e. 
 Obs. — Several of these Stems originally ended in q. 
 5. 'ivvvfii (Stem originally Peg, compare Lat. ves-tis)^ I clothe (only 
 
 dfKpi-evvvm is in use). 
 dfi(pi-u> (§ 263) 
 
 Fut. Mid. dfupi-eaofiai i^fi(piE(Tfiai 
 
 Aor. i)fi(pi-£<Ta (§ 240) 
 Inf. Aor. Mid. linkaaaQai 
 
 Q.Kopevvvfit {Stem. Kope), I satisfy. 
 
 tKopeaa tKopeaOijv 
 
 KfKopecrfiai 
 
 7. (TJSevvvjxi (Stem a ^e), I quench. 
 
 f''''^ Uransitive '<^^^<^/^«* l<r(3e<rer,v 
 
 tajSecea ) 
 
 t<TJir]v ia^riKa \ 
 
 (§ 316, 9) \ intransitive (§ 329, 5) 
 
 Fut. a(ir]<JO{xai ) 
 
 8. aTopkvvvfii (Stem ffTope) (compare 11 and 25)^1 ^ead 
 
 (compare Lat. ster-n-o) 
 (TTOpCJ (§ 263). iaropecTixat 
 
 laropeaa. 
 
 Stems in (X), 
 (Stem K(t)),Igh'd, 
 
 lZ,w(ydfir\v 
 
 (Stem pio),I strengthen. 
 
 tppojfiai (lam stroTig) tppaxrOijv 
 (Stem orrpw). Compare No. 8. 
 
 iarpojfxai larptoQijv 
 
 9. ^(OVVVfll 
 
 tlwaa (Mid.) 
 
 10. pwvvviii 
 
 pU)(T(t) 
 
 11. (Trptovpvixt 
 
 (TTpbtfflO 
 t<TTpiO(Ta 
 
 12. XQ'^^^^H-'- 
 
 fXpiotra 
 
 13. ayvvfti 
 
 dXio 
 
 taKa (§ 237) 
 
 ixpii)(TBiiv. 
 
 (Stem xp<^)i^ co^' 
 KSxp(o<Tnai 
 
 Consonant-Stems. 
 (Stem d y, originally Pay, § 34, D.), I hreah 
 tdya (I am l)roken) Idyriv 
 
 (§ 375, 2) 
 
 Dialects. — 5. Imperf. ^Ivvov for 1<t-vvov [Inf. Pres. dwaOai], Fut. dfx- 
 0i£(T(u, eWw, Aor. eWa, Mid. isffaaTO, Perf. Mid. el/iat, tWat, Part, dfikvog, 
 2 Sing. Plup. tWo, 3 Sing, 'iaro, haro, 3 Plur. eVaro. 
 
 6. Aor. Mid. Kopkaaaro, Part. Perf. Act. KeKoprjutg, satiated, Mid. keko- 
 prjfiai. 
 
 13. ^^a with ia^a [Her. Perf. tj;7a]. 
 
18^ 
 
 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN jut. § 319. 
 
 14. ^£iKvy/At, see § 318. 
 
 15. e'lpyvvfii (Stem eipy),I shut in (addit. form e'lpyuj) 
 
 ^ip^^ tipxOTjv 
 
 elp^a Part, ep^ag, dpyfiai 
 
 16. l^vyvvixi (Stem Kvy),IUnd. 
 
 Kev^u) ilvyriv 
 
 tZev^a iZevyfiai [t^evxOtjv] 
 
 17. KTivvvfii (Stem K r 6 v) , / killj with (cretVw (§253) 
 
 18. fiiyvvfii (Stem /iiy),/w^ with /liayw (§ 327,*7) 
 
 /xi^w /^£/itX« ( IfiixOrjv 
 
 t^iiKa fisfiiyfiai \ ijxiyrjv 
 
 19. olyvvjxi (Stem o I y) , / 6>j9eyi (with o 7 y w) 
 
 ot^w l<^X« and t<^ya (§ 279) it^x'^nv 
 
 ey^a (§ 237) ti^yiiai 
 
 20. oXXvfii (Stem 6X and 6X6),for 6Xwfii,Ii 
 
 6\w (§ 262) oXtiXem (§ 275, 1) 
 
 wXeca 
 Fut. Mid. oXovfiai oXioXa 
 
 .. , , in trans., //)ms^. 
 
 0)X0flT]V ) -^ 
 
 21. ofxvvfii (Stem 6fi, 6}x6)^I swear. 
 
 ofiovfxai (Act.) ofiwuoKa (§ 275, 1) wfioaQrjv 
 
 wfxoaa g-gjjjg pgj.f jyjij I ofubfioTai Verb. Adj. (dv)w/toroe 
 
 ( 6lXb)fiO(TTai 
 
 22. ofiopywui (Stem bfiopy)^! wipe out. 
 
 w/xopKa (Mid.) wfiopx&vv 
 
 23. w^yvvfii (Stem tt a y), /^;i; [compare Lat. pango] 
 
 .iirrj^a TrsTrijya {I am fixed) \ t7rrix9r]v 
 
 i tTrdytjv 
 
 24. (6//yvv/ii (Stem pay), J ^mr. 
 
 f |0j6;;?a (Mid.) eppojya (I am tom) kppdyrjv 
 
 (§ 278) payrjaofiai 
 
 25. (TTopvvfxi (Stem trrop), with <TTopkvvvfii (8) and ffTp^vvv/xi (1 1) 
 
 26. ^pdyvvfii (Stem <ppay), also (pdpyvvfiij and, according to 
 
 Class 4, a, ^pdatro), I shut in, lock in. 
 
 Dialects. — 15. Imperf. lepyvv, with Upycj [epyo], 3 Pliir. Perf. Mid. 
 epxarai, Plup. tpx^''^ (§ 287), Part. Perf. kpyfikvog, Aor. Pass. IpxQtig, 
 with Imperf. tpyaOov. 
 
 18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37. 
 
 19. wV^a, ^^a [avot^a], Imperf, wiyvvvTO. 
 
 20. 6Xs<T(T(jj [oXew], Part. Aor. oyXd/xevof (^Z^s^rwc^i^e), with 6Xk-a>. 
 
 21. wfiotTcra or bfioaaa. 
 To these also belong : 
 
 27. aivvfiai, aTToaivvfiaij I talce away, used only in the Pres. 
 
320. IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 
 
 Obs. — Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as : ij SeX^t-c, 
 the announcement; 6 Kpd-rrjp, tTie mixing howl; rb El-fxa^ the clothing 
 — for Pea-fxa ; r) ^w-vt/, tlie girdle; rj pw-/f»/, the strength ; to arpu>-fia, 
 the carpet; to Z,vy-6-v,the yoke; 6 6Xe-9po-Q,the ruin; 6 avv-iofio- 
 Tr}-Q,the conspirator; 6 Trdy-o-g, the frosty h^ar-frostr 
 
 Chap. Xlt. — Irregular Verbs of the First 
 Principal Conjugation. 
 
 § 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con- 
 sist in the Present- Stem differing from the Verbal- Stem in 
 a way different from that which has been pointed out above, 
 § 245, etc. To the four classes there enumerated the fol- 
 lowing four classes are to be added. 
 
 Obs. — In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms 
 only are given, fi-om which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.), 
 added to a tense, denotes that, in addition to the Active, the 
 
 Dialects. — 28. dwni (and dvv(x)), I complete, only Imperf Mid. i)vvto. 
 
 29. apvvfiai, I acquire, Aor. i^pSfiriv, Inf. dpeaOai, 1 Aor. 2 Sing, iipao, 
 3 Sing. TjpaTo. 
 
 30. dxvv^ai, I grieve, Aor. dKdxovTo (§ 257, D.), Perf. dKdxrjfJiai (§ 275, 
 1), 3 Plur. dKTjx^daTai (§ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. dKuxduTo, Part. dKaxn- 
 fievog and dKrjxsfieuog. Moreover, the Active a/caxiZw (/ grieve), Aor. 
 ■^Kaxov and dKdxr](Ta (compare § 326). 
 
 31. ydvvfiai, J rejoice, Fut. yavvaa^Tai. 
 
 32. daivvm, I entertain. Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. daivvTo (§ 318, D.), 3 
 Plur. daivvuT, Fut. dai(T(o (Mid.), Aor. iSaiaa (Mid.). 
 
 33. Kaivvfjiai (Stem Kad), I Surpass, Perf. KSKatrfiai (I am distin- 
 
 34. Kivvfiai, I move, additional form of ictvlw, Preterite i-Ki-o-v,Iwent, 
 Subj. Ki-cj, Opt. Ki-oi-fii, Part, ki-wv. 
 
 35. Tivvfii, Tivvfxai, additional form of nVw, § 321, D. 5. 
 
 36. opeyvvfii, additional form of dpsycj, I stretch out, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid. 
 opwpex"^"* (§ 287). 
 
 37. opvvfxi (Stem 6 p), I excite, Fut. opaio, Aor. wpopov (§ 257, D.), 
 Perf. opojpa (§ 275, 1), I have arisen [Lat. or-ior], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. JjpTo, 
 arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. 6pa»p-e-Tai, Subj. bpwpriTai, with 
 Imperf Mid. opkovTo. 
 
 38. Tdvvfiai, with Tavvw, reivu), I extend, stretch. 
 
190 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 321. 
 
 corresponding Middle form is also in use ; e. g.^ in addition to 
 iTiaa (No. 5) iri(Tdfii]v also is used. 
 
 Fifth^ or Nasal Class. 
 
 % 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition 
 of V, or of a syllable containing v, to form the Present- 
 Stem. 
 
 a) V alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, 
 is added to the following Stems : 
 
 1. Stem /3 a, Pres. /SatVo), I go. 
 
 Aor.Act. Fut. Perf. Pass. 
 
 i-fin-v (§ 316, 1) ^iiGoiiai (5e^r}Ka (§ 317, 1) 
 
 t/3j7-(Ta (3i](To) (§ 329, 2) Verb. Adj. (idrdg 
 
 2. Stem £ \ a, Pres. iXavvw,! drive. 
 
 fiXd-aa. iXuj (§ 263) ajjXa/ca (§ 275, 1) v^dOriv 
 
 i\r)\anai Verb. Adj. eXareog 
 
 3. Stem <p6a, Pres. ^9avu),I anticipate. 
 
 < t-<pBr]-v (§ 316, 7) <p9r]<Tonai ttpBoLKa 
 
 ( t-tpOd-aa 
 
 4. Stem TV t, Pres. tt i v w, / drink (additional Stem tr o). Compare 
 § 827, 10. 
 
 t-ni-o-v (§ 316, 15) Trioiiai (§ 265) 
 
 5. Stem r t, Pres. rivo)^ I pay penalty. 
 
 l-Ti-aa (Mid.) Ti<7ia TSTiKa IriaOTjv 
 
 rkncT/xai 
 
 6. Stem ^ 1, Pres. ^Oivu), I perish, waste away. 
 
 i-^9i-(Ta (pQi<TO}iai t^Oi/iai e^OiOrjv 
 
 7. Stem dv, Pres. dvvu) (with dvo), Class 1), I immerge. 
 
 i-dv-v (§ 316, 16) H(T(i) dtdvKa idvOrjv 
 
 t^vaa, I dipped. m 
 
 8. Stem ^afc, Pres. SdKvo),IUte. 
 
 t-ddK-o-v drj^ofiuL ^eSrjxa l^i}xdr]V 
 
 § 321. Dialects.— 1. Aor. ]^id. t/B^aero, § 268, D. 
 
 2. Pres. tXaw, Fut. eXow, tXd^c, § 243, D., Aor. tXaaffa, Mid. r/Xdcrdfiriv. 
 3 Plup. Mid. aj^Xd^aro (§ 287, D.) [^Xatreriv]. 
 
 3. Ep. (pOdvu), Part. Aor. Mid. ^Od/xevog. 
 
 5. Ep. Wvw, with n'-w and rtW/it, § 319, D. 35. 
 
 6. Ep. (p9tv(o, (pei(o, Aor. e<p9ifiriv, i(p9lTo, § 316, D. 26 ; with Pres. <})9i- 
 vv9(>). 
 
 7. Aor. Mid. idvaeTo, § 268, D. [Pres. tvdweoj, I put on. Compare 
 § 323]. 
 
§ 322. 
 
 FIFTH, OR NASAL OliASj 
 
 191 
 
 9. Stem Kdfi, Pres. Kctfivu),! weary. 
 i-Kan-o-v Kafiovfiai KSKfiijKa 
 
 10. Stem Tefi, Pres. rkfivu),! cut. 
 
 t-Tefi-o-v (trdfiov) TSfid ThfirjKa (§ 283) hfirjOrjv 
 
 § 322. h) The syllable av is added to the following 
 Stems : 
 
 11. Stem aiaO, Pres. ai<T9-av-o-nai, I perceive. 
 
 yad-6-fir}v aiffO-rj-ffOfiai yrrO-ij-ixat 
 
 12. Stem dfiapr, Pres. duapT-dv-M,! err, 
 
 rifiaprfi-Oriv 
 
 rjfiapT-o-v afiapT-rj-ffOfiai rjnapT-rj-Ka 
 
 13. Stem a u ^, Pres. avK-dv-u) and au?w, / increase [aug-eo] 
 
 av^rf^ofiai (Passive) 
 
 14. Stemj3Xa<rr, Fres. (5 Xaffrdvcjjllmd. 
 
 t-fSkatXT-o-v 
 
 15. Stem 5 ape, 
 i-Sap9-o-v 
 
 16. Stem kxO, 
 (d7r)rix9-6-fir]V 
 
 17. Stem I?, 
 
 18. Stem KiX) 
 i-Kix-o-v 
 
 19. Stem olS, 
 
 20. Stem 6\i<t9, 
 utXiaQo-v 
 
 21. Stem 6ff({>p, 
 w<T(l>p-6-firjv 
 
 22. Stem 6^\, 
 
 (iXaffT-rj-au) tjSXdarrijKa (§ 274 exc.) 
 
 Pres. dapOdvtj,! sleep. 
 
 dapO-'fi-aofiaL deddpOrjKa 
 
 Pres. (dTr)e xOdvofiai,Iam hated. 
 
 (d7r)€x0-^-<TO/iai (a7r)i7X^^/iai 
 
 Pres. I ^ a V w and t^w, I seat myself. 
 
 Pres. Klxctvio,Imeet (compare § 313, D. 6) 
 
 Kix-rj-oofxai 
 Pres. olSdvia and oiSeto,! swell. 
 
 oidrj-aui (pdrjKa 
 
 Pres. 6 \ t (T a 1/ w, I slip. 
 
 6\ia9-rj-a(t) 
 Pres. 6<T<ppaivofiai,I smell. 
 
 6(T<pp-r)-(T0fiai 
 Pres. o^X-ttTK-av-w (compare § 324) and 
 6(peiX(t), I owe. 
 
 6<p\-r)-(T(iJ u)<p\riKa 
 
 Dialects. — 9. Part. Perf. KEKfirjcJg, Gen. KeKfirjwTog. 
 
 10. With Tfirjyb), Aor. Pass. 3 Plur. irftayev, with Pres. Hfin. 
 
 Peculiar to the Hom. dialect are : Aor. 0a-£(v), illuxit, Fut. m-tpfi- 
 (TOfiai, from Stem <}> a, Pres. ^aivoj ((i>adv(ti), I shine, shmo, Aor. Pass. 
 ^adv9r}v. 
 
 § 322. Dialects. — 12. Aor. ?)//j3porov for r)fipdrov (§ 257, D. Com- 
 pare § 51, D.). 
 
 13. diP)sK(o. 
 
 15. Aor. iSpd9ov (§ 257, D.). 
 
 18. Ep. KXxdvb). 
 
 21. [Herod, datppdnrjv, 1 Aor.] 
 
192 . FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 322. 
 
 23. Sternal, Vve%. av^ dvio^I please. 
 
 24. Stem r y, Pres. 9iyyavb)^I touch. 
 e-9Xy-o-v Oi^ofiai 
 
 25. Stem \ a /3, Pres. Xafifidvoj, I take. 
 
 t-\d^-o-v Xfjipofiai tiXij^a (§ 274) i\r]<l>9r]V 
 
 dXrjuiiai (seldom XeXijuiiai) 
 
 26. Stem Xd9, Pres. Xav9dva),I am hidden, with X^0w (Class 3), 
 
 Mid., I forget. 
 t-Xd9-o-v Xrjau) XkXT)9a 
 
 Mid. eXa96fiT]v Xrjffofiai XsXrifffiai 
 
 27. Stem \ a x, Pres. Xayxavoj,! attain. 
 t-Xdx-o-v XriKofJiat £tX»7X" (§ 274) 
 
 tlXijyuai 
 
 28. Stem fid 9, Pres. fiav9dv<o, J^eam. 
 t-Hd9-o-v fia9-ri-(rofiai ni}id9riKa 
 
 29. Stem tt i; 0, Pres. Trvv9dvofiai,I learn, with mv9ofiaL, Class 2. 
 l-Trv9-6-HT]v ireixTOfiai ireTrvfffiai 
 
 30. Stem r i; x, Pres. rvyxdvu),! meet, with reux*^) I prepare, CI. 2. 
 i-Tvx-o-v TEv^ofiai TS-Tvx-^-Ka 
 
 seldom Hrevxa 
 
 31. Stem ^vy, Pres. (pvyydvco, IJiee, with ^evyw (Class 2). 
 
 O&s. 1. — The verbs in 23-31, whose Stem forms a short syllable, 
 insert another nasal in addition to the affix a v. In ^aivio (1) 
 and dffippaivofiai (21) i has crept in (§ 253), as well as in Kepdaivu), 
 I gain, which forms only the Perf. KeKspdrjKa, from the Stem Ksp da ; 
 all the other forms are regular, according to Class 4. A large 
 part of the verbs (No. 11-16, 18-22, 28, and 30) form either some 
 
 . or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, from a Stem 
 in € (compare below, § 326). 
 
 Ohs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
 nouns : to (^fj-fia, the step ; jy (p9i-(n-g, the consumption ; 6 KUfi-aTo-g, 
 
 Dialects.— 23. Imperf , § 237, D., Aor. [eaSov'] evadov (§ 237), [ddriaio] 
 'dada. 
 
 25. [Her. Fut. XdfixpofiaL, Perf. XeXdi3r)Ka, Aor. Pass. iXdfi(p9T}v. 
 
 XeXa/i/wai, Verb. Adj. Xa/iTrrof.] 
 Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. X€Xa(3s(T9ai (§ 257, D.). 
 
 26. Pres., with lKXT]9dvo), cause to forget, Aor. eXijca and XsXd9ov 
 (§ 257, D.), XeXa96nT]v (I forgot), Perf. Mid. XeXacr/iai. 
 
 27. Aor. XkXaxov,! sTiared with [Fut. Xd^o/tat], Perf. XeXoyx"- 
 
 29. Aor. Opt. 7re7rv9oiTo (§ 257, D.). 
 
 30. Also Tevx<*), Aor. tstvkeiv, Mid. tevvkovto, Perf. Tsrvyfiai, 3 Plur. 
 TtTEvxarai, Aor. kTvx9T]v, with the Pres. TiTv<7K0fiai (§ 324, D. 37), / aim 
 at, Aor. iTvxr}<Ta, I met (§ 326). 
 
§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 193 
 
 the exiiaustion; to Xij^-jxa, the assumption; ri Xr]9-r}, ths forgetting; 
 V Tvx-n^ i^ chance^ accident ; and from Stems which are length- 
 ened by £ : »7 ai(T9-r]-(n-g, the sensation; to afidpT-r]-fia^ the error; 
 6 naO-jj-Trj-g, the scholar. 
 
 § 323. c) The syllable ve is added to the following 
 Stems : 
 
 32. Stem /3 u, Pres. jSww, I stop up. 
 
 t-^v-aa (3v(T(o Mid. ^k^vfffiai 
 
 33. Stem i k, Pres. iKvovfiai,! come, with iKavo), according to 
 
 §323 
 
 iK-o-fitjv 'l^ofiai ly/xai 
 
 34. Stem k v, Pres. Kvvko),! kiss. 
 i-KV-aa 
 
 35. Stem ttet, Pres. tt i r v e w, I fall (compare TrtVrw, § 327, 15) 
 t-TTBo-o-v (for l-7r€r-o-r), together with t-TriTv-o-v 
 
 36. Stem u tt e x, Pres. vtc laxvov jiai, I pivmise (compare ix(o, 
 
 § 327, 6) 
 VTTSffxonrjv VTroffxv^ofiai vireffxilfJiai 
 
 so likewise dfnriax^ovfiai, I wear (also anTrkxofiai), Aor. tjixttktxoVj Inf. 
 
 dflTTKTXf^V. 
 
 § 324. Sixth Class, or Inchoative Verbs. 
 The Yerbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing o-k to form the 
 Present- Stem. This o- k is added to Yowel- Stems (exc. 21) 
 at once, but to Consonant- Stems after the insertion of the 
 connecting vowel i. Several of the verbs belonging to this 
 class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) farther strengthen the 
 Present-Stem by means of a reduplication with the vowel 
 £ : yi'yvw-(TK-(x) [Lat. {g)-no-sc-o'], 
 
 § 323. Dialects.— 32. [Herod. fHvoj.] 
 
 33. 'iKio, Aor. l^ov (§ 268, D.), Part. iK/jievog,favoraI)le (§ 316, D.). 
 
 34. Kvaaa. 
 
 Moreover (to a — c), the Verbs : 
 
 37. Stem dXiT, Pres. dXiTaivto, I sin, Aor. ^Xtrov, Mid. dXiVovro, Part. 
 Perf. d\iTT]fievog, sinful. 
 
 38. Stem a X 0, Pres. d\<i)dvo), I acquire, Aor. ^\(pov. 
 
 39. dyivku), only in Yres., I lead, with aycj. 
 
 40. Ipvyydvu), I roar, Aor. ijpvyov, Pres. also ipevyofjiai. 
 
 41. Stem xdd, Pres. x«i'^«»'w, / embrace, Aor. tx«^o^, Fut. x«t<^o/^«i; 
 Perf. KBxavda. 
 
 I 
 
194 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324. 
 
 As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming 
 into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives. 
 
 Stems in a, 
 
 1. Stem yrjpa, Pres. yrjpd-aK-io, I grow old (seldom yrjpd-io). Com- 
 
 pare sene-sc-o 
 i-yr]pd-aa yrjpd-aofxai ye-yr/pa-Ka 
 
 Inf. yrjpd-vai (§ 316, 2) 
 
 2. stem dp a, Pres. di-d pd-<TK-(D^ I run (used only in com- 
 
 pounds) 
 t-dpd-v Spd-aofiai ds-dpd-Ka (§ 316, 3) 
 
 3. Stem jf j3 a, Pres. ti^d-oK-io^ I hecome marriageable (compare 
 
 pvbe-scrd) 
 i](3T}-<Ta 
 
 4. Stem 9va (from d v), Pres. 9vT]-(TK-io,Idie (usually aTroOvridKw) 
 t-9dv-ov 6dv-ov/iai Ts-Qvtj-Ka (§ 317, 3) 
 
 Fut. 3, Ttepr]^u}, § 291 evTj-To-Q 
 (mortal) 
 
 5. Stem IXa, Pres. i\d-(TK-ofiai, I conciliate. 
 
 Mid. iXd-ad-fiijp tXa-(T-o-/iai iXd-aOij-v 
 
 6. Stem fiva^ ■ Pres. jx i- ft vri-<TK-u), I remember. 
 i-fivrj-(Ta nvr)-a(3) i-iivrj-aOr}-v 
 
 fik-fiVT]-nai fivr]-<T9r](T0fiaL 
 
 [Tuemini] 
 
 7. Stem TT pa, "PreB. 'TTi-Trpd-ffK-u),! sell. 
 
 (for the Aor. and Fut. dTridofirjv irk-irpd-Ka B-7rpd-9Tjv 
 
 dTToddxTOfxaC) Trk-7rpd-/iai 7rpa-9r}(TO/xat 
 
 TTB-TTpd-ffOHai 
 
 8. Stem (p a, Pres. ^ a - tr <c - w, / say. ' Compare (prj-fii, § 312, 5. 
 
 9. Stem X a and % « ^j Fres. % a - a k - w, / open the mouth. 
 i-Xdv-ov xdv-ov^iai Kk-xriv-a. 
 
 Stem in c. 
 
 10. Stem dpE^ Pres. apk-oK-w^ I please. 
 
 fipi-aa dpe-ffu) rjpk-a9r}v. 
 
 Stems in (i). 
 
 11. Stem/3iw, Pres. (dva)(3iu>-(rK-ofxai,I revive. 
 (dv)e-(3i<o-v (§ 316, 13) 
 
 {dv)e(3i(t)<rdfirjv, I revived. Compare § 329. 
 
§ 324. SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195 
 
 13. Stem (3 \ 10 (from /io\, § 51, D.), Pres. jiXdi-a k-m^I go. 
 e-fio\-ov fioX-ovfiai • 
 
 13. Stem fipo), Pres. l3i-(3pu)-(TK-o), I consume. 
 
 l3e-l3poj-Ka (Part. /3£/3pwf, § 317, 
 
 D. 16) 
 /3£-,3jO(i»-/iai 
 
 14. Stem y v w, Pres. y i-yvio-ffK-o)^ I recognize [Lat. (g)no-sc-o] 
 
 i-yv(i)-v (§ 316, 14) yvu)-aofiai i-yvcj-ica i-yvu)-aBriv 
 
 • t-yv(o-(r-fiai 
 
 15. Stem 9p(o (from o p), Pres. Oput-aK-o), I leap. 
 t-Bop-ov 
 
 16. Stem rpw, Pres. n-Tpw-cK-oj, I wound. 
 
 t-rpio-aa rpw-aio rk-Tpio-fiai l-Tp(t)-9r}v 
 
 17. Stem aX and dXw, Pres. aX-i-oK-o fiai^I am taken. 
 j «-a\w-v aXdj-aofiai t-dXoj-Ka or ijXcj-Ka 
 
 i ijXojv (§ 316, 12) (compare § 237) 
 
 18. Stem d/i/3\ and d/i/3Xw, Pres. dfi^X-i-GK-tjj, I miscarry. 
 
 i'lfijSXcj-aa rifi(3XiiJ-Ka 
 
 19. Stem d vaX and avaXio, Pres. dvdX-i-<TK-oj, I expend. 
 
 dvdXb}-aa or dvrjXitxra dvdXcj-ffCJ j di^aXw-ica j dvdXw-Qrjv 
 
 also j}j/dXw-ora ( dvfjXw-Ku ( dvrjXb)-9r}v. 
 
 Stem in t. 
 
 20. Stem tt t, Pres. in-7ri-aK-<u, I give to drink. Compare tti-v-w, 
 
 § 321, 4. 
 i-7n-<Ta Tri-ffu) 
 
 Stems ill V, 
 
 21. stem Kv, Pres. Kv-i-<TK-a), I fructify. 
 
 22. Stem jtt 1 y, Pres. fieGv-(TK-(o, I make drunk, Mid., I decome drunk, 
 l-fikev-aa t-fieOv-aeriv. . 
 
 Consonant-Stems. 
 
 23. Stem dfiirXdK, Pres. d fiTrXdK-i-a k-m, I fail. 
 
 yfiTrXdK-ov dfnrXdK-i)-(Ji») 
 
 24. Stem (£7r)a v p, Pres. (t7r)a vp-i-aK-ofiat, I enjoy. 
 
 tTTtJVp-OflTJV 
 
 Inf. tiravp-'taOai 
 
 § 324. Dialects. — 12. Perf. fie-fi-ji-Xcj-Ka (compare § 51, D., and . 
 §282,D.). 
 
 13. Aor. t-(3pu)-v (§ 316, D. 23), with tlie Pres. /36/3/3w06>. 
 
 15. 3 Pirn-. Fut. Gopeovrai [with edp-vv-fiai, according to § 319]. 
 
 16. With rpw-w. 
 
 24. Aor. tTTtjvpov, Inf. tTravpeiv. 
 
196 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. § 324. 
 
 25. Stem evp, Pres. ev p-i-cr k-u), IJind. 
 
 evp-ov (Mid?) evp-r]-(T(i) fvp-ij-K-a evp-e-9r}v 
 
 (.vp-r]-Hai Evp-e-OTj-ffOfiai 
 
 26. Stem (rrep^ Pres. crrsp-i-ff k-m, I deprive (with artpib, Mid. ^ 
 
 (TTEpofiai, I am deprived) 
 k-arkp-rj-aa (XTep-rj-cru) i-arkp-ri-Ka e-(TTep-r}-9r]v 
 
 i-<TTsp-i]-fiai 
 
 27. Stem dXvK, Pres. dXv-crK-a), I shun. 
 tjXv^a dXv^o) 
 
 28. Stem diddx, Pres. d idd'aK-o),Iteach. 
 
 i-di^a^a didd^u) Se-Sidax-a i-di-ddxOriv 
 
 ^E-didayfxai 
 
 29. Stem X&k, Pres. Xd-(TK-(o,I utter, speak. 
 i-XttK-ov XaK-r]-(TOfiaL j Xs-XrjK-a 
 i-XdK-ri-aa \ Xk-XdK-a. 
 
 Obs. 1. — The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before ok. Sev- 
 eral of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affixing « 
 to the Stem (compare § 322, Ohs., and § 326), especially Nos. 23, 
 25, 26, 29. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
 nouns : 6 Odv-a-ro-g, death ; to fivij-fieXo-v, the memorial ; 6 ahro- 
 fioX-o-g, the deserter; y yvaj-fir}, the opinion ; y) a\w-<Ti-f, the capture; 
 6 didd(TK-aXo-g (from the Present-Stem), the teacher; ») SiSax-rj 
 (from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction; and from Stems which 
 are enlarged by e : t6 evp-rj-fia, the discovery; t) aTep-rj-cri-g, the 
 deprivation. 
 
 Dialects. — 26. Aor. (mphtrai, Part. Pass. Aor. ffTepsig. 
 
 28. [diSacTKTjfrai] a secondary Stem is d a, Aor. dkdaov, I taught (§ 326, 
 D. 40).. 
 
 29. Ion. form Xt/kew (§ 325), Fern. Part. Perf XeXdKvXa. 
 And the S^Decial Verbs : 
 
 30. Stem dXcTa, Pres. dXdfjffKO), I become great, Aor. ijXdavov, I made 
 great. 
 
 31. Stem /c\€, Pres. kikXtjctku), with koXsio, I call. 
 
 32. Stem ^av, Pres. [(pav-trK-oj] Tri-^av-aK-u), I call. 
 
 33. Stem dTra^ (from d^), Pres. d-n-aip-i-ffK-cj, I deceive, Aor. y'7ra<pov, 
 
 SClbj. d7rd(p(t). 
 
 34. Stem d p, Pres. dp-ap-i-aK-oj, I Jit, Aor. ypapov, I fitted, Perf. dpijpa, 
 I suit, Fern. Part, dpdpvla, Part. Mid. dpfievog, suitable, Weak Aor. ypaa, 
 I fitted, Aor. Pass. dp9riv. 
 
 35. Stem Ik, Pres. k-t-cK-u),! mdke equal (compare § 317, B. 7). 
 
 36. Imperf. "lOK^iy), he spolce. 
 
 37. Stem tvx (compare § 322, 30), Pres. riTvaKOfxai, I aim at. 
 
§ 325. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 197 
 
 § 325. Seventh, or E-class. 
 A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by c. 
 A) The enlarged Stem in e is the Present- Stem; the 
 shorter serves to form the other tenses. 
 
 1. Stem ya/i, Pres. yaixe-o), I marry (Act. uxorem dtico, Mid. nubo) 
 i-yr]^-a yafi-iSJ (Mid.) ye-yafX-ij-Ka 
 
 ye-ycLfX-ri-fiai 
 
 2. Stem yT]9, Pres. yt]Qk- it), I rejoice. 
 
 yk-yrjO-a, I am rejoiced. 
 
 3. Stem d OK, Pres. d oks-o),! seem. 
 
 i-do^a So^u) Mid. dsSoy-fiai 
 
 4. Stem Kv p, Pres. kv pe-o) and Kvpoj, I meet. 
 i-KVp-aa Kvpcro) 
 
 5. Stem fiapTvp, Pres. ixapTvpe-io^Iam icitness. 
 
 Mid. fiapriponai, I call to witness. 
 
 6. Stem %vp, Pres. ^vpe(o,I shave. Mid. ^vpo/xai- 
 l-^vp-aiii]v t^vp-r]-fiai 
 
 7. Stem TTUT, Pres. Trare-o fiai^Ieat. 
 t-Traca/iT^v irkiraajxai 
 
 8. Stem pt^, Pres. pnrr-e-io and plttt-uj (according to § 249),/ 
 
 tJirow. 
 
 tppirpa pi\p<jj ippi^a j tppitprjv 
 
 ippififxai I tppi<p9r]v 
 
 9. Stem w 9, Pres. w9s-io, I push. 
 
 t-ojaa (§ 237) wo-w {u)9i](T(ti Mid.) i-utr-fiai t-w(T9i]v 
 
 § 325. Dialects. — 1 Fut. yafi4(o, 3 Sing. Fut. Mid. ya/xeafjeTai, slw will 
 marry. 
 
 3. [^0Ki7(rw, t^oKT/o-a.] 
 
 8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. IpepnrTo. 
 
 Besides : 
 
 a) Stem yeyiov, Pres. yeyajve-oj^Icall, Perf. yiywi^a, Fut. yf.yo}vr](7(s). 
 
 1)) Stem ^ a r, Pres. Sars-ofiai, I distribute, Fut. ddcofiai, Aor. ^do-traro, 
 Perf. ^k^aarai. 
 
 c) Stem d ovTT, Pres. dovTrk-o},I malce a sound, Aor. l{y)^ovTrr)-aa, Perf. 
 
 67) Stem €tX, tX, Pres. d-\k-io,I j^ress, Impcrf. tfiXfov (§ 237), Aor. 3 
 Pirn-. t\aav, Perf. Mid. teX/zat, Aor. Pass. edX?;!/ (§ 295), 3 Plur. aXiv, Inf. 
 
 e) Stem KeXaS, Pres. Kika^e-tx), I resound. Part. KsXdd-Mv. 
 
 f) Stem fc € V r, Pres. Kevre-oj, I stiJig, Aor. Inf. Ksv-crai. 
 
198 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326. 
 
 Obs. — In some verbs the Stem with e extends even farther than the 
 Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns : b ydfi-o-Q, 
 the wedding; r) So^a, the ajipearance ; to fiaprvp-io-v, the testimony; 
 ■t) bj-ai-g or wQrj-aiQ^ pushing. 
 
 % 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem ; the 
 enlarged one in £ serves to form the other tenses. 
 
 10. Stem aid{t), Pres. ald-ofiai and aldk-ofiai, I am ashamed. 
 
 11. Stem d \ € ^ (e), Pres. d \ I ^ - w, / ward off. 
 ijX^^-dixriv aXe^-rj-(Toixai 
 
 12. Stem d X (0? Pres. axQ-ofiai^I am xiexed. 
 
 dxOe-aojxai rixQ'^-<y9r}v 
 
 dx0e-(T9r](TOfiaL 
 
 13. Stem (3o<TK (f), Pres. (3 6(tk-o), T pasture. 
 
 l3o<ricf)-aio ; from the Stem /3 o the Verb. Adj . ^o-t6q 
 
 14. Stem (iovX (c), Pres. (iov\-ofiai,I will. 
 
 (Augment, § 234) (SovXIj-aoixai (is-(3ovXri-fiai t-(5ovXrj-Qr]v 
 
 15. Stem ^6(e), Pres. di-u),I need {M, it is necessary), Mid. Saofiai, 
 
 I require. 
 t-der}-(Ta Serf-au) de-Serj-Ka k-d£^-9t]v (§ 328, 2) 
 
 16. Stem I p (e), Pres. not usual (§ 327, 13) 
 i)p-6^t}v, I asked. lpr)-(TOfiai, Inf. ip'taBai 
 
 17. Stem ip|6(e), Pres. tpp-io, I go away, 
 fjpprj-ffa tppt]-(Jio TippT]-Ka . 
 
 Dialects. — g) Stem ktvtt, Pres. Krvn-k-io, I ring, Aor. tK-nJTr-ov. 
 h) Pres. TTif^w and 7rte^£-w,/j?r^ss, Aor. lirUaa. 
 i) Stem p I y, Pres, piyi-w, I shudder, Perf tppiya. 
 Tc) Stem orvy, Pres. <xTvys-io,Ihate, shun, Aor. tarvyov and (TTvyrjffaiy 
 tarv^a, I made dreadful. 
 
 I) Stem ^ t X, Pres. ^iXtw, / Zm?*?, Aor. l-(fCX-d-\i.i\v. 
 
 Ill) Pres. x9<^^^V^''^^i I help, Aor. txpaia/xov. 
 
 Three Verbs in aw with a movable a are here to be noticed : 
 
 n) Stem y o, Pres. yod-(o, I wail, Imperf. l-yo-ov. 
 
 o) Stem jxd K, Pres. p,r]Kd-o.-}iai, I low, Perf, fik-nrjK-a, Aor. t-fidK-ov. 
 
 p) Stem fiijK, Pres. fivKd-o-fiai, I roar, Perf. ^kfivK-a, Aor. tfivK-ov. 
 
 § 326. Dialects. — 10. y^kaaro, Imperat. ai^ecraai, Fut. aiU-oonai, Aor. 
 Pass. 3 Plur. olhadEv. 
 11. dXaXKoa/ (§ 257). 
 
 14. Pres. f36XeTai, Imperf tfSoXovTo, Perf ^k^ovXa. 
 
 15. Aor. thvr](Ta, once ^/"/cra, I was in want of, also Pres. ^eyo/xai. 
 
 16. Pres. elpofiai, Fut. elprjaofiai. 
 
§ 326. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 199 
 
 18. Stem evd{e), Pres. ev ceo, I sleep (generally KaOevSu)) 
 Augment, § 240 (KaO)Evdri-(Toj 
 
 19. Stem c ^ («), Pres. s ;// - a>, / cooh 
 
 i]}pr]-(Ta ixptj-tjo/xai tj^prj-fiai r)\l/r)-6T]V 
 
 Verb. Adj. t(i>06g 
 
 20. Stem 9e\(e) or l9eX{e), Pres. 9s\-io or ies\-o), I will 
 rjOtXij-ffa {t)9E\ri-(ru) ,rt9k\r}-Ka 
 
 21. Stem iS(e), Pure Stem tiJ, Pres. 'li^ofiai, I seat myself; also 
 
 iKdvoj, Class 5. Compare eKofiai. 
 iKa9i(Tdfir]v (§ 240) Ka9iZ,i]<Tonai and Ka9edovfiai (§ 2G3) 
 
 22. Stem kXuv and icXaie, Pres. KXaio) (kXoho), I weep. Com- 
 
 pare § 253. 
 tKXav-aa KXair)<T(i) with.' KXavcrofiai 
 
 23. Stem /tax (e), Pre^ fidxo fiai, IJigTit. 
 
 l-/iaxi-(Tdixt]v fxaxovfiai (§ 263) fie-fidxv-H-(^'- 
 
 24. Stem fiEX{e), Pres. fisXei fioi,it is a care to me ; Mid. /^eXo- 
 
 juai, I care for^ take care of. 
 i-fieXT}-(Te fieXt)-<Tet /xe-fikXrj-Ke t-fx.EXr]-9r]v 
 
 {lTn)fiEXr](TOfiai 
 
 25. Stem /i e X \ (e), Pres. fi eXX-oj, lam on tlie point, hesitate. 
 i)-^EXXr]-<ra fieXXrj-ab) 
 
 (§ 234, Ohs.) 
 
 26. Stem fiev{e), Pres. fikv-u, I remain [mane-o, man-si], Verbal 
 
 Adj. fiev-e-Tog 
 i-fieiva {itv-Ca fie-fievij-Ka 
 
 27. Stem fivK (f), Pres. ixv^o), I such 
 
 28. Stem veju(€), Pres. vsfi-cj, I assign. 
 
 t-veifia vEfx-uj ve-vefuj-Ka (Mid.) e-vefir]-9T]v 
 
 29. Stem 6K(e), Pure Stem dd, Pres. uK-(o,I smell. 
 
 ujKr}-(Ta d^-(To} od-(o8-a (§ 275,1).) [Lat. od-ov] 
 
 30. Stem oi(€), Pres. oi-ofiai,ItMnJc (compare § 244) 
 
 oir]-(TOfiat (^rj-9Tiv 
 
 31. Stem oi'xCO? Pres. olx-ojxai,I am off. 
 
 olxri-CTOfiai oix-wfc-a 
 
 Dialects. — 19. [Imperf. t^ee.] 
 
 23. fiax^-ofiai, Part, ^ax^iofievog or ^axEovfievog, Fut. juaxv^^ofiai and 
 juax£<T'o/iat. 
 
 24. Perf. fXEfirjXs, Plup. fisfiriXei, Perf. Mid. nk-fi-^-XE-Tai (Plup. -ro), 
 §51,D. 
 
 26. Perf. fikjiova, I am disposed, strive. 
 
 30. Pres. bt-ofxai, 6i-w, Aor. Mid. otaaro, Aor. Pass. m.a9r]v. 
 
 31. Perf. oixnKa {olx^fxai), with the Pres. ot'x-vi-w, according to § 323. 
 
200 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326. 
 
 (oix-iOK-a, with irreg. Reduplication [§ 275] for o/x-wx-a. Com- 
 pare § 35, a) 
 
 32. Stein 60ei\(€), Pure Stem o^eX, Pres. 6(pei\u), I owe (§ 253, 
 
 Obs.) 
 uk})eX-ov [utinarri] 6<pEiX7j-(X(o ujcpdXrj-Ka 
 
 oxpeiXrj-aa 
 
 33. Stem rrepd^e), Pres. jrepdu) 
 i-Trapd-ov 7rapdt]-<T0fiai irk-iropd-a 
 
 34. Stem tt (e) r (e), Pres. Trkr-ofiai, I Jiy. 
 l-7r{e)T-6-/J.T)v 7r{s)ri]-(T0fiai 
 
 (§61,c) 
 
 35. Stem pv{e), Pres. pko), I Jiow (§ 248). 
 
 ippev-<Ta (rare, § 260, 2) pvrj-ao/iai Ippvrj-Ku Ippvrjv 
 
 (with peixTOfiai) 
 
 36. Stem <Tri/3(e), Pres. (TTei(i-io,Itread. 
 
 i-arilSij-fxai 
 
 37. Stem tv-ttts, Pure Stem r w tt (§249), Pres. rvirrw, 1 strike. 
 i-TVTT-ov TVTTTri-au} Mid. Te-rvfi-fiai l-rvTr-rjv 
 
 38. Stem x « * |0 «, Pure Stem x a p, Pres. xccipfo, I rejoice (§ 253) 
 
 XciLpr]-aix) KS-xdpT}-Ka k-xdp-T)v 
 
 Ke-xdpr]-fiai 
 
 Obs. — The e sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present, 
 sometimes only in some of them ; sometimes it is added to the 
 pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: fiev-e, aTi{3-e, t^e, 
 6Ke, TVTrre. The formation of nouns -shows the same varieties : 
 aldrj-fKjjv, shame-faced ; r) (iovXi]-(n-g, voluntas; lOeX^-fKjjVyVoluntarj/; 
 
 Dialects. — 38. Part. Perf. Ksxaprnog, Fut. Kexapriao), Aor. Ixriparo, and 
 3 Plur. KsxdpovTo, § 257, D. 
 Besides : 
 
 39. Stem dX9{e), Pres. dXO-ofiai, I become well, Fut. dXOri-ffofiai. 
 
 40. Stem d a, Aor. dedaov (§ 257, D.), / taught, Aor. Mid. Inf. dedda- 
 <r9ai {to get to hiow), Aor. Pass, tddriv {I learned), besides Fut. dariffofiai, 
 Perf deddrjKa, Part. Perf deSaiog. 
 
 41. Stem Kr]d{e), Pres. Kt)S-u), I grieve, Fut icjy^jy-aw, Perf KeKr]d-a (/ 
 am concerned), Fut. KEKadrjaonai. 
 
 42. Stem fied{a), Pres. ned-io, I rule, Mid., I reflect, Fut. fiEdrj-tro/xai. 
 
 43. Stem tt 1 0, Pres. TreiQtu, I persuade, Fut. also Tn9r)<Tu), Part. Aor. 
 
 44. Stem ro|o(€), Aor. t-rop-ov and l-Toprj-cra, I bored through, Fut 
 r£ro|077-(ra>. 
 
 45. Stem ^ i ^, Pres. (pEidoixai, I spare, Aor. Mid. Tre(pidka9aL (§ 257, D.), 
 Fut. Trecpidrj-aofiai. 
 
§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 201 
 
 6 fiaxv-Trf-c, t^ warrior ; y fiEWrj-fri-g, the delay; fiov-ifio-g, remain- 
 ing; 6 vofi-o-g, the law; y od-ixTj, the smell; 7) x^P'^j the jay . 
 
 § 327. EigJitJi^ or Mixed Class. 
 
 Several essentially different Stems unite to form one 
 verb ; 
 
 1. Present aipk-ix),! tdk£, ; Mid., I choose ; Stems a\p?. and k X. 
 
 €CK-ov (§ 336) aipr)-a(i) yprj-Ka ype-9r]V 
 
 Inf. (Xuv 
 
 d\6fir]v aiprj-(TOfiai yprj-fiai 
 
 2. Pres. t px-o /xai, I go, come ; Stems kpx and t\(v)9 
 fiX[v]9-ov IXev-aofxai tX-rjXvO-a (§ 275) 
 Imperat. lX9s (§ 333, 12) 
 
 Inf. tX9eiv. The place of the Fiit. is generally supplied by eJiu. 
 
 3. Pres. tp d-oj and peZ-io,I do; Stems tpd, epy, pey 
 i-pe^a tp^ii) • ipkx9r]v 
 
 Obs. — The original Verbal-Stem is /^ e |0 y, hence to Fkpy-o-v (§ 34, 
 D.), Att. tpy-o-v, worJc ; from (P)tpy,hj the addition of the en- 
 largement of the Present i (Class 4), arose {P)tpy-t-(o, and from 
 this tpS-(o. But by metathesis P epy became P pey, and, with 
 loss of the P, pey, whence the regular Present, according to Class 
 4, is piZ-o), i. <?., pey-t-u) (§ 251). 
 
 4. Pres. t(r9i-(x),I eat ; Stem l(r9L, tS{e) [ed-o], and ^ a y 
 t-(l>ay-ov Fut. td-ofiai kd-rjdoKU (§ 275) TjSa-<T9T]v 
 
 (§ 265) t^-rjhafxai 
 
 5. Pres. s TT - o n a I, I follow (Imperf e'nrofirjv, § 236); Stems Itt and 
 
 (r(£)7r 
 i-(nr-6p.r]v 'iiponai * Sul>j. (r7rio-fj.at Inf. aTrk(T9ai 
 
 Obs. — The original Stem is o-e tt, from which k tt has arisen by weak- 
 ening 0- to the rough breathing (§ 60, V). In the Aor. Ind. the 
 rough breathing is not organic, e being properly only the Aug- 
 ment. Besides this there is a syncope (§ 61, c). 
 
 § 327. Dialects. — 1. [^apaipyKa, dpaiprjfiai, § 275.] 
 
 2. Aor. fiXv9ov, Perf eiXriXov9a (§317, D. 13), Part. tXr]Xov9wc. 
 
 3. [Pres. spS-oj] Perf iopya (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. iuipyeiv, Aor. tp^a and 
 tpe^a. 
 
 4. Pres. t(T9ix) and tcio, Inf. 't^-p.evai, Perf tS-rjS-a, Mid. IS/jSoTai. 
 
 5. Pres. Act. tVw, I am occupied, Aor. t-air-ov, Inf. (nrelv, Part, (nrwv^ 
 Fut. fi/'w, Subj. Aor. Mid. tWw/^ai, kaTroifiyv, kaTrk(T9ai, kaTTofievoQ. 
 
 I 2 
 
202 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. § 327. 
 
 C. Pres. tx-i^^I'have^ liold (Imperf. fixov, § 236) ; Stems tx a^^l (Tx(e) 
 
 t-ax-ov, I seked. 1. i'^w (Mid.) 
 
 Subj. <TxtD, Opt. axoir]v 
 Inf. ax^lv^ Part, ax^v 2. axtj-aa) i-axrj-Ka e-(Txs-9r}v 
 
 Imperat. ax^-c (§ 316, 11) i-crxv-fiai Iktoq (tx^toq 
 
 Mid. t-(TX-6fiT]v, CTXwyuai, etc. 
 Ind. Gx-tadai 
 
 Obs. — The original Stem is o- e x> from which « x lias arisen by weak- 
 ening a to the rough breathing (§ 60, 1). From (rex by syncope 
 came t-ax-o-v, by metathesis ax^, from which axs-e, t-axv-Ka. 
 From i X came the Future Ua and the Verbal Adj. t/c-rd-e, while 
 in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the 
 soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllabic 
 (§ 53, 5, Ohs.) : tx-oj for ix"^* Compare also v-n-icrxveofiai and dfi- 
 iriaxveofiai, § 323, 36. All the Stem forms also appear in the 
 formation of nouns : to axT}- ^a^ the form ; i) t^i-g ^ the leaving ; ix- 
 vp6-Q,Jirm^ tenable. 
 
 7. Pres. fiiay-w, I mix, misc-eo ; Stems fiKry and ft i y, additional 
 form fiiyvvfii (§ 319, 18). 
 
 8. Pres. opd-a),I see; Stems 6pa, iS, ott 
 
 Eid-ov (Mid.) vxpofiai t-wpd-KU w<pQr]v 
 
 UTT-iOTT-a (§ 275) 
 
 Imperat. l^a Mid. Idou (333, 12) 
 
 Inf. io-eiv tiopd-fiai opdroQ 
 
 lOfi-lXaL OTTTOg 
 
 Obs. — On the irregular Augment of the Stem bpa (Imperf. iwpwv), 
 § 237. The Stem l d was originally Pid {^ 34, D.). Compare 
 ^'wZ-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, e-PiS-ov, with Syllabic Augment, 
 contracted to eU-o-v, but Subj. Id-io, Opt. U-oi-fii. The Perf of 
 this Stem is oUa^Ucrww (§ 317, 6). All three Stems appear also 
 in the formation of nouns : rb opd-fia, the spectacle ; to eW-og, the 
 form, appearance; j) o-^i-r, tlie sight; to 6fi-fia, the eye, hole. 
 
 0. Pres. 7rd(Tx-<^,I »ujfer; Stem ttoo-x, 7ra0(£), ttbvO 
 t-irdO-ov Trd-aop.ai irk-TrovB-a TraOrj-Tog 
 
 (for TTSvO-troftai, § 50) 
 
 Dialects.— 6. Perf. 5x-<u/c-a (§ 326, 31), Perf. Mid. ^yfim, 3 Plur. Plup. 
 
 WXCITO. 
 
 8. Aor. Idov, Weak Aor. Mid. kiaaTo and daaTO, Part, kicrdfievog to 
 the Pres. etdo/xai, I appear, resemble (compare § 34, D. 4). As a shorter 
 additional form of the Stem 6 pa, we find in Homer the Stem 6p {Pop), 
 thence 3 Plur. Pres. kirl bp-o-vTai, they overhoTc. 
 
 9. 2 Plur. TtkirouQ^ (§ 317, D. 14), Part. miraQvla. 
 
§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLAS§. 203 
 
 Obs. — From the shorter* Stems we have the nouns : to TrdQ-og^ the 
 suffering; to irevO-og, the mourning. 
 
 10. Triv-(o, I drinlc ; Steins Trtv, 7rt, tto [Latin ^o-tus]. Compare 
 
 § 331, 4. 
 
 t-TTL-OV Fut. TTl-Oflai (§ 265) TTS-TTIO-Ka l-7r6-9t]V 
 
 Imperat. ttI-Oi (§ 316, 15) 7r£-7ro-/xai tto-toq 
 
 Obs. — From the Stem tto we have the nouns: 6 7r6-TT]-c,po-tor; r) 
 TTo-m-g, po-tio ; to iro-Trjpio-v, po-culu-m. 
 
 11. Pres. rp£x-w,/rw/i; Stems rpex and dpEfx 
 
 i-dpdfx-ov dpaixovfi-ai Se-dpdfiij-Ka OpsKTSov 
 
 OpB^ofjiai (§ 54, c) 
 
 Obs. — Nouns from both Stems : 6 Tpox-6-g, the wheel; 6 dpofi-Ev-g, 
 the runner. 
 
 12. Pres. <psp-o),I carry [fero] ; Stems ^ep, lve{y) k, o l 
 -qveyK-ov oi-(T(i) tv-Tjvox-a (§ 275) oi-<T-0ri<JO}iai 
 
 ol-a-TOQ 
 fjveyK-a (§ 269) ijvkx-Oriv 
 
 i^veyK-d-firjv olaofiai tv-rjvey-fiai fci^ex-^r/co/uai 
 
 Obs. — From the Stem <pep we have the nouns: ro ^ep-e-Tpo-v,t7ie. 
 bier; 6 (pop-o-g^ the contribution, tax; 6 ^6p-To-g, the Mrden. 
 
 13. Aorist el-TTov,! spoke ; Stems e i tt, i p, and p e 
 
 dTT-OV 
 
 el-rr-a (§ 269) tp-ui u-pr}-Ka (§ 274, Obs.) IppfjOtjv 
 
 Imperat. eiTr-e Inf. eiTr-elv £i-pr]-fiai pr]-9r](Tonai 
 
 (§333,12) ^ 
 
 ei-pf]-<T-ofiai prj-To-g 
 
 Obs. — The Stem e / tt has arisen by contraction from e-ett, and i-eir 
 from Pe-pETT, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-Stem Pi.ir 
 {tTTog, word, § 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the dijihthong 
 d belongs not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.). The Stem tp 
 (Fut. tpw), to which the Mid. IpsaOai, to ask (§ 326, 16) belongs, 
 has likewise lost P, it being originally Pep (compare Lat. «jer-bu-m). 
 From Pep, by metathesis (§59), arose Ppe, after the loss of the P, pe, 
 
 Dialects. — 11. Wpe^a [Spafieo/xai], Sedpofia. 
 
 12. 3 Plur. Imperat. Pres. <pep-Te [Lat. fo^te], Aor. yveiKa, 3 Sing. 
 Opt. Ive'iKai {tve'iKoi) [Perf. ivr]veiyfiai\, Imperat. Aor, pZo-e, Inf. olaefievai 
 (§268,D.). 
 
 13. Pres. e'lpu) (Class 4, d), Aor. i<nr-ov (Stem aev, compare 5), 7 
 spoke, Imperat. tair-ere, Pres. tv-e-jr-oj, Imperat. tvveire (§ 62, D.), Aor. 
 ivKTirov, Subj. iviaiTii), Opt. 2 Sing. ivi(JTrQig, Imperat. tvitnce and tvicnreg, 
 Fut. Ivixpu) and IvKnrijffco. 
 
204 irregula:kities of meaning. § 328. 
 
 hence ei-prj-KU for Pe-fprj-Ka, Ippri-Orj-iT for E-Ppf]-9r]-v, prj-ro-g for 
 Pprj-ro-g. As Present forms, 0/;/ij, Xlyw, and, especially in com- 
 pounds, dyopevoj may be used, e. g., dTrayopevcj, I forbid ; Aor. 
 dTreiTTov, Fut. ctTrepu), Perf. cnrdpr]Ka. Nouns from tlae Stems k tt 
 and pe : I'l o^, the voice; to pfj-fia, the word; 6 prj-Tcop, the orator. 
 
 In addition to these, there are three verbs which redu- 
 plicate the Stem in the Present : 
 
 14. Present yi-yv-ofxai (also yiv-ofiat), I become. 
 
 Stem y I - y (e) V and y e v («) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-m) 
 l-yev-o-firiv yevrj-ffonai ye-yov-a 
 
 ye-ysvT}-fiai 
 
 Obs. — From the Stem yev we have to yev-og, the rcLce^genm; oi 
 yov-iiQ, the parents^ from y e v c, r) yive-ffi-g, the origin. 
 
 15. Pres. TTi-TTT-bi (from 7ri-7reT-w),IfaU; Stem ttIttt, ttbt, tttcj 
 l-TTEtr-ov, from t-Trer-ov (§ 60, a), Trta-ovfiai (§ 264), Tre-Trrw-Ka (com- 
 pare § 323, 35). 
 
 Obs. — From the Stem tttw : ») TTTuj-ai-e, to irTw-fia, the fall. 
 
 ' 16. Pres. Ti-Tpd-<i),Ibore; Stems tit pa and Tpa 
 i-Tpri-aa Tprj-ffco 
 
 (§ 270, Obs.). 
 
 Irregularities of Meaning. 
 
 § 328. The most important^regularities of meaning cof 
 sist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, ana 
 Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transi- 
 tive and intransitive meaning. 
 
 A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning. 
 
 1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with 
 Active meaning (§ 266). This is the case with most verbs 
 of Classes 5 to 8. * 
 
 Z- The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle, 
 
 Dialects.— 14. Perf 1 Plur. y's-yd-fiEv, § 317, D. 2. Compare § 329, 8. 
 15. Perf. Part, tte-ttte-ujq, § 317, P. J 7, 
 Besides : 
 
 17. t-aua>, Stem av, dP^ I sleep {I as Reduplication, compare § 308), 
 Aor. ataa. 
 
§ S29. 
 
 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 
 
 205 
 
 and also make most of their tenses in the Middle form. 
 Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a 
 Passive form : e. g., (dovXoiuai, I wish, ij3ov\r)9r)v, I wished. 
 The most important Passive Deponents are the following, 
 of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is 
 used alons: with the Middle : 
 
 EvXaphiiai, I am on my guard. 
 *i]SoiJiaL, I rejoice. 
 
 J- Ovuiouai 
 
 TTjOO 
 
 ^ItaTce to heart. 
 I am inclined. 
 
 Htti ) 
 
 ( / am anxious. 
 
 jxera J 
 
 CLTTO ^ 
 
 K vosouai 
 tv 
 
 Trpo , 
 
 ' / repent. 
 ' I despair. 
 
 I reflect. 
 
 I ponder. 
 . I anticipate. 
 
 dyafiai, I admire (§ 312, 8). 
 ^aidkofiai, I dread (§ 301, 1). 
 
 aXdofiai, I ramble. 
 
 afiiXKdofiai, I rival. 
 *dpvso/iai, I deny. 
 *dx9ofiai, lam indignant (§ 326, 
 12). 
 
 (SovXofiai, I wish (§ 326, 14). 
 
 Seofiai, I need (§ 326,15). 
 
 depKOfiai, I look. 
 *dca\eyo[xai, I converse. 
 
 Uvafiai^ I can (§ 312, 9). olonai, I am of opinion (§ 326, 30). 
 
 ivavTioofiai, I am Opposed. asfiofjiai, I reverence. 
 
 iTTiffTafiai, I know (§ 312, 10). (jtiXoriixkofiai, I am ambitious. 
 
 O&s.— Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the 
 Passive. 
 
 3. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a 
 Middle meaning : thtppaivw, I rejoice, ev(j)pav9riv, I re- 
 joiced ; arpicjxjj, I caiise to turn, larpai^nv, I turned — 
 myself; (^taivw,! show, t(l>avriv, I appeared, etc. 
 
 4. The Passive forms of several Deponents have also a 
 Passive meaning: laojiai, I heal, laOr^v, I was healed; 
 Ziyjipai,! receive,V^iy(%r\v,I VMS received; in some even 
 the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meaning : 
 fiLfiioiiai, I imitate, ninifir]ixaL, I have imitated or have heen 
 imitated. 
 
 § 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning. 
 
 When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans- 
 
 § 329. Dialects. — The Strong Aor. tTpa(pov {Tp'tcpu)^ I nourish) in Horn, 
 has an intransitive meaning, I grew up. In Herod. , dvkyvojv {dvayi- 
 yvuxTKU)) means I read, dvkyvwaa, I persuaded ; Hom. ypLTrov, I fell, Aor. 
 to kpe'nru) (Class 2), / throw down; tvaaaa, I caused to dwell, Aor. to 
 vaio), I dwell. 
 
206 IRREGULAEITIES OF MEANING. § 3^9. 
 
 sitive and 'Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the intran- 
 sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran- 
 sitive meaning ; when there are two Perfects, the Strong 
 likewise has the intransitive and the Weah the transitive 
 meaning ; if there is only one Perfect, it is intransitive. 
 The most important cases of this kind are : 
 
 1. Stem (xra, Pres. to-rr^^t, /^Z^J^c^, Weak Aor. iaTr\<m, 
 I jplaced, Put. ot»Vw, / shall jplace^ Pres. Mid. 'iarainai, I 
 jplace myself^ Strong Aor. laTr\v, I placed myself— stood^ 
 Perf. f o-rr^fca, / have jplaced myself, or stand (§ 503), Plup. 
 t(TTr}Keiv, I stood, Put. karij^tj (§ 291), I shall stand, 
 
 Obs. — This same important distinction appears in the numerous 
 compounds : d^iaTrjui, I cause t9 revolt, to separate, dTradTrjv, I re- 
 xolted — separated, d<}>k(rTr]Ka, I Tiave revolted; i<pi(TTr}}ii, I put over, 
 iTrk(TTr}v, I put myself over, ttp'tGTrjKa, I am put over; KaOitrrrjixi, I put 
 down, Karkarriv, I put myself foncard, KaOkarrjKa, I stand tliere or 
 forward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially Middle meaning, e. g., 
 KariarriaaTo, he determined for himself (compare § 479). 
 
 2. Stem |3a, Pres. (^aivw,! go,is commonly intransitive 
 with the Put. f^iiao/uai ; but in the poets, I cause to go, 
 also in the Weak Aor. ijdwa, Put. j3)7«rw ; but intransitive 
 in the Strong Aor. t(5r]v,Iwent, (5i[5r}Ka, I have advanced, 
 stand firm (j3i(5a-io-g,firm), 
 
 3. Stem (j) V, Pres. (pvo), I heget,We2ik Aor. t(j)V(Ta, (pv&h) ; 
 but the Strong Aor. '^(j)vv,Iwas hegotten,Tri(l>vKa,I am hy 
 nature, to which the Pres. is (jtvoiiat. 
 
 4. Stem S V, Pres. Suw, I sinlc, hide, often transitive ; 
 icaraSuw, I cause to sink, also t^vaa, Zvau) ; but c^Dv, I 
 sunk myself , I dived ; Ividvv, I put on; l^iZvv, I pict 
 off- 
 
 5. Stem (Tj3€(c), Pres. (T(5tvvviuii, I que7ich. Weak Aor. 
 £-<Tj3£-cra, / quenched. Strong Aor. t<j^r\v, I was quenched, 
 ta^r\Ka, I am quenched. The Pres. to it is (r^ivvvjjLai. 
 
 6. Stem cr k: £ X, Pres. a/caXXw, / dry, but Aor. tV/cXr^v, / 
 grew dry, with the Pres. o-icfXXojuaf. 
 
§ 331. ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 207 
 
 7. Stem IT I, Aor. Iettiov, I drank^ iifiaa (irnricrKU}), I 
 caused to drinlc. 
 
 8. Stem Y £ V, Pres. ydvojuai (compare § 327, 14), / am 
 horn, Aor. iyuvafxnvy I hegat. 
 
 9. Stem 6 X, Pres. oWvui, I ruin, strong Perf. oXwXa, 
 / am ruined, jperii, Weak Perf. dXwXsica, / Itave ruined^ 
 jperdidi. 
 
 § 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone 
 has only an intransitive meaning, as : 
 
 1. ayvvni,IhreaJc., Perf. iaya,I am hrohen (§ 275, 2). 
 
 2. lyupwy I awaJce, *^ lyprjyopa, lam awake (§ 275, l). 
 
 3. ndOw, I persuade, " iriiroida, I trust {irudoixaiy I fol- 
 
 low, ohey). 
 
 4. irnyvvfiL, I fasten, " TreVjjya, / stick fast. 
 
 5. prjyvviui, I tear, " Vppiiiya, I am torn (§ 278). 
 
 6. <7/i7rw, I cause to rot, " aianira, I am rotten, 
 
 7. rri/cw, I melt, " rtrrjica, I am melted. 
 
 8. <ltaivix),I show (rarely shine), Perf. iricjiriva, I have ap- 
 
 l^eared {^(^aivop.ai,I apjpear\ 
 
 On the (li'stinction between avtwya and av£(i>x", and be- 
 tween -Ki-wpaya and TrLirpaya, see § 279. 
 
 § 331. General View of the Accentuation 
 OF Verbal Forms. 
 
 The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the 
 accent is removed as far hack as possible from the end, is 
 subject to the following exceptions : 
 
 For all contracted syllables the accentuation is seen 
 from § 87. Hence Sokw, eXw^ev (§ 263), TrEaovjuLai (ttitttii}, 
 § 327, 15), TiOw^ai (§ 302), XvOw, Xv% (§ 296). Compare, 
 however, § 307, Ohs. 
 
 § 330. Dialects. — 9. Horn. daiu),lsetjire to, Perf. Udr]a, I have caught 
 fire. 
 
 10. Horn. tXTTw, / ghe hope, Perf. iokira, I hope. 
 
 11. Horn. (pOeipio, I destroy, Perf. {ci)t<i)dopa, I am destroyed. 
 
^08 ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. § 332. 
 
 § 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule 
 laid down in § 85, with the following limitations : 
 
 1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on 
 which the first word had it before the composition: aTro- 
 Soc, give hack (otto), not aTroSoc ; liriGXiq, hold in (liri), 
 not iTn(j\z^. 
 
 2. In double compounds the accent never goes back be- 
 yond the first : cvviK^oQ, give out loith ; irapivOeg, j)ut in 
 besides. 
 
 3. The accent never passes heyond the Augment or He- 
 duplication : a-rrriXOE, he went aioay ; atfiKrai^ he has ar- 
 rived. This is the case even when the Augment or Re- 
 duplication is not expressed : vtteTkov, I gave way ; a'vevpsy 
 he found again / (rvvoi^a, I hnow along with^ from oI§a, 
 Ihnow^^Qxva^ an exception. 
 
 § 333. The other exceptions are : 
 
 1. All Infinitives in v a t have the accent on the penult- 
 ima : TiOivai, Quvai, \i\.vKivaiy XvOrjvai. 
 . 2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in 
 w is perispome : Xafinv. 
 
 3. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone : Aaj3f- 
 aOat. 
 
 4. the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the 
 accent on the penultima : irai^ivaai, lirmvicjaL (§ 268, Ohs. 
 
 !)• _ _ 
 
 5. SO likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle : ttc- 
 TTttf^fucr^af, KEKOfiicrOai. 
 
 6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs 
 in (1) is oxytone : XajSwy. 
 
 7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aor- 
 ist Active of verbs in ju t is oxytone : riOeig, cnro^ovg. 
 
 8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active : Xe- 
 \vK(i)g {xna, 6g, Gen. orog) ; and, 
 
 9. that of both Aorists Passive : XvOcig, ypa^dg. 
 
§ 337. FOKMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209 
 
 10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxytone : 
 XeXyjuiivog. 
 
 11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aor- 
 ist Middle is perispome : XajSou. Only the compounds of 
 monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an 
 exception : irEptOov {ir^piTidrifjLL). Compare § 307, Ohs. 
 
 12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active 
 in the following verbs is oxytone : utte, sjpeak ; IXOi, 
 come; svpiyjl'iid; l^i, see ; \a(5i, take. But aTTfiTre, etc., 
 according to § 85. 
 
 On the accentuation of the three equal forms of the 
 Weak Aorist, see § 268, Obs. 1. 
 
 Peculiar Forms of Verbs in the Ionic Dialect. 
 
 § 334. Dialects. — The Iterative form, denoting the repetition of an 
 act, is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic 
 prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters a k affixed to the histor- 
 ical person-endings, in the Active as well as in the Middle, by means 
 of the connecting vowels o and e ; hence 1 Sing. Act. (tkov, Mid. 
 aKO]jii]v. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod, always. 
 The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect. 
 
 § 335. Dialects. — The Iterative c k may be affixed to the Present as 
 well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems ; hence we distin- 
 guish Iterative Imjjerfects^ as : tx-e-(7Ko-j/, / used to liave^ and Iterative 
 Aorists^as: U-e-ck-o-v^ I used to see ; IXaaa-aK-^-v ^ he used to drive ; the 
 former denote the repetition of continuance, the latter the repetition 
 of the occurrence of an action (§ 498). 
 
 § 336. Dialects. — In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation, e is 
 the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the 
 Iteratives of the Strong Aorist : fxev-e-crKop (/jievio, I remain)^ (io<jK-k- 
 (TKovTo {i36(TKw, I pasture), (pvy-E-crKe {(pevyw^ Ifl^e) ; a occurs rarely in its 
 stead : p'nrT-a-aKov (ptTrrw, / hurl), Kpinrr-a-oKov {icpvTrTU), I hide). Con- 
 tracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncon- 
 tracted : koXUgkov (KoXeoj, I call), or reject one of them : wOeaKov (w0£w, 
 I push), EiaaKov (edu), I leccve) ; the Stems in a sometimes change ae 
 to aa : vaiSTaaffKOV {vaieTccoj, I inlidbit). Compare vaurdq,, § 243, D. 
 
 § 337. Dialects. — In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation <tk 
 is affixed immediately to the Stem : t-^a-crfcov (Stem ^ a, ^»?/ut, I say), 
 
210 FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. § 338. 
 
 ard-ffKov {iarrjv, I placed myself), t<jKov instead of ia-cKov (Stein i q, 
 eifii, I am)j ke-<tk^to (Stem kei, Ksi/xai,! lie), ti-Oe-ctkov (TiOrj/JLi, I put), 
 prjyvv-aKov (prjyvvfii, I tear). For the Stem 6 X, as in other formations 
 {wXe<Ta, oXeao)), e is the connecting vowel : oX-e-o-Kcro. 
 
 CK is farther appended directly to the Weak Aoiist-Stem : Iprjrvaa- 
 <TK6 (tpTjTvoj, I pacify), fivrjcrd-GKETo (jivdoixui, I remember). 
 
 § 338. Dialects. — Many Stems of the Present and Strong Aorist in 
 poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have 9 added without any particular 
 modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the 
 Stems thus strengthened. The 9 is connected with the Stems some- 
 times by a, sometimes by e. The most important forms of this kind 
 are : 
 
 ^lofKu), additional form di(OKd9w, I pursue. 
 
 el Kit), 
 
 
 
 ^ eiKd9u), I yield. 
 
 dfivvta, 
 
 
 
 rifivva9ov, I warded off. 
 
 e'tpyo), 
 
 
 
 ipyd9ov {iepya9ov), I separated, sTiut off. 
 
 KllO, 
 
 
 
 tKia9ov, I went. 
 
 deipofiai. 
 
 
 
 r/epWovTai, they Twver. 
 
 dyEipo), 
 
 
 
 i)yepE9ovTo, they were assembled. 
 
 <l)9ivoj. 
 
 
 
 <p9nw9oj. 
 
 *xw, 
 
 (( 
 
 u 
 
 (TxiOeeiv, Aor. Inf., to hold. 
 
§ 340. SIMPLE DERIVATION. 211 
 
 III. DERIVATION. 
 
 Chap. XIII. 
 
 § 339. A word is either sivvple^ i. e., sprung from a single 
 Stem : \6y-og, speech (Stem X e y), ypcK^t-w, I write (Stem 
 y pacf), or co7npound, i. e.^ formed from two or more Stems : 
 \oyo-ypa^O'Q, sjpeech-writer. 
 
 A) Simple Derivation. 
 Simple words are either jprimitive {Verbalia)^ i. e.^ are 
 formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245) : apx~^h begiii- 
 ning^ from the Verbal- Stem a p\ (apx(i>f 1 hegin), or de- 
 rived {Denominativa), i. e.^ formed from^ a N'ominal-Stem 
 (§ 100) : apxa-lo-q, incipient, ancient, from the Nominal- 
 Stem dpxa, Nom. apxi], beginning. 
 
 % 340. Nouns are usually formed — whether from a Ver- 
 bal or from a Nominal- Stem — by means of a termination. 
 This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative- 
 ending or suffix. Thus X070-C is formed by means of the 
 suffix o from the Verbal-Stem Xty, apxa-lo-g by means 
 of the suffix Lo from the Nominal- Stem apxa. The suf- 
 fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or 
 to mark the different relations in which the general idea 
 of the Stem is to be conceived : Verbal-Stem ttoie {ttoilj, 
 I p7'oduce, compose), TToi-n-Tit-g, compos-^/*/ 7roirj-(n-g,com- 
 ■posi-tion ; 7rot?j-jua(r), composition, poem; Verbal-Stem 
 y pa^ {ypd<ptj, I vjrite), 7|oa<^-£v-c, ^^r\ier ; ypacji-i-g, writ- 
 ing instrument; ypapr^ay vfviting ; ypaji-fxi], a line; 
 Nom.- Stem St/ca {^Ikt], right), tiKa-io-g, right, just ; ^i- 
 Kaio-avvrj, righteousness ; Nom.-Stem (iaaiXev (j^aaiXev-g, 
 Mng), |3a(TtX€-ta, gueen ; j^amXt-lcif kingdom ; (^aaiXiKo-g, 
 kingly. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix : 
 ^wXa^, guard, Nominal and Verbal-Stem (pvXaK (^vXdaaoj, Class 4, 
 a,Igicard); 6\l/, voice, Stem 67r,Verb.-Stem Itt (elTrelv). 
 
212 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 341. 
 
 Obs. 2'. — The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary changes be- 
 .fore suffixes beginning with a consonant (§ 44, etc.) : .ypa^, 
 ypdix-fia, Xey, Xe^ie, WOJ'd ; diKad (diKaZio), ^iKaa-Trjg, judge. Vow- 
 el-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert a be- 
 fore several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the Weak 
 Passive-Stem (§ 298) : Troirj-fxa (compare Tre-Troirj-ixai), aei-a-fio-g, 
 shaking (compare Gk-trn-cr-fiai). 
 
 Obs. 3. — In many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change 
 in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect 
 (§ 278): Stem X a 0, X/j0-j;,/or^e^MZ;iess, compare \k-\r)9-a; Stem 
 TrefXTT, TTOfiTT-r}, escort^ compare Tre-TrofKp-a ; Stem Xitt, Xoitto-c, re- 
 maining, compare Xs-\onr-a. The most frequent vowel-change is 
 that of € to o : Stem tte^tt {Trefiiru), I escort), tto^tt-j?, escort ; Stem 
 ^Xcy {(fKkyio, I hirn), ip\6^, Jiame ; Stem rpEir {rpsTrio, I turn), 
 TpoTT-og, turning, manner. 
 
 Obs. 4. — A general rule for the accent of nouns is that the Neuters 
 are almost all barytone (§ 19) : to ykv-og, tJie race; Sui-po-v, gift; 
 XeiTpavo-v, remains ; Trvev-ixa, breath. 
 
 § 341. I. The most important Suffixes for forming 
 Substantives. 
 
 A) Substantives (Jenoting an agent are called nomina 
 agentis. The person acting or occupied in and belonging 
 to something is indicated by the following suffixes : 
 
 1. Ev, Nom. Ev-Q (always oxytone), Masc. (§ 137). 
 
 Examples of Primitive words are : 
 
 7(oa^-ey-c, «^5n^ER, Verb. -Stem ypa<p, Pres. ypdipco (Class 1). 
 yov-ev-g, begett-Bn, " yev, " yiy vo/iai (Class 8). 
 
 Kovp-Ev-g,barb-ER, " Ksp, " <c6/|0w (Class 4, d). 
 
 An examj^le of the not very numerous Denominatives 
 is : 
 
 7rop9n-ev-g,ferry-MAN, Nom.-Stem TropOfio, Nom. TropQii6g,X)Cissage. 
 
 Obs. — Several Masculines in e w - ? have Feminines in e t a (proparox- 
 ytones) : jSamXevg, Mng; (3aai\eia, queen. 
 
 2. TTjp, 'Nom. TTjp ^ T e I p a, 'Nom. Teipa ^ 
 Top, " Tiop CMasc. rpia, " rpia i-p^^ 
 ra, " Tr]-g ) Tpid, " rpi-g | 
 
 Tid, " Ti-g J 
 
§ 343. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 213 
 
 Examples of Primitive nouns are : 
 
 Stem and Nomin. (T(x)-Tr}p,deUver-En,'Mai3c. ) Verb.-Stem (toj ((tw?w) 
 " ad,-Tecpa, " Fem. \ (§298). 
 
 ^^ pr]-Top, " pn-Tiop, ora-TOR, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ipcj (§ 327, 13). 
 ^^ Kpi-Tu, " Kpi-Tf')-g, judge, " /Cjot, Pres. fcpiVto (§ 253, 
 
 Ods.). 
 
 -^ocn-ra,-^ ^ocy^-g,poet ) , ^ot.,Pres.7rocaa; (CI. 1). 
 
 Stem and JNomm. 7roir]-Tpia, poetess ) ' ^ 
 
 " avXrj-ra, " av\rirr]-g, Jlute-play-BH, Masc. ) Verbal- Stem avXe, 
 " avXrj-Tpid,^'' avXijrpi-g, " Fem. f Pres. auXew (CI. 1). 
 
 Examples of Derived words are : 
 
 Stem TToXl-Ta, Nom. TroXirrj-g, citizen, Nom.-Stem ttoXi, Nom. TroXi-g. 
 " oi/ce-ra, " otKgrT^-f, ^Zowes^ic, Masc. ^ Stem oi/co, Nom. 
 
 oiKE-Tid " oiKSTi-g, " Fem. f 
 
 OtKO-jf. 
 
 § 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are called 
 nomina actionis ; the following suffixes are the most com- 
 mon for them : 
 
 1. rt, Nom. Ti-g ■] 
 
 a I, " ffi-e, from rt-c, according to § 60, a [com- I Feminine, 
 pare Lat. tio\ | Barytones. 
 
 (J I a, " (Tia J 
 
 All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as : 
 
 TTia-Ti-g, faith, Verb.-Stem ttiO, Pres. Mid. TreiOofiai (Class 2). 
 
 fiifir]-(Ti-g, imitation, " ft i fie, Pres. (Dep.) jut/isojwai (Class 1). 
 
 (TKs\pi-g, contemplation, " (tkctt, " " (rK£7rro/iai (Class 3). 
 
 TTpa^i-g, action, , " Tjoay, Pres. Act. Trpdaaia (Class 4, a). 
 
 yere-(Ti-f, or^^^7^, " ye 1^(0? Pi'es. Mid. yiyvofiai (§ 327, 14). 
 
 doKifia-m-a, examination, " doKi/xad, Pres. doKind^uj (Class 4, b). 
 
 2. /xo, Nom. /tto-c (always oxytone), Masc. 
 
 a7ra-(T-fi6-g, cmm^, Verb.-Stem o-Tra, Pres. trTraw (Class 1), I draw. 
 de-(T-fi6-g,dond, " ^e, " dko), " lUnd. 
 
 ddvp-n6-g, wailing, " ddvp, ^'' 6^0jOo/iat (Class 4, d, 05s.). 
 
 05s. — From verbs in euw substantives in ud are derived, which de- 
 note the action, and are all paroxytone : Traihvu),! educate, irai- 
 Ma, education; (BaffiXeino, I am Tcing, (SaaiXda, lcing''s rule. Com- 
 pare § 341, 1, Obs. 
 
 § 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by : 
 
214 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344, 
 
 1. IX ar, Nom. /xa, Neuter (accent, § 340, Ols. 4). 
 
 Trpdy-fxalr], the thing 6Z(9?i€, Verb. -Stem Trpay, Pres. irpaarno (Class 4, a) 
 (almost the same as to TreTrpay/xevov, hat. factum). 
 
 pf}-fia[T], word,YeTb.-Stem. pe, Fut. kput (§ 327, 13) (compare to elprjfiE- 
 vov, Lat. dictum). 
 
 r/i)7-/ia[r], cw^, Verb.-Stem te/x, Pres. re/ivw (§ 321, 10) (compare to 
 TeTfitjfxsvov, the piece cut off). 
 
 2. €c, Nom. oc, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). [27). 
 Stem X a X - 6 f, Nom. Xaxog, Z(?^, Yerb.-Stem \ a %, Pres. Xayxavw (§ 322, 
 ." i0-ec, " Wag, custom, " £0, Perf. £(w0a (§ 275). 
 
 " TEK-eg, " TtKog^ child, " r £ k, Pres. n'fcrw (Class 3). 
 
 05s. — The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality : 
 
 (3dpog, weight, Adjective-Stem (3apv, Nom. (3apv-g. 
 f5d9og, depth, " /3a0v, " /3a0y-c. 
 
 fxfJKog, length, " fxaKpo, '"'' fiuKpo-g. 
 
 § 344. D) The instrument or means for an action is 
 expressed by : 
 
 Tpo, Nom. Tjoo-v [Lat. ^rw-m] (accent, § 340, Obs. 4). 
 apo-Tpo-v,plow, Verb.-Stem a |0o, Pres. apow (CI. 1) [«m-t?'w-m]. 
 
 \v-Tpo-v, redemption money,'"'' \v, " Xuo) (Class 1). 
 USuK-Tpo-v, a teacher's fee, " ^t^ax, " ^i^atricw (§ 324, 28). 
 
 05s. — The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rpa is less fixed : 
 ^v-(T-Tpa {^v(o,I scrape), scraper, instrument for rubbing; 6pxh-(T-Tpa 
 (opxeo/xai, I dance), dancing place ; TraXai-c-Tpa {iraXaiix), I wrestle), 
 wrestling school. 
 
 % 345. E) Place is indicated by : 
 
 1. TTjpio, Nom. TT]pio-v, Neuter proparoxytone. 
 dicpoa-Tripio-v, audi-toriu-m, Yerb. Stem uKpoa, Pres. ccKpodofiai (CI. 1). 
 hKaa-TYipio-v, judgment hall, " hKuS, " ^iKrd^w (CI. 4, b). 
 
 2. E 1 0, Nom. Ho-v, Neuter properispome. 
 
 \oy-(.lo'V, speaJcing place, from the Nom.-Stem Xoyo, Nom. X6yo-g. 
 Kovp-i.lo-v,barbef8 shop, " " Kovpev,^'' Kovpev-g. 
 
 M.ov(t-eIo-v, seat of th^ Muses, ^^ " Mov.aa, " Moma. 
 
 3. w v, Nom. wr, Masc. oxytone, 
 
 denotes a place where any thing is in abundance: a/iTreXwv, vineyard; 
 dvSpwv, men's room ; olvdjv, icine vault. 
 
§ 348. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215 
 
 § 346. F) Substantives of quality are derived from Ad- 
 jective-Stems by means of the following suffixes : 
 
 1. TT/r, Nom. Tr]-Q^ Fern. [Lat. tat^ tut^ Nom. tds^ tus\. 
 
 Stem Traxv-rriT, Nom. TraxvTTjQ, thickness, Adj. -Stem ttuxv, Nom. 
 
 TTaxv-g. 
 " veo-Tijrj " vsoTijg, youth, " v€o,Nom. v£o-e. 
 
 " lao-TTjr, " hoTTiQ, equality, " Lao, " 1<jo-q. 
 
 2. <Tu va, Nom. <Tw»;, Fem. paroxytone. 
 
 diKaio-(T V V r}, jlCStice, Aclj.-Stcm diKaio, Nom. SiKaio-g. 
 ffcj^po-ffvvT], soberness, " awtppov, " adxppwv. 
 
 3. ta, Nom. ta, Fern, paroxytone. 
 
 <TO(l)-ia, wisdom, Aclj.-Stem (TO(po, Nom. (ro(p6-g. 
 evdaifjiov-i a, bliss, " evdaifxov,'^'' evSaifioJV. 
 
 The suffix t a, with the vowel £ of the Adjective -Stems 
 in -Eg, Nom. -rig, becomes eia ; and when the final o of an 
 Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oia, 
 oia (proparoxytone); » 
 
 dXr}9E-ia, truth, Adj.-Stem d\r}9e[g], Nom. akr}9f}Q (§ 165). 
 evvo-ia,benevole7ice, " svvoo, " evvov-g. 
 
 4. 6c, Nom. og. Neuter, § 343, 3. 
 
 § 347. G) DiQuinutives are formed from Nominal- Stems 
 by the suffixes : 
 
 1. 10, Nom. w-v. Neuter. 
 
 7raid-io-v, little boy, Nom.-Stem rraid, Nom. Trai-g. 
 KTfiir-io-v, little garden, " kj^tto, " Kriiro-g. 
 
 Obs. — Other forms of lo are t^io (Nom. idio-v), apio (Nom. apio-v)^ 
 vdpio (Nom. vdpio-v), vWio (Nom. vWio-v) : oiKidio-v, a little 
 house {oiKo-g)', rrai^dpio-v, a little boy (Tral-g) ', jxeXvdpio-v, a little 
 song (jikXog) ; ei6v\\io-v, a little picture (eldog). 
 
 2. Masc. iffKo, Fem. ktku, Nom. laKo-g, ktkij, paroxytone. 
 vEav-i a k o-g, adolescen^wZws, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. veavm-g, 
 7raid-i<TKri,girl, " vaid, " 7raX-g. 
 (TTE<pav-i a K o-g, a little garland, " <TTe<pavo, " (TTs<f)avo-g. 
 
 § 348: H) Patronymics or substantives which denote 
 descent from a father (or ancestor) — more rarely the de- 
 scent from a mother — are most frequently formed by the 
 suffix S a (Nom. ^ri-g) for the Masculine, and only 3 (Nom. 
 
216 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 349. 
 
 -g) for tlie Feminine. The Masculines are paroxytone, 
 the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added to Stems in 
 a without any connecting vowel : 
 
 Masc. Boped-drj-g, Fem. Bopsa-g, Nom.-Stem Bo pea, Nom. Boped-g. 
 " Alveid-dr]-g, " Aiveia, " kivda-g. 
 
 The same is affixed to Consonant-^iQm?> by means of 
 
 the vowel i : 
 
 Masc. KeKpo7r-t-dr]-g, Fem. KeKp07r-t-g, Nom.-Stem KEKpOTT, Nom. Ke- 
 
 KpOXJ/. 
 
 Stems in ev and o of the Second Principal Declensiopi 
 also adopt the connecting vowel i, before which the v of ev 
 is dropped : 
 
 UriXe-i-d r]-g, from the Nom.-Stem UrjXev, Nom. Uri\ev-g. Homeric ad- 
 ditional form UriXrjiddii-g (compare § 161, D.). 
 Ar}To-i-S r)-g, from the Nom.-Stem Atjto, Nom. ArjTw, son of Leto. 
 
 The Stems of the 0-Declension substitute l for o : 
 
 Masc. TavraX-i-d rj-g, Fem. TavTaX-i-g, Nom.-Stem TavTaXo, Nom. Tdv- 
 TaXo-g. 
 " Kpov-i-dT]-g, *' K p o v o, Nom. Kpo vo-c. 
 
 Only those in lo (Nom. lo-g) change these letters to m : 
 
 Masc. eecTTid-drj-g, Fem. Oeand-g, Nom.-Stem QEffTio, Nom. Qeano-g. 
 " MevoiTid-d r]-g, " Mevo itio, Nom. Mevoi- 
 
 Tio-g. 
 
 01)8. — A more rare sufSx for Patronymics is lov or Xwv, Nom. kov : 
 Kpovicov, son of Kp6vo-g. The Poets take many liberties with re- 
 gard to the metre. 
 
 § 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing per- 
 sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf- 
 fixes : 
 
 1. €u, Nom. Evg (compare § 341), oxytone. 
 
 Msyap-ey-g, Nom.-Stem Meya/oo, Nom. rd May apa. 
 
 'EpETpi-ev-g, " 'Epsrpio, " 'Eperpia. 
 
 2. Ta, Nom. TT]-g, paroxytone. 
 
 Tiyed-TT]-g (Teyea), Aiyivr]-Ti]-g {Aiyivrj)^ 'RTreipuj-rri-g {'HTTEipo-g), SiK£' 
 Xi(ij-Trj-g (2<K€X(a). 
 
§ 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. 217 
 
 Obs. — The feminine gentile names end in d (Nom. -q) : Meyapi^, 
 Nom. Meyap/g ; T £ y e a r i ^, Nom. Teyeartf ; SuceXt wn^, Nom. 2t- 
 
 KtklCjTlQ. 
 
 § 350. II. The inost imjportant Suffixes for forming 
 Adjectives. 
 
 1. I o, Nom. Lo-q (proparoxytone), 
 expresses the most general relation to the idea of the sub- 
 stantive from which the adjective is formed : ovpav-i o-c, 
 heaven-^?/ (ovpavog) ; icjirip-i o-q, belonging to evening {ka- 
 TTtpa). The I sometimes combines with the final vowels of 
 Vowel- Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive 
 the circumflex : ayopa-X o-g, forensis {ayopa) ; aiSo-T o-g, 
 modest, from the Stem al^o (Nom. ai^wg) ; but ^iKa-io-g, 
 just, from, the Stem ^iku (Nom. ^iKrj, justice); so also, 
 after rejecting the g, we have from the Stem Os pag {to 
 Oipog, sicmmer), 6ipE-i o-g, summer-like. By the suffix i o, 
 adjectives are also formed from AdjectiveSteiins : eXevOip- 
 lo-g, liher-alis {iXevOepo-g, liber), and gentile adjectives 
 (§ 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used 
 substantively : MiXri<j-i o-q (for MiX^t-l o-g, from MiXtiro-g, 
 according to § 60), 'A9r}va-Xo-g {'AOrivai). 
 
 § 351. 2. Ko, Nom. Ko-g (always oxytone), 
 is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel i, 
 and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes ftness :- 
 ap^-L-Ko-g, suited for governing ; ypa(f)iK6g, suited for writ- 
 ing or painting (picturesque). Many Verbal- Stems insert 
 the syllable ri before the suffix ko (§ 342) : at(T0r/-n-Ko-c, 
 capable of perceiving • wpa-KTi-Ko-g, suited for acting. 
 From Nominal- Stems the suffix ko, Nom. Ko-g, forms ad- 
 jectives denoting what is pecidiar, belonging or referable 
 to the thing expressed by the noun : ^aaiXiKog, kingly * 
 i^vcTLKog, natural ; iroXejuiKog, warlike. 
 
 Obs. — By means of tins sufRx are formed the names of many arts 
 and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally 
 with the addition of Tix^^rj, art, science; ?/ hovo-i-kt}, music; i) 
 K 
 
218 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. § 352. 
 
 ypanfiar-i-Kr)^ from rd Ypd/xfiaTa, Utterce, grammar, tlie art of writ- 
 ing ; r) TUKT-i-Kr), tactics. The corresponding Masculine denotes 
 one who is experienced in such art or science : o fiovmKo-g, mu- 
 sician ; 6 ypafifiaTiKo-g, grammarian / 6 ruKTiKo-g, tactician. 
 
 § 352. 3. ivo, Nom. ivo-g, proparoxytone, and 
 
 4. f o, Nom. Eo-g [Lat. eu-s~\, proparoxytone (ovg peri- 
 spome, § 183), denote the material of which any thing 
 consists : \'S-i v o-q, of stone (XiOo-g) ; ^v\-i v o-g, wood-en 
 (^v\o-v) ; ^v(j-i o-g, ^vaovg, gold-en \aur-eu-s\ {^pvao-g), 
 
 Obs. — ivo, Nom. iv6-Q, oxytone, fonns adjectives of time: x0€<T-t»^o-c, 
 yesterday' s^irom. xQkg, yesterday ; tap-iv6-£,'Dermis; with enlarged 
 suffix : vvKT-ep-i V 6-Q, noct-ur-nu-s, 
 
 5. evT, Nom. Masc. ei-g, Fern, c trtra, Neut. ev, 
 
 denotes abundance : xapi-e i-g, grace-ful {^api-g) ; vXr^-f i-g, 
 wood-y (vXri) ; rjfxaOo-e i-g, sand-?/ (afxaOo-g). Compare Lat. 
 
 OSU-S : gV2i\A0SUS, ^WyOSUS, SiYeiiOSUS. 
 
 6. ju o V, Nona. Masc. juwv, Neut. fiov, 
 
 denotes the he7it or inclination to something : iivr]-jjL to v, 
 'ini7idful ; t\{\-ii to v, patient ; lTn\i](T-fx w v, forgetful. 
 
 Obs. — Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are : 
 vo, Nom. vo-Q, oxytone, mostly passive : ^u-v6-q, terriible; asfx-vo-g ((7t/3- 
 
 o-nai), venerable. 
 Xo, " Xo-g, mostly oxytone and active: dei-Xo-g, fearful ; cnruTri- 
 
 X 6-f , deceitful. 
 no, " /io-c, proparoxytone, partly active: ^dx-i-jJio-Q, warlike; and 
 
 partly passive : doid-i-/xo-£, capable of being mng ; akin 
 
 tb it is 
 mno, " mixo-Q, proparoxytone : xph^^^o-g, useful; tpv^ifio-g, capable of 
 
 being fled from, avoidable. 
 eg, *•' Tjg, Neut. eg : ^pevd-rjg, false, almost exclusively in compound 
 
 words (§ 355). 
 
 § 353. III. Derived Verbs 
 are formed in various ways from ir<?mm«Z- Stems. The 
 most important endings of derived verbs, differing little 
 from one another in meaning, are the following, arranged 
 according to their forms of the Present : 
 
§ 353, h, DERIVED VERBS. — ADVERBS. 
 
 219 
 
 1. o-w : \xi(jQ6-i))^Iliire 
 
 Xpvao-ijj, I gild 
 ^yjfiio-io, I jmnish 
 
 2. a-w : Tifid-io, I honor 
 
 aiTid-ofiai^ I Harm 
 yoa-w, / wail 
 
 3. €-w : apiOns-io, I number 
 
 evrvxe-<j^, I am fortunate 
 icTTopk-u}, I search 
 
 4. sv-(o : (3a<n\ev-(i), I am king 
 
 (3ovXev-o), I advise 
 
 5. iK-b) : cXttj^-w, / hope 
 
 eX\r}vi^-u), I speak Oreeh 
 ^iXiTTTt^-w, I am inclined 
 to Philip 
 
 6. a?-w : ^KaK-ia^ I judge 
 
 tpydK-ofiai, 1 WOrJc 
 ^id^-ofiai, I use violence 
 
 7. aiv-u) : (TT]fiaiv-iOj I sign 
 
 XevKuiv-oj, I whiten 
 Xa\e7ratV-w, / am it 
 
 8. vv-b) : I'jdvv-u), I sweeten 
 
 \an7rpvv-(jj, I brighten 
 
 (ijli<t96-q, hire). 
 (xpvao-Q, gold). 
 {^T]nia, punishment), 
 {rifir], hanor). 
 (aHa, hlame). 
 {yoo-g, wailing). 
 {dpi9fi6-g, number). 
 {^vTvxm, fortunate). 
 (i(TTiop, searcher). 
 {iSamXev-g, king). 
 (/3ovXi7, advice). 
 (IXTTi-g, hope). 
 {"EXXt]v). 
 
 ((piXnnro-g). 
 
 (SiKT], justice). 
 
 (tp-yo-v, work). 
 
 (/3ia, violence). 
 
 {(TTJfia, sign). 
 
 {XevKo-g, white). 
 
 (xaXeTTo-g, severe, indignant). 
 
 {r)dv-g, sweet). 
 
 {Xafi7rp6-g, bright). 
 
 Obs. 1.— From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with differ- 
 ent endings and with different meanings; thus from SovXo, 
 Nom. dovXo-g, slave : dovX6-io, I enslave, dovXev-io, I am a slave ; from 
 TroXefxo, Nom. TrdXefio-g, war, TroXe/ue-w and TroXefii^-oj, I make war, 
 TToXefio-oj, I make hostile. 
 
 Obs. 2. — A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in (teioj, as well as 
 to several in aw and lau) : yeXaGsiu), I am inclined to laugh; ^pa- 
 aeiix), I desire to do; ^ovdio,I want to murder; KXavaidoj, I want to 
 weep. The verbs of the last two terminations frequently indicate 
 a bodily weakness or illness: wx/oiaw, / am pale; d^OaXnidb), I 
 suffer in the eyes. 
 
 IV. Adverbs, 
 
 § 353, h. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives, com- 
 pare §§ 201-204. 
 
 From Verbal and Substantive-'^iQm^ adverbs are formed 
 by the suffixes : 
 
220 FORM OF COMPOSITION. § 354. 
 
 5dv, oxytone: ava-^av-^6v^<ypenly ; ayE\r]-^6v^gregatim. 
 
 St]v (aSrjv), paroxytone : KpvjS-S r] v, clam ; <Tv\\r](i-S ri v, collectively^ 
 
 hriejly (Stem Xa/3) ; (nrop-ddrjv, scatteredly (Stem airEp)^ o-Treipw, 
 
 / sow. 
 Ti, oxytone : dvofiaa-Ti, h/ name (dvofidi^w) ; iXkr}vi(T-Ti, gr(Bce {eXKrjvi^w). 
 
 B) Composition. 
 § 354. L JPorm of Composition. 
 
 A noun, standing' j^/'^^ in a compound, appears in the 
 form of its Stem : aGTv-yuTijjVf neighbor to the city ; x^po" 
 ^tSacTKaXo-c, teacher of the chorus / aaKiqrTraXog, shaker 
 of the shield (to o-aicoc)* 
 
 ConsonatitStems are usually united to the second part 
 by the connecting-vowel o : av^piavT-o-iroLO-g (6 av^pia-g), 
 maker of statues, statuary; iraTp-o-KTovo-g, murderer of 
 a father. This o, farther, is frequently inserted after weak 
 vowels : ^u(Tt-o-Xoyo-c, acquainted with nature ; \y^v-o- 
 ^w^o-q, fish-eating ; and regularly stands in place of a in 
 the Stem: i7jU£po-S]0o/zo-c, a runner hy day ; xw/oo-ypa^o-c, 
 descriher of a country. The o is dropped before vowels : 
 XO/o-Tjyo-c, leader of the choi'us ; 7raTp'a^eX(f>0'g, a father'^ s 
 hrother ; it remains, however, where the word originally 
 began with digamma (§ 34, D.) ; Hom. drfjULioepyo-g, Att. 
 ^rjluLovpyogj artisan. 
 
 Obs. — Exceptions to these rules are frequent. Thus Stems in or 
 often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds : ^Kpo-KvovoQ^ 
 Mlling with tJie sword (Stem ^ i ^ e e) ; Tuxo-naxia, « contest at the 
 wall (Stem Teix^Q)i the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes 
 preserved as a or ?; : dpeTd-Xoyog, a speaker about mrtUe; xorj-ipopog, 
 hearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of 
 the Stem-form : vewg-oiKog, shedfm' shijjs; dpEaai-^drrjg, wandering 
 on the hills. 
 
 § 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered 
 in composition, especially when the compound word is an 
 adjective : rt/i//, (piXo-Tijuo-gy amhitious y irpayfia, ttoXv- 
 TTpdjfjibJv, 'inuch occujpied. The ending y\ g Masculine and 
 
§ 358. FOEM OF COMPOSITION. 221 
 
 Feminine, e g Neuter, deserves special notice ; this ending 
 occurs : 
 
 a) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- 
 Stems : a-j5\aj5-r]g, uninjured (/3Xa/3, Pres. /BXaTrrw) ; av- 
 rapK-rjg, self-sufficient (avro-g and a/OKtw). 
 
 b) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub- 
 stantive in £ c (Nom. og) : ^cica-trijc, ten year's old (trog) ; 
 KaKo-{]Or]g, of a had nature {^Oog). 
 
 Obs. — Observe also the compound adverbs in e i or t, oxytone : 
 avTo-x^ip-i, with one's own hand; d-fxiaO-i, without pay ; 7rav-di]ix-ei, 
 with the whole people. 
 
 § 356. A verb — without changing its nature — can only 
 be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the 
 connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi- 
 tion of the Augment mentioned in § 238 : a7roj3aXXw, / 
 throw away; airijdaXov, I threw away. For the same 
 reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their 
 verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases 
 even in Attic prose (compare § 446). This separation is 
 called tmesis. 
 
 When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver- 
 bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, e. g., from 
 \iOo-g and Stem /3 a X, \i6o-f36Xo-g, throwing stones, and 
 thence Xt 0o/3oXf-w, I throw stones ; so likewise from vav-g 
 hnd fia^^o/iiai comes first vav-ixayo-gi fighting at sea, and 
 thence vavixayjihi ; from cu and Stem £ /o y, evipyirrig, hene- 
 f actor, ^vepy^ii),! do good. 
 
 § 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only 
 be compounded with a preposition without changing its 
 termination: irpo and /3ouX/) make Trpoj^ovXri, previous 
 consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub- 
 stantive must take a derivative ending : XiOog and ^oXit 
 make Xt0oj3oXm, throiving stones / vavg and fiaxn, vai>- 
 fJLaxia, seafijght / tu and Trpa^ig, evirpa^ia, well-heing. 
 
 § 358. Compounds having the first part formed directly 
 
222 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 359. 
 
 from a Verbal- Stem are rarely met with except in the 
 poets. They are formed in two ways, viz. : 
 
 1. the Verbal or the Present- Stem is joined directly to 
 Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning 
 with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels e, i, 
 or o : ^aK-i-Ovfio-g (Pres. ^clkv-oj, Class 5), heart-gnawing/ 
 TTud-apxo-Qf obedient to order {TreWojuaL and apxn) ; apx-i- 
 TtKTtJv, master-huilder ; fjucr-o-yvvo-g, hater of women (jui- 
 (ri(x)). 
 
 2. A form strengthened by o-, and resembling the Weak 
 Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part 
 of the word: Xva-i-rrovo-g, freeing from trouble; 7rXrj|- 
 nnro-g {wXridau), Class 4, a), tohipping horses; (Trpeipi-hKO-g 
 (orpf^w, Class l),perverter of right. 
 
 § 359. II. Meaning of Comjpounds, 
 In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and 
 Substantives are divided into three principal classes : 
 
 1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word 
 is the principal, which, without in any way altering its 
 meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds 
 may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into 
 an Adjective or an Adverb : ajCjOo-TroXf-c, high town, castle^ 
 i. e., aKpa TToXig (Hom. iroXig aKpri) ; juea-riiuj^pia, midday, 
 i. e., fjLiar] ri/uipa ; ipBv^o-Kripv^, i. e., ^ev^rig Ki]pv^y false her- 
 ald ; 6 fio-^ovXo-g, fellow-slave, i. e., 6 fjiov ^ovX^vmv; fieya- 
 XoirpeTrrig, grand, properly, ajpjpearing as great ; o^i-yovog, 
 late born, L e., 6\ps jevofKvog. This class is the least nu- 
 merous. 
 
 2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is 
 indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters 
 its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea, 
 which is attributed as a quality to another word. These 
 compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing 
 the Participle of ix^> ^^ ^ verb akin to it in meaning, and 
 adding to this the second word as an object, the first be- 
 
§ 359. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223 
 
 coming an attribute to the object : jjiaKpo-x^ip, longi-manus, 
 long-handed^ i. e., juaKpag x^^P^^ ^'x**^^ (^^^ ^^^ long hand 
 itself); apyvp6'To^o-g,j>?'ovided with a silver how, i. e., 
 apyvpovv to^ov (^ipuyv ; o/uLo-Tpoiro-g, of the same Jcincl, i. e.^ 
 ofxoiov TpoTTov f x^i^ 5 yXavK-ioTTi-g , hri(/ht-ei/ed, i. e.^ ykav 
 KovQ ocpdaXjuovg exovcra ; TriKpo-yajuo-g, having a hitter 
 wedding y Kov<^6~vov-g, frivolous^ trifling / o-Gj-<^|Owy, of 
 sound se?ise, sober ; ^EKa-sTiig, ten years old, i. <?., having or 
 lasting ten years j avTo-x^ip, making use of one^s own 
 hands. 
 
 Obs. — To these belong the numerous adjectives in -ojdrjg and osiSrjg : 
 yvvaiKoJdrjQ := yvvaiKO-eidrjg (ddog), WOmanZi^^, woman^sA, 
 
 3. Ohjective compounds, or those of dependency. In 
 them, either the first word is grammatically governed by 
 the second or the second by the first, so that in the para- 
 phrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case : 
 rivi-oxo-g = Ta r]via t'Ywv, ^?^?'<im^ ^A^ reins^ driver ; Xoyo- 
 ypa<po-g, speech-writer, i. e., Xoyovg ypa(f>ii)v ; a^io-Xoyo-g, 
 worth sj)eaMng, i. e., \6yov a^iog ; (l)iX6-iuiov(To-gy loving the 
 Muses, i. e., (j)iX{ov rag Movaag; ^£i(Ti-^aifjiwv, fearing the 
 gods, i. e., ^^^iwg Tovg ^ai/uLovag ; x^fjOOTronjroc, made hy 
 hand, i. e., Xipai iroir]T6g ; 0wl3\a(^{]g, injicred hy God, i. e., 
 viro Oeov jdtjdXapfxtvog ; oiKoytviw, horn in the house, i. e., 
 Iv o'/k(^> yevofxevog. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Prepositions may he joined with substantives in any of the 
 three principal classes — (1) Determinative : dix<pi-9eaTpov, a round 
 theatre, i. e., a theatre extending itself round in a circle; dir- 
 eXevOepog, one who has been freed by anothei-, not by himself, i. e., 
 a freedman (6 utto nvog IXsvOepog wv) ; (2) Attributive : tv-9eog, 
 i. e., Iv tavTtp Bebv txiov, carrying a god in himself, god-inspired ; 
 dfx<i>iKi(i)v, viz., vEojg, i. e., Kiovag afi<p' kavrbv ix^v, a temple encom- 
 passed around with pillars ; (3) Ol^ective : tyx^piog, i. e., iv ry x^P?- 
 ^ Mv, at home ; t^iTnnog, i. e., l^' 'iTnrqj wv, being on a Jwrse, belonging 
 to a hoarse. 
 
 Obs. 2. — Against the general rule (§ 85), according to which com- 
 pound words draw back the accent as far as possible from the 
 end, those compounds in -o-g in the Nominative, whose second 
 part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 356), usually accent 
 
224 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 360. 
 
 this Stem if it has an active meaning. They are paroxytone 
 when the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long : 
 Xoyo-jpd^o-Q^ speech-writer ; fiijTp-o-KTovog, 7)iotlier-murderer ; Traid- 
 aywyo-f, hoy-leader ; fiEXo-Troiog, composer of songs. When the mean- 
 ing is passive, the second word remains unaccented : avTo-ypa^o-g, 
 written hy one\ self; iirjTp-o-KTovo-Q, murdered hy the mother ; dva- 
 dywyogj liard to guide. • 
 
 § 360. The prefix a v [compare aveu, without, Lat. in-, 
 Engl. un-'\, before consonants a [compare Lat. i- in i-gna- 
 ru-s], called aljpha jorivative on account of its meaning, is 
 found in a very large number of compounds, which belong 
 to the determinative ciass if the second part has arisen from 
 a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attributive if from 
 a substantive : a-ypa^og, unwritten, i. e., ov yEypafi/nivog ; 
 av-BXevOapog, unfree, i. e., ovk tXtvOepog ; av-ai^ijgy shame- 
 less, i. e., al^u) OVK ix^*^ J airai-g, childless, i. e., Trdtdag ovk 
 iX^^' Determinatives with a v (a) from substantives are 
 rare and poetic: iur]Tr}p ani]Twp, an unmotherly mother, 
 %. e., iiy]Ty\p ov fxrjTTip ovcra, 
 
 Obs. — Words originally beginning with digamma (§ 34, D.) have d, 
 not dv: d-k-wv, contracted ukov, unwilling ; d-£ifc->ye, contracted 
 aiK-rjg, reproachful (Stem e t k, toiKo) ; d-epy6-g, contracted dpyo-g, 
 inactive (tpyo-v, work). 
 
 The prefix ^vg corresponds to the English 7nis, and, as 
 the opposite to eu, denotes something unfortunate, awk- 
 ward, difficult : ^vgapearog (§ 324:, 10), displeased ; ^vg- 
 /SouXoc, ill advised, i. e., KUKag (5ov\ag t'xwv (attributive) ; 
 cvgaXwTog, hard to capture (§ 324, 17). Here, too, de- 
 terminative compounds from substantives are rare : Hom. 
 Avgirapig, unfortunate Paris, 
 
PAET SECOND. 
 S Y N T AX. 
 
 Preliminary Hemarhs. 
 § 361. 1. Syntax {avvTa^iq^ arrangement) teaches the 
 use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, 
 and the way in which words are arranged into sentences, 
 and sentences are combined together. 
 
 2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every 
 sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen- 
 tence occur only once. 
 
 3. The necessary parts of a sentence are : 
 
 a) the Suhject, i. e., the person or thing about which 
 something is stated ; 
 
 h) the Predicate^ i, c, that which is stated. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com- 
 plete sentence in itself, in which the personal ending contains 
 the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate : 0?y/«t, / say ; 
 t<paixw^ ice said. 
 
 Obs. 2. — In many cases the Subject remains undefined : <paai, they 
 say, people say ; or it is not defined, because readily understood 
 by the Greeks : vu. Tie rains, i. e., Zeus, for he alone can cause 
 rain ; ttraXiriy^e, he Mew the trumpet., i. c, the trumpeter, for it is 
 his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs ^a, xphi ii «« 
 iiecessary, is also undefined. 
 
 4. The Predicate is either Verhal or Nominal ; it is 
 Verbal when expressed in the form of ^finite verb': Kupoc 
 i[5a(TiXev(rey Cyrus rided ; it is Nom,inal when expressed 
 in the form of a noun (substantive or adjective)*: Kupoc 
 jSamXfvc rfv, Gyrus was king. 
 
 5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., the 
 Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number and 
 case, and, when it is an adjective, in gender also : ot TroXt- 
 
 K 2 
 
226 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. § 361. 
 
 fjLioL £viKri(yav, the enemies conquered / rj juiaxrj fxeyaXt] ^v, 
 the battle was great. 
 
 Exceptions, §§ 362-366. 
 
 6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient to ex- 
 press the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject : 
 6 iii'yaq oXjSoc ov ii6vi\xoq, great jprosjperity is not lasting ; 
 Aipioi- KaKoi, the Lerians (inhabitants of the island of Le- 
 ros) are had. But mostly the Nominal Predicate is more 
 clearly connected with its Subject by the verb to he (sub- 
 stantive verb) : 6 fieyag oXfiog ov fiovi/uLog IcrriVf Aipioi tcaicoc 
 ti(Tiv. This verb, thus used, is called the Copula. 
 
 7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote to 
 heeome, he 7nade, appear, he named, designated, chosen, and 
 the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often re- 
 quire a Nominal Predicate along with the Verbal one. In 
 this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the 
 Subject : Kvpog lyiviTo fiaaiXevg, Gyrus hecarne king^ Cy- 
 rus rex foetus est. Compare § 392. 
 
 8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of 
 time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec- 
 tives, which are expressed in English by adverbs or prepo- 
 sitions with substantives. These adjectives, which must 
 agree with the Subject, are to be considered as supple- 
 mentary Predicates : rpiToXoi cnrtiXOoVf they ivent away on 
 the third day j AaKe^aifiovioi varepoi a<f)iKovTO, the Lace- 
 dcemonians arrived later, posterior es advenerunt ; opKiog 
 aoL Atyw, / tell you on oath. 
 
 On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate, 
 see ^ 589, etc. 
 
 9. A simple sentence is emiarged by an Object being add- 
 ed to tlfe verb. The Object is that to which the action of 
 the verb extends : ot 'A0r/vatot a-KkKTiivav tov Sw/c/oarr^v, 
 
 the Athenians killed /Socrates. 
 
 On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they 
 are indicated, see §§ 395-403. 
 
§ 361. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 227 
 
 10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning to 
 the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, i. e., the 
 verbs which denote to make^ name, designate, choose, and 
 the like, frequently also require a Nominal Predicate. 
 But, as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it : 
 Of Yiipaai Tov Kvpov hXovto (iacriXia, the Persians chose 
 Cyrus Icing [Per see Cyrum i^egem elegerunt\ Compare 
 § 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Pred- 
 icate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the 
 Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive 
 or Dative. Compare § 438 ; Ohs. % 589, etc. 
 
 11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Attri- 
 hiote, i. e., any nominal definition added to a substantive as 
 essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea : 
 KoXoQ "iTnroQ, a fine horse j' 6 irapiov Kaipog, the present time 
 (the present). 
 
 Obs. — The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the 
 designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea : Horn, ripuitg 
 Aavaoi, ye heroes Baiiai (ye warring Danai) ; dvdpeg SiKacrTai^ ye 
 judges^ judices. 
 
 12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposition. 
 Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a sub- 
 stantive as does not exactly form 07ie idea with it, but is 
 superadded .rather for describing or illustrating it, and 
 hence might generally be expressed in the form of a de- 
 scriptive clause : Ylapvaang, 7j tov Kvpov fxrjrrjp, tovtov 
 paXXov tcjiiXei fj TOV ^ApTa^tp^riv, Parysatis, the mother of 
 Cyrus — who was Cyrus's mother — loved him more than 
 Artaxerxes ; IvTsvOev Kvpog l^tXavvti Sm ^pvyiag Hg Ko- 
 Xo(T(TOvg, TToXiv olKOvpivrjv, ev^aifiova KaX fAEyaXr)v, fipom 
 there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi, a popu- 
 lous, prosperous, and large city (which was a . . . city). 
 
 The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the sub- 
 stantive to which they belong, in the same way as the 
 Predicate (5, 7). 
 
228 NUMBER AND GENDER. S 362. 
 
 Chap. XIV. — Number and Gender. 
 
 § 362. The singular sometimes has a collective sense, de- 
 noting a plurality : I <t // Cj clothing^ clothes ; irXlvOo g, 
 bric/cs / 77 t TT TT o Cj cavalry; ri atririg, the heavy-armed. 
 
 Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural re- 
 fers to collective substantives in the Singular : 'A0rjvatwv 
 TO TrXrjOog otovTat"l7r7rap\ov rvpavvov ovra airoQavtlv, 
 the mass of the Athenians believe Hijpjparchus died as 
 ruler; to cPTpaTtvfia tiropiZ^TO gXtov kotttovtsq tovq 
 (5ovg KOi ovovg, the army obtained food by killing the oxen 
 and asses. 
 
 A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, especial- 
 ly abstracts, which have no plural in English, especially 
 when the repetition of an idea is to be expressed : ai lir i- 
 <P av E I at KOL \a juTT p 6t r) T e g tie twv aywvwv yiyvtadat 
 (piXovmv, celebrity and glory usually arise from the con- 
 tests ; e/Liol ai aai fxeyaXai EVTV\iai ovk api(TKOV(Tiv,your 
 (repeated) great success does not please me ; Hom. iravTig 
 OdvaToi aTvyepoi, all kinds of death are hateful. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where 
 we employ the Singular with the indefinite article : ovk av ywai- 
 Kutv ij(T<roveQ KoKoifxeff dv, I should not like to T)e called inferior to a 
 woman ; (piXoi, a friend. • 
 
 'Obs. 2. — The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself 
 [compare Lat. nos]. In this case the Masculine is used even 
 when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says : TrsffovfieO', 
 d xpv, T^aTpl Tifnopov/xevot, I loill fall^ if it must he, as my fathers 
 avenger. % 
 
 Obs.^. — In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which 
 we express in the Singular ; the Plural, however, properly de- 
 notes the various manifestations of such ideas : i-KiroavvyQ 
 UeKaaro, by horsemanship he icas distinguished ; d(ppadiy<ri vooio, 
 in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) ofJiis mind. 
 
 § 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its mean- 
 ing to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek 
 custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in the Sin- 
 
§ 366. NUMBER AND GENDER. 229 
 
 gular : ttwc ravra iraiKTErai', how is this to end f ra 
 TT pay fiara Tavra ^ewa 1(jt l v, these things are terrible. 
 
 Obs. 1. — Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of persons, 
 sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as : to. HXr], in the sense 
 of the mithorities; ra iOvt], the peoples. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Introduc- 
 tion, 4) generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural : 
 
 Hom. (TTrdpTa XeXvvrai, the ropes are loosed. 
 
 • 
 
 § 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject (in English, 
 it) the Adjective Predicate is frequently^ in the Plural: 
 aSvvaTa Icjtlv awotpvyuvj it is impossible to escape ; this 
 is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in rto-c : 
 iTTix^tpvTia r]v,it was to he attemj^ted. 
 
 § 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the 
 Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and both 
 numbers may be used in referring to the same thing : 
 E'ytXao'arjjv ajucfxi), [5\i\liavT£g elg aWrfXovg, they 
 both laughed after looking at one another y' ^6tb^ irapa- 
 ^aiyfia, tj AaxvQ re kol Nticm, give an exaniple, Laches and 
 Nicias ^ w Kayj\q re Kai NtKta, uTrarov, O Laches and 
 Nicias say. 
 
 § 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as 
 well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive : Iv 
 ju £ o" (j>, in medio, in the midst ; iv ri^ irapovr i, at the 
 j>rese?it moment, for the present; Ik iroWovyfor a 
 long time ; S c t v a, terrible things. 
 
 Hence a Neuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to 
 one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to ex- 
 press a class or genus in general : Hom. ovk. ay aObv 
 iroXvKoipavirif the government of many is not a good thrnig; 
 opOov aXi^OeL aeiy truth is always the right thing ; Beivov 
 ol iroXXoi, KaKovpyovg orav t^wm TrpoaTarag, a bad thing 
 is the many when they have base leaders; rapaxat ica\ 
 araoHQ oXiO pia Ta7g TToXfcrtv, disturbance and disCord 
 are ruinous to states. 
 
230 THE ARTICLE. § 367. 
 
 § 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in 
 the Neuter as in German, frequently agrees in gender and 
 number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as in 
 Latin: ovtoi hctiv av^pig, those are men j ovroq opog 
 coTt ^iKaioarvvrjg aXr]Ori re Xiyeiv Koi a av \dj3ri rig airo^ido- 
 vai, this is the idea of justice, to speak the truth, and to 
 give hack what we have received \_haiG notio justitice est']. 
 
 The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and 
 Number, not with tlie preceding substantive to which it 
 refers, but with the substantive following, which is added 
 as a Predicate: (ItiXov, 6 luiyicrrov ayaOov lariVf ov (ppov 
 TiZovaiVy they do not care for a friend, which is the great- 
 est good. 
 
 Chap. XY. — The Article. 
 
 § 368. The Article 6, 17, to is originally a demonstrative 
 jpronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a 
 substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the 
 language of the other poets : Hom. rv\v eyw ov Xvau), 
 her / will not give ujp ; poet, tov, ^ Zev irarsp, ^^t'orov, 
 uiM, father Zeus, destroy , Hom. (^tdlau as to aov juivog, 
 this thy courage will he thy ruin. 
 
 § 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also 
 employed in the following cases in Attic prose : 
 
 1. In connection with ixiv and ^£ : 6 /xl v, the one ; 6 ^i, 
 the other. 
 
 O&s.*— Used adverbially, to {to) \ikv — to {to) de, mean partly — 
 partly. 
 
 2. Sometimes also with Kai and ^i : jcat tov KeXevcTai, 
 and that he ordered ; tov koi tov, the one and the other. 
 
 3. In TTjOo r ov, hefore that, formerly. 
 
 § 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the 
 English definite article. It serves to set forth an object. 
 
§ 374. THE ARTICLE. 231 
 
 either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a 
 class (the generic article). 
 
 Obs. — 6, »7, TO in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power. 
 Yet in many cases — compare especially § 379 — the use of these 
 forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The 
 Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is fre- 
 quently omitted also in the Tragic writers. 
 
 § 371. 1. The Individualizing Article sets forth a sin- 
 gle object above others of the same kind, and that : 
 
 a) as known or having been pointed out before : Herod. 
 XaXjcf 8f £c T CLQ Itt ^AprejuLKTito eiKom vrjaQ Trapei^ovTO, the 
 Chalcideans furnished the (before mentioned) twenty shij^s 
 at Artemision ; IS^ip^rig ayeipag Trjv dvapiOiuLr)TOv (rrpariav 
 ijXOev ewl ttiv 'EXXd^a, after having collected the (well- 
 known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched against 
 Greece. 
 
 Obs. — In this sense proper names also, which in general do not 
 need it, may take the Article : o ^oKpdTtjg, Socrates, whom you 
 know, or who was mentioned before. 
 
 § 372. h) A thing as distinguished from others by the 
 addition o^ distinguishing circumstances : 6 rwv 'AOrjvaiwv 
 ^rjl^og, the Athenian j)eople (no othei:) ; 17 woXig rjv noXiop- 
 KovfjL^v, the city lohich we are besieging (just this). 
 
 § 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by 
 the Article is often indicated in English by the, possessive 
 pronoun : cjcaoroc tCjv ^r]iiLOvpyC)v tt) v ri)(yriv KaXtog £$- 
 EipydZeroj each of the artisans practised his art well. 
 
 § 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some- 
 times denotes that the number to which it is added stands 
 in a defined relation to another number : rd ^vo julprj, two 
 thirds / Twv Tpiy]pii)v rpiaKoaiujv ovaCjv twv iracrwv rag 
 ^laKomag ii iroXig rrapicTX^To, of the triremes, of which there 
 were three hmidred in all, the city furnished two hun- 
 dred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative 
 adjectives of a more general kind : iroXXoi, inany — ot ttoX- 
 
232 THE ARTICLE. § 375. 
 
 Xoi, most; irXtovBgy more — ol nXeoveg, the greater part ; 
 aX\oi,alu — ol aXXoi, cceteri / oX[^oi,afew — ol bXLyoi,the 
 oligarchs. 
 
 § 375. 2. The Generic Article indicates a whole class of 
 homogeneous objects : ol iroXlrai, all the citizens ; 6 pwwp, 
 the orator (by profession) ; ^a tov (TTparitJTr}v top ap\ovTa 
 fiaXXov rj Tovg iroXEfxiovg (j)oj5ei(TdaL, the soldier must fear 
 his superior rather than the enemy. 
 
 Obs. — Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in 
 the plural when a whole class is to be described : o I ArjfioaOeveig, 
 . orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 363, Obs. 1). 
 
 § 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only 
 expresses an idea in general : aydpilyirov xpvxrj tov Ohov 
 pETtx^i, man's soul partakes of the divine / so 0f oc de- 
 notes the deity ; 6 0£oc, a particular god ; so likewise, in 
 many other current expressions, the more ancient method 
 of not using the Article has been preserved : wktoq, hy 
 night; r}iuifpag,hy day; IttX OaXcKrari, at sea; irpog ckjtv, 
 to town; Kar'aypoVfin the country; Kara yfjc, under the 
 earth ; Iv ^t^ia, on the right ; l^aiptj X6yov,I exempt. 
 
 % 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub- 
 stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force 
 of proper names : fiaaiXevg, the king (of the Persians) ; 
 TrpvTavEig, the presidents (as officials); hv clkpottoXei, i7i the 
 Acropolis (Athens). 
 
 § 378. The Predicate (§ 361, 3, lo) generally has no 
 Article : YJjpog tyivETo f^atriXev g rtjv Hepcrwv, Cyrus 
 hecame Jdng of the Persians; irovog evKXdag Trarrip, 
 labor is father of fame ; ol "AOrjvaloi IlspiKXia eIXovto 
 (TT parriy 6v, the Athenians chose Pei'icles general (com- 
 pare §§ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Ols. 
 
 § 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici- 
 ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, may be made a 
 substantive : Hom. 6 ylptjjv, the old man ; ol nXoixnoi, 
 the rich; 6 Xiywv, the speaker ; 6 TrtXac, the neighbor; ol 
 
§ 385. THE ARTICLE. 233 
 
 TrapovTsg, those present ; to. koltcj^ the tender (part) ; ot 7ra- 
 Xai, the ancients / to julktuv, hating or hatred. 
 
 Obs. — With the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence, 
 may be represented as one object : to dvrjp, the word dvrjp or the 
 idea " man ;" to TvutQi aeavTov, the saying or rule " Know thy- 
 self." 
 
 § 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea 
 of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative 
 phrase : tzoihtu) tovto 6 j3ovXo/x£voc, do that, who will; jmij 
 t^rireiTS rov ravra Xi^ovra, seeh not (one) who will say this 
 (compare § 500). 
 
 § 381. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub- 
 stantive, become attributive adjectives: oi tote dv9pu)7roi, the people of 
 that time ; i] TrapavTiKu ridovr), the momentary pleasure ; ai evOdde 
 yvvdiKEc, the women of this place ; rj dyav iXevOepia, the excessive free- 
 dom. 
 
 § 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan- 
 tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes 
 an attributive clause : tu tHjv 'AOrjvaiojv TrpdyfiaTa, the affairs of the 
 Athenians ; oi iv Ty iroXu avOpioiroi, the people in the city ; ?) Ka9' rjfikpav 
 Tpotpf], the daily nourishment; al dvev XvttCjv r/dovai, the painless pleas- 
 ures. 
 
 § 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with 
 the Genitive of a substantive (compare §§ 409, 410), some- 
 times with a preposition followed by a substantive ; in 
 such a construction the Article has the force of a substan- 
 tive (§ 379) : ra rwv 'AOr^vaiwv, the affairs (possessions, 
 interests) of the Athenians ; o\ Iv ry TToXei, ^/i^ (people) in 
 the city; ra /^tra ravra, what JvUows, the later (events). 
 
 § 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361, 
 ll) adjective has the Article, the adjective staiids between 
 the substantive and the article : 6 ayaOog avrjp, the good 
 man. 
 
 § 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and 
 the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the 
 substantive stands first, and the adjective with the article 
 follows, thus : 
 
234 THE ARTICLE. § 386. 
 
 a) The siobstantive without Article, when tlie case is 
 such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no arti- 
 cle : TL ^la^ipH avdpwTTog aKpaTrjg Or^piov tov aKpars- 
 arciTov; in what does an ungovernable man differ from 
 the most ungovernable beast f for if Or^piov stood alone it 
 would be without Article, dr]piov,from a beast. 
 
 b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even 
 without an adjective, it must have the Article : ol Xloi to 
 Tuxog ir^pieiXov to kuivov, the Chians pulled down (their) 
 wall— the new one (which they themselves had built) ; for, 
 even without the adjective, it would have to be to TCi\oq 
 TrepidXov (§ 373). 
 
 § 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po- 
 sition of the attributive additions mentioned in §§ 381 and 
 382 : 6 'A9r}vai(i)v S^/xoc, the Athenian jpeojple ; 6 S^/ioc, 
 6 rwv 'A^Tjvatwv, the people, that is, the Athenian ; 6 jueTo. 
 TavTa xpovog, the after time / 6 yjpovog 6 jueTo. TavTa, the 
 time v^hich followed this. 
 
 § 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either 
 precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre- 
 dicative, i. e.^ the character is assigned to the substantive 
 only by this word (§ 361, 4, 8, and lo) : ayaOog 6 avr)p or 6 
 :^vrjp dyaOog (viz., l(TTiv)ithe 7nan is good; aTravTsg txojuiev 
 TO (TWjua OvriToVf we all have a body (which is) mortal. 
 The translation may often be effected by a relative clause : 
 ol ^A6r]vaLOi riyovvTO avTOVOfxiov to irpCnov GViip.a\wv, the 
 Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at first (were) inde- 
 pendent / (jjaivoiuai fULeyaXag Tag v7ro(Txi(TEig iroiovfjLivog, I 
 seem to onake promises which are great. Compare § 378. 
 
 Obs. — Witli proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain 
 when the class is added to which they belong : b EixppdrrjQ -n-ora- 
 fiog or 6 TTOTafibg 6 'Ev^pdrrjg, the river Euphrates ; t) Ahvt] to opog, 
 Mount Etna; StKeX/a ?) vrjtrog, the island of Sicily ; r) ttoXiq ol Tap- 
 (Toi, the city of Tarsi. 
 
 § 388. T\\Q possessive pronoun is precededby the Arti- 
 cle when a single definite object is referred to : 6 Ifiog 
 
§ 391. THE ARTICLE. 235 
 
 iraipog, my (particular) friend ; Ifiog haipog, a friend of 
 7)iine. 
 
 § 389. aurocj as ^ jpredicate, ^\xi before or after a sub- 
 stantive with the Article, means self: avTog 6 TraTrip or 6 
 irarrip avrog, the father himself ipse pater ; but as an at- 
 tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive, 
 and means sam^e : 6 avrog dvrjp, the same man, idem vir. 
 
 With the demonstrative jpronouns ovrog, 6§c, iKuvogy a 
 substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article : 
 ovrog 6 dvrip or o dvrip ovrog, this 7nan y Ikhvo rb ^iopov, 
 that gift. But when the substantive is a predicate the 
 Article is wanting : Iv Uepdmg vo/uog e<jr\v ovrog, atnong 
 the Persians this is law. Compare § 367. 
 
 § 390. TT a c without the Article before a substantive with- 
 out the Article means in the Singular every : iraaa iroXig, 
 every dty. The Article before irag gives it the meaning 
 oi whole : i] ttcktu rroXigythe whole city,' rovg irdvrag onXi- 
 rag, the whole of the heavy -armed. Most generally Trac 
 as well as o\og without the Article precedes or follows a 
 substantive provided with the Article : Trao-av v^iv rrjv 
 dXtfOsiav lpCj,I will tell you the whole truth ; rov dpiOfxov 
 wdvra St'xa ^isXd(5oiJ.sv, we divided the whole number into 
 two parts / rrig rijiipag o\r]g ^iriXOov ov ttXeov irivre KaX 
 itKocTi xrradlwv, during the whole^ day they proceeded no' 
 more than twenty-five stadia. 
 
 Obs. — iraQ, with the Article added to a numeral, may often be 
 translated by " altogether" or " in all :" Aajoaoe llSaaiXevae to. 
 Trdvra U Kal TpiaKovra irr], Darius ruled altogether thirty-six years. 
 
 § 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently, 
 according to the position of the Article : terxarov to 6pog, the extreme 
 end of the mountain ; to ttrxaTov opoQ, the farthest mountain (in contrast 
 to other mountains); r) dyopd ixetrrj^the middle (of the) market-place; 
 r) ukat} dyopa, the middle market^ that placed in the middle of several 
 others. In hsiim, forum medium means both. 
 
236 THE NOMINATIVE. § 392. 
 
 Chap. XVI. — Use of the Cases. 
 A) The Nominative. 
 
 § 392. The Nominative is the case of the subject and of 
 the predicate belonging to the subject (§ 361, 3, 4). 
 
 Hence, as in Latin vfiihfio^dicorjVideoT^creor, etc., so 
 in Greek with verbs of the same meaning, 'the predicative 
 noun referring to the subject is in the Nominative : Kadi- 
 (TTarai Pa(Ti\evg,he is appointed king / ^AXl^av^pog Oeog 
 wvojuaZero, Alexander deus appelldbatur. Compare § 361, 
 7 ; §§ 378, 403. 
 
 Obs. — cLKovit)^ Ihear^ in tlie sense of lam called [Lat. avdio], also be- 
 longs to these verbs : oi Iv 'AOrjvaig (piMTnriKovTEg KoXaicag Kai 
 OeoXg ix^pol vKovov,the PMlippizers in Athens were called flat- 
 terers and objects of the gods' hatred. 
 
 § 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative 
 in addressing a person, especially in connection with ovj-oq : o 'AttoX- 
 \6d(x)poQ ovTog, oh TrEpifievelg ; You I Apollodorus, won't you stop 1 and 
 also in exclamations : vrjinog, the fool I , 
 
 B) The Vocative. 
 
 § 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Vocative. 
 In Attic prose w is generally put before it, except some- 
 times in animated discourse : fir) dopv^ure, w avdpig 'A0»;- 
 vaioi, don^t mahe a disturbance^ Athenians ; aKoveig Al- 
 (Txtvrj; do'youhear^^schinesf 
 
 Obs. — The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the 
 structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is in- 
 closed by commas. 
 
 C) The Accusative. 
 
 § 395. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark an 
 object as dependent, whence they are called cases of de- 
 pendence {casus obliqui^ oblique cases). 
 
 The Accusative is the case of the Object, and therefore 
 denotes generally the person or thing to which an action 
 is directed. 
 
§ 398. THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 237 
 
 The Object is either external to the action by which it 
 is affected : tutttw tov ^ovXov, I strike the slave, or inter- 
 nal, i. <?., already contained in the action itself: tvtttoj wev- 
 TYiKovra irXrjyag, I strike Jlfty blows. 
 
 Obs. — The Accusative, therefore, in the great majority of cases, is 
 dependent on a verb. Only in a very few cases does it happen 
 that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an 
 Accusative : ol avjx^axoi reOvaai t<^ Ssei tovq toiovtovq ccTroffToXovg, 
 the allies are dead (beside themselves) /rom/e^r of such embassa- 
 dors. 
 
 § 396. 1. The External Ohject 
 is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in 
 other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in 
 Greek as transitive which in other languages are intransi- 
 tive. Such verbs are : 
 
 . a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it 
 be by act or speech : tv or ayaOov Trotew, evEpjETiw, I ben- 
 efit {roxjq evfpjETridavTagf my benefactors^ ; 6vivr]fjiif w^eXtw, 
 J am xiseful y KUKiog or kukov iroiiii), icaicow, T do ill/ 
 a^iK^w, I do wrong ; vj^piZio, I insult ; jSXaTrro), / hurt, 
 etc. ; also icoXa/cfuw, I flatter, and TLfxiopio/aai, I avenge my- 
 self {tov Ix^pov, on my enemy) ; 6 Sa>jC|oarr/C ovctva twv 
 TToXiTwv -n^iKtitjEv, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his 
 fellow-citizens. 
 
 § 397. Not unfrequently the verb of a jDrincipal clause takes as its 
 object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause : 
 
 Kai fioi TOV vibv eiTre, d /xeixdOjjKS Trjv rexvrjv, more animated than Kai fioi 
 dire, d 6 vibg ii£nd9r]Ke ri^v texvtjv, and tell me about my son, whether he 
 has learned his trade. Compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2. 
 
 § 398. b) The Accusative of the external Object is used 
 with the verbs : ^^vyw (compare fugio), a7ro^i^pa(TKw, I 
 run away from ; <^0avw, / get before ; OtjpaM, OrfpEvcj, I 
 hunt after; fxifuLiojuai (compare imito?'), ZrjXoto, T rival ; 
 afxhi^ofxaiy I repay, I respond to ; XavOavo) (compare lateo), 
 ekXeitto) (compare deficio); IkXeitth jU£ 17 iXirig, spes me 
 deficit. 
 
238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. § 399. 
 
 § 399. c) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of 
 emotion : al^eoimm, aKTX^vofxaiy I am ashamed {tov iraripa, 
 hefore my father) ; ^vXarTojiai, ivXap>iojiai, I am on my 
 guard against; Qappiti), I have confidence (rriv i(Txyv,in 
 my strength) ; eKirXriTToiuai, KaTairXriTToiuai, I am amazed 
 at ; similarly with ojuvvjui, I swear hy {tovq Oeovg, the 
 gods). 
 
 Obs. — As witli oiivvfii, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used 
 even without a governing verb : vai fia tov Ata, Tes^ ly Zeus ! 
 (§ 643, 16). 
 
 § 399 J. The S^ace and Time over which an action ex- 
 tends are often expressed by the Accusative : koivtiv oSoy 
 riXOoiuLw, yje came hy a common road ; Horn. KXifiaKa 
 v\prj\riv KarefdrjaETo, she came down the high ladder ; 
 ir\uv BaXacraav, to navigate the sea ; evravOa Kvpog ifxuvE 
 nuipaQ irivre, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare 
 § 405. 
 
 On the Accusative of the aim^ see § 406. 
 
 § 400. 2. The Internal Object 
 is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, 
 but also with intransitive and passive verbs. 
 The internal Object is : 
 
 a^ a word of cognate origin with the verb : Horn. a^Ckoi 
 ^' h-ii^ aWrjm judxriv Ijulolxovto irvXy^aiv, alii circa alias 
 jportas jpugnam jpugnahant ; retx^? ruxCCovTai, they 
 wall (build) a wall ; TrojUTrrjv TrifXTreiv, to send an escort, 
 make a solemn procession ; KaKiarrjv ^ovXeiav b^ov\ev(T£v, 
 he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery) ; 
 Hom. rt[» TTEiaeai 6q kev apicTTriv jdovXrfv f^ovXevtr^, you will 
 obey him who advises (gives) the best advice; rr\v ivavriav 
 voaov vocTovfiEv, we suffer (sicken) from the ojyposite sick- 
 ness ; fjLEyaXrjv Tiva Kpimv Kpiverai, he is judged (tried) in 
 a great trial ; 
 
 b) or a word akin to the verb in m^eaning / irkriyriv tvtt- 
 rsrai /3a/ourarnv, he is struck a very severe blow ; iraaag 
 
§ 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 239 
 
 vocTovg KajjLVH, he suffers from all diseases ; poet, o^vpfxara 
 yoacrOai, to moan lamentations / ttoXejuov e oTjoarevo-av rov 
 hpbv KoXovjULEvoVfthey marched out to the so-called holy 
 war ; ypacpriv ^iwKuv, to pursue with a lorit (compare 
 ypa(l)rjv ypa^EcrOai) ; 
 
 c) or a substantive defining the verb : ^OXv/xiria vikuv, 
 to conquer in the Olympic games ; ydfiovg lormv, to give 
 a marriage-feast; Horn. vo(Trov odvpojUBvoi, weeping for 
 the return ; fxivm irvHovTEg 'Axato/, the courage-hreathing 
 Achceans ; ayyeXiriv eXOnvyto go a message; nvp ocjiOaX- 
 fioim ^e^opKtjg, looking fire with the eyes (flashing fiery- 
 looks) ; 
 
 d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb : 
 IeXkoq ovraaai, to strike a wound (produce by blows) ; op- 
 fcm raixvHVyfoedus ferire,i.e.,fo6dus hostiam feriendo ef 
 ficere / poet. i\^i. (17 avap\ia) rpoirag Karapprtyvvcn, it (an- 
 archy) hreaJcs flight, i. e., produces flight by breaking through 
 the ranks. 
 
 § 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective 
 or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a 
 special qualification, almost like an adverb (§ 400, c) : 
 oXiyov cnrtivat, to he a little way off; jxiy a \pev^eTaif 
 he tells a great lie (compare /miya xl^^v^og \pevdsTai) ; tov- 
 T o \aip(i), at this I rejoice ; ri ^^prtcrojuiai rovrtoj what 
 use shall I make of this f ir avra Trdaofihi, I will ohey in 
 all things. 
 
 § 402. 3. Double Object. 
 
 Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double 
 Accusative ; the following, which most frequently occur 
 with this construction, may serve as examples : ^^i^ddKii) 
 {e^i^a^av tov irai^a rriv fxovmKi]v, docuerunt jpuerum mu- 
 sicam) r KpvTTTOjf I hide ; Ipwrdu), I ask ; aiTicj, I demand; 
 TrpcLTTOfiai, I acquire {dpyvpiov rovg irapovrag, money from 
 those who are present); kukov Xiyto rovg axOpovg, I speak 
 
240 DOUBLE OBJECT. § 403. 
 
 ill of my enemies ; a(^aipko}xai, cnrocTTepioj, I deprive of/ 
 avajuiiuvrjCTKU), I remind of/ Ivtvii), kiK^iivvviii, I put on 
 {tlvcl ')(^iTU)va, a coat on some one) ; Tr^pi^aWofxai, I encircle 
 {ruxn TYiv itoKlv, the city with walls). Horn. : 17 ^£ jiiyav 
 larov vtpaivev ^iirXaKa, she wove a double garment at the 
 loom (§ 399, h), 
 
 Obs. 1. — In the passive construction the thing remains in the Accu- 
 sative : diSdcTKOfxai ttjv fiovaiKrjV'^ a<pypr}fiaL tov 'ittttov, I am 
 robbed of the horse. 
 
 Obs. 3. — ^Many other verbs besides these have a double Accusative, 
 by an external object being added to the internal one : Horn. 
 ov Zevg (piXei TravToirjv ipi\6Ti]Ta, whom Zeus loved with multiform 
 love, i. e., to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (§ 400, 
 a) ; AhxivrjQ Krrjffi^oJVTa ypa^tjv Trapavofiiov ISiioKev, ^schines pros- 
 ecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of violating the law (§ 400, b) ; poet. 
 TToXXd ere odvpfiara KUTeldov Ttjv 'Hpa/cXetov t^odov yoatfievtjv, many 
 tcailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles 
 (§ 400, c) ; Hom, iXkoq fie (ipoTog ovraaev dvrjp, the wauiid which 
 a mortal man struck me (§ 400, d). 
 
 § 404. 4. The Accicsative as a Predicate. 
 
 A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the 
 Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10, 
 and 392, which signify naming^ deeming^ onahing, appoint- 
 ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a double 
 Accusative in the Active — one of the external Object, and 
 one of the Predicate : ol KoXa/cec 'A\i^av^pov Oeov tjvo- 
 }jLaZ,ov, the flatterers used to call Alexander a god ; alpn- 
 adai Tiva or par r]y6v, eligere aliquem ducem / oi> roiig 
 irXdcTTa exovrag ev^ai/uLOveaTa t o v g vojiiZii), I do not 
 deem those possessing most the happiest ; -Kapi^^ l/uavrov 
 evTTBiOriy I show myself obedient ; cXa/Be tovto ^tj pov, 
 he received this (as) a gift. 
 
 Obs.— The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre- 
 dicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the passive 
 construction both Accusatives must become Nominative*, accord- 
 ing to § 392. 
 
 § 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined to 
 
4®i- 
 
 § 405. DOUBLE 0BJE®4: 241 
 
 verbs and adjectives, to point out to wliat the idea of 
 these words refers, in Teference to what tliey- are to be 
 understood : Ka/xvw Tr\v k^(^ a\y]v,I suffer in the head 
 (compare § 400, h) ; o^ikoq ircKrav a^iKiav, unjxist in 
 every (kind of) injustice (in every way, compare § 400, 
 a)\ "EXXrjveg elm to y ivog, they are Greeks in race; 
 ev txojuev TO. (Tw fiara, we are well in hody ; Hom. o/x- 
 fxar a koX ic £ a X ?) v 'iKeXog Ail repTTiKepavviOf in eyes arid 
 head like thunder-loving Zeus ; wapOivog KoXri to tldog, 
 a maiden heautiful in form, or of beautiful, form {facie 
 pulchra) ; ouSeic avOptJirog avTog tt clvt a aoc^og, no 'inan 
 is himself loise in every thing ; 6 Map(Tvag TroTajmog ukocfi 
 KCLi irivTe iro^ag hx^ to tv pog, the River Ma/rsyas was 
 twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the 
 Accusative of reference. 
 
 Obs. — Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac- 
 cusatives : TO ovofxa, in name, by name ; to TrXtjOog^in number; t6v 
 TpoTTov, in character ; tovtov tov TpoTrov, in this way ; tyjv <pv<jiv, by 
 nature; Trp6^a(nv,on the pretext, ostensibly ; diKT]v,UJce; xapiP,for 
 the saJce of (gratia) ; to irav, altogether, on the whole ; ttoXv, by far ; 
 Ti, quid, what f why ? tI KXaieig ; why weepest thou ? avrd tuvtu 
 ijK(t),for this very reason I have corns. 
 
 § 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the 
 Accusative expresses extension (compare § 399, h) : Hom. 
 Trav i]ixap (^ipointiv, a whole day I was home along., to- 
 turn diem ferebar ; j^amXevg koX "EWrjvEg cnruxov aX- 
 XtjXwv TpicLKovTa (TTaSta, the hing and the Hellenes 
 were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Hom. XdireTo 
 ^ovpbg lpu)r]v,he remained a spears throw behind ; tov 
 filv tv TraOovTa eel fiefxvr\adai tov tt clvt a X9 ^"^ ^^f ^oy 
 Se TTOLTiaavTa Evdvg £7riXe\ri(T0aiy he who has received kind- 
 nesses ought to remember them throughout all time, but he 
 who has done them immediately to forget them. 
 
 Obs. 1. — An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard to 
 time, is to be translated by since before or ago : kjSdSfiriv ijfispav 
 rj Ovydrrjp avT<^ iTeTeXevTrjKEi, his daughter had died seven days be- 
 fore. ■ ' 
 
 L 
 
242 THE GENITIVE. § 406, 
 
 Obs. 2. — Freer Accusatives, referable chiefly to time, are : tovtov 
 Tov xpovov^ at this time ; to \onr6v,far tlie future, henceforth ; riXogy 
 at last; Trporepov, formerly ; dpxnv, up to the beginning, hence en- 
 tirely; TYjv Taxi(Trr]v, supply 6d6v,tlie quickest (way); ixaKpdv,far, 
 distant. 
 
 § 406. In the poets, the Accusative joined to verbs of 
 motion also denotes the j)lace toward which an action is 
 directed : Horn, rov ^l KXiog ov pavov 'ikh, Ms fanfie 
 reaches up to heaven ; wCjg riXOeg "A jO 7 o c ; quomodo Ar- 
 gos venisti f On the absolute Accusative of participles, 
 see § 586. 
 
 D) The Genitive. 
 
 % 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing helong- 
 ing to another. 
 
 Obs. — Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a noun, 
 and, even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that 
 with a noun. 
 
 § 408. 1. The Genitive with Suhstantives, 
 
 One Substantive may be joined to another in various 
 ways ; the most common are : 
 
 1. Sa)ic/oarj]c ^ 'Siw ^ pov i <t kov vlog, Socrates son of 
 Sophrokiscus : Origin. 
 
 2. 7] oiKia TOV Tvarpog, the father's house : Possession, 
 
 3. vofiKTiua dpyvpiov,a silver coui : Material. 
 Horn, ^iirag olvov,a cup of wine : Contents. 
 
 4. Gt TrXuaTOL t Cj v 'EW ri v w v,7nost of the Hellenes: 
 Partitive Genitive. 
 
 5. 6 (}i6f5og tCjv TroXefjiiwVf metus hostiurn, i. e., either 
 
 a) the fear of the enemy .^ i. e., the fear w^hich the 
 enemy feels {Subjective Genitive), or, 
 
 h) the fear about the enemy, i. e., the fear of which 
 the enemy is the object {Objective Genitive). 
 
 6. ^ovKog irlvre juvwv, a slave worth five Tnince : Value, 
 
 7. ypa^ri Kkowrig, an accusation of theft : Cause. 
 
 8. irokiTov aptTY], a citizen! s virtue : Quality. 
 
§ 412. THE GENITIVE. 243 
 
 9. Horn. TpoiiiQ TTToXiSpov, the city of (called) Troy : 
 Designation. 
 
 Which of the two substantives in any particular case 
 has to be expressed by the Genitive is generally quite as 
 clear from their meaning as in English. 
 
 But the following special peculiarities in the use of the 
 different kinds of Genitives deserve to be noticed : 
 
 § 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father, 
 even without the addition of a Substantive : 2wK|oar»jc o 
 1>w(l)povi(7Kov, Socrates, the son of Sojphroniscus ; MiKria- 
 ^rig KliuLwvo g, Ifiltiades, son ofKimon; poet., At6c*'A/o- 
 r^piq, Artemis, daughter of Zeus. 
 
 § 410. J) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has 
 very diflferent meanings (compare § 383) : to. tCjv 'EXXr^- 
 vb) V, the affairs, interests, possessions of the Hellenes (com- 
 pare ra 'EXXr]v«ica) ; to Tr\Q 6\Ljap\iag, the nature of the 
 oligarchy y on the other hand, to tov ArjfiocrOivovg, the 
 word of Demosthenes ; to. tCjv ^iKijjv Koiva, the property 
 of friends is common. 
 
 § 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the ex- 
 pressions : HQ ^L^aaKoko v <^ofrav, to go to the master's 
 (house), i. e., to go to school ; Iv or elg "Ai^ov (Homer, hv 
 ^Ai^a o ^ofjioig, in Ilades^ dwelling, dominion), in or into 
 the lower world. 
 
 § 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4)3 denoting a whole 
 to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla- 
 tives : TT o X X o I TMv ^AOr)vaiwvj multi Atheniensium ; tt o- 
 TEpog TLJv aSfX^wv ; which of the two brothers f iravTojv 
 apioTOQj omnium optimus ; but also with various adjec- 
 tives: 01 (TTTov^aloi Tbjv TToXiTOJVfthe assiduous among 
 the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems : ^a 
 OEawVf the divine one among goddesses; drijuov avrip, a 
 man of the people ; and similarly, a v^j/o rwv pr^Topwv, a 
 man from the number of the orators. 
 
244 THE GENITIVE. § 413. 
 
 The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the 
 whole territory; e?)]3ai rrig Boiwriag, Thehes in Boeotia ; 
 with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which 
 is attained by degrees : dq tovto avoiag r}\9ov, eo usque 
 insanice progressi sunt. 
 
 Obs. — Adjectives wliicli have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow 
 the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them : 6 rj/xKrvg tov 
 Xpovov, the half of the time (instead of to ijixiav tov xpovov) ; ») 
 TrXdaTT] TfjQ x<^P«C, '^^^^i of ihe land. 
 
 § ^13. e) The Objective Genitive (5, e) may be translated 
 by various prepositions: wvoia tCjv (I}l\ix)v, benevolence 
 tovmrd friends ; airopia aiTovyWant of food; Hom./f^oc 
 l^x\rvoq i\^\ iTOTr\To Qy eagerness for food and drinh ; riavxia 
 Ix^P^ ^y J9^(2C6 from enemies ; ayihvig Xoyw v, contests in 
 speeches ; cKpopfxri Epytjv, stimulus to deeds; aTrocrramc T(i>v 
 ^AOrivaiwv, defection from the Athenians ; Xvmg OavaTov, 
 deliverance from death ; j3/g iroXirw v, with violence against 
 the citizens, in spite of the citizens. 
 
 2- Genitive loith Adjectives and Adverbs. 
 % 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec- 
 tives and their adverbs, i. e., to such adjectives and adverbs 
 as are conceivable only in reference to something, and 
 points out the person or thing they refer to. The most 
 important adjectives of this kind are : 
 
 1. KoivoQy common; l^iog, olKHog, own, peculiar, and oth- 
 ers which imply property or belonging to, as : vaog hpbg 
 TOV 'AttoXXwvoc, ^ temple sacred to Apollo (possession, 
 compare § 408, 2). 
 
 2. Adjectives denoting j^Z^wi^^/ ^^^ want (contents, § 408, 
 3), as: iuL£GT6gftiunr\sii)g,TrX7] prig, full; ifKovaiog, rich ; Iv 
 ^BTig, wivrig, necessitous ; farther, the adverb aXig, enough : 
 iravTa EV(l)pO(Tvvr}g irXia i]v, all was full of joy. 
 
 3. Those signifying acquainted or imacquainted with : 
 llxiTupog, peritiis ; aireipog, imperitus ; lTri(TTrifxu)v, sldlled 
 
§ 416. THE GENITIVE. * 245 
 
 (rixvv^, in o^Ti art)\ fjLvyjjudJv, ajuvrjjuwv, mindftd and un- 
 mindful. 
 
 4. a^ioQy worthy j ava^ioQy unworthy ; TrXeUrov a^iov, 
 worth most, the worthiest thing (§ 408, 6); 
 
 5. Adjectives implying participation (§ 408, 4), whether 
 it be positive or negative: fiiroxog tov 7r6vov,particeps 
 laboris; ajxoipog, without a share j' ainog, author, guilty, 
 reus. . 
 
 Obs. — To these belong many adjectives compounded with dv (d, 
 § 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the 
 genitive : poet. aio)v kukCov dyevarog, a life which has not tasted of 
 misfortunes ; cpiXbJv uKXavrog, unwept ty friends. 
 
 6. Adjectives in -iKog (§ 351) denoting capability or fit- 
 ness for (compare 3) something : ^L^aGKokiKoq jpa/uiuaTiKrig, 
 capable of teaching grammar ; TrapacTKevaariKbg tcjv ug rbv 
 TToXcjuoy, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. 
 
 § 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni- 
 tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412): 
 TTou yfie; where on earth? so with IvTog, within ; aW, 
 inside; iKTog, without ; t^oj, outside/ o.yxi) lyyvgy nXtj- 
 aiov, near; Trpoo-w or ir 6 ppto, forward ; iripay beyo'nd ; 
 evOv, straight towards ; irporrOev, tjULTrpocrOev, in front; om- 
 (rOeVf behiiid; djKliOTipwdiv, on both sides; avh), upward 
 (TTora/xwi', up-stream^) \ and corresponding with these also 
 some adverbs of time and manner : TrrjvUa Trjg rjl^epag ; 
 at what time of the day f iruig 'i^^ig rfjc yvh)fxr)g ; what do 
 you think? XaOpa ra>y yoviwv, secretly from the parents. 
 
 § 416. The Comparative may have the object with which, 
 any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla- 
 tive in Latin) : iulh^wv tov d^eX(l>ovj major fratre, i. e., rj 
 6 d^iX(l)6gy than the brother; ov irpogmu rbv apxovra 
 TMV dpxo/mhujv irovrfpOTepov uvai, i. e., rj rovg dpxofiivovg, 
 it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than 
 the governed. 
 
 Obs. 1. — This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents 
 
246 THE GENITIVE. § 417. 
 
 y with the Nominative or Accusative ; yet it may also more 
 freely represent ?/ with the Dative : poet. TrXejwv xp^^^^Qi '^^ ^^'^ /^' 
 apkcTKuv ToiQ KCLTio Tuiv tvOd^E (tj Tolg tvOdSe), longer is the time that 
 I must please those below than tJmt I must please those here. 
 
 Obs. 3. — Like th6 Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined 
 with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com- 
 pared : poet. <l)doQ KoXXi arov twv Trporspwv, a light most beautiful 
 in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected 
 (pdoQ KdWiov riov Trporepujv, lux prioj^bus pulchrior, or (pdoQ KdWt- 
 GTov Trdvrwv, omnium pulcherrima. 
 
 Obs. 3. — All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow the rule 
 of Comparatives : hTrXdaiog, doubly (as great as) ; hvT^poQ (ovdevog), 
 second {to none) ; vonpoQ, later than ; 'irepoQ, another than. _ 
 
 3. The Genitive with Verbs. 
 Very many verbs are joined with the Genitive on the 
 general principles mentioned in § 408. 
 
 § 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (§ 361 > 7 
 and 10) with verbs which denote being., becoming^ making., 
 deeming.^ in order to predicate something of a substantive, 
 as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any 
 other way qualifying it, § 408 : SwK/oarTjc ^(i)(l)povi(Ticov rjv, 
 Socrates was Sojphroniscus' s son (§ 408, i); i] oiKia rov 
 irarpog tyivtroy the house became the fathers jpro^erty 
 (§ 408, 2); TO rCiyoq \iOov TTfTrotrjraf, the wall has been 
 made of stone (§ 408, 3) ; ol eEcro-aXoi rwv 'EXX?}vwv naav, 
 the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (§ 408, 4) ; TroXt- 
 Tov ajaOov vojuiZeTai Oappuv, to be courageous is deemed a 
 good citizen! s quality (§ 408, 8). 
 
 Obs. — The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob- 
 servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun 
 or pronoun : tovto vfiajv ndXiara Oavixd^oixev, this we most admire in 
 you (properly : this of you we most admire). 
 
 § 418. 2. The Genitive of Material (§ 408, 3) is also 
 used with verbs oi plenty and want (compare § 414, 2): 
 iripnrXrijiL, ir\r]p6ii),I fill ^' irXi^Bw, y^jjib), I a7n full ; ^eojuai 
 (Sti poi), I need ; ra wra iviirXridav ^aipoviag aocpiag, they 
 filled the ears with wondrous wisdom; 6 irapwv Katpbg 
 
§ 419. THE GENITIVE. 247 
 
 TToXXijc (ppovTi^og KaX j3ouXr/c ^iiTai, the jpresent time is in 
 need of much reflection and advice. 
 
 % 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (§ 408, 4) is used with 
 many verbs which only jpartially affect the object of the 
 action : 
 
 a) With all verbs which contain the idea of sharing : 
 luieTi\u) {jiiTiiGTL fjiQi), I have a share in ^ jmeTaXajildavti),! 
 take a share in ; jueTa^iEufxi, I give a share (rJjc Atmc, of 
 the booty) \ KOLvijjviw, I share (compare § 414,5); Hom. 
 aiTOv 8' al^oiT] rafiir} TrapiOr^Ke ^apiZ^Ofxivr] Trapaovrtuv, the 
 modest stewardess brought bread sujpjplying from the store. 
 
 *Obs. — oCo),I smell, also belongs to these: jivpojv 6K^i,he smells of 
 myrrh. 
 
 b) With verbs which denote touching^ laying hold of 
 seizing : airroixai, xpavw, I touch ; txofiaiy I hold by, border 
 {Tivoq) on something^' avTi\oiJiai, l-rriXafiptavofiaL, I lay 
 hold of; Xafij^avu) Tiva T7}g ^iLpog,! seize one by the 
 hand ; ap\o\mi, I begin (r ^ c tt a t ^ 1 1 a c, with the educa- 
 tion)-, poet, ^avovrtiiv ov^lv aXyog airrf^rai, no jpoAn 
 touches the dead. 
 
 c) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at : oro- 
 Xa^ofxai Tov gkottov,! aim at the- goal ; optyoimai, /strive; 
 ^ixpaw, I thirst,; rvy\aviii, I hit, attain (fVux^ twv aOXwv, 
 he wo?i the prizes); l(lnKvovnai, I reach, attain; r'lKw, I 
 have attained (Herod, ^vvafxiog, power). 
 
 d) With verbs which denote enjoying : laOiw, I eat ; 
 irivw,! drinJc ; y^vu),! give a taste; k(jTiab), I entertain; 
 aTToAaww, / enjoy {imeyifTTwv ayadwVf the greatest blessings); 
 tvog av^pog iv (Ppovriaavrog TroXAot av diroXavaEiav, 
 inany %oould enjoy a man who has thought sensibly. 
 
 e) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu- 
 merated under a — d, that is, the exclusion from a share in 
 something: a-i\o^ai, I refraiii {gltov , abstineo cibo); x!^- 
 pitii) , I separate ; upyw^I keep off; aripicsKM , I deprive ; 
 TTavojuai, I cease; tiKw, Trapa\iopi(x), I yield ; Xuw, / loose ; 
 
248 THE GENITIVE. § 420. 
 
 IXevOepou), I free j t^u^o^xai, I sjpare ^ afiapTavii), cnrorvy- 
 yavu),I miss,' \piv^opai, ac^iaWofxaiy I aon deceived {rrig 
 IXiri^ogy in my ho])e). 
 
 Obs. — Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative 
 when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by the 
 action : irXdarov fispog rivog /zfrixetv, to Jiave the greatest part in 
 any thing; irivio oJvov, I drinJc wine; qivov, some wine; Xayxavio 
 ri, I attain something; rtvog, a share in something. 
 
 § 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de- 
 noting a sensuous or m^oral jyerception or emotion (com- 
 pare § 414, 3), as: aKOvtj, aKpoaofiai, I hear j aKrOavofiai, 
 I perceive ; iiifxvy]<jKOfiaiy I rememher {rov (^i\ov, memini 
 amici); imXavdavofJLai, I forget ,' fxiXn fioi TLvoqylTrip.^Xi- 
 ofiaif I am concerned about sonnetliing^ I care ; Ivrpinoiuai, 
 Hom. aXiytjy aXeyiZtjj, I concern myself; ajULsXtio, I neg- 
 lect ; oXiyiopiu), I care little about ; Ipad), I love (§ 419, c); 
 iTriOvjuioj, I desire ; irvvOavofiaL ri Tivog, I learn something 
 about one. 
 
 Obs. — The Accusative also is admissible with several of these 
 verbs : with ukovu), if the object is directly audible : ^96yyov, a 
 sound, but tov didauKoXov, the teacher. 
 
 § 421. 5. With verbs of estimating, buying, selling, etc., 
 the Genitive denotes the value or price (compare § 408, 6, 
 and § 417) : 6 dovXog Trivre p.vu)v TifiaTai, the slave is valued 
 at five mince; iroXXov wveiaOai, magni emere; raXdvTov 
 airo^oaOai, to sell for a talent. 
 
 § 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni- 
 tive denotes the cause (§ 408, 7, § 414, 5): kXott^c ypa^^- 
 adai aiaxpoVffurti occusari turpe est ; (povov ^itoKsiv, to 
 prosecute for murder; (pEvyn irapavofiwvyhe is charged 
 with violating the law ; airi^vye KaKtjyopiag, he was ac- 
 quitted of libel; kaXhiaav Ttpo^ocjiaq, proditionis condem- 
 nati sunt. 
 
 Obs. — With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the 
 cause, as : QavfidZo) o-e rrjg aojtppoavvrjg, I admire thee for thy mod- 
 eration ; Hom. xw6/i£voe ywaiKoq, angry about the woman. 
 
§ 425. THE GENITIVE. 249 
 
 § 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs which 
 imply the meaning of a Comparative (§ 416), as : Kpariuj 
 {icpHTT(i)v el/JLi), cLp\ii) {Kpoiaog AuSwv ^Vx^^> Crmsus ruled 
 over the Lydians) ; jSao-iXeuw, / ride ; iripiup.i, -rrepiyiyvo- 
 fxaijlam sicperior ; -nrraoimaL {inTwy ufxi), I am inferior; 
 Xdiro/bLai, v(TTepi(ij,Iam behind; ^ta^apw TivoQfdiffero ab 
 aliquo ; fiap^aptov "EXXrjvag apx^tv aicoc, '^t is reasonable 
 that Hellenes should rule over barbarians. 
 
 § 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded 
 with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense 
 which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen- 
 itive (compare Chapter XVII.) : £ic/3aXXw tlvcl rifxrig, I 
 
 eject sotne one from office ; irpoaraTzvu rf)(,* iroXzwQ, he pre- 
 sides over the state ; 1<jxvv tov ^lkuiov irpoTiOrjGiv, he pre- 
 fers might before right ; Kara(l>povuv nvog, to desjpise any 
 one; Karriyopdv tl tivoq^Io accuse one of a thing ; Trarpiov 
 yv rri ^AOrjvaiiov woXei TrpoeGravai tu)v 'EXXr/vwv, it VMS a 
 hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at 
 the head of the Hellenes. 
 
 4. Freer use of the Genitive. 
 § 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with 
 a noun or verb, expresses : 
 
 1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan- 
 guage of poetry, and that eithei^ the place fro7n which 
 something is removed : '[(rraaOe [5adpo)Vf get up from the 
 stej)s; virayuv rf/c oSou, to go out of 'the way (compare 
 § 419, e) ; — or the space within which something takes 
 place (compare §§ 412, 415) : rfjc 'Iwvmc tovto ai(s\pov 
 vevo/uiiaTai, within Ionia that is considered disgraceful; 
 Hom. i;f<^oc oh (^taiv^To iraariq yairig, no cloud ajppeared 
 within the com/pass of the whole earth ; ip^ovTai ir^^ioio, 
 they go through or within thej^lain (compare the German 
 ich gehe des Weges). 
 
 On another local Genitive, see § 412. 
 
 L2 
 
250 THE DATIVE. § 426. 
 
 § 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitiv^),in which case it is 
 a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of 
 time (§ 412) within which something takes place: rpig 
 Tov IviavTov, thrice in the yeai* j i]fxipag,hy day j vvKTog, 
 hy night y tov avTov yiifjLwvoQf in the same winter j tov 
 XoLTTovyfor the future ^' \p6vov av\vov,for some timej 
 iKaaTov tTovg, each year. 
 
 § 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7, 
 § 422), in exclamations : otjuoi Trig rvyr\g^ alas ! for my 
 fortune (compare the German O des Leides) ; and in In- 
 finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to). 
 § 574, 3, Ohs, 
 
 § 428. 4. Occasion, time, circumstances, etc., as an al>so- 
 lute Genitive, in connection with participles, just like the 
 absolute Ablative in Latin : Kvpov (iamXevovTog, Gyro reg~ 
 nante, § 584 (compare the German : stehenden Fusses), 
 
 Obs. — The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute 
 Ablative of the Latins, without a participle ; when the verb to le 
 occurs in the clause the participle u)v is to be used : te jpuero^ aov 
 Traiddg uvtoq. 
 
 E) The Dative. 
 § 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or 
 thing more remotely connected with an action. 
 
 Obs. — The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on 
 adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive. 
 
 § 430. 1, Dative <di iha person concerned. 
 As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person more 
 remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and : 
 
 a) with transitive verbs it is the so-called indirect oh- 
 ject : ^om. kwTa ^i ol Swo-w svvaiojLieva TTToXUOpa, and I 
 will give him seven flourishing cities. 
 
 h) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a 
 thing conceived as a person to which the action refers : 
 
§ 435. THE DATIYE. 251 
 
 iTpiiTu fjLoi Tij a thing hecomes me / Stt [loi nvog, I need 
 something ; IjuoX ovrw ^okeT bx^iv, it seeUis to me to he so ; 
 /3orj0w rote (J\)iilio.yoiq, SUGCurro sociis / ireiOov rolg vo/moLc;, 
 ohey the laws ; fux^o'^e rote Oioig,pray to the gods; fxifM- 
 ^ofxai Toiq fxadr]Taig,I rej[)roach the scholars. 
 
 Obs. — Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed 
 by the Dative : j? Iv n^ TroXefiq) roTg avmidxoiQ (3oT]9Ha, the help to 
 the allies in the war. 
 
 c) with Adjectives : 6 ayaOog tio ayaOc^ fxovog (plXog, the 
 good alone is dear to the good. 
 
 431. 2. Dative oi interest. 
 
 The Dative denotes the person for whom — for whose 
 interest — something is or takes place ; hence 
 
 a) the person henefited or injured {dat. commodi, incom- 
 modi) : irag avrjp avrto irovu, every man toils for himself; 
 (l>d6vog /mijKTTov kukov Toig i)(ov(Tiv avTov, envy IS the great- 
 est evil to them that have it. 
 
 432. h) the possessor with tt/xf, yiyvoimai, and similar 
 verbs: iroXXoi fioi cjiiXoi daiVy I have many friends. 
 
 Obs. — The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined 
 with a Substantive : Herod., 61 a^t /Sdee, their oxen. 
 
 • § 433. c) the symjpathizing person (ethical Dative) : poet, 
 w tLkvov, y\ f3l(5wsv r\iiLv 6 ^ivog ; O child, has the stranger 
 left us f ri yap Trarfip juoi irpia^vg Iv ^o/ulokti ^pa ; for what 
 is my aged father doing in the house f 
 
 § 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (common- 
 ly vTTo with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as 
 one interested in the action : Hom. iroXUg ^ajuev "Eicro/ot 
 S/q>, many were overcome by godlike Hector ; ri TriirpaKraL 
 Toig aXXoig ; what has been done by the rest f This Da- 
 tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -Tiog : t/uoi 
 TToXejUY^Ttov Igtiv, miM 2)ugrvaiyJiiim est. 
 
 § 435. e) the person remotely connected with an action : 
 riOvTix ^H-'^v TToXai, he died to you long ago-; Hom. wcktiv 
 
252 THE DATIVE. § 436. 
 
 Ksv TpwecTGi Kv^og apoio, thou mightest get thee fame with 
 all Trojans ,' Horn. toIglv avtcrrr}, among them arose ; vtto- 
 Xafi^avHv ^a ti^ toiovtm on tv{}Or}g laTiv, in regard to such 
 a one we must su^pjpose him simjple. 
 
 Obs. — In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly 
 with, partly without, an accompanying noun : Hom. 77/tiTv dvarog 
 i(TTi 7repiTpo7rsu)v iviavroQ IvOdde fiifivovreaffiv, it is tJie ninth year 
 Jar us lingering here; r) diaj3dvTi tov Trorafibv irpbg koTrkpav 6d6g, 
 the road westward when you have crossed the river ; yiyverai n tfioi 
 (3ovXofisv(p, something ha/ppens to me as I wish; crweXovrt. or mq 
 avv^XovTi eiTreiv, to spealc briejly. 
 
 § 436. 3. Dative of community. 
 
 With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com- 
 munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person 
 or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such 
 a meeting takes place, is in the Dative. 
 
 a) Verbs of this kind are : Koivajvuv, I share {rivi rtvoc, 
 something with one) ; crvfKJiwviu), o/uioXoyiu}, <tuvo[Sw, ojulo- 
 voiu), I agree ; u/bioioofiaiy I resemble ; o/unXia), I associate 
 with; ^laXiyoiiaiy I converse ; ^icK^lpofxaiy I differ ; juaxo- 
 fiaif I fight ; Ipi^io , I dispute ; ra tpya ov av/uKpoyvH roTg 
 Xoyoig, the deeds do not harmonize with the words ; poet. 
 KaKoiaiv \xy] npogojuiXei av^pdaiVy aXX alei tCjv ayaOiov t'x^o, 
 with bad men do not associate, but always hold to the 
 good. 
 
 b) Adjectives : \(jog, like / ofioiog, TrapaTrXrjcriog, simi- 
 lar / 6 avTog, the same ; oiKuog, ^^log, j[>eculiar ; Koivog, 
 common (compare 414, l); vjuivvv/Liog, of like name; cruv- 
 wvvjuog, of like meaning; ^ta<popog, different; IvavTiog, 
 ojpposite : wirXiaiuivoi rjtjav roig avroTg Kvpi^ oirXoig, they 
 were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus. 
 
 c) Adverbs : besides those derived from the adjectives 
 just mentioned, especially afia, at the same time; ojuov, 
 together : afxa t^I} halpoj, at the same time with his friend. 
 
 § 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which, com- 
 
§ 440. THE DATIVE. 253 
 
 pounded with prepositions, denote a contact, or union, es- 
 pecially with such as are compounded with h, avv, liri, 
 yet also with those compounded with irpog, irapa, irspi, 
 VTTO, as : iTnaTi]p.r]v Ifnroiuv ry x^vxy, to bring knowledge 
 into the soul ; i-KiKua^ai nvi, to press tcpon, to tirge, orle ; 
 iTTiTifxuv Tivt TL, to rejproack one with something * irpogdvai 
 Tt[) ^i)iu(jt)y to come before the jpeojple / TraptcrTaaOai, irapelvai 
 Tivt, to suj>port one; TrspiiriTrTstv nvi, to meet one. 
 
 § 438. 4. The Instrumental Dative, answering to the 
 Latin Ablative, denotes that hy or hy means of which an 
 action is brought about ; hence 
 
 «) the "means or instrument (compare Sta, § 458) : Horn. 
 rov fjilv Kara GTrjOog f3a\s ^ovpi, the one he struck on the 
 breast with the spear; optjfxev To1g o^daXpoXg, we see with 
 the eyes ; ov^ug iiraivov ri^ova7g licr/jo-aro, 7io one gained 
 praise by pleasures ; Zvimiovv nva Qavarix), to punish one 
 loith death ; Horn. Tiauav Aavaol t/za ^aKpva aolm jScXeo-- 
 mv, may the Danai pay for my tears by thy darts, 
 
 Obs. — Hence the Dative is used with xp>l(TOai, to make use of; as the 
 Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often 
 added (§ 361, 10) : tovtojv nai (pvXa^iv txpn'^'o, some of them he used 
 as guards. 
 
 . § 439.^) the operating power or cause from which an 
 action proceeds : avOpioirog (pvcreL ttoXitikov, man {is) by 
 nature fitted for the state ; iroXXaKig ayvoia a/uLapravoiuev, 
 we often err from ignorance ; (j)6(5uj, from fear. 
 
 Obs. — With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or 
 occasion of the emotion : tjdofiai, x«'P<^ ^y ixovaiKy, I delight in 
 music; XvTTovfiai, I am grieved; %aX£7ratVw, / am angry; arkpyM^ 
 ayaTrCJ^iI am satisfied (with something); aiaxvpofiat, lam ashamed 
 (about something). 
 
 § 440. c) the measure, by which a thing is measured, 
 by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis- 
 tinguished : TO. fxiXXovTa Kpivofiav Tolg y^'yzvr]fxivoig, thefu- 
 
254 THE DATIVE. § 441. 
 
 ture we judge ofhy the jpast ; dUa treat irpo rrig ev ^a\a- 
 fjiivt fxa\r]g ot ^ Adr]vaioi Iv MapaOiovL fy/jcrjcrav, te?l years 
 hefore the hattle of Salamis the Athenians conquered at 
 Marathon; noXXi^) /ndZivv, multo major (also ttoXv, § 404, 
 Ohs^\ ^ia(piptiv Tivog ^povi]<TUf to differ from any one in 
 insight. 
 
 § 441. 5. The, freer use of the Dative expresses: 
 a) the way and manner, or an accompa;nying circum- 
 stance : TovTio rtp TpoTTM, iu tMs way ; ^'la, by force; 
 (Tirov^y, with seal; aiyy, in silence; tpyc^, in fact ; r([) 
 ovTi, m truth ; l^ia, privatim ; Zmxoma, puhlice ; Hom. 
 vrjTriirjm, in his folly (§ 362, Obs.). 
 
 Obs. — The Dative with avrog should be particularly noticed : 6 
 <^i\nnroQ TrevTaKOcriovg tTnreag iXafSev avrolg toIq ottKoiq, Philip took 
 Jive hundred horse together with their armor. (Compare the Dative 
 of community, § 436.) 
 
 § 442. b) The j^ted? where something happens is ex- 
 pressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry : 
 MapadCjvif at Marathon; Hom. 'EXXa^t oiKia vainjv, in- 
 habiting his house in Hellas ; Hom. rof wjjLoiaiv e'xwv, 
 having the bow on his shoulders ; poet. 68o7c, on the way. 
 
 § 443. c) Time is expressed by the Dative as definitely 
 limited in answer to the question when : r^Sf rij vvkti, hac 
 node; ry vGTipaia,on the following day ; TerapTa) lTu,in 
 the fourth year ; ^OXv/uLwioicat the Olympic ' games ; poet. 
 Xsijuspiii) voTt^y in a stormy south wind. 
 
 05s.— Notice the diflference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the 
 Genitive (§ 436), in their application to relations of time. 
 
447. THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 
 
 Chap. XYII. — The Prepositions. 
 
 § 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are 
 combined with a verb, to define the direction which the 
 action of the verb takes, or they are used independently, 
 and serve, in connection with different cases, to point out 
 the relation of single words in a sentence to one another 
 more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone. 
 
 § 445. Obs. 1. — As the name prcepositio (TrpoOacrig) points to tlie first 
 of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with verbs, 
 such as: dvev, without (poet, ■^t'xa, xwjo/c) ; dxpi, f^^XPh ^^^^^' f^^Ta^v, be- 
 tween ; svEKa^ on account of; irXqv, besides, are called spurious. They 
 are all used with the Genitive (compare § 415), except wg, to, which 
 has the Accusative. 
 
 § 446. Obs. 2. — All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many of 
 them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose : irepi, 
 beyond, very ; fierd, later; irpog, in addition. On account of this ori- 
 gin, their position jn Homer is very free ; they may be separated 
 from their verb as well as from their substantive : Hom. iv S' avrbg 
 tcv(7ETo vuipoira xa^Kov, and he himself put on the glittering brass ; dn<pi 
 Se xcti'''<^'^ cjfioig aXaaovTai, and the manes wave around the shoulders. On 
 the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, see § 90. In prose 
 only TTEpi is sometimes thus used. 
 
 § 447. With regard to the cases joined with Prepositions, 
 the following general rules are to be noticed : 
 
 1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object 
 upon which, over which, toward which an action extends 
 (§§ 395, 405), and with many Prepositions the goal of an 
 action itself (§ •406). 
 
 2. The Genitive frequently denotes iho^ jplace from which 
 an action proceeds (§ 425), often also a moral relation 
 (§ 408, etc.), while it depends on other Prepositions in the 
 same way as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415. 
 
 3. The Dative denotes a more external connection (§§ 435, 
 
 442). 
 
256 prepositions with the accusative. § 448. 
 
 General View of the Prepositions. 
 § 448. I. Prepositions which can have only one case : 
 
 A) the Accusative : uq, wq. 
 
 B) the Genitive : avri, airo, Ik (c^, tt/oo — aviv, a-\pi, 
 
 C) the Dative : Iv, gvv (Svv). 
 
 II. Prepositions which can have two cases : 
 
 A) the Genitive and Accusative : 3m, Kara, virip. 
 
 B) the Dative and Accusative : ava. 
 
 III. Prepositions which can have all the three oblique 
 cases : ajuipi, Itti, /uL^ra, irapa, Trepi, irpog, vtto. 
 
 I. Prepositions which can have only one Case. 
 
 § 449. A) Prepos-ltions with the Accusative. 
 
 1. elg or £c (Lat. in, c. Accus., and inter), to, into, points 
 out the goal toward which the action is directed. The 
 opposite is t^, oict. tig is used : 
 
 a) of jplace : ol AaKt^aifiovioi Eiglj3a\ov elg rrjv 'Arrfjcr/v* 
 the Zacedcemonians invaded Attica; elg ^iKaarripiov slg- 
 livai, to come into court; Xiyeiv elg to nXriOog, to speak to 
 the multitude ; elg avdpag eyypa(^eiv,to enroll among men. 
 Compare lv,% 456, a. 
 
 h) of time : elg rrjv vaTepaiav, in diem proximum, for 
 the next day ; elg ernrepav, toward evening; poet. eTog elg 
 hog, year hy year ; elg Kaip6v,for the right time. 
 
 c) of measure and number : elg ^laKomovg, tip to two 
 hundred; elg ^vva/miv, up to one^s power, as much as is iii 
 one'' s power. 
 
 d) of purpose : xpv<riiuLov elg tov iroXejuiov, useful for the 
 war'; elg ro^e r\KOfiev,for that we have come. 
 
 In compounds it is to be translated by into, in, to. 
 
 % 450. 2. wg (compare § 631), to, only of persons : Horn. 
 
§ 453. PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257 
 
 aUX Tov bfioXov ayu Oiog ojg tov ofxoTov, God always brings 
 like to like. 
 
 § 451. B) Prepositions with the Genitive. 
 
 1. avTi (compare Horn, avra, avTr]v, avriKpv), originally 
 opposite to (compare Iv-avri-og), then instead of, for : 
 Hom. avxi Kaariyvy^TOv ^dvog 9' iKtTrig re rirvKTai, a stranger 
 and a suppliant is instead of a brother (like a brother) ; 
 avTi dvr\TOv aivjuarog aOdvarov ^o^av aWa^aaSai, to ex- 
 change a 7/iortal body for immortal glory. 
 
 In compounds it signifies against. 
 
 § 452. 2. ctTTo (Lat. ab, a, Engl, off), frorn, in the sense 
 of separation, severance, and origin : 
 
 a) of place : Hom. a(^' ^l-mriov oXto xa/maZe, he sprang 
 of the chariot to the ground. 
 
 b) of time : from, since: air lKHvr\g rrig r]ixipag,from 
 that day. 
 
 c) of cause : by, from, through : avrovofiog awo rrig upr}- 
 vrjg, independent through the peace. 
 
 Phrases: airo aKoirov, far from the goal; ano yvtofxrig, 
 contrary to expectation ; awo (TTOfxaTog Xlyeiv, to speak 
 from memory ; ot Il-ko aKy\vr\g, those of the stage, the act- 
 ors. 
 
 In compounds it signifies ^c>m, off, away, 
 
 § 453. 3. Ik, before vowels e? (Lat. ex, e), out of (op- 
 posed to Etc), denotes removal from within or from among : 
 
 ^) of place : Ik. ^iraprrig (pEvyei, he is banished out of 
 Sparta. 
 
 b) of time : Ik iTal^b)v,from boyhood {a pueris). 
 
 c) of origin,: Ik warpbg xprjaTov lyiveTO,he sprang from 
 a brave father ; seldom with a Passive verb: rifiacfOai ek 
 Tivog, to be honored by any one. 
 
 d) close connection and conformity with : after, secun- 
 dum : Xoyov Ik Xoyov Xtyeiv, to deliver speech after speech; 
 
258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 454. 
 
 tK tC)v o/jtoXoyovjuhwv, according to the agreement (Lat. 
 -secundum). 
 
 Phrases : Ik ^t^iag, on the right ; l^ 'laov, egtially; ^ricrai, 
 Kptfxaaai tl Ik rivog, to fasten^ to hang one thing to another 
 (Lat. ^endlre ex, ah aliqua re). 
 
 In compounds : out, away. 
 
 § 454. 4. 7rp6ilLi2ii.j>rd), for, before, instead. 
 
 a) of place, before : irpo OvpCJv, before the door. 
 
 b) of time : irpo Tr\q /xa^rjc, before the battle. 
 
 c) of preference : irpo tovtwv TsOvavai fxaXXov av 'iXoiro, 
 he would choose death before this, i. e., rather than this. 
 
 d)for, a rare use : ir-pb irai^wv fxaxecrdai, to fight for the 
 children. 
 
 Phrase : irpo ttoXXoO iroidaOai (c), to prefer greatly. 
 In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, forwa7'd. 
 
 § 455. The spurious Prepositions : 
 
 5. ay£v, without (poet. X(i)pig, ^ixa, arep), 
 
 6. a\pi, fiixpif until. 
 
 7. pera^v, between. 
 
 8. 'ivEKa, also evtKev, tiveKa (poet. ovviKo), for the sake of 
 an object to be attained (Lat. causa): rfjc vyieiag evsKa 
 Xpwp^Qa rq> larpiio, we employ a physician for the sahe of 
 health. (Compare ^m with Ace, § 458, B.) 
 
 9. 7rX?)v, besides {proeter). 
 
 Obs. — Tr\r]v is often used quite adverbially without governing a 
 case : poet, ovk ap 'AxaioXg dv^peg dai ttXtiv oh ; huTe then the 
 Achmns no men hut this ? It might be TrXrjv roUe, besides this ? 
 
 § 456. C) Prepositions tvith the Dative. 
 
 1. Iv (Hom. Ivi, Iv, Lat. in, c. Ablat., and inter), in, an- 
 swers to the question where ? 
 
 a) of place: Iv ' AOrjvaig, in Athens ; also a77iong (inter) : 
 tv TovToig, among them; Iv ^po) XijEiv, to speak before the 
 people (compare § 449, o). 
 
§ 458. prepositTions with the gen. and acc. 259 
 
 . h) of time : Iv tovtoj r^i tVff, in that year. 
 
 c) a moral relation : with : Iv to} Otoj to ttiq fxaxnQ riXog, 
 the result of the hattle rests vnth God. 
 
 Phrases: 77 Iv MapaOtJvL juaxn^ihe hattle at Marathon ; 
 Iv Toiq TTpCjTog, first hy far j iv KaipCjt, at the right time ; 
 iv 7rpoqdi]K.r]Q jiipu,in addition^' iv xt^pGi Ti9ivai,to put 
 into the hands (compare Lat. in mensa ponere). 
 
 In compounds : in, into, on. The accented ivi — tveaTi 
 signifies it is in, it exists, it is possible. 
 
 § 457. 2. avv or ^vv (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan- 
 ionship (opposed to av^v, compare fx^Ta with Gen., § 464, 
 B) ; (Tvv 'A9{}vy syt/crjo-cv, he conquered {with the help of) 
 Athene y avv v6p.i^)yin accordance with the law (opposed 
 to irapa with Acc, § 465, C, h). . 
 
 In compounds : with, together. 
 
 11. Prepositions which can have two Cases. 
 
 The Genitive and Accusative. 
 
 Obs. — Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi- 
 tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani- 
 fest. 
 
 § 458. 1. ^la (akin to Sue, as between is to two [twai^i]), 
 originally between, then through. 
 
 A) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) of space : most frequently throtcgh (Lai. per) : Hom. 
 Sm fxlv cKTTTi^og ffXOe (jtaeivrjg oj^pi^ov ij^OQ, through the 
 glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. 
 
 b) insti'umental : by or vnth : Sm rwv oc^tdaXjuiiov opw/mev, 
 by (by means of) the eyes we see (compare § 438). 
 
 c) of space and time : a^nong {inter), during, in : ^la 
 yjiipC)v 'ix^iv, to have in hand j 3(a vvKTog, during night y 
 ^la (piXiag livai, to be on friendly terms. 
 
 • Phrases : ^la aTo/xaTog tx^iv, to have in the motcth, to 
 
260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459. 
 
 be talking about; ^i' ovdsvog iroLuaQai, to deem as nothing ,' 
 ^la fxaKpov, after a long interval^ interruption. 
 
 B) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets : 
 through, during : Horn. Sm Stj/maTa, through the rooms / 
 diet vvKTa, during night. 
 
 h) usually causal : on account ^(the operating cause) 
 (compare f vfica, § 455, 8) : ^m tr\v voaov xptJjueOa t(^ larpt^, 
 we employ the physician on account of the illness. 
 
 Phrases : avroq St kavrov, by himself; Sia tl ; why f 
 
 In compounds, Sta is through, or denotes separation, like 
 Lat. dis' : ^ia(^ipii)=differre, diaipio), I sever. 
 
 § 459. 2. Kara (compare Adv. icarw, dow7i), originally 
 downward, down (the opposite to avd). 
 
 A) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) of space : down from : Hom. /3r) ^t icar OvXviuiroio 
 Kap{]VLov, he came down from the heights of Olympus ; 
 helow {sub) : to. kuto. yrig, things below the earth. 
 
 b) tropically : about, against : Xtytiv Kara nvog, to speak 
 about, against one. 
 
 Phrases : ttoXlv kut uKpag eXuv, to capture a city com- 
 pletely ; Kara vljtov, behind. 
 
 B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general 
 sense extension over, relation to, direction toward some- 
 thing : 
 
 a) of place : Kara poov, down a stream ; Kara yriv koX 
 OdXatraav, by land and sea ; Hom. Zeitg t/Br? Kara ^aiTa, 
 Zeus went to the feast. 
 
 b) of time : kut Ikhvov tov xp^^^^f ^^ ^^^^ time; -ol 
 KaO' i7Mac, Our contemporaries. 
 
 c) of other relations : Kara tovtov tov rpoirov, in this 
 way ; Kara Trdvra, in every respect ; Kara ^vvajMv, accord- 
 ing to ability, as much as possible ; Kara rovg vojuovgy in 
 accordance with the laws; kut Ifit, as regards one; Kara 
 Uiv^apov apiGTov vdwp, according to Pindar, water is best. 
 
§ 461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND ACC. 261 
 
 d) distributive in divisions : Horn. Kara (^tvKa, hy tribes ; 
 Kara rpttg, by threes / kuO' r]fxipav, daily. 
 
 In compounds : dow7i, downward, against, toward, very 
 often untranslatable. 
 
 5 460. 3. viripl Horn, also vwup (Lat. super), radical mean- 
 ing over. 
 
 A) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) of sjpOAie : 6 r\kioq virlp tjiulujv iropeveTai, the sun passes 
 over us. 
 
 J) tropically, y6>/'.' fxax^aOai virip rivoq, to fight for any 
 one (originally over, e. g., over a corpse) : 6 v-Klp r^c Tra- 
 Tpi^oq Kt'v^uvpc, the danger for one^s country; instead of: 
 lyuj virlp (Tou airoKpivovjiaL,! will answer instead of you. 
 
 B) with the Accusative : 
 
 over, beyond — oi space and oneasure : Horn, vir'^p oh^ov 
 tj5n<yeTo, he went over or beyond the threshold ; virlp ^va- 
 fiivy beyond {his) power. 
 
 In compounds : over, away over, excessively, for. 
 
 With the Dative and Accusative. 
 
 § 461. 4. ava (compare adv. avw, above), originally upon, 
 up (opposed to KaTo). 
 
 A) with the Dative only poet., on the top of, upon : 
 Hom. yjpvaiij^ ava (TKYjirrpij^, on the top of a golden staff. 
 
 B) with the Accusative ava denotes the direction ^ip- 
 ward, up toward something, then spreading out over some- 
 thing (compare Kara). 
 
 a) of space : ava p6ov,up the stream; ava iracrav rriv 
 yriv, over the whole earth, over the whole country. 
 
 b) of time : ava Trao-ay Tr\v niiipav , per totum diem. 
 
 c) tropically : ava \6yov, in accordance with. 
 
 d) distributive : ava rirrapag, by fours (four men deep, 
 compare Kara, ^ 459, d). 
 
 Phrase : ava arojuia 'ix^iv, to have in the mouth, to be talk- 
 ing about (compare ^la). 
 
 In compounds : up, upward, again, back. 
 
262 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 462. 
 
 III. Prepositions which can have three Cases. 
 
 Obs. — The original meaning is usually most manifest in connection 
 with the Dative. 
 
 § 462. 1. aiui(l}i (Lat. amh-, German um, akin to aiuLcfxi), 
 both), radical meaning arowid {i. e., on both sides, compare 
 
 TTfjOt). 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 only poet.: Hom. l^pwaH rfXa/zwv ajucfn GTt]0£(T(n,the belt 
 around the breast will siveat; a/uKft (j)6jdi^, from fear. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 Hom. a^Kla (^iXoTnTOQ addeiv, to sing about love. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 of jplace^ time^ ineasure, occupation : a/x^i to. opia, about 
 the J^oicndaries ^ a/uKfl tovtov tov \p6vov, about this tiine j 
 aju^X ra i^i]KovTa, circiter sexaginta y apcfit Shttvov ttovhv, 
 to be occupied about a meal. 
 
 Phrase: ol ajupi riva, any one with his attendants; 
 hence even : oi afuKjH UXarwva, Plato and his followers. 
 
 In compounds : about, around, on two sides, doubly. 
 
 % 463. 2. liriy radical meaning upon, on, on the surface, 
 by. 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 a) of space : Hom. lirX xQovi chtov t^ovriq, eating bread 
 on earth; Im. rf] OaXaatTy oIkhv, to dwell by the sea. 
 
 b) of time: IttI TovToig, thereupon. 
 
 c) of an ethical relation : lin toIq irpayiuatTiv elvai, to 
 preside over the business; etti roTg TroXeiuioiQ eivai,to be in 
 the power of the enemy ; lirl tlvl yaipuv, to rejoice at a 
 thing ; especially also oi purpose : tw\ Trai^ela tovto tfiadEg, 
 you learned this for education; and of condition: l-nX 
 TOKOig' ^aveiZtiv, to lend on inte?'est ; iirX rovrti), on this 
 condition. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) of space, in answer to the question where : YJvpoq 
 
§ 465. PKEPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263 
 
 7rpov<paiv£To l(f apfxarog, Cyrus apjpea^ed on a chariot y 
 and to the question whither : lin Sa^ou ttXhv, to sail to 
 Samos. (Compare § 419, c.) 
 
 h) of time : em Kpoicrov apxovTog, in the reign of Croesus y' 
 also in many connections : near^ hy. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 on,on-to : ava^aivuv l(f "nrirov, to mount {on-to) a horse ; 
 IttX ^cSta, on the right. 
 
 Phrases: wq lirX to Tro\v,for the tnost joart ^ to Itt l/mi, 
 for mpjpart. 
 
 In compounds : o?i, at, hy, in addition, he-, very often 
 untranslatable. 
 
 § 464. 3. fi'cTa (German 7nit), radical meaning in the 
 midst. 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 in poet, only : amid, among (inter) : Horn. "Etcro/oa, oq Oeog 
 1e(tke fxeT av^pacTi, Ilector, who was a god among men. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 with, in the sense of participation with (compare avv, 
 § 457) : yL^TCL tCjv ^vfx^a\(jjv KivdvvevaiVf to fight with (in 
 alliance with) the allies / ixeTa ^aKpvcov, with tears. 
 
 C) ^Yl1^ the Accusative : 
 
 a) into the midst, am,ong : poet. : Hom. libv jueTii 1 0i/oc 
 iraipuyv, going among the*crowd of companions. 
 
 h) usually after : Hom. ot'xovrat fieTa ^uirvov, they go 
 after {for) a meal y' fxeTu tov UaXoTrovvrimaKov iroXefjiov, 
 after the Peloponnesian War. 
 
 c) seldom in (as w^ith the Dative) : iuhto. x^'^P^^ ^'x^^^> ^^ 
 have in hand (compare ^la) : fxeO' r]fiipav, interdiu. 
 
 In compounds : with, after, trans- {jueTaTiOevai, trans- 
 
 § 465. 4. wapa (Hom. 7rap,Trapai), radical meaning he- 
 side, near. 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 at or near : Hom. Trapa vr\\)a\ Koptoviat fxifjivaZiLv, to linger 
 
264 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 466, 
 
 near the curved shijps ,' koI irap' lp.oi tiq ifxirupia l<jTiv,I 
 also have some experience {with me also is, etc.). 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) Jrotn, with verbs of motion, and such as denote re- 
 ceiving either bodily or mentally : Horn. cnrovoaTHv irapa 
 VYjtJv, to return fro7)i the shijps j Xaji^avuv, iiavdavuv irapa 
 TivQQ, to receive, learn from some one. 
 
 h) hy, very rare, and only poet. : vanTuyv irap 'Itr/xrjvou 
 psiOptJVy dwelling hy the waters of the Ismenus. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) to : Horn, rw S' avTig hrjv irapa vijag, they went again 
 to the ships. 
 
 h) along, near hy : 
 
 of place : Hom. irapa Qlva Qa\aa(Tr)Q, along the sea heach, 
 
 of time : during : irap o\ov tov ^iov,per totam vitam, 
 during the whole of life • 
 
 compared with : ^u Tag irpa^ug irap aWr]\ag TiOtvai, 
 you must put the acts by the side of (or compare with) 
 07ie another; with the comparative: fiu^ov ti irapa tovto, 
 something greater than this / 
 
 on account of (compare propter, near, and on account 
 of) : irapa ttjv rijutTepav ajuiXiiav ^iXnnrog av^e^i, on ac- 
 count of our neglect Philip becomes great. 
 
 Taken negatively ; besides : ^ofilv n irapa ravra aWo 
 Xeyuv, we have something else to say besides this / 
 
 contrary to (opposed to Kara with the Ace. : irapa tov 
 vopovy contrary to the law, properly past the law, by evad- 
 ing the law. 
 
 Phrases : Trapa fxiKpov, nearly/ irap* ov^lv iroLEiaOai, to 
 deem as nothing. 
 
 In compounds : near, at, past, beyond, over {irapa(5aiveiv, 
 overstep). 
 
 § 466. 5. irepi (Hom. adv. irepi, very =Jja,t. per in per- 
 magnus), radical meaning around (from above), compare 
 
§ 467. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 265 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 round, around, near, for : Horn. Trtpt SKatr/crt TruXrjo-f, 
 round the Skcean gate,' inpX to7q (jiLXraTOLg KujScvctv, to 
 gamhlefor what is dearest. 
 
 Horn. TTfjOt KT} pi, at heart ; Trepl i^o^ti^, from fear. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de : nva 
 ^o^av sxeig irepl tovtwv ; what opinion have you about 
 this f jdovXevovTai irepl tov iroXifjiov, they consult about the 
 vjar. 
 
 b) in Horn, over, above : mpl navriov tmi^vai aWwv, to 
 be above all others ; hence the prose phrases : ir^pX ttoXAou 
 TTouXaOai, to place above much, i. e., estimate highly ; Trepl 
 ov^ivbg TTOLHdOa, place above nothing, i. e., estimate at 
 nothing at all. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 almost the same as a/x<^t (§ 462): ttejoi A'/yuTrrov (around, 
 i. e., every where in Egypt), about the country oi Egypt ; 
 figuratively : iii regard to, about, concerning : irepl 0fXo- 
 (io0tav airov^aZiiVy to be zealous about philosophy. 
 
 In compounds (with adjectives = Latin per-) : round, 
 rouiwL about, besides, over. 
 
 % 467. 6. TTpoq (Hom. irpori, irori), akin to wpo, 
 radical meaning at, to (toward the front), compare Trapd, 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 a) at, near : 6 Kvpog nv irpog Ba(5vXiovi, Cyrus was near 
 Bcmylon. 
 
 b) on, to : Hom. tto-I ^e avUyKxpov ^aX^ yairj, he threw 
 the staff 071 the, ground, rov vovv Trpogi^ere rrpog tovtw, 
 give your 7nind to this. 
 
 c) besides, in addition to : irpog Tovroig, besides this; 
 irpbg Tolg aXXoig, besides the rest. 
 
 B) with the Genitive : 
 
 a) with, in the sense of community : Hom. Trpog yap 
 Aiog HCTiv airavTeg ^ttvoi re 7rrw;\;oi rf, with (protected by) 
 
 M 
 
266 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. § 468. 
 
 Zeus are all strangers and the poor • irpog nvog uvai,to 
 he with (on the side of) any one; irpog larpov lariv,it is 
 with (belongs to) a^ physician, meclici est; npog Tivog X(- 
 yeiv, to sveak for (in behalf of) ariy one ; irpbg Oeiov^ with 
 (in presence of, by) the gods, per deos, form of an oath. 
 
 h) toward (versus) : wpog iii(jr\jjL^piag^ toivard the south, 
 compare irpog with Ace. 
 
 c) from, hy (compare irapa with Gen.) : oXftog wpog Of ojv, 
 Messing from the gods ; sometimes with Passive verbs : 
 irpog nvog (piXucrdai, to be loved by some one. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) to : ip^ovTai irpog r]fiag TTpiG^ng, embassadors come 
 to us ; irpog Tov ^ri/mov ayop^vtiv, to speak to the people. 
 
 b) toward, against {versus, adversits, ergo)-, irpog j3o^- 
 pav, toward the north (compare irpog with Gen.) ; ^tKaJe- 
 aOai irpog rivay to enter an action against any one ; iriaTiog 
 ^laicHaOai irpog Tiva, to be faithfully disposed toward some 
 one; irpog jSao-tXta airovdag iroidaOat, to make a treaty to- 
 ward (with) the king. 
 
 c) in regard to, according to : diaipipHv irpog aperriv, to 
 differ in regard to virtue; irpog to. KoXXifTTa tCov virap- 
 x6vT(i)v dti Ta Xoiira irparreiv, we ought to arrange the 
 future according to the best of the present means ; irpog 
 ravra, according to this. « 
 
 Phrases: irpog r]'^ovi)Vf according to pleasure ; irpog xa- 
 pLVy in favor of; irpog (iiav, by force; ovBlv irpog ^jui, 
 nothing to me. 
 
 In compounds : to, in addition, near, together with. 
 
 § 468. 7. viro (Hom. also virai, Lat. sub), 
 radical meaning under, below. 
 
 A) with the Dative : 
 
 under : Hom. rdv viro irocrm piya (7Twa\iZeTO yaia, un- 
 der their feet the earth loudly groaned ; vir ''AOnvaloig 
 eivaif to be under (subject to) the Athenians ; poet. x^P^^^^ 
 
§ 470. THE PRONOUNS. 267 
 
 u<^' rjfjLeripymv aXovaa, (Troy) conquered under (by) our 
 hands. 
 
 B) with the Genitive: 
 
 a) under ^ in space : vtto y^c? under the earth ; in the 
 sense of dependency : utt' ai»Xrjrwv xop^vuv, to dance un- 
 der (the guidance oT) flute-jplayers ; hence 
 
 V) hy, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning : // 
 ttoKlq eaXit) vtto twv 'EXXr/vwv, the city ^vas taken hy the 
 Hellenes y ttoAXoi airWavov viro tCjv (^apjiapwv, many were 
 killed hy the harharians. 
 
 c)from^ hecause of: vtto yvptog adOevrig vv, he was weak 
 from old age. 
 
 C) with the Accusative : 
 
 a) under : Horn, wg uttwv vtto ttovtov edvcrsTo KvfiaivovTa, 
 having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy sea / vtto 
 TO opog r}v\iZovTOf they spent the night under (at the foot 
 of) the 7nountain. 
 
 h) of time; toward {Jjut suh) : vtto vvktu, toward night ; 
 VTTO Trjv vvKTa, during the night. 
 
 In compounds : under, down under, gradually, secretly, 
 often untranslatable. 
 
 Chap. XVIIL— The Pronouns. 
 
 § 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns is 
 used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be mentioned 
 with special emphasis : koi av oxpei avrov, tu quoque eum 
 videbis, i. e., ov /xovov lyiL (not merely I). 
 
 § 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is fre- 
 quently supplied by the article (§ 373). On the article 
 with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388. 
 
 a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun, the Greek likes to 
 use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pronoun. 
 Such a Genitive, when the substantive to which it belongs 
 has the article, usually stands either before the article or 
 
268 THE REFLEXITE PRONOUN. § 471. 
 
 after the substantive : aov 6 vlog or 6 vlog o-ou, thy son, 
 not 6 crov vlog. 
 
 h) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near to a 
 possessive Genitive (§ 408, 2), it may be qualified by a 
 Genitive : rafia ^vcrrrtvov kuku, my ills, the ttnfortunate 
 one^s [mea Qiiiseri mala], 
 
 § 471. 3. The Reflexive Pronouni refers either to the 
 subject of the clause in which it occurs : w ayaOi, jultj ayvou 
 aeavTov, good flriend,he not ignorant of thyself ; or, in de- 
 pendent clauses, it refers back to the subject of the leading 
 clause : elgiEvai tKiXsvaev, d jdiXXoig avv kavTto tKTrXav, he 
 hade you enter, if you were going to sail aioay with him 
 {secunfh). ^ 
 
 Obs. a)— Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun, the usual Personal Pro- 
 nouns also may be employed : ^okCj jxoi ovk dTrapdcKevog eivai, I 
 tMnk myself not to he unprepared. 
 
 Ols. b) — The simple Pronoun of the third person, oii, ol, e, etc., is 
 commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, but in Horn, it 
 is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, etc. (like the 
 Attic avTOv, avT(^, avTov, etc., according to § 474) : Xeyerai 'AttoX- 
 Xmv eKdeipai Mapavav epi^ovrd oi Trepi ao<piac, dicitur Apollo Marm/m 
 cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom. avTofxaroQ ^e ol ijXQe 
 — MevsXaog, sponte sua ad eum venit Menelaus. 
 
 Obs. c) — The Reflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the 
 place of that of the first and second : M i)fiag dvepeaOai eavrovg, 
 we must a^lc ourselves; in like manner, the Possessive og some- 
 times stands for the Possessive of the first two persons : Hom. 
 
 oi) yap tywye rjg yaiijg dvvafiai yXvKepwTEpov dXXo idkaBai^foT I can 
 see nothing sweeter than my own country. 
 
 § 472. The following are used as Possessives of the Re- 
 flexive Pronouns : 
 
 a) the Genitives of the Reflexive Pronouns, especially in 
 the Singular : Ijiavrov, (jeaurov, eavTov. When the sub- 
 stantive to which they are joined has the article, the Gen- 
 itives stand between the article and the substantive : Zei/g 
 rrjv 'AOrivav t^ucrfy ek rr)c eavTOv KEcpaXrig, Zeus produced 
 Athene out of his own head. 
 
 h) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, especially 
 
§ 475. DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 269 
 
 in the plural ; r^fiiTepogy vfxiT^poQ : crcjiiTepog is exclusively 
 Reflexive. 
 
 c) The Possessives in connection with the Genitives of 
 avToc : TjfjiiTepoc; avrwv, etc. 
 
 § 473. The Reflexive Pronoun in the Plural is also used 
 instead of the ^^<3^^^(9(?(^Z Pronoun aWiiXtJv : ^i^XEjofxiQa 
 viLuv avTolq, we Conversed with one another (among our- 
 selves). 
 
 § 474. On auToc, s^lf] and 6 avTog^ the same, see § 389. 
 
 avTog in the oblique cases, like the Lat. is, ea, id, is used 
 as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person or thing 
 mentioned before : t^tovro avTov irapafiuvai, they wanted 
 him to remain. 
 
 The Genitive avTov, ijc? wv, like the Lat. ejus, eorum, is 
 the Engl, his, her, their, when it does not refer to the sub- 
 ject. Its position is that pointed out in § 470, a : o vlog 
 avTov or avTov 6 vlocfllitcs ejtis. Still the Genitive of 
 avTog often supplies the place of the Reflexive of the third 
 person. 
 
 § 475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, ovtoq points 
 more to what precedes and is already known ; oSe to what 
 follows and has not yet been named ; so likewise are dis- 
 tinguished ToiovTog, of such quality; ToaovTog, so great ; 
 ri]XiKOVTogf so old — from roiog^e, roaog^e, rrikiKogde. On 
 the article with these Pronouns, § 389. 
 
 On the demonstrative uses of 6g, § 213, Obs. 
 
 § 475 J. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in § 216 : 
 rig, TTorepog, ttoToc, etc., are used exclusively in direct ques- 
 tions. In intlirect ones the compound Relatives oaTig, otto- 
 Tspog, biroiog, etc., are employed. The former, however, 
 are often used in indirect questions, though the latter never 
 in a direct one : Tig u ; who are you f nrri juoi, oarig u, or 
 rig H, tell me who you are. 
 
 On the Attraction with Relative Pronouns, §§ 597-603. 
 
270 THE ACTIVE VOICE. § 476. 
 
 Chap. XIX. — The Voices of the Verb. 
 § 476. 1. The Active Voice. 
 
 1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intransitive 
 as well as a transitive meaning. Thus Vkavvuv means to 
 drive and to ride / f x^f v, to have, hold, and to he in a con- 
 dition (icaXwc c'x^^ hene se habet) ; irpaTTuv, to do and to 
 he {iv irpaTTb),! am doing weW)\ ^tjXoui^, to maJce and to 
 hecome. manifest. 
 
 In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean- 
 ings. See above, §§ 329, 330. 
 
 2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become intran- 
 sitive when compounded : jSaXXtfv, to throw — fi^Taf^aXXetv, 
 to change; Igj^aXXeiv and f/^jSaXXatv, to fall into, issue (of 
 rivers); ^id6vai,to give — Iv^L^ovaiyto give in; hiri^tdovai, 
 to grow ; K6~THv,to cut; TrpoKoirTHVyproficere^maJce prog- 
 ress ; (jitpHv, to hear; ^la^ipuvydifferre, to differ or he dis- 
 tinguished. 
 
 3. The Active often denotes an action which the subject 
 accomplishes not immediately, but ^mediately, that is, causes 
 or allows to be done by others : 6 Kvpog KarUavcTe ra /3a- 
 cyiXeia, Cyrus had the royal castle hurned down. This is 
 called the Causative use. 
 
 § 477. 2. The Middle Voice. 
 
 Its primary meaning is reflexive, i. e., the action of the 
 verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from which 
 it issues. 
 
 The Middle, in the first place, may be either transitive 
 or intransitive ; it is transitive when it can have an object 
 in the Accusative: irpaTToixai xpy^fiara, I gain for myself 
 money ; intransitive when it is incapable of having such an 
 object : aTrtxofiai, I restrain inyself 
 
 The Middle, farther, can vary much in its mode of refer- 
 ring back to the subject. We distinguish : • 
 
§ 480. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 271 
 
 § 478. 1. The Direct Middle, 
 in which the subject is at the same time the direct object 
 of the verb : Xovojugl, I wash myself; rpi-wojiaiy I turn my- 
 self ; iTn^uKwuaijI show Quyself; 'laraiiaii I Jplace myself ; 
 KaXvTTToiuai, I hide myself This kind of Middle is the 
 rarest. The Active with the reflexive pronoun in the Ac- 
 cusative is more generally used to express direct Reflexion. 
 
 Obs. — Through the direct Middle, several middle verbs have be- 
 come intransitive or passive : Traww, / cause to stop; Travofiai, I 
 stop myself, cease; ^aivio,I sJiow ; (paivoixai^ I shoio myself , appear ; 
 Vj//ti, I send; 'lefxai, I send myself, hurry. 
 
 § 479. 2. The Indirect, or Dative-lihe Middle (§ 431), 
 in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the ac- 
 tion. Here the action takes place for or in the interest 
 of the subject, so that in other languages the Dative may 
 generally be used to denote the reflex influence : tto^oiSw, 
 I provide ; TropiZoiuiai, I provide for myself e. g., xp^jfiara, 
 money; ayofiai yvvaiKa, I take a wife to myself; fiKrOov' 
 fiai (TTpaTiwrag, I hire soldiers for myself (but /xicrOovv, 
 hire out, juktOovv tavrov, to hire on(^s self out) ; fiETaTTtiu-- 
 TTOfiai Tiva, I send for some one ; Hom. avrog l(lti\KtTaL 
 av^pa (Ti^r)poQ, the iron itself draws a man to it. Hence 
 the Athenian says ; 6 vojuLoOirric Ti6r}(n vofiovg, the lawgiver 
 gives laics, but 6 ^Tiiuoq TiOerat vojuovg, the people gives laws 
 to itself 
 
 Obs. — The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object 
 being removed from its reaofe : d/jivvofiai kivSwov, I ward off dan- 
 ger from me; TrpoUfiai riva, I send some one away from me; d-n-o- 
 docrOai vavv {to give away for one's interest), to sell a ship. (Com- 
 pare § 324, 7). 
 
 § 480. 3. The Subjective or ethical Middle. 
 
 This denotes that an action originates not only external- 
 ly, but also internally from the subject, i. e., from its means, 
 power, or disposition : -Kapkyj.iv, to furnish ; irapix^aOai, to 
 furnish from on^ s own means; iroiuv Blp-nv-qvyto make 
 peace; iroiucrOai dprivr^v, to strive to make peace; Xa^u- 
 
272 THE MIDDLE VOICE. § 481. 
 
 fdavtiv Ti, to take soTiietJiing j Xajuj^aveaOai tivoq, to lay 
 hold of sonnetliing ; (jK07rtiv,to look at; aKoiruadaiyto re- 
 flect. 
 
 Obs. — The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive verbs ; 
 it then expresses a state more intensively than the active : ttoXi- 
 raveiv, to de a citizen ; TroXtreufo-Oat, to act as a citizen ; (SovXeveiv, to 
 give advice; (iovXeveaOai, to deliberate with one's self. 
 
 § 481. 4. The Causative Middle. 
 
 As the Causative Active (§ 476, 3) expresses an ac- 
 tion only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is often 
 used to denote that the subject has an action done for 
 or (9^ itself: 6 Trarrip ^i^aaKbTai tov viov, the father has 
 his son instructed; irapaTid^fxai ^eiirvov, I have a meal 
 placed before me; ^iKaZo/iai, I have judg?7ient pronotmced 
 for me; airori^vojiaL tqq \HpaQ, I have my hands cut 
 off. 
 
 § 4815. As examples, the following more important verbs 
 may be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle essentially 
 differs in various ways from that of the Active : ap;^w, I 
 am first, ap\ofiai, J begin; 6 pr^rtop ypacpn vojuov^the ora- 
 tor j[>ro])oses (writes down) a law ; 6 KaT{]yopog ypa<^iTai 
 TOV adiKtiaavTa, the accuser prosecutes (has the name writ- 
 ten down) the wrong doer ; TijumypC) nviyl help one; tijulu)- 
 povfiai Tiva, I avenge 7nyselfon one; aipC)yItake, alpovjuai, 
 I choose ; ^aveiZ^M, I put out to interest; ^avdZofiai, I 
 borrow at interest; irudM, I persuade, irudofiai, I allow 
 myself to be persuaded, I obef. 
 
 One and the same Middle may occur in different senses : didddKoixai 
 (4), I catcse to teach, or (1) / teach myself, learn ; rpsTrofim (1), / 
 turn myself, or (2) / turn to myself; rpkirovTai rag yviofiag, they 
 change their opinion ; Tpk-xovTai tovq -n-oXefiiovg, they turn away (put 
 to flight) the enemy (§ 479, Obs.). 
 
 § 483. Obs. — The deponents are distributed among the different 
 kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by 
 having no active form. Thus v-n-itrxvovfiai, I pledge myself, is a direct 
 Middle ; but dexo/Jiat, I receive ; KTaojiai, I acquire, are indirect ; ayia- 
 
USE OF THE TENSES. 273 
 
 vii^ofiai, I contend ; olfxai, Ithink^ are subjective : dvafSidjcraaQai, to revivCy 
 is causative. On the Passive Deponents, § 328. 
 
 § 483. 3. The Passive Voice 
 has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. : 
 
 1. even such verbs as in the Active take a cliiFerent case 
 from the Accusative, form a Passive : Karafppovio tivoq 
 (§ 4:24:), I despise one j KaTacppovuTai rig vii ijuov ; tticttev- 
 ovcFi rti> j3a(Ti\H, they trust the king/ o ^acriXkvg TrtcrreuErat 
 vtt' avTwv ; tTTfjSouXfvfi Tt[t TroXcju/tj), he plots against the 
 enemy ; 6 TroXifxiog sTrij^ovXeveTm vtt' avrov, a plot is made 
 against the enemy hy him. 
 
 2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even 
 from intransitive verbs : ra (rrpaTavofiivay the warlike meas- 
 ures ; TO. o-ot 7r£7roXtrfUjU£va, your political course^ your 
 policy. 
 
 3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are 
 sometimes used in a Passive sense ; (iiaZofxai, I force, £j3t- 
 dffOiiv, I was forced; in like manner a Passive may be 
 formed from a Middle : aipiu),I take, alpiojiai, VsL^s.^Iam 
 chosen; iii:TeTreiui(j>Orj,he was sent for, fxETaTri^Trojxai, I send 
 for (§ 479). 
 
 Chap. XX. — Use of the Tenses. 
 § 484. In marking the time, the Greeks distinguished : 
 
 1. The Order of time. The three Orders of time being 
 the Present, the Past, and the Future. 
 
 2. The Kind of time. In regard to the Kind of time, 
 an action is either 
 
 a) going on, e. g., yiyvwcxKuv (gradually), to learn to 
 know ; or, 
 
 T)) momentary, e. g., yvCyvm, to perceive, know ; or, 
 
 M2 
 
274 USE OF THE TENSES. § 485. 
 
 c) completed, e. g., lyvwKivai, to have learned, to know 
 (Lat. nosse). 
 
 Obs. — The momentary action may be compared to a point, the ac- 
 tion going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface. 
 
 An action going on is indicated by the forms of the 
 Present-Stem. 
 
 A monientamj action is indicated by the forms of the 
 AoristStems. 
 
 A completed action is indicated by the forms of the 
 Perfect-Stem. 
 
 The Future denotes the future Order of time of an ac- 
 tion going on, as well as of a momentary action : yvtJCFOfim, 
 I shall (gradually) get to 'hiow, and / shall perceive^ the 
 Third Future (^futurum exactum) that of a completed 
 action : lyvwKwg itrofiai, I shall have learned (Latin no- 
 vero). 
 
 In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the Indicative 
 indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, the 
 Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding 
 Indicative only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the 
 Order of time. 
 
 The following table presents a general view of these 
 relations : 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Going on. Ind. Pres. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Subj., Opt, Imperat, Inf., Vart., of tJie Preserd. 
 
 Momentary. Aor. Ind. 
 
 Subj., Opt, Imperat, Inf., of the Aorist. 
 
 Completed. Perf. Ind. Plupeif. Futurum exact 
 
 Subj., Opt, Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect. 
 
 § 485. Ohs. — As the English as well as the Latin language gener- 
 ally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Mo- 
 mentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar distinc- 
 
§ 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. -275 
 
 tion, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as fiee ((pev- 
 yeiv) and escape {(pvyCiv) ; flicker and flash ; fear (^ofStXaOai) and de 
 frightened {^ojiriQiivai, deXaai) ; wonder {Oavfid^Eiv) and to be surprised 
 {Oavfidaai) ; to he tusy about {TrpdaaHv) and to accomplish (irpd^ai) ; 
 yeXdv, to be laughing, and yeXaaat, to burst out laughing. 
 
 1. Forms of an Action in Progress. 
 
 a) The Present Indicative. 
 
 § 486. Th^ Present Indicative denotes, as in English 
 and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the jpresent 
 time : iKErevofjiiv as Travrtg, we all imjplore thee. Hence 
 by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for 
 all times, and therefore also for the Present: tari Qtog, 
 there is a God. 
 
 Obs. — Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past, 
 but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed 
 by this tense : aKovoj, I hear, also in the sense, / have heard and 
 still bear in mind; vikuu), I conquer, i. e.,1 am victorious; ^evyw, 
 I am banished; dhKkio,! am wrong (have done wrong); 9vr](jKu, 
 he is dead. In this sense alone are used i]Kio,Iam come; o'ixofiai, 
 I am gone. 
 
 § 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may be 
 represented as present, hence the use, very frequent in 
 Greek, of the Historical Present, which frequently alter- 
 nates with past tenses : poet, koi iriog oparai KaX ypiOr] ; 
 and how is she seen, and was she captured f £7ra y]y Ciro 
 ^ Apyi^afxoq koi liropevETO £7ri rovg avrnraXovgf IvravOa ovroi 
 ouic idi^avTO Tovg TrepX tov ^Ap^ida/moVf aXX' eyKXivovcriv, as 
 Archidamus tooh the lead and ^inarched against the enemy, 
 the latter did not wait for the troops of Archidamus, hut 
 retreat. 
 
 § 488. I) The Imperfect 
 
 is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin 
 Imperfect. 
 
 The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he wishes 
 to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in 
 their continuance along with others, or in their frequent. 
 
276 THE IMPERrECT. § 489. 
 
 continued repetition : Horn, ol filv ap olvov i/iiayov Ivt 
 Kpr)Tr\p(JL /cat v^wp, ol S' avTe (nroyyoKTi TroXvTpiiroKTi rpaTriZag 
 viZ,ov Koi TTporiOev, tol ^l Kpea iroXXa ^aTevvTO, soiae were 
 Tmngling wine and water in mixing-hoiuls, others cleaning 
 tables withjporous sjxmges, and placing them^ the rest were 
 carving triuch meat ; rovq p\v ovv TreXracFTag t^iE,avTo ol 
 (5ap(5apoi KOL IfjLa^ovTOf the harharians met the peltasts^ 
 and then were fighting^ — Horn. o<^pa pXv iiwg r> koX at^tro 
 hpbv v/uap, To^pa paX ap(^OTipii)v (iiXe T^irTeTO, irTTrrs re 
 Xaog, as long as it was morning^ and holy day increasing^ 
 so long the darts ofhoth were striking and people falling. 
 — ovTTOTi: puov aTr^dTpaTOTTi^ivovTO ol j5ap(5apoL tCov *EXXr]- 
 vu)v i^riKovra (7Ta^i(Dv, the harharians (did not encamp) used 
 never to. encamp*less them sixty stadia from the Hellenes. 
 
 § 489. Obs. 1.— The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely at- 
 tempted but not accomj)lisliecl action : Trputrog JiikeapxoQ tovq avrov 
 aTparuoTag e/3id?£ro ievai, oi Se avrbv £/3aXXov, vcrrepov de tTret eyvw on ov 
 dvvr}(T£rai (SidtracrOai, (Tvvrjyayev hKK\r]mav, first Glearchus tried to force 
 his soldiers to go, hut they shot at him ; afterward, however, as he perceived 
 he would not he able to force them, he sumrrmied a meeting. So idi^ov 
 sometimes means he offered to give, to distinguisli it from tSwKEv, he 
 gave. 
 
 § 490. Ohs. 2. — The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should 
 and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done 
 in opposition to what was done : tda tovq XkyovTag fir^TE irpbg tx^pav 
 TToiuadai Tov \6yov firjre irpbg x^^P^'^i '^^^ speakers ought to have made their 
 speeches neither from fear nor from favor (Lat. oportebat) ; so xpn'^) ^'^ 
 ought ; eiKog ijv, it would he fair. 
 
 On the Imperf. with dv, § 494, Ohs. 1, and § 537, etc. 
 
 § 491. c) The Suhjunctive,Optative, Imperative, Infniti^e, 
 and Participle Present 
 
 simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the 
 present, past, or future : paivo^iSa iravThg, o-rrorav opyiZw- 
 peOa, we are all mad when we are angry ; Wzyov tm 
 EvOvdvptf), oTL TravTEg LToipoi uev pavOavHv, they told Eu- 
 thydemus that they were all ready to learn ; ovrw iroiriaw, 
 
§ 492. THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 277 
 
 oTTwg av (TV KiXevyg, I loill do as you may hid irne {sic 
 again, ut tic me agerejubehis)-, ravTa Xtywv 9opvj5ov riKovat, 
 dia tCjv tcl^uov \6vtoq (cat r/jOtro, rig 6 Oofxvfdog ar;, saying 
 this, he heard a noise pass through the ranhs, and ashed 
 what the noise was. 
 
 Obs. — These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489), 
 express a mere attempt : to dirodi^pdaKOVTa fxrj SvvaaOat cnro^pdvai 
 TToXkri nojpia, for a man not to he able to run away when he tries to 
 run away is great stupidity. 
 
 § 492. 2. Forms of a Momentary Action. 
 a) The Aorist Indicative 
 is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore de- 
 notes the actual beginning of an action in the past^^ similar 
 to the Historical Perfect of , the Latins. 
 
 The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they 
 wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as 
 having happened, or to represent them as individual facts 
 without reference to other actions : lara rrjv Iv Kopvjvuq. 
 IJ.aj(r]v Of ^AOrivatoi t^lXiTTOv Tjjv BoiwTiav Traaavf^of^e?^ the 
 hattle at Coronea the Athenians left all Boeotia; — Ilai;- 
 aaviag Ik AaKe^aijuovog GTpaTYiyhg viro 'EXXrjvwv I^i7ri/Li(f)6ri 
 ju^TCL eiKOCTi vEwv ttTTO YleXoTTOVvrjcTOv, ^vvtirXeov ^£ Koi 'A0»7- 
 vaioi Tpiatzovra vavai kol laTpaT^vaav Ig Kvirpov koI avri^g ra 
 TToXXa KaTECTTp^xfjavTo, Pausanias was sent out from Lace- 
 dmmon as general hy the Hellehes, with tv^enty ships from 
 the Peloponnese, hut Athenians also accompanied him 
 (accompanying circumstance) with thirty ships, and they 
 proceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater part ofit; 
 ro^iKtiv Kai laTpiKriv koX juavTiKrjv 'AttoXXwv gvevpev, Apollo 
 invented the arts of archery, medicine, and prophecy ; — 
 Hom. rr\v Sc ttoXu Tcpdrog '/& 1^7]ki\xayog Oaoeidrjg, j3ri S' 
 lOvg TTpoOvpoiOf v^jJLia(jy]Br] 8' ivi Ov/ui^j ^dvov ^rjOa Ovpyjaiv 
 t(j)e(TTap£Vy lyyvOi §£ (rrag xup fXe ^i^LTEpriv koL l^iK,aTO 
 X'^Xkiov tjx'^^f ^^^i ^^^ ^r^^ Telemachus of form divine 
 heheld,and he went straight to the porch, and was grieved 
 
278 THE AORIST INDICATIVE. § 493. 
 
 at heart that a stranger stood a long time at the door, and 
 going near he took him hy the right hand and eased him 
 of his hrazen sjpear. 
 
 § 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an ac- 
 tion as having taken place in the past, it answers to all the 
 different Preterites in other languages, especially often in 
 subordinate sentences to the Latin and English j^lii^perfect : 
 Aaps'iog Kvpov /uieTaTriiunreTai (§ 487) airo rfjc ^PX^^ ^^ avTov 
 aaTpdrrriv l7roir}(Ttv, Darius has Cyr^s sent for from the 
 province, over which he had made him satrap {fecerat). 
 Thus the Aorist is used with the Conjunctions of time/ 
 lird, wcj oT^, as, when, like the Latin Perfect with post- 
 guam, uhi, ut : wq 6 Kvpog rjaOsTO Kpavyrjc;, av£7rtjcr)(nv 
 IttI top "ttttov w(T7rep hOovaitov, when Cyrus perceived (ut 
 audivU) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired. 
 
 § 494, The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience im- 
 plying that a thing once happened^ but admitting an application to 
 all times : poet. T<ii xP^v(ji y ^ikt] TrdvTiog ijXO' cnroTiaankvr), icith time 
 avenging justice alxoays came (and hence always comes) ; koX f3paSvg 
 evfiovXoQ sIXev raxvv dv^pa diujKwv, even a slow man^ when icell advised^ 
 overtooTc (of ertakes) iy pursuit a quick marl. In English we employ 
 the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs 
 as usually, commonly, ahcays, etc. : tclq twv (pavXiov avvovaiag oXiyog 
 xpovog SuXvasv, a short time usually dissolves tJie associations of the l)ad. 
 This Aorist is called the. gnomic Aorist, because it is often used in 
 gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Horn, it is often also used in com- 
 parisons. 
 
 Obs. 1. — In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist sometimes 
 has dv in order to express the case as one that may have occurred, 
 and therefore may occur oftener : tXE^ev av, he may have said. In 
 the same way the Imperfect is used, but referring to an action 
 m progress : dvaXafil3dvu)v avTuiv rd TroirjfiaTa dirjpcjTUJV dv, rt Xe- 
 yoisv, taMn^ip their poems I would ash ichat they meant. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing., is 
 frequently used to express actions and states beginning only at 
 the moment of speaking : iykXaaa, I burst out laughing; poet. 
 BTryvecr' 'ipyov Kai Trpovoiav i)v iOov, I praise the deed and the pru- 
 dence which you have exercised. 
 
 On the Hypothetical Aorist, § 537, etc. 
 
§ 496. THE AOR. SUB J., OPT., IMPERAT., AND INFIN. 279 
 
 § 495. h) The Aorist Subjunctive^ Ojptative, Imperative, 
 and Infinitive- 
 
 denote a Momentary action simply, whether of the present, 
 past, or future : oi TpiaKovra TrpogeraE^av airayaynv Aiovra, 
 "iv cnroOavoi, the Thirty commanded to take leon away to 
 die y airopio, tl irpC)Tov fjiV7](jdC),I a'tn in doubt what first 
 to mention j /urj OavfiaarjTe, lav irapd^o^ov eiiroj ti, be not 
 surprised if I say something strange; gv jjlol airoKpivai, 
 S) TToi, give me an answer, boy ; juiya otjiaL tpyov to ap\r\i> 
 Karairpa^ai, ttoXv S' tri fiuZov to Xa(56vTa ^ia(TU)(Taadai, I 
 deem it a great thing to found a government, but a still 
 greater to maintain it after acquiring it. 
 
 Obs. — The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and infinitive Aorist, 
 therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the Present, 
 just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imperfect ; the 
 Aorist forms express a single fact, conceived as a i)oint, the 
 Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long duration : 
 XaXsTrbv to Troieiv, to Ik KtKEixrai pg,diov, it is difficult to do, easy to 
 command; el Try tx^ig avTiKkyuv, dvTiXeye ' ei de /x?;, Travaai TroXXocKig 
 Xsyiov Tov avTov Xoyov, if you have any thing to say in reply, reply 
 (even in a long speech), |/* Tiof, cease (at onco) frequently repeating 
 the same statement. 
 
 % 496. The Aorist Participjle regularly expresses some- 
 thing which took place earlier or before the act of the prin- 
 cipal verb : K/ooTo-oc "AXi»v ^laj^ag iueya\r}V apxrjv KaToXixTEi, 
 
 Croesus, after crossing the Ilalys, will overthrow a great 
 empire ; TraOwv ^i ra vriTriog tyvio (§ 494), after suffering 
 {hy ^Vi^Qvmg) even a fool becomes 7c7iowing. 
 
 Obs. — As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an 
 action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only 
 expresses that the beginning of an action took place before an- 
 other action, while its progress may continue simultaneously with 
 that other : ytXdaag dire, he began to laugh and said (laughing) 
 \risu oborto dixit]. Hom. tLSe de Tig eiTreaKev iSojv eg TrXrjaiov dXXov, 
 thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbor; xaptcrai 
 fiOL aTTOKpivdiuvog, answer and oblige Tne, inasmuch as the xapi(Taa9ai 
 follows immediately after the beginning of the answer. 
 
280 THE FUTURE. § 497. 
 
 § 497. As the Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by the 
 Pluperfect (§ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive in asser- 
 tions generally denotes something which took place lefore : oX 'IvUl 
 iXe^av on Tre/x-ipeie (r<pag 6 'Iv^utv (3a(nXevg (Ind. on iTrefi-ipe)^ the Indians 
 said that the king of the Indians had sent them ; KuKrXwTref Xkyovrai Iv 
 'SiiKfXiq, oiKfjcrai, the Cyclops are said to have dwelt in Sicily. 
 
 § 498. Many verbs whose Pre^nt-Stem expresses a state, 
 denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into this state : 
 apx^tvyto rule, ap^ai, to obtain dofninion; f^amXtvEiv, to 
 he king, (^amXevcrai, to hecome hing ; Xg^uv, to he strong, 
 la^Gai, to heconie strong j Giyav, to he silent, myriaai, to 
 hecome silent; ex^iv,to have, o-x"*^^ ^^ ohtain; (paivECfOai, 
 to appear, ((tavrivai, to, hecome apparent; voativ, to he ill, 
 voai]Gaif to hecome ill; ttoXejuhv, to he at war {helhcm ge- 
 rere), TroXEfxriaai, to hegin war (helium inferre). (Compare 
 § 485.) 
 
 Obs. — This meaning, however, is not always attached to these forms ; 
 and kiro\kfir}(rav may also signify simply Mlum gesserunt (§492). 
 
 § 499. 3. The Future 
 expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and of 
 a Momentary action : ap^b), I shall hecome rider, and I 
 shall rule. 
 
 Ohs. 2. — The 2 Person Future with ov nearly resembles the negative 
 Imperative : ovk kTnopKrjffeig, thou wilt (shalt) nat swear falsely. 
 
 § 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses 
 with OTTMQ, that, is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes 
 what may or should happen : ovk cxo/iev otov alrov wvTjaofieOa, we have 
 nothing with ichich we can l)uy food (noji habemus, quo cibum emamus) ; 
 ^£1 uiravTa dvSpa tovto TrapacrKevd^eijOai, oTrojg wg ao^wrarog icrrat-, every 
 man should take care to be {that he shall be) as icise as possible (compare 
 § 553). The Participle is similarly used : ij xwpa TroXXrj koL dyaOrj ijv 
 Kai Ivfjaav oi ipyaaoiitvoi, the land was large and good, and there were 
 people to {who could) cidtivate it ; rig larai 6 rjyrirjojxivog ; lohx) will be 
 there to {who can) guide us? (compare §§ 380, 578). 
 
 Obs. — av (Hom. Kt) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative 
 to denote that a case may possibly occur : (.v old' on dcrfiEihg dv 
 
§ 503. THE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 281 
 
 TTpdg dvdpa olog aii el d-!raXKayr]<TeTai, I well TcnoiD that he will he glad 
 to he reconciled to a man such as you are ; Horn, 6 Se icev /cexoXw- 
 cerai ov Kev 'iKojfiai, and he will doubtless he in wrath whom I come 
 upon. 
 
 § 501. The verb julXXw is used with the Present, Future, 
 or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to express 
 an immediately ajpjproaching ^ or, at least, intended action : 
 /^tfXXw v/xac ayctv uq 'Ao-tav, / am going to lead yoii to 
 Asia {in Asiam vos ducturus su7n). This is called the 
 jyerijphrastiG Future. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — nkWu) may also be used in oilier tenses than tlie Present 
 with an Infinitive, like esse in Latin, with the Part. Fut. : 7rXr]<riov 
 ySr] i]v 6 (TTaOfibg evOa ifieXXov KaraXvcrsiv, jam prope aderat statio 
 iibi deversuri erant, where they wished to rest. 
 
 Ohs. 2. — ttCjq or TL ov jweXXw, is elliptical in the sense of Why should 
 I not? 
 
 4. Forms of a Completed Action. 
 § 502. a) The Perfect Indicative 
 is the Present of a completed action, i. e.^ by the Perfect 
 the Greeks denote an action completed y6>7' and with ref- 
 erence to the Present : poet. X070C \i\iKTai irag, the whole 
 speech has hcen sjpohen [dixi'] ; evprjKa, I have found, I 
 have it / Hom. 7]^r] yap r^TtXaaTai a fioi (j)iXog tiOeXe Ov/nog, 
 for noiu has been finished what my dear soul desifed ; 
 17 TToXfc 'iKTicfrai irapa twv KopivOicjVf the city has heen 
 founded hy the Corinthia^ns (of a still existing city) ; to. 
 XprijuaTa TOig irXovaloig 17 ^vx^ ou ^e^uypr^Tai aXXa cecaveiKEv, 
 Fortune has not given, hut lent (at interest) their unoney 
 to the rich. 
 
 § 503. Ohs. — Several Perfects have an entirely Present meaning, 
 inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which 
 the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the present : fiinvfj<TKonai, 
 I remind myself; fieixvrjfiai^Ihear in mind, remember (memini) ; KoXsoiJiaij 
 Iam7iamed; KeKXrfixai, my Tiame is ; irdOonai, I follow ; TrsTroiOa, I con- 
 fde in; oXXvfii, I am p)erishing ; 6Xu)Xa,Iam lost; Krao^ai, I acquire; 
 KSKTi]fiai, I possess; 'larafiaij I place myself ; earrjKa, I stand ; (^aivio^I go; 
 (isl3r]Ka, I arri gone. 
 
282 THE FUTURE PERFECT. § 504. 
 
 § 504. h) The Plu^perfect 
 is the Preterite of a completed action, i. e., by the Pluper- 
 fect the Greeks express an action completed for and with 
 reference to a jpast time : Hom. 3j7 rort y arpifxaq tu^c 
 \Aa(jfiivoQ oo-CT lirtTTovOti, then truly he slejpt quietly ^for- 
 getting what he had suffered , Iv toIq ApuKovTog vo/noig 
 juia cLTTamv wptaro tolq afiapravovtri Z,7)fiia Oavarog, in Dra- 
 cd's laws death had heen ajpjpointed for all criminals as 
 the only jpimishment — says an Athenian after 4:he laws 
 were abolished. (As long as they were in force : wpidTai.) 
 
 Obs. — The Pluperfects of the Perfects enumerated in § 503 are to 
 
 be translated by Imperfects. 
 On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, § 493. 
 
 § 505. c) The Future Perfect (Futurum Exactum) 
 
 is the Picture of a completed action, i. e.^ it denotes an 
 action which will be completed in the future. It is only 
 in the Middle that the Greeks have a special form for this 
 Third Future, which has generally a Passive meaning. In 
 the Active, the circumlocution by means of the Perfect 
 Participle and the Future of uvai must be used (§ 291): 
 av TovT H^iojueVf to. ^eovra IcropsOa tyvtJKOTsg, whe?l we 
 knqw this, we shall (thence) have got to hnoio our duty ; 
 Hom. ijLtoi Z\ XtXdxpETai aXyea \vypa, hut I shall have 
 gloomy woes left me. ^ ^ 
 
 Obs. — The Future Perfect of the PeriQ^cts mentioned in § 503 serves 
 as a common Future : /xefivijaoijai, meminero, etc. 
 
 § 506. d) The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitive, 
 
 and of the Participle, 
 expresses a completed action generally, and may refer to 
 any of the three Orders of time : ov (^ovXeveaOm wpa aXXa 
 jdsj^ovXeiKTOai, now is not the time to consult, hut to have 
 consulted (to be resolved) ; &ph\g wc ^ttvO^to top 'EXX?V- 
 TTovTov tZ^v^Oaif TTporiyev Ik twv SapSfwv, when JTerxes 
 
§ 511. USE OF THE MOODS. 283 
 
 learned that the Hellespont had heen hridged over (and 
 Avas still provided with a bridge, on fStu/cro), he marched 
 forward from Sardis j ravra filv ovv TrpoeiprjdOijjythus 
 much he said beforehand (now to something else) ; Horn. 
 tcT(TETai rjfxap 6t av ttot oXwXri "IXloq ipri, a day will come 
 when holy Ilios will he lost (has been lost) ; yjii]aiii6v n 
 IdKejUfxivog tikio, I am come after having devised something 
 useful. 
 
 Chap. XXI. — Use of the Moods. 
 
 A) The Moods in Simple Sentences. 
 
 § 507. 1. The Indicative. 
 
 The Indicative^ in accordance with the usage of other 
 
 languages, is employed simply to state something positively 
 
 or negatively, or simjjly and directly to ask a question : 
 
 poet. Tl\q apETtig i^pioTa Oeoi irpoirapoiOev Wr)Kav, the gods 
 
 placed sweat before virtue; Horn, irodtv uq avdpCov ; from 
 
 what class of men are you f * 
 
 05s. — On tlie Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without 
 av, § 536, etc. ; in sentences expressing a wish, § 515. On the 
 Aorist Inch with av^ to express what usually happens, see § 494. 
 
 2. The Subjunctive. 
 § 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take 
 place ; it always refers to the present, to reality. * Hence 
 it is used in the foMowing cases : 
 
 § 509. 1. as a challenge in the first person : itoiutv, let us 
 go [_eamus'] ; 0£/)£ S/j, rag juapTvpiag v/uuv avayvCj, well, come ! 
 let me read you the testimonies \reciteni\. 
 
 § 510. 2. with the negative ixi) in prohibitions and in 
 negative admonitions (compare § 518) : ju?) tovto Tronitryg, 
 ne hocfeceris, you ought not to do this. 
 
 § 511. 3. In hesitating questions, where it is asked what 
 
284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. § 512. 
 
 should be done: ri 0w ; what am I to say? Horn, ttw? 
 Tiq TOL irpocjypwv iirEaiv TTiiOrjrm ^A\aiCjv ; how shall any of 
 the Achwans willingly trust thy words? ^iE,ea6e -n/xag rj 
 airi(i)^iv ; will you receive us, or are we to depart f 
 
 § 512. 4, jyith /i?'^ in sentences expressing/^a^/' or anxiety : 
 jurj aypoiKOTEpov y to a\r)Qlg utthv, if it he not rather rude 
 to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be negatively ex- 
 pressed, jur) ou is used : Horn, ^r; vv tol ov ypaKTfiri aKxiTTTpov 
 KOL arififxa Oeolo, lest the staff and wreath of the god should 
 not help thee, i. e., it will certainly be of little help to thee 
 [Lat. vereor ne non or %it tejuvet']. Compare §§ 533, 616, 
 Ohs. 3, § 621, a. 
 
 § 513. Obs. — The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of 
 future events, quite like the Fut. Ind., to express a thing that is to 
 be expected (§ 545) : ov ydp ttoj roiovg tdov avkpag ovSk Uiofiai,for never 
 yet did I see such men nor may (shall) / see them, dv is sometimes 
 added in Hom. to this Subjunctive : ovk dv roi x9<^'i^l^V KiOapig rd re 
 dojp 'A^poSiTt]g, the lyre and Aphrodite'^s gifts would not help thee. Com- 
 pare § 500, Obs. 
 
 3. The Optative. 
 
 § 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle av) 
 is used to express a wish that something may take place : 
 poet, w Trat, yivoio irarpog iVTv\iaTEpog, hoy ! may you 
 he happier than your father [Lat. Pres. or Perf. Subj.]. 
 
 The particles used (like Latin utinani) to introduce a 
 wish are : ti (Hom. at), a^e (Hom. aSi), u yap, wc. 
 
 m 
 
 § 515. Ods. — If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to be realized, 
 it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist 
 Indicative : d9' rjaOa dvvarbg ^pdv ocov TrpoQvfiog eZ, would that you were 
 able to do what you wish; dOe (toI tots avveyevoixrjv, would that I then 
 had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist 
 wtpeXov (properly " I owed") and the Infinitive : 6\ka9ai w^eXov ryS' 
 j7/i£jO^, would that I had perished on that day [Lat. Imperf and Plup. 
 Subj.]. Compare § 5C7. 
 
 § 516. 2, The Optative with the particle av (Hom. ke or 
 
§ 519. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 285 
 
 Ktv) expresses possibility : tovto yivoir av, that (could) 
 Tnight he j ti yap yivoir av IeXkoq iihZ,ov rj (piXog KaKog ; 
 what greater evil could there he than a had friend ; ttov 
 ^riT av dev ol ^evoi ; why ! where can the strangers he? 
 [Latin Pres. and Perf. Subj.]. The Optative with av is 
 therefore called ihQ potential Optative. 
 
 § 517. Obs. 1. — Hence the Optative with av is used in modestly ex- 
 pressed assertions : ovk av Xsyoi/ii, I would not say [non dixerim] ; wpa 
 av avaKwaZ,Ea9ai eir], it is perhaps time to hreaJs up; ovk av dvvato firj 
 Kafxujv evdaifiovelv, you could not, witlumt taking trouble, te happy. 
 
 Obs. 2. — In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used 
 without av : Horn, peia Oeoq y WsXcjjv Kai tt]X69ev avSpa trawcrai, a god 
 who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this use of the 
 Optative to denote a possible and merely imaginary case is originally 
 peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in dependent clauses, 
 §§ 528, 529, 532, Obs., 546, 552, Obs. 
 
 § 518. ^. The Imperative. 
 
 The Imperative is the mood of command, and, with neg- 
 atives, of prohibition. 
 
 A prohibition in the second person can be expressed only 
 in two ways, viz., either with firi and the Present Impera- 
 tive : firj iTpaTTu, of a continued action, or with /x// ^nd the 
 Aorist Suhjunctive : p,ri Trpa^rig, of a Momentary action, 
 do not do : ravTO. pot irpa^oVf riKVOv, Ka\ prj f5pa^vve pr)^^ 
 tTripvYicrOyg in Tpoiag, do me this, child, aiul delay not nor 
 think farther of Troy. 
 
 In the third person also pi] with the Aorist Imperative 
 is admissible: pr\^ug vpC)v Trpog^oKr]aarii) aX\(i)g,let none 
 of you expect otherwise. 
 
 On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see § 577. 
 On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypothetical clause, 
 § 545, Obs. 3. 
 
 B) The Moods in Compound Sentences. 
 § 519. Preliminary remarks on the connection of sen- 
 tences with one another. • 
 
286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 519. 
 
 1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined in 
 two ways, viz., either 
 
 a) so that the one may be quite independent of the other 
 — this combination is called Co-ordination, or Parataxis 
 (jrapaTa^ig). * 
 
 h) so that they mutually are referred to each other, and 
 express a complete thought only in their combination — 
 this combination is called Subordination, or Hypotaxis 
 {v7r6raE,ig). 
 
 2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal sen- 
 tence, and in every respect independent of the other : Koivrj 
 r) Tvxv KOL TO juLiWov cLopoLTov^fortune is GOimnon, and the 
 future invisible ^' tovto lyw ovt tlpr^Ka, ovTi Xiyotim av, 
 I have neither said that, nor could I say it. 
 
 On the manner in which co-ordinate sentences may be 
 combined, § 624, a. 
 
 3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such 
 a way that one expresses the principal idea, the other a 
 secondary one. The former is called the leading sentence, 
 the latter the secondary, dependent or Subordinate. One 
 leading' sentence often has several subordinate ones de- 
 pendent on it. The moods of subordinate sentences are 
 in many ways determined by the leading sentence : "Yia- 
 (TUiptpvrjg ^ia(3aXXeL rov Kvpov irpog rov adeXcpov, wg btti- 
 J^ovXevoi avru), Tissophemes brings a calumny against Cy- 
 rus before his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against 
 him ; Hom. o-ot a/x' ecnrofjieO', 6(j)pa av -xaipTjgyWe have fol- 
 lowed thee that thou mayst rejoice. 
 
 4. The Correlative connection of sentences is a special 
 kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one 
 always refers to the other. The one is called th^ Prota- 
 sis, and the other the Ajpodosis. The Protasis, which re- 
 quires to be completed by another sentence, is subordinate 
 (3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes 
 the necessary completion : Hom. wg 'ISev, tjg mv f^v xoXog, 
 
§ 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287 
 
 as he savj it wrath seized him; Horn. oTTTroToii k d-rrridOa 
 'iirog Toiov k iTraKovaaiQ, the hind of word yoto sjpeak^ such 
 you will hear. 
 
 Obs. 1. — This correlation is frequently expressed by two Pronouns 
 or Particles referring to each other (§§ 316, 317), as in the exam- 
 ples just quoted, but not always : d iry tx^ig avriXeyeip, dvriXeye, 
 if you can in any way reply ^ reply. 
 
 Obs. 3. — The Apodosis often precedes the Protasis : ovtoq (^sXricrTog 
 av eiT] '6<TTig KoafiiiOTara Tag avfKpopag (pspeiv ^vvarai, he would be the 
 best who can bear calamities with most dignity. 
 
 5. From the subordination of one clause to another there 
 arises a convpound sentence. 
 
 Obs. 1. — The same thought may often be as w^ell expressed in two 
 Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence : ixrjSevl avjx- 
 ^opdv^veiSicrygj kolvi) yap r) Tvxn-,i'^p^oach no one with a calamity^ 
 for fortune is common ; or tied r) ry%// Koivi] Icttij fir]hvi avfopopav 
 * oveiSiiryg, since fortune is common, reproach no one with a calamity. 
 The Homeric language abounds in series of Co-ordinate sentences 
 (the paratactic arrangement). 
 
 Obs. 3. — Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence 
 is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in 
 different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first, the ar- 
 rangement is called prolepsis (7rp6\r}\pig, talcing beforehand) : kuL 
 fioi Tov v'lbv eiTTEj d fiefidOrjice rrjv tsxvtjv ■=. Kai fioi sitts, ei 6 vibg 
 fiEfidOrjKB Ty)v Hxvrjv (§ 397). Hom. TvSeidrjv d' ovk dv yvoirjg, tto- 
 rkpoKTi fiETeiri, you could scarce perceive on which side Tydides stood; 
 Kai tCjv f3afll3dp(t)v tTrejueXeiro, ihg TroXefxdv iKuvoi a'irjaap, he also tooTc 
 care that the barbarians should be capable of carrying on war. On 
 the other hand, a substantive may pass from the Principal to 
 the Subordinate sentence : Hom. /^em S' tcrtrerai i}v tot d7rr]vp(ov 
 Kovpr]v Hpitrfjog, among them also will be the daughter cf Brises, whom 
 I then tooh away (compare § 603). 
 
 6. On the different kinds of sentences according to their 
 substance., % 624, etc. Only those kinds will here be no- 
 ticed which are most important in regard to the use of the 
 Moods. 
 
 § 520. The use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
 subject to the following general rules : 
 
 1. The Indicative in Greek is very extensively used 
 
288 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. §521. 
 
 even in Dependent sentences, the Greeks merely annexing 
 or inserting many sentences without any mark of depend- 
 ence where the Latin language marks the dependence by 
 the Subjunctive or Infinitive : /jlt] ji avepy, rig djui, ask me 
 not who lam \_ne me interroges, quis sini]. 
 
 ^ § 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences also 
 denotes always that which ought to take place, and can 
 generally be employed only when the leading sentence 
 contains a principal tense. 
 
 Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which 
 connects the action with \kiQ jpresent ; hence the Present 
 (except the Historical Present, § 487), the Perfect, and 
 the Future Indicative, and all tenses of the Sicbjunctive 
 and Imjperative. 
 
 § 522. 3. The Optative (without av) denotes something* 
 merely conceived or supposed (§ 611 ,Ohs. 2), and generally 
 can be employed only when the Principal sentence contains 
 an Historical tense. 
 
 Every verbal form, however, is regarded as an Historical 
 tense which connects the action with the past, hence the 
 Historical Present (§ 487), the Indicative of the Aorist, 
 the Imperfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Op- 
 tative when this mood occurs in the Principal sentence. 
 
 § 523. 4. In indirect speech {oratio ohliqua) the Opta- 
 tive (without av), but only after an Historical tense, is 
 used to denote something which is to be stated, not as the 
 opinion of the speaker, but of another person : ol 'AOrjvatot 
 TlepiKXia tKaKit^ov, on (rrpaTrjyog tov ovk iir^^ayoi IttX rovg 
 TToXe/uLiovg, the Athenians reproached Pericles because, be- 
 ing a general, he did not lead them out against the enemy 
 \_quod non duceret\ ; t^v^avro (rcoTrjpia Oikthv tvOa irpCiTov 
 ug (jiiXiav yriv a(l)iKoivTo, they vowed to offer thanh-offerings 
 whenever they should first come to a friendly land ; a ng 
 TToXfc £7rt TToXtv (TrpaTevcFOi, £7rt ravTYiv i<l>r] livai, si qua civ- 
 
((• BESITYJ 
 
 § 526. MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSEBTlIONSJ^WCCv 289 
 
 itas contra [aliam'\ civitatem pugnatura ess€i:pmmfti hano 
 se dixit iturmn: 
 
 In this case, however, the Indicative also is admissible 
 according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive, even after a 
 Principal tense, its employment being limited to the case 
 mentioned in § 527. 
 
 § 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with av) may occur in 
 Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent, sentences 
 (§ 516), to denote something as merely possible: Xlyw, qtl 
 TovTo ovK av yivoLTo, I say that this probably could not 
 happen. 
 
 The farther use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
 treated of specially in what follows, according to the differ- 
 ent kinds of Dependent sentences. 
 
 I. Moods in Dependent Assertions and in De- 
 pendent Interrogative Sentences. 
 
 § 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are 
 those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to 
 a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions, on, wc, 
 that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sentences are 
 connected with the Principal sentence by means of £/, ifj 
 TTorepov . . . ri \utTum . . . a7i\, whetlier . . . or (in double ques- 
 tions), or Interrogative Pronouns (§ 214) or Adverbs. 
 
 § 526. 1. The Indicative 
 is used in those sentences which, when conceived independ- 
 ently, would have the Indicative, and thus, 
 
 a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense, the 
 Indicative must be used (§ 521): uiri jioi, riva yvwfxriv 
 £X£f Cj t^^l ^^? what opinion you have (direct : Tiva yvwiurjv 
 aX^ig) [Lat. die mihi, quam sententiar)i habeas'] ; 
 
 b) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense 
 the Indicative inay be used (§ 522) : uirov, rivTiva yv<l)fir\v 
 ei\ov,dixi quam' sententiam haberem ; rJKev ayyiWiov rig, 
 
 N 
 
290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. § 527 
 
 wg 'EXdreia icarfiXr^Trrat, some one came hringing the news 
 that Elatea was taken (direct : 'EXareta Kctr£tXr;7rraf). 
 
 Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this case 
 admissible, § 528, a. 
 
 S/' % 527. 2. The Subjunctive 
 
 can not occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in De- 
 pendent Interrogative sentences only if, when conceived as 
 independent, they would necessarily have the Subjunctive, 
 and thus 
 
 a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense the 
 Subjunctive must remain : fdovXtvojuai, ttwq (te cnrodpu), 
 I am planning how to escape from you (direct accord- 
 ing to § 511: TTwc (T£ cnrodpC) [delibero, quo modo U effu- 
 giam'] ; 
 
 h) when tlie leading sentence has an Historical tense 
 the Subjunctive may sometimes occur: t/BouXeuojUTjv^ ttw? 
 o-£ airo^poj ; but the Optative is more frequent in this case 
 than the Subjunctive (§ 528, J). The Subjunctive in De- 
 pendent Interrogative sentences accordingly is to be trans- 
 lated by may or shall. " " ' " " 
 
 § 528. 3. The Optative (without av) 
 may occur in such sentences ; 
 
 a) as a substitute for the Indicative (§ 526, b\ i. e.^ 
 when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen- 
 tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde- 
 pendently, ought to have the Indicative : uirov, rivriva 
 yvvjfiriv i^x^ifj-t (direct : ftx^^) [Lat. dixi, quam sententiam 
 haberem'] ; iyvuyGav on kevoq 6 ^ojSoc "»?, they knew that 
 the fear was groiCTidless (direct: 6 (l>6(5og kevoq ^v), com- 
 pare § 523. 
 
 b) as a substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 527, b), i. e., 
 when an Historical tense occurs in the leading sentence, 
 in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independent- 
 ly, ought to have the Subjunctive : tjSouXtuo^nv, niog ere 
 airo^pairiv (direct : jrwg at airo^pto) [Lat. delibero^am, quo 
 
§530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. . 291 
 
 modo te effugerem'],! was reflecting Jiow I should escape 
 you. 
 
 In the second case the Optative is to be translated by 
 should. 
 
 Obs. — Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is gen- 
 erally perceived from the connection quite as easily as in the 
 Latin nesciebat quid faceret^ Tie Tcnew not what he did or what he 
 should do. 
 
 § 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found also 
 without a Conjunctioji in the continuation of a direct speech : tXe^ov 
 TToXAoi, oTi iravTOQ d^ia Xeyei (§ 526, 5), %€i/ia;j/ yap e'ltj kuI oiKude cltto- 
 •TrXHv ov dwoTuv etr], many said that he says what is worthy of the ut- 
 most regard^ for that it was winter, and that it was impossible to sail 
 home. 
 
 On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser- 
 tions, § 593. 
 
 Mixed examples : 
 
 TTEiVf OTI TO lulv bCjjia T^Ovri^eTat (§ 291), /; 0£ ^I'X'? avawTacra 
 (§ 316, 5) oix{](TeTaL aOavaTog kol ayrfpwQf Pythag07'as the 
 Sainian was the first among the Greeks who ventiored to 
 maintain that the hody will he dead^ hut the soul, flying 
 u/pward,will depart immortal and ever young ; Oe/uncrTo- 
 kXtj^ viog tTi (jjv tXEysVf wg Kadev^eiv avTov oi/k €(j>)7 to tov 
 MtXTia^ov TpoTratoVf Themistocles, when still young, used to 
 say that the trophy of Miltiades would not let^im sleep ; 
 ^AiropCjjTov (§ 214:fOhs. 1) irpioTov fivr]<rdC),I am at a loss 
 what to mention first y ol ^^iri^afivioL Tov^Oeov £7r//jOovro, d 
 Trapa^oTev KopivOioig Trjv ttoXlv, the Epidamnians ashed the 
 god whether they should give up their city to the CorintT^- 
 ians. 
 
 11. Moods in Sentences of Purpose, or Final 
 Sentences. 
 
 § 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose 
 are introduced by the Conjunction %a (Horn. 6(f)pa), wg, 
 oTTwc, in order that, that, in order to, juri, or oirwg jxi), *iva 
 fxri, m 07rler that not. 
 
292 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. § 531. 
 
 As such sentences express something which is expected 
 to happen, they take : 
 
 § 531. 1. The Suhjunctive 
 
 a) necessarily when the leading sentence has a Principal 
 tense : dg Kaipov 7]Ketc;, oirwg Tyjg ^iKrjg cLKOva^g, you have 
 come at the right time to hear the trial [in tempore ades, 
 ut causam aiidias\, 
 
 V) more rarely when the leading sentence has an Histor- 
 ical tense : ug Kaipbv ^k:£^, oirwg rrig diKri£ aKovayg [aderas 
 ut audires\ ; ImTx^ig as ovk riyeipov, *iva cjg H^icrTa ^layyg, 
 I purposely did not wake you, that you might pass your 
 time as pleasantly as possible. 
 
 Obs. — The Conjunctions wg, ottujq, sometimes have av (Hom. kI, dv) 
 added to them in this sense : tovt avrb vvv didatrx, oTrojg av Ik- 
 Hd9u), explain that very thing now that I may learn it. The pur- 
 pose is thereby represented as one whose attainment depends on 
 conditions (as here, if you explain it). Compare § 554. 
 
 § 532. 2. The Optative. 
 as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (§ 531, lj\ when 
 the leading sentence has an Historical tense: eiriTri^lg ae 
 OVK ^yeipoVf "va tjg ^ofora oiayoig ; Hom. Ti;oft^p Aio/z//o£t 
 riaXXac ^AOf)vr] Swfcf fiivog kcli Oaprrog 'iv eicdriXog /nera iracnv 
 ''Apydoim yivoiro, to Tydides Diomedes Pallas Athene 
 gave strength and courage that he might he distinguished 
 among aluthe Ar gives \_Diomedi Minerva animos dedit, 
 ut insignis fieretjinter cunctos Argivos\. 
 
 Obs. — The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in 
 
 sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the 
 
 * rarer Subjunctive exjDressing the sentence more as an object or 
 
 demand that may be attained, the Optative more as the thought 
 
 or conception of the acting person (compare §§ 521, 522). 
 
 On the Future Indicative with ottwc, §§ 500, 553. On the hypo- 
 thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the non- 
 intended consequence (wore), § 565. 
 
 § 533. Sentences expressive of /mr, introduced* by /«7 (L^t. ne) or 
 /*}) ov (Lat. ut), follow the construction of sentences of purpose (com- 
 pare § 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when dependent 
 
§ 536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293 
 
 on a Principal tense : oh <pol3eT, jxtj ydrj 7rpe(TJ3vTEpoQ yg ; do you not fear 
 to 1)6 already too old [jionne times, ne cetate j^rovectior sis] ? Tlie Optative 
 is commonly used after an Historical tense : tipojSovvro, fxi) tl ttccOoi, 
 they feared he might suffer somewhat [verebantur ne quid illi accideret] ; 
 but not unfrequently also the Subjunctive : oi 'AOrjvdloi tovq ^v^ixdxovg 
 eSedistrav, firj airoaTuxriv^the Atlienians were alarmed lest the allies should 
 remit (compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2). 
 
 Obs. — ni] and ottwc m ^^^^^ verbs of fearing seldom have the Fu- 
 ture Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear refers 
 to a completed action : <po(3ovixe9a, fiij dfKpoHpojv rjfiaprrjKafiev, we 
 fear we have failed in both. 
 
 Mixed examples: 
 Touro oi) TTpoyprjiuai \tyeiv, *iva tktIv vfxCjv a7r£\9civ(i)fxai, I 
 have not chosen to say this in order to he hateful to some 
 of you y Kvpog ^tXwv (yero ducrOaif wg (Tvv^pyovg f'x^f, Cy- 
 rus thought friends necessary that he might have helpers; 
 Ai^oiKa, lui) eTriXaOwnisOa rrJQ ot icaSe o^ov, I am afraid lest 
 we should forget the way home; ^iXnnrog h ^o/Btj) rjv, 
 /xr) Ik^vjol to. TrpdyiuaTa avTov, Philip was in fear lest the 
 affairs might escajpe him. 
 
 III. The Moods in Conditional Sentences. 
 
 § 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong to 
 the Correlative sentences (§ 519, 4). The Protasis states 
 a condition under which something is to occur ; the Apod- 
 osis states that something happens under a certain con- 
 dition. Both sentences together form a Hypothetical Pe- 
 riod. 
 
 § 535. In the Protasis, u (Horn. a\), lav (^. e., d-av), 
 contracted to j\v or av (Ilom. ti k£-v), if are employed ; in 
 the Apodosis the particle av is sometimes used to show that 
 it is true only under certain conditions. 
 
 In Greek there are fotcr principal forms of the Hypo- 
 thetical Period : 
 
 § 536. 1. in the Protasis d with the Indicative, in the 
 Apodosis the Indicative without av, or the Imperative. 
 
294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL, SENTENCES. § 537. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when 
 the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
 represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any 
 opinion being expressed by the speaker as to the probabil- 
 ity or improbability of the case : d OeoI tWiv, Igti kclI ipya 
 Oewvy if there are gods, there are also works of gods; goI 
 el Try aXXy ^i^oKTai, Xtye kol ^tSao-Kt, f you have any dif- 
 ferent opinion, sjpeah and exj)lain. 
 
 Obs. — All tenses may be used in this form, consequently also His- 
 torical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not to 
 confound this first principal form with the second : i^fjv aoi 
 airikvai Ik rtJQ TroXeiog^ d firj i/petTKov aoi oi vonoi, you were free to 
 leave the city if its laws did not please you (in the present : t^eort 
 — £1 ///) dpkaKovai) ; d tl tCjv deovTwv tTrpdxOrj, tov Kaipov, ovk Ijxk 
 (prjaiv a'iriov yejevfjaOai, if any thing right was done, he says that the 
 occasion, not /, was the cause. A sure sign of the second principal 
 form is the particle av in the apodosis. 
 
 § 537. 2. in the Protasis, u with the Indicative of an His- 
 torical tense ; m the Apodosis, av with the Indicative of 
 an Historical tense. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when 
 the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
 represented indeed as one quite necessary, but at the same 
 time 7ieither of them as real. The Indicative in such con- 
 ditional sentences is called the Hypothetical Indicative, 
 which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality 
 (compare § 515). 
 
 In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contradictory 
 of the Protasis may always be supplied in thought. 
 
 Hence the Protasis may, have the following forms : 
 
 § 538. a) The Imperfect is used when a condition is 
 stated as not existing at present: d tov ^iXnnrov ra ^iKaia 
 TTpaTTOvra tiopwv, a(l)6^pa av OavjiaGTOv rjyoviurjv avTOv, if 
 I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, I should deem 
 him very admirable. Here we may oppose to the Protasis 
 the thought vvv Se oux opw ra ^iKaia 7rpaTTovTa,but now 
 
§ 54t. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295 
 
 / see him not act justly. The verb of this contradiction 
 to be supplied is in the Present. 
 
 To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub- 
 junctive: si viderem^ ^utarem. 
 
 § 539. 5) The Aorist Indicative is used when a condi- 
 tion is stated which did not take place in the jpast : cnri- 
 Oavov av, u /mi) 77 rwv TpiaKOVTa ap^(ri Kar^XvOr], I should 
 have died if the government of the thirty had not heen 
 overthrown. 
 
 Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought icar- 
 Avdr] Uy hilt it was overthrown. The verb of this contra- 
 diction to be supplied is in the Aorist. 
 
 To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- 
 junctive : jperiissem^ nisi dominatio eversa esset. 
 
 § 540. c) The Pluperfect is used when a non-completed 
 condition is stated : d tovto tj/uoXoyriTO rijULv-f padiwg av 
 ^lEfxaxofieOafif in this we had heen agreed, we shoidd eas- 
 ily carry the contest through. 
 
 Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought aXX' 
 o\)\ (l)fio\6yr]Tai, hut we have not heen agreed. The verb 
 of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Perfect. 
 
 To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- 
 junctive : si inter nos convenisset. 
 
 § 541. The Apodosis to a Hypothetical Protasis of this 
 kind may have either the Imperfect or the Aorist Indica- 
 tive, or the Pluperfect with av [Hom. icc-y], and that quite 
 independently as to which of the three tenses occurs in 
 the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds 
 to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive ; the Aorist and Plu- 
 perfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Subjunctive : d tots. t(5o- 
 rjOtjcraiuiiv, ouk av r}vu))(Xei vvv 6 <PiXnnrog, if we then had 
 rendered help, Philip would not now he troublesome ; ft 
 avTapKT) TO. \pY}(l>i<JiuaTa riv, ^iXnnroc iraXai av I^e^ivkh ^t/cr^v, 
 si plehiscita per se svjjicerent, Philippus dudum pmnam 
 dedisset. 
 
296 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 542. 
 
 § 542. Obs. 1. — The particle dv is sometimes omitted in the apodo- 
 sis : y(Txvv6nrjv^ d vtto TroXefxiov ye uvroQ t^r}7rarr]97]v, I should he ashamed 
 if I had leen deceived ly an enemy. 
 
 § 543. Obs. 2. — The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time when 
 the continuance of an action is to be made particularly emphatic : 
 d TovT IttoUi (not tTToirjaiv) eKuaTo^, tviiciDv dv, if each had been acting 
 so, they'icould be victorious. On the other hand, the Aorist is sometimes 
 used referring to present time, when the rapid commencement of an 
 action is to be indicated : el tiq ae ypsro, tI dv direKpivio (not diriKpivov) ; 
 if any mie asksd you, what answer would you give ? 
 
 § 544. Obs. 3.— A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the Prot- 
 asis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context : f/3ou- 
 \6nr]v dv, I should like {d Idvvdfirjv, if I could, dared) ; di vfidg avrovg 
 TrdXai dv dTroXwXEire, you would long since have perished through your- 
 selves (i. e., if left to yourselves). 
 
 § 545. 3. in the Protasis^ lav (rjv, hv, Horn, ii ict-r) with 
 the Subjunctive j' in the Apodosis, the Indicative of a 
 Principal tense or the Imperative. 
 
 This form of tha Hypothetical Period is used to ex- 
 press gr prescribe something in regard to a case that iS 
 to he taken for granted and exj^ected. It is admissible 
 only in connection '^\\h jpresent and future thne (§ 521), 
 and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs : ^tt ra jSeX- 
 Tiara avri tCjv i)^iix)V, av firf crvvaiuKpOTEpa i%y, Xafi^avuv, 
 you must choose what is hest rather tlian v^hat is agree- 
 able, when both together are not allowed; av to. Trap^XrjXv 
 OoTa fxvr]fjLoviiVTgQ , afiuvov TTEpi tCov fieXXovriov fdovXeixTH, if 
 you remember the vast, you will judge better about the 
 future. 
 
 Obs. 1. — The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences often 
 comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect : vkog dv irovYiayQ, 
 jripaQ e^fig eWaXeg, si juvenis laboraveris, senectutem habebis jucun- 
 damfi. 
 
 Obs. 2. — We find d with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion- 
 ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as idv, d dv, find d 
 KE-v : Soph. dvSpa, kei rig y (ro<p6g, to fiavOdvuv ttoXX', alaxpov ov- 
 ^kv,for a man, even if he is wise, to learn much, is no disgrace. 
 
 Obs. 3.- — The Subjunctive in Conditional sentences is akin to the 
 
§ 548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297 
 
 Subjunctive of Challenging (§ 509). The speaker thereby puts 
 or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires 
 the hearer's assent : tovto tdv o-KOTriyre, evprjcrere, on TrdvTUJV dpiara 
 iXei, if you consider this you will find tliat it is the hest of all ; 
 which is almost identical with the challenge : consider this, etc. 
 [compare Lat. Naturam expellas furca^ tamen usque recurret]. In 
 a similar way the Imperative sometimes takes the place of a 
 Hypothetical Protasis : Poet, -kKovtu re yap kut oIkov, ei (iovXei, 
 fieya Kul Z,}} rvpavvov oxnii tx^tv, tdv d' diry tovtwv to xaipuv, 
 TokX iyu) KUTTvov (TKidg ovK dv 7rpLainT]v,for he rich, if you will, at 
 home, and live in the splendor of a great ruler; hut if joy he wanting 
 to it,Iicould not give the shadow of snwkefor the rest. (Compare 
 § 549.) 
 
 § 546. 4. in the Protasis, £t with the Ojptative ; in the 
 Apodosis, av (k£-v) with the Optative. 
 
 This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed in- 
 tentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain, as 
 merely possible, as a merely conceived case: a Tig KtKTr}- 
 fnivog tir] ttXovtov, XPV''^ ^^ avTi^ fii], ap av ivdrnjuovol ; 
 should any one possess wealth and not make use of it 
 (suppose any one possessed), tcould he he happy ? Com- 
 pare §§ 516, 517, Ohs. 2. The Present or Perfect Sub- 
 junctive in Latin corresponds to this form: si possideat 
 (or p>ossederit), num heatus sit f 
 
 Ohs. — In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes has 
 Ks-v or dv : €1 TovToi Ks XdjSoifiev, dpoiixeOd Kev kXsoq iaQXov, if ice 
 should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers 
 very rarely use dv in the Protasis. 
 
 § 547. Since h with the Optative intimates that a thing 
 is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past 
 what possibly might have been, i. e., a repeated case (com- 
 pare § 494, Ohs. 1) ; the Apodosis then usually has the In- 
 dicative : £1 TTOU t^tXauvod 'Acrrua'/Tjc, \^ 'iinrov \pvao\aXivov 
 Trepiriye tov Kvpov, if ever Astyages rode out (might ride 
 out), he tooh Cyrus %cith him on a horse loith a golden 
 hridle. 
 
 % 548. u with the Optative in the oratio ohliqua takes 
 the placCj accord]^ to § 523, of u with the Ind. (1), or 
 
 N 2 
 
298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 549. 
 
 tdv with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sen- 
 tence depends, on a Historical tense : y'^n Kvpog, on u tl 
 iua-)^r]g ttots ^f^crof, f/c rwv (piXtov avrt^ TTapaaTaraq XrjTrriov 
 eir), Cyrus hiew that, if ever any hattle should he necessary, 
 he would have to take his supporters from his own friends. 
 In direct language, Cyrus would say, ti]v ttote deijarj or a 
 TTorc ^eyjcTEL — XrjTTTiov Igti. If, in its relation to the time of 
 the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the 
 Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find lav 
 with the Subjunctive. 
 
 The following general remarks also are to be observed 
 in regard to Conditional sentences. 
 
 § 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are 
 not so dependent on each other as that the one necessarily 
 requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one 
 form niay, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of 
 another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is 
 in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth, 
 in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as 
 merely possible : u rouro Xtysig, afiapTavoig av,if you mean 
 this, you would he in error; lav lOeXriarjTe irpaTTtiv a^itjQ 
 vjjlC)v avTMVyiaijjQ av fiaya ri KTrjaaKrOe ayaOov, if you should 
 he disposed to act in a riianner icorthy of yourselves, you 
 would perhaps gain great good. The connection of a 
 Protasis of the second form with an Apodosis of the fourth 
 is rare ; Hom. K.ai vv kev tvO' clttoXoito avaE, avdpMv Al- 
 vdaQf tl lULYj ap o^u vorj(7£ Atoc Ovyarrjp 'A^joo^trrj, and now 
 assuredly ^neas, rider of men, would there have perished, 
 if Zeus^s daughter Aphrodite had not Jcept a sharp look- 
 out. 
 
 § 550. 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be inserted 
 in anvother sentence. The most peculiar in this respect are sentences 
 expressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional sentences: 
 ix yap M<pt\ov oloiTB dvai oi ttoXXoI to, fisyiara kukci l^epydZsaQai, 'iva oloire 
 rjffav av Kai dyaOd rd fieytara, I would that the^nany were capable of 
 doing (to a man) tJie greatest evil, in order thai^ey might also, on the 
 
§ 552. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 299 
 
 other Tiand, te capable of (effecting) the greatest good (instead of: for if 
 they were capable, they would also be capable). The Hypothetical 
 Indicative here denotes the impracticable purpose (§§ 515, 537). 
 On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583, 595. On the Hypothetical 
 Infinitive, § 575, etc. 
 
 Mixed examples : 
 
 Et viTo (f)i\u)v WiXeig ayairacrOai, tovq (fiiXovg evspysTr^Tiov, 
 if yoio wish to he loved hy your friends^ you musl henefit 
 your friends y Ei to t\uv ovTiiiq locnrep to Xaiuf^aveiv ri^if 
 rjvf TToXu av dii(j)epov EvSaijuovi^ ol irXovarioi tu)v iTEvriTwv, 
 if having were as sweet as getting, the rich woidd he 
 greatly distinguished ahove the poor in hlessedness ; Poet. 
 Et traai TavTo KaXbv t(pv <J0(p6v 0' afia, ovk rjv av a/LKpiXsKTog 
 avOpwiroLQ ipig, if the same things were to all heautiful 
 and wise, people would have no hitter disputes; IlXarwy 
 TT/ooc Tiva Twv wai^MV, fi^fiaaTLjwao av, ecprj, h fir) wpyiZofirjv, 
 Plato said to one of his servants, you would have heen 
 flogged if I were not arigry ; 'Eav fiiv ti vfxiv doKtj aXrjOlg 
 Xiyeiv, ^vvojuoXoyriaaTE, if you think I utter any truth, 
 agree with ine ; Ei izoXig av^pwv ayaOujv ytvoiro, Trepijua.' 
 XnTov av UT] TO /uLYj ap\uv, log-rrep vvvl to ap^eiv, if there 
 were a state (consisting) of good onen, it woxddhe an ohject 
 mf contention to avoid ruling (how one might not rule), 
 as now to ride ; *^Hv rwv aTpaTiMTiov ^oyjia, a Tig, ottots 
 i] (TTpaTia l^LOL, i^in Arjt'^ofro, ^rjuoaia elvai to. XrjcpOtvTa, it 
 was a decision of the soldiers, if, when the army went out, 
 any one tooJc hooty hy himself what he tooh was common " 
 property (direct lav Xrii^rjTai — drjfioma t<TT(i)). * 
 
 IV. The Moods in Relative Sentences. 
 
 § 551. Helative sentences are those which are connected 
 with others by means of Relative pronouns (§§ 213, 214, 
 216) or Relative adverbs (§ 217). 
 
 § 552. In Relative sentences all moods are possible in 
 the same meanings as in independent or hypothetical sen- 
 
300 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 553. 
 
 tences : ovk £x<*^ o ti irpwrov Xa/3w, I*have (know) not wliat 
 I shall take first (§ 511, compare § 527); Ojow o-e "^ulyKovra 
 Mv lurj Tvxotg, I see you pursumg what, I ;pray, you 'may 
 not attain (§ 514); vfiuq lar^ irap wv av KaXXtora rig 
 TovTo fiadoi, you are they from whom any one m^ight hest 
 learn this (§ 516) ; ovk i'jOeXov Xeysiv irpog vjuag Toiavra 
 oV av vjMv i]^iaT nv cikovuv, I did not wish to say to you 
 such things as might he jpleasantest to you to hear. Com- 
 pare § 544. 
 
 Obs. — Sometimes, especially in tlie Poets, Relative sentences have 
 the Optative without av in an indefinite assertion, very much 
 like the potential Optative with av : ov tcoXiq arfjcTEie, rovde xpv 
 kXveiv, wTwm the state may appoint, him we must listen to (compare 
 § 517, Ohs. 2}. 
 
 § 553. On the I^iiture Indicative in Relative sentences 
 expressive of purpose, see § 500. ottwc* how, that, in or- 
 der that, very frequently has the Future Indicative (yet, 
 according to § 531, also the Subjunctive of other tenses) 
 after verbs which denote looking after, caring for, striving, 
 avoiding : (TKoirei, oiriog to. irpayjiaTa (Tii)Or}(TeTai, see that 
 the affairs (the state) s/ball he safe ; ^u. k iravrog rponov 
 airavra av^pa tovto TrapacTKevaZecrOai, oiriog wg aotpuyTaTog 
 %(TTai, every one ought to take care in every way to (tha^^ 
 he shall) hecome as wise as j)ossihle. 
 
 Obs. — oxu)Q is often used in challenges and warnings in such a 
 t manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied : ottw^ 
 ^TrapscTH elg ttjv icrirepav, that you shall he here for the evening (more 
 completely somewhat like : gkottei ottwc, see that you, etc.) ; ottioq 
 irepi Tov iroXkfiov firjdev Ipeig, that you shall say nothing about th^ 
 war (supply something like : ^vXarrov, taJce care). 
 
 § 554. The particle av (Hom. kI-v) is added to the Rel- 
 ative when the Relative sentence expresses something mere- 
 ly conceived, so that the assertion contained in the leading 
 sentence is true only when what is asserted in the Relative 
 sentence really occurs. Such a Relative is called a Hypo- 
 thetical Belative. The Hypothetical Relative with av in 
 
§ 555. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 301 
 
 general is used only where the verb in the leading sentence 
 is in Si 2^rij'i^cipal tense, and is then accompanied by the Suh- 
 Junctive. Such a Relative sentence may easily be changed 
 to a Hypothetical senteilce of the third form (§ 545); irav 
 o ri av jULtWyg IptTv wpoTspov liriGKOTTH ry yvMfjLri, whatever 
 you inay he about to say ( = £ay rt Ipuv luLtWyg), examine 
 it first in your mind ; in which it is left quite undecided 
 whether one wishes to say any thing; e-n-affOe oiry av rig 
 riyriTai,fiollo20 wherever any one may lead you {—lav rig 
 TTY) riyvTai), where you must first wait to know whether any 
 one leads. 
 
 Obs. 1. — As the Relative is generalized by the addition of dv, it 
 may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. cunque) : oq av 
 TovTiov Ti Sp^ reOvdriOj quicunque Tiorum aliquid fecerit, perito ; 
 Xsye oa dv OeXyg, say whatever you wish (compare Idv n dkXyg 
 
 Obs. 2. — In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a 
 Relative without dv (or ks-v) : rwv de Trrjfiovi^v fidXicTTU Xvttoixt' al 
 (pavCja avOaipeToi^ the sufferings affiict most which ajjpear self-caused 
 (compare d with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the 
 Fut. Ind. with ks and the Relative (§ 500, Obs:). 
 
 § 555, If the verb in the leading sentence is an His- 
 torical tense or an Ojptative, the Relative without av with 
 tlje Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a sub- 
 stitute for the Subjunctive (§§ 522, 523). These Relative 
 sentences take the place of those mentioned in § 554, in 
 the same way as the fourth kind of Conditional sentences 
 takes the place of the third (§ 548) : EjccXeuo-fv avToig tire- 
 adai, oTTOL Tig rtyoTro, he hade them follow wherever any 
 oim might lead. Thus we read in Homer : ov ^i k iyb)v 
 ajravevOe na\r]g iQiXovra vor]rTU) fiijxvaZ,uVf ov ol iirura ap- 
 Kiov laauTai (pvykiv Kvvag 7]8' olwvovg, hut whomsoever I 
 m^ay see inclined to remain away from the hattle, to him 
 there shall he no security of esca/ping dogs and hirds {i. e., 
 death), but : ovnva /lev jSadtX^a icat t^oxov av^pa KL\dr], 
 rbv S' ayavoTg lirkcrmv iprirvaaaKE, hut whatever (where a) 
 king or promi7ient man he might meet with, him he 
 
S02 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. § 556: 
 
 soothed with gentle words. Horn, wq clitoXolto koI aXXog 
 6 Tig ToiavTo. ye ptZoi, SO may any other perish who shall 
 do such things (but og av ptZy — aTroXeaOii)). 
 
 Obs. 1. — This Optative often implies repetition : ovriva Kixdrj, as 
 often as Tie might Jind one (§ 547). 
 
 Obs. 2. — The Subjunctive and the Relative with av occur only ex- 
 ceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with the 
 Relative and dv, in the same case (compare § 546, Obs.). 
 
 Y. The Moods in Temporal Sentences. 
 
 § 556. Temporal Sentences, ^. e., those which indicate 
 time, are properly only a particular kind of Relative sen- 
 tences, and follow them almost entirely in the use of the 
 Moods. The particles of time employed in such sentences 
 are : lirsi, tTrei^fj, tjg (^when, after ^ as) ; ore, oirore, riviKa, 
 when, as; awg, tgre, fiexpi-g) till; irpiv, hefore; in Hom. 
 o^pa^as long as, till; ^p.og,when; and besides the Rela- 
 tive expressions: a^' oS, l^ ov, since; Iv oj, whilst; a\pi 
 oVf Eig o, until. 
 
 In these sentences the Indicative is used when any 
 thing actual is stated ; the Optative may supply the place 
 of the Indicative in indirect speech after an Historical tense 
 (§ 522). 
 
 § 557. When a Temporal sentence states something mere- 
 ly conceived, occurring only conditionally, the particle of 
 time, like the Relative, has av (kI-v) joined to it (§ 554). 
 This occurs usually only when the leading sentence has 
 a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must then foUo-w. 
 By combination with av are formed the Hypothetical par- 
 ticles of time : orav, oirorav, tTredv or sirriv, ETrci^av : Ittel- 
 ^av Travra otKouo-rjre, KpivaT£,whenye have heard all, judge ; 
 tbjg av au)Z,r]Tai ro (XKa^og, tote \prj Kat vavrriv Ka\ Kvf^Epvrj- 
 TTiv Kai iravT av^pa TrpoOvpovg eivat, as long as the vessel is 
 safe, the sailor, the pilot, and every one ought to he^zealous. 
 
 Obs.— Rere also av is sometimes wanting (§ 554, Obs. 2). 
 
§ 558. MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 303 
 
 § 558. If the leading verb is in an Historical tense^ the 
 particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in the 
 same sense : tX^yw on, Itth^t) Travra aKovauav, Kpiveiav. 
 
 Ohs. 1. — Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (compare 
 § 554, Obs., and § 547), so that ore, oTrore, Itth, with the Optative, 
 may be translated by " as often as," " whenever :" ottots. ol "EX- 
 Xriv^Q toIq TToXEfiioig t-jrioiev^ pg.diiog cLTretpevyov, CIS often as the Hel- 
 lenes went up to the enemy ^ the latter readily fied. ♦• 
 
 Obs. 2. — Here, too, exceptionally, av and the Subjunctive sometimes 
 
 occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Obs. 2). 
 On TTpiV with the Infinitive, § 565. 
 
 Mixed Examples of Relative and Temjporal Sentences. 
 
 'YiiEig Travra XoyKra/uevoL ravra \upoTOVHQ\ 6 ri ay\ Vfjuv 
 ^oKy iuiaXi(TTa (TVfx(pipuv rij ttoXu, after having weighed all 
 this, vote for what yoio think will most benefit the state ; 
 Of tC}V l3ap(5ap(jL)v tTTirdg, ^tlvl lvTvy\avoL^v *'¥Xkr]VL, iravrag 
 eKTeivov, the cavalry of the harharians, whatever GreeJc they 
 met, hilled them all y Miyjuq av tyo) rjKw, at o-7rov8ai /xcvov- 
 Th)v, till I come, let the treaty remain; Poet. M?77ror' lirai- 
 v^)<^\iQf TTplv av el^rJQ avSpa aa(^r\vCjgy opyrjv Kai pvO/uov Ka). 
 rpoTTov oarig av y, 7iever praise a man hefore you clearly 
 Jcnoio his temper, and hearing, and character ; -'ETrcfS// tl 
 l}X(^ayom>, avicrravro /cat liropsvovTO, after having -eaten 
 something, they rose and proceeded ; 'O '^wKparr^g Tovg 
 (Tvvovrag IttoUi^v jliovov ottote vtto tCjv avOpwTTtJV opiiwro, 
 a7ri\t<TUai rwv aciic(i)v KOt a\a\pC)v, aAXa jcai oTTorf Iv Iprifiia 
 uEVf Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what 
 was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen hy 
 men, hut also when they were in solitude. 
 
304 THE INFINITIVE. § 559. 
 
 Chap. XXII. — The Infinitive. 
 
 A) The use of the Infinitive generally. 
 
 § 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verbal noun (§ 225, 5) which, 
 as such, has certain properties in common with a verb, oth- 
 ers with a noun. 
 
 With a noun the Infinitive agrees 
 
 a) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like the 
 nomina actionis (§ 342) : ttoluv, irparTeiv, doing ; compare 
 TTOiriaig, irpa^ig. 
 
 b) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns : to 
 TToiHVf TO TTpcLTTEiv, the doi?ig / comparc rj Troirjcng, i] npa^ig. 
 
 With the verb, on the otker hand, the Infinitive agrees 
 a) in its power of denoting diiferent times : ttoieTv, wot- 
 ri(Tai, TTiiroiriKivai, and of being formed from the Active, the 
 Middle, and the Passive : Troirjcjai, ironiaaaSai, 7roir}0tivai. 
 
 h) in being occasionally joined with av, and thereby shar- 
 ing the functions of mood (§ 575, etc.). 
 
 c) in governing the same case as the verb to which it 
 belongs: Trotay Ta^iovTa, doing your duty; xpijo-^at toXq 
 oTrXoiQf making use of arms. 
 
 d) in being qualified, like the finite vifb, by adverbs, 
 never by adjectives : KoXwg irpaTTuv, doing nobly ^ but Kakr\ 
 TTpa^ig, a noble action. 
 
 2. The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek. 
 Very often, besides the more definite mode of expression, 
 by means of a Conjunction with ^finite verb, the less def- 
 inite, by means of the Infinitive, is admissible. 
 
 § 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify dif- 
 ferent sorts of verbs, viz. : 
 
 1. those which express the occasion, capability, modality 
 of an action: ^vvavTai air eXOetv, they can go away ; fjnT^^v 
 
§ 562. THE INFINITIVE. 305 
 
 TL .£xtt uTTuvyhe has something greater to say (can say); 
 Poet, ovroi avvky^uv oKka avii<^ikCiv e^uv, I a'in horn not 
 to join in hating hut in loving ; (ipxoiuai \iyuv,I hegin 
 to sjpeah ; tmrptTro)^ croi iroiuv o ti av jdovXy, Heave you to 
 do tchatever you wish ; 
 
 2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinion : 
 ^0KE7g cLfxapTuv, you seem to have erred; 
 
 3. such verbs as denote striving after something, impel- 
 ling toward, or frightening, deterring, preventing some- 
 thing : fiY) (tttsvEe TrXovTtXv, do not hasten to he rich / Horn. 
 KiXsai jue fxvOijcradOai, you hid me to Sjpeak ; iravTig al- 
 Tovvrai Tovg deovg to. (I)av\a cnroTpiTruv, omn&s homines 
 jprecantur deos, ut mala avertant; (pofioviuai ^isXlyx^iv ae, 
 lam afraid of refuting you; fXtyov aoi jurj ya/meivjdixi 
 tihi,ne uxorem^ duceres ; rig avrov kwXiktei ^^vpo (da^tZnv ; 
 quis eum imjpediet, quominus hue veniat f avt^aWETo juol 
 diaXexOiivai, he jfut off conversing with me. 
 
 § 561. Even \kiQi jpurjpose of an action may be expressed 
 by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the Infinitive with 
 to or in order to : Sevo(f)iov to rj/xto-u tov aTpaTsvparog 
 KaTtXiTTe (l)v\aTTUv TO (TTpnTOTre^oVfJ^enophon left half the 
 ariny hehind to guard the^ camp ; irapix^ IpavTov rto laTpot 
 TifivHv Ktti Kaieiv, I give myself \ip to the physician to cut 
 and hum (me) ; ttiuv ^idovm tivi, to give a?iy one (some- 
 thing) to drinh. 
 
 Obs. — Not only with verbs of this kind, but also with those men- 
 tioned in § 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application in 
 Homer: apiGTEmaKe. fidx^(r9ai, he iised to he the first infighting ; dai 
 Kal o'ide Tad' Ehsfiev, these too, then, are (able) to say this; (3fj ievai, 
 he started to go; ^werjKe fxdx^adai, he urged (them) tofi^ht. 
 
 § 562. The Infinitive serves to. complete or qualify ad- 
 jectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the En- 
 glish Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the Latin 
 supine in it : ^j^aXaTrov Evptiv, difficult to fiiid \difficile in- 
 ventu\ ; oWia TiVi(rrr\ IvdiaiTaaOai, a house very pleasant to 
 
306 THE INFINITIVE. § 563. 
 
 live in; a^ioq Igtl TrXr^yag \a^u.v,he deserves to gethlows; 
 o^vTaroL ecTTs yvojvai ra pr]QivTa,you are very keen in per- 
 ceiving what is said ; ^eivbg XijEtv, powerful in sjpeah- 
 ing ; 6 \p6vog (5paxvg a^itvg dirjyr)(Ta(TOai to. irpa^QivTa, 
 the timh is short for worthily narrating what has haj>- 
 jpmied. 
 
 Obs. — In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent : ^kya kuI 
 k(j<TOfxkvoL(n TTuOstrOai, great also for posterity to learn; Oeieiv dve/toi- 
 (Tiv o/ioioi, lihe the winds in running; so with some substantives : 
 Oavfia ideaOai, a wonder to see. 
 On olog, oUgre, and baog, with the Inf., § 601. 
 
 § 563. The Infinitive, as in English and Latin, is used 
 as the Subject of a sentence to which the predicate is a 
 neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb : 
 TTCKTiv adnv \a\e7r6i^, to jplease all is difficult/ Kivdvvog 
 kcTTiv riTTCKrOai, there is danger of being worsted; abv spyov 
 Xeyeiv, sjpealdng is your business. 
 
 § 564. The Infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on 
 a particular word, with and without the particle w^, in several phrases 
 almost like a free Accusative (§ 404) : Cjq eiTrelv, so to »peak ; kfiol do- 
 keTv, as seems to me; oXiyov ^eTv, almost; to vvv elvai,for tJie present; 
 Kara tovto elvai, in this respect. 
 
 On tKujv elvai, § 570, Ois. 
 
 § 565, The Conjunctio7is loffTe, so that; irpiv, before, and 
 its Homeric synonym Trajooc, are joined with the Infinitive : 
 ^tXojuaOicTTaTog r^v 6 Kvpog, iogts iravra irovov avarXfivat rou 
 eiraivHdOaL fvEfca, Gyrus was very fond of learning^ so as to 
 endure any trouble for the sake of being jpraised ; irptv rrju 
 ap^rjv opOiog viroOecrOaif fxaraiov rjyovpaL irspl Trig reXevTrig 
 ovTivovv iroieidOai Xoyov, before properly establishing the 
 foundation, I deem it useless to maJce any words whatever 
 about the end. 
 
 Obs. 1. — These conjunctions may also be joined with the finite verb 
 (compare § 556) ; ware with the indicative represents a sentence 
 as an actual consequence more independent and by itself, and 
 may accordingly be often translated by fhsrefore^ hence : elg rrjv 
 vanpaiav ovx rJKEv, wgO' oi "E\\r]veg scppovTL^ov, he came not on the 
 following day^ therefore the Hellenes became anxious. 
 
g 567. THE INFINITIVE. 307 
 
 Obs. 2. — For irpiv we also find irplv i), jprius-quam ; properly trpiv, 
 wlien it means sooiier tlmn^ is always to be regarded as an abbre- 
 viation for TTplv //, irpiv originally answering entirely to the Latin 
 2yrius. On the Infinitive after ?), than^ see the following §. 
 
 Oil t^' ^re, on condition that, with the Infin., § 601. 
 
 § 566. After a comparative, the Infinitive is preceded by ^ loare or 
 »/ alone in the sense of than tJiat : ^ojSovfxai ni) n fxeli^ov t} were (pspeiv 
 dvvaaOai kurov ry ttoXu o-i;/f/3j?, I fear ^ lest^too great an evil should le/all 
 the state for it to he able to bear (greater than that it should be able). 
 
 On the Genitive of the Infinitive with the Article, which also is 
 possible here, § 574, 3, Obs. 
 
 B) The case of the Subject and Predicate with the 
 Infinitive. 
 
 § 567. The Subject of the Infinitive is that word from 
 which the action of the verb in the Infinitive proceeds. 
 When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive, it 
 appears : 
 
 1. most generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which 
 gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the 
 Infinitive : i]yyu\av tov Kvpov viKriaai, nuntiabant Cy- 
 rum vicisse. The use of the Accusative with the Infin- 
 itive, like that of the Infinitive alone (§ 559, etc.), is more 
 common in Greek than in Latin. Not only can the sub- 
 stance of a statement or perception — which, however, may 
 be also expressed in one of the forms discussed, § 525, 
 etc. — be given in this construction, but also the effect and 
 consequence of an action. Hence the Accusative with 
 the Infinitive also occurs after verbs of happening, and is 
 admissible after verbs of commanding, demanding, forbid- 
 ding : iravTiQ ofioXoyovai rriv bfxovoiav jiiyidTOV ayadov d- 
 vaiy all agree that concord is a 'very great good; (Tuvif5ri 
 iur}^iva tCjv (TTparrjywv TrapHvai, it happened that none of 
 the generals was present ; lypa-^a (nroirXuv rrjv Taxiarriv 
 Tovg 7rpi<Tf5eig,proposui ut guam celerrime legati proficis- 
 ceremtur. 
 
308 THE INFINITIVE. § 568. 
 
 The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the 
 verb of the leading sentence (compare the English : I hear you 
 sing, I bid you go), and is explained by the prolepsis mentioned 
 in § 519, 5, Obs. 2. Instead of -rjyynXav on b ILvpog tviKrjaev, we 
 might have : yyyEiXav rbv Kvpov oTi iviKrjffev ; and for on kviKijaeVj 
 viKfjaai^ according to § 560, 2 ; thus we obtain i'lyynXav rbv Kvpov 
 viKijaai. If the governing verb is intransitive or passive, the Ac- 
 cusative is of a freer kind (§ 404) : IXTrig tan Tcavra KoXwg txeiv, 
 there is hope that all is wdl. 
 
 Obs. 1. — The impersonal verbs del and xph, '^t is Tiecessary, are joined 
 with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet : xp*) 
 ToXfidp xaXeTToTo'i^' tv dXyeai Keifxevov dvdpa, the man that lies in 
 painful sufferings ought to he courageous. 
 
 Obs. 2. — As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive, 
 the same construction may be employed in indirect speech in 
 Relative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and 
 circumstances : toiuvt uttu (rcpag t(pT] diaXexOevrag ikvai ' tird dk 
 yEveaOai iiri ry oiKiq. ry 'AydOuJVog, dv^ipyjikv^v KaraXafx^dvuv tyjv 
 Ovpavj he said tluit after such conversation they went ; but that, tchen 
 they readied Agathon's house, they found the door open. 
 
 § 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject must 
 necessarily be in the Accusative : tov cl^ikov koX wovrjpov 
 av^pa (^riiJLi aOXiov iivai, I maintai7i that the unjust aiid 
 had man is miserable. 
 
 Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires an 
 indefinite Subject (tlvo) to be supplied: ra roiavra i^tarL 
 {tivcl) juLtTpyjcravTa koX apiOjurjcravTa tl^evai, one may Icnow 
 such things hy measuring and counting. 
 
 % 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is the same 
 as that of the leading sentence, it is usually not expressed 
 at all : vo/ui^u) v^viKmivai, jpiito me vicisse, I think I have 
 conquered; WiriZ.uq r^v^^a^ai wv av ^iyj you hope to obtain 
 what you need/ v7rt(T\ETO irapiaiadaL ug rriv kcnripav,pro- 
 misit se afficturioi^ ad vesperam. 
 
 Obs. — For greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some- 
 thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that 
 either in the Accusative or Nominative : Herod, ol Alyvirnoi lv6- 
 fiilov ewvTovg irpioTovg yevkaBai dvOpoj-mov, the Egyptians thought 
 that they first of all men came into existence; d ohaQe XaXKidsag 
 ri Meyapeag rrjv 'EXXa^a ahXJHv, vfiaig dk dTrodpdaetrQai rd Trpd^fxaTa, 
 
§ 571. THE INFINITIVE. 309 
 
 oi>K 6p9CJg oletrQe, if you think the Chalcidians and Megarians will 
 save Greece, hit you escape f?'om trouble, you are mistaken. 
 
 § 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the Prin- 
 cipal Sicbject are in the^ Nominative : 6 'AXi^av^pog £0a- 
 cTKEv alvat Aibg vlog, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovisfilium' 
 fyw ovK bfxo\oyr\(JU) aKXrjTog rjKHV, a\X virb o-ou K^KXrifjiivog, 
 I will not acknowledge that I am come uninvited^ hut i?i- 
 vited hy you j oi SoKouvrtc o"o0ot uvai, they who seem to he 
 wise. 
 
 Ohs. — From the Predicate, Ikwv, joining the freer Infinitive, Civai 
 (§ 564), arises the combination c/cwv tlvai : tovto Ikwv dvai ov 
 TToiTjaw, this (if I am) to he of free will I will not do. 
 
 § 571. 5. In m#ny cases a personal instead of an im- 
 personal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject 
 of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading 
 sentence ; so, instead of the English " it was announced 
 that Cyrus had conquered" {riyyiXOr) rov Kupov viKriaai), 
 we have, 6 KvpoQ riyyiXOrj viKriaaiy Cyrus was announced 
 to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not 
 only — as in Latin with dicitiir, videtur — with coku, toiKs, 
 it seems; XiyErai [dicitur, traditurl ; ayyiXX^Tai,it is an- 
 nounced; ofioXoydrai, it is agreed, but also with av/jLJ^ai- 
 vHyit happens, siR^ with several adjectives with ufii, as: 
 ^iKaioQ,just ; iTTiTYi^eiog, liriKaipLOQ, fitting ; lTri^o^oq,proh- 
 ahle ; avayKoiog, necessary ; avrog fioi Sokw IvOade Kara- 
 fitvHVyit appears to me that I myself shall remain here; 
 ZiKaioq kx ayuv avOpwirovg, it is just that you should lead 
 m,en (you are justified in leading men); Wi^o^oi elm to 
 avTo ireicrecTOai, it is to he expected that they will suffer the 
 same; Poet. TrpiTrojv €«^uc irpo riovde (jtwvtXvyit hecomes you 
 to speak in their presence. 
 
 The personal construction is explained, like that of the 
 Accusative with the Infinitive (§ 567), by prolepsis (§ 519, 
 5, Ohs. 2). For rjyyiXOr) oti 6 Kvpog hiKr]<jt there might 
 be rtyytXOr} b Kvpog bri tviKrfCTE, and for this again r}yyiXOrj 
 
310 THE INFINITIVE. §572. 
 
 6 Kvpog vLKTicrai ; for Itti^o^ov Icttiv on to avTO nticTOVTaL — 
 iTrido^OL tlm oti to avTo irdaovTai, and hence iTrido^oi dcri 
 TO avTO Trda^crOaL. 
 
 Ols. — The Accusative construction, however, is almost every where 
 applicable : Xeyerai tov ILvpov viKrjaat, dicunt Cyrum mcisse. 
 
 § 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a Gen- 
 itive or Dative 7nay be in these cases : r^XOov liri Tiva 
 Twv BoKovvTwv <T0(l>u)v Eivai, I Came to one of those who 
 seem to he wisej iX^yov toXq doKOvcn o-o0o7c tivai, I said 
 to those, etc. ; Kvpov iZiovTO wg TrpoOvjuoTaTOV y^vicrOai, 
 they begged Cyrus to he as ready as jpossihle / iravrX ap- 
 XovTi irpogmu (ppovifxij^ eivat, it hecomes every ruler to he 
 judicious. 
 
 Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative ^itvfKpepH avrolg <pi\ovg 
 eTvai fiaXKov ^ TroXefiiovg, it is to their advantage rather to le friends 
 than enemies. 
 
 C) The Infinitive with the Article. 
 
 § 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is made 
 more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the Infinitive 
 with the Article must nevertheless have a noun in the case 
 required by the verb to which the Infinitive belongs: to 
 Tag -n^ovag (^^vyuv,the shunning of jpleasures ; the Infin- 
 itive in this case also is qualified by adverbs : to Kokhig Zm', 
 living rightly. 
 
 The rules given §§ 567-572 for the case of the Subject 
 and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with 
 the Article. Thus the Accusative with the Infinitive is 
 often preceded by the Article : to irpou^ivai tov Otov to 
 fiiWov KOI TO Trpo(jr]jJLaivuv uj ^ovX^Tai, kcli tovto TrdvTeg 
 KOL Xtyovm KoX vojULiZovai, God'^s foreknowing the future 
 and jpointing it out beforehand to whom he will, all assert 
 and believe. 
 
 § 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive be- 
 comes declinable, and thus answers to the Latin Gerund. 
 
§ 574. THE INFINITIVE. 311 
 
 1. Nominative : 
 
 Poet. TO (ppovtXv ev^aijuoviag TT/owrov vTrap\H, to he thought- 
 ful is the first step to hwppiness ^' to afxapraveiv avOpijjTrovg 
 ovrag ov^lv OavfxcKTTov, that those should commit errors who 
 are human is nothing surjprising. 
 
 2. Accusative : 
 
 avTo TO aTrodvi](TKuv ov^eig (poj^aiTai, dying itself no one 
 dreads. Especially to be noticed is the Accusative with 
 the Prepositions etc, kutu, in reference to ; ^m, on account 
 ofhecausej irpog, em, besides : Kvpog ^la to (fnXoiiiaOrig 
 (Nominative according to § 570) elvaL ttoWo. Tovg irapovTag 
 avr}pwTa, Cyrus, through being eager for hiowledge, asked 
 those jpresent about many things ; irpog to fx^Tpiwv ^elcrOai 
 KoXCog TrsTraldeviuai, I have been well trained to require what 
 is moderate. 
 
 Obs. — This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article has some- 
 times a freer connection with a verb or adjective after the man- 
 ner of the freer Accusative (§ 404) : ol UeXoTrowTjmoi avkXTntrTol 
 dm TO tQ Triv yrjv t'lfiwv kgl3aXKeiv, the Pelopminesians have no hope in 
 regard to invading our country. 
 
 3. Genitive : 
 
 tTndvjjLia Tov TTiuv , desideriu'in bibendi j to £u irpaTTHv irapa 
 TYjV a^iav affyopjui^ tov KttKtJg (ppovuv Totg avorjTOig jlyvsTai, 
 prosperity without merit is an occasion to fools of base 
 sentiments ^' fjuoi ov^lv 7rpea(5vT£pov tov otl j3iXTi(TTov tfxl 
 yev^rrOai (§ 416), nothing is inore important to me than 
 my becoming as good as possible. Especially to be noticed 
 is the Genitive with the prepositions Ik, from; irpo, be- 
 fore ; tvzKa, because, on account of; virip,for,for the sake 
 of in order to ; ^la, by, through; avtv, without ; ol av- 
 OpwTTOL navTa iroiovcriv virip tov firi ^ovvai ^iktjv, people do 
 every thing in order not to swffer punishment. 
 
 Obs. — Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive 
 even without a preposition : tov firj Sia^evysiv tov \aycjv Ik twv 
 diKTvojv (TKOTTovg KuOicTTafiEv, we place scouts that the hare may not 
 escape from the nets. (Compare the rare use of the Lat. Genitive 
 of the Gerundive : arma cepit opprimundos libertatis.) 
 
312 THE INFINITIVE. § 575. 
 
 4. Dative. 
 The Dative is especially frequent to express %n8trumen'- 
 tality (§ 438); it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the 
 Gerund, to be translated, hy : ^iXnnrog KeKpaTrjKe ri^ rrpo- 
 Tspog (§ 570) npog rovg woXejuiovQ Uvai, Philip lias gained 
 the victory hy going first against the enemy [compare the 
 Latin docendo discimus'] , also with the prepositions sy, 
 in; eTTiyOn, on condition that; irpoQ, besides, and others: 
 TTpog Ti^ /irjStv tK Ti}g Trpecrjidag Xa^dv rovg aixfULoXcjTovg 
 k Twv i^iojv eXvaajuriv, besides gaining nothing from the 
 embassy , I set free the captives at my own expense. 
 
 D) The Infinitive with av. 
 
 § 575. By the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a 
 potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore 
 either that something only might happen, or that under 
 certain circumstances something would happen or would, 
 have happened. Here two cases are possible : 
 
 1. the Infinitive with av can be replaced by the Optative 
 with av : fiaXiara oifjiai av crov irvdiaSaL {irvdoifxriv av), T 
 thinTc I could learn it best from you ; ^oKuri jioi iroXv 
 jSfXrfOv av TTEpX tov iroXifJiov jdovXivaaaOai {(^tXriov av f5ov- 
 XeiKrairrOE), d tov tottov Trig \(i)pag irpbg t]v roXt/iara tv- 
 Qviir]ddr]Ti, it seems to me you, would m^uch better settle 
 about the war, if you, took into account the localities of 
 the country against which you are inahing war. 
 
 Tills Infinitive with av therefore answers either to the Potential 
 Optative (§ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of 
 the fourth form (§ 546). 
 
 § 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with av can be sup- 
 plied by the Hypothetical Indicative with av : YJvpog u 
 tptaxTCV, apLCTTog av oo/c£t ap^aov ysviaOai {apiGTog av lyi- 
 vtro), if Cyrus had lived, it seems he would have become 
 one of the best of rulers; Tovg TavTa ayvoovvTag ^iDKpaTrig 
 avcpa7roc(jjc€ig av KEKXricfOai rjy^TO (el Tiveg TavTa riyvoow. 
 
§ 578. THE PARTICIPLES. 313 
 
 tKiKXrivTo av av^pairodivdEit:), Socrates thought that, if any 
 did not know this, they would he called slavish. 
 
 This Infinitive with av thus answers to the apodosis of a Hypo- 
 thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, etc.). 
 
 Obs. — The context must show into which of the two forms the 
 Infinitive with dv is to be resolved. 
 
 E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative, 
 , § 577, belongs almost entirely to poetry ; it is used for 
 the second, and rarely for the third person. The Suhject 
 and Predicate are in the Nominative : Horn. Oapaiov vvv, 
 Ai6iur}deg, IttX Tpiveaai fxax^ddai, courageously now, Dio- 
 mede, fight against the Trojans ; Tral^a S' IfioX Xvcral re 
 (l)iXYiv ra T cLTToiva ^ix^aOai, deliver up to me my dear child 
 and accept the ransom. 
 
 Chap. XXIII. — The Participles. 
 Preliminary Remarh. 
 
 A Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 559, l), is a verlal- 
 noun (§ 225, 5). It has the same things in common with 
 the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common 
 with the noun ; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive 
 inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis, whereas 
 the Participle has the nature of an adjective. 
 
 A) Their Attributive Use. 
 § 578. A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to 
 a relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe to 
 it a permanent quality : iroXiq evpdag ayvtag l[xov(Ta, i. e., 
 Horn, evpvayvia or r) tifpeiag ajviag f'x^^* ^ ^^'^l/ having 
 broad streets ; ai Ka\ov\xEvai AioXou vy\<joiy the so-called 
 islands of JEolus ; 6 wapayv Kaipog, the present opportu- 
 nity (compare § 361, 11). 
 
 .0 
 
314 THE PARTICIPLES. § 579. 
 
 Obs. — Like an adjective, the Participle also becomes a substantive 
 by having the article prefixed : oi irapovTEQ^ those present (com- 
 pare § 379) : 6 rvxojv, tJieJirst comer. Such participles may often 
 be translated by substantives: 6 dpdcrag^ the doer; oi Xsyovreg, th^ 
 speakers; to avf^pepov^the advantage; rd deovra, the duty; Trpbg to 
 TeXevToiov (§ 361, 8) IkISclv 'iKacTOV TcJv Trpiv virap^dvTiov KpiveTaij 
 every thing that happened }>efore is judged of in accordance icith its 
 final remit. 
 
 On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part, with the Article, § 500. 
 
 ' B) Thew Ajpj)ositive Use. 
 
 § 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substantive 
 a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the 
 Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression 
 for what is otherwise expressed by subordinate clauses with 
 conjunctions of the most different kinds (compare § 583, 
 Ohs.). 
 
 A Participle used in this way is : 
 
 § 580. 1. Temporal, 
 with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX. (esp. 
 § 496) : TTpogexeTE tovtoiq avayiyvwGKOfiivoiQ tov vovv, give 
 attention to this while heing read ; Hom. a>c apa ^wv^cac 
 a7r€/3r]cr£To=£7r£i wc t^wvTjtxf, after having thus sjpohen he 
 went awcty. Observe especially tx^v and tpipwv in descrip- 
 tions, which may frequently be translated by the English 
 with : rag vavg airicTreiXav exovra 'AXfctSav, they sent away 
 Alcidas with (having) the ships; xpwfx^voq/ui a similar 
 sense : TroXXp re x^y xpMfi^vog, with (using) much skill. 
 So, also, apxpfxEvoq, at first / rt Xtvrwv, at last / ciaXnrwv 
 Xjoovov, after a time; ev lioihiv^fortunatety; koXCjq woiiov, 
 justly. The Participle wv can not be omitted when heing 
 is to be ascribed to a substantive : 'AXic^jSmSr^C '^'^^ '''"^c <^v 
 eOavfiaZero, while yet a hoy (Lat., merely ^'W^t') Alcihiades 
 was admired (§ 428, Ohs.). 
 
 § 581. 2. Causal and final, 
 where the Participle is to be resolved by since, hy or hy 
 
§ 583. THE PARTICIPLES. 315 
 
 the fact that, when referring to the present or past, and by 
 that, in order that, when referring to the future : oi»/c tanv 
 a^iKOVVTU SvvajuLiv J5ef3aiav KTrjaaaOaifJirm power is not 
 to be gained hy acting unjustly f' tov a^iKovvra irapa rovg 
 ^LKacTTcig ayeiv Sat ^iktjv dcjcrovTa, he who acts unjustly ought 
 to he brought hef ore the judges in order that he may suffer 
 punishment. 
 
 § 582. 3. Concessive, 
 
 a somewhat rarer use : to vSwp evojvoTarov apiarov 6v, water is the 
 cheapest though it is the dest/ vfieXg {xpoptofievot to. TreTrpaynsva Kal 
 dvQxspaivovreg iiyere rriv eiprjvTjv b/iwc, tJimigh suspicious of what had 
 been done, and indignant, you still maintained tlie peace. 
 
 §,583. 4. Hypothetical, 
 a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved 
 by if, and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypo- 
 thetical P^rotaseis mentioned in § 534, etc. : tovq (l>i\ovg 
 evEpyerovvTag kol rovg e\9povg dwyicTErrOa KoXaZeiv , if yotl 
 benefit your friends you will be able also to punish your 
 enemies {lav) ; also with the article : 6 p^] ^apiig avOpiowog 
 ov TTaidevsTaiy a person is not educated if he has not been 
 beaten. Such a Participle with pi] may often be translated 
 by without : ovk eanv ap^uv prj ^i^ovra picrOov, a man can 
 not rule without giving pay. 
 
 Obs. — With the varied use of the Appositive Participles, it must 
 not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clear- 
 ly express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but 
 that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating 
 only in order to express in a more precise way what is simply 
 suggested by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions 
 between these meanings, especially between the Temporal and 
 Causal, but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical mean- 
 ings, just as in Latin sentences introduced by quum : Trdvra ravTa< 
 avvidovTag uTravTag (vpdg) del iSorjOeiv, it becomes every one of you, 
 when you have considered all these things, to render help; vopi^oj 
 dfieivov av vfidg irtpi wv vvv tpCJ KpXvai, fxiicpd ru>v TrpoTspSv ttote 
 pr\Q'tvTiov fivrffiovEvfravrag, I think you would better judge about what 
 I am now going to say, when you remember a little what was said 
 before. 
 
316 THE PARTICIPLES. § 584. 
 
 C) The Participle with an Absolute Case. 
 
 § 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute 
 Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative serves to point out the circumstances 
 mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par- 
 ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject^ since from it jDroceeds 
 the action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, 
 may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, 
 in which the word in the Genitive or Accusative must appear in the 
 Nominative : rovnov dvayiyvoxjKo^ikvtjjv tov vovv TrpoQEx^Ts, attend while 
 this is heing read (compare § 580). % 
 
 1. The Absolute Genitive (compare § 428), 
 for which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal, 
 concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions : Df/oticXtouc 1770U- 
 fitvcrv iroXXa Koi KaXa tpja airedei^avTO 01 ^AOrjvaioiy as long 
 as Pericles led them {Pericle duce), the Athenians pro- 
 duced 'many and splendid works ; vavfxaxiag jEvojuivr^g 
 TiTTapag Tpiripeig Xa/i/3av£t TopytJirag, navali pngna facta 
 Gorgopas quattuor triremes capit ; oXrjg rrig iroXeixig Iv 
 Toig TToXeimiKoTg Kiv^vvoig iTTLTpeTrofxivrig r^i aTpaTYiyt[), imsyaXa 
 ra T ayaOa KaropOovvTog avrov, kol to. kuko. ^la/uLapravovrog 
 eiKog yeviaOai, as the whole state i7i the dangers of war is 
 committed to the care of the general, it is natural both that 
 great good should happen when he is successful, and great 
 evil when he fails. Poet, yivoir av nav Oeov TE\vh)fiivov,^ 
 all may be done if a God contrives it {u r^xvioTo). 
 
 § 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin 
 construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points : 
 
 a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in Greek 
 when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or from the 
 meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (compare § 361, 3, 
 Obs. 2) : Trpo'iovTiov, as {they) went forward; vovtoq^ when he (Zeus) rains; 
 i^ayyfXQkvTiov^ when it had been announced. 
 
 . &) On the necessity of the Participle of Civai — aov TraiSbg uvtoq [Lat. 
 tepiiero], see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case of the 
 adjectives UiIjv and clkijjv^ which very much resemble Participles : kfiov 
 Ikovtoq, with my will; Ifiov ukovtoq, me invito. The Poets take other 
 licenses. 
 
 c) As the Greeks have two active Participles to express a past ac- 
 tion, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less fre- 
 
§ 587. THE PARTICIPLES. ,317 
 
 quently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative : 6 Kvpog, tov 
 KpoXaov viKTjffagj KaTearpsxparo tovq Avdovg, Cyrus, Crceso victo, Lydos Slbi 
 aubjecit. 
 
 d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of 
 the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence : tuvt uttov- 
 TOQ avTov t^o^e Ti Xkyeiv t(^ 'Karvdyu, after thus speahing he seemed to 
 Astyages to say something (of importance). [Lat. ita locutus — visus est] 
 
 § 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative 
 is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially 
 ^iov,it being a duty; t^ov, 7rap6v,it being allowed, fea- 
 sible ; TrpogriKovyit being befitting/ d6^av,it having been 
 decided / ovdtlg lE,bv dp{]vr)v ayuv iroX^jjiOv aiprjaerai, no 
 one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war ; iroX- 
 XaKig vfXiv l^ov TrXcovffcrrjo-at ovk r}9e\{](Tar£f though it was 
 often easy for you to gain 7nore,you were unwilling ; ol 
 ^vpaKOiKTiOL Kpavyy ovk oXiyy i\pCovTO, a^vvarov 6v iv vvktl 
 aWtt) T(jt) (TTiimrivaif the Syracusans raised no small shout, it 
 being impossible to 'malce a signal during the night by any 
 thing else. 
 
 D) Supplements to Participles. 
 
 § 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain particles 
 are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles 
 joined with an absolute case ; they give more distinct 
 prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such 
 Supplements to Participles are : 
 
 1. (ifia, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness : ot "EXKrjves 
 tjxdxovTo tifia -rropzvojxBvoi, tlie Hellenes fought while marching. 
 
 2. fiera^v, 'between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning : 
 iir'tax^ fis Xkyovra fiera^v, he checked me in the midst of my speech. 
 
 3. avTiKa and (.vQvq, to express immediate succession : r^ ^e^iy Kkpq, 
 ev9vg dirolitfirjKoTi tTreKeivro, they pressed upon the right wing immediately 
 aftei' its landing. 
 
 4. TOTS, fiTa (Kg,Ta), tireiTa, o'vTiog, are added to the principal verb to 
 indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and take 
 up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: KaToXnrcjv ^pov- 
 pav oi5rwg Itt oikou dvex(opr}(7ev, after Imving left a garrison, he thu^ went 
 
318 THE PARTICIPLES. § 588. 
 
 away home;. Poet, /i?) vvv (pvyovreg eJO' aXwixev vaTspov, lest though now 
 escaping we should afterward be caught. 
 
 5. KaiTTEp (more rarely kuL alone), with a Participle, to be translated 
 though, renders prominent tlie concessive meaning : KuiTrep ovtoj co^dg 
 wv (SeXtiiov av yevoio, though SO wise, you might perhaps become hetter; 
 Homer often separates Kui from Trep : ol dk koI dxvvfievoi Trep Itt' avriii 
 r'lSi) ykXaaaav, and though vexed they heartily laughed at him ; o/jlojq, in 
 the same sense though or yet, ia used with the principal verb : Herod. 
 vGTEpov dxiKoixevoi Trjg (Tvn(3o\r]C IfiEipovro ofiujg GefjaaaOai Tovg Mrjdovg, 
 though they did not come till after the engagerrient, yet they desired to see 
 the Medes. 
 
 6. are, with a Participle (like olov, ola crf), answers to the English 
 in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning : 
 KUTsSapOe irdvv ttoXv are ^uKpwv twv vvktwv ovaujv, he slept a great while 
 since the nights were long. [Compare Lat. quippe quum, quippe qui.] 
 
 § 588. 7. tog and ibgirsp added to a Participle suggest 
 that what is expressed in the participle is subjective, i. e., 
 is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal 
 subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive Par- 
 ticiple as well as to a Participle connected with an abso- 
 lute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Ac- 
 cusative. The latter case in this connection is far more 
 extensively used than without those particles (§ 586). If 
 the opinion expressed in the Participial construction is to 
 be characterized af once as false, tjg and wgirEp may be 
 translated by as if: Sediaai tov OavaTov wg bv tl^oreg on 
 fiiyiGTov TLJv kukCjv i(TTiv, they fear death as if they well 
 Icnew that it was the greatest of evils ; but by in the be- 
 lief that, since, in the feeling that, etc., if the correctness 
 of the opinion is to be left undecided : i7/xac iravTig t/SXtV- 
 ofXBv TTpog avTov cjg avriKa jiaXa aKOvaroiuEvoi QavfiacTiovg 
 TLvag A070UC, we all looked at him, expecting immediately 
 to hear some wonderful statements j Poet. t^eaTi (jxvvhv 
 wg Ijiiov /uovrjc niXag, you may speak out since (in the con- 
 viction that) / alone am near ; Xiyei wg SidaKTOv ovarrig rrig 
 apBTrig, he speaks thinking that virtue is capable of being 
 taught f' cnrefiXixljaTE irpog aXXrjXovg wg avTog filv f/caoroc 
 ov TTOir]<Twv TO ^o^av, TOV ^£ ttXtjctlov irpa^ovTa (absolute 
 
§ 590. THE PARTICIPLES. 319 
 
 Accusative), you looked at one another thinJcing that each 
 one of you would not do what %uas decided upon^ hut that 
 his neighbor would. 
 
 E) The Predicative Participle. 
 
 § 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560), serves 
 to complete a verb, by attributing to a word contained in 
 the sentence something which is not a mere addition, but 
 an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or 
 Predicative Participle may refer either 
 
 1. to the subject of the sentence (§ 361, 5, 7, 8) : TraverrOe 
 au TTCjol TU)v avTtJv (^ovX^vojuevoi, cease always consulting 
 about the same things; 'icfOi Xvrrrjpog wv,Jcnow that you 
 are troublesome^ or 
 
 2. to a dependent word in the sentence (compare § 361, 
 10, and § 403) : 6 TroXe/uLog tiravcre rovg ^AOrivaiovg aal irspl 
 TU)v avTU)v (5ovXsuofjiivovg, the war caused the Athenians to 
 cease from always consulting about the ^me things ; olda 
 avTov Xvirripov ovra^Ilcnoio him to be troublesome. 
 
 In English such Predicative Participles are mostly ex- 
 pressed by the Infinitive with to^ or by sentences with that^ 
 sometimes also in other ways. In some cases, however, 
 the English language also makes use of a Participle in a 
 similar way : I feel myself affected by it, he found him 
 armed (compare § 361, 10, Obs}). 
 
 The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle 
 may be classified as follows : 
 
 § 590. 1. Verbs which express a condition, 
 as: %yjj),I am in a condition; rv^xdviti, I chance to be 
 (Poet. (cu/oEw) ; AavQavii), I escap'e notice ; <paivojiai,^i]X6My 
 (pavepog, ^rjXog djui, I am manifest ; toiKa, I seem ; ^ta- 
 TeXioj, ^layw, T continue; avi\ojuai, Kapnpiti), T hold out, 
 endure; KUfivw,! grow weary; aTrayop^mo, I desj)air ; as 
 well as the verbs which denote the beginning, interrupt- 
 ing, or ending of a condition; ap^op-ai, I begin ; ^Qavoj, 
 
320 THE PARTICIPLES. § 591. 
 
 I a7n beforehand; oLxojjiai,I depart,! am off; em-, ^la- 
 \d'Kb),Ihreah off , I suspend ; Travio,! make to cease {rrav- 
 ofiai, I cease). In translating we frequently change the 
 Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal 
 Greek verb by an adverb. Examples : KTjpu^ac t'x^ (more 
 emphatic than lKi]pv^a, compare Latin nuntiatum habeo), 
 I have announced ; rig trvx^ Trapayevojuivog ; who hap- 
 pened to he present f ^LareXio tvvoiav '^x^^ ttcktiv v/uuv, J 
 continue cherishing a hindly feeling for you all ; ixii Kajuyg 
 ^iXov av^pa evepyezLJv, don't grow weary of benefiting a 
 friend ; aWa fivpia lirikuTrti) Xkyuiv, I refrain from say- 
 ing innumerable other things; Horn. u[>x^t aTroTrTafievog, 
 he was gone flying away, 
 
 Obs. — Even the verb dfil may be joined with a Participle : tf tovto 
 ovK tffTi yiyvSixevov Trap r/fuv ; is this not happening (usual) among 
 us? A Participle is necessarily so used with f/^t to complete 
 certain verbal forms (compare §§ 287, 291), especially the Par- 
 ticiple of the Perfect or Aorist with cZ/ti instead of the Future 
 Perfect : dedcoKujQ or Sovg tau = dederis. 
 
 § 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving, 
 as : opau), I see {Trepiopaio, I overlook, endure) ; afcouo), / 
 hear ; ol^a, I know ; fiavOavu), I learn ; jiyvcjaKO), I get to 
 know ; alaQavofim, I perceive ; tvpi<jKio,I find ; fiifivriiiai, 
 I remember. In several of these the object is in the Gen- 
 itive, according to § 420. Examples ; wg aSov avrovg tte- 
 XaZovrag, oi XsriXaTovvTeg ivOvg cKpivrsg to. xpVI^(iTa ecji^vyov, 
 cum COS appropinquantes vidissent, prcedantes proida sta- 
 tim relicta fugam capessiverunt ; riKovaa nore Swicjoarouc 
 irspX (fiikijjv haXayojULtvov, I once heard Socrates discoursing 
 about friends [audivi Socratem disputantem\ ; Xe/o/jo vij- 
 oroy KaTi/uaOs noXtig ev^SKa ?} ^wSejca txov(Tav, he learned 
 that the Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities ; avOpwiroi 
 KaXot KayaOol lirH^av yvtjcriv aTnaTovfxevoi (compare § 483, 
 l), ov ^iKovGL Tovg airicTTovvTag, when good tnen perceive 
 that they are distrusted, they do not like those who distrust 
 them. 
 
§ 595. THE PARTICIPLES. 321 
 
 Obs. — With (Tvvoi^a fioi, I am conscious, the Participle may be con- 
 nected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative (jioi) : 
 tfiavTiii (TvvySeiv ovSev tTriaTdnwoQ or S7ri<7ra^£v<^, / was conscious of 
 hnowing nothing. In the sense of " to be aware" it may also have 
 the Accusative with the Participle. 
 
 § 592. 3. Verbs of emotion, 
 as : ■)^aip(i), 7i8o/xaf, Tipirofiaif I rejoice j ayaTrcni), I am sat^ 
 isfied ; xaXtTrCyq ^iptOjCegrefero ; axOo/nai, I am dissatis- 
 fied ; ayavaKTiwylam vexed; alcrxvvo^aL, I am ashamed ; 
 imeraiuiXoiLiai or ju^rajuiXH fiot, I repent. Examples : Horn. 6 
 ^E 0/ocat TtpiTET aKov(i)v, hut he rejoiced in heart at hear- 
 ing (it) ; fitrafxeXsi avTcji \piV(Tafxivi^, he repents having told 
 a lie. 
 
 § 593. 4. Verbs oi pointing out and asserting, 
 as: ^eiKw/LH, aTro(j)aivijj, T show / l^^ki'^xiii^I prove, con- 
 vict; ayyiWiDy I announce ; bjuoXoyiw, I assent. Exam- 
 ples : ^iXiTTiroQ TTCLvra evsKa ^avTOv ttoiCjv tSfXrjXt'yicrm, it 
 has been proved that Philip does every thing for his own 
 sake; a-no^aivovai rovg (p^vyovTaq iraXai irovrjpovg ovrag, 
 they mahe manifest that the banished had long been base. 
 
 § 594, Obs. — The Infinitive, according to § 560, may be used as well 
 as the Participle vrith many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590- 
 593, but in a somewhat different sense : apxofiai didd(TKwv,Ibegin 
 to he a teacher; dpxofiai ^i^daKuv,! begin to teach (my teaching); 
 ahxvvofiai Xsywv, / am ashamed though I say it ; aityyvvon-ai Xeyeiv, 
 shame presents me from saying. 
 
 F) The Participle with av. 
 
 § 595. By the addition of the Particle av the Participle, 
 in every case like the Infinitive (§§ 575 and 576), acquires 
 the meaning oi possibility or that of an Apodosis in a 
 Hypothetical Sentence, and may therefore be resolved in 
 two ways : 
 
 1. by the Optative with av (§§ 516 and 546): 
 \yh) ilfiL TU)v -n^iiog /utv av IXeyxOivrojv, rt^ewg S' av eXey- 
 ZaifTtJv, I com one of those who would gladly be refuted 
 {pi av iXeyxOdtv), and would gladly refute (ot av iXiy- 
 
 02 
 
m 
 
 322 THE PARTICIPLES. § 596. 
 
 Semv); evpicTKio ravrriv av iui6vr]v y^vo}iivr\v tCjv /j^eWovtiov 
 KivSvv(i)v aTTOTpoTTijv, I find tMs would 1)6 ths only jpre- 
 vention of the coming dangers (on av ytvofro); ta^fv koI 
 vjuag av KTttt aWovg, ev ry avT^ ^vvafiu 7]jjuv ysvojuivovg, 
 ^pCjvrag av avTo, we know that you as well as others in 
 the same position would do the same thing, i. e., 6tl el 
 ytvoiaOe cpc^rs av. 
 
 2. By the hyjpothetical Indicative with av (§ 536, etc.): 
 ^fXfTTTroc WoTi^aiav iXwv koi ^vvriOeig av avTog t\iiv, el 
 e(^ov\r)9r}, 'OXvvOioig aire^ajKev, when Philip had' taken Po- 
 tidcea, and might have {ore e^wriOt] av) kept it himself, if 
 he had wished, he gave it hack to the Olynthians. 
 
 G) The Verbal Adjectives. 
 
 § 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal 
 nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from particij^les by 
 a usage much more restricted, and referring to no special 
 time, which has been treated of generally in § 300. 
 
 The Verbal Adjectives in -reogy implying necessity, are 
 worthy of notice. A double construction is here possible : 
 
 1. The ohject of a necessary action becomes the suhject, 
 and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it: 6 irary^p ctoi tijulyi- 
 Ttog laTiv, pater tihi venerandus est l n iroXig rolg TroXiraig 
 tj(peXr]Tia, the state must he assisted hy its citizens. In 
 this construction the subject is emphatic. 
 
 2. The Neutral or impersonal construction, where the 
 necessity of the action is made specially prominent ; the 
 object of the action is in each instance in the case required 
 by the verb*: Siwfcrfov rriv aperriv, we must pursue virtue; 
 eip'qvrjv ciKriov earriv, pax agenda est; aitrkov rov iroXejiov, 
 you must try war ; (5ori9r}Teov rjiulv tdri rolg irpayp.aaiv, we 
 must help the state. 
 
 The person who is to, or must do something, is in both 
 cases in the Dative : in the second, according to the anal- 
 ogy of Set (§ 567, Ohs. 1), sometimes in the Accusative : 
 
§ 597. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 323 
 
 ov^evl rpoTTfj) ticovrag adiKriTEOv, in no way must you will- 
 ingly do injustice. 
 
 Obs. 1. — The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a 
 Middle : Truarkov kaTiv, we must obey {ireiOofiai, not TreiOoj). 
 
 Obs. 3. — In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural : tto- 
 XifirjTea iariv, we mmtjiglit (compare § 364). 
 
 Chap. XXIV. — Some Peculiarities of Eelative 
 Clauses. 
 
 A) Attraction. 
 § 597. 1. The Kelative Pronoun in general follows tlie 
 rule that it agrees in Gender and Number with its ante- 
 cedent, that is, with the word to which it refers,4)ut in Case 
 with what follows ; that is, it accommodates itself to the 
 sentence in which it stands: fx^iuLvr^aOe rov lipKov ov 6/iw 
 jULOKars, he mindful of the oath which you have sworn. 
 
 2. An exception from this rule is the Attraction, or the 
 process by which the Kelative is attracted in Case also by 
 the word to which it refers, so as to take its case : jue/jLvriaOs 
 
 TOV OpKOV ov bfKjJflOKaTE. 
 
 3. With Attraction' another process is frequently com- 
 bined, viz., shortening. This consists in the Article or 
 the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, an(? the Rela- 
 tive, with the word to which it refers, being draw^together 
 into a single clause : jutjuvrjo-^e ou o/jiwjLioKaTE opKov. 
 
 4. If the word referred to by the Relative is a mere pro- 
 noun, the Relative remains quite alone, but stands in the 
 case which the Demonstrative would have had; fiefivrjaOe 
 ov 6fi(jJiui6KaT£ = fiefjivrjaOs to6tov o ofHiyfioKarE, remember that 
 which you have s^vorn • a/ufXw wv /uc Set 7rpaTTeiv^aij,e\Cj 
 Tovrwv a fxe du. it paTTuv, I neglect what I should do. 
 
324 PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 598. 
 
 § 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the 
 following conditions : 
 
 1. The Relative clause must be closely connected with 
 the word to which it refers, must be an essential part of 
 it. Attraction is inadmissible in a Relative clause, which 
 only loosely adds a remark to a substantive, which might 
 quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means of Kai 
 and a demonstrative pronoun. 
 
 2. The sentence must be such as would have the Rela- 
 tive pronoun in the Accusative^ but its antecedent in the 
 Genitive or Dative : tiq 17 w^tXcm ToTg O^oXg rvjxavH ovaa 
 dwo Tbjv ^ijjpwv iov Trap vjiCjv Xafx^avovmv , what advan- 
 tage have the gods from the presents which they receive 
 from you f ug^iptTE a(f ocfojv SKacrrog 'ix^i, contribute 
 from whojt each has {airb roaovrwv oaa) ; Xbjeig ov GVfx- 
 <^ix)va oig TO irpCjTov tXtyeg, you do not say what harmon- 
 izes with y^hat you first said {rovroig a); roj -nyenovi ttkt- 
 Tivaofiev (^ av Kvpog Sq>, vje shall trust the commander 
 %ohoin Cyrus gives (us) {rovTi^ ov). 
 
 Obs. — Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases : wv iv- 
 Tvyxavbt) fidXKTTa dyafiai ckj i. €., tovtujv olf, I admire you most of all 
 I meet. 
 
 § 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sentence, 
 so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative, 
 and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified in 
 the Attraction : olg ovaiv vfx^Tipoig f'x^*' rovroig iravra raX- 
 \a a(T(l)a\i^g KiKrrjrai, i. e,^ a ovra vfiirepa t'x^^j rovroig, he 
 keeps all the rest in safety hy means of what he has of yours, 
 
 § 600. oToe, and sometimes o(toq and jjXikoc, have quite a peculiar 
 attraction ; viz., dvai is often omitted wlien it would stand with olog 
 in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its ante- 
 cedent : oV<^ ye iiiol TTavTctTramv drropop tovto, i. ^., togovti^ olog kyu) el/xi, 
 that is quite impossible to such a inan as lam. Sometimes the article 
 is prefixed at the same time : toXq o'loig ijjuv, to such as we. By the 
 same ellipsis ogngovv acquires the fixed meaning, whoever, i. e., any 
 whatever : ovk tan diKaiov dvdpbg (SKd-rrTuv ovrivovv dvOpwTTujv, it is not 
 a just 'man's nature to injure any person whatever (i. e., any one, who- 
 
§603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325 
 
 ever he may be). [Compare Lat. cuicunque Twmini nocere.] So ogng 
 ^ovXh means the same as ovtoq ov iSovXei, like quivis. 
 
 § 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either 
 Shortening or Attractior^ are : 
 
 av0' ojv, hecause, i. e.^ avrX tovtljv a, or avrt tovtiov otl : 
 av ev tTTOirjcFag avO' wv tiraO^Qj you did good because, you 
 received good (for that which you received). 
 
 t0' to, £(^' wra (Herod, lin tovti,^, lir' (orf),/6»7' the pur- 
 pose of^ on condition that, i. e., hn tovtoj logre, often with 
 the Infinitive : ol rpiaKOVTa ypiOrjaav 1^' tiyTe avyy paxpai 
 v6ij.ovg, the thirty were chosen J^br the purpose of drawing 
 up laws. 
 
 f ? ov, cKf)' ovf ex quo, since, i. e., since the time that. On 
 Iv (J, uq o, o.yjii ov, § ^o^, 
 
 oloc, more complete roiovrog mog, with the Infinitive, of 
 the hind that, of the kind to, and ocogr^, with the Infinitive, 
 able, possible : -ovk riv lopa ola apduv to Tre^iov, it was not 
 the season to water the field j ovx oIoits riaav fior^Oricrai, 
 they were not able to render help (compare § 562). oo-ov, 
 for roaovro o<jov, enough to, with the Infinitive : Ixoixzv 
 oaov a-KoZ,r\v, we have enough to live on. ^ 
 
 § 602. An inverted Attraction takes place when a noun 
 or pronoun is put in the same case as the Relative which 
 refers to it : Tr\v ovaiav v\v KariXnrE rql vlu ov TrXdovog a^ia 
 IcTTiv, the property which he left his son is not worth more, 
 instead of 17 ovaia r]v ; Poet, ragde S' agirsp tlgopag riKOvai 
 irpog o-f , those whom you see (the girls) have come to you 
 (ai^E ag). So ov^Etg, jurjSft'c, become one word, as it were, 
 with ogrig ov '. ov^evi otlj ovk awoKpivETai, properly ovdeig 
 t(TTiv oTt^ OVK, nobody whom he does not answer. Observe 
 also such expressions as : OavjuaaTog ocrog, i. e., OavjULaarov 
 icTTiv oaog, wonderfully great ; OaviaacTTiog wg, i. e., Oav- 
 fiaGTov IcTTiv wg, it is wonderful how. Compare § 519, 5, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 § 603. A singular anomaly is presented by Relative sentences after 
 t(jTi^ in the sense of " there is." tan is in the Singular even when the 
 
326 COMBINATION OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 604. 
 
 relative is in the Plural : icmv o'l, there are those who, i. e., some ; tanv 
 oIq ovx ovrojg tSo^ev, there are some to whom it did not appear so. So 
 tcTTiv oTE (:=.lvioTe), sometimes ; tanv ov, in some vlaces; tanv y, in some 
 ways. 
 
 B) Coinplication. 
 § 604. In translating Greek Relative clauses into En- 
 glish, difficulties sometimes arise through the particular re- 
 lations of the sentences : 
 
 1. When the Relative as an Accusative of the Subject 
 belongs to an Infinitive : ol iroXijuioi, ovg (j[)ovTb airoipvyeiv, 
 t^ai(pvr]g Trapriaav, hostes, quos aufugisse jputdbant^ suhito 
 aderant, the enemy ^ whom they thought to have fled, were 
 suddenly th^re. 
 
 2. When the Relative depends on a participle : Kara- 
 Xa/ufidvovcTL Tei\og o TeiXKrafisvot Trorf 'AKapvaveg KOtytj) 
 SiKaarripitj^ t\pu)VTO ( = 6j l\pwvTO Tu\iGajiivoL avro), they 
 take possessio7i of the fort which the Acarnanians^ after 
 building it, used as a common judgment hall. 
 
 3. When the Relative is in the Genitive dependent on a 
 comparative : ap^n), rig ov^lv KTij/xa aefivoTspov, virtue, than 
 whichmuo possession is more venerable (§ 416). 
 
 4. When the Relative depends on the verb of an inserted 
 clause \ uipoviuLeOa avTO/moXovg, oig onoTav Tig irXuova fiiaQov 
 8<S(jJ, fiiiT Ikhvwv aKoXovOijCFovaiv (duces) eligimus trans- 
 fugas, quibus si quis plus stipendii prcebuerit illos se- 
 quentur (i. e., ol, oirorav ng — S<8(o, uKoXovOijaovaiv, qui, si 
 iis — -prcebuerit, sequentur), we choose deserters, tvho, if any 
 one gives them inorepay, will follow him. 
 
 Obs. — In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those dis- 
 cussed in § 605, and others besides, the Greek language satisfies 
 itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied in 
 different cases for several clauses belonging to one another. 
 
 § 605. C) Combination of several Relative Clauses. 
 
 When several Relative clauses follow one another, the Relative pro- ' 
 noun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, it 
 would require to be in a different case : Horn, avwx^* ^^ V^^^ yafxkcrOai 
 
§ 606. INTEKROGATIVE SENTENCES. 327 
 
 Ti^ oTe(^ re Traryp fceXerai /cat avddvet avTy, hid her marry whomsoever her 
 father urges and (who) phases herself; 'Apialog, dv yfieig rjOiXofiev (3a- 
 aiXea KaQiardvai kuI [^] louiKafiev Kai [d^' ov] eXdlSofiev Tr/ora, ovtoq rjfidg 
 kukCjq TToiHv TTHpdTai, AricBUS, whom we wished to Tnalce hing^ and (to 
 ■whom we) gave and (from whom we) received pledges of fidelity^ at- 
 tempts to ill use us. 
 
 Obs. — Sometimes, instead of the repeated Relative, avTog is substi- 
 tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence. 
 So likewise fiiv in Homer ; oi Trpoyovoi, olg ovk Ixapi^ovO' ot Xeyov- 
 TEg ovS' l^iXovv avTOvc^ ojgTrep v^dg ovtoi pvv, ttsvte kuI TiTTapdKovra 
 tTt} tS)v 'EWrjvojv rjglav tKovTiov, your ancestors^ whom the speaJcers 
 did not gratify, nor did they flatter them, as these now do you, ruled 
 forty-five years over the readily submitting Hellenes. Hom. : avri- 
 6eov UoXixprjfiov, oov Kpdrog lari fikyidTOV Trdaiv KvKXioTreacn, Gdoxra 
 de fiiv Hks vvfKpT], godlike Polyphemus, whose power is the greatest 
 am/)ng all the Cyclops, and him (whom) the nymph Thoosa hare. 
 
 Chap. XXV. — Interrogative Sentences. 
 
 § 606. 3- The simple direct question may be introduced 
 by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs mentioned § 214, 
 etc. In Greek several different questions may be included 
 in one interrogative sentence : Hom. rig ttoOev ug av^ptov ; 
 whai 7nan, whence are you f airb tovtiov (jtavtpbv ybvi](TETai, 
 Tig Tivog aiTiog ifTTiv,froin this it will he clear who is 
 chargeable with what (who is chargeable and with what). 
 
 Obs. 1. — An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon- 
 strative : dyyeXtav ^epw jSapnav ' riva tuvttjv ; I bring heavy tid- 
 ings ; what (is) that f (rig avrt] tariv ;) 
 
 Obs. 2. — A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause 
 and by a participle : ttote d xpv T^pd^ETE ; tTTHddv ri yevijTai ; when 
 will you do your duty ? when what shall happen ? ri idojv t6v Kpt- 
 t6(3ovXov TTOiovvra ravra KareyvojKag avrov ; what have you seen 
 Critobulus doing that you have charged him with this f o\ TzaXai 
 'AOrjvdioL ov CieXoyicravro, virip ola TreTroirjKOTUJV dv9pioTru)V klv^vvw- 
 crovmv, the old Athenians did not calculate how much people have 
 
328 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. § 607. 
 
 done for whom they were going to incur risk Of this kind also are 
 the phrases : rl ttuOwv ; what have you passed through^ that f ri 
 fiaOujv ; wJiat have you got to Jcnow^ that ? ri iraOojv dSiKelg Trjv ttu- 
 Tpida ; what have you passed through to males you act unjustly to- 
 ward your country ? 
 
 § 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word, 
 but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated 
 
 a) merely by the tone of voice ; oh (jtojdeX jurj r]^r} tt/oeo-- 
 j3vT£pog yg ; do you not fear that you are already too old? 
 
 V) by Interrogative particles, which, in translating into 
 English, can not always be expressed by separate words, 
 but often may be rendered by the position of the words 
 and the tone of pronunciation. The most important Inter- 
 rogative particles are apa and rl, both comparable to the 
 Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected is indicated by 
 neither of these particles : ap dju ixavng ; am I a jprojphetf 
 ^ ovToi TToXifjiioL dcTiv , are those enemies f 
 
 Obs. — If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated ov is add- 
 ed ; if a negative^ fir) is added to dpa. Hence apa ov corresponds 
 to the Latin nonne. apa firi to the English surely not. 
 
 § 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may be no- 
 ticed : // yap ; isn''t it ? ») irov ; surely f dXKo ti »), properly aWo n tanv 
 7] ; does any thing else happen than f hence, also with ?/ omitted (com- 
 pare § 626, O&s.), like the Lat. noTvne^ where an affirmative answer is 
 expected : aXko n r) ddiKov/xEv ; are we not doing wrong f dXXo n ovv 
 Trdvra ravra dv elrj jiia iTrLarrjfir] ; would not this, then, he all one science ? 
 ov put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may 
 be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is 
 /ti77, which may often be translated by surely, as /uwv, formed from fii) 
 ovv, surely not, always points to a negative answer. /«?) 'AxiXXsa otei 
 ^povricrai Qavdrov /cat Kivdvvov ; surely you do not think Achilles cared 
 about death and danqer ? 
 
 % 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according to 
 § 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in regard to 
 Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct Interroga- 
 tives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used instead of the 
 mdirect ones : al jwaiKeg iipwTuiv avTovg, Tiveg ehv, the 
 women asked them who they were (§ 475, ^). 
 
§ 612. THE NEGATIVES; 329 
 
 § 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative if ox whether 
 is represented by ci (§ 525, etc.), more rarely by lav (with 
 the Subj.), sometimes by apa, and in Homer by r) (r]^). 
 Whether or not or whether jperhajps may be rendered by 
 }xi]\ (TKOTTttra, £i ciKaitjg \pi](TOfiaL roj Xoytjj, see whether I 
 sjpeak justly ; opa, /mrj iraiZwv fXtyav, see whether or not he 
 spoke in jest. 
 
 On the subject of tlie Interrogative Sentence being drawn prolej)- 
 tically into the principal sentence, see §§ 397, 519, 5, Obs. 3. 
 
 § 611. The direct double question (disjunctive question) 
 is most generally introduced by iroTEpov (iroT^pa) — r), Lat. 
 utrum — a?i : iroTspov ^idpaKtv rj ov ; Trorepov a/cwv rj sKtJv ; 
 has he done it or not f %oillingly or unwillingly f In an 
 indirect double question the same Interrogatives may be 
 used, but also 1 1 — r), whether — or^ and f iVc — fire : airopov- 
 fiEVf ure aKiov ht£ kwv di^paKEv, we are in doubt whether 
 he did it willingly or tonwillingly. 
 
 Obs. — The Homeric language has for the direct, but more frequent- 
 ly for the indirect double question, the conjunctions fi {i^e), r/ 
 (ije) : r} vfifi tv vrje(T(Ti Iloaeiddcjv IddixacTcrev, fj ttov dvdpmoi dvdpeg 
 kSrjXrjffavT IttI x^P^^ov ; did Poseidon overpower you in your ships, or 
 have hostile men injured you on land? dire dk jioi ixvrjcTTrjg ciX^ov 
 l3ovXr]v Tf. voov TS, rii fievet -rrapd TraiSl Kai tfiTreSa Travra (pvXdaaei, 
 rj fjSri fiiv tyrjuev 'Axaiwv ogrig dpitrrog, tell me the purpose and in- 
 clination of the wooed wife, whether she remains with the son and 
 guards all carefully, or whether he who is the best of the Achceans lias 
 already Tnarried her. ij {ns) is also used for ij (^e) in the second 
 member. 
 
 Chap. XXVI.— The Negatives. 
 
 A) Simple. Negatives. 
 
 § 612. Tli# 'Greeks have two diiFerent negatives, ou and 
 ^77. Numerous compounds and derivatives are formed 
 
330 THE NEGATIVES. § 613. 
 
 from each, as : ovte, fxr^re, ov^dg, lurjdsig, ovdajuLiog, jUTjSa/iwc. 
 The principal distinction between ov and fir] is that ov 
 denies, but ^r) declines. Hence arise the following special 
 rules : 
 
 § 613. 1. oh is used in all direct statements, whether 
 the reality of something is denied by the Indicative, or 
 the possibility or probability of something by the Opta- 
 tive with av : ^iXiinrog ovk ayei £ipr]vriv, Philij^ does not 
 inaintain peace • ouic av ayoi dpi]vriv,he would not {will 
 hardly) maintain peace j ovk av ^vvaio firj Kafxojv evSai- 
 fwvEiv, you could not he happy without laboring (§ 516). 
 
 Obs. — ov is also used in jlie peculiar Subjunctive of tlie Homeric 
 language mentioned § 513. 
 
 2. ov is used in direct questions to which an affirmative 
 answer is expected (§ 608), but pi] when a negative an- 
 swer is expected (§ 608). 
 
 § 614. 3. In independent sentences pi] is used with the 
 Subjwictive (§§ 510, 512), with the Optative of wishing 
 (§ 514), with the Indicative of wishing (§ 515), and with 
 the Imperative : prj 9opv(3i](Tr]TE, do not make a disturh- 
 awie ; prj yivoiTo,may it not happen; Hom. ioq prj w^cXXe 
 yeviaOai, would it never happened ! pi]-Kor W airp-nKToim 
 voov t\t, never devote your thoughts to what is imprac- 
 ticable. 
 
 Ods.— In these cases fir} generally corresponds to the Latin m. It 
 is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as 
 the swearer declines something (§ 612) : Hom. laruj vvv roh Vala 
 . . . . fxr) di kfi^v ioTijra Uocreiddojv .... Trrifiaivn Tjowag, let Ocea 
 now hww this . ... not with my consent does Poseidon afflict the 
 Trojans. * • 
 
 § 615. 4. oi> in general is used in all those dependent 
 sentences which do not express a negative purpose or 
 a condition : y^eiv, on ov pa^iov e'/r?, / /meiv it was not 
 easy / a ovk iare roitg iral^ag ttoihv, ravra avToX Troieire, 
 what you do not allow your children to do'fotc do your- 
 selves. 
 
§ G16. THE NEGATIVES. 331 
 
 Obs. 1. — In indirect questions ov as well as }ir] may be used with 
 f I in the sense of whether : aKOTruJixev, \^ irpkirn ri ov, let us consider 
 whether it is becoming or not ; Treipdaofiai fiaOelv, ei d\r]9eg fj ^f], I 
 icill try to Imrn whether it is true or not. 
 
 Obs. 2.^In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea, 
 Hi] may be used : a fiij oUa, ovde oloixai eldevai, what I do not hnow, 
 I do not think I Tcnow. 
 
 § 616. 5. fill in. general is used in all those dependent 
 sentences in which a negative jpurjpose or a co')idition is 
 expressed ; hence fxi\ is the negative in sentences denot- 
 ing intention or jpui^jpose (§ 530), in those indirect Inter- 
 rogative and Relative sentences where a purpose of hin- 
 dering is implied, in all the Protaseis of Hypothetical 
 Periods (^§ 534, etc.), and lastly in Hypothetical Rela- 
 tive (§ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal 
 clauses (§§ 66Q, 557): lav rig Kafiri, napaKoXtig larpov, 
 oTTwg fxri aTToOavT), when any one is ill., you send for a 
 physician., that he may not die j •\\jy\<^iaaa^^ Toiavra tS wv 
 fuLTidiTTOTe vfXLv fiiTafiAnaHy vote for such things as will 
 never cause yoio to repent \ea quorum numquam vos 
 poeniteat\ ; opa, ottwc im <yoL airoaTrfbovTai, see that they 
 do not ahctndon you j i^y]v croi cnriivm Ik rrig ttoXewc? ti 
 firj ripe(TK6v aoi ol vo/lloi, it was at your choice to leave the 
 state., if its laws did not please you ; OsacracrOe, tjg aa- 
 Opov kari irav, o tl av fir) ^tKaiwg y ireirpayixivov, see, hoi^ 
 rotten every thing is, which is not justly done,' fieyicTTti 
 yiyverai a(i)Tr\pia, orav yvvi) irpbg avSpa jurj ^ixocTTary, it is 
 the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with 
 her husband. 
 
 Obs. 1.— In sentences of this kind, sometimes ov is used to negative 
 a single word ; iravrioQ ovtu)q tx^i, tdv re ov (ptjre lav fe <prJTe, it is 
 entirely so whether you deny or assert it. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The Optative expressing repetition likewise has firj (§ 547). 
 
 Obs. 3. — With verbs of fearing, /xr/, like the Latin ne, signifies lest or 
 thut: dedoiKu. firi iTnXaQMfitda Tfjg olKade 6Sov,Ifear lest we forget 
 the way home (compare § 533). Even without a governing verb 
 the fear that something may happen is introduced by /«//, which 
 in this case is to be translated if only not, or if but not: fii) Itti' 
 
332 . THE NEGATIVES. § 617. 
 
 XaBiofieOa Tfjg oiKade oSov, if only we do not forget the way home 
 (compare §§ 620, 621, and 512). 
 
 § 617. 6. The Infinitive generally has fx{], particularly 
 when the Infinitive has the article ; raq o/uLolag xapirag /z?) 
 avTi^i^ovai alaxpov, not to return equal thanks is hase j 
 aoi TO iir\ (TiyricTai Xolttov ^v, it remained for you not to he 
 silent. 
 
 Obs. 1. — ov may be jDut with the Infinitive after verbs of declaring 
 and conceiving : ufioXoyoJ ov Kara tovtovq tlvai pi'irwp, I acknoicledge 
 I am not an orator in tJieir sense. 
 
 Obs. 2. — ufQTs, so that, when joined with the Infinitive generally has 
 fir), more rarely ov. 
 
 Obs. 3. — After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying, and 
 others which contain the idea of declining (§ 612), fxrj is usually 
 added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or 
 not expressed at all: KioXvofxeOa firj ixa9elv,we are hindered from 
 learning ; i)pvovvTo /xt) TreTrTcoKkvai, they denied having fallen. 
 
 § 618. 7. With PartiGijples fir) is used when they are to 
 be understood hypothetically, i. e., in the sense of a Hyjpo- 
 thetical JProtasis {% 583): ouk av Svvaio firj Kafxwv zv^m- 
 jUGvav, i. e., el /xi) ^/uoig (§ 613); so, likewise, when the 
 Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a hypo- 
 thetical or a hypothetical relative clause : 6 jur) ^apeig av- 
 6pu)iroQ ov Trai^aveTai, i. e.^ lav rig fir) ^apy, or og av jui) 
 ^apy (§ 583). 
 
 Obs. 1. — When firi Is added as a Negative to single words, they are 
 likewise to be taken hypothetically : to )u/) dyaOov, the not good, 
 1. €., o av firi ayaQbv y. 
 
 Obs. 2. — With Participles as well as with other words //// often oc- 
 curs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining, or 
 hypothetical nature of the whole sentence : ■^r](i>iaa(jQe tov iroXeinov 
 ixri (pof3r]9evT£Q rb avriKa deivov, determine upon the war without fear- 
 ing the immediate danger. 
 
 B) Several Negatives comhined. 
 % 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralized by a subsequent 
 compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued. 
 In translating, the Negative is employed only o,7ice in En- 
 
§ 621. THE NEGATIVES. 333 
 
 glish, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by 
 an indefinite : Poet, ouk Itcmv ov^lv Kptlaaov rj voiaoi woXei, 
 there is not any thing hetter for a state than lavjs ; ov^elg 
 TTWTTorf "EwKparovg ov^lv acrfjSfC ov^e avoaiov ovte irpar- 
 TovTog ti^Ev, ovre Xiyovrog 7]Kov(Tev, no one ever either saw 
 Socrates doing or heard him saying any tiding i^n^ious or 
 unholy. 
 
 Obs. — A Negative is neutralized by a subsequent simple Negative 
 of the same kind : ovSdg dvQpwTrujv dSiKu/v riciv ovk dTro^wo-ei, no 
 one wTio does wrong will not {I. e., every one will) pay the penalty. 
 
 § 620. 2. ov followed by /z// with the Subjunctive or Fu- 
 ture Indicative is an emvhatio negative. This mode of 
 speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being sup- 
 plied after ov (compare § 616,6^^^.3): ov jurj noiriaw, 
 abcTut the same as ov ^ojSrjrtov ju?) iroiriaii), there is no fear 
 that I shall do it, i. e., I shall certainly not do it : ov'Bhq 
 firjiroTs evprjcFEi to kut sfxl ov^ev lX\H(l)9iv, no one will ever 
 find that any thing, as far as defends on me, is neg- 
 lected j ov /JLYITTOTE t^apvoQ yivtojuai, I shall certainly never 
 deny. 
 
 § 621. 3. jut) , followed by ov is used in very different 
 ways : 
 
 a) After verbs o^i fearing, julyj ov corresponds to the Lat. 
 ne no7i or ut, and is to be translated by that no^ ^i^oiKa, 
 juri ov OtfxiTov y, vereor, ne non justurn sit, I fear that it is 
 not just (compare § 616, Ohs. 3); also without a governing 
 verb, jurj ov Oepirov y, if it be but not not right, i. e., if 
 it be only not wrong (compare § 512, and § 616, Ohs. 3); 
 Hom. pi\ vv roi ov yjia[G\xy aK.r]Trrpov kcli aTkiipia 0£Oto, the 
 god^s staff and garland will surely not help you. 
 
 J) In indirect questions where p.i} would mean if per- 
 haps (§ 610), [IT] ov means ^yor whether perhaps not : aOpu 
 lj,ri ov TovTo y to ayaOov, look- whether perhaps this is not 
 the good. 
 
 Obs. — In the cases adduced under a and 5, fir) is a Negative Con- 
 junction, and ov the Negative to a special word. 
 
334 THE NEGATIVES. § 622. 
 
 c) fjLTi oil is used with the Infinitive after Negative ex- 
 pressions, in the sense of so as not, or not to : ov^tig ologTs 
 (iWwg Xijijjv fJLi) ov KarayiXaarTog uvai, 710 one SJ>eaJcing 
 otherwise is able not to he ridiculous. 
 
 d) jurj ov is farther used with the Infinitive after nega- 
 tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, for- 
 bidding, denying, refusing (§ 617, Ohs. 3). The Infinitive 
 in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English 
 the negative is not expressed : ov KwXvoiueOa /bLrj ov fiaOaiv, 
 we are not hindered from learning ^ ixr\ irapijg to ^f/ ov 
 ^paaaiydo not omit saying it / riva out airapvyicrtcrOai /arj 
 ovxi tTriaraaOaL to. diKaia ; who do yoih think will deny 
 at all understanding what is just? 
 
 Obs. — ov is here only a repetition of the Negative contained in the 
 principal sentence. 
 
 C) 8o7ne Negative Phrases. 
 
 § 622. 1. ovUv, ixn^iv, and ovti, fiini, nothing, are often 
 used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nihil, meaning 
 not, not at all / compare § 404, Ohs. 
 
 • 2. ouTTw, luyjTTd), not yet, are to be carefully distinguished 
 from ovKETtj fxrjKhi, no longer : outtw ireiroirjKa, 7%ondum 
 feci^ ovKtTL iroiqaix), 7%on amjplius faciam. 
 
 3. ovy^ri stands for ou Xtyw on, I do not say that, not 
 . to onention ; /cm ovx on 6 Kpinov ev vrrvxici w, aWa kqX 
 
 ol 0fXot avTov, and not to ^mention {i. e., not only) Crito 
 was quiet, hut his friends also were. 
 
 4. pi) on for pi) tiTTd) on (pi) oirayg) means do^i^t suppose, 
 nedum, by which the mention of something is declined 
 as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in 
 Negative sentences by not only not : pi) on Oeog, aXXa 
 KOL avOpMTTOi ov (piXovm Toifg aincrTOvvTag, dorH suppose 
 that only God, hut men also do not love the faithless [non 
 homines infidos amant ; nedum dens']. In like manner 
 oux oirijjg, properly not that, donH suppose, may frequent- 
 
- 0^ T!f V • 
 § 624. a. THE PARTICLES. 335 
 
 ly be rendered in connection with Negatives by not only 
 not. 
 
 5. juLovov ov, jLLovov ovxh ouly not, is equivalent to aU 
 most, nearly; oorov ov, temporal [tantum. noji], nearly, 
 almost : KarayeXa vtt' avdpiov ovg av fxovov ov TrpogKVveig, 
 you are ridiculed hy men whom you almost worship. 
 
 6. o\) fxrjv or ov fxivroi aWa, however, notwithstanding, 
 is to be explained by an ellipsis: 6 iWoc iiiKpov Ikuvov 
 \^iTpayj]Kia^v ' ov fiiiv (viz., l^iTpax<]\i(Tiv) aWa lirifiuvw 
 6 Kvpogy the horse nearly threw him off, {did) not, however, 
 hut Cyrus Icejpt his seat. 
 
 On ovTt, fXijTs, ov^e, /nrj^i, § 625. 
 
 Chap. XXVIL— The Particles. 
 
 § 623. Particles are also indeclinable words which serve 
 partly to connect sentences, partly to give emphasis to 
 particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven language. 
 The Particles which serve to connect sentences are called 
 Conjunctions ; those which give prominence to particular 
 parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire 
 sentences prominent, are called eniphatic particles. 
 
 In regard to position, they are either prepositive, i. e., 
 take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, i. e., al- 
 ways stand after at least one other word in a sentence. 
 
 Obs. — The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according 
 to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong equal- 
 ly to different classes. They will be arranged according to their 
 original or primitive signification. 
 
 A) Conjunctions. 
 
 Preliminary Kemark. 
 
 § 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated without 
 regard to the formal relation of sentences to one another 
 (§ 519). But 
 
336 THE PARTICLES. § 624. 
 
 1. Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis- 
 junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with 
 the exception of ojutjQf which is used principally in the 
 Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all Illa- 
 tive Conjunctions except logre ; 
 
 2. Subordination is implied in all the rest. 
 
 Ods. — Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely 
 also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another 
 in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (davv^ETov, 
 want of connection) takes place more frequently only in an Epex- 
 egesis (s7re?]7yr/(ng), i. e., a subsequent explanatory addition to some- 
 thing already alluded to in the previous sentence : elfii ng yeXolog 
 larpoQ ' iojusvog /xEiZov to vofftjfia ttoiw, / am an odd physician ; Tyy 
 curing the disease I make it worse. Wherever the Asyndeton oc- 
 curs in other cases, the speaker generally intends to produce a 
 special effect by it. 
 
 I. Cojpulative Conjunctions. 
 § 624. h. 1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are »cat, 
 which in general corresponds to the Latin et^ and the post- 
 positive, enclitic ri, which in general corresponds to the 
 Latin que. The language of poetry has besides i^St and 
 'tSf , with the meaning and [compare atgue\, 
 
 2. The Greeks, like the Romans, are fond of expressing 
 the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence, 
 either by Kai — Kai or rt — jcat, or rk — rk : koli Kara yfjv koX 
 Kara OaXacrcrav, both hy land and by water / Hom. ^ krpu^ai 
 r£ Koi aXXoL evKvri]Ln^eg ^Axaioi, ye AtridcB as well as ye 
 other well-greaved Achmans ; Hom. mil yap tol epig re 
 (j)i\ri TToXefioL re ficixat n^^for strife is always jpleasant to 
 you, and wars and battles. We may farther add the Epic 
 rifikv — r]^k, as well — as also. 
 
 Obs. — In single instances we also find rk — ^£, where the second 
 member is made more prominent by contrast. 
 
 3. Kai has, moreover, the meaning also : Hom. Trajo' tfjioiye 
 »cai aXXof, oi K£ fXB Tiiinaovai, with me are also others^ who 
 will honor me. 
 
§ 625. THE PARTICLES. 337 
 
 In this sense, also, Km is frequently used in both the 
 connected parts of a sentence : koI rj/buv ravra ^oku air^p 
 KCLL P^aaiku, we also ajpjprove the same thing as the Jcing 
 {does also). The meaning also by intensification becomes 
 even : kol Xiav, even verij much / and in the opposite case 
 even hut : kol (5paxvv xpovov, eve?i lut a short ti?ne. koi 
 ^i answers to the English and also : ^iKaiov kol irpiirov ^l 
 cLfia, just and at the smne time also hecoming. 
 
 After words of resemblance or likeness Kai means as : 
 oiuLoiwg Kai, ceque ac. 
 
 4. aXXwg re Kai properly means " both in other respects, and also ;" 
 it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and 
 may be translated by especially: x«X£7rov tan dia(5aivHv rdv Trorafiov 
 dXXojQ re kuI TroXefiiujv 7roXKu>v ejyvg ovtmv^ it is difficult to cross the river^ 
 especially as many of the enemy are near. kuI Srj Kai is used to make 
 the last part of a series emphatic : Herod. Kpoiaov jiamXEvovroQ din- 
 KvkovTai kg 'EdpSiQ dXXoi re oi ttcivteq Ik Ttjg 'EXXddog ao(pi(TTai^ Kai di^ Kai 
 SoXwv, during the reign of Crcesus there came from Hellas doth all the 
 other wise men and especially Solon [Lat. cum — tum\ 
 
 5. In the Epic Dialect re is frequently employed to indicate the 
 agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sen- 
 tences, often, too, in connection with other Particles, such as Kai, /^ev, 
 ^g, aWo^and with relatives (ogT^, oaogrE). In these cases re must gen- 
 erally tlpleft untranslated or rendered by an unaccented also : Horn. 
 og K€ QioTg tTrnrsiOijTai fidXa r tKXvov avTov, wlwever oheys the gods they 
 greatly listen to him also. 
 
 m Obs. — The re in we«, olocre, which occurs also in prose, is of the 
 same origin. 
 
 6. The rising climax^is also expressed by ov fiovov — 
 aXXa Kai, not only — hut also. On 6i>x ort, firi otl, ov\ 
 oirwg, see § 622. 
 
 § 625. 1. The* Particles ov^i, fxtj^i and ours, jui^rg, serve 
 to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong 
 to ouSt and luri^if viz. : 
 
 a) nor either, and not / in this sense they are used to 
 connect a single member of a sentence "v^lh a preceding 
 one negatively : Hom. jS/ow/irjc ov\ a-KT^ai ovde iroTriTog, 
 you touch not meat nor drinJc either / Trpog gov ovS' Ijjlov 
 (l)pa<no, to your advantage and not to mine I will speah. 
 
 P 
 
338 THE PARTICLES. § 626. 
 
 h) also not, not even : IXttIZ^io oy^l tovq iroX^fiiovq imeveiv 
 hiy I hope that the enemy also will not longer stay ; ovdt 
 TovTo l^rjv, not even this was allowed [ne hoc quidem lice^ 
 hat\ 
 
 2. ovre — ovte, jurfre — luiire, are used with mutual refer- 
 ence to each other, and may be translated neither — nor : 
 Horn. our£ TTor Iq noXeiiiov TrwXeaicfro, ovre ttot uq ayoprjv, 
 he neither went to war nor to the assemhly. Sometimes 
 a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation 
 with a positive one by means of omz or iiixri: — rk [Latin 
 neqtce — et~\: wfxoaav fxi]Tt irpodwcreiv aXXr^XovQ GVfi}xa\OL 
 T£ £(7£o-0a(, they sivore not to betray one another and to he 
 allies. 
 
 Obs. — If something else be added to two members connected by 
 owre — ovre, or iitjte — /wjjre, it may be done by oUk^ fxrjSe. When, 
 on the contrary, ovSe or i.ir)Ss corresponds to a preceding ovre or 
 IxrjTE, it must be called an irregularity (compare re — ^e, § 634, 2, 
 » Ods.), and the member thus added is emphatic : dXXd yap ovre 
 TovTOJv ovdsv i(TTiv oXijGeg, ovde y' et rivog dKrjKoaTe^ wg lyoj TraiSeveiv 
 ETTtxeipw dvOpwwovg, but neither is any of these things true, nor even 
 if you have heard from any one that I undertalce to train men. 
 
 II. Disjunctive Conjunctions. ^ 
 
 § 626. 1. rj, carefully to be distinguished from ^ (§§ 643^ 
 607), means # 
 
 a) or, and in this sense is often doubled : rj — ?/, either — 
 or, for which i'^tol — rj is used wh^ greater emphasis is to 
 be given to the first member of a sentence : r\ aoroc tiq v 
 Ktvog, either some citizen or a' stranger. 
 
 h) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives 
 like aXXoQ, alius; Evepog, alter ; Zia^opoq, different ; Iv- 
 avTLog, opposed to, etc. : tlvl av jiaXXov iriaTivaaipL rj aoi ; 
 whom should I trust more than you f ovSlv aXXo tirirr]' 
 ^avovaiv rj cnr&SvricFKeiv, they think upon nothing else than 
 dying. 
 
 Obs. — After TrXeov (TrXeTor, contracted TrXelv), m&re, and tXaTToi^, pelov, 
 less, 7) is sometimes omitted with numerals, just as quam is after 
 
§ 629. THE PARTICLES. 339 
 
 plus : tTij yeyovwg ttXhov ejSdoixfiKovTa, more than seventy years old 
 [plus septuaginta annos natus]. The same is the case also after 
 dXKo Ti in questions (§ 608). 
 
 § 627. 2 EiT£ — are, tavre — eavre, are used like the Latin 
 sive — sive, when it is to be left undecided which of two 
 sides is to be chosen : arc aXr^Otg sire xpev^ogf ov koXov jioi 
 ^OKH TovTo Tovvojua ^x^iv, whethev true or false ^ it seems to 
 Trie not fair to have this name. 
 
 III. Adversative Conjunctions. 
 § 628. 1. ?i expresses so slight a contrast or opposition 
 that^ though it is generally rendered by hut, it may also, 
 and especially in Horn., be translated by and. The Greeks, 
 however, also like to indicate the first of two sentences 
 which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by 
 fiiv, in truth, truly, indeed ; but it may often be left un- 
 translated: Horn. aWoL juEV pa Oeoi re KaX avipig iinro-' 
 KopvaraX ev^ov Travvv\ioi, Aia S' owk exe vri^viuog vTTvog, the 
 other gods, indeed, and the horse-hair crested men slept 
 through the night, hut sweet sleep did not hold Zeus.- As 
 here, jiiv — St express a contrast, so elsewhere they indicate 
 only a difference : AapEiov /cm UapvaaTidog yiyvovrai iraX^tg 
 ^vo, 7rpE(TJ3vTepog fxlv 'A/ora^fp^Tjc, vewrepog ^l Kvpog, Darius 
 and Pary satis had two children, the elder Artaxerxes, the 
 younger Cyrus; Horn. Trspt plv f5ov\y Aavaiov TTEpX S' eare 
 fiax^adm, in council on the one hand, and in hattle on the 
 other, you are distinguished among the Danai. 
 
 Obs. — In Homer an Apodosis also may be opposed to its Protasis 
 by means of ^s, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a 
 temporal conjunction : 'iujq 6 ravQ' wpfiaive Kara <ppeva Kal Kara 
 Ovfiov, i/XOE 6' 'AOrtvT], while he pored on this in his mind and spirit 
 Athene came. This is founded on a combination of co-ordination 
 and subordination. Compare § 519, 1 and 5, Obs. 
 
 % 629. 2. aWa, yet, hut (originally Ace. Plur. Neut. of 
 aWog), denotes a stronger contrast than Se : Horn. tvQ'' 
 aXXot fxlv TravTEg sTrsw^rj/xrjo-av 'A^a<ot — aXX ouk 'ArpctSr^ 
 ^ Aya/aepvovi T]v^ave Qvpt^y, aSXa KUKiog a(f)iei, then all the 
 
340 THE PARTICLES. § 630. 
 
 other AchcBans assented, yet it did not meet the feelings 
 of Atrides Agamemnon, hut he harshly dism^issed him., 
 
 Qlg^ 1, — After a hypothetical sentence either expressed or under- 
 stood, aXXd^ sometimes with a strengthening ye added to it, may 
 frequently be rendered by Imt or yet at least : d firj rravra, dXXd 
 TToXXd Y laTs, if not all, yet you hnow at least much ; Poet. t5 Qtol 
 -TraTp^oi (7vyysv£(T6s y dXXd vvv, oh gods of my fathers, he with me at 
 least now [if not before]. 
 
 Obs. 2. — dXXd frequently serves to break off a long discussion and 
 emphatically to introduce a request : Horn. dXXd iriBEaQt kuI vfifiee, 
 lut do you also follow me. 
 
 Obs. 3. — After negatives dXX ?; or dXXd alone means except : dpyvpwv 
 fitv ovK tx(^ d\X' fi fiLKpov Tijlhave no money except a little. On ou 
 firfv oKkd, § 622, 6. 
 
 § 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast or 
 a transition to something diiFerent are : 
 
 3. av, avT£, properly again, then on the other hand, yet. 
 
 4. Horn, avrap, and arap, hut, on the contrary, yet. 
 
 5. jUEVToi, certainly, however, see § 643^ 13, 
 
 6. KaiToiy and yet, still. 
 
 7. ojuwg, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast [Lat. 
 tamen, nihilominus']. On ojuwc as a supplement to a par- 
 ticiple, § 587, 5. 
 
 IV. Conjunctions of Comparison. 
 
 § 631. 1. w(,', as (Lat. ut), 
 is properly the adverb of oc, ri, o. It differs in accent from 
 wg, so or thus (§ 99), except when in poets and the Homeric 
 Dialect it is placed after the word compared (§ 98, a), in 
 which case it is oxytone : 7raTi)p wg ijiriog ^£v, he was gen- 
 tle as a father. Like the Lat. ut, it is employed in very 
 different ways : 
 
 a) In its original C07nparative sense wg means as or how, 
 and is used in comparisons : wg J^ovXei, as you wish; fia- 
 Kpov iog ytpovrijfarfor me an old man (Lat. tanquam)-, 
 Horn, wc fJiOL ^i\ETaL KUKov EK KaKov aid (how with me one 
 evil always follows another, Lat. quam); with superlatives 
 
§ 632. THE PARTICLES. 341 
 
 like the Lat. quam : w^ TaxKyTa, guam celevTime^ as quick- 
 ly as possible (compare otl). In statements of number and 
 measure it means about ^ nearly : wc V^Ka, about ten ^ ojg 
 lin TO Tro\v,for the most part ; with verbs of motion or 
 action it indicates what is merely intended, apparent : air^qu 
 (oq HQ TovQ TToXeiLLiovg, he went away in the direction of the 
 eneifny (as if he went against the enemy) ; hence it occurs 
 ^ith. participles in the manner described § 588. On its 
 use with the Infinitive, § 564, and on wg as a preposition, 
 §450. 
 
 h) In a temporal sense w^ means when^ as soon as (com- 
 pare Lat. ut) : Hom. wg ei^\ log fxiv juaWov t^v x^^^oc, when 
 he saw him, ancjer pierced him the onore j wg ra^iaTa 'iwg 
 vir^c^aiv^v, IQvovro, as soon as dawn appeared, they sacri- 
 ficed [Lat. ut pTimum\ 
 
 c) In a causal sense wg means as (Latin quum), since, 
 and with subsequent statement of the reason, j^?' .• Kojuai 
 (70V TTapafXHvaiy wg lyw r\^iaTa aKOvaaifXL aov, I beg you to 
 stay here, as I should hear you with the greatest pleas- 
 ure, 
 
 6?)» After verbs of saying and declaring wg means that: 
 riK^v ayyeW(i)v Tig, u)g 'EXarem KaretXrjTrrat, 807ne one came 
 announcing that Elatcea has been tahen. § 526, b. 
 
 e) wg is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that (wgTs). 
 
 f) In 2^ final sense a>c means in order that : wg firj navTeg 
 o\(i)VTai, in order that all may not perish. Compare § 530, 
 etc. 
 
 g) On wg expressing a wish (Lat. utinami), see § 514. 
 
 § 632. 2. wgirep, as, 
 is only a strengthenecl'^wc (compare § 641, 3), and is used 
 only in a comparative sense. 
 
 3. oirwg, how, that, in order that, 
 is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then 
 
B42 THE PARTICLES. § 633. 
 
 be translated by that^ or in order that^ compare § 530, etc. 
 On ovx oTTwc, § 622, 4. 
 
 4. a)OT£, as, so that, 
 
 bas rarely tbe comparative meaning as, generally tbe con- 
 secutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive 
 or a finite verb. Compare § 5^5. 
 
 5. Hom. ^i5rc, as, just as,iike, only in comparisons. 
 
 § 633. V. Declarative Conjunctions, 
 
 1. OTL, that, because [Lat. quod^, 
 
 is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun oqtlq, 
 6 ri, on the distinction of which from on, compare § 214, 
 Obs. 2. Like the Latin quod, on has two principal mean- 
 ings, the declarative that and the causal because. 
 
 a) on means that after verbs of saying and declaring 
 (compare § 525) : 'HpaKXeiTog Xiyei, on iravra x^P^^ '^"^ 
 ov^lv juiveif Ileraclitus says that every thing moves, and 
 nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase S^Xov on (also 
 written SrjXovori), it is clear that, manifestly. 
 
 Obs. — Sometimes, also, a direct speech is introduced by on, so that 
 the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation : ISrjXov 
 r) ypacpf], on QEfiicrroKXrjg ^kw Trapd gs, the letter Stated (that) I The^ 
 mistocles am come to you. 
 
 b) because, that [Lat. quod^ : Hom. x^ojuevog, or api- 
 arov ^Axaiiov ovSlv tncrag, angry that you have not hon- 
 ored the best of the Achceans. 
 
 The use of oti (or o ri) with a superlative deserves at- 
 tention : on raxK^ra like mq raxK^ra, as quickly as possi- 
 ble/ and on ju//, except, besides : ovk riv Kprivrj on fxrj juiia, 
 there was no fountain except one,0 
 
 2. ojg, that, § 631, d. 
 
 3. gioTf, that, § 636, 2. 
 
 4. ovveKa, that, § 636, 3. 
 
§ 635. THE PARTICLES. 343 
 
 yi. Temporal Conjunctions. 
 § 634. (Respecting the Moods, see § 6oQ, etc.) 
 
 1. oTi, oiroTE, whe?i, as \_qtm?ido, cum] : orav, oTrorav, 
 when^ if : r/v ttotc \p6voq, ore Otol /jlv ^<jav, Ovrjra ^l yivrj 
 ovK riv, there once was a time when gods existed^ hut moi'- 
 tal races did not exist ; Horn, ol ^' ore h) XijiivoQ iroXv- 
 (ievOiog ivTog *Ikovto, iGTia fxlv (rrdXavro, hut when they got 
 within the deep harbor they furled the sails, ore and 
 oTTorc with the Optative, according to § 558, Ohs. 1, mean 
 whenever, as often as : Horn. Ivda irapog Koifiad' ore jullv 
 jXvKvg vTTvog iKavoi, where formerly he used to lie down 
 whenever sweet sleep came upon him. Sometimes ore has 
 the causal meaning since. 
 
 2. Hom. £ur£ = orf. 
 
 3. riviKa, oTtriviKa, when, at the time when (§ 217), de- 
 notes rather a point of time : -qviKo. r\v ^aiXri, eK(nr(vr}g tiri- 
 <l>aLvovTai OL TroXijULOi, when it was evening the enemy sud- 
 denly appeared. 
 
 4. riiioQ, poet, when : 
 
 Horn. ii]\iOQ d' 7]sXiog ji'taov ohpavbv afx^ilSefSTjKei, Kai Tore Si) xpycreta 
 Trarijp iriTaive raXavra^ lolien (at the moment) the sun liad entered 
 
 mid heaven, just then the father raised the golden scales. 
 
 • 
 
 § 635. 5. lird, (Tfter, when, as : linav, lirriv, lirav, lohen ; 
 Hom. avrap liru Trocriog koX k^rjTvog l^- tpov fVro, hut when 
 they had quenched the desire for food and drinh ; YJvpoq 
 vTricTXsro av^pl licaorq^) ^(xxjelv Trivrs apyvpiov fxvaq, lirav 
 elg BajivXiova t]K(i)(Tiv, Gyrus promised to give each man 
 five silver mince when they should come to Bahylon. iizu 
 frequently introduces a reason, and then is to be translated 
 by hecause or for : Hom. aXXa TrWiaOe kol vfifiegf Ittel 
 TrELOerrOai afiuvov, hut do you also ohey me, for it is hetter 
 to ohey. 
 
 6. eTTEi^T], now since, since : liru^avy when, is liru strength- 
 ened by §// (§ 642), and points more strongly to the reason 
 
y = tojg. 
 
 344 THE PARTICLES. § 636. 
 
 assigned than eird : iTreidrj aveujxOri to ^Eo-juwr/jjotov, tig- 
 riXdoiuLEv, now si7ice the prison was opened we entered. 
 
 7. EU)g, as long as, till [qioamdm, duin, done(i\ : twc £Tt 
 kXirig, as long as there is still hope; TnpL^^ivoji^v iujg avoi- 
 xOdrj TO ^E(Tiuiii)Ti]piov, we waited till the prison shoidd he 
 opened, 
 
 8. iCJTS. 
 
 9. fJi^xP'-f ^XP'- (compare § 455 
 
 10. poet, ocjipa, as long as, till : 
 
 Horn, o^pa fikv i]u)g r/v, as long as it was morning; Horn, ix^i kotov, 
 o^pa TtXkaay^ he nurses wrath till hefuljills it. o<ppa is very often 
 a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by 
 that^ in order that : Horn. 6<ppa fii) dlog aykpaarog Iw, in order that 
 I may not de alone unhxmored. 
 
 11. TTpiv, hefore, sooner \_priusquam] (compare § 565), 
 is joined sometimes with the Infinitive, sometimes with a 
 finite verb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously y 
 earlier, has been preserved, especially in to it pivy formerly. 
 In Hom. the Conjunction irpiv may refer back to the ad- 
 verb TTpiv : ouS' 6y£ TTpIv AavaoXcTiv auKia Xoiyov clttmctei, 
 irpiv y* ctTTo Trarpi ^tX({^ dojuevai tXiKwiri^a Kovprjv, and he 
 will not avert the dreadful suffering from the Danai he- 
 fore they have given hacJc the quick-eyed maiden to her 
 father, 
 
 12. Trapoc, Hom. =:7r|0tV. • 
 
 VII. Causal Conjunctions, 
 § 636. 1. oTLy § 633, h, 
 
 2. Iloti, hecause, properly ^la tovto oTi,for this reason 
 that, or that, 
 
 3. ouvEKa, hecause, poet., from ov fvsKa, for tovtov fvtjca 
 oTiffor this reason that ; hecause, also declarative that. 
 So likewise oOovvsKa from orou (ovrtvoc) cvfKa. 
 
 4. IttsI, § 635, 5. 
 
 5. ore, § 634, 1. 
 
 6. yap (always postpositive),yc»7', namely, to wit. Spe- 
 cial peculiarities in the use of yap are : 
 
§ 637. THE PARTICLES. 345 
 
 a) In animated discourse the sentence containing a rea- 
 son is often put before the one for which the reason is 
 given, especially after a Vocative : Horn. 'Arpd^r], ttoXXoi 
 yap TeOvaai KaprjKO/uLOWVTeg ^A-)(aLOi — no aa )(pri ttoXs/jlov 
 iraixrai, Atrides,for many rich-Imired Achceans have died, 
 therefore you ought to jput an end to the war. 
 
 h) By namely, yap may be translated when it introduces 
 the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so 
 especially after TSKfiripiov SI, jiaprvpiov di (supply l(jTi),fo'r 
 that there is a jproof, a testimony. 
 
 c) In answers yap may often be rendered by yes, cer- 
 tainly, but must in reality be explained by an ellipsis : 
 aywvKjriov fjilv apa r]fuv irpog Toifg avdpag ; avayKt] yap, 
 i^r]y 7nust we then contend with the Tnen f yes, it is nee- 
 essary, said he — the complete answer would be, we must 
 contend, for it is necessary. 
 
 d) In anima^ questions yap serves to give emphasis 
 like the Lat. ncmi : tl yap ; quidnam f how so f ^ yap ; 
 ov yap ; is it not so f ttCjq yap ov ; how could it he other- 
 wise f u yap is the Lat. utinam. oKka yap [at eniml 
 corresponds to the English hut surely ; ov yap aWa prop- 
 erly : for it is not so, hut, hence however. 
 
 WII. Inferential Conjunctions. 
 
 § 637. 1. apa (Ep. ap and enclitic pa, poet, also apa, 
 postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers to 
 something known or resulting from what has gone before. 
 It is most frequently used in Homer to connect sentences 
 slightly: loq ap e(pr^,thus then he spoke; ^Arpeidrig S* apa 
 vna Oorjv aXa^e irpoipvaaav, and Atrides accordingly drew 
 the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be expected), ovk apa 
 often means not forsooth, u apa if then or if perhaps, and 
 in indirect questions whether perhaps: 
 
 On the Interrogative apa, % 607, h. 
 
 2. ovv (New Ion. wv, postpositive), then, consequently, is 
 
 P2 
 
346 THE PARTICLES. § 638. 
 
 more emphatic than apa : Horn, rirot voaTog aTrwXfro ira- 
 rpog tfxoio ' ovt ovv ayyeXiy £rt TrdOofiai, el ttoOev tXOot, 
 ovre OeoTTpoTrir^g efiirdZofiai, surely my father's return is 
 lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, if one comes 
 from any where, nor concern myself about prophecy, plv 
 ovv (compare § 643, 12), no doubt, certainly, well then; 
 3' ovv, certainly; a AX' ovv, but certainly ;. yap ovv, yet 
 surely. When joined to relatives, ovv has the generalizing 
 meaning of the Lat. cungue : oqtiqovv, whoever, guicungue 
 (§§ 218, 600). 
 
 By combination with ovv we obtain the Negative oi^/c- 
 ovv, not then, to be carefully distinguished from ovkovv, 
 which is properly an Interrogative, not then f but as an 
 affirmative answer is expected after an interrogative with 
 ov (§ 608), it has acquired \h^ positive meaning, therefore, 
 accordingly, now : ovkovv tfioiye ^0KH,hence Ido not think 
 so; Poet, ovfcouv orav ^rj fjirj adivix),'iTe'irav(TOiiai, well, then, 
 I will cease when I really have no stroicMk. 
 
 3. vvv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened vvv, corre- 
 sponds to the unaccented English now, 
 
 4. Toivvv, hence, therefore, surely, is a vvv strengthened 
 by the assuring tol (§ 643, 10). 
 
 5. ToiyapySO then, therefore, yet ; more emphatic roiyap- 
 TOi, Toiyapovv. ^ 
 
 6. (ogrs, SO that, § 632, 4. 
 
 IX. Final Conjunctions. 
 
 .^ (Respecting the Moods, § 530, etc.) 
 
 § 638. 1. *lva, that, in order that, in order to [Lat. ut\, 
 as an adverb also signifies ivhere in a relative sense and in 
 indirect questions : o^x opag "iv d kukov ; do you not see 
 in what (position of) evil you are? tVa -as a Particle of 
 purpose is elliptical in \va ri ; where yhr^TaL must be sup- 
 plied, i. e., that what may happen? whyf 
 
§ 639. THE particles; 347 
 
 On 2, wg and 
 
 3. oTTwc, see §§ 631, 632, 3. • 
 
 4. oippa, § 635, 10. 
 
 5. fii] = ljat. ne, that 7iot, in order that not, §§ 530, 
 etc., 614 ; after verbs of* fearing, § 616, Ohs. 3. 
 
 X. Hypothetical Conjunctions. 
 (Kespecting the Moods, § 535, etc.) 
 § 639. 1. a, if, 
 in indirect questions whether, § 610 ; in wishes (where a^t, 
 u ^dp are also used), if only ^ if hut, § 514. Observe also 
 u iii] in the sense of except, like the Lat. nisi: rifuv ov^iv 
 i(TTiv ayaBov aXXo el firj oTrXa kol apirri, we have no other 
 good except weapons and valor ; £t ixr\ f(, nisi si, unless ; 
 tlirep, siquidenif if indeed, certainly if, contains aji em- 
 phatic assurance : Poet. i\ Koi yeyrtOtbg ravr ad Xi^nv ^o- 
 KEig ; HTTEp TL y tan t7]q aXrjOeiag adivoQ, do you really 
 thinJc you ivill always speah thus joyously f (answer) if 
 indeed (certainly if) there is any force in truth. 
 
 2. laVf i. e., u av (ay, I'lv), if/ 
 
 in indirect questions, whether, § 610. 
 
 3. av, I suppose, perhaps (postpositive), 
 
 always denotes that something may happen only under 
 certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable. 
 On av with the (potential) Optative, § 516. 
 
 " " (hypothetical) Indicative, § 537. 
 
 '' ^^ Indicative, denoting repetition, § 494. 
 
 Future Indicative, § 500, Obs. 
 
 '' " Subjunctive with relatives, § 554. 
 
 '' '' " with particles of time, §557. 
 
 « '' Infinitive, §§ 575, 576. 
 
 " " Participles, § 595. 
 
 Obs. — dv is often used twice in the same clause : ovk av dpOcig ovd' 
 vyiCJQ 6 TOVTO TTOirjirag Trepi ovSevbg dv XoyiaaiTO, Tie wTw did this WOvld 
 not^ I suppose Judge correctly or soundly about any thing. 
 
348 THE PARTICLES. § 640. 
 
 4. Horn. KB, dv (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely 
 like dv. 
 
 XI. Concessive Conjunctions, 
 
 § 640. 1. el Kai (iav Kai), if even, although, 
 denotes a simple concession : poet. ttoXiv, tl kol ju?) j3Xt- 
 ireig, (ppovug S' ofnog, olq. vocrt^ ^vveartv, though you have 
 not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city is 
 involved. 
 
 2. KOI el {kol eav, kuv), even if, even though, 
 
 denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamsi : riyeiTO av- 
 ^p6g ehai ayaOov ^(^eXcTv roifg (piXovg, kol el jurjSac M^'XXot 
 eiaeadai, he deemed it to helong to a good man to benefit 
 his friends, even if no one should hnow it, 
 
 05s.— The distinction between d Kai and Kai ci consists mainly in 
 the former giving the emphasis of the Kai to the Protasis, the 
 latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases al- 
 most the same. 
 
 3. Kuiirep with the participle, § 587, 5. ' 
 
 In the Apodosis, the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed 
 by ofidjg, notwitMtanding, § 630, 7. 
 
 B) Particles of Emjphasis, 
 
 § 641. 1. ye (enclitic and postpositive), at least [Latin 
 quideifn\, gives the word before it greater weight, and is 
 often represented in other languages merely by a more 
 emphatic accent on the word to which ye is attached: 
 Horn, eiirep yap "Ektwjo ye kqkov koX avaXKida (jtrjcrei, aXX 
 ov ireiaovrai Tptjeg,for if Hector shall call (you) hase 
 and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not believe (it) ; 
 Horn. aXXa av, el ^vvacrai ye, Trepi(T\eo irai^og, but do you, 
 if you can, protect your son; tovto ye oip.ai vfiag airavrag 
 ytrOriaOai, this at least I think you all have perceived; 
 Horn. oTig roiavra ye peZ,oi, whoever should do such things, 
 ye is very frequently affixed to pronouns : tywyt, ego qid- 
 
§ 642. THE PABTICLES. 349 
 
 dem^ oye (Horn, he^ he sjpecially) ; o'cyf strengthened o'c, 
 qui quidem, 
 
 2. yovv (postpositive), at least [Lat. certe'], is compound- 
 ed of Y£ and ovv, and hence more emphatic than ye alone. 
 
 3. Trip (enclitic and postpositive),^''^^^, exactly, very, 
 shortened from the adverb tte/oi, very{% 466), serves to give 
 precision to the relative : ogir^p (§ 218), the very one who ; 
 u)QTrip,just as. In Homer it is added to participles in a 
 sense similar to that of Kalirep (§ 587, 5) : ^rjS' ovTU)g aya- 
 Oog irep lu)v OEOEiKiX 'Ax^AXtv icXeTrrt vo(jj, he not so stealthy 
 in jpurpose, divine Achilles, though you are so very noble 
 {ironical). 
 
 § 642. 4. ^7] {certainly, to he sure, well then, therefore), 
 points to what is ohviotcs in a single idea or in a whole 
 sentence. ^{\ is used principally in three ways : 
 
 a) to emphasize single words : irota Igtlv a r)fxaq wtpeXsi ; 
 vyieia koI Icrxvg koi KoXXog koX irXovrog ^r/, what kind of 
 things are those which benefit us f health, and strength, 
 and beauty, and, certainly, wealth • ^riXa S77, to he sure if 
 is clear ; vvv hpar^ ^7), now you surely see ; aye ?»), well! 
 come ; tI h) ; what then f p.akiaTa St}, very much so, at the 
 beginning of an apodosis ; kox tote S//, now, just then. On 
 KOL ^ Kai, § 624, 4. 
 
 h) to confirm a sentence by referring to what precedes : 
 Tov fxlv ^rj TrifXTTu, him, then, he sends ; Poet, ot rrjXiKoi^e 
 KOL dida^ojULecrOa ^i) ^poveiv irpog avdpog rriXiKOvda ; we even 
 at such an age are, then (according to the preceding 
 speeches), to he taught wisdom by a man of such an 
 age? (og \v nvi ^povpii. lapev ol avOpwiroi, kol ov ^h 3?) 
 tavTov Ik TovTYig \vuv, we men are, as it were, placed 
 at some post, and it is therefore not proper to aban- 
 don it. 
 
 c) referring to time, very much like the particle of time, 
 rjt^r], Lat. jam : Kai rroXka ^i) aXXa Xi^ag eIttS, and after 
 having already stated m<iny other things, he said ; vvv ^ri, 
 
350 THE PARTICLES. § 643. 
 
 just now, Horn, ra S/) vvv wavra TeXnTai, all that is Just 
 now being done. 
 
 5. drjTTov, surely, I suppose, also SrjTrovOev, 
 is often used ironically in assertions which admit of no reply : 
 Tpk<p^Tai dk ^vxr) rivi ; fiaOrjfiaai Sr)7rov, the soul IS rwurished lyy loJiat? 
 (answer) surely lyy learning. H Sjjttov, well, then, what do you sup- 
 
 6. dfjra, certainly, 
 
 negative ov SrjTa, certainly not ; tL drjTa, well ! what then f 
 
 7. ^yiBev, clearly, evidently. 
 
 8. ^al, 
 
 another form of ^7';, but only used in questions: H ^ai; well! 
 what? liow so? 
 
 § 643. 9. ?], verily^ truly 
 (to be distinguished from ?J, or^ than^ § 626), strengthens 
 an assurance, r] }i{]v (Horn, r] fxiv) is the common form 
 of an oath : wfioaav opKovg i) fxriv fxrj fxvr](jLKaKi](juv, they 
 swore that they would truly not cherish revenge. On the 
 Interrogative n, §§ 607, 608. 
 
 In Homer ?] is appended to lird and rt, to add strength 
 to them : Ittu r], ri i], for which also lirui], nrf is written. 
 
 10. Toi (enclitic and postpositive), I assure yon, let me tell you. 
 ovToi, truly not; strengthened forms: roiyap, roiyapovv, roiyapTOi 
 (§ 637, 5). 
 
 11. I'lToC, xerily, faith (j) and toi), 
 
 serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry: i'lTot 07 wf dirwv kut 
 ap eZsTo, now when Tie had so spolcen he sat down. 
 On the disjunctive iiToi — ?}, either, or, see § 626, a. 
 
 12. fxi]v (Hom. iiav, juh), verily, truly [Latin verum, 
 vero], 
 
 Hom. ojde yafy t^epiu), /cat jur)^ rertXeaiuivov tarai^for SO 
 will I sjpeah out, and truly it will he fulfilled; ri ////v ; 
 why! what? lohy not? (compare § 404, Ol)S.\ 
 
 13. luLtvToiy yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero, 
 
 from fiiv, the weaker form of /ulyjv : eg Olvia^ag liTTparevcrav 
 
 Kol tTToXlO^OVV, ov jlivTOL u\6v JBy ClXX aVE\d)pt)(TaV ItT 
 
 oiKov, they made an expedition against (Eniadce, and he- 
 
§ 643. THE PARTICLES. 351 
 
 sieged it j yet they did not conquer it, hut returned 
 home, 
 
 14. vaiy yea, in fact. 
 
 15. VI} y truly, 
 
 followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, who are 
 invoked as witnesses in an oath : vr) Am, hy Zeus. 
 
 16. fia, truly, 
 
 in negative oaths: oh fxa Am, 7io, hy Zeus; also in positive 
 ones, when val precedes : vol fxa Ala, truly hy Zeus (§ 399, 
 Ohs.). 
 
 17. Horn. er]v (enclitic), truly ^ surely, 
 
 similar to the Attic dti-n-ov (§ 642, 5), often with an ironical mean- 
 ing : ow 9r]V fiiv ttoXiv avTig dvrjcTEi Ovfiog dyrivojp vukuuv (iamXrjag, 
 his courageous heart will surely not again incite him to taunt 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 (The numbers indicate the §, not the pages.) 
 
 ABODE. 
 
 «'^6ode,"to be supplied, 411 
 
 Absolute Genit., 428 ; 584— 
 Ace, 586. 
 
 Abstracts in the Plur., 362, 
 Obs.— mostly Fem., 103. 
 
 Accent, 17, etc. — General 
 rules, 79, etc. — of Nouns, 
 107, etc.; 118; 123; 148 — 
 of Comparatives, 171 — of 
 Pron., 207 — Irregularities 
 in the declensions, 121 ; 
 123; 131; 133; 142; 163; 
 166; 181 ; 183— in Adverbs, 
 201; 165 — in Verbs, 229; 
 
 331, etc. — in the Strong 
 Aor., 255— in the Perf., 
 276; 284- in the Strong 
 Pass. Stem, 293 — irreg., 
 
 332, etc. — in derivation, 
 340, Obs. 4, etc. 
 
 Accusative, orig. ending, 173, 
 Obs. — meamng, 395 — of 
 the outer obj., 396, etc.— of 
 the inner obj., 400, etc — 
 of double obj., 402, etc.— of 
 the predicate, 403 — free 
 Ace, 404, etc.— Adverbial, 
 201 ; 203 ; with Prep., 447, 1 
 —with the Inf., 567, etc. 
 
 "Accustomed to," expressed 
 by Aor. and Imperf. Ind., 
 with !iv, 494, Obs. 1. 
 
 "Acquainted with," or "ig- 
 norant of," with Genit., 
 414, 3. 
 
 Action, Suffixes for, 342. 
 
 Active, 476 — Act., Mid., Pass, 
 meaning, 328. 
 
 Acute Accent, 17 ; 80, etc.— 
 87 2 
 
 "Adapted for" Suffix, 351. 
 
 Adjectives, decleiis.,114:; 126; 
 154; 164, etc. — Compar., 
 197— Genders, ISO, etc.— of 
 
 3 Endings, 185, etc of 2 
 
 Endings, 182; 189 — of 1 
 Ending, 190— Derived, 350 
 — Contr., 183— Subs, fem., 
 127, 4— with Art., 379— fol- 
 low the Genit., 412, Obs. 
 
 Adverbs, 201, etc. — Correla- 
 tive, 217, etc. — Num. Adv., 
 
 ATTRIBUTE. 
 
 223— with the Art., 379- 
 as Adject., 382. 
 
 "Aim," expressed by Ace 
 406. 
 
 Alphabet, B. 
 
 Anastrophe, 90. 
 
 Aorist, weak, with transitive 
 meaning, 329— with «, 310 
 — strong with intransitive 
 meaning, 329— of proverbs 
 andgnomes,494 — Ind., 492, 
 etc. — in Condit. sentences, 
 543— in Condit. sentences, 
 
 . 539 ; 541— Moods, 495, etc. 
 — Subj. in cond. sent., 545, 
 Obs. 1— Opt. and Inf. 497 
 —Part., 496. 
 
 Apoco2}e, 64, D. 
 
 Apostrophe, 15; 64; 65, D. 
 
 Apposition, S61, 12; 385— Ap- 
 positive Partic, 579 ; 583 
 
 Article, 106 — Crasis, 65- 
 without Accent, 97, 1— as 
 Demonstr. Pron., 212, D, 
 for the Relative, 213, D.— 
 Origin in Homer, 368 ; 370, 
 Obs. — omitted, 376, etc.— 
 Meaning, 369, etc. — Neut., 
 with Genit., 381 ; 410— Po- 
 sition, 383-390. 
 
 Aspirates,d2; 52, etc. — at the 
 begin, of two successive 
 syll., 53 ; 274, 1— Redupli- 
 cated by Tenues, 62. 
 
 Aspiration dropped or re- 
 moved, 32, D. — thrown 
 back, 54— omitted, 52, D.— 
 in the strong Perf., 279. 
 
 Assimilation, 45 ; 47, etc. ; 
 50 6 ; 51 ; 56. 
 
 Asyndeton, 624 a, Obs. 
 
 Atona, 97— before Enclit., 93 
 e; 98. 
 
 Attempting an action," ex- 
 pressed by the Imperf., 489. 
 
 Attic Decl., 132— Ending, 157 
 —Future, 263— Reduplic, 
 275,1; 278. 
 
 Attraction, 597, etc. — ^invert- 
 ed, 604. 
 
 Attribute, 361, 11 — Attribu- 
 tive Adjective Art., 384 — 
 
 COMPLETED. 
 
 Attrib. compounds, 359, 2, 
 . and Obs. (Comp. 300)— At- 
 * tributive additions, 383- 
 
 386 — Attrib. Partic, 578. 
 Augment, 234, etc.— Omitted, 
 
 234, D. ; 235— Double, 237 ; 
 
 240 — in Compounds, 238, 
 
 etc.— irreg., 270, D. 
 
 Barytones, 19. 
 
 "Be," "become," "make," 
 
 etc, 417; 361,7. 
 "i5e(7m," "interrupt," "end," 
 
 verbs with Part. , 590 — with 
 
 Genit., 419 6. 
 " Benefiting,"YeY\)B of, 396. 
 "i>M7/," Verbs with Genit., 
 
 421. 
 
 " Capability, "QiQ,.,'SfQvhs, with 
 Inf., 560, 1. 
 
 Cardinal Num., 220. 
 
 Case, 100— Use of, 392, etc.— 
 Endings, 100 — Ace, 142; 
 153— in Comps., 3W, Obs. 
 
 " Cause," in the Genit., 408, 
 7—422; 426 — Dat., 439— 
 Part., 581. 
 
 Challenge or Command — in 
 the Subj unc, 509 — by ottws-, 
 553, Obs. 
 
 Characteristic, 249. 
 
 Circumflex, 21 ; 80 ; 83, etc. ; 
 87 a. 
 
 Classes of Verbs in &>, 247- 
 
 ^ 250; 320-327; of Verbs in 
 * HI, 305-319. 
 
 Collective Sing., 362. 
 
 Common Gend., 127, 5 ; 140. 
 
 " Community," expressed by 
 Dat. 436. 
 
 Comparative, 192, etc. — de- 
 clens., 170, etc— irreg., 199 
 —Adv., 203— with Genit., 
 416 — Adj. and Verbs with 
 Genit., 416, Obs. 3 ; 423. 
 
 Compensation by lengthen- 
 ing, 42 — for V, 49, Obs. 3 ; 
 147, 1 ; 233, 2— for vt, vO, vd, 
 50 ; 147, 1 ; 187— for a, 270. 
 
 Completed Action in Verbs, 
 484; 435; 502-506. 
 
354 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 COMPOUNDS. 
 
 Compounds, Divis. of Syll.,73 
 — Accent, 85; 131; 165; 
 183; 332 — Adj., 182, etc.; 
 189, 8 — Augm. in Comp. 
 Verbs, 238, etc.— treated as 
 simple Verbs, 402 — with 
 Genitive, 424 — with Dat., 
 43T. 
 
 Concessive Participle, 582. 
 
 Conditional Sentences, 534, 
 
 ■ 549— uegat., 616. 
 
 Conju7ictions, 623, etc. 
 
 Connecting Vowels, 233, 1, 2, 
 5 ; 262, etc. ; 275. 
 
 Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc., 
 44 — in dividing iSyll., 71, 
 etc. 
 
 Contraction, 36, etc.— in De- 
 clens., 118; 122; 128; 130, 
 etc.; 103, D. ; 166; 108 — 
 Double, 167— Omitted, 85, 
 D. 1; 165; 160, D. ; 288, 
 D. 4 ; 243, D. ; 263, D.— of 
 the Pres. Stem, 243, etc.— 
 of Adv., 201— Contr. Syll. 
 long, 75, Obs.— Accent, 87 ; 
 168; 881— Contr. Fut., 269 ; 
 262, etc. 
 
 Co-ordination, 519, 1 a, 2. 
 
 Coronis, 16 ; 05. 
 
 Correlation, 519, 4 — Correl. 
 Pron. 210 ; 218— Adv., 217, 
 etc. 
 
 Crasis, 10; 65 — Accent in. 
 
 Dative, Perispome, 109— Oxy- 
 toue, 188, 2— in Monosyll., 
 142 — in <n{v), 08; 165, D. 
 
 — represented by <}>iv, 178, 
 D. — Meaning, 429, etc. — 
 withPrepos.,447,3— ofad- 
 vant. and disadv., 431— of 
 interest, 431, etc. — ethical, 
 483 — of community, 436, 
 etc. — of instrument, 438, 
 etc. — of measure, 440 — 
 free, 441-443. 
 
 "Declaration," Verbs of— 
 with Ace. and Inf., 567 — 
 with Inf, 500, 2 — with 
 Part., 593 — with oi^, 617, 
 Obs. 1— Sentences of, 525. . 
 
 Decomposites, Augment in, 
 239. 
 
 Defectives in Compar., 200. 
 
 Defining Object, 400 c— Inf., 
 562. 
 
 Demonstrative Article, 369— 
 Pron., 212; 216; 475— fol- 
 lows the predicate, 367 — 
 Art. with, 389. 
 
 Denominatives, 389. 
 
 Dental Cons., 30— dissim. 40 
 — become a, 47 ; 07 — mutes 
 dropped before a, 49 ; 147, 
 1; 149; 260— in Per f., 281 
 
 — Charact. in Verbs, 250, 
 Obs — Fut., 260, 3. 
 
 Deponents,4S2—PaiSS.,S2S, 2— 
 Pass. Mean., 328, 4: 483,3. 
 
 Derivative Ending in Com 
 paratives, 357. 
 
 Description expressed by the 
 Imperf., 488. 
 
 Desideratives, 353, Obs. 2. 
 
 Determinative Comps., 359, 1 
 and Obs. (Comp. 300). 
 
 Diceresis, 9 ; 22, Obs. 
 
 Digamma, 3, D. ; 34, D. ; 85, 
 D. 2 ; 63, D. ; 75, D. ; 160 
 237 ; 283, Obs. ; 360, Obs. 
 
 Diminutives, 347 ; 104. 
 
 Diphthongs, Pronunciation. 
 8— Origin, 26; 35, 2— be- 
 fore Vowels, 35, Obs. ; 160 : 
 248, Obs.— without Angm., 
 235— spurious, 27. 
 
 Disjunctive questions. (See 
 Double question.) 
 
 Dissimilation, 40. 
 
 Distributives, 223. 
 
 Doric Fut., 204. 
 
 Doubling of Conson., 62 ; 34 
 
 Double questions, 611 — oi 
 and M';, 615, Obs. 1. 
 
 Dual represented by PI., 366, 
 
 Effect and Consequence ex- 
 pressed by Ace. and Inf., 
 567. 
 
 Elision, 64— Accents, 88— be- 
 fore Enclit, 96, 3. 
 
 Enclitics, 92, etc.— retaining 
 the Accent, 96. 
 
 Endi7ig, 100 — changed in 
 Comps. 855— of the IstDe 
 clens., 134— of 2d,172. 
 
 Enjoying,\erhs of, with Gen 
 itive, 419 d. 
 
 Epexegesis, 624 a, Obs. 
 
 Ethical Dative, 433. 
 
 Exclamations, 393 — in Ace. 
 399, Obs— in Genit., 427. 
 
 Extent, exp. by Ace, 405. 
 
 Fear and Anxiety, 538 ; 512 
 
 616, Obs. 3. 
 Feeling, verbs of, with Ace. 
 
 899— with Dat., 439, Obs.— 
 
 with Genitive, 422, Obs.— 
 
 with Part., 592. 
 Feminines, 103; 127; 188; 
 
 108. 
 Fi7ml letters, 07, etc. — Syll. 
 
 long — bef. vowels short, 75, 
 
 D. 2— Contr. Accent, 87; 
 
 183. 
 Future, 499, etc., 484 — Act. 
 . with trans. Meaning, 329 
 
 — periphrastic, 501 — Fut. 
 
 Perf., 505 — Ind. with /ce, 
 
 554, Obs. 2— Particip. with 
 
 Art., 800. 
 
 Gender, known by general 
 rules, 101, etc.; 127 — by 
 ending of Stem, 125 ; 137, 
 
 INTEEROGATIVE. 
 
 etc.— by Declens., 105 ; 122 
 —in A Declens., 122 — in O 
 Declens., 127 — in Conson. 
 Declens., 137, etc. 
 
 Generic Article, 375. 
 
 Genitive Perispome, 100 ; 118 
 — Oxytone,133, 2— Paroxy- 
 toue, 181 — in Monosyll., 142 
 — represented by Oev and 
 0rv,178,D.; 118— Meaning, 
 407— with Prepos.,447, 2— 
 with Subst.,408, etc.— with 
 Adj. and Adv., 414, etc.— 
 with Verbs, 417, etc.— free 
 Genit., 425, etc. 
 
 Gentile l>iames, 349; 350. 
 
 Grave accent, 19, etc. ; 86. 
 
 Gutturals, 30 — with a form f , 
 48 ; 260 — before n, become 
 7,47 — with t, become era-, 
 57— Charact. of Pres., 250 ; 
 251, D. 
 
 Heteroclites, 174. 
 Hiatus, 08 — apparent, 68, D. 4. 
 Hypothetical Sent (See Con- 
 ditional Sent.). 
 
 Imperative, 228 — 1 Aor., 53 — 
 268,D.;518— iuCond.Sent., 
 545, Obs. 8— exp. by 2 Pers. 
 Fut. with ov, 499, Obs. — 
 supplied by Inf., 577. 
 
 Imperfect,4SQ, etc. — in Cond. 
 Sent., 548 — in Prot. and 
 Apod., 538; 541. 
 
 Inclination, 91, etc. 
 
 Incomplete Action, 484, etc. 
 
 Indefinite Subject, 361,3, Obs. 
 2— in Neut., 864. 
 
 Indefinite Prououus,214,etc. ; 
 216— Adv., 92, 4. 
 
 Indicative, &)! — in Depend. 
 Sent., 620; 528— in depend., 
 declar.,and interrog.Sent., 
 626— in Condit. Sent., 530, 
 etc., 545 — in temp. Sent., 
 566— hypoth. Ind. in Cond. 
 Sent., 637— in Sent, of pur- 
 pose, 650. 
 
 Indirect Object, 430 a. 
 
 Individualizing Article, 371, 
 etc. 
 
 Infinitive Act., in ij.evai, ixev, 
 233, D. 3; 265, D. — in vai 
 Aor. and Perf. Accent, 383, 
 1-^; 268, Obs. 1 — Use, 659 
 —with Art., 379— as Sub- 
 ject, 563 ; 574, 1— Ace, 2— 
 Gen., 8— Dat., 4— with ju'v, 
 and ou, 017 — with nh ov, 
 621 c, d— for Imper., 677. 
 
 " Injure," Verbs— with Ace, 
 896. 
 
 Instrument, suffix, 844 — Da- 
 tive of, 438 ; 674, 4. 
 
 Interest or Advantage, Dat. 
 of, 431, ete— Middle of,479. 
 
 Interrogative Pron., 214 ; 216 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 355 
 
 IKREGULAB. 
 
 — direct andindirect,475 6; 
 
 609— in depend. Sent., 525 
 
 — joined with Demonstr., 
 
 606, Obs. 1. 
 Jz-rfif/M/Jar Nouns, 177 — Verbs, 
 
 320, Obs. 
 Iterative form, 334, D., etc.— 
 
 in Imperf. and Aor., 335, D. 
 
 Judicial Proceediugs, Verbs 
 of— with Genit., 422. 
 
 Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2. 
 
 Labials, 30 — before /x. 47 
 before o-, 48; 260 — verbal 
 stem, 249. 
 
 Lengthening, 40, etc. ; 147 ; 
 155 ; 165 ; 173, Obs. — in 
 Pres.,24S— intheFut. 
 2; 261 — in Redupl., 275 
 (Com p., 273, D. ; 278)— of 
 Vowels, 243, D. 3 ; 263, D. 
 
 Liquids, 33— in divis. of Syll., 
 
 Locative, 179. 
 Long by Nature, 75. 
 
 Manner, exp. by Dat, 441. 
 
 Masculines,102; 137— distiug, 
 from Fem., 113; 122; 134 
 —for Fem., 362, Obs. 2. 
 
 Material, suffix, 352, 3, 4- 
 Genit.,408, 3; 414,2; 418. 
 
 Measure, in Dat., 440. 
 
 Medice, 32. 
 
 Metaplasm, 175. 
 
 Metathesis, 59 ; with strong 
 Aor., Act. and Mid., 257 
 D., 282, 285 ; with strong 
 Aor. Pass., 295, D. 
 
 Middle, 477, etc. — direct, 478 
 — indirect, 479 — Subject- 
 ive, 480— Causative, 481 — 
 Aor. with Mid. meaning, 
 255, 2 ; 271— Fut. with Act. 
 meaning, 264 ; 266 ; 328, 1 
 — with Pass, meaning, 266. 
 
 Modesty of Assertion, exp. in 
 Opt., with uv, 517, Obs. 1. 
 
 Jfomeritory Action, 484; 492- 
 498. 
 
 Monosyllabic Stems, length- 
 ened, 142 &— in \, V, p,Perf., 
 282— AccentofMon. words, 
 142— with Enclit., 94. 
 
 Moods, 225, 4, 
 
 Multiplicatives, 223. 
 
 **Must" and "^^/lowW, "Verbs 
 of, in Imperf., 490. 
 
 JfM^es,31, etc.— Assimilation, 
 49, D, ; 52— before Liquids 
 and Nasals, 78— Stems of 
 Verbs, 248. 
 
 Ka'ine in Genit., 408, 9 — of 
 Animals, Gender, 140. 
 
 •'iVawe,""Select,"etc.,Verb8 
 of, 361, 7, 10; 392; 403. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Narrative in Aor. Ind., 492. 
 
 Nasals, 33— in divis. of Syll., 
 72,1. 
 
 Necessity, expressed by Ver- 
 bal Adj., 300. 
 
 Negatives, 619, and Obs. 
 
 Negative Pron. and Adv., 219. 
 
 Neuters, 104 ; 139 — Dental 
 Stems, 147 b; — Liquid 
 Stems, 151 — Sigma Stems, 
 165— Marks of, 105, 3 ; 125 ; 
 136— Accent, 340, Obs. 4 — 
 as Adv., 201 ; 203 ; 401 — 
 Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 303 
 —Adj. as Predic, 366. 
 
 Nominal Predicate, 361, 4, 
 etc. 
 
 Nominative Dual oxytone, 
 131,1— for Voc, 129; 393- 
 meaning, 392. 
 
 Nouns from Verbal Stems, 
 245. 
 
 Numbers, 100, 1 ; 225, 1 — 
 "two" in the PI., 305. 
 
 Numerals, 220, Obs. — with 
 Art., 374, 
 
 Objective Inf., 501 — Genit., 
 574, 3, Obs.— Part., 581 ; 361, 
 9 ; 395. 
 
 Objective Compp., 359, 3, and 
 Obs,- Genit.,403, 5 b; 413. 
 
 '■'■ Opinion to be of,'' Yerh, 
 with Inf., 560, 2; 567. 
 
 Optative, 228— Pres., 2 Pers. 
 Sing, in atia, 233, D. 1 — 
 Perf. Mid., 2S9 -514 — po- 
 tential with av, 517, Obs. 2 ; 
 552, Obs. — in dep. sent., 524 
 — Opt.in dep. Sent., 522,etc. 
 —in indir. Speech, 523 — in 
 depend., declar., and inter. 
 Sent, 528— in Sent, of pur- 
 pose, 532— in Sent, of fear, 
 533— in Condit. Sent., 546, 
 etc.— in Relat. Sent., 555— 
 in tempor. Sent., 556 ; 558 
 —exp. interest, 430. 
 
 Ordinal Numbers, 220 — in 
 Ace, 405, Obs. 1. 
 
 Oxytones, 17— before Enclit., 
 93 a. 
 
 Paroxy tones, 11 — \n Crasis, 
 "—before Enclit., 93 c. 
 
 Participles, Declens., 187 — 
 Voc. Siug.,148— Perf, Act., 
 276, D. -^em., 188 ; 277, 
 D.— Pres., Aor., and Perf. 
 Mid., 333, 6-10— with Art., 
 379, etc. ; 578, Obs. — in 
 Dat., 435, Obs. — hypoth. 
 with /u»';, 583,618. 
 
 Particles, 92, 5 ; 623, etc. 
 
 Partitive Genitive, 403, 4; 
 412; 419. 
 
 Passive, 483 — with Dative, 
 434— Aor. in Active verbs 
 with Mid. meaning, 328, 3. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Patronymics, 348. 
 
 Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351 
 —Genit., 408, 8. 
 
 "Perccwe," Verbs of, with 
 Genit., 420 ; 417, Obs. — 
 with Infln., 560, 2 — with 
 Part., 591. 
 
 Perfect, weak, 277, D. ; 280, 
 etc. — strong, 277, etc, — in- 
 trans. meaning, 330— trans, 
 and intrans. meaning, 329 
 — use of the Ind., 502 — 
 Moods, Inf., Part., 506 — 
 Perfects with Pres, mean- 
 ing, 503.- 
 
 Period, hypoth., 534 — inter- 
 posed, 550— Negative, 616. 
 
 Perispomes, 21 — before En- 
 clit., 93 6. 
 
 Personal Endings, 226— Pro- 
 noun, 250, etc. ; 92, 2 — 
 Meaning, 469— Genit. ,470 a 
 —for reflec. pron., 471, Obs. 
 
 a, 6— Personal Constr.,571. 
 Place, Suffix of, 345— Genit 
 
 of, 412 ; 415 ; 425— Dative, 
 442— Adv. with Genit, 415 
 — Desig. of, 82, 2 ; 179; 412. 
 
 Plenty and Want, Adject, of, 
 414, 2— Verbs, 418. 
 
 Phiral, 3 Pers. PI. Mid. in 
 
 -arai, -aro, 226, D. ; 233, D. 
 
 6—1 Mid. in fieaOa, 233, D. 
 
 5 ; 362, etc. 
 Position, 71, etc. ; 193. 
 Possessive Article, 373 — 
 
 Pron., 208— with Art., 388 ; 
 
 470 — of the reflective, 472 
 
 b, c — Poss, exp. by Genit, 
 408, 2 ; 414, 1— by Dat, 422. 
 
 Possibiliy,ex\).hy Verb Adj., 
 300— by Opt with av, 516, 
 etc.; 546 — by Part with 
 iiv, 595. 
 
 Predicate, 361, 3, etc. — de- 
 pendent, 361, 10; 589, 2 — 
 without Art, 378, 387. 
 
 Predicative Ace. , 403— Genit , 
 417— Ace. with Inf., 570— 
 Gen. or Ace, 572 — Part,* 
 589. 
 
 Prepositions, lose their Ac- 
 cent, 88— Elision in dissyl., 
 64; 90; 238— Anastrophe, 
 90— Augm. aft Prep., 238, 
 etc. — Use, 444 — Adverbial, 
 446 — with Ace, 449 /— 
 Genit, 451, etc.— Dat, 456, 
 etc.— Genit and Ace, 458 — 
 with three cases, 462, etc. — 
 spurious, 445. 
 
 Present Ind., 4S6, ete — 
 Moods, Inf. Part, 491 — 
 hist, 487 — exp. by Ind. 
 Aor., 494, Obs. 2— enlarge- 
 ment of, 246— Stem, 231— 
 like the Verb Stem, 247— 
 with lengthened Stem 
 Vowel, 248— from Verb 
 
356 
 
 ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 PKIMITIVE. 
 
 Stem with t, 249 — with i, 
 250, etc. 
 
 Primitive words, 339. 
 
 Principal Conjugations, 230 
 —first, 231, etc. ; 320, etc.— 
 second, 302-319— Declen- 
 sions, 111— first, 112-134— 
 second, 135, 
 
 Proclitics (see Atoua). 
 
 '' Prohibition," 518 ; 510; 499 
 — Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, 
 etc.— have the Infln. with 
 Idf], 617, Obs. 3— with M^; ov, 
 621 d. 
 
 Prolepsis, 519, 5, Observ. 2 
 (Comp.,567; 571). 
 
 Pronunciation, 4, etc. 
 
 Proparoxytones, 17 — before 
 End., 93 d. 
 
 Properispomes, 21 — before 
 Eucl., 93 d. 
 
 Proper Names in -a, 115, D. 2 
 — n?, 174— KXr^f, 167— with 
 Art., 371, Obs. ; 375, Obs, ; 
 387, Obs. 
 
 "Property," Suffix of, 346; 
 343, Obs. 
 
 Quantity, in Crasis, 65 — in 
 Monosyll., 142 — doubtful, 
 75, D., 1 — reversing quant., 
 37, D., 2 ; 161, Obs. 
 
 Quantitative Adj. and Adv., 
 224— with Art., 374. 
 
 Questions, dubious in the 
 Subj., 511. 
 
 Reciprocal Pi'on., 211. 
 
 Reduplication, 53, 10 a — in 
 the Perf., 273, etc.— in the 
 2 Aor., 257 d— in Verbs in 
 m, 308. 
 
 Reflective Pron., 210— Mean- 
 ing, 471— 3d for 1st and 2d 
 Pers., Obs. c — to denote 
 possession, 472 — for Re- 
 ciprocal, 473, 
 
 Relative Adj., 414. 
 
 Relative Pron., 213 ; 216 — 
 Crasis,65— Compound,214, 
 Obs. 2— Hypoth., 554— fol- 
 lows the Predic. Subst,, 367 
 —used once only, 605, 
 
 RelativeSeutences,551 — with 
 Future Ind., 500— with /u^, 
 615, Obs. 2— complication, 
 604— Connection, 605. 
 
 "Reference to," exp. by the 
 Ace, 404. 
 
 Rejection of letters, 61— of a 
 "Vowel at begin., see Syn- 
 cope—of a vowel at end, 
 see Elision. 
 
 Repetition, exp. by the Opt., 
 547 (Negative, 616, Obs, 2) 
 555, Obs. 1 ; 558, Obs. 1. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Result of an Act, 343— in the 
 
 Ace, 400 d. 
 Root, 245. 
 
 "Scare," "Obstruct," a d 
 other Verbs, with the Inf., 
 560, 3. 
 
 Semivowels, 31. 
 
 Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, 
 5 — Principal, Subordinate, 
 519, 4— Moods of, 525, etc. 
 — Condit., 534; 549, etc.— 
 Negat., 616 — of Experience 
 in Aor. Ind., 494 — luterr,, 
 525— of Purpose, 530-533— 
 Negat,, 616. 
 
 Shortening, at the begiun., 
 
 74, D.— of the final syll,, 
 
 75, D. 2— in the Perf, 285, 
 D.— in the Subj., 228, D. ; 
 233, D. 2 — in Rel. Sent., 
 597, 3. 
 
 "Should," exp. in depend. 
 Sent, by the Subj., 527 b. 
 Opt., 528 b. 
 
 "Show,"\erhs of with Part., 
 693; 580. 
 
 Sigma, future, 259 ; 260, etc. 
 —Aor., 269. 
 
 Singular, 3 Pers. in e (i/), 68, 
 4 — Accent on Imp. Mid., 
 268, 2 — Accent on 2 Aor. 
 Imper. Act. and Mid., 333, 
 11, 12, 362. 
 
 "Space," exp. by the Accus,, 
 399 b. 
 
 Spiritus, position, 12; 22 — 
 with p and pp, 13 — Spir, 
 Asper, 60 6— in Augment, 
 235, Obs.— Spir. Lenis, 11. 
 
 Stern, 100— St. Vowel length- 
 ened, 147, 2 ; 248 ; 253, Obs. ; 
 261, 270, changed to e, 157. 
 
 "Strive," "Aim at," Verbs 
 with Genitive, 419 c — with 
 Inf., 560, 3. 
 
 Subject, 301, 3— Omitted, Obs. 
 2— with Genit. Abs., 585 a 
 —of a Subordinate Sent, 
 as Object of the Principal 
 Sent., 397 ; 519, 5— Obs. 2— 
 Subj. of Prin. Sent, in the 
 Subord. Sent., 602 ; 519, 5, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 Subjective Genit., 408, 5 a. 
 
 Subjunctive, 228 — Shortened, 
 233, D. 2 ; 255, D. 1 ; 302, D. 
 —of the Perf;^id., 289- 
 of verbs in /mi, accent, 309 — 
 Meaning, 508, etc. — similar 
 to Fut,, 513 — in dep. sent., 
 521 — in depend, assert, and 
 interrog., 527— in sent, of 
 purpose, 531, 532, Obs.— 
 exp. fear, 533 — in condit. 
 sent,, 545, 554, 555, Obs. 2 
 
 —in tempo r. sent., 557, 558, 
 
 Obs. 2. 
 Subordination, 519, 3. 
 Substantive, degrees of, 199, 
 
 D.— joined to the Dat., 430, 
 
 Obs., 432, Obs. 
 Suffixes, 340 ; 178. 
 Superlatives, Adv., 203— with 
 
 Geuit.,416,Obs.2— withwr, 
 
 631 a— with 6ti, 633, 1 b. 
 Supplements to the Part., 
 
 361, 8, 
 Supplementary Aorist, 270, 
 
 etc. 
 Syllabic Augm., 234 — with 
 
 initial vowel, 237 — omit- 
 ted, 283. 
 Syllables of both quantities, 
 
 75, D., 1 ; 77. 
 Synizesis, 39 ; 66 ; 243, D., 3. 
 Syncope, 61 c; 257, D. 
 
 " Taking part in," with Gen- 
 itive, 414, 5 ; 419 a. 
 
 Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.— 
 Augm., 234 ft; 235. 
 
 Tenses, 225; 3 Prin. Tenses, 
 521— Subord., 522— Tense 
 Stems, 227. 
 
 Tenues, 32— for Aspirate8,-S2, 
 D. 
 
 Time, in Ace, 399 b; 405 — 
 in Genit., 4-26— in Dat., 443 
 Adv. of with Genit,, 415— 
 kiuds, degrees of, 484, 1, 2. 
 
 Transitive and Intransitive 
 Meaning, 329, etc. ; 476— 
 Mid., 477. 
 
 "Touch," and other Verbs 
 with Genitive, 419 b. 
 
 UncontracUd Syll., 35, D., 1. 
 
 Verba Contracta among Iter- 
 atives, 336 d— V. pura, im- 
 pura, 247. 
 
 Verbal Pred., 361, 4— Nouns, 
 225, 5 — Stem, 245, etc. — 
 Pres. Stem, 246 ; 260, 3. 
 
 Vocal Stems, 1 Perf. 280. 
 
 Vowels, 24, etc. — in divis. of 
 Syll., 470 — before others, 
 74— long without Augm., 
 235— Changes, 40, etc.— in 
 2 Perf, 278— in derivation, 
 340, Obs. 3. 
 
 Weakening of Conson., 60. 
 
 ''iF/ien," expressed by Dat., 
 443, 
 
 " Whither," expressed by Ac- 
 cusative, 406, 
 
 "Wish," expressed in the 
 Opt., 514, etc. 
 
 Worth and Price, in the Gen- 
 itive, 408, 6; 421. 
 
GREEK INDEX 
 
 a for »i,24,D.2; 41, D.; 115, 
 
 D.1;121,D.2; 235 D.; 270, 
 
 Obs. 
 d for n, 277, D. 
 a bee. o), 268; 278— bee. 0,268. 
 abec. M,40; 115,1, c; 116, d; 
 
 235; 270; 268; 278; 303, 
 abec. €,37,D.2;169D.; 243, 
 
 D.3. 
 a bee. ai, 24, D, 3. 
 
 d from ao, ato, 866 ao, 
 
 d after e, «, p, 41 ; 115, 1, a; 
 
 116, c; 121; ISO; 261; 270; 
 
 278. 
 a before vowels, 235, 
 a, connecting vowel, 276 ; 
 
 336, D.; 338, D.— in the 3 
 
 Plur., 302, 3, 
 a, characteristic of the First 
 
 or Weak Aorist, 268. 
 a, privative, 360 — in Adj. with 
 
 the Genit. 414, Obs. 5. 
 -a, ending of the Accus.,141; 
 
 156; 173, Obs.; 181; 276. 
 -a, quantity of, 117; 121; 161; 
 
 169; 181,1. 
 -a, Plur. ending of Neuters, 
 
 125,2; 136; 141; 173. 
 -a, Adverbs in, 202. 
 -a, Nom. of Substant, in, 172. 
 •a, from ao in the Genit., 
 
 122, Obs. 
 a'^aOo?, Comparison, 199, 1, 
 
 a'^aiJ.ai (uydofiai), 312, 8 — 
 
 Pass, Depon., 328, 2. 
 a^awaKTfcWjWith the Partlcip., 
 
 592. 
 ityanu), with the Dative, 439, 
 
 Obs,— with the Partic.,592. 
 ayteWo/xai, constmed per- 
 
 8onally,571— u-yYtWto.with 
 
 aPartic.,593. 
 076 6n> 642, 4 a. 
 u^e/pw, 2 Aor., 257, D.— Perf., 
 
 275, 1. 
 
 iiytjoxa, 279. 
 
 <i7<i/ea),323,D.39. 
 
 tiyvviJit, 319, 13— Perf., 275, 2 
 
 — Signif. 330, 1. 
 ayxh Comparison of, 203, D. 
 
 —with the Genit,, 415. 
 07(0, 2 Aor., 257— Imper. of 1 
 
 Aor., 268, D. 
 «de\^6s,Voc. Sing., 129. 
 
 adiKeo), with the Accus,, 396 
 
 —Signif., 486, Obs. 
 ae (an) into d, 38; into rj, 243, 
 
 D. 2— into aa, 336, D. 
 aei into 9, 38 — into a, 243, 
 
 Obs.- into ac, 38, Obs. 
 iefw, 322, D. 13. 
 aecra, 327, D, 17. 
 
 -aCo), Verbs in, 353, 6— Fut, 
 
 263. 
 at^diiv, Gen. Sing., 163. 
 atiiJLt, 313, D. 3. 
 a>;p, Masc,,140. 
 at, in the Compar. for o or w, 
 
 195— into v, 235. 
 -ai, Elided, '64, D.— Short in 
 
 regard to the Accent, 83, 
 
 Obs.2; 108; 229; 268,Obs.l, 
 ai, a'lOe, See ei, ei'^'e. 
 aideofjiat, a'tdoimai, 301, 1 ; 326, 
 
 10— Pass. Depon., 328, 2— 
 
 with the Aceus., 399. 
 'Ai6n^, 177, D. 19 — ew, ely, 
 
 "Atdov, 411. 
 aldwi, 163. 
 
 -aiv, in the Dual, 173, 4. 
 -om-a, Fem. ending, 115, 1 b. 
 
 alvecx), 301, 3. 
 aivvnai, 319, D. 27, 
 
 -a(va),Verbs in, 353, 7. 
 ai'f , of both genders, 140. 
 alpeoy, 327, 1— Perf,, 275, D. 1 
 
 — Distinct, between Act. 
 
 and Mid,, 481 b— Passive 
 
 meaning, 483, 3, 
 a'ipw, Aor., 270, Obs, 
 -a«p, Subst. in, 172. 
 -aiP,intheDat,Pl,,119, 
 a\a-OdvoiJ.at, 322, 11— with the 
 
 Gen, ,420— with the Partic, 
 
 591. 
 alo-xpoy, Comj)arison of, 198. 
 
 ai<rx''voixat, with AcC, 399 — 
 
 with Dat., 439, Obs,— with 
 
 Partic., 592— with the Inf., 
 
 594— alo-x-'i'to, Perf, 286, D. 
 
 aiTto>, with double Ace., 402. 
 
 !xKax^t,u>, 319, D. 30. 
 uKCOfxai, 301, 1. 
 uK^Koa, 275,1; 280, Ob 
 aKT)x^^aro, 287, D. 
 
 aKovo), Perf. Act, 275, 1 — 
 Perf, Mid., 288— with the 
 Num., 392, Obs.— with 
 
 afxevai, * 
 
 Gen,, 420, and Obs ^wlth 
 
 Partic, 591. 
 aKparor.Comparison of,196&, 
 uKpodofxat, Fut,, 261 — with 
 
 Gen., 420, 
 a/ctoi/, Gen, Abs., 585 b. 
 d\a\Kov, 326, D. 11. 
 aXdXniJiai, 275, D. 
 uXdojuat, Pass. Depon., 328, 2 
 
 — Perf., 275, D.l, 
 uXyeivoi, Comparative of, 
 
 199, 8. 
 a\di]aKO), 324, D. 30. 
 uXeacOai, 269, D. 
 a\€/0ap,176. 
 
 uXei<po}, Perf., 275, 1. 
 aXeKTuvwv, of both gendcrs, 
 140. 
 
 aXev, aXrtiJ.evai, 325, D. d. 
 uXef w, 326, 11. 
 uXeo), 301, 1. 
 aXr)0e9,165. 
 aXOofJiai, 326,1). 59. 
 
 dXti, with Gen., 414, 2. 
 aXlaKonai, 327, 17— Perf,, 275, 
 
 2— Aor,, 316, 12— with the 
 
 Genit,, 422, 
 aXiTaivM, 323, D, 37, 
 <k\K^, Dat, Sing., 175, D. 
 aXXu, 629— uWa jdp, 636, 6, 
 
 d; uW ^, 629, Obs. 3—dXX' 
 
 ouv, 637, 2. 
 aWao-o-o), 1 Aor. Pass., 294, 
 
 Obs. 
 u\\>;Ao(i/, etc.,211. 
 liXXo/iai, 1 Aor., 270, Obs.— 
 
 2 Aor., 316, D. 32. 
 aXXo?, 2il — dXXo ri r] ; oKXo 
 
 Ti ; 608. 
 aWtof re Ka/, 624, 4. 
 aXi, 150, 
 
 a\i;<7Ka), 324, 27, Obs. 
 aX<pdvo}, 323, D. 38. 
 aXwvai, 324, 17. 
 
 u\a)7r»)^,in''g.Nom.Sing.,146, 
 a/xu, with Dat., 436 c — with 
 
 Part., 587, 1. 
 a/uaprdvo), 322,12— with Gcn., 
 
 419 e. 
 afi(3Xi(TK0), 324, 18. 
 
 anei^Ofxai, with AcC., 398. 
 
 iifxcivuiv, Signif., 109, 1, Obs. 
 uMc^fw, with Genit., 420. 
 dn^vai, 312, D. 13. 
 
358 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 afiiWdofiai. 
 
 afitWdoiJiat, Depou. Pass.. 
 
 328, 2. 
 uij.vfjiJ.Mv, with Genit., 414, 3. 
 a/jotpoi, with Geuit., 414, 5. 
 
 a/JOi, ayaoy, 208, D. 
 
 aftTTfcXW, 53, d. 
 
 ufjiriax'-'ov^xai, 323, 36. 
 
 a/JTrXaKia-Kto, 324, 23. 
 
 afxirvvvtiri, 298, D. — afxnvvTO, 
 316, D. 29. 
 
 ufKpi, 462 — without Ana- 
 strophe, 90. 
 
 itn(pitvvvfjLi, 319, 5 — Augm., 
 ^240— with double Acc.,402. 
 
 u/u0(o, ufxcpoTepoi, ujui^oTepoi/, 
 221 — aiJi<poTtpo30ev, with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 -ai/-, aflBxed to form the Pres- 
 ent Stem, 322. 
 
 iiv-, privative, 3G0. 
 
 'ai', see ectv. 
 
 ui/, 639, 3— with particles of 
 time, 557 — in the Apodosis 
 of Conditional Sentences, 
 535 ; 53T ; 541 ; Comp. 542 ; 
 546— with Aor., 494, Obs. 1 
 — with Subj., 513— with 
 Fut. Ind., 500, Obs.— with 
 Imperf., 494, Obs. 1— with 
 Ind., 536, etc.— with Inf., 
 575, etc.— with Opt., 516 ; 
 546— with Part., 595— with 
 Relatives, 554 ; 555, Obs. 2. 
 
 -av, Nom. Masc. and Neut., 
 172. 
 
 -5"' for diov, Gen. Plur. of 
 a-Decl., 118, D. 
 
 ava, see ava$. 
 
 uvd, 461 — Apocope, 64, D. — 
 
 without Anastrophe, 90. 
 ava/3dk\ofxai,w\ih Inf.,560,3. 
 uvafiiwaKOfiai, 324, 11. 
 
 avaifnaln^ eiju«,construed per- 
 sonally, 571. 
 
 uvaXicTKcx), uvaXiixTco, 324, 19. 
 
 uvafjtfivrcrKw, with double 
 
 Acc, 402. 
 ai/af ,Voc. Sing., 148, D. 
 uvd^ioi, with Genit., 414, 4. 
 av6dvoi, 322, 23— Augm., 237. 
 wdpdnodov, Dat. PI., 175, D. _ 
 
 avtyvtov, uve'^vaxra, Diflf. of 
 
 ^ Signif.,329, D. 
 
 avev, 445 ; 455, 5. 
 
 iivexoiJai, double Augm., 240 
 —with Part., 590. 
 
 avew'/a, uveu>xa, 319, 19 — Dis- 
 tinction, 279. 
 
 uvj-fVoOev, 275, D. 
 
 avrp, 153 ; 177, 1— Genit., 51, 
 Obs. 2. 
 
 aviip, 65, Obs. 1. 
 
 iivO'Siv, 601. 
 
 avoi-^w, Augm., 237 — Perf., 
 
 275, 2 ; 279. 
 iivopOow, double Augm., 240. 
 
 avra, avrnv, avTiKpv, See 
 aVTi. 
 
 uvTtxofiat,with Genit., 419 b. 
 
 apxiv. 
 
 avTi', 451 — without Ana- 
 strophe, 90. 
 
 avo), Compar., 204 — with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 Hvioya, 517, D. 11— Pluperf., 
 283, D. 
 
 a^to?, with Genit., 414, 4 — 
 with Inf., 562. 
 
 a^ioxpeo}?, 184. 
 
 ao into d, 37, D. 3 ; 122, D. 2 
 —into o), 37 : 122, D. 3 c— 
 into €0), 37, D. 2 ; 122, D. 3 
 b; 132; 243, D. 8. 
 
 -ao, Genit. Sing., 122, Obs., 
 etc., D. 3 6. 
 
 aoi, ^nto w, 37. 
 
 aov, into e&), 243, D. 3 b. 
 
 uTraYopei'o), with Part., 590. 
 
 ravrdoo, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 
 meaning, 266. 
 una(pi<TKu), 324, D. 33. 
 uneiTTbov, 327, 12. 
 avretpo^. With Genit., 419 e. 
 unexOdvofjat, B22,16. 
 u7rtxoMa«,with Genit, 414, 3. 
 uTTo, 452 — Apocope, 64, D. ; 
 
 Compar., 204. 
 aiTodldoi.iai, with Genit., 421. 
 
 anodi&pdaKco, with AcC, 398. 
 
 uTToepaa, 270, D. 
 
 anoXauta, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 
 meaning,266— with Genit., 
 419 d. 
 'AiroXXiav, AcC, 171 ; Voc. 
 148, Obs. 
 
 uTToo-Tepeo), with Doub, Acc, 
 
 402. 
 uiTOTvyx»v(o, with Genitive, 
 
 419 e. 
 
 UTTOipuf, 316, D. 18. 
 
 uno^alvoi, with Part., 593. 
 
 cnroxpri, 312, 6. 
 
 aTTTojuar, with Genit., 419 6. 
 
 -ap, Subst injl72. 
 
 apa and dpa, Distinction, 99. 
 
 apa (ap'), Apocope, 64, D. ; 
 
 _ 637j 1. 
 
 &pa, in questions, 607 &— in- 
 direct, 610; dp' oi; &pa jU'/, 
 607, Obs. 
 
 upaplffKiOi 324, D. 34— Perf. 
 275, D.l. 
 
 apeitiv, aptffTOi, 199, 1, and 
 Obs. 
 
 upe(TKoo, 324, 10. 
 
 apr}pwi, 280, D. 
 
 "Apur, 177, 2. 
 
 -apiov. Neuters in, 347, Obs.l 
 
 upK6to, Aor., 301,1. 
 
 dpMoTTO), 250, Obs. — Fut., 
 260, 3. 
 
 upi eojLtai, Depon. Pass., 328,2, 
 
 upv^r, etc., 177, 3. 
 
 apvvfxat, Aor., 319, D. 29. 
 
 ap6<o, 301, 1— Perf. Pass., 275, 
 D. 1. 
 
 apptjv, 189, 3. 
 api'iQ), 301, 1. 
 
 apx'jv, 405, Obs. 2. 
 
 fiacnXevi. 
 
 apxofiai and tipxco, Distinc- 
 tion, 481 b. 
 
 apxofxai, with Genit, 419- & 
 —with Inf., 560, 1— with 
 Part., 590— with Inf. and 
 Part, 594. 
 
 apxto, with Genit, 423— DiflF. 
 of Pres. and Aor., 498. 
 
 -ar. Ending of the Acc. PL, 
 141. 
 
 -di, Fem. in, 138. 
 
 -ar, Neut. in, 139. 
 
 -as, Subst in, 172. 
 
 ao-pevof, 319, D. — Compar., 
 
 _ 196 b. 
 
 acraov, utrffoxtpo), 203, D. 
 a<rT/;p, Dat. PI., 153. 
 uo-Tu, 158— Gend., 139, 
 
 aTat, -aro, 3 PI. Mid., 226, D.; 
 
 233, D. 6 ; 287, and D. 
 
 ardp, avrdp, 630, 4. 
 are, with Part, 587, 6. 
 tirep, 455, 5. 
 aTTa,dTTa, 214. 
 V, avTC, 630, 3. 
 aif dio), a'u^oy, 322, 13. 
 
 -aur,Fem. in,172. 
 
 ai-TiKa, with Part, 587, 3. 
 
 auToy, 200 — position with the 
 Art, 389— with Dat., 441, 
 Obs. — in the Genit. with 
 Possess., 474— for the Rel., 
 605, Obs. — 6 avjdi, with 
 Dat, 436 6. 
 
 <i^a(pfco/ua«,with doub. Acc, 
 402. 
 
 a<pd(rcra>, 250, D. 
 
 u<pir]ni, 313, 1— Augm. 240. 
 <:.<^' oS, 556 ; 601. 
 aipvoffoi, 1 Aor., 269, D. 
 cixaptr, compar. 193, D. 
 axOo/jai, 326, 12 — Depon. 
 
 Pass., 328, 2— with Part, 
 
 592. 
 dxvvfjai, 319, D. 30 — Plup. 
 
 287, D. 
 axpti'!), 69, Obs. 3 ; 445 ; 455 
 
 b; without Elision, 64, Obs. 
 
 1 — tixp' ov, 556. 
 -aw, Verbs in, 353, 2, and 
 
 Obs. 2— lengthening, 243, 
 
 D. 3. 
 -aw, Fut in, 263, D. 
 
 /3, inserted between ju and p, 
 51, Obs. 2, and D. ; /3 for m, 
 sec /x. 
 
 jSabitui, Fut Mid. with Act 
 meaning, 266. 
 
 /3a.Vw, 321, 1, and D-Perf., 
 317, 1 — 2 Aor., 316, 1 — 1 
 Aor. Mid., 268, D.— mean- 
 ing, 329, 2— of the Perf., 
 503. 
 
 ySdXAw, A«r., 316, D. 19 — 
 Perf., 282— Signif., 476, 2. 
 
 /3dpdt<Tro9, 198, D. 
 
 /SaaiXeta and /3a<riXeia, 117. 
 
 /3a<7iXev^, 161, D. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 359 
 
 (iaaiXtvu). 
 (3a(Ti\eva), with Genit., 423— 
 Diff. of Pies, and Aor.,498. 
 /Se^pwOoy, 324, D. 13. 
 ^eio^ai, jSto/jiat, 265, D. 
 /Jtta),/3;;»7, etC.,31G, D. 1. 
 /JeXWcoi/,' /3t\Ti<7Toi, 199, 1. 
 
 /3idi^oiJLat, Pass, meaning, 
 
 483,3. 
 /«4/3d9, 312, D. 14. 
 /3i/3\o9, Fem., 127, 5. 
 liijipwcTKU), .S24, 13— Aor., 316, 
 
 D. 23— I'erf. Part., 317, D. 
 
 16. 
 ^i6u), Aor., 316, 13. 
 /3\,Redup.,274, Ex. 
 /3\u/3erai, Horn. Pres., 249, D. 
 /3\a7rTto,Aor.Pa8S.,299 — with 
 
 Ace, 396. 
 /SXaindfu, 322, 14. 
 /3\7,(y0ai, etc., 316, 19. 
 /3\irro), 250, Obs. 
 /3Xwo-Kto, 324, 12 ; 51, D. 
 /3od(i), Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 
 meaning, 230. 
 f36XeTai, 360, D. 14. 
 /3oppus, Genit. Sing., 122, 
 
 Obs. 
 (36<TKw, 326, 13. 
 /JoTpi/ff, Masc.,140. 
 /SovKofxai, 326, 14 — Angm., 
 
 234, Obs. — 2 Sing. Pres. 
 
 Mid.,233,3— Depou. Pass., 
 
 328 2 
 /3ori?,'l59; 160; 35, Obs.— of 
 
 two Genders, 140. 
 (Spuaffu), 250, Obs. 
 /3pcia-au)v, 198, D. 
 /3paxi^?, with Inf., 502. 
 /SpoTor, 51, D. 
 /3yi/a., 323, 32. 
 (3wca?, 35, D. 1. 
 
 7, Pronunt., 4 — Character of 
 Verbs, 251, Obs. — their 
 Fnt.,260,3— Perf.,279. . 
 
 jafxeoi, 325, 1. 
 
 -Yavvfiai, 319, D. 31. 
 
 7«p, 636, 6 — yap ovv, 637, 2. 
 
 7ao-Trp, 153— Fern., 140. 
 
 77, Char, of Verbal Stems, 
 
 2.51, Obs. 
 7e, 041, 1— Affix, ibid. 
 ttyovcL, 327, 14. 
 767covea), 325, D. Cf. 
 7e('i'0|uai, Signif., 329, 8. 
 7e\da), 301 , 1— Aor. Pass. , 298 
 
 — Fut. Mid. with Act. 
 
 meaning, 266. 
 76\a)9, 109, D. 
 7fryxw, with Genit., 418. 
 
 feveaOai, jevija-o/Jiai, etC, 327, 
 
 14. 
 yivTo, 310, D. 33. 
 yepaioi, Compar., 194. 
 yeno}, with Genit., 419, D. 
 7n(^ea,, 325, 2. 
 
 7MP«(TKa), 324, 1— Aor., 316, 2. 
 7t into C, 58 ; 251. 
 fljvonai, 327, 14— Perf., 317, 
 
 devrepo^. 
 
 2— With Genit, 417— with 
 
 Dat., 432. 
 yiyvuKTKb), 324, 14 — Aor., 316, 
 
 14— with Part., 591. 
 -rK yv, Rednpl. with, 274, 
 
 Ex. 
 jodio, 325, D. n. 
 yovv, 177, 4. 
 ■yovv, 641, 2. 
 ypavi, 159. 
 
 'Ypd<f>ofxai, with Genit., 422. 
 1pd(poiJ.ai and 7p«0w, Diff., 
 
 4816. 
 7i'»';;, 177, 5. 
 
 6 inserted betw. v and p, 51, 
 Obs. 2; 287, D.; 612— Char- 
 acter, 251. See Dentals. 
 
 5ai, 642, 8. 
 
 3u<'/ua)i/, of two Genders, 140. 
 
 daivvfic, 319, D. 32 — Opt., 
 318, D. 
 
 dalay, meaning, 330, D. 9. 
 
 ddKv(o, 321, 8. 
 
 ddKpvov, 175. 
 
 Sdfxap, 147, 1, Ex. 
 
 5dM»"?M', 312, D. a— Aor. Subj. 
 Pass., 293, D. 
 
 daveiZ<^, DifF. of Act. and 
 Mid., 481 b. 
 
 6ap0dvu, 322, 15. 
 
 6uy, Accent, of Genit. PI. and 
 Dual, 142, 3. 
 
 daTionai, 325, D. 6—1 Aor. 
 Inf., 269, D. 
 
 -de, affixed, 94; 212; 216— 
 Enclitic, 92, 5— Local Suf- 
 fix, 178. 
 
 at, 628—5' ovv, 637, 2. 
 
 S^aTo, 269, D. 
 
 dkifiai, 312, D. 14, 6. 
 
 didaov, 324, D. 28 ; 320, D. 40. 
 
 dtdeyfxai, dt^to, etc., 318, D. 
 
 dtdia, dedoma, 317, 5, and D. 
 
 5ei (see 8e<o), with Ace. and 
 Inf., 507, Obs. 1—edet, 490. 
 
 3eidw, forms Position, 77,D. — 
 doubling of the 6, 234, D. 
 
 delavviJii, 318— with Partic, 
 593. 
 
 deTva, ludef. Pronoun, 215. 
 
 6eiv6r, with Inf., 502. 
 
 deipr], 115. 
 d('vdpov, 175. 
 
 dtofxai, Depon. Pass., 328, 2. 
 
 See 3t'a). 
 6tov, 586. 
 
 atTras-, Dat. PI., 169, D. 
 ae'pKo/uat, Depon. Pass., 328, 2 
 
 —2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D.— 
 
 with Ace, 400 o. 
 aeo-juof, Nom. and Ace. PI., 
 
 175, D. 
 3e<T7r6Tr)r,VoC. Sing.121— ACC. 
 
 Sing. 174, D. 
 Sevofjiai, 326, D. 15. 
 
 aei3TaTor,199, D. (Defectives), 
 aei^repor, with Gcnitivc, 416, 
 Obs. 3. 
 
 dparv^. 
 
 6exofxai,Ferr., 273,D-2Aor., 
 310, D. 34— Aor. Pass. Sig- 
 nif., 328, 4. 
 
 dtm (I bind), 301, 2— Contrac- 
 tion, 244, 1. 
 
 dial, dtofiai (I am in want of), 
 320, 15— with Genit., 418. 
 
 a/;, 642, 4— Affix, 218. 
 
 6J,0ex',O42,7. 
 
 d7,\ov ort, 633, 1 a. 
 
 an\6a), Meaning, 476, 1— arj- 
 Xoco and arjXor eifjii, with 
 Part., 590, 
 
 A>|/u/;Tr)p, 153. 
 
 dijv, makes position, 77, D. 
 
 dtjTTOTe, Affix, 218. 
 
 6t]Trov, diiTTovOev, 642, 6. 
 
 -any, Mas<f. in, 348. 
 
 dnaa, 326, D. 15. 
 
 dTiTa, 642, 6. 
 
 a* into C, 58 ; 251. 
 
 did, 448; 458— without Ana- 
 strophe, 90— with Inf. and 
 Article, 574, 2, 3. 
 
 Sla, 181, D. 
 
 didyoi, diaXeinoo, diaTeXtoi, 
 with Part., 590. 
 
 dtana, 115. 
 
 diaixda), with double Auffra., 
 
 240. 
 amKoi/eto.with doub. Augra., 
 
 240. 
 diaXtyonai, Depon.Pas8.,328, 
 
 2— Rednpl., 274, Ex.— with 
 
 Dat., 436 a. 
 SidXeKTOi, Fem., 127, 5. 
 
 a^a0e'po^lu«, 436 a. 
 
 6ui<f>ipo),42^; 440. 
 
 did^opoi, 436 6. 
 
 6i6d<TKu), 324, 28, Obs.— Aor., 
 326, D. 40 — with double 
 Ace, 402— ata«(7Ko/ia«, 481, 
 
 dl6t)fj.i,Bl3,2. 
 
 dldio/xi, Compounds — Mean- 
 ing, 476, 2— with Inf., 501. 
 
 didpdaKoj, 324, 2— Aor., 316, 3. 
 
 a/eaa./, etc., 313, D. 4. 
 
 a<C'IMa<, aiXa,,313,D.5. 
 
 ai/caCoMa'j Meaning, 481. 
 .diKaid? eifxi, consirued per- 
 sonally, 571. 
 la/Kfji/, free Ace, 404, Obs. 
 ;a.6T<,636, 2. 
 idmXda-toi, diaaoi, etc., 223 — 
 
 ! with Genit., 416, Obs. 3. 
 
 Slxa, 445. 
 
 |aix|,da),Contr.,244,2. 
 
 \diu>KM, with Genit., 422. 
 
 aMa.c,Gen.Pl.andDual,142,3. 
 
 :ao/a>, ete,220, D. 
 
 doKtw, 325, 3— with Inf., 560, 2 
 
 — constr. personally, 571. 
 aoKar,Fem.,127, 5. 
 66^av, Ace Abs., 580. 
 
 jaapu, 177, 6. 
 
 \8ovn4<o, 325, D. c. 
 dpafxelv, Spa/xov/xai, etC, 327, 
 I 11. 
 i apara?, 300, D. 
 
360 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 6puoj, 
 ^paw.Aor. Pass., 298, 
 6p6(ro?, Fern., 127, 5. 
 dOvafxai, 312, 9— Augm., 234, 
 
 Obs Subj,, Opt., Accent. 
 
 309— Depon. Pass., 328, 2— 
 
 with Inf., 560, 1. 
 Siir, Compounds with, 360, 
 
 Obs.— Augm., 241. 
 ayw.at'i/o), 321,7; 301,4— lAor. 
 
 Mid., 268, D.— 2 Aor., 316, 
 
 16— Meaning, 329, 4. 
 
 CITTOV. 
 
 eyprjfopa, 275. 
 
 eyw, Synizesis, 66 — e^M^e, 
 
 641,1. 
 i6Veva',315,D.3; 327, D. 4. 
 edonai, Fut., 265. See e<r(*i'a). 
 
 ee bee. ei, 36 — bec. €1 and n, 
 243, D. B. — bec. n in the 
 
 e for a, 268, D.— bec. a, 257; 
 
 282; 285; 295; 298. 
 ebec. r),40; 147,2; 151; 161, 
 
 D.; 233,4; 235; 293. 
 e bec. ei, 24, D. 3 ; 42 ; 147, 1 ; 
 
 236; 243,D.B.; 270; 293, D. 
 c bec. o, 165 ; 278 ; 340, Obs. 3 
 
 —bec. w, 278. 
 6 for digamma, 34, D. 4 ; 
 
 237, D. 
 e inserted, 264 ; 269, D. 
 e rejected, 153 ; 243, D. B. ; 
 
 257, D.— in Synizesis, 59, D. 
 € contr. with preceding vow- 
 el, 166, D. 
 e affixed to the Stem, 322, 
 
 e^iTreipo?. 
 -op, Subs, iu, 172. 
 e'lp-yvv/jit, 319, 15. 
 eipYw, Perf. and Plup., 287, D. 
 
 — with Genit., 419 e. 
 e;'pnKa,274,Ex.; 327,13. 
 e'ipofxai, 326, D. 16. 
 cVpco, 1 Aor.. 270, D.— Perf. 
 
 and Plup., 275, D. 2. 
 
 Dual. See -rj. 
 ee'pxaTO, 287, D. 
 -eef bec. €19 in Nom,Pl.,157 
 
 —bec. et? and n?, 161 d. 
 -en for -em, 185, D. 
 erif, 213, D. 
 eWCw, Augm., 236. 
 
 : for c, 24, D. 3— for a., 267, 
 
 etc.— from e, t, see e, 
 ei, Redupl., 274, etc.— in the 
 
 Plup., 283. 
 
 u in the Dat. Sing., 157 ; ^^Vkw, 324, D. 35. 
 
 161 6— connecting vowel,lel'o-oMa<, etc., 314, D. 1. 
 
 233, 1—3 Sing. Ind. Act., jeiW, with Genit., 415. 
 
 233, 2^2 Sing. Ind. Mid.jieiTa, with Part.,587,4. 
 
 233, 3. I eiVe, 94— eiVe-eiVe, 611 ; 
 
 ;, 639, 1— Atonon, 97, 3— iu giw^^a, 275, 2 ; 278. 
 
 Cond. Sent., 535 — with U, ef , 69, Obs. 2 ; 448 ; 
 
 Ind., 536— with Opt., 546, with Augm., 238— Atonon, 
 
 etc for edv, 545, Obs. 2. 97, 2— with Inf. and Art., 
 
 Obs. ; 324, Obs. ; 325, etc.— el, eWe, el -^dp, in a wish, 514 574, 3— unaltered, 45, Obs. ; 
 considered as Stem-vowel, — " whether" in Depend. 47, Ex. — ef oZ, 556 ; COl. 
 43. Interr. Sent., 525; 610. f Kav, Compar., 203, D. 
 
 e in the Augm., 236; 275. el-r?, 611 — ei' kcv, see ^dv— iKelvo9,212. 
 See Syllabic Augm. | el apa, 637, 1— el ydp, 637,'tKt/<XeTo, 257,D. ; 61, D. 
 
 €iy, 2 Sing, of ei/ui', 92, D. 
 el?, h, 448 ; 449— Atonon, 97, 
 
 2— with Inf. and Art., 574, 
 
 2 — els o, 556. 
 -e.9, Nora. PL, 157; 161 <?. 
 -eis-, Masc. and Fern, in, 172. 
 -etr, 2 Sing. Ind. Act., 233, 2. 
 -eti-eaaa-ev, Adj. in, 352, 5: 
 
 187— Dat. Plur., 50, Obs. 1 ; 
 
 149. 
 eI<7a,def.Aor.,269,D. 
 
 627. 
 
 453- 
 
 e in Redupl., 275— as Redupl., 6 d—ei Kai, 640, 1— el uw, 
 
 274,3,4. 639,1. 
 
 e connecting vowel, 233, l,!-em,Fem. in, 185— Quantity, 
 
 and D. 3, 6 ; 262 ; 336, D. ; 117 ; 341, Obs. ; 342, Obs. 
 
 338, D. emro, 315, D. 2. 
 
 -e in Nom. Ace. and Vocative et6oi/, 327, 8. 
 
 Dual, 141. -ei»},Fem.in,115,D.2. . 
 
 ea bec. a", 130— bec. n, 38. eiKe, cUtov, 317, D. 7. 
 
 -ea for em, 185, D.— for w in ei'Koo-<(y), 68, 3 ; 220. 
 
 Acc. Sing., 185— in i and elKo), with Genit., 419 e. 
 
 V Stems, 157— in Diphth, 
 Stems, 161— bec. n and a, 
 ibid — bec. ti in the Acc. 
 PL, ibid.— hec. d or »j in 
 Fem. of Adj., 183— Ending 
 of the Plup., 283, D. 
 
 td^a, 275, 2; 319,13. 
 
 eat bec. f], 38 — bec. e<, ibid., 
 Obs. ' 
 
 kdv, 639, 2— in Condit. Sent., 
 535; 545; 548— "whether," 
 
 ^ 610— Comp. el. 
 
 edvre-hdvTe, 627. 
 
 ea^a, 319, 13. 
 
 -ea? bec. -et? in Acc. PL, 157 
 
 —from na?, 161, Obs 
 eaTa«,etC.,315, D. 2. 
 
 eavTov, 210— used as a pos- 
 sessive, 472 a. 
 
 ed(o, Augm., 236. 
 
 e-^yv?, Compar., 204 — with 
 Genit., 415. 
 
 fydov'jrr]<Ta, 325, D. C. 
 
 heipw, 2 Aor., 275, D.— Perf., 
 
 275, 1 ; 317, D. 12— Mean 
 
 ing, 330, 2. 
 
 el«a)i/, Genit., 163 
 
 elXeo), 625, D. d. 
 
 el\/;\oi/<<a,40,D.; 317, D. 13. 
 
 el'Arj^a, ei'\»ixa, 274, Ex. 
 
 e'iXoxa, 274, Ex. ; 279. 
 Aoi/, etc., 327, 1. 
 
 elXo), 253, D.— 1 Aor., 270, D. 
 
 eJnat, 319, D. 5. 
 
 e'ifJiapTai, 274, Ex. 
 
 el/x', 315, 1 — Enclit., 92, 3; 
 315, Obs. 2— with Partic, 
 287; 289; 291; 505; 590, 
 Obs. — with Genit., 417 — 
 with Dat., 432— Accent of 
 compounds of el/i*, 315, 
 Obs. 3— <^i/, 428, Obs. ; 580 ; 
 ,585 6— T45 6Wi, 441. 
 
 eifxt, 314, 1 — Meaning, 314, 
 Obs. 
 
 elVeKa, see t'veKa. 
 e'lvuov, 319, D. 5. 
 ei'fa<r/,317,7. 
 
 -etov, Neuters in, 345, 2. 
 eiTrep, 639, 1. 
 
 etVov, 327, 13— Aor. Imper. 
 Accent, 333, 12. 
 
 eKexetpta, 53, 10 d. 
 kKK\t)(ndt<i), Augm., 239. 
 UKeiiru), with Acc, 398. 
 "(cXn^Jai/w, 322, D.26. 
 eKTr\i]TTOfj.ai, with AcC, 399. 
 tKT6y, 327, 6. 
 tKTof, with Genit, 415. 
 fK(ov, Genit. Abs., 585 & — 
 
 eKwv eivai, 570, Obs. 
 eXdaaav, e\dxi<TTo9, 199, 4 
 — eXaTTOV, without »;, 626, 
 
 Obs. 
 
 \a6v(o, 821, 2 — Fut., 203 — 
 Perf., 275, 1— Plup., 287, D. 
 — ^Meaning, 476, 1. 
 Xe-fX^, Perf. Mid., 275, 1; 
 286, Obs. 
 XeXv, 827, 1. 
 
 eXevOepoM, with Genit, 419 e. 
 
 iXOe'iv, eXeixTopiat, 327, 2. 
 
 kXr)XddaTO, 287, D. 
 
 t-Xiaca), 236. 
 
 eXKro), tXKo), 301, 1— Augm., 
 236. 
 
 eXpitvs!, 50, Obs. 2. 
 
 ^Xtt/Cco, with Inf., 569. 
 
 «?\7ra), Perf., 275, D. 2— Mean- 
 ing, 330, D. 10. 
 
 fc^\<7a,270,D.; 325,D.cZ. 
 
 eMawToCs 210— Poss., 472 a. 
 
 eptpiy^Kov, 283, D. 
 
 e/jLtb), 301, 1. 
 
 efjipLevat, 315, D. 1. 
 
 i-H/Jiopa, 274, D. 
 
 (^pivijpvKa, 275, D. 1. 
 
 efiTtecpoi, with Gcuit, 414, 3. 
 
x- 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 361 
 
 e'MTrXecoc.with Genit.,414, 2. 
 
 flJ.npoaOev, with Geuit., 415. 
 
 iv (i*-.), 448; 450— unaltered 
 in corapouutls, 49, Obs. 1 — 
 bef. p, 51, Obs. 2— Atonon, 
 97, 2— with Inf. and Art., 
 574, 4—61' J), 556. 
 
 -e(i'),3Siug.,68,4. 
 
 -ei', Nom. of Neuters, 272. 
 
 -ei', 3 PI. Aor. Pass., 293, D. 
 
 -ivat, Inf., 276, 
 
 tvaipu), Augm., 239. 
 
 kvavTi6op.ai, Depon. Pass., 
 328, 2— Augm., 239. 
 
 i-vavrio^, with Dat., 436 h. 
 
 tvaaaa, Meaning, 329, D. 
 
 t>3e>;9, with Geuit., 414, 2. 
 
 hdOo), with double Ace, 402 
 —Meaning, 329, 4. 
 
 eveiKai {eveUot), 327, D. 12. 
 
 ti/€Ka, 445 ; 448; 445, 8— with 
 
 ^ Inf. and Art., 574, 3. 
 
 eviniM), evveTTC, Ivianu), etc., 
 327, D. 13. 
 
 eveprepot, 199, D. (Defect.). 
 
 ivijvoOev, 275, D. 2. 
 
 eviivoxa, 327, 12. 
 
 en, 90. 
 
 cuttto), 2 Aor., 257, D. 
 
 fvi<Tcra), 250, D. 
 
 ivvvfit, 319, 5. 
 
 evoxXf'w, double Augm,, 240. 
 
 ti/Tor, with Genit., 415. 
 
 fvTpinofxai, with Genit., 420. 
 
 tft\t7xw, with Part., 593. 
 
 l^tKvovfxat, with Genit., 419 c. 
 
 f f 6y, 586. 
 
 e^o), Comparative, 204 — with 
 Genit,, 415. 
 
 eo bee. ow, 37— bee. ev, 37, D. 
 1; 165, D,; 233, D. 4; 243, 
 D. B,j C. 
 
 to, cv, eio, etc., 205, D. 
 
 eoi bee. 01,37. 
 
 toiKa, 317, 7; 275, 2 — con- 
 strued personally, 571 — 
 with Part., 590. 
 
 toXna, 275, D. 2. 
 
 6op7a, 327, D. 3. 
 
 fopTu^ca, Augm., 237. 
 
 toy, 208, D. 
 
 -eo9, Genit. in, 161, D. 
 
 -eo9, Adj. in, 352, 4 ; 183— for 
 -ew9, 184, IX 
 
 eov bee. oi», 37— bee, ev, 37, D. 
 1; 243, D.B. 
 
 eiravpidKonai, 324, 24. 
 
 CTrej, 556 — knedv, enl/V, lirdv, 
 557; 635, 5 — in Syuizesis, 
 C6— with Aor. Ind., 493— 
 "whenever," 558, Obs. 1. 
 
 ^ncLdiu 556 ; 635, 6. 
 
 eirena, with Part., 587, 4, 
 
 ^ni, 448 ; 463— with Inf. and 
 Art., 574, 2, 4. 
 
 eTTt'dofor, kniKaipto^ eiyut. Con- 
 strued personally, 571. 
 
 (■TTihffairtiat, 319, 5. 
 
 fc7r4(yu/xt'a>, with Geuit., 420. 
 
 CTcid^riK. 
 hiTiXanfidvopi.ai, tiriXaM^civo- 
 
 Ma<,withGenit.,419 6,- 420. 
 iTTtKeiiro), with Part., 590. 
 67r(Mt'Xo/ua«,Depon.Pass.,328. 
 
 2— with Genit., 420. 
 eff<<TTaMai,312,10 — Accent. o( 
 
 Subj.andOpt.,3t)9 — Depon. 
 
 Pass., 328, 2. 
 67r£<7T/;/Lia)i/,with Genit.,414, 3. 
 67r<T»j66i6feijut,construed.per- 
 
 sonally, 571. 
 Innpenw, with Inf., 560, 1. 
 
 6V\riTO,312,D./. 
 
 tnoiJiai, 327, 5— Augm., 236. 
 e'puCe, 178, D. 
 fpa/Jiat, 312, 11. 
 
 ip<ioi,Aor. Mid.,301, D.— with 
 
 Genit., 420. 
 ep'idCop.ai, Augm., 236. 
 eptaOov, 319, D. 15. 
 epdu), 827, 3. 
 
 fcpe(7o-co,250,Ob8.—Fut., 260,8. 
 tpeO-ronai, 322, D. 40. 
 epr\pi6aTai, 287, D. 
 
 epi^oi, with Dat., 436 a. 
 eptfipo?, Nom. PI., 175, D. 
 tprro), tpTrtCw, Augm., 236. 
 eppadarai, 287, D. 
 eppd), 326, 17. ' 
 
 eppco-ya, 278 ; 319, 24. 
 eppoj/utVor, Compar., 196 h. 
 ipct], 115. 
 6'po-n»',lS9, D. 
 epi;'j7oi/w, 823, D. 40. 
 ept^Kco, 2 Aor.,257,D. 
 
 epi/fft'a<,etC.,814, D. 
 
 epi)a)*Aor.,301, D. 
 '4pxarat, etc., 319, D. 15. 
 epxoMai, 327, 2. 
 fp5, 327, 13, and Obs. 
 t'pwr, 177, D. 20. 
 epwTftoj.with doub. Ace, 402. 
 -e?, Nxjm. of Neuters^72, 
 -er, Ending of Nom. PI., 141 ; 
 
 173, 8, 2. 
 kaeiu,, 315, D. 3 (errM ; 327, 4 
 
 —with Genit., 419 d. 
 fCKov, 337, D. 
 eV7ret<7|Liai,286, 1, Obs. 
 eaTTofinv, etc., 327, 5. 
 eanov, 327, D. 13. 
 -eaaa, Fem. of Adj., 187. 
 eVo-a^ etc., 269, D. 
 -ecr<7<(0,Dat.Pl.,14l,D.; 153, 
 
 D. ; 158,_D. ; 105, D. 
 HaavjjLai, 274, D. 
 iaauiv, 199, D. 2. 
 'taTe, "until," 550. 
 
 -eTTepo^, -cffTaTor, Compar. 
 
 Ending, 196. 
 eo-T/jf o), 311, 291. 
 bori. Accented, 96 ; 315, Obs. 
 
 2—eariv o'i, ov, etc., 603. 
 Utiuu), Augm., 236 — with 
 
 Ace, 400 c— with Genit., 
 
 419 d. 
 e<rxaTor, 200 ; 391. 
 f-'o-o), Compar,, 204. See el'o-w. 
 £tu(^hi/,29S. 
 
 Q 
 
 iiwvvvjsi. 
 i-Td(j}r]v, see OdTTToy. 
 
 trepos.with Genit.,416,Obs.3. 
 ht^ciai. Genit. PL, 123. 
 f-Topoi/, 326, D. 44. 
 ev bee. ef, 35, D. 2 ; 248, Obs. 
 
 — from €o, €ov, see eo, eov. 
 ev, 202 — Augm. in Com- 
 pounds, 241— £11 7rottw,wilh 
 
 Acc, 396. 
 evadov, 322, D. 23. 
 evdioi, Compar., 195. 
 evep'^eriu), with Acc, 396. 
 eudv, with Geuit., 416—evOvt, 
 ^ with Part., 587, 3. 
 evKTifxevoi, 316, D. 25. 
 fci<Xa/3eoMa4,Depon.Pass.,328, 
 
 2— with Acc, 399. 
 ewour, Accent, 183 — Compar., 
 
 196 c. 
 evpioKui, 324, 25— with Part., 
 
 591. 
 eiipiii, Acc. Sing., 157, D. 
 -euv, Genit. in, 1G1,D.; 165,D. 
 -e..?, Nom. Sing., 841, 1 ; 849, 
 
 1; 187; 172. 
 eine. See ore. 
 
 ey<^a«'vw, Meaning of the Aor. 
 
 Pass., 828, 8. 
 -efw, Verbs in, 853, 4. 
 e'^a^ov, 327, 4. 
 t^' J), e(p' tuTc, 601. 
 exea, 269. 
 
 frx^por, Compar., 198. 
 
 txw, 327, 6 — Augm., 236 — 
 Meaning, 476, 1 — Diff. of 
 Pres. and Aor., 498 — with 
 Inf., 560,1— with Part., 590 
 — ex^f, SSO — e'xofiat, with 
 Genit., 419 b. 
 
 Ho), 320, 19. 
 
 €0) for ao, see ao — in the At- 
 tic Declens., 132, etc.— in 
 Contracted Verbs, 243, D., 
 Herod — as one Syll., 121, 
 D. 3&; 133,1; 157. 
 
 eco, Genit. Sing., 121, D. 3 &; 
 177, 11 — Verbs in, 248; 
 253, 8 — Fut., 260, 2; 204; 
 263. 
 
 eu>0a, 275, D. 2. 
 
 awfiei', etc., 312, D, 13. 
 
 -ewv, Genit, of o- Declens., 
 118, D. 
 
 tcorC till"), 556; 035, T. 
 
 tw9,Decl.,163. 
 
 -ew9, Genit,, 161, Obs. 
 
 C, Pronunt., 5— Pres. Stems 
 
 "n, 251, Obs. 
 C'«w, Contract., 244, 2. 
 Ce, Local Suffix, 178. 
 ^eu-yi/K/ut, 819, 16. 
 /.evi,in,l. 
 Cew, 301,1. 
 
 CnX6fc),withAcc,, 398. 
 Co), Char, of Verbs, 251, Obs. 
 
 andD — Fut, 260,3. Comp. 
 
 203. 
 J^iovvvfit, 319,9. 
 
362 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 », for d, 24, D. 1; 115, D. 2;! 
 
 ISO, D.; 244, 2; 161, D.;! 
 
 270, Obs. See e. I 
 
 t] after o.lSO, Ex.— bee. <o,43. 
 n, Syll. Augm., 234, Obs. 
 -t], Voc. Sing., 121— iu Ace. 
 
 Pl.,157— iu the Dual, 158; 
 
 16G— in the Aee. Sing., IGl, 
 
 D, ; 166— Conn. Vowel, 233, 
 
 1— Ending of 1 and 3 Plur. 
 
 Flap., 283. 
 -n, 2 Sing.Ind. and Subj.Mid., 
 ' 233, 3, 4. 
 »j and h, Synizesis, 66— Diff., 
 
 99; 643,9. 
 fi {iif)-ri (lie), 611, Obs. 
 ri, in iudir. questions, 610 — 
 
 n and ri-n, 626 a, and Obs. 
 
 — ») and n ware, with Inf., 
 
 566. 
 n, luterr., 607 &— "really?" 
 
 643, 9 — ri -jap, fi TTov, 608; 
 
 636, 6 d—h M^", 643, 9. 
 ^, "he spoke, "312,1. 
 pa, yetv, 314. 
 rifiuaKU), 324, 3. 
 i'tyayov, 267. 
 »,dfe, 624 b, 1. 
 »j5oMat, Depon. Pass., 328, 2— 
 
 with Dat., 439, Obs.— with 
 
 Part., 592. 
 riaw, Fern., 185, D. 
 Tieipa, 270, D. 
 ^Ka, 313. 
 mtara, 199, 2. 
 iiKM, Meaning, 486, Obs. 
 fiXiKo?, Attr. in, 600. 
 aXirov, 323, D. 87. 
 fiXvOov, 327, 2. 
 Vfxai, 315, 2. 
 rin^poTov, 322, D. 12. 
 »!/ueV->)ae, 024 6, 2. 
 V«. ^v, ^, 312, 1. 
 ^Mo?, 556: 634,4. 
 riij.iTiarxov, 323, 36. 
 inintXaCKov, 324, 23. 
 rifJ^<piecra, 319, 5. 
 -riv, Nom., H2. 
 VV, see edi/. 
 
 ^w€7Koi/, »ji/e<Ko, 327, 12. 
 r,v{Ka,556; 634,3. 
 r,i'£7ra7rov, 257, 1). 
 tji/uTo, 319, D. 28. 
 
 t]o bee. 0), 37 no?, rjo, rja?, 
 
 ^ 161, Obs.— not; bee. w, 37. 
 
 11 Trap, 176. 
 riT!-a<pov, 324, D. 33. 
 -rip, Nom. 172. 
 ^P,142,4. 
 •HpaK\r,r, 167, D. 
 tipapoi/, 324, D. 34. 
 vpiirov, Meaning, 329, D. 
 »}p6/iriv, 326, 16. 
 -nr, Nom. PI., 161 d. 
 -m, Nom. Sing., 172 ; 174, D. 
 ->i?, Prop. Names in, 174. 
 'm, Adj. in, 355 — Comp., 197. 
 -»;<n(i/), Dat. Plur. of a-Decl., 
 ' 119, D. 
 
 iifTaoiv, 199, 2. 
 
 mvxoi, Compar., 195.^ 
 
 mot, 94; 643, 11 — rirot- »i, 
 
 626 a. 
 nrop, Gender, 139. 
 fmuofxat, with Genit., 423. 
 
 riTTCiV, 199, 2. 
 
 rjtiTc, 632, 5. 
 i,<piet, 240 ; 313, 1. 
 7ixa.279. 
 w,217,D. 
 M, 163, D. 
 
 0, Pronunt., 7 — in the Perf., 
 286, 4— iu the Weak Pass. 
 Stem, 298— Nopi. Sing, of 
 Stems iu, 147, Obs. 2— Af- 
 fixed to Pres. and 2 Aor. 
 Stems, 338, D.— bee. a, 307. 
 Sefe also Dentals. 
 
 Oavelv, 324, 4. 
 
 OdnTU), 64 c ; 298. 
 
 Oappiw, With A-ce., 399. 
 
 Odaaov, gee TaxiT. 
 et'nepov, 66, Obs. 1. 
 Oavixd'Cu), with Genit., 417, 
 
 Obs. ; 422, Obs. 
 OavfiacTTo^ bao^, ete., 602. 
 Oed,115,lD.2; 117. 
 OiXa, lOeXm, 326, 20. 
 6/eM'y, 177, D. 21. 
 -Oe{v), Suffix, 178, 2 ; 68, D.— 
 
 for the Genitive, 205, D. ; 
 
 178, D. 
 6>e6r,Voc. Sing., 129, D. 
 Otpetoi, 350. 
 
 Oipofiai, Fut., 262, D. • 
 t^tw, 248— Fut., 260, 2. 
 ^^n^iT, as Fem., 185, Obs. 
 ei]v, Enclit., 92, 5 ; 643, 17. 
 Onpaa, with Aceus., 398. 
 Oi bee. CO-, 57. 
 -Oi, Loc. Suff.,178, 1— Ending 
 
 of 2P.Imper.,228; 302,5; 
 
 807. 
 Oif-idvui, 322, 24. 
 exdo), 301, 1. 
 OviiaKoi, 324, 4— Perf., 317, 3— 
 
 Perf. Part., 276, D.— 3 Fut., 
 
 291— Siguif.,486,Obs. 
 Oo]iJidTiov, 65, Obs. 1. 
 eopvvpiai, 324, D. 15. 
 ^Pif,54a; 145. 
 6 pinna), 54 f'. 
 OpwaKoy, 59 ; 324, 15. 
 (/i/7«Tnp, 153. 
 ev- npo- Ovfjieofiai, Dcpon. 
 
 Pass., 328, 2. 
 6»^pdo-<(i/),179. 
 Oufo, 301, 2— Aor. Pass., 53, 
 
 10 6. 
 6>a.9,Genit., PI. and Du.,142, 3. 
 
 J, Pronnnt., 4— Long by Nat., 
 83, Obs. 1 — Lengthened, 
 253, Obs.— r bee. .-, e<, oi, 
 40 ; 278—. of the Stem bee. 
 e, 157— Changes, 55; 168; 
 250, etc. 
 
 -I, Locative Ending, 179 — 
 
 Demonst., 212— Neat, in, 
 
 139; 172. 
 -I, Nom. Ending in the PI., 
 
 134, 9 — Dat. Sing., 141; 
 
 173, 2. 
 I, Sign of the Opt., 22S-Ke- 
 
 dupl.,308; 327, D. 17— Con- 
 nect. Vowel, 348; 351— Af- 
 fixed to the Stem in the 
 
 Dat. PL, 119; 134,8. 
 I, Subscribed, 8; 12; 27; 65, 
 
 Obs. 2— Dat. Sing., 134, 3; 
 
 169 ; 173, 2. 
 I, Verbs in the Pres. with, 
 
 250, etc.; 822, Obs. — their 
 
 Fut., 260,3; 262. 
 la for to, 348. 
 -la, Fern, in, 346, 3; 185, 
 
 ete. 
 i'a, iTi^, ifj, tw, 220, D. 1. 
 IdoMoj, Meaning of the Aor. 
 
 Pass., 328, 4. 
 laCio, 327, D. 17. 
 -mw, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2. 
 ide (Couj.),624 b, 1— (Imper.), 
 
 827,8; 333,12. 
 -idiov, Neut. in, 347, 1, Obs, 
 'idi or,wit h Genit. , 414, 1— wi th 
 
 Dat., 436 6. 
 «apir,158; 189,3. 
 idpvu), Aor. Pass,, 298, D. 
 Idpwi, 169, D. 
 lepoi, with Genit., 414, 1. 
 lC«i'a),822,17. 
 't^otxat, 326, 21. 
 -<C«, Verbs in, 363, 5-Fut., 
 
 263, 
 in, Char, of the Op* 293; 
 
 302, 4. 
 i'nM«, 313, 1. 
 100^, Superl., 193, D. 
 iKfxevov, 316, D. ; 323, D, 33. 
 iKveo/JLai, iKvvviJiai, 323, 83— 
 
 1 Aor., 268, D. 
 -ik6<:, Adj. in, 351 — with 
 
 Genit., 414, 6. 
 iXdaKo/jiai, 324, 5 — Imper., 
 
 312, D. 15. 
 i'Xeur, 184. 
 IfxdcTKTa), 260, D. 
 -IV, Subs, in, 172 tv, Dual 
 
 Ending in Genit. and Dat., 
 
 134,6; 173,4. 
 IVa, 638, 1 — in Sentences of 
 
 Purpose, 530. 
 -<i/or. Adj. in, 852, 15, 4, Obs. 
 -lo, Geuit. Ending, 128, D. 
 -jo^, Neut. in, 847,1. 
 -4 09, Adj. in, 350. 
 L^ov, 823, D. 83, 
 ipor, 35, D. 1. 
 -<9, Nom. of Fem. in, 138 ; 172 
 
 —Barytones in Ace. Sing., 
 
 156. 
 IVkc, 324, D. 36, 
 -to-Kof, -laKti, Subs, in, 847, 2. 
 l'o-o9,Corapar.,195— withDat,, 
 
 436 &. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 363 
 
 -lO-TCpOf. 
 
 -taTepo9, -tffTaTor, Compar., 
 197. 
 
 iffTHM<, Perf., 31T, 4— Mean- 
 ing, 329,1— of the Perf., 503. 
 
 io-xi'to, Diflf. of Pres. and Aor., 
 498. 
 
 *xf)6i, Dat. Sing., 158, D.— 
 Ace. PI., 158— Masc., 140. 
 
 Jxwp, Ace. Sing., 175, D. 
 
 -luv, Nom. of Masc. in, 348, 
 Obs. 
 
 -lav, -to-Toy, Compar,, 198. 
 
 K, in ouK, C9, Obs. 1 — New- 
 Ion, for TT, 216, D— Asp. in 
 the Perfect, 279. See also 
 Gutturals. 
 
 -Kajl Aor. in, 310. 
 
 KaOedovfxai, 326, 21. 
 
 KaOeOdu, 326, 18— Augm., 240. 
 
 KdOnfiai, 315, 2— Augm., 240. 
 
 KaOiK<o, Fut., etc., 32G, 21— 
 Augm., 240. 
 
 Kal, 624 6— Crasis, G5— with 
 Numbers, 222— with Part, 
 S87, 5 — Kai or, Kai Tov, 369, 
 2 — Kai 6e, G24, 3 — Kai-Kai, 
 624, 2, 3— Kai a;; Kai, 624, 4 
 — Kac 61,640, 2 — Kai Tore 6>i, 
 642, 4 a. 
 
 KatVu/ia*, 319, D. 33. 
 
 Kaiirep, with Part., 587, 5. 
 
 KaiTOi, 630, 6 ; 94. 
 
 Kaioi, 35, Obs.; 263, Obs 
 
 Future, 260, 2—1 Aorist, 
 269, D. 
 
 KaKov \tyo), KaKwt 5ro£ta),with 
 Acc.,402; 896. 
 
 KaKoi, Compar., 199, 2. 
 
 «a\6a),301,3. 
 
 Ka\69, Compar., 199, 6. 
 Kd/jivo^, 321, 9— Perfect, 282— 
 
 with Ace, 400 & — with 
 
 Part., 590. 
 
 Kai'eoi', Kavovv, 131, 3. 
 K«pa, 177, D. 22. 
 Kaprepto), with Part., 590. 
 Kara, 448; 459— Apocope, 64, 
 
 D. — with Inf. and Art., 
 
 574, 2. 
 KaTairXiiTTO/jiai, with AcC, 
 
 399. 
 Karrjyopto), Augm., 239. 
 Kara), Compar., 204. 
 Ke7ai, etc., 269, D. 
 KeliJiai, 314, 2. 
 Keli/or, see eKeTvo^. 
 Keipa, Fut., 262, D. 
 K6KacrMa',320,D. 33. 
 
 KtKXniJiai, Meaning, 503. 
 KtKTt^fjiat, 274, Ex. — Moods, 
 
 289— Meaning, S03. , 
 KeXade'o). 325, D. e. 
 KeXeuo), Perf., 288. 
 «6\\a),FHt.,266,Es. 
 KeXofiat, Aor., 257, D. 
 «e(v), 68, D.— Enclit., 92, 5. 
 
 See ttf. 
 Kevrea, 825,1}./. 
 
 Kepdvvvnt, 31^, 1— Sub. Mid., 
 
 312, D. 16. 
 Kepdaivw, Aor., 270, Obs. — 
 
 Perf., 322, Obs. 
 KeffKCTo, 337, D. 
 Krai, etc., 209, D. 
 Kiidu), 326, D. 41. 
 KKpv^, S3, Obs. 1 ; 145. 
 KiK\t]ffKM, 324, D. 31. 
 Kivunai, 319, D. 34. 
 Kipvn^xi, 312, D. &. 
 K(x«i/a), 321,18. 
 K.xMM', 313, D. 6 ; 322, 18. 
 k/xpiM<. 312, 7. 
 
 1/, etc., 319, D. 34. 
 K\aCw» 251, Obs. — Meaning 
 
 of the Perf. Act., 276, D. 
 KXa/o), 253, Obs.; 326, 22 — 
 
 Fut., 260, 2. 
 KAdo), 301,1. 
 KXe/fjAcCjlSG. 
 KAe/o), KAjio), Perf. Mid., 288. 
 KXtTTTn?, 'Compar., 197. 
 KXtTTTw, Perfect, 279— Aorist 
 
 Pass., 295. 
 kXts, Proper Names in, 167; 
 
 174. 
 kA/i/o), Perf., 282. 
 kAuo), Aor., 316, D. 27. 
 Kvuu), Contr., 244, 2. 
 i/.Vffr),115,D.2. 
 Koiv6<s, KotvMvtoj, with Genit., 
 
 414, 1 ; 419 o— with Dat., 
 
 436 a, b. 
 KoTo^, Koao^, etc., 216, D. 
 KoXaKet'jo), with Acc, 396. 
 KoTTTwandcompoundSjMean- 
 
 ing, 476, 2. 
 Koptvvvfxi, 319, 6. 
 Kopeo), Aor.,801, D. 
 K6pr\, Koppr], 115. 
 
 Kopvaau), 250, D. — Perfect, 
 
 286, D. 
 -Koi, Adj. in, 351. 
 KOTtw, Aor., 301, D. — Per£ 
 
 Part., 277, D. 
 KpdC«, 251— Perf., 317, 8. 
 Kparew, with Geuit., 423. 
 KpuTo?, etc., see Kdpa. 
 KpuTy?, Positive, 199, D. 1, 
 Kpciaaiav, Kpariaro^, 199, 1, 
 
 Obs. 
 
 Kpe^dvvvfxi, KpffiajJiat, 319, 2; 
 
 312, 12— Acc. of Sub. and 
 
 Opt., 309. 
 Kpefxoui, 319, D. 2. 
 Kpecraav, 199, D. 1. 
 Kpijfxvaisai, 312, D. C. 
 
 Kpivoi, 253, Obs.— Perf., 282; 
 
 286, Obs. 
 Kpoyo), Perf. Mid., 288. 
 (cpyTTTWjWith double Acc.,402. 
 KTcti/o), Aor,, 316, 4. 
 
 KTivVVIXl, 319, 17. 
 KTi/Treo), 325, D. g. 
 KvlffKia, 324, 21. 
 KVKewv, Acc. Sing., 171, D. 
 KvXlo}, Perf. Mid., 288. 
 xi^ctw, 323, 34. 
 
 fxaKpav. 
 Kvvrepo^, 199, D. 
 
 Ki/ptoj, Kupo), 325, 4— Future, 
 
 262, Ex with Part., 590. 
 
 Kvarai, Kvaaa, 323, D. 34. 
 
 Kvuv, 177, 8. 
 
 KwAyco, with Inf., 560, 3. 
 
 A doubled after the Syll. 
 Augm., 234, D, — Charac- 
 ter, 252. 
 
 A, n, V, p, Metathesis, 59 — 
 
 Position, 77, /, and D 
 
 Eedupl., 274, 2 — Fut, of 
 Stems in, 262— Aor,, 270— 
 Perf,, 280. 
 
 A,v,p,Monos. Stems in, Perf., 
 282— Aor, Pass., 298. 
 
 Aa7xdi"o, 322,27— with Genit. 
 and Acc, 419, Obs. 
 
 Aa7c69,174. 
 
 Ad^pajWith Genit., 415. 
 
 AdAor, Compar., 197. 
 
 \an/3dvo), 322, 25-Perf., 274, 
 Ex.— with Genit., 419 b— 
 Meaning, 480. 
 
 \dfx\},ofxax, 322, D. 25. 
 
 WavOdvoo, 322, 20- with Acc, 
 398— with Part., 590. 
 
 Aar, 177, 9. 
 
 Ado-Ko), 324, 29, and Obs, 
 
 Xeyonai, construed person- 
 ally, 571, 
 
 A67<o (collect), Perf., 279—2 
 Aor. M., 316, D. 35. 
 
 AetVoyuat, with Genit,, 423. 
 
 XeKTO, Afr7/i£vo9, etc, 316, D. 
 36 ; 268, D. 
 
 Ae'AnKa, 324, 29. 
 
 XtAo7X<if322, D. 27. 
 
 Aeuo), Perf. Mid., 288. 
 
 XfiOcj, 322, 26. 
 
 ArjKea), 324, D. 29, 
 
 A^?oMa«,322,27. 
 
 Ayjx//oMa(,322,25. 
 
 Xi bee AA, 56 ; 252. 
 
 Xicao/jiai, 250, D. 
 
 AA, Pres. Stems in, 252. 
 
 Aoe, 244, D. 4. 
 
 XSeaaa, 269, D. 
 
 TO Xoiniiv, 405, Obs, 2. 
 
 XoTc70oi, XoiaOio^, 199, D. 
 
 -Ao?,Adj. in, 352, Obs. 
 
 Xovo}, Constr., 244, 4 — 1 Aor., 
 269, D. 
 
 Ai/TToI^Ma', with Dat., 439,Obs. 
 
 Xvw, 301, 2— Perf. Opt. Mid., 
 289, D.— Aor,, 316, D, 28— 
 %yith Genit, 419 c. 
 
 Xutoiv, AaJffToy, 199, 1. 
 
 fi bef. p, 51, Obs. 2— bef, A bee. 
 /3, 51, D.— Change of pre- 
 ceding Cons., 47; 286, 1— 
 doubled after the Syll. 
 Augm., 234, D. 
 
 fxd, 643, 16. 
 
 -na, Nom. of Neuters, 343, 1 ; 
 130. 
 
 /iuKpdi', 405, Obs. 2. 
 
364 
 
 GEEEK INDEX. 
 
 fxuXa. 
 fxd\a, /laWov, /uuXiffra, 202 
 
 fidXicna hi], 642 a. 
 ixdv, see fxtiv. 
 fxavOdvu), 322, 2S— with Part., 
 
 591. 
 fxdvTi^, of both Genders, 140, 
 /uapi/o/Liaj, Imper., 312, D. d. 
 fiapTvpeu), 325, 5. 
 Iidprvi, 177, 10. 
 
 fJ.d(T<T(l}V, fXrjKtCTTO^, 198, D. 
 
 uao-Ti'Ctd, 251, Obs.— Future. 
 
 260, 8. 
 M«<rTjf, 177, D. 23. 
 fxdxonat, /jLaxto/iXai, 326, 23, 
 
 and D.— with Dat., 430 a. 
 nejai, 191 — Compar., 198 — 
 
 /ue^a, 401, 
 fxidonai, 326, D. 42. 
 fieeuffKco, 324, 22. 
 fxeipofxai, Perf., 274, D. 
 /ueir,177,D.24. 
 fietcav, see fjiiKpoi — /ueroi/ with 
 
 out n, 626, Obs. 
 /LteXar, 186. 
 
 fxtXet, 826, 24— with Geuit. 
 
 420, J- 
 
 /txeXXo), 826, 25— Angm , 2li, 
 
 Obs.— as Fut., 501— TTws, ti 
 
 oil txiXKu), 501, Obs. 2. 
 /xfcjuaToi/, etc., 317, D. 9. 
 fiefji/3\eTai, etc., 326, D. 24. 
 /ueM/3Xa)Ka, 51, D. ; 282, D. 
 
 324, D. 12. 
 /Li€jueT<juti/oy, 313, D. 1. 
 /xfM«'»iMa«.274,Ex.— Sub.Opt, 
 
 289, D.— Meaning, 503- 
 
 with Part., 591. 
 fiiv, comp, firiv—fxevs^e, 628 — 
 
 fxev olv, 637, 2, * 
 -ftew, 1 Pers. Dual and Plural 
 
 Act., 226, 
 
 -fxevai, -fxev. Inf. Act., 233, 
 D. 3 ; 255, D.— Aor. Pass., 
 293, D, — in Verbs in /u., 
 302, D, 
 
 nivToi, 630,5. 
 
 Mt'i'a),326,20, 
 
 iie(Tt]iij3pia, 51, Obs. 2. 
 
 ixtaoi, Compar., 195— Mean- 
 ing, 801. 
 
 /leo-Tcis-, with Genit, 414, 2. 
 
 nerd, 448; 464— Adverb, 446. 
 
 HeTaSidoaiuLi, fieTaXan^dvu), 
 
 with Genit,, 419 a. 
 
 {leTafxeXofjiai, Dep. PaSS.,328. 
 
 2— with Part., 592. 
 MeTaf^,446; 448; 455,7— with 
 Part., 587, 2. 
 
 HeTanefxnoiJiat, Pass. mean., 
 483,3— Indir. Mid., 479. 
 
 /icTfrxw, jU€Toxor, with Genit,, 
 419 a, and Obs.; 414,5. 
 
 fieXP<W, 69, Observ. 3; 445; 
 448 ; 455, 6 ; 556— without 
 Elision, 64, Obs. 1. 
 
 H^, Synizesis, 66— Neg., 612, 
 etc. — in sentences of pur- 
 pose, 530— with Verbs of 
 prohibiting,518; 510— with 
 
 Verbs of fearing, 512 ; 533 ; 
 
 616, Obs. 3— with Future 
 
 and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs.— 
 
 with Hypoth. Part., 583- 
 
 In questions, 608 — "wheth 
 
 er perchance," 610 — m'/ ov 
 
 621; 512; 533 — M^; on 
 
 622, 4. 
 litlSeii, fiijiro}, etc., see ovdek, 
 
 ouno), etc. 
 UTtKdo/iai, 325, D. 0, 
 finv, 643, 12. 
 M^Tr)p,150. 153. 
 -ju^ 1 Pers. Sing. Act., 226 ; 
 
 302, 1 — Subj., 233, D. 1; 
 
 255, D. 
 fii-ivvfxi, 319, 18. 
 niKpoi, Compar., 199, 3. 
 /jn/jiiofxat, Meaning, 328, 4— 
 
 with Ace, 398. 
 txi^ivijaKU), 274, Ex.; 824, 6— 
 
 fjnnx/riffKofxai, with Genit., 
 
 420. 
 niv, 205. D. 
 Mil/tor, Acc. Sing., 103, D.; 
 
 174, D. 
 fiicryu), 327, T— Aor. Mid., 316, 
 
 D.87. 
 fiv, in divis. of Syll., 72, 1. 
 nva, Genit. Sing., 116 c. 
 imitjfKav, with Genit., 414, 8. 
 Mo\oi}/uu', 324,12. 
 fjiovov ov, ovxi, 622, 5. 
 /j.ovocpd'foi, comp., 197. 
 Mor, Masc. in, 342, 2— Adj. 
 
 in, 352, Obs. 
 fiiC^, 326, 27. 
 
 fXVKdofJiai, 825, D. p. 
 
 iJiV9, Masc, 140. 
 
 ', before o- (and dropped, 
 49; 147,1; 149; 187— bef, 
 other Conson., 51 — bee. 7, 
 51 ; 282— Present Stems in, 
 253 — dropped in Perfect 
 Stems, 282 ; 286, 1, Obs.— 
 inserted in 1 Aor, Pass., 
 298, D.— affixed to Verb.- 
 Stem, 321— doubled after 
 the Syll. Augm., 234, D.— 
 doubled in the Pres. Stem, 
 318, 3— movable, 68. 
 
 V, in the Acc. Sing., 134,4; 
 141 ; 155, etc. ; 173, 3— in 
 Neuters, 125—1 Pers. Sing, 
 in Hist. Tenses Act., 226— 
 3 PI. in Hist. Tenses, 226 ; 
 302, D. 
 
 va, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 
 312, D. 
 
 vat, Inf., 302, 6; 333,1. 
 
 vai, 643, 14. 
 
 eT«a)^Contr.,243, D.l. 
 
 vavi, 177, 11. 
 
 I'd, vO, VT, dropped before a, 
 
 50—147, 1 ; 149. 
 -v€, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 
 
 323. 
 
 o'Uade. 
 vefxu>, 326, 28. 
 veto, 24S— Fut., 260, 2. 
 vi,, 643, 15. 
 w'Co), 251, Obs. 
 
 iiKaoi 'oXufjiiria, 400 c — Mean- 
 ing, 486, Obs. 
 wi/,205,D. ^ 
 
 uTTo-, dia-, €v-, Ttpo- voiofiat, 
 
 Dep. Pass., 328, 2. 
 i/o/u«Cw, with Genitive, 417 — 
 
 with Inf., 569. 
 -vof, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 
 i/oo-ew.Diflf. of Pres. and Aor., 
 
 498. 
 voaoi. Fern., 127, 5, 
 -vTi, 3 Plur. of Princ. Tenses 
 
 Act, 226. 
 -vrwv, 3 PI. Imper. Act., 228. 
 -vv affixed to Verb.-Stems, 
 
 804, 2 ; 318, 1, 
 vvix<j)a,Yoc. Sing., 117, D, 3. 
 vv{v), 08, D.— Enclit., 92, 5— 
 
 Diff.of vi'i/ and vvv,^Q\ 637, 
 
 8 — vvv 61}, 642, 4 c. 
 i/wtrepor, 208, D. 
 
 f,34;48;260. 
 
 -f , Masc. and Fern, in, 172. 
 
 fto), 301,1. 
 
 ^vpto), 325, 0. 
 
 ^vio, Perf. Mid., 288. 
 
 o, bee. oy, 24, D. 3 ; 42; 147,1; 
 
 bee. oi, 24, D. 3— bee. w, 40 ; 
 
 147, 2; 151; 193; 233, 4— 
 
 bee. e, 243, D. c — dropped 
 
 after ai, 194— for a, 268, D. ; 
 
 854— Conn. Vowel, 178; 238, 
 
 1; 354. 
 -o, Genit. Ending, 122, Obs. ; 
 
 128; 131, D. 
 o, for o?, 213, D.— Neut. for 
 
 oTi, 633, 1— Crasis, 65. 
 o /div — o 6e, 369,1 — Tov Kal top, 
 
 369, 2. See t6. 
 
 I bee. a, 87— bee. a, 188. 
 ode, 212; 475. See also De- 
 
 monst. Pron. 
 
 iSOpecrOai, with AcC, 400 C. 
 6du}da, 275, D. 1. 
 
 bee. ov, 87. 
 oei bee. oc or ov, 87; 248, Obs. 
 -oeidn<:, Adj. in, 359, 2, Obs. 
 o^o), 326, 29— Perf. 275, D. 1. 
 on bee. (o, 87. 
 oOi, irdOi, t60i, 217, D. 
 oOovveKa, 636, 3. 
 ot from t, 40— bee. w, 235. 
 
 <,dropped,64,D.— Short in 
 
 regard to Acc, 83, Obs. 2; 
 
 108— Voc ending, 163. 
 o'l'ywimi, 319, 19. 
 o'lda, 317, 6— with Part., 591. 
 
 6dvta,ol6em, 322, 19. 
 O'ldinovi, 174, D. 
 o« n, ending for -om, 115, D. 2, 
 -GUI', Genit. and Dat. Dual, 
 
 128, D. ; 141, D. 
 oJ'Kade, 94 ; 178. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 365 
 
 o.Ketor. 
 oUeiov, with Genit., 414, 1— 
 
 with Dat., 436 &. 
 o'lKot, 179. 
 
 o<.KTpor, Compar., 108. 
 olfxai, 244. 
 oifxwX.'^, 251, Obi'.— Fnt., 2C0, 3 
 
 —Mean, of Fut. Mid., 266. 
 -oil/, ending of Genitive and 
 
 Dative Dual, 141 ; 173, 4. 
 oicoxofco), Angm., 237, D. 
 -oio,\n the Genit., 128, D.— 
 
 2 Pers. Sing. Opt. Mid., 
 
 233, 5. 
 olo, 213, D. 
 oi'oMai, 6i'oMa«, 326,30— 2 Pers. 
 
 Sing. Pres., 233, 3 — Dep. 
 
 Pass., 328, 2. 
 olor, Attr. and Article, 600 — 
 
 with Inf., 601 — oI(io-Te, 94 
 
 — olov, ola bij, with Part., 
 
 587, 6. 
 oh, 160. 
 
 oiae, 268, 'D.—o"iGei, 327, 12. 
 -ot<7«(0,I>at.Pl.,128,D. 
 oiVoj, ett., 327, 12. 
 oixofxai, oix>'tw, 326, 31, and 
 
 D.— Meaning, 486, Obs 
 
 with Part., 590. 
 oXeKo), 319, D. 20. 
 o\t7o?, Compar., 199, 4. 
 o\i7a)pe'&), with Genit, 420. 
 hXiaOdvu), 322, 20. 
 oWvut, 319, 20— Meaning of 
 
 Perf., 329, 9; 503 — Itera- 
 tive, 337, D. 
 oXof, Position, 390. 
 *O\i^M'''»a,400 c. 
 o/itXew, with Dat., 436 a. 
 ofivvnt, 319, 21 — with the 
 ^ Ace, 399. 
 
 o/io<09, onotoofiat, o/xoXo^t'o), 
 
 oyuoi;, etc., with Dat., 436 a, 
 6, c. 
 
 6fio\oy4ofxai, constr. person- 
 ally, 571. 
 
 oidop'fvvfMi, 319, 22. 
 
 6fiuivv/j.o<!, with Dat., 436 b. 
 
 o/utof, 630, 7— after Participle, 
 587,6. 
 
 -oi/,Nom. of Neuters, 172. 
 
 oveipof, 175. 
 
 ovivnfJ-i, 312, 2 — Ace. of Aor. 
 Sub. and Opt. Mid., 309— 
 
 ^ with Accus., 396. 
 
 ovo^xat, 314, D. 
 
 if .^yo), Perf. Mid., 28G, Obs. 
 
 oo bee. ou, 36 ; 130. 
 
 -oor, Adj. in, 183. 
 
 vov, 213, D. 
 
 oTrnv/Ka, 634, 3. 
 
 oniaOev, with Genit., 415. 
 
 oTTore, oiroTov, 556 ; 634, 1 — 
 " as often -as," 558, Obs. 1. 
 
 oVtriTra, 275, D. 1. 
 
 oTTWf , 632, 3— in sentences of 
 purpose, 530— with av, 531 
 6, Obs.— with Future Ind., 
 500; 553 — in Challenges 
 and Warnings, 553, Obs.— 
 
 oTTwv jLi>'/, with Verbs of 
 
 Fearing, 533, Obs. 
 opao), 327, 8 — Double Augm., 
 
 237— Perf., 327, 8; 275, D.l 
 
 —with Part., 591. 
 opfaivoi, Aor., 270, Obs. 
 
 opiyvvm, 319, D. 30. 
 
 ope-fofjiat, with Genit., 419 c. 
 opeovTo, 320, D. 37. 
 opwf , 177, 12— Ace. Sing., 156. 
 iipwijit, 319, D. 37—2 Aorist 
 
 Mid., 316, D. 38. 
 opovTai, 327, D. 8. 
 op6m, 243, D. 3 a. 
 Spaeo, 268, D. 
 opvGCTo), Perf., 275, 1. 
 opwpa, 320, D. 37. 
 -09, Neuters in, 243, 2, and 
 
 Obs. ; 139; 172— Ending of 
 
 Genit., 141 ; 157, D. ; 173, 
 
 8,1. . 
 o9, Relative, 213— Demonst. 
 
 212, D.; 213, Obs., and D.— 
 
 for the Possess, of 1 and 2 
 
 Pers., 471, Obs. c; 208, D, 
 oaw, Attr., 600— cffov, 601— 
 
 oaov ov, 622, 5. 
 oaaaTio?, 216, D. 
 6'aae, 177, D. 25. 
 oCTTiy, 94—214, Obs. 2— offTt? 
 
 and 6(TTiiovv,Me£in., 600. 
 IxTtppaivo/iai, 822, 21, and Obs. 
 ore, orav, 556; 634, 1— with 
 
 Aor. Ind., 493 — "as often 
 
 as," 558, Obs. 1. 
 on and o Ti, 214, Obs. 2. 
 oTt, 633, 1— without Elision 
 
 64, Obs. 1 — in Dependent 
 
 Declarative Sentences, 525 
 
 — oTt lit], 633, 1 b. 
 6rin, 218. 
 St.9, 214, D. 
 ov from o. See o.' 
 -ou, Genitive ending, 122, 2 ; 
 
 128; 134, 2-Conn. Vowel, 
 
 233, 1—2 Pers. Sing. Imper. 
 . and Imperf. Mid., 233, 5. 
 ov, ovK, ovx, 69, Obs. 1 ; 52, D. 
 
 — Atonons, 97.4; 612, etc. 
 
 —with Prohibitives, 499, 
 
 Obs.— in questions,60S — ov 
 
 tap, ov yap aWd, 636, 6 d. 
 — ov 6rira, 642, 6 — ovk iipa, 
 637, 1—ov fxiu 620— ou /u^" 
 (juevTOi) aWd, 622, 6 — ov 
 {Xovov-uWcc Kal, 624, 6. 
 
 ov, ol, J-', etc., Meaning, 471, 
 
 Obs. b. 
 oi5e,625, 1. 
 oidek, 221— Attr., (J02—ov6ev, 
 
 622, 1. 
 o^K6T<,622, 2. 
 ovKovv and ovKovv, Diff. 99 ; 
 
 637, 2. 
 ov\6fxevof, 319, D. 20. 
 olv, 637, 2— Atfixed, 218. 
 -oyv, Ace. Sing., 163, D. 
 ovveKa, 636, 3. 
 o£,?, 65, D. 
 
 Trutrxo). 
 oiVo), 622, 2. 
 
 ovptio. Augment, 237. 
 
 -01/9, Adj. in, 183; 352, 4— 
 Nom. of Subs., 172. 
 
 ol?, 177, 13 ; 142, 8 — Neut., 
 140. 
 
 ouTuoj.Aor., 316, 20, D. 
 
 ovTe,94 — ovTe-ovTe,ovTe-ovde, 
 625, 2, and Obs. 
 
 oUti, 622, 1. 
 
 ovToi, 643, 10. 
 
 ouT09,,212; 475;— in address- 
 ing, 393— ouToo-;, 212. 
 
 o[;T<o(9),69,Obs.3— withPart., 
 587, 4. 
 
 o^x',,97, Obs. 
 
 ovx OT«, oix O7rt09, 622, 3, 4. 
 
 bcpeiXo) and 6d)e\\w,Diff.,253, 
 
 Obs. 
 b<pei\u), 326, 32. 
 o<p€\\a), 1 Aor., 270, D. 
 o0\«ffKai/c<), 322, 22. 
 o(Ppa, 556 ; 635, 10.— See 'iva. 
 b<ppvi, ACC. PI., 158. 
 6'xo9, PI., 174, D. 
 6xo)Ka, 327, D. 6. 
 b\j/iof, Comp., 195. 
 o^ofiai, 327, 8. 
 b^o(pdyo^, Compar., 197. 
 -ow, Length, in Contr. Verb, 
 
 243, D. A. 3— Attic Fut., 
 
 263, D.— Verbs in, 353, 1, 
 
 and Obs. 1. 
 
 IT, doubled, 217, D. (62, D.)— 
 Aspir. in Perf., 279. 
 
 7ra7f, Genit., Plur. and Dual, 
 142, 3— Voc. Sing., 148— of 
 two Genders, 140. 
 
 naiw, Perf. Mid., 288. 
 
 naXaiov, Compar., 194. 
 
 wdAiv, in Compos, before a-, 
 49, Obs. 1. 
 
 ndX\o>, Aor. 257, D.— 2 Aor. 
 Mid., 316, D. 40. 
 
 nav, 142, 6— in Compos, be- 
 fore or, 49, Obs. 1. 
 
 ■7ravT(ina<rt{v), 68, 3. 
 
 napci, Ttapai, nap, 448, III. ; 
 465— Apoc, 64, D. 
 
 irdpa, 90. 
 
 napavoiJ.eb}, ineg. Augm. ,239. 
 napan\i](Ttoi, With Dat., 436 
 
 &— Compar., 195. 
 irapaTiOeiJiat, 481, 
 
 7rapaxc«jp6'«>,withGenit.,419 e. 
 
 Trape'xw and wapexoMa'. 480. 
 Trape'xw, with Inf., 561. 
 napoivfo}, double Aug., 240. 
 wapov, 586. 
 ndpov, 565 : 635, 12. 
 nappnTid^onai, Augm., 239. 
 
 7ru9, Genit. and Dat. Accent., 
 142, 2— meaning with and 
 . without Art., 390, and Obs. 
 Trdaau), 250, Obs.- Fut. 260, 3. 
 Trdaacov, 198, D. 
 
 Trdcrxo), 32Y, 9— Perf,, 317, D. 
 14. / 
 
366 
 
 GEEEK INDEX. 
 
 Trareojuaj. 
 irareoiJiai, 325, 7. 
 <irar>]p, 153. 
 iravonai, Aorist, 298 — with 
 
 Genit., 419 e— with Part. 
 
 mean., 590. 
 irelOa, Aorist, 257, D.— Perf., 
 
 317, D. 15— Fut. aud Aor. 
 
 Part., 326, D. 43 —Mean- 
 ing, 330, 3 ; 503. 
 ireivdu), Contr., 244, 2. 
 TretVojaai, 327, 9. 
 neKdC(a,l Aor. Imper., 268, D. 
 jreXeKy?, Masc, 140 ; 157. 
 nenTTu, Perf., 279. 
 Trevn?, Compar., 192 — with 
 
 Genit., 414, 2. 
 ireiToi0a, 317, D. 15. 
 nenovOa, 317, D. 14. 
 7re7rpa7a and irtirpaxo-, DiffL, 
 
 330. 
 ireTT p(i}Tai, 285, D. 
 weTTTa/xat, 274, Ex. 
 weTTTto/ca, 274, Ex. ; 327, 15. 
 jrenoiKa, 327, 10. 
 irenojv, Coinpar., 196 a. 
 jrep, 641, 3— Enclit., 92, 5 — 
 
 Affix, 218. 
 wepa, with Genit, 415— Corn- 
 par., 200. 
 jrepdoi, 326, 33. 
 irepOoi, 2 Aor., 257, D. ; 59, D. 
 
 —Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D. 41. 
 nepi, 448, III. ; 466— without 
 
 Elision,64,Obs.l-Anastr., 
 
 446— Adverb, ibid.—with. 
 
 Augm,, 238. 
 irepi/3dX\oiJiai, with double 
 
 Ace, 402. 
 Tceptfiyvofxat, irepleiiJit, with 
 
 Genit., 423. 
 nepvnm, Part., 312, D. e. 
 ir€pvcn{v), 68, 3. 
 Treffetv, 327, 15. 
 weo-ffw, 250, Obs. 
 neTuvvvfxi, 319, 3. 
 nerewf, Genit. Sing., 131, D. 
 neronai, 326, 34— 2 Aor., 61 c; 
 
 257, D.; 316,5. 
 TtevOoixai, 322, 29. 
 Tre^i/ov, 257, D. 
 •Keipvi^oTc^, 277, D. 
 ff^, Enclit., 92, 4. 
 nnyvvpLi, 319, 23 — 2 Aorist 
 
 Mid., 316, D. 39— Meaning. 
 
 830,4. 
 wnv/Ka, with Genit., 415. 
 TTJJxi'r, Masc.,140; 154. 
 ffteCew, 7rjtCw,325,D. A. 
 nWc, 316, 15. 
 TrtXi/ajuat, Aor., 312, D.f. 
 
 TrjMTAnM', 312, 3— with Gen- 
 itive, 418. 
 
 ninnprifxi, 312, 4. 
 
 tt/vo), 321, 4 ; 327, 10— Future, 
 265— Aor., 321, 4; 316,15— 
 Meaniug,329,7— with Gen- 
 itive, 419 d, and Obs. 
 
 niofxa,, 265; 327,10. 
 
 iriTtiaKca, 324, 20. 
 
 TrpaTTCi), 
 ■mirpdaKOi, 324, 7. 
 
 tt/ttto), 327, 15 — Perf. Part., 
 
 317, D. 17. 
 nlavpe<!, 220, D. 4. 
 TTiTi-ea), 323, 35. 
 TTtTvu/xt, 312, D. (7. 
 7r£0ai/cTKw, 324, D. 32. 
 7r«wv, Compar., 196 a. 
 TrXdCw, 251, Obs. 
 irXdcrao), 250, ObS. — FutUre, 
 
 ■",3. 
 TrXetwv, wXeTcTTo?, 199, 5 — 
 
 TrXeov, without n, 626, Obs. 
 
 — irXeuv, 199, D. 5. 
 TrXtKw, Aor. Pass., 295. 
 TrXeo), 248— Fut., 260, 2 ; 264 
 
 -Perf. Mid., 288. 
 TrXewr, 184 — with Genitive, 
 
 414, 2. 
 nXriOo}, 312, 3 — with Genit., 
 
 418. 
 nXjv, 445 ; 455, 9, ^ 
 ■nXhpn^t TrXnpoo), with Genit., 
 
 414, 2 ; 418. 
 nXmiov, Compar., 195— with 
 
 Genit., 415. 
 ffX^ffffM, 2 Aorist and Future 
 
 Pass., 295. 
 TrXfiTO, 316, D. 22. 
 -ttXoCs, in Multiplicat., 223. 
 TcXovaio^, with Genit., 414, 2 
 nXvv(a, Perf., 282. 
 itXtiiU), Aor,, 316, D. 24. 
 TTveo), 248 — Fut., 260, 2 ; 264 
 
 —Perf. ,285, D. -with Ace. 
 
 400 c. 
 nw^f,177,14 
 
 7ro66y, see ttow. 
 7ro6»6i/, End., 92, 4. 
 iroeiu, 301, 4. 
 n-o(^t, see Tvou. 
 
 TTot, Encl.,92, 4. 
 
 TTOteo) and Tzoieonai, 480 — 
 
 with Genit., 417. 
 7r6X.9, 151, D.— Gender, 138 & 
 
 Compos., 189, 3. 
 TToXtTeuo) and iroXnevouat, 
 
 480, Obs. 
 7roXXdK«(9),69, Obs.3; 224 
 TToXu?, 191 — Compar., 199, 5 
 
 — TToXu, 404, Obs. TToXXw, 
 
 with Comp., 440. 
 noveo), 301, 4. 
 TToppo), with Genit, 415, 
 noaeiduiv, Acc, Sing., 171 — 
 
 Voc.,148,Obs. 
 iTore, End., 92, 4. 
 
 TTOTepoi/ »j, 611 — in Depend. 
 Interr. Sentences, 525. 
 
 iroTi, see TTpor, 
 
 TTou, with Genitive, 415. 
 
 7rou(7ro(^0,Encl,,92,4. 
 
 TToyXi'/?, Fern,, 185, D. 
 
 TToik, 142 b; 147, 1, Ex, — 
 
 DatPlur,,49, D.; 141, D. 
 
 149, D.— in Compos., 160- 
 
 Masc, 140. 
 wpyor, 191. 
 TrpdTTO), Meaning, 476, 1 - 
 
 Trpdr.To/ia/, with double 
 
 Acc, 402. 
 7rptcr/3i;9, 177, 15. 
 irp/j(^a), 312, 4. 
 Trpm/iat, 2 Aorist, 316, 8 — 
 
 Accent of Aor. Sub. Opt,, 
 
 309. 
 npiv, 556 ; 635, 11— with Inf., 
 
 565, and Obs. 1, 2. 
 npioi, Perf. Mid., 288. 
 np6, 448, B ; 454 — Crasis, 65 
 
 — with Augm., in Compos., 
 
 238 — with Inf. and Art, 
 
 574, 3 — vp6 Tov, 369, 3. 
 irpo? {noTi, irpoTi), 448, III.; 
 
 467 -Adv., 446— with Inf. 
 
 and Art, 574, 2,4. 
 irpoaOev, itpoaut, with Genit., 
 
 415. 
 irpo^r,Kov, 586. n 
 
 irpo^MTTov, N©m. Acc. Plur., 
 
 175, D. 
 wpoTcpof, TrpwTor, 200. 
 npovp'^ov, Compar., 195. 
 Trpwioi, Compar., 195? 
 mt]<T(T(t), 316, D. 21. 
 miaata, 250, Obs.— Future, 
 
 260, 3. 
 nriju), 301, 1. 
 
 TTTwxo?, Compar., 197. 
 TTveiaOai, 322, 29. 
 UvKvoi, 177, 14. 
 
 nO/xaToi, 190, D. (Defect). 
 
 nvvedvofxai, 322, 29 — with 
 
 Genit,, 420. 
 irUp,142 6; 151; 175; Neut, 
 
 140. 
 wti), irw(s), End., 92, 4. 
 Trios', witli Genit,, 415 — nws 
 
 7fip oi), 636, 6 d. 
 
 p, doubled, 62 — after the 
 Augm, ,234— after Redupl., 
 274, 4^Metathesis, 59— in 
 2 Aor., 257, D p,pp, 13. 
 
 pd, End., 92, 5.— See apa. 
 
 pd^boi, Fem., 127, 5. 
 
 pd6io^, Compar., 199, 7. 
 
 pa/i/co, Plup., 287, D. 
 
 pe^co, 327, 3. 
 
 pepuTTWjuei/or, 274, D. 
 
 peo), 248 ; 326, 35— Fut., 260, 2. 
 
 p;77i/i;M', 319, 24; 278— Mean- 
 ing, 330, 5. 
 
 pnOr]<Tonai, etc., 327, 13. 
 
 piytu), 325, D. i. 
 
 piyiov, 199, D. 
 
 piyoM, Contr,, 244, 3. 
 
 pmreo}, plirTU), 325, 8. 
 
 pvcrOat, etc., 314, D. 
 
 pwvvviJ.1, 319, 10. 
 
 (T, 2 ; 33 c — effect on preced- 
 ing Vowel and Cons., 46, 
 etc. ; 260, etc. ; 286— Cora- 
 bin,, 48 — Assim, to p, 50 b 
 
 —to X, iJi,v,p, 270, D bee. 
 
 Spir. Asp,, 60 b; 308; 327, 
 5 Obs.— from t, see t. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 
 
 367 
 
 a, dropped, 61 a, ft— in Sigma 
 Stems,166— iuPres.Steras, 
 233, 3, 4, 5— in the Future, 
 202, Obs., etc. — in tlie 1 
 Aor., 268; 269, D.; 270 — 
 in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307— in 
 the Pert*, and Plup. Mid., 
 2S4, D. 
 
 <r, inserted in the Perf., 2S8 
 —in the Weak Pass. Stem, 
 2ys— in the Verb. Adj., 300 
 —in Deri v., 340, Obs. 2— in 
 Compos., 358, 2. 
 
 (T, doubled in the Dat. Plur., 
 158, D.— in the Fut., 261, 
 D.— in the 1 Aor., 269, D.— 
 after Syl. Augm., 234, D. 
 
 r, dropped, 69, Observ. 3— in 
 Compar., 204. 
 
 9, ending of Nom. Sing., 173, 
 1 ; 113 ; 122, 1 ; 134, 1 ; 141 ; 
 145 ; 147, 1 ; 155 ; 160 — 
 wanting, 122, D. 1 ; 147, 2 ; 
 151; 163. 
 
 r, ending of Dat. Plur., 119 ; 
 134, 8-of Ace. PL, 134, 10; 
 173, 7— of 2 Person Sing. 
 in Hist. Tenses Act., 226 
 —Nom. of Fem., 348 ; 349, 
 Obs. 
 
 -a a, Fem. ending, 187. 
 
 <Ta\iTitoy, 251, Obs. 
 
 -aav, 3 PI. in Preter,, 302, 7. 
 
 2ap7rn6aii/, 174, D. 
 
 afitvvvfii, 319, 7—2 Aor., 316, 
 9 ; 318, 5— Meaning, 329, 5. 
 
 -o-e, Local Suffix, 178. 
 
 oeavTov, 210 — PoSS., 472 a. 
 
 ae(3ofxat, Dcp. Pass., 328, 2. 
 
 -<7e<a), Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2. 
 
 aeco,, Perf. Mid.,'28S. 
 
 ae6a), 248, D.— 1 Aor., 269, D. 
 —Perf. Mid., 274, D., 285, 
 D 2 Aor., 316, D. 30. 
 
 ff/jTTo), Mean, of Perf., 330, 6. 
 
 <r>;9, Gen., PI. and Du., 142, 3. 
 
 aO, after Cons. , 61 a ; 286, 4. 
 
 -<r0a, in the 2 Pers. Sing. Sub. 
 and Opt., 233, D. 1 : 255, 
 D. 1— Ind.,302,D.— in the 
 1 Person Plur. Pres. Mid., 
 233, D. 5. 
 
 -cOe, 2 Pers. Plural, Imper. 
 Mid., 228. 
 
 'ffOov, 1 Pers. Du. Pres. Mid., 
 233, D. 5 — 3 Person Dual 
 Imperf., 233, D. 7-2 Pers. 
 Du. Imper. Mid., 228. 
 
 -atiia, -aOuiv, -aOuxrav, 3 Pers. 
 
 Sing. Du. PI. Imper. Mid., 
 228. 
 
 -ai, 2 Pers. Sing, of Princ. 
 Tenses Act., 226 ; 302,2. 
 
 -<Ti(i/), Dat. Plur., 68, 1 ; 119 ; 
 134, 8; 141; 160; 173, 6 — 
 3 Pers. Sing. Pres. Subj., 
 233, D. 1 ; 255, D. 1— Local 
 ending, 179 ; 68, 2—3 Pers, 
 Plur. and Sing., 68, 5. 
 
 tr(p€, 
 aia, -(TK, Fem. in, 342, 1. 
 
 ai'^dai, Diff. of Pres. and 
 Aor., 498 — Mean, of Fut. 
 Mid., 266. 
 fft/xor, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 
 
 aioiTcdu), Meaning of Fut. 
 Mid., 266. 
 
 (jK, in forming Inchoatives, 
 324— Iteratives, 334,D.,etc. 
 
 a-KedcivvvfJii, 319, 4. 
 
 o-KeAXo), Aor., 316, 10— Mean- 
 ing, 329, 6. 
 
 (7K/av.iM«, 312, D. h ; 319, 4. 
 
 cKoitico and eofjiai, 480. 
 
 (TKOTO?, 174. 
 
 lKi6\Kt), 115, D. 2. 
 andop, 176. 
 
 (T/udo), Contr., 244, 2. 
 
 -GO, 2 Person Sing. Imper. 
 
 Mid., 228. 
 o-Trdw, 301, 1— Perf. Mid., 288. 
 aTrtvdo), Fut., 260, 1 — Perf. 
 
 Mid., 286, Obs. 
 cTTreoj, 166, D. 
 o-7r6(7(ya<,etC.,327, 5. 
 o-7reiv6a), with Inf., 560, 3. 
 aiTovbdt,iis, Meaning of Fut. 
 
 Mid., 266. 
 cro-,57; 250. 
 -ffo-o), Verbs in, 250— Future, 
 
 260, 3. 
 
 -ara, 307. 
 
 (rTd^w,251,Obs.— Fnt.,260,3. 
 
 o-rdxi'S', Masc.,140. 
 
 £rT£(/3a). 326, 36. 
 
 areWw, Perf., 282 — Aorist 
 Pass., 295. 
 
 <TTei/dCw, 251, Obs.— Future. 
 260, 3. 
 
 (TTei'MTr^c, Masc, 127, 2. 
 
 ffrepTO), with Dat., 4^9, Obs. 
 
 arepicKO), 324, 26 — with Gen- 
 itive, 419 e. 
 
 (TT.Cw, 251, Obs.— Fut., 260, 3. 
 
 (TTod, 115 (Ex.). 
 
 <rToptvvviJL.i, 319, 8. 
 
 cTTopw/jit, 319, 25. 
 
 (j-Tox«Co/^««> with Genitive, 
 419 c. 
 
 arpe<p(a, Perf., 285— Meaning 
 of Aor. Pass., 328, 3. 
 
 (TTpUVVVfll, 319, 11. 
 
 aTvyem, 325, D. k. 
 
 ffv/jiftaivo), Constr. personal- 
 ly, 571. 
 
 o-K^i^coveo), avvc^8u), with Dat., 
 436 a. 
 
 (Tvv, ^vv, in Compos, bef. a 
 and C, 49, Obs. 1— in Dis- 
 tributives, 223. 
 
 -<rvvrt, Fem., 340, 2. 
 
 cr6voi6d fxoi, with Part., 591, 
 Obs. 
 
 a-vvwvvfjLov, with Dat., 436 b. 
 
 avi, 142 6— of two Genders. 
 140. 
 
 (T^d \XoMa«, with Gen., 419, e. 
 
 (T(pe, 205,-D.— o-0eTepor, 472 b 
 —a<p6s, 208, D. 
 
 (r(prj^, Masc, 140. 
 
 o-xe«te<i/,33S,D. 
 
 <rxtf, etc., 310, 11 ; 327,6. 
 
 crxoXalo',; Compar., 194. 
 
 <T(iCw,l Aor. Pass., 298. 
 
 SwKpdrf]?, 174. 
 
 (Tws, 184. 
 
 <TWT>;p,Voc. Sing., 152. 
 
 T, Prounnt., 4— bee. 9, 54 — 
 becomes ff,60a; 67; 187— 
 dropped, 147, 2 ; 169 — in 
 the Perfect, 281— changes 
 before, 286, 3 — affixed to 
 Verb. Stem, 249— movable, 
 169, D. 
 
 rdv, Defect., 177, 10. 
 
 Tdn;Ma«,319,D.38. 
 
 Tcixa, 212 — tJ(i/ TUXtTTtlV, 405, 
 
 Obs. 2. 
 raxt'i, Compar. 0d<7ffco^, 54 &; 
 
 198. 
 -T6, 2 Pers. Plur. Act., 226— 
 
 2 Plur. Imper. Act., 22S. 
 -re, 624 6 — Enclit, 92, 5 — 
 
 Affix, 94 ; 624, 5 — rt-Kai, 
 
 76-6e, 024, 2, and Obs. 
 
 reOvi^^oi, 291. 
 7etv, 205, D. 
 Te/wo), Perfect, 282—1 Aorist 
 
 Pass., 298. 
 -re/pa, Fem., 341, 2. 
 Teiifxr]piov 6i, 636, 6 b. 
 reXeo), 301, 1— Perf. Mid., 288. 
 Tf/u£., 321, D. 10. 
 Tfyui/w, 321, 10. 
 T60, rev, Tfo), etc., 214, D. 
 reoi, 208, D. 
 -reo?, Verb. Adj., 300; 590— 
 
 with Dat., 434. 
 -T6po9, Compar., 192 ; 208, 
 
 Obs.; 216. 
 ripnonai, Aorist, 59, D. ; 257, 
 
 D. ; 295, D.— with Partic, 
 
 592. 
 TCTa'^wv, 257, D. 
 reruKa, 282. 
 TtrXn/ca, 317, D. 10. 
 TtT/iov, 257, D. 
 rerpaivu), Aor., 270, Obs. 
 TtTpnxa. 277, D. 
 TeTi-Keli/, 322, D. 30. 
 T£i''x«, 322, 30 — Perf. Mid., 
 
 285, D. • 
 Tr,KU), Meaning, 330, 7. 
 TM^'Koi/TOS', TTi^iKoide, 212 ; 
 
 475. 
 -rm. Ending of the 3 Person 
 
 Dual of the Hist. Tenses, 
 
 Act., 226— of the 2 Person 
 
 Dual, 233, D. 7. 
 -Tnp, Masc. in, 341, 2 ; 137. 
 --npiof, Neut. in, 345, 1. 
 -Tr79, Nom. of Masc. in, 341, 
 
 2 ; 349, 2— Voc. Sing., 121 
 
 —Nom. of Fem. in, 346, 1 ; 
 
 138. 
 Ti bee. aa-, 57— inserted in 
 
 Derivation, 361. 
 
368 
 
 GEEEK INDEX. 
 
 'Ti, 3 Pers. Sing. Act. iu the 
 
 Princip. Tenses, 226. 
 Tt ; why ? 404, Obs. — t« 7dp ; 
 
 636, 6d — Ti dn; 642, 4 a 
 — Tt dfjirov ; 642, 5 — ri 
 8hra ; 642, 6— rt ij.a0wv ; t< 
 iraOiuv ; 606, Obs. 2 — t« /i>ji/ ; 
 643, 12. 
 
 rin, 218. 
 
 riOnui, Aor. Pass., 53 &. 
 
 TtKTd), 249. 
 
 Tj/i"". with Genit., 421. 
 Tilj.u)peojj.ai and -fco), 481 & — 
 
 -eofjiai, with Acc, 396. 
 T/Vi^M'. 319, D. 35. 
 fivw, 321, 5. 
 riTTTe, 61, D. 
 T/pwi/r, 50 b, Obs. 2. 
 -T«,Nom. Fern., 341,2; 342,1. 
 t/?, t/, 214— for orTif, 609. 
 T/y, Ti, 214— End., 92, 1— T/^a, 
 
 to be supplied, 568. 
 T(Tpda), 327, 16. 
 rtrpuxTKU), 324, 16. 
 rnvaKofiai, 322, D. 30; 324, 
 
 D.37. 
 rXTivat, etc., 316, 6. 
 TM-ta, 321, D. 10. 
 TO, 879, Obs.; 104; 559 6— t6 
 
 /Liei/, to 6i, 369, Obs. — to 
 
 irpt'i/, 635, 11. 
 ToOi, ToOev, Tto?, 217, D. 
 Tot, 643, 10— Eucl., 92, 5. 
 Toi'^ap, roi'iapoiiv, rof^apTOi, 
 
 643, 10; 637, 5 — toivvv, 
 
 637, 4. 
 
 Tolo, etc., 212, D. 
 
 TOioi/Tor, Toiorde, 212; 475. 
 
 Toir6e<7«,212,D. 
 
 toXm", 115 (Ex.). 
 
 -Toi/. 2 and 3 Pers. Du. Act., 
 226—3 Pers. Dual Imperf., 
 233, D. 7—2 Pers. Du. Im- 
 perf., 228. 
 
 -Tor, Verbal Adj. in, 300. 
 
 Tooroi'Tos', rocToide, 212 ; 475. 
 
 TOTe, with Part., 587, 4. 
 
 rov, Tw, 214, Obs. 1. 
 
 -Tpa for -Tep in the DatPlur,, 
 153. • 
 
 -Tpa, Fem. iu, 344, Obs. 
 
 TpeTTO), 2 Aorist Act., 257 — 
 2 Aorist Pass., 294— Perf., 
 279; 285. 
 
 Tp(:0w,54 c— Perf., 279 ; 285— 
 Aor. Pass., 295— Aor. Act. 
 Meaning, 329, D. 
 
 Tp^;xw,54c; 327,11. 
 
 Tpt]ao}, 327, 16. 
 
 -Tpm, Fem. in, 341, 2— Quan- 
 tity, 117. 
 Tpivpn9, Genit. PI., 166. 
 -Tp<?, Fem. in, 341, 2. 
 rpixo^, see t)pi^. 
 -Tpov, Neut. in, 344. 
 TpwYo), 2Aor. Act.,257. 
 Tpw^, Gen, PI. and Du.,142, 3. 
 Tpwu>, 324, D. 16. 
 TT, -TTW, see <ra; -aaia. 
 
 (peidofiat, 
 
 Tvjxavi^, 322, 30, etc. —with 
 
 the Genitive, 419 c — with 
 ■ Part., 590. 
 rvvtu 205, D. 
 Tl^TTTCO, 326, 37. 
 Tv<po>, 54 c. 
 rvxdv, 322, 30. 
 -TO), -Twv, 3 Pers. Sing, and 
 
 Du. Imper. Act., 228. 
 -Twp, Norn. Masc. iu, 341,- 2 ; 
 
 137. 
 -TWffai/, 3 Pers. Plur. Imper. 
 
 Act., 228. 
 
 V bee. F, 35, D. 2 ; 160 ; 248, 
 Obs.— bee. a, 40 — bee. cv, 
 40; 278 — bee. ov, 40, D.— 
 of the Stem bee. e, 157— 
 Long by nature, 83, Obs. 1 
 —lengthened, 253, Obs.— 
 dropped, 253 — not drop- 
 ped, 64. 
 
 ri/, Neut. in, 139; 172. 
 
 6/3p<'Cw, with Acc, 396. 
 
 v/3piaTi]i, Compar., 197. 
 
 -v8p,ov, Neut. in, 347, Obs. 1. 
 
 uSwp, 176— Neut., 140. 
 
 i/e bee. 0, 158. 
 
 VI, Diphth., 28. 
 
 -via, Fem. of Perf. Partic, 
 188. 
 
 v\6i, 177, 17. 
 
 vjjiiv, v/jiiv, etc., 207 — iifioi, 
 208, D. 
 
 -vv, Nom. of Masc and Neut. 
 iu, 172. 
 
 -uvw.Verbs in, 353,8. 
 
 inai, see vno. 
 
 uTraTO?, 200. 
 
 hittp (bneip), 448, II.,*A. ; 460 
 
 —with Inf. and Art, 574, 3. 
 virttrxvov/Jiai, 323, 30 — with 
 
 Inf., 569. 
 hno, 448, III.; 468— Apoc., 
 
 64, D. 
 vnoTTTevco, Augm., 239. 
 -w, Nom. Masc. and Fem., 
 
 172 — Barytones in Acc. 
 
 Sing., 156. 
 vanivt), Dat. Sing., 175, D. 
 
 UCTTepoc, vararof, vaTUTio^, 
 
 200 : 199, D. 
 vffTepo^, varepta, with Gen., 
 
 416, Obs. 3; 423. 
 
 <p, Pronunt., 6. 
 
 <padi>0t]v, 521,1). 
 ipaeivoi, Superl., 193, D. 
 
 (paivo), (paeivu),32l, D.— Perf., 
 
 282— Meaning, 330, 8— Aor. 
 Pass., 298, D. — Meaninc:, 
 828, 3 — Diff. of Pres. and 
 Aor., 498. 
 (jyaivoixai, (pavepos e/jut, With 
 
 Part., 590. 
 (puaKbi, 324, 8. 
 <pei6ofxat,?i26, D.45— Aor. and 
 
 Fut., 257, D.— with Genit., 
 
 419 e. 
 
 XP«w. 
 
 0epT€, 315, D. 4. 
 
 ^epTcpo?, ^epTaTor, d>tptaTOS, 
 199, D. 1. 
 
 ^epo), 327, 12— Imperat. of 1 
 Aor. Act., 268, D.— Mean- 
 ing, 476, 2—<ptpwv, 580. 
 
 0eu7a),822, 31— Fut. Mid., 264 
 —Perf. Mid., 285, D.— with 
 Acc, 398— with Genit., 422 
 — Meaning, 486, Obs. 
 
 (pniJii, 312, 5— Pres. Ind.Eucl., 
 92 3. 
 
 4>0uL', 321, 3—2 Aor., 316, 7 
 — with Acc, 898 — with 
 Part., 590. 
 
 (pOe'tpui, Perf., 282— Meaning, 
 330, D. 11. 
 
 <l>eivu>, 321, 6— Aor. Mid., 316, 
 D.26. 
 
 <i>i\tui, 825, D. 1. 
 
 0tXor, Compar., 195. 
 
 (p(\oTifiionai, Dep. Pass., 
 828, 2. 
 
 -0^(1/), 178, D. 
 
 (po/Sovfiat, Meaning of Aor., 
 828,3— with Inf., 500, 3. 
 
 ^olwf , 83, Obs. 1 ; 145. 
 
 (poprivai, see <j)ip(>i. 
 
 (ppayvvpn, ipcip-yvvfjit, 319, 26. 
 
 0paCw,Aor.,257,D. 
 
 ippiap, 176. 
 
 (ppijv, Fem., 140. 
 
 (piifade, 178, D. 
 
 ipvfjdvM, 322, 81, and Obs. 
 -^y^?,Adj. in,Acc. Sing.,166. 
 <pv\dTTop.at, with Acc, 899. 
 0.^pa), Fut.,262,D. 
 ipvo), Aor., 816, 17— "Meaning, 
 
 829, 3. 
 <pwi, ^lo'r, Genit. Plur. and 
 
 Dual,' 142,* 8. 
 
 xa/po), 326, 38— with Dat., 439, 
 
 Obs.— with Part., 592. 
 XaXdu', 301, 1. 
 
 XaXc7ratVa),withDat.,439,ObS. 
 xaXcTTos, with Inf., 562. 
 xaXenwi ^f p(o,withPart.,592. 
 Xov5di/a),323, D.41. 
 Xai/oi;Ma«,324,9. 
 xdpiv, 404, Obs. 
 x«pK,Compar.of compounds 
 
 with, 197. 
 Xfiffhto, 324, 9. 
 xe/p,177,18— Fem.,140. 
 Xe/pwi/, xcp'O'Tor, 199, 2. 
 xe«VoMa«,323,D.41. 
 xepn?, etc, 199, D. 2. 
 Xfco), 248 — Fut., 265 — Perf., 
 
 281—1 Aor., 269 — 2 Aor., 
 
 816, D. 81. 
 xpaifffxeu), 325, D. tn. 
 xpaofiai, xpdco, Coutr., 244, 2 
 
 —Future, 261— with Dat., 
 
 438, Obs. 
 xpv, 312, 6—xp7iv, 490— with 
 
 Acc. and Inf., 567, Obs. 1. 
 Xp/;<rTnr, Genit. PL, 123. • 
 xpio, Per£ Mid., 288. 
 
GKEEK INDEX. 
 
 369 
 
 Xpoa. 
 
 Xpoa, 115 (Ex.). 
 ■Xptiivvvni, 319, 12. 
 Xpwy, 169, D. 
 
 xupt'Co), with Genit., 419 e. 
 X(>)pi^, 455, 5. 
 
 ^, 34 ; 48 ; 260, 
 
 -\/^, Subs, in, 172. 
 
 Vauo), Perf. Mid., 288— with 
 
 Genit, 419 6. 
 ^au), Contr., 244, 2. 
 ^tiidonai, with Genit., 419 e. 
 
 o), for o, 276, D.— See Att. 
 Declens. — from o, see o— 
 from n, see n. 
 
 -ft), Fern, in, 138— Nom., 172 
 — Adv. in, 204 — Proper 
 Names in Ace. Sing.,163,D. 
 —in the Genit., 122, D. 3 c 
 —Conn. Vowel, 233, 1—1 
 Pers. Sin^. Ind. Act., 233,2. 
 
 Zi'iixat, 327, D. 6. 
 
 -odn?, Adj. in, 359, 2 Obs. 
 
 e^(^, 325, 9 — Syll. Augm., 
 237. 
 
 \Ao«,65, D. 
 w/dfiai, 327, S, 
 
 -ft)i/,Nom. ofMasc. andFem., 
 172; 345, 3 — Genit., 118; 
 134, 7 ; 141 : 173, 5. 
 
 a)i/d/u»)i/, etc., 3' 4, D. 
 
 livaf ,-65, D. 
 
 <ii/eoMai, Syll. Angm., 237— 
 Perf., 275, 2— with Genit., 
 421. 
 
 w^vfi,iai, 280, 1, Obs. 
 
 -cop, Subs, in, 172. 
 
 iopaaiiv), 179. 
 
 -0)?, Nom. 172 — Adj., 184 — 
 Peff.Part.,276; 188— Fem., 
 138— Adv., 201 ; 203— End- 
 ing of Genit. Sing, in, 161 
 — with I- and v- Stems, 157 
 —in -ev Stems, 161 a. 
 
 w9 and «>?, 217. 
 
 (5,9 and wi, Diff., 99 ; 217, D. ; 
 031. 
 
 iixpeXov. 
 w?, Atonon, 97, 3; 98— with 
 Compar., 631 a — with Inf., 
 
 u)? eiTreii/, tor to hvv eivat, 
 
 etc. ,564 — "as ihough,"etc., 
 with Part., 588— "when," 
 "as," 556— with Aor.Ind., 
 493— "that," in Dependent 
 Declarative Sentences, 525 
 — "in order that," in Sen- 
 tences of Purpose, 530 — 
 with av, 031 b, Obs. — iu 
 expressing a wish, 514. 
 
 (is, Preposit., 445 ; 448, A. ; 
 450. 
 
 (icTrep, 032— with Part., 588. 
 
 (iirre, 94; 560; 632, 4— with 
 Inf., 566— joined with fxij, 
 617, Obs.^2. 
 
 (tiTor, see ovf. 
 
 cou, Diphth., 26, D. 
 
 a)uT(3r,etC.,209, D. 
 
 lixpeXta, with Acc, 396. 
 </,e\oi/, 320, 32- in express- 
 ing a wish, 515. 
 
 Q2 
 
 THE END. 
 
0^ 
 
GENERAL LIBRARY 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA— BERKELEY 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 This book is due on ike last date stamped below, or on the 
 date to whidl renewed. 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall, i ^ 
 
 JUN 2 195A 
 
 JUL2 81954LU 
 250c'55JB 
 
 , 31955115 
 
 '• v> 
 
 
 DtO 
 
 14 ^9S9 
 
 ^'9 aosEPWAi 
 
 j*>c»V^'' 
 
 v?,^^"^ 
 
 DEC is 
 
 REC'D Uo 
 
 lECDCD JUN 3 73 -9 AM 9^ 
 
 LD 21-100m-l,'54(1887sl6)476 
 

 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY